MISHRIFAH VILLA

DIRIYAH, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

SPECIFICATIONS
Part 1 of 3 (Divisions 01 to 13)

ISSUED FOR TENDER

MARCH 2020
 SECTION 00 0101
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
PROJECT MANUAL
FOR
MISHRIFAH VILLA
PROJECT NUMBER: 1009DF
AD' DIRIYYAH, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA
DATE: MAY 2018
PREPARED BY:
DAR AL RIYADH, ENGINEERING AND ARCHITECTURE
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0101 - 1 PROJECT TITLE PAGE

 SECTION 00 0102
PROJECT INFORMATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Project Name: MISHRIFAH VILLA, located at Ad' Diriyyah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
B. Owner's Project Number: 1009DF.
C. Project Location: Ad' Diriyyah, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia
D. The Owner, hereinafter referred to as Owner: HRH Prince Turki Abdulrahman Al Saud
E. Owner's Project Manager: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
1. Address: P.O. Box 250170.
2. City, State, Zip: Riyadh 11391.
3. Phone/Fax: +966 11 2922954/+966 11 2922975.
4. E-mail: www.daralriyadh.com.
1.02 NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
A. These documents constitute an Invitation to Bid to and request for qualifications from General
Contractors for the construction of the project described below.
1.03 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. Summary Project Description: See Space Program.
B. Contract Scope: Design and construction.
C. The currently occupied premises at the project site are open for examination by bidders only
during the following hours:
D. To assist in the assessment of subsoil conditions at site, a test hole will be dug at ________ on
________ at ____ a.m.
1.04 PROJECT CONSULTANTS
A. Design Architects: PATKAU ARCHITECTS INC.
B. Architect of Record: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
C. Lighting: Margot Richards Lighting Consultants
D. Pool: Aquatic Design and Engineering
E. Landscape Architects: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
F. Structural Engineers: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
G. Mechanical Engineers: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
H. Civil Engineers: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
I. Telecommunications, AV & Security: DAR AL RIYADH CONSULTANTS, Engineering and
Architecture.
J. The Architect of Record, hereinafter referred to as Architect: DAR AL RIYADH
CONSULTANTS, Engineering and Architecture.
1. Address: P.O. Box 250170.
2. City, State, Zip: Riyadh 11391.
3. Phone/Fax: +966 11 2922954.
4. E-mail: www.daralriyadh.com.
1.05 PROCUREMENT TIMETABLE
A. Last Request for Substitution Due: 7 days prior to due date of bids.
B. Last Request for Information Due: 7 days prior to due date of bids.
C. Bid Due Date: ________, before 4 PM local time.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0102 - 1 PROJECT INFORMATION

 D. Bid Opening: Same day, 5 PM local time.
E. Notice to Proceed: Within 7 days after due date.
F. Bids May Not Be Withdrawn Until: 30 days after due date.
G. Contract Time: To be stated in bid documents.
H. Desired Construction Start: Not later than _____.
I. Desired Substantial Completion Date: Not later than ____ calendar days from Notice to
Proceed.
J. Desired Final Completion Date: Not later than ____ calendar days from Notice to Proceed.
K. Completion date is critical due to requirements of Owner's operations.
L. The Owner reserves the right to change the schedule or terminate the entire procurement
process at any time.
1.06 PROCUREMENT DOCUMENTS
A. Availability of Documents: Complete sets of procurement documents may be obtained:
1. From Owner at the Project Manager's address listed above.
1.07 SIGNATURE
A. For: __________
B. By: __________
1. Signed: _______________________________
2. (Authorized signing officer)
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0102 - 2 PROJECT INFORMATION

 SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
A. 00 0101 - Project Title Page
B. 00 0102 - Project Information
C. 00 0110 - Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS
2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements
B 01 4000 – Quality Requirements
C. 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
D. 01 5500 – Access Roads and Paving Areas
E. 01 6000 – Product Requirements
F. 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Requirement
G. 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals
H. 01 7900 – Demonstration and Training
I. 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements
2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
A. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
B. 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing
C. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
D. 03 3713 - Shotcrete
E. 03 3900 – Concrete Curing
2.04 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
A. 04 0511 – Mortar and Masonry Grout
B. 04 2000 – Unit Masonry
C. 04 2300 – Glass Unit Masonry
D. 04 2723 – Cavity Wall Unit Masonry
E. 04 4200 – Exterior Stone Cladding
2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS
A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing
B. 05 3100 - Steel Decking
C. 05 5000 – Metal Fabrication
D. 05 7300 – Decorative Metal Railing
E. 05 7313 – Glazed Decorative Metal Railing
2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
A. 06 0573 – Wood Treatment
B. 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry
C. 06 2000 – Finish Carpentry
D. 06 4100 – Architectural Wood Casework

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 E. 06 4200 – Wood Paneling
2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. 07 1113 - Bituminous Dampproofing
B. 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing
C. 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation
D. 07 7273 – Vegetated Roof Systems
2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
A. 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. 08 1416 – Wood Doors
C. 08 3200 – Sliding Glass Door
D. 08 3459 – Vault Doors
E. 08 4413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
F. 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows
G. 08 5123 – Steel Windows
H. 08 6223 – Tubular Skylight
I. 08 6300 – Metal-Framed Skylight
J. 08 7100 – Door Hardware
K. 08 8000 – Glazing
L. 08 8300 - Mirrors
2.09 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
A. 09 2116 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. 09 2216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
C. 09 2400 – Cement Plastering
D. 09 2613 – Gypsum Veneer Plastering
E. 09 3000 - Tiling
F. 09 5423 – Linear Metal Ceiling
G. 09 5426 – Suspended Wood Ceiling
H. 09 6340 – Stone Flooring
I. 09 9113 – Exterior Painting
J. 09 9123 – Interior Painting
2.10 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
A. 10 2800 – Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
B. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties
2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT
A. 11 3100 – Residential Appliances
2.12 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
A. 12 2216 – Drapery Track and Accessories
B. 12 3530 – Residential Casework
C. 12 3600 – Countertops
D. 12 9300 – Site Furnishings

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A. 13 1100 – Pool
B. 13 2426 – Steam Baths
2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
A. Electric Traction Elevators
2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. 21 0510 – Fire Protection Systems
B. 21 3000 – Fire Pumps
2.16 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
A. 22 0505 – Valves
B. 22 0593 – Flushing, Cleaning, Disinfection and Chemical Treatment of Piping Systems
C. 22 1005 – Pipe and Pipe Fittings
D. 22 1006 – Piping Specialties
E. 22 1114 – Domestic Water System
F. 22 1122 – Pumps
G. 22 1123 – Domestic Water Pumps
H. 22 1424 – Drainage, Storm and Vent System
I. 22 3000 – Plumbing Equipment
J. 22 4100 – Residential Plumbing Fixtures
K. 22 5100 – Swimming Pool Plumbing Systems
2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
A. 23 0500 – Basic Mechanical Requirements
B. 23 0513 – Electrical Requirements for HVAC Equipment
C. 23 0528 – Hangers and Supports
D. 23 0548 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control
E. 23 0553 – Mechanical Identification
F. 23 0593 – Testing, Commissioning, Adjusting and Balancing
G 23 0713 – Mechanical Insulation
H. 23 3300 – Air Distribution
I. 23 3413 – Fans
J. 23 3710 – HVAC Air Filter
K. 23 6213 – VRF Air Condensing System
L. 23 7412 – Air Handling Units
M. 23 8413 - Dehumidifiers
2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
A. 26 0510 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
C. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D. 26 0529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
E. 26.0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems
F. 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems
G. 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 H. 26 0539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems
I. 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
J. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
K. 26 0573 - Power System Studies
L. 26 0583 - Wiring Connections
M. 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices
N. 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear
O. 26 2413 - Switchboards
P. 26 2416 – Panelboards
Q. 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers
R. 26 2713 - Electric Metering
S. 26 2726 - Wiring Devices
T. 26 2813 – Fuses
U. 26 2816.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers
V. 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches
W. 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers
X. 26 2923 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers
Y. 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors
Z. 26 3533.16 - Low-Voltage Power Factor Correction Equipment
AA. 26 4113 - Lightning Protection for Structures
BB. 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices
CC. 26 5100 - Interior Lighting
DD. 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting
EE. 33 7119 – Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes
FF. 33 7900 – Site Grounding
2.18 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS
A. 27 0500 - Communication Systems - General Requirements
B. 27 0526 - Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Communication Systems
C. 27 0528 - Pathways for Communication Systems
D. 27 0533 - Conduits and Back boxes for Communications
E. 27 0544 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communication Pathways and Cabling
F. 27 1100 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings
G. 27 1116 - Communication Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures
H. 27 1323 - Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Requirements
I. 27 1513 - Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
J. 27 1543 - Communications Faceplates and Connectors Requirements
K. 27 2000 - Data Communications Network Equipment
L. 27 3000 - IP Telephone System
M. 27 4133 – IPTV System
N. 27 4219 - IT Network

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.19 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. 28 0513 - IP CCTV System
B. 28 3115 - Fire Detection and Alarm System
2.20 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
A. 31 1000 - Site Clearing
B. 31 2200 - Grading
C. 31 2316 - Excavation
D. 31 2316.13 - Trenching
E. 31 2323 – Fill
F. 31 3116 – Termite Control
G. 31 3213 – Cement Soil Stabilization
H. 31 3700 - Riprap
2.21 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
A. 32 1123 – Aggregate Base Courses
B. 32 1216 – Asphalt Paving
C. 32 1313 – Concrete Paving
D. 32 1413 – Precast Concrete Unit Paving
E. 32 1713 – Parking Bumpers
F. 32 3119 – Decorative Metal Fences and Gates
G. 32 8423 – Irrigation System
H 32 9300 – Plants
I. 32 9415 - Landscaping
2.22 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
A. 33 0513 – Manholes and Structures
B. 33 1416 – Site Water Utility Distribution Piping
C. 33 3113 – Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping
E. 33 4100 – Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping
E. 33 4211 – Stormwater Gravity Piping
F. 33 4216 – Culvert
G. 33 7119 – Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes
H. 33 7900 – Site Grounding
I. 33 8126 – Communication Underground – Ducts, Manholes and Handholes

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 SECTION 01 3000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electronic document submittal service.
B. Preconstruction meeting.
C. Site mobilization meeting.
D. Progress meetings.
E. Construction progress schedule.
F. Progress photographs.
G. Coordination drawings.
H. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
I. Submittal procedures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination
requirements.
B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
C. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Additional procedures for submittals
relating to commissioning.
1. Where submittals are indicated for review by both Architect and the Commissioning
Authority, submit one extra and route to Architect first, for forwarding to the
Commissioning Authority.
2. Where submittals are not indicated to be reviewed by Architect, submit directly to the
Commissioning Authority; otherwise, the procedures specified in this section apply to
commissioning submittals.
1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION
A. Project Coordinator: Construction Manager.
B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices
and sheds, for access, traffic, and parking facilities.
C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.
D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals,
reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution
of ambiguities and conflicts.
E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and
construction facilities.
F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.
G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator:
1. Requests for interpretation.
2. Requests for substitution.
3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
4. Test and inspection reports.
5. Design data.
6. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
7. Applications for payment and change order requests.
8. Progress schedules.
9. Coordination drawings.
10. Correction Punch List and Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 3000 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS
 11. Closeout submittals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE
A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic
(PDF) format and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service that receives, logs and
stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via
email.
1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to
requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents
(e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for
payment, field reports and meeting minutes, Contractor's correction punchlist, and any
other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record.
2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service.
3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format.
4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants are to be permitted to use the
service at no extra charge.
5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software
that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat,
www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software
capability is provided by the service provider.
6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be
reviewed.
7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that
electronic document requirements do not apply to samples or color selection charts.
B. Cost: The cost of the service is to be paid by Contractor; include the cost of the service in the
contract sum.
C. Submittal Service: (To be determined)
D. Training: One, one-hour, web-based training session will be arranged for all participants, with
representatives of Architect and Contractor participating; further training is the responsibility of
the user of the service.
E. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is
responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.
3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule meeting after Notice of Award.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Owner.
2. Architect.
3. Contractor.
C. Agenda:
1. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect.
6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
7. Scheduling.
8. Scheduling activities of a Geotechnical Engineer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 3000 - 2 ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS
 D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.03 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING
A. Schedule meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.
B. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Architect.
4. Special Consultants.
5. Contractor's Superintendent.
6. Major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda:
1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
2. Owner's requirements and occupancy prior to completion.
3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
5. Survey and building layout.
6. Security and housekeeping procedures.
7. Schedules.
8. Application for payment procedures.
9. Procedures for testing.
10. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
11. Requirements for start-up of equipment.
12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals.
B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
C. Attendance Required:
1. Contractor.
2. Owner.
3. Architect.
4. Special Consultants.
5. Contractor's Superintendent.
6. Major Subcontractors.
D. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Maintenance of progress schedule.
7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
11. Other business relating to Work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 3000 - 3 ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS
 E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two
copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.05 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete
schedule for review.
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
D. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.06 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Submit photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days prior to
submission of application for payment.
B. Submit new photographs at least once a month, within 3 days after exposure.
C. Maintain one set of all photographs at project site for reference; same copies as submitted,
identified as such.
D. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.
E. Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work produced by an
experienced photographer, acceptable to Architect.
F. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:
G. Views:
1. Provide aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until structure
is enclosed.
2. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date
of Substantial Completion.
3. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required.
4. Provide factual presentation.
5. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of
field, and minimum distortion.
6. Point of View Sketch: Provide sketch identifying point of view of each photograph.
H. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide
files unaltered by photo editing software.
1. Delivery Medium: Via email.
2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification.
3. Point of View Sketch: Include digital copy of point of view sketch with each electronic
submittal; include point of view identification in each photo file name.
4. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per
page, each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal.
5. Photo CD(s): Provide 1 copy including all photos cumulative to date and PDF file(s), with
files organized in separate folders by submittal date.
6. Hard Copy: Printed hardcopy (grayscale) of PDF file and point of view sketch.
I. Photographer Quality Prints: Full color; three prints of each view.
1. Glossy; smooth texture; white tint; single weight; high contrast.
2. Size: 200 x 250 mm; mounted for binder and tabs.
3. Identify each print on back. Identify name of Project, contract number, phase, orientation
of view, date and time of view, name and address of photographer, and photographer's
numbered identification of exposure.
4. Assemble prints into transparent holder sheets for 3-ring binder.
5. Binders: Provide one 2-inch binder with initial submittal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 3000 - 4 ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS
 6. Point of View Sketch: Include printed copy of point of view sketch with each submittal;
include point of view identification on each print.
7. Negatives: Include negatives with print submittal, arranged in chronological sequence,
with typed table of contents.
3.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
article below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 - Closeout
Submittals.
3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Submit Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
B. Submit Final Correction Punch List for Substantial Completion.
C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
D. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.11 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Electronic Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up
file will be returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected.
B. Extra Copies at Project Closeout: See Section 01 7800.
C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be
retained by Architect.
1. After review, produce duplicates.
2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
3.12 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Shop Drawing Procedures:
1. Prepare accurate, drawn-to-scale, original shop drawing documentation by interpreting
the Contract Documents and coordinating related Work.
2. Do not reproduce the Contract Documents to create shop drawings.
3. Generic, non-project specific information submitted as shop drawings do not meet the
requirements for shop drawings.
B. Transmit each submittal with a copy of approved submittal form.
C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix.
D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number,
and specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 3000 - 5 ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS
E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of
Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 3000 - 6 ADMINISTRATIVE

REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 01 4000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. References and standards.
B. Submittals.
C. References and standards.
D. Mock-ups.
E. Control of installation.
F. Tolerances.
G. Testing and inspection agencies and services.
H. Control of installation.
I. Mock-ups.
J. Tolerances.
K. Prequalification requirements of contractors, manufacturers and material suppliers.
L. Manufacturers' field services.
M. Defect Assessment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Available Project Information: Soil investigation data.
B. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
C. Section 01 4216 - Definitions.
D. Section 01 4219 - Reference Standards.
E. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants;
2008 (Reapproved 2014).
B. ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the
Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;
2012a.
C. ASTM E329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection,
Testing, or Special Inspection; 2014a.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Construction Manager.
B. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance
with specified criteria.
C. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a
testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.
D. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 4000 - 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

 E. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
F. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications:
1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names
of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction
Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of
remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.
3. Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing testing laboratory is accredited
under IAS AC89.
C. Design Data: Submit for Owner's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose
of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the
contract documents, or for Owner's information.
D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Owner and to
Contractor.
1. Include:
a. Date issued.
b. Project title and number.
c. Name of inspector.
d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
e. Identification of product and specifications section.
f. Location in the Project.
g. Type of test/inspection.
h. Date of test/inspection.
i. Results of test/inspection.
j. Conformance with Contract Documents.
k. When requested by Owner, provide interpretation of results.
2. Test report submittals are for Owner's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited
purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept
expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.
E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Owner, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be
acceptable to Owner.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special
attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Owner's benefit as contract administrator or
for Owner.
1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Owner for information.
2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
H. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Owner's benefit as contract administrator or for
Owner.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 4000 - 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Owner.
1.06 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not
included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with
requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are
required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by applicable code.
C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until
Substantial Completion.
E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Owner before proceeding.
F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor
those of Owner shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
1.07 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES
A. Owner will employ services of an independent testing agency to perform certain specified
testing; payment for cost of services will be derived from allowance specified in Section 01
2100; see Section 01 2100 and applicable sections for description of services included in
allowance.
B. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other
specified testing.
C. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other
specified testing.
D. As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for
services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.
E. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
F. Contractor Employed Agency:
1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E329, ASTM E543, ASTM C1021,
ASTM C1077, ASTM C1093, and ASTM D3740.
2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329.
3. Laboratory Qualifications: Accredited by IAS according to IAS AC89.
4. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
5. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
6. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST
established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality
assurance program.
1.08 PREQUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTORS, MANUFACTURERS AND
MATERIAL SUPPLIERS
A. Contractors, manufacturers and material suppliers should have a minimum of ten years of
documented experience with previous works similar in nature, size, scope and extent to
requirements of this Project.
1.09 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 4000 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

 surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and
balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Owner 30 days in advance of required observations.
1. Observer subject to approval of Owner.
2. Observer subject to approval of Owner.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
1.10 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct
an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Owner before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 MOCK-UPS
A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in
location and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of
mock-up is to demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
B. Accepted mock-ups establish the standard of quality the Owner will use to judge the Work.
C. Integrated Exterior Mock-ups: construct integrated exterior mock-up as indicated on Drawings.
Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products as required in individual
Specification Sections. Provide adequate supporting structure for mock-up materials as
necessary.
D. Notify Owner fifteen (15) working days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
E. Obtain Owner's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
1. Make corrections as necessary until Owner's approval is issued.
F. Where mock-up has been accepted by Owner and is specified in product specification sections
to be removed, protect mock-up throughout construction, remove mock-up and clear area when
directed to do so by Architect.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 4000 - 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

 B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required.
B. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance
of services.
3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
5. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.
6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner.
7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
8. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract
Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturers' facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Owner and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections
required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by Owner.
F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 4000 - 5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

 SECTION 01 5000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities.
D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E. Security requirements.
F. Vehicular access and parking.
G. Waste removal facilities and services.
H. Project identification sign.
I. Field offices.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2015a.
B. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation
required for construction purposes.
B. Existing facilities may not be used.
C. New permanent facilities may be used.
D. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide equivalent equipment and connections for Owner's field office.
B. Provide equivalent equipment and connections for Architect's field office.
C. Telecommunications services shall include:
1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with
necessary software and laser printer.
2. Telephone Land Lines: One line, minimum; one handset per line.
3. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.
4. Email: Account/address reserved for project use.
5. Facsimile Service: Minimum of one dedicated fax machine/printer, with dedicated phone
line.
1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.06 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas
that could be hazardous to workers or the public, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect
existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and
demolition.
B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-
way and for public access to existing building.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 5000 - 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND

CONTROLS
 C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.07 FENCING
A. Construction: Contractor's option.
B. Provide 1.8 m high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates
with locks.
1.08 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate
acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and
maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections,
and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware
and locks.
1.09 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as indicated to separate work areas from Owner-
occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner-occupied areas, and to
prevent damage to existing materials and equipment.
B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene sheet materials with closed joints and
sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces:
1. Insulated.
2. STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90.
3. Maximum flame spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner-occupied areas.
1.10 SECURITY - SEE SECTION 01 3553
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from
unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. Ensure security of existing facilites specially at
connection areas, customers, visitors, and the public including workers during construction of
the project.
B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.
1.11 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,
and access for emergency vehicles.
B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is
not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
F. Provide three parking spaces for Owner use.
G. Provide four parking spaces for Architect use.
1.12 WASTE REMOVAL
A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and
orderly condition.
C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
D. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure
unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 5000 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND

CONTROLS
 E. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers
with lids.
1.13 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings.
B. Erect on site at location established by Architect.
C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
1.14 FIELD OFFICES
A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped
with sturdy furniture, drawing rack and drawing display table.
B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
C. Provide separate private office similarly equipped and furnished, for use of Architect and
Owner.
D. Locate offices a minimum distance of 10 m from existing and new structures.
1.15 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of Substantial
Completion inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 600 mm. Grade site as indicated.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 5000 - 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND

CONTROLS
 SECTION 01 5500
ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING AREAS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Access roads.
B. Parking.
C. Existing pavements and parking areas.
D. Permanent pavement and parking areas.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 011000 Summary of Works.
B. Section 013000 Administrative Requirements.
C. Section 015500 Access Roads and Parking Areas
D. Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Temporary construction shall be as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
B. Permanent construction shall comply with the relevant Contract Documents.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clear areas, provide surface water drainage of work areas and parking areas.
B. Access Roads
1. Construct temporary access roads from public thoroughfares to serve construction area,
of a width and load bearing capacity to provide unimpeded traffic for construction
purposes.
2. Construct temporary bridges and culverts to span low areas and allow unimpeded
drainage.
3. Extend and relocate as work progress requires, provide detours as necessary for
unimpeded traffic flow.
4. Where public roads are used for access, maintain and repair on completion.
5. Provide unimpeded access for emergency vehicles to all roads surrounding the site and
fire hydrants.
6. Where connection to existing utilities requires construction below the existing roads,
obtain local authority permissions before work commences.
C. Parking
1. Arrange temporary parking areas to accommodate use of construction personnel and
delivery vehicles. Locate as approved by Engineer.
2. Construct shade canopies for 20 parking spaces for Owner’s and Engineer’s use.
3. Ensure site traffic parking does not obstruct public roads.
4. Where site parking is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
D. Existing Pavements and Parking Facilities
1. Use of existing surrounding streets and driveways for parking of construction vehicles is
not permitted. Tracked vehicles shall not be allowed on paved areas.
2. Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment on parking areas.
3. Make good on completion, all pavements damaged during construction.
E. Permanent Pavements and Parking Facilities
1. Prior to Taking-Over, the base for permanent roads may be used for construction traffic.
Light weight traffic only to use these areas.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 5500 - 1 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING

AREAS
 2. Basement parking areas shall not be used for parking during the construction period or for
construction staging except where approved by the Engineer. If approved, the area shall
be protected before use.
3. Keep all permanent and temporary pavement and parking areas clean and tidy at all
times.
F. Maintenance
1. Maintain traffic and parking areas in a sound condition free of excavated material,
construction equipment, products and mud.
2. Maintain existing and permanent paved areas used for construction. Promptly repair
breaks, potholes, low areas, standing water, and other deficiencies to maintain paving and
drainage in original or specified condition.
G. Removal and Repair
1. Remove temporary materials and construction at Substantial Completion.
2. Repair facilities damaged by use, to original condition.
H. Mud from Site Vehicles
1. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering public streets.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 5500 - 2 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING

AREAS
 SECTION 01 6000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General product requirements.
B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C. Product option requirements.
D. Manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties.
E. Substitution limitations and procedures.
F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
B. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Warranties and bonds.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. C2C (DIR) - C2C Certified Products Registry; Cradle to Cradle Products Innovation Institute;
http://www.c2ccertified.org/products/registry.
B. HPDC (Tool) - Create an HPD On-Line Tool; Health Product Declaration Collaborative;
http://hpdcollaborative.org/manufacturers/.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.
B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
functional equipment and appliances.
D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cradle-to-Cradle Certified: End use product certified Cradle-to-Cradle v2 Basic or Cradle-to-
Cradle v3 Bronze, minimum.
B. Health Product Declarations (HPD): Complete, published declaration with full disclosure of
known hazards, prepared using the Health Product Declaration Collaborative's "Create an
HPD" on-line tool; HPD's with "unknown" listed for any hazard will not be considered
acceptable.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 6000 - 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEW PRODUCTS
A. General Product Requirements: Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted
by the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time
of installation.
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
2.03 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for submittal period of warranties
and bonds.
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide
specific rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution.
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated form properly executed.
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
2.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B. Deliver and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Submit substitution requests by completing the approved substitution request form in the
general conditions or supplementary conditions; see this section for additional information and
instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are unacceptable.
B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date established in
Notice to Proceed.
C. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 6000 - 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

 D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required
for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
G. Substitution Submittal Procedure (after contract award):
1. Submit substitution requests by completing the form; see this section for additional
information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission are
unacceptable.
2. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to
one proposed substitution.
3. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
4. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoid
loss of factory calibration.
B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside of
packaging.
C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.
H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,
precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and other
contaminants.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 6000 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.
H. Do not store products directly on the ground.
I. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
J. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with
foreign matter.
K. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
L. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
M. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 6000 - 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

 SECTION 01 7000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition.
C. Cutting and patching.
D. Surveying for laying out the work.
E. Cleaning and protection.
F. Starting of systems and equipment.
G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
H. Closeout procedures, including Contractor's Correction Punch List, except payment
procedures.
I. General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions.
B. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for
trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.
C. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Demonstration of products and systems to be
commissioned and where indicated in specific specification sections
D. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Contractor's responsibilities in
regard to commissioning.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
work.
1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and
locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities.
D. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
6. Include in request:
a. Identification of Project.
b. Location and description of affected work.
c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.
f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.
g. Date and time work will be executed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia and
acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance
coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.
B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific
service on Project, licensed in Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in
design of this type of work and licensed in Riyadh, Kingdom of Saudi Arabia.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
B. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.
Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over
adjacent property.
1. Provide dust-proof enclosures to prevent entry of dust generated outdoors.
2. Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be
occupied by Owner.
C. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by
construction operations.
1. At All Times: Excessively noisy tools and operations will not be tolerated inside the
building at any time of day; excessively noisy includes jackhammers.
2. Outdoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy exterior work to the hours of 8 am to 5 pm.
3. Indoors: Limit conduct of especially noisy interior work to the hours of 6 pm to 7 am.
D. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
from damaging the work.
E. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced
by construction operations. Comply with local regulations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent
responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work
that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work
and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's
activities.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 2 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
locations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
D. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required
because of changes in grades or other reasons.
E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect.
F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations; and ________.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations, and ________.
H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 3 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.05 ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
existing record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.
3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,
and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if
necessary for successful application of new finish.
4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged
surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.
C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical,
Telecommunications, and ______): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to
accommodate new construction.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access
or provide access panel.
2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require
reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment
as required.
3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready
for service.
a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize
duration of outages.
b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.
5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub
and tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new
construction.
D. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the
surface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch
so that the substrate is ready for the new finish.
G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces
to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent
finishes.
2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and
refinish to match.
H. Clean existing systems and equipment.
I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;
do not burn or bury.
J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate
surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to
original condition.
E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant
elements, and sight exposed surfaces.
F. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior
approval.
G. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
H. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
I. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids
with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated
element.
J. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous
surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire
unit.
2. Match color, texture, and appearance.
3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair
substrate prior to repairing finish.
3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 5 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
 D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and
dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
possible.
3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required
by the equipment or system manufacturer.
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
correctly.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.12 FINAL CLEANING
A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
surfaces.
C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
E. Clean filters of operating equipment.
F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, overflow drains, area drains, drainage
systems, and ______.
G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
H. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;
dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 6 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for
completion or correction in the Contractor's Correction Punch List for Contractor's Notice of
Substantial Completion.
C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Architect's Substantial Completion
inspection.
D. Submit written certification containing Contractor's Correction Punch List, that Contract
Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected, and that work is complete in
accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's Substantial Completion
inspection.
E. Conduct Substantial Completion inspection and create Final Correction Punch List containing
Architect's and Contractor's comprehensive list of items identified to be completed or corrected
and submit to Architect.
F. Correct items of work listed in Final Correction Punch List and comply with requirements for
access to Owner-occupied areas.
G. Notify Architect when work is considered finally complete and ready for Architect's Substantial
Completion final inspection.
H. Complete items of work determined by Architect listed in executed Certificate of Substantial
Completion.
3.14 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than
one year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty,
whichever is longer.
C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,
and lubricate as required.
D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7000 - 7 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT

REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 01 7800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and Bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,
product data, and samples.
B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
C. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit one copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will
be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content
of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final
inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the
beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.
B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7800 - 1 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

 E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Source Data: For each product or system, list names, addresses and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:
1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents
and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and
recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable
reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide
recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.
D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.
E. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B. Where additional instructions are required, beyond the manufacturer's standard printed
instructions, have instructions prepared by personnel experienced in the operation and
maintenance of the specific products.
C. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7800 - 2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

 D. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.
E. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions
and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
F. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
G. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
H. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
I. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
J. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
K. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.
L. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.
M. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and
control diagrams.
N. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities
to be maintained in storage.
O. Include test and balancing reports.
P. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 ASSEMBLY OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Assemble operation and maintenance data into durable manuals for Owner's personnel use,
with data arranged in the same sequence as, and identified by, the specification sections.
B. Where systems involve more than one specification section, provide separate tabbed divider for
each system.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 216 by 280 mm three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 50 mm maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E. Project Directory: Title and address of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Architect, Consultants, Contractor and subcontractors, with names of responsible parties.
F. Tables of Contents: List every item separated by a divider, using the same identification as on
the divider tab; where multiple volumes are required, include all volumes Tables of Contents in
each volume, with the current volume clearly identified.
G. Dividers: Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system; identify the contents
on the divider tab; immediately following the divider tab include a description of product and
major component parts of equipment.
H. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 20 pound paper.
I. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
J. Arrangement of Contents: Organize each volume in parts as follows:
1. Project Directory.
2. Table of Contents, of all volumes, and of this volume.
3. Operation and Maintenance Data: Arranged by system, then by product category.
a. Source data.
b. Product data, shop drawings, and other submittals.
c. Operation and maintenance data.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7800 - 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

 d. Field quality control data.
e. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
4. Design Data: To allow for addition of design data furnished by Architect or others, provide
a tab labeled "Design Data" and provide a binder large enough to allow for insertion of at
least 20 pages of typed text.
3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until
Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7800 - 4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

 SECTION 01 7900
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Demonstration of products and systems to be commissioned and where indicated in specific
specification sections.
B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:
1. All software-operated systems.
2. HVAC systems and equipment.
3. Plumbing equipment.
4. Electrical systems and equipment.
5. Conveying systems.
6. Landscape irrigation.
7. Items specified in individual product Sections.
C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for:
1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products.
2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes.
3. Fixtures and fittings.
4. Items specified in individual product Sections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements: Additional requirements applicable
to demonstration and training.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except:
1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for
commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority.
2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.
3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.
4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in
preparation of overall Training Plan; submit in editable electronic format, Microsoft Word
2003 preferred.
B. Draft Training Plans: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and
skill-level of attendees.
1. Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner.
2. Submit to Commissioning Authority for review and inclusion in overall training plan.
3. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training.
4. Revise and resubmit until acceptable.
5. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions.
6. Include at least the following for each training session:
a. Identification, date, time, and duration.
b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered.
c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications.
d. Intended audience, such as job description.
e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training.
f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc.
g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc.
h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be
provided by Contractor.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7900 - 1 DEMONSTRATION AND

TRAINING
 C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two
attendees per training session.
1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals.
2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not
included in O&M manuals.
3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and
maintenance data.
D. Training Reports:
1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration.
2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees.
3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references
to supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that
could not be answered in original training session.
4. Include Commissioning Authority's formal acceptance of training session.
E. Video Recordings: Submit digital video recording of each demonstration and training session
for Owner's subsequent use.
1. Format: DVD Disc.
2. Label each disc and container with session identification and date.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of
the relevant products and systems.
1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who
actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.
2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary
qualifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL
A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the
purposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.
B. Demonstrations conducted during Functional Testing need not be repeated unless Owner
personnel training is specified.
C. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.
D. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up,
shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and
maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
E. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and
repair procedures.
1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL
A. Commissioning Authority will prepare the Training Plan based on draft plans submitted.
B. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.
C. Owner will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Contractor.
D. Do not start training until Functional Testing is complete, unless otherwise specified or
approved by the Commissioning Authority.
E. Provide training in minimum two hour segments.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7900 - 2 DEMONSTRATION AND

TRAINING
F. The Commissioning Authority is responsible for determining that the training was satisfactorily
completed and will provide approval forms.
G. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule
training sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to
conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for
personnel "show-up" time.
H. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss:
1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup
copies.
2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information,
system narratives, and product specific information.
3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.
I. Product- and System-Specific Training:
1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.
2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and
constraints, and operational strategies.
3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down,
seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including
preventative maintenance.
4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.
5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety
issues and emergency procedures.
6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding
coverage.
9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.
10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.
11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.
J. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during
training session, provide written response within three days.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 7900 - 3 DEMONSTRATION AND

TRAINING
 SECTION 01 9113
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section specifies
the Contractor's responsibilities for commissioning:
1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with Contract Documents and the
manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate
operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists
executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this.
2. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with Contract
Documents: Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the
Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this.
3. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete:
Detailed operation and maintenance (O&M) data submittals by Contractor are utilized to
achieve this.
4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained: Formal training
conducted by Contractor is utilized to achieve this.
B. Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to
occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion.
C. The Commissioning Authority directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section
describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities.
D. The Commissioning Authority is employed by Owner.
1.02 SCOPE OF COMMISSIONING
A. The following are to be commissioned:
B. Building envelope:
1. Thermal and moisture integrity.
2. Air tightness.
C. Structural systems.
D. Fire Protection Systems.
E. Plumbing Systems:
1. Water heaters.
2. Booster pumps.
3. Laboratory gas systems.
4. Landscape irrigation.
F. HVAC System, including:
1. Major and minor equipment items.
2. Piping systems and equipment.
3. Ductwork and accessories.
4. Terminal units.
5. Control system.
6. Sound control devices.
7. Vibration control devices.
8. Variable frequency drives.
G. Special Ventilation:
1. Fume hoods.
2. Laboratory pressurization.
3. Specialty fans.
4. Egress pressurization.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 1 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 H. Integrated Automation.
I. Electrical Systems:
1. Power quality.
2. Lighting controls other than manual switches.
J. Electronic Safety and Security:
1. Security system, including doors and hardware.
2. Fire and smoke alarms.
K. Communications:
1. Voice and data systems.
2. Public address/paging.
L. Other equipment and systems explicitly identified elsewhere in Contract Documents as
requiring commissioning.
M. Sound Transmission Class-rated interior partitions.
N. Indoor Air Quality Procedures: The Commissioning Authority will coordinate; Contractor will
execute; see Section 01 5719 - Temporary Environmental Controls.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 5719 - Temporary Environmental Controls: Precautions and procedures; smoking
room testing; building flush-out.
B. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: General startup requirements.
C. Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals: Scope and procedures for operation and maintenance
manuals and project record documents.
D. Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training: Scope and procedures for Owner personnel
training.
E. Section 01 9114 - Commissioning Authority Responsibilities.
F. Section 23 0800 - Commissioning of HVAC: HVAC control system testing; other requirements.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E336 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Attenuation between
Rooms in Buildings; 2019a.
B. ASTM E779 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization;
2019.
C. ASTM E1827 - Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an
Orifice Blower Door; 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
D. CSI/CSC MF - Masterformat; 2016.
E. NEBB S110 - Whole Building Technical Commissioning Of New Construction; 2018.
F. PECI (Samples) - Sample Forms for Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance
Tests; Current Edition.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except:
1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for
commissioning purposes, directly to the Commissioning Authority, unless they require
review by Architect; in that case, submit to Architect first.
2. Submit one copy to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned.
3. Make commissioning submittals on time schedule specified by Commissioning Authority.
4. Submittals indicated as "Draft" are intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in
preparation of Prefunctional Checklists or Functional Test requirements; submit in editable
electronic format, Microsoft Word 2010 preferred.
5. As soon as possible after submittals made to Architect are approved, submit copy of
approved submittal to the Commissioning Authority.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 2 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 B. Product Data: If submittals to Architect do not include the following, submit copies as soon as
possible:
1. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures.
4. Fan and pump curves.
5. Factory test reports.
6. Warranty information, including details of Owner's responsibilities in regard to keeping
warranties in force.
C. Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions that are
shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered.
D. Startup Plans and Reports.
E. Completed Prefunctional Checklists.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT
A. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and
required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become
the property of Owner.
B. Provide all standard testing equipment required to perform building envelope air tightness
testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will NOT become the property of
Owner.
C. Calibration Tolerances: Provide testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test
and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified. If not otherwise noted, the
following minimum requirements apply:
1. Temperature Sensors and Digital Thermometers: Certified calibration within past year to
accuracy of 0.3 degree C and resolution of plus/minus 0.05 degree C.
2. Pressure Sensors: Accuracy of plus/minus 2.0 percent of the value range being
measured (not full range of meter), calibrated within the last year.
3. Calibration: According to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped
or damaged; affix calibration tags or keep certificates readily available for inspection.
D. Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific
to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to
accomplish startup or Functional Testing, provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as
part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to
become the property of Owner.
E. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status,
pressures, etc. of equipment.
1. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning
Authority and will not become the property of Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Commissioning Authority has prepared the Commissioning Plan.
1. Attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority for purposes of completing the
commissioning plan.
2. Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and
manufacturer representatives.
B. Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 3 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 C. Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination
requirements for all parties in the commissioning process.
1. Commissioning will be phased (by floors, for example) to minimize the total construction
time.
D. Basis of Design Documentation (BOD): Detailed documentation of the functional requirements
of the project; descriptions of the systems, components, and methods chosen to meet the
design intent; assumptions underlying the design intent.
1. Basis of Design Documentation is to be prepared by Architect.
E. Commissioning Schedule:
1. Submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to
Commissioning Authority within 60 days after award of Contract.
2. Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than 4 weeks prior to startup.
3. Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from
components, to subsystems, to systems.
4. Provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority for delivery of relevant Checklists and
Functional Test procedures, to avoid delay.
3.02 DOCUMENTATION IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
A. Give each submitted form or report a unique identification; use the following scheme.
B. Type of Document: Use the following prefixes:
1. Startup Plan: SP-.
2. Startup Report: SR-.
3. Prefunctional Checklist: PC-.
4. Functional Test Procedure: FTP-.
5. Functional Test Report: FTR-.
C. System Type: Use the first 4 digits from CSI/CSC MF (Master Format), that are applicable to
the system; for example:
1. 2300: HVAC system as a whole.
2. 2320: HVAC Piping and Pumps.
3. 2330: HVAC Air Distribution.
D. Component Number: Assign numbers sequentially, using 1, 2, or 3 digits as required to
accommodate the number of units in the system.
E. Test, Revision, or Submittal Number: Number each successive iteration sequentially, starting
with 1.
F. Example: PC-2320-001.2 would be the Prefunctional Checklist for equipment item 1 in the
HVAC piping system, probably a pump; this is the second, revised submittal of this checklist.
3.03 STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS
A. Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a
startup plan, submit the plan not less than 8 weeks prior to startup.
B. Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides
a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), document compliance by submitting
the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity.
C. Submit directly to the Commissioning Authority.
3.04 PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS
A. A Prefunctional Checklist is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other
assembly specified to be commissioned.
1. No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed.
2. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists,
regardless of apparent redundancy.
3. Prefunctional Checklist forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the
following types of information will be gathered via the completed Checklist forms:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 4 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 a. Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed, started up, and
operating and ready for Functional Testing.
b. Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified,
itemized by unit.
c. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information "as
specified," "as submitted," and "as installed."
d. Serial number of installed unit.
e. List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup
and Functional Testing; these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for
equipment and systems may include normal manufacturer’s start-up checklist items
and minor testing.
f. Sensor and actuator calibration information.
4. A preliminary list of Prefunctional Checklists is attached, to indicate anticipated scope.
5. PECI (Samples) found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm indicate anticipated level
of detail for Prefunctional Checklists.
B. Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists, after completion of installation
and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority is not required unless otherwise
specified.
1. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual
witness; checklists are not complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete
without deficiencies.
2. Checklists with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor
attests that incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable
Functional Testing; re-submission of the Checklist is required upon completion of
remaining items.
3. Individual Checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one
installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors,
with identification recorded on the form.
4. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form.
5. Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at Contractor's
option.
6. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Contractor is responsible for correct startup
and operation.
7. Submit completed Checklists to Commissioning Authority within two days of completion.
8. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional general
startup requirements.
C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklists to
Contractor.
1. Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for initial draft of Prefunctional Checklist where so
indicated in Contract Documents.
2. Provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority to aid in
preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup
checklists, and O&M data.
3. Commissioning Authority may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of
whether they are explicitly mentioned in Contract Documents or not.
4. When asked to review the proposed Checklists, do so in a timely manner.
D. Commissioning Authority Witnessing: Required for:
1. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by
the commissioning plan.
2. A sampling of non-primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan.
E. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to
Owner.
1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning
Authority immediately.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 5 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
3.05 FUNCTIONAL TESTS
A. A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified
to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by
the final test procedures.
B. Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of
Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout.
C. Commissioning Authority is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests,
including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose.
D. Contractor is responsible for correction of deficiencies and re-testing at no extra cost to Owner;
if a deficiency is not corrected and re-tested immediately, the Commissioning Authority will
document the deficiency and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction.
1. Deficiencies are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of
equipment or system that is not in compliance with Contract Documents or does not
perform properly.
2. When the deficiency has been corrected, the Contractor completes the form certifying that
the item is ready to be re-tested and returns the form to the Commissioning Authority; the
Commissioning Authority will reschedule the test and the Contractor shall re-test.
3. Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical
or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will
be considered defective; provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification
of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all
items.
4. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time
witnessing re-testing.
5. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owner and Commissioning Authority personnel time
witnessing re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional
Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the
Prefunctional Checklist process, Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and
subsequent re-tests.
E. Functional Test Procedures:
1. Some test procedures are included in Contract Documents; where Functional Test
procedures are not included in Contract Documents, test procedures will be determined by
the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with Contractor.
2. Examples of Functional Testing:
a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just
components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full
operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see
if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint).
b. Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating
loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures,
fire alarm, power failure, etc.
c. Systems are run through all the HVAC control system’s sequences of operation and
components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state.
d. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; spot
checking of TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority is Functional
Testing.
3. A preliminary list of Functional Tests is attached, to indicate anticipated scope.
4. PECI (Samples) found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm indicated anticipated level
of detail for Functional Tests.
F. Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial
completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site
conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of
timing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 6 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 G. Factory Tests: Commissioning Authority and Contractor are responsible for coordinating
testing of equipment at the factory by factory personnel, to ensure compliance with
commissioning requirements.
H. Field Tests By Others: Where Functional Tests are indicated as to be performed by others not
subject to Contract Documents, those tests are not subject to these commissioning
requirements.
3.06 SENSOR AND ACTUATOR CALIBRATION
A. Calibrate all field-installed temperature, relative humidity, carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide,
and pressure sensors and gauges, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on this piece of
equipment shall be calibrated. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration
certification provided need not be field calibrated.
B. Calibrate using the methods described below; alternate methods may be used, if approved by
Commissioning Authority and Owner beforehand. See PART 2 for test instrument
requirements. Record methods used on the relevant Prefunctional Checklist or other suitable
forms, documenting initial, intermediate and final results.
C. All Sensors:
1. Verify that sensor location is appropriate and away from potential causes of erratic
operation.
2. Verify that sensors with shielded cable are grounded only at one end.
3. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, for
temperature make sure they are reading within 0.1 degree C of each other, and for
pressure, within tolerance equal to 2 percent of the reading, of each other.
4. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter.
D. Sensors Without Transmitters - Standard Application:
1. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 150 mm of the site sensor.
2. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gauge or building
automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured
value.
3. If not, install offset, calibrate or replace sensor.
E. Sensors With Transmitters - Standard Application.
1. Disconnect sensor.
2. Connect a signal generator in place of sensor.
3. Connect ammeter in series between transmitter and building automation system control
panel.
4. Using manufacturer’s resistance-temperature data, simulate minimum desired
temperature.
5. Adjust transmitter potentiometer zero until 4 mA is read by the ammeter.
6. Repeat for the maximum temperature matching 20 mA to the potentiometer span or
maximum and verify at the building automation system.
7. Record all values and recalibrate controller as necessary to comply with specified control
ramps, reset schedules, proportional relationship, reset relationship and P/I reaction.
8. Reconnect sensor.
9. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 150 mm of the site sensor.
10. Verify that the sensor reading, via the permanent thermostat, gauge or building
automation system, is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured
value.
11. If not, replace sensor and repeat.
12. For pressure sensors, perform a similar process with a suitable signal generator.
F. Sensor Tolerances for Standard Applications: Plus/minus the following maximums:
1. Watthour, Voltage, Amperage: 1 percent of design.
2. Pressure, Air, Water, Gas: 3 percent of design.
3. Air Temperatures (Outside Air, Space Air, Duct Air): 0.2 degree C.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 7 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 4. Relative Humidity: 4 percent of design.
5. Barometric Pressure: 340 Pa.
6. Flow Rate, Air: 10 percent of design.
7. Flow Rate, Water: 4 percent of design.
8. Flow Rate, Steam: 3 percent of design.
9. AHU Wet Bulb and Dew Point: 1.1 degrees C.
10. Hot Water Coil and Boiler Water Temperature: 0.8 degrees C.
11. Cooling Coil, Chilled and Condenser Water Temperatures: 0.2 degree C.
12. Combustion Flue Temperature: 2.8 degrees C.
13. Oxygen and CO2 Monitors: 0.1 percentage points.
14. CO Monitor: 0.01 percentage points.
15. Natural Gas and Oil Flow Rate: 1 percent of design.
G. Critical Applications: For some applications more rigorous calibration techniques may be
required for selected sensors. Describe any such methods used on an attached sheet.
H. Valve/Damper Stroke Setup and Check:
1. For all valve/damper actuator positions checked, verify the actual position against the
control system readout.
2. Set pump/fan to normal operating mode.
3. Command valve/damper closed; visually verify that valve/damper is closed and adjust
output zero signal as required.
4. Command valve/damper to open; verify position is full open and adjust output signal as
required.
5. Command valve/damper to a few intermediate positions.
6. If actual valve/damper position does not reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add
pilot positioner (for pneumatics).
I. Isolation Valve or System Valve Leak Check: For valves not associated with coils.
1. With full pressure in the system, command valve closed.
2. Use an ultra-sonic flow meter to detect flow or leakage.
3.07 TEST PROCEDURES - GENERAL
A. Provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional
Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for
sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving.
B. Provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows,
pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the
specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to
their pre-test condition.
C. Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or
near-identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows:
1. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only
minor size or capacity difference.
2. Sampling is not allowed for:
a. Major equipment.
b. Life-safety-critical equipment.
c. Prefunctional Checklist execution.
3. XX = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample;
defined for specific type of equipment.
4. YY = the percent of the sample that if failed will require another sample to be tested;
defined for specific type of equipment.
5. Randomly test at least XX percent of each group of identical equipment, but not less than
three units. This constitutes the "first sample."
6. If YY percent of the units in the first sample fail, test another XX percent of the remaining
identical units.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 8 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 7. If YY percent of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining identical units.
8. If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the
Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and
document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing.
D. Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct
observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to
make the “observation”).
E. Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the
response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the
response in a VAV box.
F. Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage,
resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value.
G. Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control
system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature
value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation.
H. Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a
control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect
indicators.
I. Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation
using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control systems; where monitoring
of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures:
1. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor;
at the Commissioning Authority’s request, Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more
points than specified at no extra charge.
2. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers.
3. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be
replaced with datalogger monitoring.
4. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and
at least 5 columns of point values on same page.
5. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it.
6. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing.
3.08 BUILDING ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING
A. General: Comply with the following procedural requirements:
1. NEBB S110 Whole Building Technical Commissioning of New Construction.
2. ASTM E779 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan
Pressurization.
3. ASTM E1827 Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an
Orifice Blower Door.
B. Verify that the building envelope has been sufficiently completed for testing to commence.
C. Conduct ongoing inspections as construction progresses to document satisfactory installation
conditions. related to thermal and moisture integrity of the building envelope that become
concealed upon completion of construction.
D. Submit a detailed narrative of proposed pressure test procedures prior to the test. Include a
plan view showing proposed installation locations (personnel doors or other similar openings)
for blower doors (or flexible ducts for trailer-mounted fans, if used).
E. Avoid testing on days forecast to experience high winds, rain, or snow.
F. Test the completed building and demonstrate that the air leakage rate of the building envelope
does not exceed the specified requirements.
1. Use equipment and methods necessary to produce indoor/outdoor pressure differential of
50 Pascals.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 9 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 2. Use RESNET accredited software to document salient features of project's building
envelope and to calculate the HERS Index Score.
G. Determine location and nature of undesirable air leakage pathways using methods specified in
ASTM E1186-17 Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building Envelopes and
Air Barrier Systems.
H. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to
Owner.
1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning
Authority immediately.
2. Insulation for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air
leakage is specified in Section 07 2100.
3. Air barriers for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air
leakage are specified in Section 07 2500.
4. Sealants for remedying building envelope deficiencies evidenced as excessive air leakage
are specified in Section 07 9200.
3.09 FIELD TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF PARTITIONS FOR NOISE ISOLATION
A. Conduct testing of partitions requiring a specific STC class indicated on drawings and/or in
various specifications sections. Comply with ASTM E336 for testing methods, including
requirements of Annex A1 for reduction of flanking sound transmission.
B. Confirm that the FSTC values are not less than 67 percent of design STC values.
C. Deficiencies: Correct deficiencies and re-inspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to
Owner.
1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, report deficiency to the Commissioning
Authority immediately.
2. Sealants for remedying flanking sound transmission deficiencies evidenced as excessive
air leakage are specified in Section 07 9200.
3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals for additional requirements.
B. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to
Owner.
C. Submit manuals related to items that were commissioned to Commissioning Authority for
review; make changes recommended by Commissioning Authority.
D. Commissioning Authority will add commissioning records to manuals after submission to
Owner.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 01 9113 - 10 GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 03 1000
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B. Openings for other work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Form stripping.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 04 2001 - Masonry Veneer: Spacing for veneer anchor reglets recessed in concrete.
D. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors and plates
in cast-in-place concrete.
E. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Placement of steel anchors in composite decking.
F. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Shoring and underpinning for excavation.
G. Section 31 6216.13 - Sheet Steel Piles: Shoring and underpinning related to sheet piles.
H. Section 31 6614 - Hydraulically Driven Pier Foundations: Shoring and underpinning related to
hydraulically driven piles.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;
2010 (Reapproved 2015).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
C. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2017).
D. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2014.
E. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2016.
F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
G. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
H. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2017a.
I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
J. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints
and ties.
D. Permanent Insulated Foam Panel Formwork Shop Drawings: Include calculations or selections
from manufacturer's prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with applicable building
code and manufacturer's requirements.
1. Include test reports for performance criteria specified.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 1000 - 1 CONCRETE FORMING AND

ACCESSORIES
 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.
E. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural
Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in []he Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia.
B. Maintain one copy of each installation standard on site throughout the duration of concrete
work.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a mock-up of formwork for ________, ____ m long by ____ m wide.
1. Include reinforcement, ties, and accessories specified in Section 03 2000.
2. Provide concrete in accordance with provisions of Section 03 3000.
3. Cure concrete in accordance with provisions of Section 03 3000.
B. Locate mock-up where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver prefabricated forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
B. Store prefabricated forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent
deterioration from moisture.
C. Protect plastic foam products from damage and exposure to sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A. Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish cast-in-
place concrete work.
B. Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to
shape, lines, and dimensions.
C. Chamfer outside corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls.
D. Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and
removal of formwork.
E. Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
F. Comply with Ministry of Transportation standard.
G. Use the following form types:
1. Basement Walls Not Exposed To View: Site fabricated plywood.
2. Basement Walls Exposed To View: Site fabricated rough sawn lumber.
3. Elevated Floor Slabs: Prefabricated glass fiber pan forms, treated for exposed to view
finish.
4. Elevated Floor/Roof Slabs: Permanent prefabricated foam panel formwork; formwork to
remain.
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, C Grade, Group 2.
B. Lumber: ________ species; ________ grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
2.03 REMOVABLE PREFABRICATED FORMS
A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 1.52 mm thick, matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support
weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished
surfaces.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 1000 - 2 CONCRETE FORMING AND

ACCESSORIES
 B. Preformed Plastic Forms: Thermoplastic polystyrene form liner, tight fitting, stiffened to support
weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished
surfaces.
C. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight
of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished concrete
surfaces.
D. Pan Type: Glass fiber, of size and profile indicated.
E. Tubular Column Type: Round, [] material, surface treated with release agent, non-reusable, of
sizes indicated.
F. Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to
support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set; thick.
2.04 PERMANENT PREFABRICATED FOAM PANEL FORMWORK
A. Floor/Roof Deck Forms: Pre-engineered expanded polystyrene foam plastic deck and
beam/joist forms with factory installed metal channel furring strips flush with face of panel and
field installed form stiffener slots.
1. Structural Performance: In accordance with applicable code.
2. Form Cross Section: As indicated on the drawings; flat-bottomed solid foam blocks with
voids only for stiffeners and beam/joist cross-section; interlocking long edges.
3. Form Width: 600 mm.
4. Beam/Joist Depth: 102 mm, exclusive of deck depth; if necessary, provide contour cut
filler pieces to achieve required depth.
5. Beam/Joist Spacing: 610 mm on center.
6. Channel Width at Face of Panel: 38 mm, minimum.
7. Channel Spacing: 304.8 mm on center.
8. Form Length: ___ mm, minimum.
9. Thermal Performance: Average RSI-value of 4.4, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C177, based on assembled formwork.
10. Sound Transmission: STC of 57, minimum; based on assembly consisting of 76.2 mm
concrete cover and 355.6 mm concrete beam/joist depth.
11. Sound Impact Insulation: IIC of 44, minimum; based on assembly consisting of 76.2 mm
concrete cover and 355.6 mm concrete beam/joist depth with no floor finish.
B. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board: ASTM C578, Type VIII.
1. Density: 18 kg/cu m.
2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Form Stiffeners: Steel C-channels, 1.21 mm, complying with ASTM A653/A653M, galvanized
to G90/Z275.
2.05 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: [] type, [], fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, free of defects that
could leave holes larger than 25 mm in concrete surface.
B. Form Release Agent: Capable of releasing forms from hardened concrete without staining or
discoloring concrete or forming bugholes and other surface defects, compatible with concrete
and form materials, and not requiring removal for satisfactory bonding of coatings to be applied.
1. Composition: Colorless reactive, mineral oil-based, soy-based, or vegetable-oil based
compound.
2. Do not use materials containing diesel oil or petroleum-based compounds.
C. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve and nailable plastic base for smooth, round, steel load-transfer
dowels.
D. Filler Strips for Chamfered Corners: [] type; ____ by ____ mm size; maximum possible lengths.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 1000 - 3 CONCRETE FORMING AND

ACCESSORIES
 E. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, at least [] thick, [], release tape sealed slots, anchors
for securing to concrete formwork.
F. Flashing Reglets: [], at least [] thick, longest possible lengths, with alignment splines for joints,
foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.
G. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
H. Embedded Anchor Shapes, Plates, Angles and Bars: As specified in Section 05 1200.
I. Waterstops: [], minimum [] tensile strength, minimum 46 degrees C to plus 79 degrees C
working temperature range, ____ mm wide, maximum possible lengths, ribbed profile,
preformed corner sections, heat welded jointing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions
agree with drawings.
3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
C. Install permanent insulated foam panel formwork per manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete
during stripping. Permit removal of remaining principal shores.
E. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum.
F. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on
drawings.
G. Install void forms in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Protect forms from
moisture or crushing.
H. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to
formwork.
I. If formwork is placed after reinforcement, resulting in insufficient concrete cover over
reinforcement, request instructions from Dar Al Riyadh before proceeding.
3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
C. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets,
recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D. Position recessed anchor slots for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals
specified in Section 04 2001.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 1000 - 4 CONCRETE FORMING AND

ACCESSORIES
 E. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
F. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous
without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight.
G. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
H. Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly
fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.05 FORM CLEANING
A. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B. Clean and protect permanent insulated concrete foam panel formwork per manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
2. During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts.
Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed
within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construct permanent insulated foam panel formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI
301.
C. Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1.
D. Camber slabs and beams 2 mm/m.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with
formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
B. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete
surfaces scheduled for exposure to view.
C. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard
damaged forms.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 1000 - 5 CONCRETE FORMING AND

ACCESSORIES
 SECTION 03 2000
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Reinforcement for masonry.
D. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Grounding connection to
concrete reinforcement.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
B. ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.
C. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
D. ASTM A704/A704M - Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2017.
E. ASTM A767/A767M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
F. ASTM A775/A775M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2017.
G. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
H. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-
Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2015.
I. CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of
bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
1. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in
design of work of this type and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this
project meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Reports: Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
B. Provide Dar Al Riyadh with access to fabrication plant to facilitate inspection of reinforcement.
Provide notification of commencement and duration of shop fabrication in sufficient time to
allow inspection.
C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certifications for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 2000 - 1 CONCRETE REINFORCING

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 420 MPa.
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
2. Unfinished.
3. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A767/A767M, Class I.
4. Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A775/A775M.
B. Reinforcing Steel Mat: ASTM A704/A704M, using 280 MPa steel bars or rods, unfinished.
C. Stirrup Steel: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, unfinished.
D. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement (WWR): Galvanized, deformed type; ASTM
A1064/A1064M.
1. Form: Flat Sheets.
2. WWR Style: 102 x 203-MW39 x MW65.
E. Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 1.29 mm.
2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
3. Provide stainless steel components for placement within 38 mm of weathering surfaces.
2.02 RE-BAR SPLICING:
A. Coupler Systems: Mechanical devices for splicing reinforcing bars; capable of developing full
steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression.
B. Dowel Bar Splicer with Dowel-Ins: Mechanical devices for connecting dowels; capable of
developing full steel reinforcing design strength in tension and compression.
C. Taper Tie Hole Plug: Mechanical device for plugging tie holes; anchors optional flush or
recessed grout.
D. Grout: Cementitious, non-metallic, non-shrink grout for use with manufacturer's grout sleeve
reinforcing bar coupler system.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with CRSI (DA4) - Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
C. Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M.
D. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings at point of minimum stress.
1. Review locations of splices with Dar Al Riyadh.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.
C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
1. Beams:____ mm
2. Supported Slabs and Joists: ____ mm.
3. Column Ties: ____ mm.
4. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): ____ mm.
5. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: ____ mm.
6. Slabs on Fill: ____ mm.
E. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 2000 - 2 CONCRETE REINFORCING

 F. Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Section 26 0526.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 4000, will inspect installed
reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A. Reinforcement For Superstructure Framing Members: Deformed bars, unfinished.
B. Reinforcement For Foundation Wall Framing Members and Slab-on-Grade: Deformed bars
and welded wire reinforcement, galvanized finish.
C. Reinforcement For Parking Structure Framing Members: Deformed bars, epoxy coated finish.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 2000 - 3 CONCRETE REINFORCING

 SECTION 03 3000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete building frame members.
B. Concrete for composite floor construction.
C. Elevated concrete slabs.
D. Floors and slabs on grade.
E. Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls.
F. Concrete reinforcement.
G. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
H. Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, thrust blocks, and manholes.
I. Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Densifiers, hardeners, applied coatings, and
polishing.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Products and installation for sealants and joint fillers for saw
cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
B. ACI 211.2 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete;
1998 (Reapproved 2004).
C. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
D. ACI 302.1R - Guide to Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2015.
E. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000
(Reapproved 2009).
F. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016.
G. ACI 308R - Guide to External Curing of Concrete; 2016.
H. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2014 (Errata
2017).
I. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2017b.
J. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2017a.
K. ASTM C109/C109M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars (Using 2-in. or (50-mm) Cube Specimens); 2016a.
L. ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2015a.
M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
N. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2016.
O. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2016.
P. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a
(Reapproved 2016).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 Q. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2011.
R. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete; 2017a.
S. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2017.
T. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant
Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes; 2001 (Reapproved 2012).
U. ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete; 2015.
V. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2014.
W. ASTM C827/C827M - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical
Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2016.
X. ASTM C845/C845M - Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement; 2012.
Y. ASTM C881/C881M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; 2015.
Z. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2016.
AA. ASTM C1059/C1059M - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to
Hardened Concrete; 2013.
AB. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2014a.
AC. ASTM C1116/C1116M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete; 2010a
(Reapproved 2015).
AD. ASTM C1240 - Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious Mixtures; 2015.
AE. ASTM C1315 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having
Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete; 2011.
AF. ASTM C1582/C1582M - Standard Specification for Admixtures to Inhibit Chloride-Induced
Corrosion of Reinforcing Steel in Concrete; 2011, with Editorial Revision (2017).
AG. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics; 2015.
AH. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004, with Editorial
Revision (2013).
AI. ASTM D3963/D3963M - Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-
Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2015.
AJ. ASTM E11 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves; 2017.
AK. ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a, with Editorial Revision
(2013).
AL. ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011
(Reapproved 2017).
AM. ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2017.
AN. ASTM E1993/E1993M - Standard Specification for Bituminous Water Vapor Retarders Used in
Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1998, with Editorial Revision (2013).
AO. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 AP. COE CRD-C 48 - Method of Test for Water Permeability of Concrete; 1992.
AQ. COE CRD-C 572 - Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop; 1974.
AR. ICC-ES AC380 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite Physical Barrier Systems; 2014, with Editorial
Revision (2017).
AS. ICRI 310.2R - Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings,
Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair; 2013.
AT. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017.
AU. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix design.
1. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 301, Section 4 -
Concrete Mixtures.
2. Indicate proposed mix design complies with requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 5 -
Concrete Quality, Mixing and Placing.
C. Samples for Pigment Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's complete sample chip set,
including pigment number and required dosage rate for each color.
D. Verification Samples: Submit sample chips of specified colors indicating pigment numbers and
required dosage rates, for subsequent comparison to installed concrete.
E. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
F. Sustainable Design Submittal: If any fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, silica fume,
rice hull ash, or other waste material is used in mix designs to replace Portland cement, submit
the total volume of concrete cast in place, mix design(s) used showing the quantity of portland
cement replaced, reports showing successful cylinder testing, and temperature on day of pour if
cold weather mix is used; use LEED New Product Content Form.
G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
C. For slabs required to include moisture vapor reduction admixture (MVRA), do not proceed with
placement unless manufacturer's representative is present for every day of placement.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive
special treatment or finish as result of formwork.
1. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment.
2. Number of Panels: Two.
3. Locate as indicated on drawings.
B. If requested by Dar Al Riyadh, cast concrete against mock-up panel. Obtain acceptance of
resulting surface finish prior to erecting formwork.
C. Accepted mock-up panel is considered basis of quality for the finished work. Keep mock-up
exposed to view for duration of concrete work.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Slabs with Moisture Vapor Reducing Admixture (MVRA): Provide warranty to cover the cost of
flooring failures due to moisture migration from slabs for ten years.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 1. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring, placement of topical moisture
remediation system, and replacement of flooring with comparable flooring system.
2. Provide warranty by manufacturer of MVRA matching terms of flooring adhesive or primer
manufacturer's material defect warranty.
C. Moisture Emission Reducing Curing and Sealing Compound: Provide warranty to cost of
flooring delamination failures for 10 years.
1. Include cost of repair or removal of failed flooring, remediation with a moisture vapor
impermeable surface coating, and replacement of flooring with comparable flooring
system.
D. Termite-Resistant Vapor Barrier Sheet: Provide five year manufacturer's limited warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with
application of coatings.
2. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 38 mm of concrete surface.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A. Comply with requirements of Section 03 2000.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal Portland type.
1. Acquire cement for entire project from same source.
B. Blended, Expansive Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C845/C845M, Type K.
C. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
1. Acquire aggregates for entire project from same source.
D. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C330/C330M.
E. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
F. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Class N.
G. Silica Fume: ASTM C1240, proportioned in accordance with ACI 211.1.
H. Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into
concrete and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
1. Color(s): As selected by Dar Al Riyadh from manufacturer's full range.
I. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
J. Structural Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M.
1. Fiber Type: Alkali-resistant synthetic.
2. Fiber Length: 12 mm, nominal.
K. Early Age Crack-Control Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M.
1. Fiber Type: Alkali-resistant polypropylene.
2. Fiber Length: 12 mm, nominal.
L. Blended Fiber Reinforcement: ASTM C1116/C1116M, engineered blend of two or more sizes of
reinforcing fibers.
1. Fiber Type: Alkali-resistant synthetic.
2. Fiber Length: 12 mm, nominal.
2.04 ADMIXTURES
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight
of cement.
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494/C494M Type G.
D. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture:
1. ASTM C494/C494M, Type S.
E. Shrinkage Compensating Admixture: For on site production of concrete with ASTM
C845/C845M, Type K cement.
F. Shrinkage Compensating Admixture with Fiber Reinforcement: For on site production of
concrete with ASTM C845/C845M, Type K cement with integral fiber reinforcement.
G. Corrosion Inhibiting Admixture:
1. ASTM C494/C494M, Type C.
2. ASTM C1582/C1582M.
H. Moisture Vapor Reduction Admixture (MVRA): Liquid, inorganic admixture free of volatile
organic compounds (VOCs) and formulated to close capillary systems formed during curing to
reduce moisture vapor emission and transmission with no adverse effect on concrete properties
or finish flooring.
1. Provide admixture in slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring.
I. Waterproofing Admixture: Admixture formulated to reduce permeability to liquid water, with no
adverse effect on concrete properties.
1. Admixture Composition: Crystalline, functioning by growth of crystals in capillary pores.
2. Permeability of Cured Concrete: No measurable leakage when tested in accordance with
COE CRD-C 48 at 106 m of head; provide test reports.
3. Potable Water Contact Approval: National Science Foundation (NSF) certification for use
on structures holding potable water, based on testing in accordance with NSF 61 and NSF
372.
J. Integral Hardening Admixture: Dry powder added to concrete during batching.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Underslab Vapor Retarder: Sheet material complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by
manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs.
The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
B. Termite-Excluding Underslab Barrier and Waterproofing Membrane: Composite sheet of
polyethylene film, termite-excluding barrier sealant, and non-woven polypropylene fabric.
1. Total Thickness: 2.4 mm.
2. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
3. Water Vapor Permeance: 1.7 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
4. Accessory Products: Manufacturer's recommended flexible sealant tape, adhesive,
mastic, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
C. Insulated Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer product of high density closed-cell foam and
high density polyethylene bubble sandwiched between outer layers of aluminum-reinforced
polyethylene or equivalent, stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with
soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
D. Underslab Waterproofing and Vapor Retarder: Semi-rigid bituminous membrane, seven-ply,
complying with ASTM E1993/E1993M.
1. Composition: Weather-resistant coated, permanently bonded bituminous core board
composed of an inner core, suspended and sealed within high melt point asphalt-
impregnated felt, with glass mat liner and polyethylene anti-stick sheet.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 2. Permeance: 0.1 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum.
3. Tensile Strength: 24.5 kN/m, minimum.
4. Puncture Resistance: 400 N, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E154/E154M.
5. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
E. Composite Underslab Vapor Retarder: Composite sheet of plastic film laminated with non-
woven geotextile fabric and complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as
suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs.
1. Installation: Comply with ASTM E1643.
2. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations.
F. Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Grout: Comply with ASTM C1107/C1107M.
2. Height Change, Plastic State; when tested in accordance with ASTM C827/C827M:
a. Maximum: Plus 4 percent.
b. Minimum: Plus 1 percent.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours, ASTM C109/C109M: 13.7 MPa.
4. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 13.7 MPa.
5. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 48 MPa.
6. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 48 MPa.
G. Non-Shrink Epoxy Grout: Moisture-insensitive, two-part; consisting of epoxy resin, non-metallic
aggregate, and activator.
1. Composition: High solids content material exhibiting positive expansion when tested in
accordance with ASTM C827/C827M.
a. Maximum Height Change: Plus 4 percent.
b. Minimum Height Change: Plus 1 percent.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days, ASTM C579: 82.7 MPa.
3. Minimum Compressive Strength at 7 days, ASTM D695: 82.7 MPa.
H. Termite-Resistant Barrier Sealant: Solvent-based; single component, non-sag, non-skinning,
non-hardening, non-bleeding; vapor-impermeable; intended for fully concealed applications.
1. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
I. Heavy Duty, Abrasion-Resistant Concrete Floor Topping:
J. Architectural Concrete Floor Topping and Resurfacer:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days, ASTM C109/C109M: 45 MPa.
K. Non-Shrink Epoxy Chocking Compound:
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable acrylic latex, complying with ASTM C1059/C1059M,
Type II.
B. Epoxy Bonding System:
1. Complying with ASTM C881/C881M and of Type required for specific application.
C. Waterproofing Admixture Slurry: Slurry coat of Portland cement, sand, and crystalline
waterproofing additive, mixed with water in proportions recommended by manufacturer to
achieve waterproofing at cold joints in concrete.
D. Waterstops: PVC, complying with COE CRD-C 572.
1. Configuration: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Size: As indicated on the drawings.
E. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion
during placement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
F. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 13 mm thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 13 mm deep sealant pocket after removal.
1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber.
G. Termite-Excluding Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 13 mm thick, composite sheet of elastomeric
membrane, embedded stainless steel termite-exclusion screen, adhesive on both sides, and a
disposable, treated release sheet.
1. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
2. Stainless Steel Mesh: ASTM E11; opening size 0.44 mm, maximum.
H. Slab Contraction Joint Device: Preformed linear strip intended for pressing into wet concrete to
provide straight route for shrinkage cracking.
I. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,
with rectangular or round knockout holes for conduit or rebar to pass through joint form at 150
mm on center; ribbed steel stakes for setting.
1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation.
2. Height: To suit slab thickness.
J. Dowel Sleeves: Plastic sleeve for smooth, round, steel load-transfer dowels.
K. Plate Dowel System: Steel plate dowel and plastic dowel sleeve; with integral fasteners for
attachment to formwork.
2.07 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Reducer: Liquid thin-film-forming compound that reduces rapid moisture loss
caused by high temperature, low humidity, and high winds; intended for application immediately
after concrete placement.
B. Curing Compound, Naturally Dissipating: Clear, water-based, liquid membrane-forming
compound; complying with ASTM C309.
C. Curing Agent, Water Replacement Type: Clear, water based, liquid water cure replacement
agent complying with ASTM C309 standards for water retention, and with ACI 302.1R.
D. Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound: Boiled linseed oil compound.
1. Application: Use on roadway, bridge deck, parking deck, and ramps.
E. Wax Curing Compound: Water-based liquid, white pigmented, membrane-forming.
F. Resin Curing Compound: Solvent-based liquid, white pigmented, membrane-forming.
1. For use on exterior slabs. When slab will be painted, sealed, topped, or receive other
applied finish, completely remove curing compound after curing is complete and before
finish coatings are applied.
2. Comply with ASTM C309, Type 2, Classes A and B.
G. Curing and Sealing Compound, Moisture Emission Reducing: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear
sealer, for application to newly placed concrete; capable of providing adequate bond for flooring
adhesives, initially and over the long term; with sufficient moisture vapor impermeability to
prevent deterioration of flooring adhesives due to moisture emission.
1. Use this product to cure and seal all slabs to receive adhesively applied flooring or roofing.
2. Comply with ASTM C309 and ASTM C1315 Type I Class A.
3. VOC Content: Less than 100 g/L.
4. Solids Content: 25 percent, minimum.
H. Curing Compound, Non-dissipating: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing acrylic;
complying with ASTM C309.
1. Vehicle: Water-based.
2. Gloss: High.
3. Solids by Mass: 18 percent, minimum.
I. Curing and Sealing Compound, Low Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing
acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 1. Vehicle: Solvent-based.
2. Solids by Mass: 25 percent, minimum.
J. Curing and Sealing Compound, High Gloss: Liquid, membrane-forming, clear, non-yellowing
acrylic; complying with ASTM C1315 Type 1 Class A.
1. Vehicle: Solvent-based.
2. Solids by Mass: 25 percent, minimum.
K. Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C171.
1. Curing paper, regular.
2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.102 mm.
3. White-burlap-polyethylene sheet, weighing not less than 305 g/sq m.
2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast
furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations.
B. Proportioning Structural Lightweight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.2 recommendations.
1. Replace as much Portland cement as possible with fly ash, ground granulated blast
furnace slag, silica fume, or rice hull ash as is consistent with ACI recommendations.
C. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis
of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Dar Al
Riyadh for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
D. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended or required by manufacturer.
E. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 0.89 kg per cu m, or as recommended by
manufacturer for specific project conditions.
F. Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:
20.7 MPa.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
5. Cement Content: Minimum ___ kg per cu m.
6. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
7. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
8. Maximum Slump: 75 mm.
9. Maximum Aggregate Size: 16 mm.
G. Structural Lightweight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:
20.7 MPa.
2. Cement Content: Minimum ___ kg per cubic meter.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
4. Total Air Content: 3 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
5. Maximum Slump: 75 mm.
6. Maximum Aggregate Size: 16 mm.
7. Maximum dry unit weight: ____ kg per cubic meter.
2.09 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each
batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
1. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
achieve consistent color from batch to batch.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 2. Fiber Reinforcement: Batch and mix as recommended by manufacturer for specific
project conditions.
B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all
applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
D. Prepare existing concrete surfaces to be repaired according to ICRI 310.2R, ______.
E. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning and applying bonding agent in according to bonding agent manufacturer's instructions.
1. Use epoxy bonding system for bonding to damp surfaces, for structural load-bearing
applications, and where curing under humid conditions is required.
2. Use latex bonding agent only for non-load-bearing applications.
F. Where new concrete with integral waterproofing is to be bonded to previously placed concrete,
prepare surfaces to be treated in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions.
Saturate cold joint surface with clean water, and remove excess water before application of
coat of waterproofing admixture slurry. Apply slurry coat uniformly with semi-stiff bristle brush
at rate recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
G. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,
insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
H. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints
minimum 150 mm. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's
recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor
retarder before covering.
1. Granular Fill Over Vapor Retarder: Cover vapor retarder with compactible granular fill as
indicated on the drawings. Do not use sand.
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Fabricate and handle epoxy-coated reinforcing in accordance with ASTM D3963/D3963M.
B. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete
coverage required for protection.
C. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both
directions. Splice laps with tie wire.
D. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement.
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
C. Notify Dar Al Riyadh not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and
test samples taken.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint
devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 F. Place concrete continuously without construction (cold) joints wherever possible; where
construction joints are necessary, before next placement prepare joint surface by removing
laitance and exposing the sand and sound surface mortar, by sandblasting or high-pressure
water jetting.
G. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.05 SLAB JOINTING
A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C. Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total
height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
1. Install wherever necessary to separate slab from other building members, including
columns, walls, equipment foundations, footings, stairs, manholes, sumps, and drains.
D. Load Transfer Construction and Contraction Joints: Install load transfer devices as indicated;
saw cut joint at surface as indicated for contraction joints.
E. Saw Cut Contraction Joints: Saw cut joints before concrete begins to cool, within 4 to 12 hours
after placing; use 5 mm thick blade and cut at least 25 mm deep but not less than one quarter
(1/4) the depth of the slab.
F. Construction Joints: Where not otherwise indicated, use metal combination screed and key
form, with removable top section for joint sealant.
3.06 SEPARATE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A. Prior to placing floor topping, roughen substrate concrete surface and remove deleterious
material. Broom and vacuum clean.
B. Place required dividers, edge strips, reinforcing, and other items to be cast in.
C. Apply bonding agent to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Apply sand and cement slurry coat on base course, immediately prior to placing toppings.
E. Place concrete floor toppings to required lines and levels.
1. Place topping in checkerboard panels not to exceed 6 m in either direction.
F. Screed toppings level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1:1000.
3.07 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A. An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01 4000, will inspect finished slabs for
conformance to specified tolerances.
B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness:
1. Exposed Concrete Floors: 6 mm in 3 m.
2. Under Seamless Resilient Flooring: 6 mm in 3 m.
3. Under Carpeting: 6 mm in 3 m.
C. Correct the slab surface if tolerances are less than specified.
D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas
requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 6 mm or more in
height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 6 mm or
more in height. Provide finish as follows:
1. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive,
not more than 24 hours after form removal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 2. Grout Cleaned Finish: Wet areas to be cleaned and apply grout mixture by brush or
spray; scrub immediately to remove excess grout. After drying, rub vigorously with clean
burlap, and keep moist for 36 hours.
3. Cork Floated Finish: Immediately after form removal, apply grout with trowel or firm
rubber float; compress grout with low-speed grinder, and apply final texture with cork
float.
D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Surfaces to Receive Thick Floor Coverings: "Wood float" as described in ACI 302.1R;
thick floor coverings include quarry tile, ceramic tile, and Portland cement terrazzo with full
bed setting system.
2. Surfaces to Receive Thin Floor Coverings: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; thin
floor coverings include carpeting, resilient flooring, seamless flooring, resinous matrix
terrazzo, thin set quarry tile, and thin set ceramic tile.
3. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: Trowel as described in ACI 302.1R; use steel-reinforced
plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black-burnish marks; decorative
exposed surfaces include surfaces to be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete, surfaces to
receive liquid hardeners, surfaces to receive dry-shake hardeners, surfaces to be
polished, and all other exposed slab surfaces.
4. Chemical Hardener: See Section 03 3511.
E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at
1:100 nominal.
3.09 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Slabs and Floors To Receive Adhesive-Applied Flooring: Curing compounds and other
surface coatings are usually considered unacceptable by flooring and adhesive
manufacturers. If such materials must be used, either obtain the approval of the flooring
and adhesive manufacturers prior to use or remove the surface coating after curing to
flooring manufacturer's satisfaction.
2. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.
Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated
sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.
a. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously
for 4 days.
b. Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet.
c. Saturated Burlap: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over
floor slab areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place.
3. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M, for each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 76 cu m or less of each class of concrete placed.
F. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
G. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM
C143/C143M.
H. Slab Testing: Cooperate with manufacturer of specified moisture vapor reduction admixture
(MVRA) to allow access for sampling and testing concrete for compliance with warranty
requirements.
3.11 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Dar Al Riyadh and
Contractor within 24 hours of test.
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
or specified requirements.
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by Dar Al Riyadh. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction
of Dar Al Riyadh for each individual area.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected concrete floor surface until fully cured.
3.13 SCHEDULE - CONCRETE TYPES AND FINISHES
A. Foundation Walls: 20.7 MPa 28 day concrete, form finish with honeycomb filled surface.
B. Underside of Supported Floors and Structure Exposed to View: 27.6 MPa 28 day concrete,
form finish with honeycomb filled surface.
C. Exposed Portico Structure: 27.6 MPa 28 day concrete, air entrained, smooth rubbed finish.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3000 - 12 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

 SECTION 03 3713
SHOTCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pneumatically applied concrete.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Prepared forms to achieve
configuration, contours, and tolerances required.
B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Reinforcement.
D. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Forming earth to achieve contours and surfaces required.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 506.2 - Specification for Shotcrete; 2013.
B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
C. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
D. ASTM C1602/C1602M - Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of
Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 2012.
E. ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2016, with Editorial
Revision (2016).
F. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
G. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a
(Reapproved 2016).
H. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete; 2017a.
I. ASTM C332 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete; 2017.
J. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on admixtures.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate [], and dimensions, reinforcement, accessories.
D. Mix design test reports.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 506.2.
1. Maintain one copy of document on site.
B. Design work of this section under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer
experienced in design of shotcrete structures and licensed in the State in which the Project is
located.
C. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing shotcrete installations, with
minimum [] years of documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Sample Panel: Provide mock-up of sufficient size to indicate special treatment or finish
required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3713 - 1 SHOTCRETE

 B. Test Panels: Prior to starting work provide mock-up for evaluation of materials and
workmanship:
1. Provide three test panels fabricated by placing shotcrete onto plywood for each mix
design being considered, for each shooting position to be encountered, and for each ____
sq m of placed shotcrete.
2. Form panels to identical shotcrete thickness with reinforcement in place.
3. Repair core holes after testing, in accordance with ACI 506.2.
C. Locate mock-up where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain material and surrounding air temperature at minimum 10 degrees C prior to and during
installation and maintain material at this minimum temperature for 7 days after completion of
work. Provide equipment and cover to maintain minimum temperature.
B. Suspend shotcrete operations during high winds, rainy weather, or near freezing temperatures
when work cannot be protected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I - Normal; white color.
B. Aggregate: Normal weight, ASTM C33/C33M, 9 mm maximum size.
C. Aggregate: Lightweight, ASTM C330/C330M.
D. Aggregate: Insulating, ASTM C332.
E. Admixtures: Chemical type complying with ASTM C494/C494M (wet mix only).
F. Air-Entraining Admixture: Complying with ASTM C260/C260M (wet mix only).
G. Microbiologically-Induced Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Resists growth of bacteria and fungi
on or inside concrete.
H. Reinforcing Bars: Type and size as indicated on drawings.
I. Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel welded wire reinforcement, plain type; 50 x 50,
MW 5/MW 5, galvanized.
J. Reinforcing Mesh: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel welded wire reinforcement, deformed type; 50 x
50, MD 25/MD 25 wires, galvanized after fabrication per ASTM A123/A123M.
K. Fiber Reinforcement: Steel fibers, ____ size by _____ mm long.
1. In proportion of ____ percent of mix by volume.
2. At ____ kg/cu m of mix.
L. Water: ASTM C1602/C1602M; clean, potable, and not detrimental to shotcrete.
M. Curing Compound: Water-based, spray-on, penetrating curing compound and hardener; not
detrimental to application of subsequent surface finish materials; containing no wax, resin, or
solvents.
N. Bonding Agent: Compatible with substrate and subsequent materials.
O. Alignment Wire: Small gage, high strength steel wire.
2.02 SHOTCRETE MIX
A. Provide wet or dry mix design that gives good compaction and low percentage of rebound, is
stiff enough not to sag.
B. Comply with following requirements:
1. Compressive Strength (28 day minimum): 20 MPa.
2. Aggregate Size (maximum): 9 mm.
3. Air Entrainment: ____ percent/cu m.
4. Chemical Admixture: ____ percent/cu m.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3713 - 2 SHOTCRETE
 5. Pozzolanic Mineral Admixture: ____ percent/cu m.
6. Slump (plus or minus 1/2 inch): 25 mm.
C. Maintain quality control records during production of shotcrete; make records available.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Equipment: Capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient
quantity to maintain continuous placement.
B. Water Supply: Uniform water pressure at discharge nozzle sufficiently greater than operating
air pressure to ensure intimate mixing with aggregate-cement mix; provide water pump to
system if line water pressure is inadequate.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will provide inspection and testing services, as specified in
Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Prior to start of work, testing agency will review mix proportions, gradation, and quality of
aggregate.
C. Provide inspection for compliance with design mix.
D. Test samples in accordance with ACI 506.2.
E. Independent testing agency will test mock-up panels as follows:
1. Drill 75 mm diameter core samples from test panels.
2. Test for strength.
F. Modify mix design as required based on results of testing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.
D. Verify fabricated forms are:
1. True to line and dimension.
2. Adequately braced against vibration during placement.
3. Constructed to permit escape of trapped air during gunning operations.
4. Constructed to minimize rebound during gunning operations.
E. Verify correct placement of reinforcement with sufficient clearances to permit complete
encasement.
F. Verify that embedded fittings, pipe, conduits, and other items are correctly and securely placed.
G. Ensure easy access to shotcrete surfaces for screeding and finishing, and to permit
uninterrupted application.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing unsound concrete from substrate surfaces.
1. Minimize abrupt changes in depth of area to be repaired.
2. Remove square external corners from substrate by radiusing the edges.
B. Sandblast surfaces to receive shotcrete.
C. Determine operating procedures for placement in close quarters, extended distances, or
around unusual obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency may be adjusted
during application.
D. Clean and wet cementitious or absorptive substrate surfaces prior to receiving shotcrete. Keep
porous surfaces damp for several hours prior to placement of shotcrete.
E. Apply bonding agent.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3713 - 3 SHOTCRETE
 F. Protect adjacent surfaces not receiving shotcrete.
3.03 ALIGNMENT CONTROL
A. Provide alignment wire to establish thickness and plane of required surfaces.
B. Install alignment wire at corners and offsets not established by forms.
C. Tighten alignment wire true to line. Position adjustment devices to permit additional tightening.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 506.2.
B. Use mixing and delivery equipment capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate, cement, and water
in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous and uniform placement.
C. Do not apply shotcrete more than 45 minutes after adding Portland cement to the mix.
D. Do not place shotcrete on surfaces that are frozen, spongy, or where there is free water.
E. Achieve maximum compaction with minimum rebound.
F. Build-up to required thickness in multiple passes to achieve layering. Encase reinforcement
with the first pass.
G. Allow each layer to take initial set before applying succeeding layers.
H. Do not permit applied shotcrete to sag, slough, or displace.
I. After initial set of final layer, remove excess material outside of forms and alignment lines.
J. Sandblast to remove laitance. Clean with air/water pressure jet.
K. Finish surface of final layer with natural gun finish.
L. Remove rebound at construction and expansion joints.
M. Remove rebound material that does not fall clear of work; discard salvaged rebound.
N. Maintain shotcrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of shotcrete.
O. Immediately after placement, protect shotcrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
P. Maintain surfaces wet for a minimum of 7 days.
Q. Sound test the applied material with hammer for voids. Expose voids and replace with new
shotcrete ensuring full bond with adjacent work.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide additional test panels, as specified for mock-up, during the course of the work as may
be requested by the testing agency.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit applied work to damage adjacent surfaces.
3.07 SCHEDULES
A. Pool Shell: 5 inch (127 mm) thick shotcrete, reinforced, wood float finish, to receive ceramic tile
finish.
B. Wading Pool Shell: 3 inch (76 mm) thick shotcrete, unreinforced, steel trowel finish, white
color, to receive high performance coating
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3713 - 4 SHOTCRETE

 SECTION 03 3900
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; American Concrete Institute International;
2010.
B. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (Errata 2007).
C. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001
(Reapproved 2008).
D. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
E. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete.
F. ASTM D2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements.
B. Product Data: Provide data on curing compounds, mats, paper, film, compatibilities, and
limitations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of Section 016000 - Product
Requirements.
B. Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's packaging. Including application instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309 chlorinated rubber styrene-acrylate type.
B. Absorptive Mats: ASTM C171, burlap-polyethylene, (270 grams/sq m) bonded to prevent
separation during handling and placing.
C. Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete. As specified in Section 03300: Cast - In - Place
Concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 013000 - Administrative Requirement.
B. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.02 HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for 7
days.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3900 - 1 CONCRETE CURING

 C. Absorptive Mat: Saturate burlap-polyethylene and place burlap-side down over floor slab
areas, lapping ends and sides; maintain in place for 7 days.
D. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions in one coat.
E. Maintain labour on site to ensure continuous wetting, covering and spraying of concrete
surfaces.
3.03 VERTICAL SURFACES
A. Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
B. Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.
C. Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 03 3900 - 2 CONCRETE CURING

 SECTION 04 0511
MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mortar for masonry.
B. Grout for masonry.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.
B. Section 04 2723 - Cavity Wall Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
B. ASTM C5 - Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes; 2018.
C. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
D. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2017a.
E. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2017.
F. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
G. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006
(Reapproved 2011).
H. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.
I. ASTM C387/C387M - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for
Concrete and High Strength Mortar; 2015.
J. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
K. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2018.
L. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2017.
M. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2016.
N. ASTM C1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 2018, with Editorial
Revision.
O. ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength;
2013, with Editorial Revision (2014).
P. ASTM C1142 - Standard Specification for Extended Life Mortar for Unit Masonry; 1995
(Reapproved 2013).
Q. ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
1992a (Reapproved 2014).
R. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2016.
S. ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry; 2014a.
T. ASTM E518/E518M - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Bond Strength of Masonry; 2015.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Include design mix and indicate whether the Proportion or Property specification
of ASTM C270 is to be used. Also include required environmental conditions and admixture
limitations.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 0511 - 1 MORTAR AND MASONRY

GROUT
 C. Samples: Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
D. Reports: Submit reports on mortar indicating compliance of mortar to property requirements of
ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports per ASTM C780.
E. Reports: Submit reports on grout indicating compliance of component grout materials to
requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to requirements of ASTM C1019.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit packaged dry mortar manufacturer's installation
instructions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract
Documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
1.06 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Testing will be conducted by an independent test agency, in accordance with provisions of
Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Mortar Mixes: Test mortars prebatched by weight in accordance with ASTM C780
recommendations for preconstruction testing.
1. Test results will be used to establish optimum mortar proportions and establish quality
control values for construction testing.
C. Grout Mixes: Test grout batches in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures.
1. Test results will be used to establish optimum grout proportions and establish quality
control values for construction testing.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign
matter.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS
A. At Contractor's option, mortar and grout may be field-mixed from packaged dry materials, made
from factory premixed dry materials with addition of water only, or ready-mixed.
B. Mortar Color: Natural gray unless otherwise indicated.
C. Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.
1. Exterior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
2. Exterior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
3. Interior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
4. Interior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type O.
D. Grout Mix Designs:
1. Bond Beams and Lintels: 21 MPa strength at 28 days; 200-250 mm slump; provide
premixed type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2. Engineered Masonry: 21 MPa strength at 28 days; 200-250 mm slump; provide premixed
type in accordance with ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Unit Masonry: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime,
and sand; complying with ASTM C387/C387M and capable of producing mortar of the specified
strength in accordance with ASTM C270 with the addition of water only.
1. Type: Type N.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 0511 - 2 MORTAR AND MASONRY

GROUT
 2. Color: Standard gray.
3. Water repellent mortar for use with water repellent masonry units.
B. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Repointing: Premixed Portland cement, graded sand, and
chemical admixtures complying with ASTM C91/C91M with the addition of water only.
1. Color: Natural gray.
C. Packaged Dry Material for Mortar for Repointing: Premixed Portland cement, hydrated lime,
and graded sand; capable of producing Type O mortar in accordance with ASTM C270 with the
addition of water only.
1. Color: Standard gray.
D. Packaged Dry Material for Grout for Masonry: Premixed cementitious materials and dried
aggregates; capable of producing grout of the specified strength in accordance with ASTM
C476 with the addition of water only.
E. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M.
1. Type: Type I - Normal; ASTM C150/C150M.
2. Color: Standard gray.
F. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M.
1. Type: Type N; ASTM C91/C91M.
G. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
H. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type.
I. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
J. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
K. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
L. Water: Clean and potable.
M. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
N. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
O. Plasticizer: ________ manufactured by ____________.
P. Retardant: ________ type; ________ manufactured by ____________.
Q. Bonding Agent: Latex type.
R. Integral Water Repellent Admixture: Polymeric liquid admixture added to mortar at the time of
manufacture.
1. Performance of Mortar with Integral Water Repellent:
a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514/E514M and for a minimum of 72
hours:
1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.05 L per hour at the end
of 24 hours.
3) No more than 25 percent of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1072; minimum 10 percent increase.
c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5 percent decrease.
d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5 percent increase in shrinkage.
2. Use only in combination with masonry units produced with integral water repellent
admixture.
2.03 MORTAR MIXING
A. Ready Mixed Mortar: ASTM C1142, Type equivalent to that specified according to ASTM
C270.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 0511 - 3 MORTAR AND MASONRY

GROUT
 B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM
C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.
C. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
D. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's
sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio; mix in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, uniform in coloration.
E. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
F. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
G. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
2.04 GROUT MIXING
A. Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
B. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with
ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with brick masonry units. Brace masonry to resist
wet grout pressure.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 400 mm without consolidating grout by rodding.
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
3.03 GROUTING
A. Use either high-lift or low-lift grouting techniques, at Contractor's option, subject to other
limitations of Contract Documents.
B. Low-Lift Grouting:
1. Limit height of pours to 300 mm.
2. Limit height of masonry to 400 mm above each pour.
3. Pour grout only after vertical reinforcing is in place; place horizontal reinforcing as grout is
poured. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.
4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt
pours for more than 1-1/2 hours.
C. High-Lift Grouting:
1. Verify that horizontal and vertical reinforcement is in proper position and adequately
secured before beginning pours.
2. Place grout for spanning elements in single, continuous pour.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section
01 4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C780 procedures.
C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C1019 procedures.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 0511 - 4 MORTAR AND MASONRY

GROUT
 D. Prism Tests: Test masonry and mortar panels for compressive strength in accordance with
ASTM C1314, and for flexural bond strength in accordance with ASTM C1072 or ASTM
E518/E518M; perform tests and evaluate results as specified in individual masonry sections.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 0511 - 5 MORTAR AND MASONRY

GROUT
 SECTION 04 2000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete block.
B. Concrete building brick.
C. Concrete facing brick.
D. Clay facing brick.
E. Common brick.
F. Hollow brick.
G. Sand-lime face brick.
H. Mortar and grout.
I. Reinforcement and anchorage.
J. Flashings.
K. Lintels.
L. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
B. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.
C. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.
D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
B. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2016.
C. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a (Reapproved 2014).
D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
E. ASTM A951/A951M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement;
2016.
F. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
G. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction;
2012.
H. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2017.
I. ASTM C62 - Standard Specification for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2017.
J. ASTM C67/C67M - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile; 2018.
K. ASTM C73 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Brick (Sand-Lime Brick); 2017.
L. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2016a.
M. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 1 UNIT MASONRY

 N. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2017.
O. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
and Related Units; 2017a.
P. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2017a.
Q. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay
or Shale); 2017a.
R. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry
Units; 2016.
S. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2017.
T. ASTM C1072 - Standard Test Method for Measurement of Masonry Flexural Bond Strength;
2013, with Editorial Revision (2014).
U. ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
1992a (Reapproved 2014).
V. ASTM C1283 - Standard Practice for Installing Clay Flue Lining; 2015.
W. ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2016.
X. ASTM C1634 - Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick; 2017.
Y. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing; 2017.
Z. ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane; 2015.
AA. ASTM E11 - Standard Specification for Woven Wire Test Sieve Cloth and Test Sieves; 2017.
AB. ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry; 2014a.
AC. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance – Design and Detailing; 2017.
AD. BIA Technical Notes No. 13 - Ceramic Glazed Brick Exterior Walls; 2017.
AE. BIA Technical Notes No. 28B - Brick Veneer/Steel Stud Walls; 2005.
AF. BIA Technical Notes No. 46 - Maintenance of Brick Masonry; 2017.
AG. ICC-ES AC380 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite Physical Barrier Systems; 2014, with Editorial
Revision (2017).
AH. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
AI. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and
masonry accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories for brickwork support system.
1. Include calculations or selections from the manufacturer's prescriptive design tables that
indicate compliance with the applicable building code and project conditions.
2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.
D. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and
extremes of color range.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 2 UNIT MASONRY

 F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has certified
masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in the
manufacture of concrete block.
G. Test Reports: Concrete masonry manufacturer's test reports for units with integral water
repellent admixture.
H. Designer's Qualification Statement.
I. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
J. Installer's Qualification Statement.
K. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Pre-Faced Units: 50 of each type, size, and color combination.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract
Documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Comply with applicable code for UL (FRD) Assembly No. ____.
C. Designer Qualifications: Perform design under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is
located.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 2.4 m long by 1.8 m high; include mortar,
accessories, structural backup, and flashings (with lap joint, corner, and end dam) in mock-up.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 400 by 200 mm and nominal depths
as indicated on drawings for specific locations.
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
a. Provide bullnose units for outside corners.
3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
c. Pattern: Vertical single score.
4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Lightweight.
5. Pre-Faced Units: ASTM C90, hollow block, with smooth resinous facing complying with
ASTM C744.
a. Colors and styles: As indicated on drawings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 3 UNIT MASONRY

 6. Units with Integral Water Repellent: Concrete block units as specified in this section with
polymeric liquid admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of manufacture.
a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent:
1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514/E514M and for a minimum of
72 hours.
(a) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
(b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.05 L per hour at
the end of 24 hours.
(c) No more than 25 percent of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of
test.
2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1072; minimum 10 percent increase.
3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5 percent decrease.
4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5 percent increase in shrinkage.
b. Use only in combination with mortar that also has integral water repellent admixture.
c. Use water repellent admixtures for masonry units and mortar by a single
manufacturer.
7. Standard Units with Factory-Installed Insulation Inserts: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 400 by 200 mm and nominal
depth of 200 mm.
b. Insulation Type: Manufacturer's standard expanded polystyrene (XPS).
c. Pattern: Vertical single score.
d. Exposed Faces: Color and texture to be selected from manufacturer's standard
range.
8. Special Units with Factory-Installed Insulation Inserts: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Type: Special shape without end webs; with continuous horizontal insulation inserts.
b. Insulation Type: Manufacturer's standard expanded polystyrene (XPS).
c. Size: Nominal face dimensions of 400 mm by 100 mm) and nominal depths as
indicated on drawings for specific locations.
d. Exposed Faces: Color and texture to be selected from manufacturer's standard
range.
B. Concrete Brick:
1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C55; lightweight, solid, for interior or concealed use.
3. Concrete Facing Brick: ASTM C1634; solid, lightweight; for architectural, paver, and
below grade use.
a. Exposed Faces: Color and texture to be selected from manufacturer's standard
range.
2.02 BRICK UNITS
A. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS Smooth, Grade SW.
1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.
2. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units
can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.
4. Compressive strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.
B. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units.
1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Compressive strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.
C. Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW; Type HBS; Class H40V.
1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.
2. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 4 UNIT MASONRY

 3. Compressive strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.
D. Sand-Lime Brick: ASTM C73, Grade SW.
1. Nominal size: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 0511.
B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type N.
1. Colored Mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 2000; size as indicated on drawings;
galvanized finish.
B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is
involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M.
1. Type: Truss or ladder.
2. Material: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class
3.
3. Size: 3.8 mm side rods with 3.8 mm cross rods; width as required to provide not less than
16 mm of mortar coverage on each exposure.
D. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M.
1. Type: Truss.
2. Material: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class
3.
3. Size: 3.8 mm side rods with 3.8 mm cross rods; width as required to provide not less than
16 mm of mortar coverage on each exposure.
E. Adjustable Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M.
F. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes, 38 mm width, 2.7 mm thick, 610 mm length, with 38 mm
long, 90 degree bend at each end to form a U or Z shape or with cross pins, hot dip galvanized
to ASTM A153/A153M, Class B.
G. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and
building frame, sized to provide not less than 16 mm of mortar coverage from masonry face.
1. Concrete frame: Dovetail anchors of bent steel strap, nominal 25 mm width x 0.61 mm
thick, with trapezoidal wire ties 4.75 mm thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
2. Steel frame: Crimped wire anchors for welding to frame, 6.3 mm thick, with trapezoidal
wire ties 4.75 mm thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
H. Residential Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 22 mm wide by 1.22 mm thick, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to extend at least 38 mm into the veneer
with at least 16 mm of mortar coverage from masonry face.
I. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 4.8 mm thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not less than 16 mm of mortar
coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 32 mm.
J. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry
veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
1. Anchor plates: Not less than 1.91 mm thick, designed for fastening to structural backup
through sheathing by two fasteners; provide design with legs that penetrate sheathing and
insulation to provide positive anchorage.
2. Wire ties: Manufacturer's standard shape, 4.75 mm thick.
3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 89 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 5 UNIT MASONRY

 4. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on end of wire ties to engage or enclose not
less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 3.8 mm diameter.
K. Metal-to-Metal Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; corrosion resistant finish or hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M.
2.05 FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashing Materials:
1. Copper Flashing: ASTM B370, 060 soft annealed; 0.7 mm thick; natural finish.
2. Stainless Steel Flashing: ASTM A666, Type 304, soft temper; 0.48 mm thick; finish 2B to
2D.
3. Prefabricated Metal Flashing: Smooth fabricated 3.66 kg/sq m copper flashing for surface
mounted conditions.
B. Combination Non-Asphaltic Flashing Materials - Copper:
1. Copper/Polymer Film or Fabric Flashing: 0.915 kg/sq m copper sheet laminated between
two sheets of polymer or fiberglass fiber-reinforced film.
2. Copper/Polymer Fabric Drainage Plane Flashing System : 0.915 kg/sq m copper sheet
bonded with rubber-based adhesive between one sheet of polymer fabric and one sheet
of non-woven drainage material.
C. Combination Non-Asphaltic Flashing Materials - Stainless Steel:
1. Stainless Steel Flashing - Self-adhering: ASTM A240/A240M; 0.05 mm type 304 stainless
steel sheet with 0.20 mm of butyl adhesive and a removable release liner.
2. Stainless Steel/Polymer Fabric Flashing: ASTM A240/A240M;.05 mm type 304 stainless
steel sheet bonded on one side to one sheet of polymer fabric.
3. Stainless Steel/Polymer Fabric Drainage Plane Flashing: ASTM A240/A240M;.05 mm
type 304 stainless steel sheet bonded between one sheet of polymer fabric and one sheet
of non-woven drainage material.
D. Membrane Asphaltic Flashing Materials:
1. Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering polymer modified asphalt sheet; 1.0 mm
minimum total thickness; 0.20 mm cross-laminated polyethylene bonded to adhesive
rubberized asphalt, with a removable release liner.
E. Membrane Non-Asphaltic Flashing Materials:
1. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I, 1.0 mm thick.
F. Factory-Fabricated Flashing Corners and End Dams: Stainless steel.
G. Drip Edge: Stainless steel; angled drip with hemmed edge; compatible with membrane and
adhesives.
H. Lap Sealants and Tapes: As recommended by flashing manufacturer; compatible with
membrane and adhesives.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; in
maximum lengths available.
C. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of
wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents
and allow proper cavity drainage.
1. Full-Height Airspace Maintenance and Drainage Material: Mesh panels, fitted between
masonry ties.
D. Building Paper: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt.
E. Nailing Strips: Softwood lumber, preservative treated; as specified in Section 06 1000.
F. Weeps:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 6 UNIT MASONRY

 1. Type: Polyester mesh.
2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Manufacturers:
G. Cavity Vents:
1. Type: Preformed aluminum vents with sloping louvers.
2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
H. Termite-Excluding Weep and Vent:
1. Type: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) vent body with stainless-steel mesh closure.
2. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
3. Stainless Steel Mesh: ASTM E11 ; opening size 0.44 mm, maximum.
I. Drainage Fabric: Polyester or polypropylene mesh bonded to a water and vapor-permeable
fabric.
J. Chimney Cap: Precast concrete, sized to cover chimney construction plus additional overhang
for drip on four sides, thickness as indicated, sloped from flue opening to edges for natural
drainage.
K. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.07 LINTELS
A. Precast Concrete Lintels: ________ type, ____by____ mm size, ____ MPa strength at 28
days.
B. Prefabricated Steel Lintels:
C. Brickwork Support System: Offset steel relief angles or lintels with hanger brackets for support
of brickwork above horizontal masonry joints and openings to allow insulation to span
continuously behind brick and eliminate continuous thermal bridges associated with support
systems that interrupt continuous insulation.
1. Configuration: Relief angle or lintel with welded hanger brackets anchored to structure.
2. Sizes: Component and anchor sizes and spacing to be determined by manufacturer from
calculations or prescriptive design tables to suit project loading conditions and cavity width
indicated on drawings.
3. Anchorage: Wedge type expansion bolts in concrete or grout-filled CMU backup.
4. Materials: Steel, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M, class B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable building code, whichever is more
stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 7 UNIT MASONRY

 1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
D. Brick Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
E. Clay Tile Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
E. Remove excess mortar with water repellent admixture promptly. Do not use acids,
sandblasting or high pressure cleaning methods.
F. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
G. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
H. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
I. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
J. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as
indicated.
K. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
L. Lay clay tile flue linings vertically, embedded in concrete block units.
1. Install in accordance with ASTM C1283.
2. Extend above chimney cladding 203 mm.
3. Trowel mortar smooth over chimney cladding and slope for positive drainage.
M. Place precast chimney cap atop chimney masonry; mortar into place; seal to protruding flue.
3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A. Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 600 mm on center horizontally on top of through-wall
flashing above shelf angles and lintels and at bottom of walls.
B. Install cavity vents in veneer and cavity walls at 800 mm on center horizontally below shelf
angles and lintels and near top of walls.
3.07 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL
A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
B. For cavity walls, build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to accommodate accessories.
C. Install cavity mortar control panels continuously throughout full height of exterior masonry
cavities during construction of exterior wythe, complying with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
1. Verify that airspace width is no more than 9 mm greater than panel thickness.
2. Hold cavity mortar control panel tight to face wythe.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 8 UNIT MASONRY

 3. Install horizontally between joint reinforcement.
4. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows.
5. Fit to perimeter construction and penetrations without voids.
D. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended
by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.
3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL, SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY, AND CAVITY
WALL MASONRY
A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal
joint reinforcement 400 mm on center.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 400 mm each side of opening.
C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Embed longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement in mortar joint with at least 16 mm mortar cover
on each side.
E. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 150 mm.
F. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 400 mm on
center.
G. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Unless
otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall type, space
anchors at maximum of 900 mm horizontally and 600 mm vertically.
H. Embed ties and anchors in mortar joint and extend into masonry unit a minimum of 38 mm with
at least 16 mm mortar cover to the outside face of the anchor.
3.09 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER
A. Masonry Back-Up: Embed anchors to bond veneer at maximum 400 mm on center vertically
and 900 mm on center horizontally. Place additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends
of panels, so maximum spacing of anchors is 200 mm on center.
B. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry
veneer at maximum 400 mm on center vertically and 600 mm on center horizontally. Place
additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of
anchors is 200 mm on center.
C. Seismic Reinforcement: Connect veneer anchors with continuous horizontal wire reinforcement
before embedding anchors in mortar.
3.10 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - MULTIPLE WYTHE UNIT MASONRY
A. Use individual metal ties installed in horizontal joints to bond wythes together. Provide ties
spaced as indicated on drawings.
B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 13 mm of
dimensioned position.
3.11 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 152 mm, minimum, into
adjacent masonry or turn up flashing ends at least 25.4 mm, minimum, to form watertight
pan at non-masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
B. Terminate flashing up 203 mm minimum on vertical surface of backing:
1. Install vertical leg of flashing behind water-resistive barrier sheet over backing.
2. Install vertical leg of flashing over fluid-applied or self-adhered air/vapor barriers over
backing or per manufacturer’s directions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 9 UNIT MASONRY

 3. Terminate vertical leg of flashing into bed joint in masonry or reglet in concrete.
4. Anchor vertical leg of flashing into backing with a termination bar and sealant.
5. Apply cap bead of sealant on top edge of self-adhered flashing.
C. Install flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and BIA Technical Notes No. 7.
D. Extend metal flashings to within 12 mm of exterior face of masonry and adhere to top of
stainless steel angled drip with hemmed edge.
E. Support flexible flashings across gaps and openings.
F. Extend plastic, laminated, and EPDM flashings to within 12 mm of exterior face of masonry and
adhere to top of stainless steel angled drip with hemmed edge.
G. Lap end joints of flashings at least 152 mm, minimum, and seal watertight with flashing
sealant/adhesive.
3.12 LINTELS
A. Install precast concrete lintels over openings.
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are
not scheduled.
1. Openings to 1070 mm: Place two, M9 reinforcing bars 25 mm from bottom web.
2. Openings from 1070 mm to 1980 mm: Place two, M16 reinforcing bars 25 mm from
bottom web.
3. Openings over 1980 mm: Reinforce openings as detailed.
4. Do not splice reinforcing bars.
5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 13 mm of
dimensioned position.
6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
C. Maintain minimum ____ mm bearing on each side of opening.
D. Install thermal brick support system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at locations
indicated on drawings
3.13 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Reinforce bond beams with 2, M____ bars, 25 mm from bottom web.
B. Reinforce columns with ____, M____ bars, placed ________.
C. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
D. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 13 mm of
dimensioned position.
E. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
F. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 300 mm either side of
opening.
3.14 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Form expansion joint as detailed on drawings.
3.15 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and glazed frames and other items to be
built into the work and furnished under other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with grout.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 10 UNIT MASONRY

 D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.16 TOLERANCES
A. Install masonry within the site tolerances found in TMS 402/602.
B. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 6 mm.
C. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1.6 mm.
D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 6 mm/3 m and 13 mm/6 m or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story non-cumulative; 13 mm in two stories or more.
F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 3 mm/m and 6 mm/3 m; 13 mm/9 m.
G. Maximum Variation of Mortar Joint Thickness: Head joint, minus 6.4 mm, plus 9.5 mm.
H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 6 mm.
3.17 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,
and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.18 PARGING
3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. Clay Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of clay masonry in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M requirements, sampling 5 randomly chosen units for each 50,000 installed.
C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with
ASTM C140/C140M for compliance with requirements of this specification.
D. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780, testing with same
frequency as masonry samples.
3.20 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
3.21 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2000 - 11 UNIT MASONRY

 SECTION 04 2300
GLASS UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass masonry units.
B. Setting and pointing materials.
C. Perimeter treatment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 0511 - Mortar and Masonry Grout: Mortar for glass unit masonry.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between glass unit masonry and adjacent
construction.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
B. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
C. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.
D. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for glass units and accessories.
C. Samples: Submit two glass units and two curved units illustrating color, design, and face
pattern.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, positioning of
reinforcement, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Glass Units: Ten of each type, size, and pattern combination.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing [] with minimum [] years of []
experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct []mock-up, [] long by 4 m high; include glass units with head, jamb, and sill
conditions, and perimeter chase and construction.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept glass units on site on pallets; inspect for damage.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2300 - 1 GLASS UNIT MASONRY

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS UNITS
A. Solid Glass Units: Made of one piece of glass with joint key to assist mortar bond.
1. Applications: Bathrooms and Private Rooms, as indicated on Drawings.
2. Provide specially shaped units where indicated, including corners, curved units, and end
units.
3. Nominal Size: 600 x 150 x 100 mm.
4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range
5. Pattern and Design: [].
6. Compressive Strength: 2.8-4.1 MPa.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Panel Reinforcement: Steel, galvanized after fabrication in accordance with requirements of
ASTM A123/A123M:
1. Side Rods: Two 4.76 mm diameter rods spaced 50.8 mm apart.
2. Cross Rods: 1.8 mm diameter rods welded 203.2 mm on center.
B. Expansion Strips: Dense glass fiber matting, 11 mm by 100 mm nominal size.
C. Panel Anchors: Steel strips, at least 0.91 mm thick by 44 mm wide; punched with three rows of
elongated holes, pattern staggered, hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
D. Perimeter Channel: Extruded aluminum channel profile, 120 mm by 32 mm by 3 mm size, one
piece per length installed, uncoated finish.
E. Asphalt Emulsion: Water based.
2.03 MORTAR AND POINTING MATERIAL
A. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type M using the Proportion specification as specified in Section 04
0511.
B. Pointing Mortar: ASTM C270, Type M using the Proportion specification with maximum 2
percent ammonium stearate or calcium stearate per cement weight, with beach sand
aggregate.
C. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.04 MORTAR MIXING
A. Mix mortar ingredients in accordance with Section 04 0511.
B. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed for
immediate use.
C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and
coloration.
2.05 MIX TESTS
A. Testing of Mortar Mix: In accordance with ASTM C780 for compressive strength, consistency,
mortar aggregate ratio, water content, air content, and splitting tensile strength.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean glass units of substances that may impair bond with mortar or sealant.
B. Establish and protect lines, levels, and coursing.
C. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage and disfigurement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2300 - 2 GLASS UNIT MASONRY

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Erect glass units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Pointing With Mortar:
1. Before mortar sets, rake out joints to depth of 16 to 19 mm.
2. Fill joints with pointing mortar; press into joint to eliminate voids; neatly tool surface to a
concave profile.
3. Remove excess pointing mortar.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2300 - 3 GLASS UNIT MASONRY

 SECTION 04 2723
CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete block.
B. Concrete building brick.
C. Concrete facing brick.
D. Clay facing brick.
E. Common brick
F. Hollow brick.
G. Mortar and grout.
H. Reinforcement and anchorage.
I. Flashings.
J. Lintels.
K. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Nailing strips built into masonry.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing control and expansion joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
B. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a (Reapproved 2014).
C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
D. ASTM A951/A951M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire for Masonry Joint Reinforcement;
2016.
E. ASTM A1064/A1064M - Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire
Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete; 2017.
F. ASTM B370 - Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction;
2012.
G. ASTM C55 - Standard Specification for Concrete Building Brick; 2017.
H. ASTM C67/C67M - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay
Tile; 2018.
I. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2016a.
J. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
K. ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2017.
L. ASTM C140/C140M - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
and Related Units; 2017a.
M. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
N. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006
(Reapproved 2011).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 1 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 O. ASTM C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or
Shale); 2017a.
P. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.
Q. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2011.
R. ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2018.
S. ASTM C652 - Standard Specification for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made From Clay
or Shale); 2017a.
T. ASTM C744 - Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry
Units; 2016.
U. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2017.
V. ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2016.
W. ASTM C1634 - Standard Specification for Concrete Facing Brick; 2017.
X. ASTM D226/D226M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing; 2017.
Y. BIA Technical Notes No. 7 - Water Penetration Resistance – Design and Detailing; 2017.
Z. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
AA. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, and mortar.
C. Samples: Submit four samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and
extremes of color range.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with provisions of TMS 402/602, except where exceeded by requirements of Contract
Documents.
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a masonry cavity wall as a mock-up panel sized 2.4 m long by 1.8 m high; include
mortar and accessories, reinforcement, flashings, and wall insulation in mock-up.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage and
contamination by other materials.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 2 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 B. Handle and store ceramic glazed masonry units in protective cartons or trays. Do not remove
from protective packaging until ready for installation.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 UNIT MASONRY - GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable code for ___________ requirements for fire rated masonry
construction.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 400 by 200 mm and nominal depth
of 200 mm.
2. Special Shapes: Provide non-standard blocks configured for corners.
3. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
c. Pattern: Vertical single score.
4. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Lightweight.
5. Pre-Faced Units: ASTM C90, hollow block, with smooth resinous facing complying with
ASTM C744.
a. Colors and styles: As indicated on drawings.
B. Concrete Brick:
1. Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C55; lightweight, solid, for interior or concealed use.
3. Concrete Facing Brick: ASTM C1634; solid, lightweight; for architectural, paver, and
below grade use.
a. Exposed Faces: Color and texture to be selected from manufacturer's standard
range.
2.03 BRICK UNITS
A. Manufacturers:
B. Facing Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.
2. Nominal Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Special Shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units
can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.
4. Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.
C. Building (Common) Brick: ASTM C62, Grade SW; solid units.
1. Nominal Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.
D. Hollow Facing and Building Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW; Type HBS; Class H40V.
1. Color and texture to match Architect's sample.
2. Actual Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 3 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M Type N.
1. Colored Mortar: Premixed cement as required to match Architect's color sample.
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I; color as required to produce approved color
sample.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
E. Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
F. Water: Clean and potable.
G. Accelerating Admixture: Nonchloride type for use in cold weather.
H. Moisture-Resistant Admixture: Water repellent compound designed to reduce capillarity.
2.05 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 03 2000; size as indicated on drawings;
galvanized finish.
B. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is
involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M.
1. Type: Truss.
2. Material: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, mill galvanized to ASTM A641/A641M, Class
3.
3. Size: 3.8 mm side rods with 3.8 mm cross rods; width as required to provide not less than
16 mm of mortar coverage on each exposure.
D. Adjustable Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A951/A951M.
1. Type: Truss, with adjustable ties or tabs spaced at 406 mm on center.
2. Material: ASTM A1064/A1064M steel wire, hot dip galvanized after fabrication to ASTM
A153/A153M, Class B.
3. Size: 4.8 mm side rods with 3.8 mm cross rods and adjustable components of 4.8
mmwire, width of components as required to provide not less than 16 mm of mortar
coverage from each masonry face.
4. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 50 mm.
5. Seismic Feature: Provide lip, hook, or clip on extended leg of wall ties to engage or
enclose not less than one continuous horizontal joint reinforcement wire of 3.8 mm
diameter.
6. Insulation Clips: Provide clips at tabs or ties designed to secure insulation against outer
face of inner wythe of masonry.
E. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shapes configured as required for specific situations, 32 mm width,
2.7 mm thick, lengths as required to provide not more than 25 mm and not less than 13 mm of
mortar coverage from masonry face, corrugated for embedment in masonry joint, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
F. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry and
building frame, sized to provide not more than 25 mm and not less than 13 mm of mortar
coverage from masonry face.
1. Concrete frame: Dovetail anchors of bent steel strap, nominal 25 mm width x 0.61 mm
thick, with trapezoidal wire ties 4.75 mm thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
2. Steel frame: Crimped wire anchors for welding to frame, 6.3 mm thick, with trapezoidal
wire ties 4.75 mm thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 4 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 G. Residential Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 22 mm wide by 1.22 mm thick, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to extend at least 38 mm into the veneer
with at least 16 mm of mortar coverage from masonry face.
H. Two-Piece Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, 4.8 mm thick, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip
galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not less than 16 mm of mortar
coverage from masonry face and to allow vertical adjustment of up to 32 mm.
2.06 FLASHINGS
A. Metal Flashing Materials:
1. Copper Flashing: ASTM B370, 060 soft annealed; 0.7 mm thick; natural finish.
2. Stainless Steel Flashing: ASTM A666, Type 304, soft temper; 0.48 mm thick; finish 2B to
2D.
3. Prefabricated Metal Flashing: Smooth fabricated 3.66 kg/sq m copper flashing for surface
mounted conditions.
B. Membrane Non-Asphaltic Flashing Materials:
1. EPDM Flashing: ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I, 1.0 mm thick.
C. Factory-Fabricated Flashing Corners and Ends: Stainless steel.
D. Flashing Sealant/Adhesives: Silicone, polyurethane, or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane,
or other type required or recommended by flashing manufacturer; type capable of adhering to
type of flashing used.
1. Manufacturers: Modified Polyether Products:
E. Drip Edge: Stainless steel; angled drip with hemmed edge; compatible with membrane and
adhesives.
F. Lap Sealants and Tapes: As recommended by flashing manufacturer; compatible with
membrane and adhesives.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories, fused
joints.
B. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;
in maximum lengths available.
C. Building Paper: ASTM D226/D226M, Type I ("No. 15") asphalt felt.
D. Nailing Strips: Softwood lumber, preservative treated; as specified in Section 06 1000.
E. Weeps:
1. Type: Polyester mesh.
2. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
F. Cavity Vents:
1. Type: Preformed aluminum vents with sloping louvers.
2. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
G. Drainage Fabric: Polyester or polypropylene mesh bonded to a water and vapor-permeable
fabric.
H. Cavity Mortar Control: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh panels, sized to thickness of
wall cavity, and designed to prevent mortar droppings from clogging weeps and cavity vents
and allow proper cavity drainage.
1. Full-Height Airspace Maintenance and Drainage Material: Polymer mesh panels attached
to rigid insulation of type indicated, for fitting between masonry ties to loosely fill masonry
cavity.
I. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 5 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

2.08 LINTELS
A. Precast Concrete Lintels: ________ type, _____ mm by _____ mm size, ____ MPa strength at
28 days.
2.09 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth; Type S.
2. Exterior, loadbearing masonry; Type N.
3. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry; Type N.
4. Interior, loadbearing masonry; Type N.
5. Interior, non-loadbearing masonry; Type O.
B. Colored Mortar: Proportion selected pigments and other ingredients to match Architect's
sample, without exceeding manufacturer's recommended pigment-to-cement ratio.
C. Grout: ASTM C476; consistency required to fill indicated volumes completely for grouting; fine
grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 50 mm or less; coarse grout for spaces
with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 50 mm.
D. Mixing: Use mechanical batch mixer and comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable building code, whichever is more
stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
D. Brick Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 200 mm.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other
work.
B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
C. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
D. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 6 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 E. Interlock intersections and external corners, except for units laid in stack bond.
F. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must
be made, remove mortar and replace.
G. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
H. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
I. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint as
indicated.
J. Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or
decks with compressible joint filler.
3.06 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A. Install weeps in cavity walls at 600 mm on center horizontally above through-wall flashing,
above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
B. Install cavity vents in cavity walls at 800 mm on center horizontally below shelf angles and
lintels and at top of walls.
3.07 CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION
A. Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity as recommended by manufacturer to prevent
mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.
C. Install cavity mortar control panels continuously throughout full height of exterior masonry
cavities during construction of exterior wythe, complying with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
1. Verify that airspace width is no more than 9 mm greater than panel thickness.
2. Hold cavity mortar control panel tight to face wythe.
3. Install horizontally between joint reinforcement.
4. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows.
5. Fit to perimeter construction and penetrations without voids.
D. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive accessories.
3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES - CAVITY WALL MASONRY
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 400 mm on center.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 400 mm each side of openings.
C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Embed longitudinal wires of joint reinforcement in mortar joint with at least 16 mm mortar cover
on each side.
E. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 150 mm.
F. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid. Space
anchors at maximum of 600 mm horizontally and 400 mm vertically.
G. Embed ties and anchors in mortar joint and extend into masonry unit a minimum of 38 mm with
at least 16 mm mortar cover to the outside face of the anchor.
H. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 400 mm on
center.
3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 7 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 1. Extend flashings full width at such interruptions and at least 152 mm, minimum, into
adjacent masonry or turn up at least 25.4 mm, minimum, to form watertight pan at non-
masonry construction.
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashings.
3. Seal lapped ends and penetrations of flashing before covering with mortar.
B. Terminate flashing up 203 mm minimum on vertical surface of backing:
1. Install vertical leg of flashing behind water-resistive barrier sheet over backing.
2. Install vertical leg of flashing over fluid-applied or self-adhered air/vapor barriers over
backing or per manufacturer’s directions.
3. Terminate vertical leg of flashing into bed joint in masonry or reglet in concrete.
4. Anchor vertical leg of flashing into backing with a termination bar and sealant.
5. Apply cap bead of sealant on top edge of self-adhered flashing.
C. Install flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and BIA Technical Notes No. 7.
D. Extend metal flashings through exterior face of masonry and terminate in an angled drip with
hemmed edge. Install joint sealer below drip edge to prevent moisture migration under flashing.
E. Support flexible flashings across gaps and openings.
F. Extend plastic, laminated, EPDM, and ______ flashings to within 12 mm of exterior face of
masonry and adhere to top of stainless steel angled drip with hemmed edge.
G. Lap end joints of flashings at least 152 mm, minimum, and seal watertight with flashing
sealant/adhesive.
3.10 LINTELS
A. Install precast concrete lintels over openings.
B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are
not scheduled.
1. Openings to 1070 mm: Place two, M9 reinforcing bars 25 mm from bottom web.
2. Openings from 1070 mm to 1980 mm: Place two, M16 reinforcing bars 25 mm from
bottom web.
3. Openings over 1980 mm: Reinforce openings as detailed.
4. Do not splice reinforcing bars.
5. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 13 mm of
dimensioned position.
6. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
7. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
C. Maintain minimum ____ mm bearing on each side of opening.
3.11 GROUTED COMPONENTS
A. Lap splices minimum 24 bar diameters.
B. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 13 mm of
dimensioned position.
C. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
3.12 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control or expansion joints.
B. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Size control joints as indicated on drawings; if not indicated, 19 mm wide and deep.
D. Form expansion joint as detailed on drawings.
3.13 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work
and furnished under other sections.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 8 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with grout.
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 300 mm from framed openings.
D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.14 TOLERANCES
A. Install masonry within the site tolerances found in TMS 402/602.
B. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: 6 mm.
C. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1.6 mm.
D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 6 mm/3 m and 13 mm/6 m or more.
E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story non-cumulative; 13 mm in two stories or more.
F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 3 mm/m and 6 mm/3 m; 13 mm/9 m.
G. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 3 mm/m.
H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 6 mm.
3.15 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape,
and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.16 PARGING
A. Dampen masonry walls prior to parging.
B. Scarify each parging coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.
C. Parge masonry walls in two uniform coats of mortar to a total thickness of 19 mm.
D. Steel trowel surface smooth and flat with a maximum surface variation of 1 mm/m.
E. Strike top edge of parging at 45 degrees.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000.
B. Clay Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of clay masonry in accordance with ASTM
C67/C67M requirements, sampling 5 randomly chosen units for each 50,000 installed.
C. Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: Test each variety of concrete unit masonry in accordance with
ASTM C140/C140M for compliance with requirements of this specification.
D. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with recommended procedures in ASTM
C780, testing with same frequency as masonry samples.
3.18 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.19 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 2723 - 9 CAVITY WALL UNIT MASONRY

 SECTION 04 4200
EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cut limestone veneer at exterior and interior walls.
B. Metal anchors and supports.
C. Sealing exterior joints.
D. Pointing interior joints.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel framing members supporting stone.
B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Shelf angles and supports.
C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings at copings, lintels, and sills.
D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing perimeter and expansion joints in interior stone work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A240/A240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications; 2016.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
C. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2014a.
D. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.
E. ASTM C1248 - Standard Test Method for Staining of Porous Substrate by Joint Sealants; 2008
(Reapproved 2012).
F. ASTM C1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid-
Applied Sealants; 2002 (Reapproved 2013).
G. ILI (HB) - Indiana Limestone Handbook; 2007.
H. MIA (DSDM) - Dimensional Stone Design Manual, Version VIII; 2016.
I. NBGQA (SPEC) - Specifications for Architectural Granite, Version 18-1; 2018.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on stone, mortar products, and sealant products.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, pertinent dimensions, anchorages, head, jamb, and sill
opening details, and jointing methods.
D. Samples: Submit two stone samples [] in size, illustrating color range and texture, markings,
surface finish.
E. Samples: Submit mortar color samples.
F. Installation Instructions: Submit stone fabricator's installation instructions and field erection or
setting drawings; indicate panel identifying marks and locations on setting drawings.
G. Designer's Qualification Statement.
H. Stone Fabricator's Qualification Statement.
I. Installer's Qualification Statement.
J. Warranty Documentation for Installation of Building Rainscreen Assembly: Submit installer
warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with
installer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 4200 - 1 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design anchors and supports under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer,
registered in the State in which the Project is located.
1. Design anchors to resist positive and negative wind pressures and other loads as required
by applicable code.
2. Design anchor attachment to stone with a factor of safety of 5:1.
3. Design each individual anchor with a factor of safety in the vertical dead-load-bearing
direction of 4:1 and in the horizontal lateral-load-bearing direction of 2:1.
B. Perform work in accordance with ILI Indiana Limestone Handbook.
C. Perform work in accordance with NBGQA (SPEC).
D. Perform work in accordance with MIA Dimensional Stone Design Manual.
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
F. Stone Fabricator: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten years of
documented experience.
G. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section approved
by stone fabricator.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample Submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic
effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store stone panels vertically on edge, resting weight on panel edge.
B. Protect stone from discoloration.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover
stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STONE
A. Refer to Drawing No. A6.01 for Details of Exterior Stone Cladding
B. Limestone: Complying with ASTM C568/C568M Classification III - High Density.
1. Grade: ILI Standard.
2. Color: Buff.
3. Grain Direction: Vertical.
4. Surface Texture: Roughback.
2.02 MORTAR
A. Mortar: ASTM C270, Type N, Proportion specification, using Portland cement of white color.
B. Mortar: As specified in Section 04 0511.
C. Mortar Color Additive: Mineral oxide pigment of color as selected.
2.03 ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors and Other Components in Contact with Stone: Stainless steel, ASTM A666, Type 304.
1. Sizes and configurations: As required for vertical and horizontal support of stone and
applicable loads.
2. Wire ties are not permitted.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 4200 - 2 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

 B. Support Components not in Contact with Stone: Stainless steel, ASTM A240/A240M, Type
304.
C. Setting Buttons and Shims: Lead type.
D. Flashings: Specified in Section 07 6200.
E. Weep/Cavity Vents: Preformed plastic tubes.
F. Joint Filler: Closed cell foam; [] size.
G. Bond Breaker: 10 mil (0.25 mm) thick plastic sheet.
H. Joint Sealant: ASTM C920 silicone sealant with movement capability of at least plus/minus 25
percent and non-staining to stone when tested in accordance with ASTM C1248.
I. Joint Backer Rod: ASTM C1330 open cell polyurethane of size 40 to 50 percent larger in
diameter than joint width.
J. Back Coating: Bituminous.
2.04 STONE FABRICATION
A. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
B. Panel Size: As indicated on drawings.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: In accordance with NBGQA (SPEC).
D. Fabricate units for uniform coloration between adjacent units and over the full area of the
installation.
E. Where corner detail is not indicated, form external corners to quirk joint profile.
F. Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for natural wash.
G. Cut drip slot in bottom surface of work projecting more than 13 mm over wall openings. Size
slot not less than 10 mm wide and 6 mm deep; full width of projection.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
B. Verify that items built-in under other sections are properly located and sized.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that will mark or damage
exposed surfaces.
B. Coat back surfaces with back coating. Allow coating to cure.
3.03 INSTALLING BACKUP STRUCTURE
A. Installing Steel Trussed, Strongback Frames and Miscellaneous Steel Framing
1. Maintain erection of backup structure within tolerances in AISC 303.
2. Install be welding to steel weld-plates anchored in concrete, bolting to inserts cast into
concrete or bolting to structural-steel frame.
3. Clean weld, bolted connections, and abraded areas immediately after erection.
a. Repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780/A780M.
b. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.
B. Installing Metal-Grid Systems: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions to provide
integrated system that combines metal struts, fittings, fasteners, and stone anchors.
1. Fasten struts by bolting to inserts in concrete or steel angle clips bolted to steel framing.
2. Fasten stone supports and anchors by bolting to struts
3. Shim and adjust struts and stone supports and anchors to provide grid that is level, plumb,
and true to line with no variation in plane or alignment exceeding 1.5 mm and no variation
in position exceeding 3 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 4200 - 3 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

3.04 SETTING STONE CLADDING, GENERAL
A. Before setting stone, clean surfaces that are dirty or stained by removing soil, stains, and
foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching
with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compound that contain no caustic or harsh materials or
abrasives.
B. Coat limestone with Dampproofing to extent indicated below:
1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 300 mm above finish-grade
elevations.
2. Stone Extending Below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces below
grade.
3. Allow dampproofing to cure before setting dampproofed stone. Do not damage or remove
dampproofing while handling and setting stone.
C. Execute stone cladding installation by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at
Project site to do necessary field cutting as stone is set.
1. User power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Produce lines cut straight and true,
with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
D. Contiguous Work: Provide reveals, reglets, and openings as required to accommodate
contiguous work.
E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other
attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone cladding in place. Shim and adjust
anchors, supports, and accessories to set stone accurately in locations indicated, with uniform
joints of widths indicated, and with edges and faces aligned according to established
relationships and inidicated tolerances.
F. Install concealed flashing at continuous shelf angles, linters, ledges, and similar obstructions to
downward flow of water, to divert water to building exterior. Extend flashing 150 mm at ends
and turn up not less than 50 mm to form end dams.
G. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated betwwen back of stone units and backup
wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout.
3.05 SETTING MECHANICALLY ANCHORED STONE CLADDING
A. Set stone cladding with mechanical anchors without mortar unless othewise indicated.
B. Attach anchors securely to stone and to backup surfaces. Comply with recommendations in
ASTM C1242.
C. Provide compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing
of dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with sealant
indicated for filling kerfs.
D. Set stone supported on clips or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use materials of
thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths and to prevent point loading of stone on
anchors. Hold shims back from face of stone a distance at least equual to width of joints.
3.06 SETTING STONE CLADDING WITH MORTAR
A. Set stone cladding with mortar and mechanical anchors where indicated.
B. Set stone in full bed of mortar with head joints filled unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fill space between back of stone units and backup wall solidly with mortar or grout.
D. Embed ends of sills in mortar; leave remainder of joint open until final pointing.
E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 12 mm. Rake joints to uniform
depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
F. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles.
Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply first layers
of pointing mortar in layers not more than 10 mm until a uniform depth is formed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 4200 - 4 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

 G. Point stone joints by placing pointing mortar in layers not more than 10 mm. Compact each
layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.
H. Tool joints with a round jointer having a diameter 3 mm larger than width of joint, when pointing
mortar is thumbprint hard.
I. Rake out mortar from sealant-pointed joints to depths required for sealant and sealant backing,
but not less than 12 mm. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides.
3.07 JOINT-SEALANT INTALLATION
A. Prepare joints and apply sealants of type and at location indicated to comply with applicable
requirements in Section 07 9200.
3.08 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Positioning of Elements: Maximum 6 mm from true position.
B. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 6 mm in 3 m; 13 mm in 15 m.
C. Maximum Variation Between Face Plane of Adjacent Panels: 1.5 mm.
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 6 mm per story non-cumulative; 13 mm in any two stories.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 3 mm/m; 6 mm in 3 m; 13 mm maximum.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 3 mm/m.
3.09 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item not so indicated on drawings.
B. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone work by cutting.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove excess joint material upon completion of work.
B. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
C. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 04 4200 - 5 EXTERIOR STONE CLADDING

 SECTION 05 1200
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Structural steel framing members.
B. Structural steel support members, suspension cables, sag rods, and struts.
C. Base plates, shear stud connectors and expansion joint plates.
D. Grouting under base plates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 3100 - Steel Decking: Support framing for small openings in deck.
B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.
C. Section 07 8100 - Applied Fireproofing: Fireproof protection to framing and metal deck systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; 2017.
B. AISC 303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2016.
C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
E. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold Finished; 2013.
F. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
G. ASTM A242/A242M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel; 2013
(Reapproved 2018).
H. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2014 (Editorial 2017).
I. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2013.
J. ASTM A501/A501M - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing; 2014.
K. ASTM A514/A514M - Standard Specification for High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and Tempered
Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding; 2014.
L. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of
Structural Quality; 2014.
M. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2015.
N. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric); 2007
(Reapproved 2013).
O. ASTM A572/A572M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel; 2015.
P. ASTM A992/A992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2011 (Reapproved
2015).
Q. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 1200 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

 R. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength; 2017.
S. ASTM C827/C827M - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical
Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures; 2016.
T. ASTM E94 - Standard Guide for Radiographic Examination; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).
U. ASTM E164 - Standard Practice for Contact Ultrasonic Testing of Weldments; 2013.
V. ASTM E165/E165M - Standard Test Method for Liquid Penetrant Examination for General
Industry; 2012.
W. ASTM E709 - Standard Guide for Magnetic Particle Testing; 2015.
X. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and
Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile
Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions; 2015a.
Y. ASTM F436/F436M - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric
Dimensions; 2016.
Z. ASTM F959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators
for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2013.
AA. ASTM F1554 - Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield
Strength; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2017).
AB. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2012.
AC. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).
AD. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
2017.
AE. RCSC (HSBOLT) - Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts; Research
Council on Structural Connections; 2014, with Errata (2015).
AF. SSPC-SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; 1982, with Editorial Revision (2004).
AG. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, openings, attachments,
and fasteners.
2. Connections not detailed.
3. Indicate cambers and loads.
4. Indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
C. Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Mill Test Reports: Indicate structural strength, destructive test analysis and non-destructive test
analysis.
E. Fabricator Test Reports: Comply with ASTM A1011/A1011M.
F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
G. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is
accredited under IAS AC172.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC (MAN) "Steel Construction
Manual."

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 1200 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

 B. Structural steel members designated as architecturally-exposed structural steel (AESS) to also
comply with Section 05 1213.
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five
years of documented experience.
E. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance
with IAS AC172.
F. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years
of documented experience.
G. Design connections not detailed on the drawings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the Kingdom of
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL (FRD) Assembly Design No. ____.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel W Shapes and Tees: ASTM A992/A992M.
C. Rolled Steel Structural Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M.
D. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A242/A242M high-strength, corrosion-resistant
structural steel.
E. Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A529/A529M high-strength, carbon-manganese
structural steel, Grade 50.
F. Steel Plates and Bars: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50 (345) high-strength, columbium-
vanadium steel.
G. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B.
H. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M, seamless or welded.
I. Steel Bars: ASTM A108 Grade _____.
J. Steel Plate: ASTM A514/A514M.
K. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM
A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled.
L. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Finish black.
M. Shear Stud Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.
N. Suspension Cable: ________ wire rope.
O. Sag Rods: ASTM A36/A36M.
P. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized in compliance
with ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.
Q. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM F3125/F3125M, Type 1, with
matching compatible ASTM A563 or ASTM A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M washers.
R. Tension Control Bolts: Twist-off type; ASTM F3125/F3125M.
S. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, plain, with matching ASTM A563 or ASTM
A563M nuts and ASTM F436/F436M Type 1 washers.
T. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM A307, Grade C, plain.
U. Load Indicator Washers: Provide washers complying with ASTM F959 at connections requiring
high-strength bolts.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 1200 - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

 V. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
W. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non-shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic
aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 13.7 MPa.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 48 MPa.
3. Height Change, Plastic State; when tested according to ASTM C827/C827M:
a. Maximum: Plus 4 percent.
b. Minimum: Plus 1 percent.
X. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
Y. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate to greatest extent possible.
B. Space shear stud connectors at [] on center.
C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Grind exposed welds smooth.
D. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.
E. Develop required camber for members.
2.04 FINISH
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.
B. Shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime surfaces that will be fireproofed, field
welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide shop testing and analysis of structural steel.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance
with RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at
least ____ percent of bolts at each connection.
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test at least ____
percent of welds using one of the following:
1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94.
2. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164.
3. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165/E165M.
4. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may
properly proceed.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC 303.
B. Allow for erection loads, and provide sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure in safe
condition, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of
permanent bracing.
C. Field weld components and shear studs indicated on shop drawings.
D. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise
specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with RCSC
(HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts".
E. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Dar Al Riyadh.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 1200 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

 F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in
contact with concrete.
G. Grout solidly between column plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45
degrees.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 6 mm per story, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 6 mm.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections in accordance
with RCSC (HSBOLT) "Specification for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Bolts", testing at
least ____ percent of bolts at each connection.
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test at least ____
percent of welds using one of the following:
1. Radiographic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E94.
2. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E164.
3. Liquid penetrant inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E165/E165M.
4. Magnetic particle inspection performed in accordance with ASTM E709.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 1200 - 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

 SECTION 05 3100
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Acoustical roof deck.
B. Roof deck.
C. Composite floor deck.
D. Cellular floor deck.
E. Cellular floor deck electrical raceway system.
F. Metal form deck.
G. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 450 mm.
H. Bearing plates and angles.
I. Stud shear connectors.
J. Acoustical insulation in roof deck flutes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete topping over metal deck.
C. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Support framing for openings larger than 450 mm
and shear stud connectors.
D. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Placement of embedded steel anchors for bearing
plates in cast-in-place concrete.
E. Section 07 8100 - Applied Fireproofing: Spray applied fireproofing.
F. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Electrical, telephone, and
________________ floor outlets, sleeves, and gaskets.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
B. ASTM A510/A510M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and
Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel; 2013.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
D. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel;
2015.
E. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).
F. AWS D1.3/D1.3M - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 2018.
G. IAS AC172 - Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel;
2017.
H. ICC-ES AC43 - Acceptance Criteria for Steel Deck Roof and Floor Systems; 2016.
I. ICC-ES AC70 - Acceptance Criteria for Fasteners Power Driven into Concrete, Steel and
Masonry Elements; 2016.
J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K. SDI (DM) - Publication No.30, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof
Decks; 2007.
L. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 1999 (Ed. 2004).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 3100 - 1 STEEL DECKING

 M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.
2004).
N. UL 209 - Cellular Metal Floor Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Cellular Floor Deck Electrical Raceway System: Coordinate the work with other trades to
provide electrical service fittings compatible with the raceway system to be installed.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,
pertinent details, and accessories.
1. Cellular Floor Deck Electrical Raceway System: Include insert spacing and height and
trench header duct layout.
C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and
finishes.
1. Cellular Floor Deck Electrical Raceway System: Include conductor and cable fill
capacities.
D. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
F. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
G. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is
accredited under IAS AC172.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International
Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel in accordance
with IAS AC172.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum five years of experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL DECK
A. All Deck Types: Select and design metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.
1. Calculate to structural working stress design and structural properties specified.
2. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Floor Deck: 1/360 of span.
3. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Roof Deck: 1/240 of span.
4. Maximum Vertical Deflection of Form Deck: 1/360 of span.
5. Maximum Lateral Deflection of Diaphragms: 1/500 of the height of the wall.
B. Acoustical Roof Deck: Non-composite type, steel sheet with plain vertical flute faces perforated
with 3 mm diameter holes staggered 10 mm on center:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 3100 - 2 STEEL DECKING

 2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and
phosphatized substrate.
3. Structural Properties:
a. Section modulus: ______.
b. Span Design: Double.
4. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.76 mm.
5. Nominal Height: 38 mm.
6. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.
7. Formed Sheet Width: 600 mm.
8. Side Joints: Lapped, welded.
9. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
10. Fire Resistance Classification: Comply with UL (FRD) Assembly Number ____.
C. Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and
phosphatized substrate.
3. Structural Properties:
a. Section Modulus: ______.
b. Span Design: Double.
4. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.76 mm.
5. Nominal Height: 38 mm.
6. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.
7. Formed Sheet Width: 600 mm.
8. Side Joints: Lock seam.
9. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
10. Fire Resistance Classification: Comply with UL (FRD) Assembly Number ____.
D. Composite Floor Deck: Fluted steel sheet embossed to interlock with concrete:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and
phosphatized substrate.
3. Structural Properties:
a. Section modulus: ______.
b. Shear stress resistance (deck and shear studs): ____ MPa.
4. Span Design: Double.
5. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.76 mm.
6. Nominal Height: 38 mm.
7. Profile: Fluted; SDI NR.
8. Formed Sheet Width: 600 mm.
9. Side Joints: Lock seam.
10. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
11. Fire Resistance Classification: Comply with UL (FRD) Assembly Number ____.
E. Cellular Floor Deck: Composite floor deck equipped with bottom flat sheet.
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and
phosphatized substrate.
3. Structural Properties:
a. Section modulus: ______.
b. Shear stress resistance (deck and shear studs): ____ MPa.
4. Span Design: Multiple.
5. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.76 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 3100 - 3 STEEL DECKING

 6. Nominal Height: 38 mm.
7. Formed Sheet Width: 600 mm.
8. Side Joints: Lapped, welded.
9. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
10. Fire Resistance Classification: Comply with UL (FRD) Assembly Number ____.
F. Cellular Floor Deck Electrical Raceway System: Composite floor deck with bottom flat sheet
suitable for use as NFPA 70 cellular metal floor raceway and listed as complying with UL 209.
Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete duct
system.
1. Cellular Floor Deck:
a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230,
with G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
b. Structural Properties:
1) Section modulus: ______.
2) Shear stress resistance (deck and shear studs): ____ MPa.
c. Span Design: Multiple.
d. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.91 mm.
e. Nominal Height: 51 mm.
f. Formed Sheet Width: 600 mm.
g. Side Joints: Lapped, welded.
h. End Joints: Butt, taped.
i. Fire Resistance Classification: Comply with UL (FRD) Assembly Number ____.
j. Minimum Compartment Size:
1) Power: _____ square mm, minimum.
2) Communications: _____ square mm, minimum.
3) __________: _____ square mm, minimum.
k. Preset Inserts: Suitable to accommodate specified electrical service fittings.
1) Height: Selected according to depth of concrete cover.
2) Spacing: 610 mm.
3) Furnish with removable cap recessed to hold concrete.
2. Trench Header Duct:
a. Description: Steel duct with corrosion-resistant coating, designed for installation flush
with concrete floor surface; furnished with removable gasketed covers for lay-in
installation of wires and cables.
b. Size: _____ by _____ mm.
c. Compartment Size: Equivalent to compartment sizes of connected raceway.
d. Cover Plates: Minimum 6.4 mm thick steel, furnished with trim suitable for flooring to
be installed.
3. Service Fittings: Compatible with raceway system to be installed with all components,
adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
G. Metal Form Deck: Corrugated sheet steel, with provision for ventilation of concrete:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and
phosphatized substrate.
3. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: ___ mm.
4. Nominal Height: ____ mm.
5. Formed Sheet Width: 600 mm.
6. Side Joints: Lapped, welded.
7. End Joints: Lapped, welded.
8. Bridging Profile: ___ by ___ mm size below pan elevation to permit continuous
reinforcement bar placement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 3100 - 4 STEEL DECKING

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Bearing Plates and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M steel, galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M.
B. Stud Shear Connectors: Made from ASTM A108 Grade 1015 bars.
C. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
D. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.
E. Powder Actuated Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; with knurled shank and forged ballistic point.
Comply with applicable requirements of ICC-ES AC70.
1. Design Requirements: Provide number and type of fasteners that comply with the
applicable requirements of SDI (DM) design method for roof deck and floor deck
applications and ICC-ES AC43.
2. Material: Steel; ASTM A510/A510M, Grade 1077.
a. Hardness: Rockwell C 54.5, minimum.
b. Tensile Strength: 1965 MPa, minimum.
c. Shear Strength: 1205 MPa, minimum.
d. Washers:
1) Steel Bar Joist Framing Applications: 12 mm diameter, minimum.
2) Exposed Roof Deck Applications: 15 mm diameter, minimum.
e. Corrosion Resistance:
1) Steel Bar Joist Framing Applications: ASTM B633, SC1, Type III zinc
electroplate..
2) Exposed Roof Deck Applications: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless
steel sealing caps with bonded neoprene washer over each fastener.
F. Mechanical Fasteners: Steel; hex washer head, self-drilling, self-tapping.
1. Design Requirements for Sidelap Connections: Provide number and type of fasteners that
comply with the applicable requirements of SDI (DM)SDI design method for roof deck and
floor deck applications and ICC-ES AC43.
2. Fasteners for Steel Roof Decks Protected with Waterproofing Membrane: ASTM B633,
SC1, Type III zinc electroplate.
3. Fasteners for Exposed Steel Roof Deck Application: Manufacturer's standard stainless
steel with bonded neoprene washer.
G. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 19 mm outside diameter, 3 mm thick.
H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 25 mm thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.
K. Acoustical Insulation: Glass fiber type, minimum 18 kg/cu m density; profiled to suit deck.
2.03 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 0.76
mm thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.
B. Cant Strips: Formed sheet steel, ___ mm minimum thickness, 45 degree slope, 87.5 mm
nominal width and height, flange for attachment.
C. Roof Sump Pans: Formed sheet steel, 1.90 mm minimum thickness, flat bottom, sloped sides,
recessed 38 mm below roof deck surface, bearing flange 75 mm wide, sealed watertight.
D. Floor Drain Pans: Formed sheet steel, 1.90 mm minimum thickness, flat bottom, sloped sides,
recessed 38 mm below floor deck surface, bearing flange 75 mm wide, sealed watertight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 3100 - 5 STEEL DECKING

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align
and level.
B. On concrete and masonry surfaces provide minimum 100 mm bearing.
C. On steel supports provide minimum 38 mm bearing.
D. At cellular deck intended for electrical raceways level and align deck within 3 mm horizontally
and vertically. Butt ends, allow for maximum 3 mm gap. Install sheet steel covers over gaps
wider than 3 mm. Tape and seal joints watertight.
E. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 300 mm on center
maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods specified.
1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.
2. Place and secure special deep fluted sections for integral concrete bridging.
F. Clinch lock seam side laps.
G. At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 600 mm on center maximum.
H. Drive mechanical sidelap connectors completely through adjacent lapped sheets; positively
engage adjacent sheets with minimum three-thread penetration.
I. At welded male/female side laps weld at 450 mm on center maximum.
J. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3/D1.3M.
K. At deck openings from 150 mm to 450 mm in size, provide 50 by 50 by 6 mm steel angle
reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each
side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.
L. At deck openings greater than 450 mm in size, provide steel angle reinforcement. as specified
in Section 05 1200.
M. Where deck (other than cellular deck electrical raceway) changes direction, install 150 mm
minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same thickness as deck. Fusion weld 300 mm on
center maximum.
N. At floor edges, install concrete stops upturned to top surface of slab, to contain wet concrete.
Provide stops of sufficient strength to remain stationary without distortion.
O. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and
angle flashings to close openings.
P. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam
cell closures.
Q. Place metal cant strips in position and fusion weld.
R. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck
flute.
S. Position floor drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck
flute.
T. Weld stud shear connectors through steel deck to structural members below.
U. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned
areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 3100 - 6 STEEL DECKING

 SECTION 05 5000
METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Decorative metal wall panels at interior openings.
2. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
4. Metal ladders.
5. Ladder safety cages.
6. Metal downspout boots.
7. Loose bearing and levelling plates for applications where they are not specified in
other Sections.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are
not specified in other Sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe
sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into
concrete.
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other
items built into unit masonry.
3. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing."
4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."
5. Division 05 Section "Decorative Metal Railings."
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
B. Structural Performance of Alternating Tread Devices: Alternating tread devices shall
withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ICC's International Building Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.
2. Prefabricated building columns.
3. Metal nosings and treads.
4. Paint products.
5. Grout.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
E. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 1 METAL FABRICATIONS
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with
paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and
topcoats are compatible with one another.
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into
concrete. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to
be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
2.02 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A
36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Rolled-Stainless-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 793.
F. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive granules rolled into surface or with
abrasive material metallically bonded to steel.
G. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.
H. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
I. Cast Iron: Either grey iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.03 NONFERROUS METALS
A. Aluminium Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6.
B. Aluminium Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T6.
C. Aluminium-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
D. Aluminium Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
2.04 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior
use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M,
Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminium.
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);
with hex nuts, ASTM A 563M; and, where indicated, flat washers.
C. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,
ASTM F 738M; with hex nuts, ASTM F 836M; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy
Group 2 (A4).
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 2 METAL FABRICATIONS

 E. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times
the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when
installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a
qualified independent testing agency.
F. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A
27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized
per ASTM F 2329.
G. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich
primer.
D. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous
grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 3 METAL FABRICATIONS

 I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 3.2 by 38 mm, with a minimum 150-mm
embedment and 50-mm hook, not less than 200 mm from ends and corners of units
and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
2.08 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 19-mm bolts, spaced not more than
150 mm from ends and 600 mm o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint
approximately 50 mm larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry
and concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete.
2.09 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space side rails 406 mm apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Side rails: Continuous, 9.5-by-64-mm steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 19-mm diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centreline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminium-
oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung
filled with aluminium-oxide grout.
6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material
metallically bonded to rung.
7. Support each ladder with welded or bolted steel brackets.
8. Galvanize ladders, including brackets and fasteners.
9. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A. General:
1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or
with stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 6 m
o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 1200 mm o.c.
between primary hoops.
3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or
with stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 4 METAL FABRICATIONS

 1. Primary Hoops: 6.4-by-100-mm flat bar hoops.
2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 6.4-by-50-mm flat bar hoops.
3. Vertical Bars: 4.8-by-38-mm flat bars secured to each hoop.
4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.
5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
2.11 METAL FLOOR PLATE
A. Fabricate from rolled-stainless-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:
1. Thickness: As indicated.
B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from pressure-locked stainless steel bar
grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 12 mm in least dimension.
C. Provide stainless-steel angle supports as indicated.
D. Include stainless-steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
E. Provide flush stainless-steel bar drop handles for lifting removable sections, one at each
end of each section.
2.12 STRUCTURAL-STEEL DOOR FRAMES
A. Fabricate structural-steel door frames from steel shapes, plates, and bars of size and to
dimensions indicated, fully welded together, with 16-by-38-mm steel channel stops, unless
otherwise indicated. Plug-weld built-up members and continuously weld exposed joints.
Secure removable stops to frame with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced at
not more than 250 mm o.c. Reinforce frames and drill and tap as necessary to accept finish
hardware.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for securing door frames into
adjoining concrete or masonry.
B. Extend bottom of frames to floor elevation indicated with steel angle clips welded to frames
for anchoring frame to floor with expansion shields and bolts.
C. Galvanize steel frames.
D. Prime steel frames with zinc-rich primer.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles
shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Mitre corners and use
concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cut-outs, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and
installation with other work.
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or
masonry construction.
C. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
2.14 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS, TREADS AND THRESHOLDS
A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminium, with an integral-abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of
aluminium oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
1. Nosings: Cross-hatched units, 100 mm wide with 6-mm lip, for casting into concrete
steps.
2. Treads: Cross-hatched units, full depth of tread with 19-by-19-mm nosing, for
application over bent plate treads or existing stairs.
3. Thresholds: Fluted-saddle-type units, 125 mm wide by 12 mm high, with tapered
edges.
B. Extruded Units: Aluminium, with abrasive filler consisting of aluminium oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder. Fabricate units in lengths
necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions.
1. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1.5 mm above aluminium
extrusion.
2. Nosings: Square-back units, 48 mm wide, for casting into concrete steps.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 5 METAL FABRICATIONS

 3. Treads: Square-back units, full depth of tread with 35-mm lip, for application over
existing stairs.
C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
D. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.
E. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units.
2.15 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS
A. Provide downspout boots made from cast iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and
shape to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor
bolts.
1. Outlet: Vertical, to discharge into pipe.
B. Prime cast iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer.
2.16 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths
for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a
single unit where indicated.
2.17 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.18 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.19 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint
adhesion.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on
fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated
below:
1. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
2.20 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminium
Association for designating aluminium finishes.
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).
C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as
fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I,
clear coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 6 METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation;
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that
are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size
limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so
no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of
adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded
fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws,
wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminium that will come into contact
with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminium: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2. Extruded Aluminium: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.02 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure
girders with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through
top plates of pipe columns.
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete
or masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Levelling Plates" Article.
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout
column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Levelling Plates" Article.
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and
levelled.
3.03 INSTALLING NOSINGS, TREADS, AND THRESHOLDS
A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and
level with tread surfaces.
C. Seal thresholds exposed to exterior with elastomeric sealant complying with Division 07
Section "Joint Sealants" to provide a watertight installation.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 0.05-mm dry film thickness.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 7 METAL FABRICATIONS

 B. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05 5000

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 5000 - 8 METAL FABRICATIONS

 SECTION 05 7300
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Railing and guardrail assemblies.
B. Wall-mounted handrails.
C. Free-standing railings at steps.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).
C. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating
Appendix); 2017a.
D. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
E. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.
F. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.
G. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2014a.
H. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.
I. ASTM E488/E488M - Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete Elements;
2015.
J. ASTM E935 - Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems
and Rails for Buildings; 2013, with Editorial Revision.
K. AWS C 3.4/C3.4M - Specification for Torch Brazing; 2007.
L. AWS C3.5M/C 3.5 - Specification for Induction Brazing; 2007.
M. AWS C3.9M/C3.9 - Specification for Resistance Brazing; 2009.
N. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).
O. AWS D1.6 - Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel; 1999.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data including description of materials,
components, finishes, fabrication details, glass, anchors, and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate railing system elevations and sections, details of profile, dimensions,
sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.
Indicate anchor and joint locations, brazed connections, transitions, and terminations.
D. Test Reports: Submit test reports from an independent testing agency showing compliance with
specified design and performance requirements.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing glazed railing systems and
acceptable to manufacturer.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7300 - 1 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

 B. Mock-ups: Construct a railing of each type specified. Locate mock-ups where directed.
Mockups may remain as part of the work.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver railing materials in factory provided protective coverings and packaging.
B. Protect railing materials against damage during transit, delivery, storage, and installation at site.
C. Inspect railing materials upon delivery for damage. Repair damage to be indistinguishable from
undamaged areas; if damage cannot be repaired to be indistinguishable from undamaged parts
and finishes, replace damaged items.
D. Prior to installation, store materials and components under cover, in a dry location.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install railings until project is enclosed and ambient temperature of space is minimum
18.3 degrees C (65 degrees F) and maximum 35 degrees C (95 degrees F).
B. Maintain ambient temperature of space at minimum 18.3 degrees C (65 degrees F) and
maximum 35 degrees C (95 degrees F) for 24 hours before, during, and after railing installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard one year warranty against defects in materials, fabrication,
finishes, and installation commencing on Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RAILING SYSTEMS
A. Railings - General: Factory- or shop-fabricated in design indicated, to suit specific project
conditions, and for proper connection to building structure, and in largest practical sizes for
delivery to site.
1. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate railings and anchorages to resist the following loads
without failure, damage, or permanent set; loads do not need to be applied
simultaneously.
a. Lateral Force: 333 N (75 lb) minimum, at any point, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E935.
b. Distributed Load: 0.73 kN per m (50 pounds per foot) minimum, applied in any
direction at the top of the handrail, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935.
c. Concentrated Loads on Intermediate Rails: 0.22 per sq m (50 pounds per square ft),
minimum.
d. Concentrated Load: 888 N (200 pounds) minimum, applied in any direction at any
point along the handrail system, when tested in accordance with ASTM E935.
2. Assembly: Join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts
using slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.
3. Joints: Tightly fitted and secured, machined smooth with hairline seams.
4. Field Connections: Provide sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.
5. Welded and Brazed Joints: Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline; use
methods that avoid discoloration and damage of finish; grind smooth, polish, and restore
to required finish.
a. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
b. Welded Joints:
1) Carbon Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D 1.1/D1.1M.
2) Stainless Steel: Perform welding in accordance with AWS D 1.6.
c. Brass/Bronze Brazed Joints:
1) Perform torch brazing in accordance with AWS C3.4/3.4M.
2) Perform induction brazing in accordance with AWS C3.5/3.5M.
3) Perform resistance brazing in accordance with AWS C3.9/3.9M
B. Base Mount Railing System: Engineered, base supported railing system with structural glass.
1. Top Cap: 25 by 38 mm (1 by 1-1/2 inch) stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7300 - 2 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

 2. Base Shoe, Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063 T5 alloy; 64 mm (2-1/2 inch) wide by 105 mm
(4-1/8 inch) high, rectangular profile, natural anodized finish.
3. Base Cladding:
a. Material: 1.27 mm (18 gage, (0.05 inch)) stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish.
4. Glass: As specified in this section.
5. Fasteners:
a. Attachment to Concrete:
1) Provide anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times
the load imposed when installed in concrete, tested in accordance with ASTM
E488.
2) Provide 305 mm (12 inch) center-to-center hole spacing; 13 by 102 mm (1/2 by
4 inch) concrete anchors.
b. Attachment to Steel: Provide 610 mm (24 inch) center-to-center hole spacing; 13 mm
(1/2 inch), stainless steel, socket head cap screws for drilled and tapped or drilled
and bolted attachment.
C. Post Railing System: Engineered, post supported railing system with glass infill panels.
1. Top Cap: Round, stainless steel, 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) diameter.
2. Posts: Round, stainless steel, 51 mm (2 inch).
3. Fins:
a. Configuration: As indicated.
b. Material: As indicated.
c. Finish: As indicated.
d. Mounting: As indicated.
4. Glass: As specified in this section.
5. Glass Mounts: Pressure clamps/infill mounts, same metal as railing.
6. Handrail Brackets: Same metal as railing.
7. Stainless Steel Finish, Exposed Surfaces: No. 4 satin finish.
D. Wall-Mounted Handrail:
1. 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) diameter stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish.
2. Internal Connection Sleeves: Sleeve, material compatible with handrail and top cap
material.
3. Handrail Brackets: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel brackets.
a. Mounting: Glass.
b. Finish: No. 4 satin finish.
E. Metal Infill Panels: 3.18 mm (11 gage, (0.125 inch)) perforated stainless steel; 6.3 mm (1/4
inch) diameter holes on 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) staggered centers, 40 percent open area.
F. Metal Infill Panels: 51 mm x 51 mm (2 inch x 2 inch) welded wire mesh, steel, electrocoated
and powder coated to AAMA 2604.
G. Metal Infill Panels: Vertical pickets, 19 mm (0.75 inch) IPS, aluminum, natural anodized finish.
H. Metal Infill Panel: Perforated steel, 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) holes, electrocoated and powder coated
AAMA 2604 finish.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Components: ASTM B221/B221M.
1. Natural Anodized Finish: Class I, AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating with
electrolytically deposited organic seal; not less than 0.018 mm (0.7 mils) thick.
B. Stainless Steel Components:
1. ASTM A666, Type 304.
2. Stainless Steel Tubing: 1.59 mm (16 gage (0.0625 inch)), 38 mm (1-1/2 inch) diameter.
3. Stainless Steel Finish: No. 4 Satin.
C. Glass: Laminated safety glass; ASTM C 1172, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Plastic Interlayer: Minimum 1.52 mm (0.060 inch) thick.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7300 - 3 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

 2. Impact Strength: Category II, tested in accordance with 16 CFR 1201.
3. Thickness: 12 mm.
4. Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
5. Edges: Ground smooth and polished.
6. Color: Clear, no tint.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings for Stainless Steel Railings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron
castings, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no
bolts or screw fasteners.
B. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; joints and seams
ground smooth.
C. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and other materials as required to attach to structure,
made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed
fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.
1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete for bolting anchors.
2. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry for bolting
anchors.
3. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates for bolting anchors.
4. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.
D. Hydraulic Expansion Cement: ASTM C1107/C1107M.
E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, noncorrosive compound free of asbestos,
sulfur, and other deleterious impurities; 0.4 mm (0.015 inch) dry film thickness per coat..
F. Sealant: Silicone; black.
G. Finish Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by manufacturer for field application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate and site conditions are acceptable and ready to receive work.
B. Verify field dimensions of locations and areas to receive work.
C. Notify Architect immediately of conditions that would prevent satisfactory installation.
D. Do not proceed with work until detrimental conditions have been corrected.
E. Furnish components to be installed in other work to installer of that other work, including but not
limited to blocking, sleeves, inserts, anchor bolts, embedded plates and supports for
attachment of anchors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Review installation drawings before beginning installation. Coordinate diagrams, templates,
instructions and directions for installation of anchorages and fasteners.
B. Clean surfaces to receive units. Remove materials and substances detrimental to the
installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's drawings and written instructions.
B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects and with
tight joints, except where necessary for expansion.
C. Anchor securely to structure.
D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush
countersunk fastenings.
E. Isolate dissimilar materials with bituminous coating, bushings, grommets or washers to prevent
electrolytic corrosion.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7300 - 4 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 6 mm (1/4 inch) per floor level, non-cumulative.
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 6 mm (1/4 inch).
C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 6 mm (1/4 inch).
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Services: Provide the services of the manufacturer for field observation of installation of
railings.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective film from exposed metal surfaces.
B. Metal: Clean exposed metal finishes with potable water and mild detergent, in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations; do not use abrasive materials or chemicals, detergents or
other substances that may damage the material or finish.
C. Glass and Glazing: Clean glazing surfaces; remove excess glazing sealant compounds, dirt,
and other substances.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components and finishes from damage after installation.
B. Repair damage to exposed finishes to be indistinguishable from undamaged areas.
1. If damage to finishes and components cannot be repaired to be indistinguishable from
undamaged finishes and components, replace damaged items.
END OF SECTION

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7300 - 5 DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

 SECTION 05 7313
GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Glass- and plastic-supported railings.

2. Post-supported railings with glass infill.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" or wood blocking for anchoring railings.

2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided
floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.3 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint
and coating manufacturers' written instructions to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are
compatible.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project
site in time for installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.

2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails,
posts, and balusters.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 1 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 2. Each type of glass required.
3. Fittings and brackets.
4. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top
rail, post, handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections.
Samples need not be full height.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel products certifying that products

furnished comply with requirements.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified

testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.

D. Preconstruction test reports.

E. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.
1. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill
area, and anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 600
mm in length.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction

testing on laboratory mockups. Payment for these services will be made by Contractor.
Retesting of products that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's
expense.

1. Build laboratory mockups at testing agency facility; use personnel, materials, and
methods of construction that will be used at Project site.
2. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory mockups
will be tested.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 2 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for

system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods, including structural
analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and
are based on the specific system indicated. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements," to design railings, including attachment to building construction.

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable

design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate
tensile strength divided by 1.95.
2. Copper Alloys: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
3. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
4. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.
5. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as
listed in "Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12,
"Structural Properties of Glass."

C. Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:

1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:

a. Uniform load of 0.73 kN/m applied in any direction.

b. Concentrated load of 0.89 kN applied in any direction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 3 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

2. Infill of Guards:

a. Concentrated load of 0.22 kN applied horizontally on an area of 0.093 sq. m.

b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

3. Glass-Supported Railings: Support each section of top rail by a minimum of three glass
panels or by other means so top rail will remain in place if any one panel fails.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on exterior railings by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 67 deg C, ambient; 100 deg C, material surfaces.

2.3 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.

2.4 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher
for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each
aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes, Including Extruded Tubing: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Round Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

1. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe unless otherwise indicated.

D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210M, Alloy 6063-T832.

E. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247M, Alloy 6061-T6.

G. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.5 COPPER ALLOYS

A. Copper and Copper Alloys, General: Provide alloys indicated and with temper to suit application
and forming methods, but with strength and stiffness not less than Temper H01 (quarter hard)
for plate, sheet, strip, and bars and Temper H55 (light drawn) for tube and pipe.

B. Extruded Shapes, Bronze: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS C38500 (architectural bronze).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 4 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 C. Extruded Shapes, Brass: ASTM B 249/B 249M, Alloy UNS C36000 (free-cutting brass).

D. Extruded Shapes, Nickel Silver: ASTM B 249/B 249M, Alloy UNS C79600.

E. Seamless Pipe, Bronze: ASTM B 43, Alloy UNS C23000 (red brass, 85 percent copper).

F. Seamless Tube, Bronze: ASTM B 135M, Alloy UNS C23000 (red brass, 85 percent copper).

G. Seamless Tube, Brass: ASTM B 135M, Alloy UNS C26000 (cartridge brass, 70 percent
copper).

H. Seamless Tube, Copper: ASTM B 75/B 75M, Alloy UNS C12200 (phosphorous deoxidized, high
residual phosphorous copper).

I. Castings, Bronze: Composition bronze castings complying with ASTM B 62, Alloy UNS C83600
(85-5-5-5 or No. 1 composition commercial red brass) or sand castings complying with
ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS C86500 (No. 1 manganese bronze)].

J. Castings, Brass: Sand castings complying with ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS C85200 (high-copper
yellow brass).

K. Castings, Copper: ASTM B 824, with a minimum of 99.9 percent copper.

L. Castings, Nickel Silver: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS C97300 (12 percent leaded nickel silver).

M. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Bronze: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS C28000 (muntz metal, 60
percent copper).

N. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Brass: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS C26000 (cartridge brass, 70
percent copper).

O. Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars; Copper: ASTM B 152/B 152M, Alloy UNS C11000 (electrolytic
tough pitch copper) or Alloy UNS C12200 (phosphorous deoxidized, high-residual phosphorous
copper).

2.6 STAINLESS STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316.

B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316.

C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8M or CF 3M.

D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 316.

E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

B. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 5 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
2.8 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1
(transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and
edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to
16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Glass Color: Clear.

2. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads, but not less
than 12.0 mm.
3. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than 16.0
mm.

C. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, Condition A (uncoated), Type I (transparent flat glass),
Quality-Q3 with two plies of glass and polyvinyl butyral interlayer not less than 1.52 mm thick.

1. Kind: LT (laminated tempered).

2. Glass Color: Clear.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear.
4. Interlayer Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
5. Glass Plies for Structural Glass Balusters: Thickness required by structural loads, but not
less than 8.0 mm thick each.
6. Glass Plies for Glass Infill Panels: 5.0 mm thick each.
7. Glass Plies for Glass Infill Panels: Thickness required by structural loads, but not less
than [5.0 mm each.

D. Ceramic-Coated Glass: Heat-treated float glass, Condition C; with ceramic enamel applied by
silk-screened process; complying with Specification No. 95-1-31 in GANA's "Engineering
Standards Manual" and with other requirements specified.

1. Glass Color: Clear.

2. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.

E. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another
certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall
indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which
glass complies.

F. Plastic Structural Glazing: Uncoated, transparent, monolithic acrylic sheet complying with
ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 or A-2 (cell cast or continuous cast), Finish 1 (smooth or polished),
and as follows:

1. Color: Colorless (clear) .

2. Thickness: 12.0 mm.

G. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims,
and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing
structural glazing in metal subrails.

1. Glazing Cement: Nonshrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an electric
current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as standard with manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 6 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 H. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended
or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings.

2.9 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.
2. Dissimilar Metals: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to
other work unless exposed fasteners are the standard fastening method for railings indicated.

1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the
design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2
(A4) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Wood Rails: Clear, straight-grained hardwood rails secured to recessed metal subrail.

1. Species: Walnut.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Profile: As indicated.

B. Wood Rails: Hardwood rails complying with Section 064300 "Wood Stairs and Railings."

C. Lacquer for Copper Alloys: Clear acrylic lacquer specially developed for coating copper-alloy
products.

D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 7 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 G. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion
cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching,
and grouting compound.

1. Water-Resistant Product: [At exterior locations] [and] [where indicated] provide

formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by
a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

2.11 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage[, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1 mm unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed
surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.

F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

G. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.

H. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member.

I. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

J. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.

K. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work where indicated.

1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-
resistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 8 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 L. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

M. For railing posts set in concrete, provide stainless-steel sleeves not less than 150 mm long with
inside dimensions not less than 13 mm greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal
plate forming bottom closure.

2.12 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on
glazing panels.

1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with
slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

B. Structural Glass Balusters: Factory-bond glass to aluminum base and top-rail channels in railing
manufacturer's plant using glazing cement to comply with manufacturer's written
specifications, unless field glazing is standard with manufacturer.

C. Structural Balusters: Provide laminated, tempered glass panels[ for both straight and curved
sections.

D. Structural Balusters: Provide thermoformed, curved, plastic glazing panels for curved sections
and laminated, tempered glass panels for straight sections.

E. Infill Panels: Provide laminated, tempered glass panels[ for both straight and curved sections].

2.13 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,

temporary protective covering before shipment.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-
half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.

C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.

2.14 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Mechanical Finish: AA-M3x; sand top rails, handrails, and intermediate rails in one direction
only, parallel to length of railing, with 120- and 320-grit abrasive. After installation, polish railings
with No. 0 steel wool immersed in paste wax, then rub to a luster with a soft dry cloth.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31,
Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 9 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-
M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.

D. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of
0.04 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605
and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.15 COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES

A. Finish designations for copper alloys comply with the system for designating copper-alloy finish
systems defined in NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products."

B. Buffed Finish: M21 (Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth specular).

C. Hand-Rubbed Finish: M31-M34 (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, fine satin; Mechanical
Finish: directionally textured, hand rubbed).

D. Medium-Satin Finish: M32 (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, medium satin).

E. Fine-Matte Finish: M42 (Mechanical Finish: nondirectional finish, fine matte).

F. Buffed Finish, Lacquered: M21-O6x (Mechanical Finish: buffed, smooth specular; Coating:
clear, organic, air dried, as specified below).

1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in two
coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of
0.025 mm.

G. Hand-Rubbed Finish, Lacquered: M31-M34-O6x (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, fine

satin; Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, hand rubbed; Coating: clear, organic, air dried,
as specified below).

1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in two
coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of
0.025 mm.

H. Medium-Satin Finish, Lacquered: M32-O6x (Mechanical Finish: directionally textured, medium

satin; Coating: clear, organic, air dried, as specified below).

1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in two
coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of
0.025 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 10 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 I. Fine-Matte Finish, Lacquered: M42-O6x (Mechanical Finish: nondirectional finish, fine matte;
Coating: clear, organic, air dried, as specified below).

1. Clear, Organic Coating: Lacquer specified for copper alloys, applied by air spray in two
coats per manufacturer's written instructions, with interim drying, to a total thickness of
0.025 mm.

2.16 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.

C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

D. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.

E. Satin, Reflective, Directional Polish: No. 7.

F. Mirrorlike Reflective, Nondirectional Polish: No. 8.

G. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.

H. Sputter-Coated Finish: Titanium nitride coating deposited by magnetic sputter-coating process

over indicated mechanical finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 2 mm in 1 m.
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 5 mm in 3 m.

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum and copper alloys that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 11 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing
components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings.
Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match
finish of railings.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than
required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 50
mm beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to one side, and locate joint
within 150 mm of post.

3.3 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have
been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink,
nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material
manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 125 mm deep and 20 mm larger than OD of post for
installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space
between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and
placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring
material] [attached to post with set screws.

D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with 3-mm buildup, sloped away from post.

E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions,
connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows:

1. For aluminum railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and engineered
for this purpose.
2. For copper-alloy railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and
engineered for this purpose.
3. For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.

F. Install removable railing sections, where indicated, in slip-fit metal sockets cast in concrete.

3.4 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS

A. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written

instructions.

1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert and connect factory-fabricated and -
assembled glass panels if glass was bonded to base and top-rail channels in factory.
2. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel and bond
with glazing cement unless glass was bonded to base and top-rail channels in factory.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 12 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 B. Support glass panels in base channel at quarter points with channel-shaped setting blocks that
also act as shims to maintain uniform space for glazing cement. Fill remaining space in base
channel with glazing cement for uniform support of glass.

1. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in
position.
2. Erect glass railings under direct supervision of manufacturer's authorized technical
personnel.

C. Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written
instructions and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing
components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field.
Protect edges from damage.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and to prepare test reports. Payment for these services will be made from the testing and
inspecting allowance, as authorized by Change Orders.

B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing agency will randomly select completed railing
assemblies for testing that are representative of different railing designs and conditions in the
completed Work. Test railings according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935 for compliance with
performance requirements.

C. Remove and replace railings where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified
requirements unless they can be repaired in a manner satisfactory to Architect and comply with
specified requirements.

D. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of

replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with
clean water, and wiping dry.

B. Clean copper alloys according to metal finisher's written instructions in a manner that leaves an
undamaged and uniform finish matching approved Sample.

C. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed
surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion.

D. Clean wood rails by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial
Completion.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 13 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 05 7313 - 14 GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL

RAILINGS
 SECTION 06 0573
WOOD TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Site applied termiticide for wood materials.
B. Site applied termiticide for other building materials.
C. Site applied mildewcide for wood materials.
D. Site applied preservative treatment for wood materials.
E. Site applied fire-retardant treatment for wood materials.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Factory treatment for wood products.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and
application instructions.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildewcide: Correct defective Work within a twenty-five year
period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SITE-APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied, penetrating
termiticide.
B. Site Applied Termiticide and Mildewcide: Borate mineral salt based, spray applied termiticide,
mildewcide and mold growth preventative.
C. Site Applied Termiticide for Wood, Steel and Concrete: Borate mineral salt based, spray
applied termiticide formulated for use on wood, steel, concrete and other building materials.
1. Active Ingredient: 40% minimum disodium octaborate tetrahydrate (DOT).
2. Carrier and Penetrant: Proprietary glycol solution.
D. Site Applied Mold Cleaner: Non-bleaching, oxidizer based formula with high-pH tolerant
surfactant. Contains no sodium hydroxide or sodium hypochlorite.
E. Surface-Applied Wood Preservative:
F. Surface-Applied Fire-Retardant:
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove dust, dirt and other contaminants from treatment surfaces. Remove tarpaulins,
dropcloths, strippable protective films, etc., from areas to be treated Move equipment and
stored materials that block or prevent product application.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 0573 - 1 WOOD TREATMENT

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Comply with manufacturers written mixing and installation instructions.
B. Termiticide: Apply to foundations, structure and other items as listed.
1. All structural wood and sill plates within 610 mm, minimum, of point of contact with
foundation.
2. All wood, wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 610 mm, minimum, of point of
contact with foundation.
3. Concrete foundations 51 mm, minimum, from sill plate.
4. Open bath traps and concrete slab within 305 mm, minimum, of bath trap.
5. All pipe and plumbing penetrations up to 305 mm, minimum, above slab and slab surface
within 152 mm, minimum, of pipe or penetration.
6. Concrete or masonry crawlspace walls up to 610 mm, minimum, from top of soil.
7. Concrete or masonry basement walls up to 610 mm, minimum, from top of soil.
8. 152 mm, minimum, on either side of control joints and construction joints in slabs and
joints between slabs and abutting material.
C. Mildewcide: Apply to wood and wood based building materials as listed.
1. All structural wood and sill plates within 610 mm, minimum, of point of contact with
foundation.
2. All wood, wood based and cellulosic sheathing within 610 mm, minimum, of point of
contact with foundation.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 0573 - 2 WOOD TREATMENT

 SECTION 06 1000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preservative treated wood materials.
B. Fire retardant treated wood materials.
C. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Setting anchors in concrete.
B. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Prefabricated beams and columns for support of
wood framing.
C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
D. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill flashings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2016.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
D. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2012 (Reapproved
2017).
E. ASTM C557 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood
Framing; 2003 (Reapproved 2017).
F. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as
Sheathing; 2013.
G. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017.
H. ASTM D2898 - Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated
Wood for Fire Testing; 2010 (Reapproved 2017).
I. ASTM D3498 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Wood Structural Panels
(Plywood or Oriented Strand Board) to Wood Based Floor System Framing; 2018a.
J. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2013.
K. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies;
2017.
L. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
M. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.
N. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; 2015.
O. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2018.
P. ICC-ES AC380 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite Physical Barrier Systems; 2014, with Editorial
Revision (2017).
Q. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
R. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels; 2010.
S. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2015.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and
application instructions.
C. Structural Composite Lumber: Submit manufacturer's published structural data including span
tables, marked to indicate which sizes and grades are being used; if structural composite
lumber is being substituted for dimension lumber or timbers, submit grading agency structural
tables marked for comparison.
D. ABAA Field Quality Control Submittals: Submit third-party reports of testing and inspection
required by ABAA QAP.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or
exceed specified requirements.
F. ABAA Manufacturer Qualification: Submit documentation of current evaluation of proposed
manufacturer and materials.
G. ABAA Installer Qualification: Submit documentation of current contractor accreditation and
current installer certification. Keep copies of all contractor accreditation and installer
certification on site during and after installation. Present on-site documentation upon request.
H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP);
www.airbarrier.org/#sle:
1. Installer Qualification: Use accredited contractor, certified installers, evaluated materials,
and third-party field quality control audit.
2. Manufacturer Qualification: Use evaluated materials from a single manufacturer regularly
engaged in air barrier material manufacture. Use secondary materials approved in writing
by primary material manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and to allow air circulation.
B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or
installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Lumber of other species or grades is acceptable provided structural and appearance
characteristics are equivalent to or better than products specified.
B. Provide sustainably harvested wood; see Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements for
requirements.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
 C. Provide wood harvested within a 805 km radius of the project site.
D. Lumber salvaged from deconstruction or demolition of existing buildings or structures is
permitted in lieu of sustainably harvested lumber provided it is clean, denailed, and free of paint
and finish materials, and other contamination; identify source.
1. Where salvaged lumber is used for structural applications, provide lumber re-graded by an
inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard Committee, Inc;
www.alsc.org.
E. Lumber fabricated from recovered timber (abandoned in transit) is permitted in lieu of
sustainably harvested lumber, unless otherwise noted, provided it meets the specified
requirements for new lumber and is free of contamination; identify source.
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
C. Stud Framing (50 by 50 mm through 50 by 150 mm ):
1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules.
2. Grade: No. 2.
D. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (50 by 150 mm through 100 by 400 mm ):
1. Machine stress-rated (MSR) as follows:
a. Fb-single (minimum extreme fiber stress in bending): 9,300 kPa.
b. E (minimum modulus of elasticity): 8960 MPa.
2. Species: Any allowed under grading rules.
E. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Subfloor/Underlayment Combination: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2, rated
Single Floor.
1. Bond Classification: Exterior.
2. Performance Category: 19/32 PERF CAT.
3. Span Rating: 20.
4. Edges: Square.
5. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.
6. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture
absorption from exposure to weather for up to 200 days.
7. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener
spacing for 406 mm, 488 mm and 610 mm on center, respectively.
B. Subflooring: Any PS 2 type, rated Sheathing.
1. Bond Classification: Exterior.
2. Span Rating: 48.
3. Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT.
C. Subflooring: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 EXTERIOR GLUE waferboard; 19 mm
thick, square edge.
D. Subflooring: Magnesium oxide board.
1. Classification: PS 2, Exposure 1.
2. Fire Resistance: ASTM E84, Class A1; zero flame spread and zero smoke developed.
3. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Zero growth when tested according to ASTM G21.
E. Subflooring: Structural cementitious subfloor panels.
1. Thickness: 19 mm, nominal.
2. Span: 610 mm, maximum.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY

 F. Underlayment: APA Underlayment; plywood, Exposure 2, 12.5 mm thick. Fully sanded faces
at resilient flooring.
G. Roof Sheathing: Any PS 2 type, rated Structural I Sheathing.
1. Bond Classification: Exterior.
2. Span Rating: 60.
3. Performance Category: 3/4 PERF CAT.
H. Roof Sheathing: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3 EXTERIOR GLUE; square edges,
with panel clips.
I. Roof Sheathing: Oriented strand board wood structural panel; PS 2.
1. Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing.
2. Bond Classification: Exposure 1.
3. Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT.
4. Span Rating: 40/20.
5. Edges: Square.
6. Exposure Time: Sheathing will not delaminate or require sanding due to moisture
absorption from exposure to weather for up to 500 days.
7. Provide fastening guide on top panel surface with separate markings indicating fastener
spacing for 406 mm and 610 mm on center, respectively.
J. Wall Sheathing: Any PS 2 type.
1. Bond Classification: Exterior.
2. Grade: Structural I Sheathing.
3. Span Rating: 24.
4. Performance Category: 5/16 PERF CAT.
5. Edge Profile: Square edge.
K. Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I.
L. Wall Sheathing: Particleboard, ANSI A208.1, Grade M-3 EXTERIOR GLUE.
M. Wall Sheathing: Fiberboard, ASTM C208, Type IV, Grade 1 regular, square edges.
N. Wall Sheathing: Gypsum, complying with requirements of ASTM C1396/C1396M for gypsum
sheathing, V-shaped long edges, 16 mm Type X fire resistant.
O. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum, ASTM C1177/C1177M, 16 mm Type X fire resistant.
P. Wall Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum with integral water-resistive and air barrier, ASTM
C1177/C1177M, 15.9 mm thick.
1. Edges: Square.
2. Water Vapor Permeance: 57.5 ng/(Pa s sq m), minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
3. Air Permeance, Sheathing: 0.005 L/s per sq m, maximum, when tested in accordance
with ASTM E2178.
4. Air Permeance, Assembly: 0.2 L/s per sq m, maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E2357.
5. Fluid-Applied Flashing: Approved by sheathing manufacturer.
6. Warranty:
a. Exposure: Manufacturer's standard; 12 months, against exposure damage, and
dated from installation of product.
b. Defect: Manufacturer's standard; 5 years, against manufacturing defects, and dated
from purchase of product.
c. Material: Manufacturer's standard; 5 years, dated from Date of Substantial
Completion.
d. Effective Drainage Warranty: 12 years, dated from installation of product, when
sheathing is used as substrate under approved, water-managed exterior insulation
finish system (EIFS).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY

 Q. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density
fiberboard; 19 mm thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or
less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
R. Other Applications:
1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C
Plugged or better, Exterior grade.
2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.
3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for
high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times
thickness of sheathing.
3. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry.
B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum Z550
galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M.
C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide minimum Z550
galvanizing complying with ASTM A653/A653M.
D. Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 6 mm thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
E. Termite-Resistant Sill Plate Barrier: Self-adhesive, film-backed barrier with release sheet;
adheres to concrete substrates and blocks termite access.
1. Thickness: 1.7 mm.
2. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
3. Water Vapor Permeance: 2 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
F. Termite-Resistant Sill Flashing: Self-adhesive membrane; polyethylene film bonded to sealant.
1. Thickness: 1 mm.
2. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
3. Water Vapor Permeance: 2 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
G. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 07 6200.
H. Subfloor Adhesives: Waterproof, air cure type, cartridge dispensed; adhesives designed for
subfloor applications and complying with either ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.
I. Construction Adhesives: Adhesives complying with ASTM C557 or ASTM D3498.
J. General Purpose Construction Adhesives:
K. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
L. Building Paper: Water resistant Kraft paper.
M. Termite Shield: Galvanized sheet steel, ____ mm thick.
2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
compliance with specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY

 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically
treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of
25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion
when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated
weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber and 15 percent for plywood.
b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with the ground.
2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low
temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated;
capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an
additional 20 minutes.
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for
lumber and 15 percent for plywood.
b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .
c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may
become wet.
C. Preservative Treatment:
1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b. Treat lumber exposed to weather.
c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
e. Treat lumber less than 450 mm above grade.
f. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.
g. Treat lumber ___________.
2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category
UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F using waterborne preservative.
a. Kiln dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
b. Treat plywood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
c. Treat plywood in contact with masonry or concrete.
d. Treat plywood less than 450 mm above grade.
3. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber in Contact with Soil: AWPA U1, Use
Category UC4A, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative.
a. Preservative for Field Application to Cut Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer
of factory treatment chemicals for brush-application in the field.
b. Restrictions: Do not use lumber or plywood treated with chromated copper arsenate
(CCA) in exposed exterior applications subject to leaching.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous
over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 100 mm and seal.
B. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket
cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
C. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for
anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.
D. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items,
unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is
explicitly indicated.
E. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above
ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted.
B. Subflooring: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted.
C. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with
ends staggered and over firm bearing.
1. At long edges use sheathing clips where joints occur between roof framing members.
2. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.
D. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and
ends.
E. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 610 mm on center on all edges and into
studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated
assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
4. Size: 2440 by 4880 mm, installed horizontally at ceiling height.
F. Wall Sheathing and Roof Sheathing with Laminated Water-Resistive Barrier and Air Barrier:
Secure to studs as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Install with laminated water-resistive and air barrier on exterior side of sheathing.
2. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing
of structural support elements.
3. Use only mechanically attached and drainable EIFS and exterior insulation with wall
sheathing with laminated water-resistive and air barrier.
4. Apply manufacturer's standard seam tape to joints between sheathing panels. Use tape
gun or hard rubber roller as recommended by manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY

3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,
complying with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Framing Members: 6 mm from true position, maximum.
B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 2 mm/m maximum, and 7 mm in 10 m maximum.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Coordination of ABAA Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide testing and inspection required by ABAA QAP.
2. Notify in ABAA writing of schedule for air barrier work. Allow adequate time for testing and
inspection.
3. Cooperate with ABAA testing agency.
4. Allow access to air barrier work areas and staging.
5. Do not cover air barrier work until tested, inspected, and accepted.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste
Management and Disposal.
1. Comply with applicable regulations.
2. Do not burn scrap on project site.
3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated.
4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation
facilities or “waste-to-energy” facilities.
B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 1000 - 8 ROUGH CARPENTRY

 SECTION 06 2000
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finish carpentry items.
B. Wood door frames, glazed frames.
C. Wood casings and moldings.
D. Hardware and attachment accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinet work.
C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing of wood partitions and screens.
D. Section 12 3530 - Residential Casework: Shop fabricated cabinet work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2012.
B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2016.
C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
D. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2018).
E. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1;
2016, with Errata (2018).
F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2018.
G. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2015.
H. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2016.
I. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
J. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
K. WDMA I.S. 4 - Industry Specification for Preservative Treatment for Millwork; 2015a.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated
and adjacent components.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
2. Include certification program label.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of finish plywood, ____by____ mm in size illustrating wood
grain and specified finish.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with AWI/AWMAC/WI
(AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades specified.
2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.
3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.
4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
with specified requirements.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver factory-fabricated units to project site in original packages, containers or bundles
bearing brand name and identification.
B. Store finish carpentry items under cover, elevated above grade, and in a dry, well-ventilated
area not exposed to heat or sunlight.
C. Protect from moisture damage.
D. Handle materials and products to prevent damage to edges, ends, or surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide materials having fire and smoke properties as
required by applicable code.
C. Exterior Woodwork Items:
1. Window Casings and Moldings: Softwood; prepare for paint finish.
2. Soffits and Fascias: Prepare for paint finish.
3. Enclosing Soffit Spaces: As detailed.
4. Enclosing Structural Members: Softwood lumber; "PT" preservative treated.
5. Handrails: Redwood; prepare for stained and sealed finish.
6. Brackets, Finials, and Pediments: Prepare for paint finish.
7. Bench Seats and Backs: "PT" preservative treated.
D. Interior Woodwork Items:
1. Moldings, Bases, Casings, and Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint
finish.
2. Door, Glazed Light, and Pocket Door Frames: White birch; prepare for paint finish.
3. Window Sills: Clear fir; prepare for transparent finish.
4. Stairs, Balustrades, and Handrails: Clear fir; prepare for stained finish.
5. Suspended Wood Ceiling System: "FR-S" treated.
6. Glazed Screen Partition System: Clear fir; prepare for transparent finish.
7. Valance Work: Clear fir; prepare for paint finish.
8. Loose Shelving: Birch plywood; prepare for paint finish.
9. False Box Beams: Knotty Tight Knot Cedar; unfinished.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 2000 - 2 FINISH CARPENTRY

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000 -
Product Requirements.
B. Provide wood harvested within a 805 km radius of the project site.
C. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted,
unless indicated otherwise, and provided it is clean and free of contamination, identify source;
provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber
Standard Committee, Inc. (ALSC).
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Softwood Lumber: ________ species, ________ sawn, maximum moisture content of 6
percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
B. Hardwood Lumber: ________ species, ________ sawn, maximum moisture content of 6
percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.
2.04 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Softwood Plywood, Not Exposed to View: Any face species, medium density fiberboard core;
PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application.
B. Softwood Plywood, Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, medium density
fiberboard core; PS 1 Grade A-B, glue type as recommended for application.
C. Hardwood Plywood: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, book matched, medium density
fiberboard core; HPVA HP-1, Front Face Grade AA, Back Face Grade 1, glue type as
recommended for application.
D. Prefinished Paneling: ________ face species, ________ cut, ________ grain, V-cut vertical
joint scoring; 4 mm thick, finished as gloss.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Composed of wood chips, sawdust, or flakes of medium density,
made with waterproof resin binders; of grade to suit application; sanded faces.
F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 6 mm
thick, smooth one side (S1S).
G. Pegboard: Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, standard grade; 3 mm thick, with holes
spaced at 25.4 mm on center in both directions.
2.05 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3; color as selected by Architect; textured, low gloss finish.
B. Low Pressure Laminate: Melamine; ________ color and gloss surface texture.
C. Solid Laminate: ________ color, and gloss surface texture.
D. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, BKL; undecorated plastic laminate.
E. Laminate Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application; not
containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
2.06 FASTENINGS
A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not
containing formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
B. Adhesive for factory-fabricated units: Manufacturer's recommended adhesive for application.
C. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; ________ finish in concealed locations and
________ finish in exposed locations.
D. Fasteners for Exterior Applications: Stainless steel; length required to penetrate wood
substrate 38 mm minimum.
E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 2000 - 3 FINISH CARPENTRY

2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of indicated species.
C. Plastic Edge Trim: Extruded convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of
width to match component thickness; color as selected.
D. Aluminum Edge Trim: Extruded convex shape; smooth surface finish; self locking serrated
tongue; of width to match component thickness; natural mill finish.
E. Glass: Type FG-A as specified in Section 08 8000.
F. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.
G. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.
H. Boxes and Trim for Recessed Components: See Section __________:
2.08 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.9.
B. Shelf Standards: ________ style, ________ finish.
C. Specialty Workstation and Countertop Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied powder coat.
3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D. Standard Shelf, Countertop, and Workstation Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat.
3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
E. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)-Compliant Vanity and Countertop Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat.
3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
F. Specialty Vanity Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat.
3. Color: White.
2.09 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Factory-Treated Lumber: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for
pressure impregnated wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service
conditions, and specific applications.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type): Chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable
of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed index of 450,
maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): Provide AWPA U1 treatment using
waterborne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.
D. Water Repellent Preservative Treatment by Dipping Method: WDMA I.S. 4, with 0.25 percent
retainage.
E. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Colored, _____________ type, ________
manufactured by ____________.
F. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring fire rating to concealed wood blocking.
G. Provide identification on fire retardant treated material.
H. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
I. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum ____ percent moisture content.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 2000 - 4 FINISH CARPENTRY
2.10 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Stain, Shellac, Varnish, and Finishing Materials: In compliance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or
AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
2.11 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with aluminum trim.
C. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit
corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises.Locate
counter butt joints minimum 600 mm from sink cut-outs.
E. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse face of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2.12 SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and
is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -
Finishing for grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Sheen: Flat.
2. Opaque:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install custom fabrications in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS) requirements for grade indicated.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 0.79 mm. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
D. Install prefinished paneling with full bed contact adhesive applied to substrate.
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Brush apply one coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.04 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 2000 - 5 FINISH CARPENTRY

3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.6 mm.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 0.79 mm.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 2000 - 6 FINISH CARPENTRY

 SECTION 06 4100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B. Countertops.
C. Hardware.
D. Factory finishing.
E. Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Support framing, grounds, and concealed blocking.
B. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass for casework.
C. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field finishing of cabinet exterior.
D. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Field finishing of cabinet exterior.
E. Section 12 3600 - Countertops.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2018).
B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1;
2016, with Errata (2018).
C. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2015.
D. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2016.
E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
F. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before
starting work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1. Scale of Drawings: 125 mm to 1 m, minimum.
2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
3. Include certification program label.
C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 300 mm
square, illustrating proposed cabinet, countertop, and shelf unit substrate and finish.
E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control
programs.
F. Sustainable Design Submittal: Documentation for sustainably harvested wood-based
components.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4100 - 1 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD

CASEWORK
 1. Company with at least one project in the past 5 years with value of woodwork within 20
percent of cost of woodwork for this Project.
2. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
3. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install this work from single fabricator.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.
3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.
4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
with specified requirements.
5. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of typical base cabinet, wall cabinet, and countertop, including hardware,
finishes, and plumbing accessories.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Wood Veneer Faced Cabinet:
1. Exposed Surfaces: HPVA HP-1 Grade A, Ash, plain sliced, random-matched.
2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: HPVA HP-1 Grade B, Ash, plain sliced, random-matched.
3. Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.
C. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
D. Breakroom Cabinets: Plastic laminate faced, Custom grade.
E. Cabinets:
1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Wood.
2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Wood.
3. Finish - Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Wood
4. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.
5. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band.
6. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel.
7. Casework Construction Type: Type A - Frameless.
8. Interface Style for Cabinet and Door: Style 2 - Finish Inset; reveal overlay.
9. Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Style and Rail, all Grades.
a. Drawer fronts run grain either vertically or horizontally at the manufacturer's option.
b. Doors: Vertical grain.
10. Grained Face Layout for Cabinet and Door Fronts: Flush panel.
a. Premium Grade:
1) Provide vertical run and match for doors, drawer fronts and false fronts within
each cabinet unit.
2) Provide well-matched doors, drawer fronts and false fronts across multiple
cabinet faces in one elevation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4100 - 2 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD

CASEWORK
 3) Cathedral Grain: Point grain crown up and run in the same direction for entire
project.
11. Cabinet Design Series: As indicated on drawings.
12. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.
a. Deflection: L/144.
13. Cabinet Style: As scheduled.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000.
C. Provide wood harvested within a 805 km radius of the project site.
D. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted,
unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify source; provide
lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber Standard
Committee, Inc.
2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL): Melamine resin, NEMA LD 3, Type VGL laminate panels.
B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific
applications.
C. Provide specific types as indicated.
2.04 COUNTERTOPS
A. Countertops are specified in Section 12 3600.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated
tongue; of width to match component thickness.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
2. Use at all exposed plywood edges.
3. Use at all exposed shelf edges.
C. Aluminum Edge Banding: Extruded convex shape; smooth surface finish; self locking serrated
tongue; of width to match component thickness; natural mill finish.
1. Use at all exposed plywood edges.
2. Use at all exposed shelf edges.
3. Use at __________.
D. Vinyl Countertop Edge: PVC anchor type tee-molding edging in width to match thickness of
countertop, color as indicated, used at locations as indicated.
E. Glass: Type A as specified in Section 08 8000.
F. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application.
G. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized
or chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in
exposed locations.
H. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.
I. Grommets: Standard plastic, painted metal, or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match
adjacent surface.
2.06 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4100 - 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD

CASEWORK
 B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf
standards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,
for nominal 25 mm spacing adjustments.
C. Fixed Specialty Shelf Supports:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat.
3. Color: White.
D. Fixed Specialty Workstation and Countertop Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied powder coat.
3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
E. Fixed Standard Shelf, Countertop, and Workstation Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat.
3. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
F. Fixed Specialty Vanity Brackets:
1. Material: Steel.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied, textured powder coat.
3. Color: White.
G. Countertop Supports:
1. Material: Aluminum
2. Finish/Color: Clear anodized.
H. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 100 mm centers.
I. Sliding Door Pulls: Circular shape for recessed installation, steel with satin finish.
J. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.
K. Catches: Magnetic.
L. Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Extension types as indicated.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
M. Drawer Systems: Integrated drawer slide and side.
1. Side Type: Single Wall.
2. Drawer Side Height: 90 mm.
3. Drawer Length: 400 mm.
4. Extension Type: Extension types as indicated.
5. Static Load Capacity: Residential/Light Commercial grade.
6. Mounting: Side mounted.
7. Stops: Integral type.
8. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed and white epoxy finish type.
N. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.
O. Soft Close Adapter: Concealed, frame-mounted, screw-adjustable damper ; steel with polished
finish.
P. Mechanical Automatic Opening System: Concealed; steel with polished finish.
Q. Electro-Mechanical Automatic Opening System: Concealed; steel with polished finish.
R. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Upper and lower track of satin anodized aluminum, with
matching shoe equipped with nylon rollers.
S. Cabinet Pocket Door Slides:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4100 - 4 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD

CASEWORK
 1. Class: Heavy-duty.
2.07 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A. Provide UL (DIR) listed and approved identification on fire retardant treated material.
2.08 SITE FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Stain, Shellac, Varnish, and Finishing Materials: In compliance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or
AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
2.09 FABRICATION
A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
passage through building openings.
B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than
one piece for any single length.
C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly
bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 600 mm from sink cut-outs.
1. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
2. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.
E. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as
follows:
1. Provide center matched panels at each elevation.
2. Provide sequence matching across each elevation.
3. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks.
F. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at
400 mm on center.
G. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.
Prime paint cut edges.
H. Shop glaze glass materials using the Interior Dry method as specified in Section 08 8000.
2.10 SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.
D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -
Finishing for grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
2. Opaque:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4100 - 5 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD

CASEWORK
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements
for grade indicated.
B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.
C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.
D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.
E. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 0.79 mm. Do not
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
F. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.
G. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of
species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust installed work.
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4100 - 6 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD

CASEWORK
 SECTION 06 4200
WOOD PANELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Custom wood veneer paneling.
B. Solid wood panel trim.
C. Shop finishing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Grounds and concealed blocking.
B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field finishing.
C. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Field finishing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 2016.
B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2018).
D. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1;
2016, with Errata (2018).
E. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2018.
F. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,
and accessories.
1. Scale of Drawings: 125 mm to 1 m, minimum.
2. Provide plan of panel number sequencing.
3. Provide information as required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
4. Include certification program label.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of finished plywood, ____x____ mm in size, illustrating wood
grain and specified finish.
E. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control
programs.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this
section with minimum five years of documented experience.
1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of
fabrication and throughout the duration of the project.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.
3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.
4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
with specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4200 - 1 WOOD PANELING

1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct mock-up, ____ m long by ____ m wide, illustrating full panel sheet, edge trim, joint
trim, applied finish, and ________.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect work from moisture damage.
B. Do not deliver wood materials to project site until building is fully enclosed and interior
temperature and humidity are in accordance with recommendations of AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)
or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable codes for fire retardant requirements.
2.02 PANELING
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless otherwise indicated.
B. Stile and Rail Paneling:
1. Species: __________.
2. Panel Veneer Cut: __________.
3. Stiles and Rails: 19 mm.
4. Joints: Fastened with dowels or biscuits.
5. Panels: Flat.
6. Finish: Transparent, shop finished.
C. Flat Paneling:
1. Species: __________.
2. Cut: __________.
3. Panels: Veneer of full width and balanced sequence matched.
4. Visible Edges and Reveals: Filled and painted.
5. Outside Corners: Mitered and splined.
2.03 WOOD-BASED MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
B. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000.
C. Provide wood harvested within a 805 km radius of the project site.
D. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is permitted,
unless indicated otherwise, and provided it is clean and free of contamination, identify source;
provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American Lumber
Standard Committee, Inc. (ALSC).
E. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1 Grade A; veneer core, type of glue recommended for
application; of grain quality suitable for transparent finish.
F. Particleboard: Composed of wood chips, medium density, with waterproof resin binders; of
grade to suit application; sanded faces; complying with ANSI A208.1.
G. Lumber: Maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for
transparent finish.
2.04 ADHESIVES AND FASTENERS
A. Adhesives: Type suitable for intended purpose, complying with applicable air quality
regulations.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4200 - 2 WOOD PANELING

 B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; ________ finish in concealed locations and
________ finish in exposed locations.
2.05 WOOD TREATMENT PROCESSES
A. Fire Retardant Treatment (FR-S Type) for Lumber: Chemically treated and pressure
impregnated; capable of providing flame spread index of 25, maximum, and smoke developed
index of 450, maximum , when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): Provide AWPA U1 using waterborne
preservativeto 4.0 kg/cu m retention.
C. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Clear, _____________ type.
2.06 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
A. Shop pressure treat wood materials requiring UL fire rating to concealed wood blocking.
B. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material.
C. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.
D. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum ____ percent moisture content.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Prepare panels for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B. Finish exposed edges of panels as specified by grade requirements.
2.08 SHOP FINISHING
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler that matches surrounding surfaces and
is of type recommended for the applicable finish.
D. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section 5 -
Finishing for grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Sheen: Flat.
2. Opaque:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Gloss.
E. Prime paint surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials.
F. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.
2.09 ACCESSORIES
A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Softwood lumber of ________ species.
B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
C. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and
ready to receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements
for grade indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4200 - 3 WOOD PANELING

 B. Do not begin installation until wood materials have been fully acclimated to interior conditions.
C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level, using concealed fasteners
wherever possible.
D. Where necessary to cut and fit on site, scribe work abutting other components. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal gaps.
E. Coordinate the installation of firestopping behind paneling.
F. Set exposed fasteners, fill with wood filler, and finish to match panel finish.
G. Touch up damaged finish to match original, using materials provided by fabricator; replace
components that cannot be refinished like new.
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Brush apply one coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious
materials. Treat site-sawn cuts.
C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting paneling.
3.04 PREPARATION FOR FIELD FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.
B. Field Finishing: Refer to Section 09 9300.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1.6 mm.
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 0.8 mm.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 06 4200 - 4 WOOD PANELING

 SECTION 07 1113
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bituminous dampproofing.
B. Protection boards.
C. Drainage panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation: Rigid insulation board used as protection board.
B. Section 31 2323 - Fill.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D41/D41M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing,
and Waterproofing; 2011 (Reapproved 2016).
B. ASTM D43/D43M - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing,
and Waterproofing; 2000 (Reapproved 2012).
C. ASTM D449/D449M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Dampproofing and
Waterproofing; 2003 (Reapproved 2014).
D. ASTM D450/D450M - Standard Specification for Coal-Tar Pitch Used in Roofing,
Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).
E. ASTM D1187/D1187M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as
Protective Coatings for Metal; 1997 (Reapproved 2011).
F. ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing; 2013.
G. ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2007,
with Editorial Revision (2012).
H. ASTM D5643/D5643M - Standard Specification for Coal Tar Roof Cement, Asbestos Free;
2006, with Editorial Revision (2012).
I. NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide properties of primer, bitumen, and mastics.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with at
least three years of documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 5 degrees C for 24 hours before and during application
until dampproofing has cured.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
A. Bituminous Dampproofing: Cold-applied water-based emulsion; asphalt with mineral colloid or
chemical emulsifying agent; with or without fiber reinforcement; asbestos-free; suitable for
application on vertical and horizontal surfaces.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1113 - 1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

 1. Composition - Vertical Application: ASTM D1227 Type III or ASTM D1187/D1187M Type
I.
2. Composition - Horizontal and Low-Slope Application: ASTM D1227 Type II or III.
3. VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal regulations.
4. Applied Thickness: 1.5 mm, minimum, wet film.
B. Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by dampproofing
manufacturer.
2.02 BITUMEN MATERIALS
A. Hot Asphaltic Type:
1. Bitumen: ASTM D449/D449M, Type I, asphalt.
2. Primer: ASTM D41/D41M, compatible with substrate.
3. Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I, asbestos-free.
B. Coal Tar Type:
1. Bitumen: ASTM D450/D450M, Type II, coal tar pitch.
2. Primer: ASTM D43/D43M, coal tar type.
3. Sealing Mastic: ASTM D5643/D5643M, coal tar roof cement, asbestos-free.
C. Cold Asphaltic Type:
1. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41/D41M, compatible with substrate.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Drainage Panel: 6 mm thick formed plastic, hollowed sandwich.
B. Protection Board: 3 mm thick biodegradable hardboard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
dampproofing system.
C. Verify that items penetrating surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D. Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycombs in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of asphalt dampproofing.
B. Foundation Walls: Patch disturbed areas of existing dampproofing with two additional coats of
dampproofing of the same generic type.
C. Perform this work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (WM) applicable
requirements.
D. Prime surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA (WM) applicable
requirements.
E. Prime surfaces at a rate approved by manufacturer for application indicated, and allow primer
to dry thoroughly.
F. Apply bitumen with mop.
G. Apply bitumen at a temperature limited by equiviscous temperature (EVT) plus or minus 14
degrees C; do not exceed finish blowing temperature for four hours.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1113 - 2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

 H. Apply bitumen in one coat, continuous and uniform, at a rate of 0.6 sq m/L per coat.
I. Apply from 50 mm below finish grade elevation down to top of footings.
J. Seal items watertight with mastic, that project through dampproofing surface.
K. Place drainage panel directly over dampproofing, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward.
L. Place protection board over drainage panel, butt joints, and adhere with mastic.
M. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1113 - 3 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

 SECTION 07 1300
SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sheet Waterproofing:
1. Self-adhered modified bituminous sheet membrane.
2. Below grade bituminous sheet membrane with aluminum backing
3. Self-adhered HDPE sheet membrane.
4. Mechanically attached elastomeric sheet membrane.
5. EPDM rubber sheet membrane.
6. Reinforced EPDM sheet embedded in modified polyurethane waterproofing system.
7. Plastic sheet membrane.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete substrate.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS
A. EPDM - Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer.
B. HDPE - High-Density Polyethylene.
C. NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association.
D. PVC - Polyvinyl Chloride.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C836/C836M - Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied
Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course; 2015.
B. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers--
Tension; 2016.
C. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved
2010).
D. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; 2012.
E. ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds; 1998
(Reapproved 2010).
F. ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test); 2008
(Reapproved 2015).
G. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2017.
H. ASTM D4551 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Flexible
Concealed Water-Containment Membrane; 2012.
I. ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane; 2015.
J. ASTM D5295/D5295M - Standard Guide for Preparation of Concrete Surfaces for Adhered
(Bonded) Membrane Waterproofing Systems; 2014.
K. ASTM D5385/D5385M - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of
Waterproofing Membranes; 1993, with Editorial Revision (2014).
L. ASTM D5602/D5602M - Standard Test Method for Static Puncture Resistance of Roofing
Membrane Specimens; 2011.
M. ASTM D6134 - Standard Specification for Vulcanized Rubber Sheets Used in Waterproofing
Systems; 2007 (Reapproved 2013).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1300 - 1 SHEET WATERPROOFING

 N. ASTM D6506/D6506M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Based Protection Board for Below-
Grade Waterproofing; 2001, with Editorial Revision (2018).
O. ASTM D6506 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Based Protection for Below-Grade
Waterproofing; 2001 (Reapproved 2009).
P. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2016.
Q. ASTM E154/E154M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a, with Editorial Revision
(2013).
R. ASTM F2130 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Repellency, Retention, and Penetration of
Liquid Pesticide Formulation Through Protective Clothing Materials; 2011.
S. ICC-ES AC380 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite Physical Barrier Systems; 2014, with Editorial
Revision (2017).
T. NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual; 2005.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with
other materials.
D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products
specified in this section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. Construct mock-up consisting of 10 sq m of horizontal waterproofed panel; to represent finished
work including internal and external corners.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of this Work.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 5 degrees C for 24 hours before and during application
and until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water,
except where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of
concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Sheet Membrane:
1. Thickness: 2.41 mm, minimum.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1300 - 2 SHEET WATERPROOFING

 2. Sheet Width: 0.914 m, minimum.
3. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
4. Tensile Strength:
a. Film: 34.57 MPa, minimum, measured according to ASTM D882 and at grip-
separation rate of 50 mm per minute.
b. Membrane: 2.24 MPa, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412 Method A,
using die C and at spindle-separation rate of 50 mm per minute.
5. Elongation at Break: 300 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412.
6. Water Vapor Permeance: 2.9 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum, measured in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
7. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970/D1970M
at minus 11 C, 180 degree bend on 25 mm mandrel.
8. Peel Strength: 1226 N/m, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D903.
9. Lap Adhesion Strength: 875.6 N/m, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D1876.
10. Puncture Resistance: 22.67 kg, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM
E154/E154M.
11. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance
with ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion.
12. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 61 m when tested according to ASTM
D5385/D5385M.
13. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
B. Below Grade Bituminous Sheet Membrane with Aluminum Backing:
1. Thickness: 1.5 mm, minimum.
2. Sheet Width: 1.0 m.
3. Tear Strength: Greater than 12 N.
4. Heat Resistance: No displacement sag or dripping after 2 hours at 70 degrees C.
5. Water Permeability: Impermeable.
6. Low Temperature Flexibility: No cracking at minus 15 degrees C.
7. Shipping Weight: 38.6 kg per roll.
8. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
C. Self-Adhered HDPE Sheet Membrane: Recommended by manufacturer for placement below
concrete slabs and on outside face of below grade walls before placement of concrete.
1. Sheet Thickness: 2.4 mm, minimum.
2. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
3. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970/D1970M
at minus 11 C, 180 degree bend on 25 mm mandrel.
4. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 70 m when tested according to ASTM
D5385/D5385M.
5. Elongation at Break: 500 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412.
6. Tensile Strength, Film: 24 MPa, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412.
7. Lap Peel Adhesion: 1408 N/m, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D1876.
8. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.6 ng/(Pa s sq m), maximum, measured in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
9. Bond to Concrete: 875 N/m, minimum, per ASTM D903.
10. Lateral Water Migration Resistance: Resists the weight of 70 m when tested according to
ASTM D5385/D5385M.
11. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
D. Mechanically Attached Elastomeric Sheet Membrane: Composite membrane formed of
elastomeric materials bonded to an inner core and covered by a non-woven geotextile fabric,

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1300 - 3 SHEET WATERPROOFING

 recommended by the manufacturer for direct concrete contact in negative-side waterproofing
applications.
1. Membrane Thickness: 1.85 mm, minimum
2. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D1970/D1970M: Pass.
3. Resistance to Hydrostatic Head, ASTM D5385/D5385M: 70 m
4. Elongation, ASTM D412: Greater than 400 percent.
5. Tensile Strength (film), ASTM D882: 63.4 MPa
6. Crack Cycling, ASTM C836/C836M: Pass
7. Puncture Resistance, ASTM E154/E154M: >934 N
8. Peel Adhesion to Concrete, ASTM D903: 1,754 N/m
9. Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96/E96M (Water Method): 0.06 ng/(Pa s sq m).
10. Resistance to Penetration by Termites, Texas A & M Method, Percentage of Penetration:
Zero percent.
11. Resistance to Penetration by Pesticides, ASTM F2130, Percentage of Penetration: Zero
percent.
12. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer
E. EPDM Rubber Sheet Membrane: Complies with ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type I unreinforced
and with soil burial resistance requirement of ASTM D6134.
1. Thickness: 2.3 mm, minimum.
2. Sheet Width: As large as is practical, with factory vulcanized splices.
3. Field Seaming: Contact cement and lap edge sealant.
4. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
5. Tensile Strength: 8.3 MPa, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
6. Puncture Resistance: Withstanding 25 kg, minimum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D5602/D5602M.
7. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
8. Flashing: Cured EPDM rubber sheet.
F. Reinforced EPDM Sheet Embedded in Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing System:
1. Overall Thickness: 2.67 mm, minimum.
2. Sheet Width: 305 mm.
3. Sheeting Puncture Resistance, ASTM E154/E154M: Greater than 1830 N.
G. Plastic Sheet Membrane:
1. Type: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) complying with ASTM D4551.
2. Formulated for seaming by solvent welding.
H. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
I. Membrane Sealant: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
J. Flexible Flashings: (As recommended by manufacturer) mm thick butylene.
K. Termination Bars: Aluminum; compatible with membrane and adhesives.
L. Surface Conditioner: (As recommended by manufacturer) type, compatible with membrane.
M. Adhesives: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
N. Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet
membrane.
2.02 ATTACHMENT MATERIALS
A. Battens: (As recommended by manufacturer).
B. Disc Washers and Screws: (As recommended by manufacturer).
C. Circular Membrane Discs: (As recommended by manufacturer).
D. Reglet Strip Devices: (As recommended by manufacturer).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1300 - 4 SHEET WATERPROOFING

2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealant for Cracks and Joints In Substrates: Resilient elastomeric joint sealant compatible with
substrates and waterproofing materials.
B. Protection Board: Provide type capable of preventing damage to waterproofing due to
backfilling and construction traffic.
1. Hardboard, 3 mm thick.
2. Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard, 6 mm thick.
3. Polystyrene foam board, 25 mm thick.
4. Multi-layer internally-reinforced asphaltic panels, 3 mm thick, nominal, complying with
ASTM D6506/D6506M.
5. Recycled or reclaimed closed-cell foam plastic with non-woven filter fabric cover; 25 mm
thick.
6. Semi-rigid glass fiber board; unaffected by water, freeze-thaw, fungus, or soil bacteria;
containing no formaldehyde, phenol, acrylic, or artificial color; 19 mm thick, nominal.
C. Drainage Panel: Drainage layer with geotextile filter fabric on earth side.
1. Composition: Dimpled polystyrene, polyethylene, or polypropylene core; polypropylene
filter fabric.
D. Cant Strips: Premolded composition material.
E. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer.
F. Counterflashings: Galvanized steel sheet, (As recommended by manufacturer) mm thick.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
waterproofing system.
C. Verify items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage not designated to receive waterproofing.
B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions; vacuum substrate clean.
C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.
D. Fill non-moving joints and cracks with a filler compatible with waterproofing materials.
E. Seal moving cracks with sealant and non-rigid filler, using procedures recommended by sealant
and waterproofing manufacturers.
F. Prepare building expansion joints at locations as indicated on drawings.
G. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by
manufacturer, and protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
H. Concrete Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Prepare concrete substrate according to ASTM
D5295/D5295M.
1. Remove substances that inhibit adhesion including form release agents, curing
compounds admixtures, laitance, moisture, dust, dirt, grease and oil.
2. Repair surface defects including honeycombs, fins, tie holes, bug holes, sharp offsets,
rutted cracks, ragged corners, deviations in surface plane, spalling and delaminations, as
described in the reference standard.
3. Remove and replace areas of defective concrete as specified in Section 03 3000.
4. Prepare concrete for adhesive bonded waterproofing using mechanical or chemical
methods described in the referenced standard.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1300 - 5 SHEET WATERPROOFING

 5. Test concrete surfaces as described in the referenced standards. Verify surfaces are
ready to receive adhesive bonded waterproofing membrane system.
3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE
A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NRCA
(WM) applicable requirements.
B. Roll out membrane, and minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
C. Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer, and roll out onto substrate with a
mechanical roller to provide full contact bond.
D. Adhesive Bonded Membrane: Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
and bond sheet to substrate except in those areas directly over or within 75 mm of a control or
expansion joint.
E. Torch Applied Membrane: Apply membrane by torch application, coated side down.
F. Mechanically Fastened Membrane: Install mechanical fasteners in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, and bond sheet to membrane discs.
G. Overlap edges and ends, minimum 76 mm, seal permanently waterproof by method
recommended by manufacturer, and apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
H. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints
are static or dynamic.
I. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage, and seal joints and seams.
J. Install building expansion joints at locations as indicated on drawings.
K. Flexible Flashings: Seal items watertight that penetrate through waterproofing membrane with
flexible flashings.
L. Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum
150 mm above horizontal surface for first ply and ____ mm at subsequent plies laid in shingle
fashion.
M. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces.
1. Install termination bar along edges.
2. Install counterflashing over exposed edges.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL AND PROTECTION BOARD
A. Place drainage panel directly against membrane, butt joints, place to encourage drainage
downward. Scribe and cut boards around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
B. Place protection board directly against drainage panel; butt joints. Scribe and cut boards
around projections, penetrations, and interruptions.
C. Adhere protection board to substrate with compatible adhesive.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for
flood testing.
1. Flood to minimum depth of 25 mm with clean water, and after 48 hours inspect for leaks.
2. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as
directed by Architect; repeat flood test, and repair damage to building.
3. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 1300 - 6 SHEET WATERPROOFING

 SECTION 07 2100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Board insulation and integral vapor retarder at cavity wall construction, perimeter foundation
wall, underside of floor slabs, over roof deck, over roof sheathing, exterior wall behind wall
finish, and interior wall with facer providing exposed finish.
B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall, ceiling, and roof construction.
C. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior wall
and roof.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Installation requirements for board insulation over steep
slope roof sheathing or roof structure.
B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Separate air barrier and vapor retarder materials.
C. Section 07 8400 - Firestopping: Insulation as part of fire-rated through-penetration assemblies.
D. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation inside walls and partitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method; 2017.
B. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2017.
C. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2017a.
D. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2014.
E. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.
F. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board; 2017.
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
H. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At
750 Degrees C; 2016a.
I. ASTM E1414/E1414M - Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between
Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum; 2016.
J. ASTM E2357 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies;
2017.
K. ICC-ES AC239 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite-Resistant Foam Plastic; 2008, with Editorial
Revision (2014).
L. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
C. ABAA Field Quality Control Submittals: Submit third-party reports of testing and inspection
required by ABAA QAP.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION

 D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental
conditions required for installation and installation techniques.
F. ABAA Manufacturer Qualification: Submit documentation of current evaluation of proposed
manufacturer and materials.
G. ABAA Installer Qualification: Submit documentation of current contractor accreditation and
current installer certification. Keep copies of contractor accreditation and installer certification
on site during and after installation. Present on-site documentation upon request.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP);
www.airbarrier.org/#sle:
1. Installer Qualification: Use accredited contractor, certified installers, evaluated materials,
and third-party field quality control audit.
2. Manufacturer Qualification: Use evaluated materials from a single manufacturer regularly
engaged in air barrier material manufacture. Use secondary materials approved in writing
by primary material manufacturer.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation Under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.
B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.
C. Insulation Inside Masonry Cavity Walls: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) carbon black board.
D. Insulation Inside Prefabricated Wall Panels: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.
E. Insulation Over Metal Stud Framed Walls, Continuous: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) carbon
black board.
F. Insulation on Inside of Framed Walls with Exposed Facer Providing Interior Finish: Glass-fiber-
reinforced polyisocyanurate with exposed facers.
G. Insulation on Inside of Concrete and Masonry Exterior Walls: Glass fiber board.
H. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls: Batt insulation with integral vapor retarder.
I. Insulation in Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
J. Insulation in Wood Framed Ceiling Structure: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
K. Insulation Above Lay-In Acoustical Ceilings: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder.
L. Insulation Over Roof Deck: Extruded polystyrene (XPS) board.
2.02 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578.
1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Board Size: 1220 mm by 2440 mm.
5. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings
6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type XI, 5 psi (35 kPa), minimum.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 2 THERMAL INSULATION

 8. Type and Water Absorption: Type XI, 4.0 percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.
9. Type and Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: Type XI, 3.1 (0.55) per 25.4 mm thickness at
24 degrees C mean temperature.
B. Termite-Resistant Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578.
1. Termite Resistance: Comply with ICC-ES AC239.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Board Size: 1220 mm by 2440 mm.
5. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings. []
6. Thermal Resistance: RSI-value of 1.94, for overall thickness indicated.
7. Board Edges: Square.
C. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with either natural
skin or cut cell surfaces.
1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa), minimum.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Type and Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88) per 25.4 mm thickness at
24 degrees C mean temperature.
5. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
6. Type and Water Absorption: Type IV, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.
D. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Continuous Insulation (CI) Board: Complies with ASTM C578, and
manufactured using carbon black technology.
1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa), minimum.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Type and Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88), minimum, per 25.4 mm
thickness at 24 degrees C mean temperature.
5. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
6. Board Size: 1220 mm by 2440 mm.
7. Board Thickness: 44.5 mm.
8. Board Edges: Shiplap, at long edges.
9. Type and Water Absorption: Type IV, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.
E. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Cavity Wall Insulation Board: Complies with ASTM C578, and
manufactured using carbon black technology.
1. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type IV, 25 psi (173 kPa), minimum.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Type and Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: Type IV, 5.0 (0.88), minimum, per 25.4 mm
thickness at 24 degrees C mean temperature.
5. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
6. Board Size: 400 mm by 2440 mm.
7. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
8. Board Edges: Square.
9. Type and Water Absorption: Type IV, 0.3 percent by volume, maximum, by total
immersion.

F. Expanded Graphite Polystyrene (GPS) Board Insulation: Complying with ASTM C578, Type I.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 3 THERMAL INSULATION

 1. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class B - 26 to 75, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
4. Board Edges: Square.
5. Water Absorption: 1.1 percent by volume, maximum.
6. Type and Compressive Resistance: Type I, 10 psi (69 kPa), minimum.
7. Thermal Resistance: RSI-value of Type I, 3.6 (0.63) per 25.4 mm at 24 degrees C mean
temperature.
G. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides and
Providing Interior Finish System: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289.
1. Classification: Type I, Class 2 - Faced with aluminum foil on both major surfaces of core
foam; glass fiber reinforced or non-reinforced core foam.
2. Compressive Strength: 110 kPa, minimum.
3. Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: Type I, Class 2, at 38.1 mm thick; 1.59 at 24 degrees C.
4. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
5. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. Board Size: 1220 mm by 2440 mm.
7. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings mm.
8. Board Edges: Square.
9. Exposed Facer: 0.1016 mm embossed white thermoset-coated aluminum.
10. Non-Exposed Facer: 0.03175 mm embossed aluminum.
H. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation with Facers Both Sides: Rigid cellular foam,
complying with ASTM C1289.
1. Classifications:
a. Type I: Faced with aluminum foil on both major surfaces of core foam.
1) Class 2 - Glass fiber reinforced or non-reinforced core foam.
2) Compressive Strength: 110 kPa, minimum.
3) Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: At 38.1 mm thick; 1.59 at 24 degrees C.
b. Type II:
1) Class 1 - Faced with glass fiber reinforced cellulosic felt facers on both major
surfaces of core foam.
2) Compressive Strength: Classes 1-2-3, Grade 1 - 16 psi (110 kPa), minimum.
3) Thermal Resistance, RSI-value: At 38.1 mm thick; Class 1, Grades 1-2-3 - 8.4
(1.48) at 24 degrees C.
2. Flame Spread Index (FSI): Class A - 0 to 25, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index (SDI): 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4. Complies with fire resistance requirements indicated on drawings as part of an exterior
non-load-bearing exterior wall assembly when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
5. Board Size: 1220 mm by 2440 mm.
6. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings mm.
2.03 FIBERBOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where fiberboard insulation is indicated, either rock, slag, or glass mineral fiberboard insulation
may be used, at Contractor's option.
B. Mineral Fiberboard Insulation: Rigid mineral fiber, in accordance with ASTM C612.
1. Facing: None, unfaced.
2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with ASTM
E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with
ASTM E84.
4. Board Size: 1220 by 1220 mm.
5. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 4 THERMAL INSULATION

 6. Board Edges: Square.
7. Thermal Conductivity (k-factor): W/m K of 0.037 per inch at 24 degrees C when tested in
accordance with ASTM C518.
8. Maximum Density: 128 kg/cu m.
9. Combustibility: Except for facing, if any, non-combustible when tested in accordance with
ASTM E136.
2.04 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used,
at Contractor's option.
B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Flame Spread Index: 75 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
facing, if any.
4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
5. Thermal Resistance: RSI-value of [].
6. Thickness: [].
7. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.
C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying with
ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84.
1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Provide foil facing on one side, at locations indicated on drawings.
4. Thermal Resistance: RSI-value of [].
5. Thickness: [].
D. Flexible Blanket Insulation: Thin profile insulation that complies with complex shapes, unfaced;
flame spread index of 5 (five) and smoke development index of 10 (ten) or less when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
E. Enclosure for Recessed Ceiling Fixtures: Mineral fiber insulation box enclosure with foil facing
on exterior side for placement over recessed ceiling light fixture; flame spread index of 25
(twenty five) and smoke development index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84.
1. Light Fixture Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Insulation Thickness: 31.8 mm, nominal.
3. Thermal Resistance: RSI-value of 0.74 per inch at 24 degrees C, minimum, when tested
according to ASTM C518.
4. Provide enclosure with documented noise reduction coefficient (NRC) in accordance with
ASTM C423 of at least 1.00 at 51 mm thick.
5. Provide enclosure with documented ceiling attenuation class (CAC) in accordance with
ASTM E1414/E1414M.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Black polyethylene film for above grade application, 0.25 mm thick.
B. Interior Vapor Retarder: Modified polyethylene/polyacrylate (PE/PA) film reinforced with
polyethylene terephthalate (PET) fibers, 0.30 mm thick.
1. Width: 1.5 m.
C. Tape: Reinforced polyethylene film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive.
1. Application: Sealing of interior circular penetrations, such as pipes or cables.
2. Width: Are required for application.
3. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees C to 100 degrees C

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 5 THERMAL INSULATION

 D. Flashing Tape: Special reinforced film with high performance adhesive.
1. Application: Window and door opening flashing tape.
2. Width: As required for application.
3. Primer: Tape manufacturer's recommended product.
E. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 50 mm wide.
F. Tape joints of rigid insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers'
instructions.
G. Insulation Fasteners: Lengths of unfinished1.83 mm high carbon spring steel with chisel or
mitered tips, held in place by tension, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable
of securely supporting insulation in place.
H. Continuous Insulation (CI) Support Systems: Composite framing support (CFS) system
consisting of insulated fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) girts that support CI and provide
cladding attachment support integrated with metal wall panels, brick veneer, CMU veneer, or
_____ exterior wall cladding.
1. Substrate: Attach CFS system components to open metal stud framing without sheathing,
open wood stud framing without sheathing, exterior sheathing over metal stud framing,
exterior sheathing over wood stud framing, concrete masonry units (CMU), or poured
concrete.
2. Depth of Girts: As required for thickness of insulation.
3. Length: 152 mm for clips, and 2.44 m for girts.
4. Spacing of Girts: 406 mm on center, vertically.
I. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated or galvanized; type and size to suit application.
J. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.
K. Protection Board for Below Grade Insulation: Cementitious, 6 mm thick.
L. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates
are ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER
A. Adhere a 152 mm wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control, and expansion
joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B. Apply adhesive to back of boards:
1. Three continuous beads per board length.
2. Full bed 3.2 mm thick.
C. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
D. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation on one side of joint.
E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
F. Immediately following application of board insulation, place protective boards over exposed
insulation surfaces.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 6 THERMAL INSULATION

 1. Apply adhesive in five continuous beads per board length.
2. Install boards horizontally from base of foundation to top of insulation.
3. Butt boards tightly, with joints staggered from insulation joints.
3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION AT EXTERIOR WALLS
A. Adhere 152 mm wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of
adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints between sheets.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
B. Apply adhesive to back of boards:
1. Three continuous beads per board length.
2. Full bed 3.2 mm thick.
C. Install rigid insulation directly to steel studs or exterior grade sheathing at 406 mm on center
with manufacturer recommended mechanical fasteners, and tape joints with manufacturer's
minimum 102 mm wide sealant tape; comply with ASTM E2357.
D. Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
E. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to wall on one side of joint.
F. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
G. Place 152 mm wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor
retarder bed to window and door frames, and tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor
retarder and air seal.
H. Tape insulation board joints.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS
A. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at following frequency:
1. Six (6) per insulation board.
B. Adhere a 152 mm wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of
adhesive each side of joint.
1. Tape seal joints between sheets.
2. Extend sheet full height of joint.
C. Apply adhesive to back of boards:
1. Three continuous beads per board length.
2. Full bed 3.2 mm thick.
D. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties.
1. Place membrane surface against adhesive.
2. Place membrane surface facing out, and tape seal board joints.
E. Install boards horizontally on walls.
1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact.
2. Install in running bond pattern.
3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions.
4. Place impale fastener locking discs.
F. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
G. Place 152 mm wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor
retarder bed to window and door frames, and tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor
retarder and air seal.
3.05 BOARD INSTALLATION USING COMPOSITE FRAMING SUPPORT (CFS) SYSTEM
A. Install CFS system in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 7 THERMAL INSULATION

 B. Install CFS system in compliance with system orientation, sizes, and locations as indicated on
drawings.
C. Install CFS system to fill-in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids, and do not compress
insulation boards.
D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces, and insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids with approved
expandable foam sealant.
3.06 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing
slab.
3.07 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER LOW SLOPE ROOF DECK
A. Board Installation Over Roof Deck, General:
1. See applicable roofing specification section for specific board installation requirements.
2. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of roofing
system.
3. Fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's written instructions
and applicable Factory Mutual requirements.
4. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with roofing in same day.
3.08 BOARD INSTALLATION OVER STEEP SLOPE ROOF SHEATHING OR ROOF STRUCTURE
A. Installation of board insulation over steep slope roof structure or roof sheathing is specified in
Section 06 1000.
3.09 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of the insulation.
E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 152 mm on
center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face.
F. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder
joints over member face.
G. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
H. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place.
I. Coordinate work of this section with requirements for vapor retarder specified in Section 07
2500.
J. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07 2500.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Coordination of Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Tests and Inspections:
1. Provide testing and inspection required by ABAA Quality Assurance Program (QAP).
2. Notify in ABAA writing of schedule for air barrier work, and allow adequate time for testing
and inspection.
3. Cooperate with ABAA testing agency.
4. Allow access to air barrier work areas and staging.
5. Do not cover air barrier work until tested, inspected, and accepted.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 8 THERMAL INSULATION

3.11 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 2100 - 9 THERMAL INSULATION

 SECTION 07 7273
VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Continuous vegetated roof assemblies.

2. Tray-type vegetated roof assemblies.
3. Walkway pavers.
4. Geofoam fill.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section <Insert Section number> "<Insert Section title>" for roofing membrane, roof
thermal insulation, aggregate or roof-paver ballast, and roofing system warranty.
2. Section 129300 "Site Furnishings" for exterior unit planters.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Captured Water: Water that is retained in the drainage layer of a vegetated roof assembly after
new water additions have ceased and that cannot escape the roof except through evaporation
or plant transpiration.

B. Finish Elevation: Elevation of finished growing-media surface of planting area.

C. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

D. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: Vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground
covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

E. Growing Medium: Manufactured, lightweight soil mixture that promotes good growing conditions
for specific varieties of plants.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each vegetated roof assembly.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include material descriptions for each growing medium.

B. Shop Drawings: For each vegetated roof assembly.

1. Include plans, sections, slopes, and drain locations.

2. Indicate dimensions, weights, and loads.
3. Detail field assembly of components, depth of growing media, and attachments to other
work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 1 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 4. Indicate walkway pavers, geofoam fill, locations of irrigation, coordination with lighting
and accessories.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following components of vegetated roof assembly:

1. Preplanted Vegetative Mat: 300 by 300 mm.

2. Growing Media: 1-liter volume of each growing medium, in sealed plastic bags labeled
with content and source. Each Sample shall be typical of the lots of growing media to be
furnished. Provide an accurate representation of texture and composition.
3. Moisture-Retention Mat: 300 by 300 mm.
4. Drainage Panels: 300 by 300 mm.
5. Root Barrier: 300 by 300 mm.
6. Walkway paver, full size, manufacturer's standard size, in each color and texture
required; include installation accessories to illustrate assembly.
7. Geofoam Fill: 300 by 300 mm
8. Separation Geotextile: 300 by 300 mm.
9. Access Boxes: One in each size and color required.
10. Soil Retainer: Manufacturer's standard size to verify configuration and color selected.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product.

1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products.

2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory, according to methods established
by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.

C. Product Test Reports: For complete analysis of each growing medium, for tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or by a qualified testing agency.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Sample Warranty: For special warranties.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For vegetated roof assembly and plants, including a recommended
maintenance plan with procedures for inspection and care during a calendar year. Submit
before start of required warranty and maintenance periods.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From vegetated roof assembly Installer approved by roofing-
membrane manufacturer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement,
starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions,
and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 2 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified vegetated roof assembly Installer, approved, authorized, or

licensed by roofing-membrane manufacturer, whose work has resulted in successful
establishment of vegetated roofs.

1. Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on

Project site when vegetated roof assembly work is in progress.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing

weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance
with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials on or near structures, utilities, walkways and
pavements, or existing roof areas or plants.
2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials,
discharge of debris-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties,
water conveyance systems, or walkways.
3. Accompany each delivery of bulk materials with product certificates.

C. Handle and store materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid overloading roof
structure or damaging roofing membrane.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit planting to be performed when optimum results may be obtained. Apply
products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions
and warranty requirements.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Vegetated Roof Assembly: Installer agrees to repair or replace
components of vegetated roof assembly that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, ponding water or prolonged wetness of growing
medium caused as a result of failure of the assembly to properly drain.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty for Plant Growth: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and
accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.

1. Foliage Cover: Planted materials shall grow to achieve and maintain at least 80 percent
foliage cover over planting area commencing 24 months after planting, through the
duration of this warranty.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 3 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, death and unsatisfactory growth except for defects
resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, neglect by Owner, or incidents that
are beyond Contractor's control.
3. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion as follows:

a. Trees and Shrubs: Five years.

b. Ground Covers, Perennials, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: Five years.

4. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the
succeeding planting season.
b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at
end of warranty period.
c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.

5. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant
material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain vegetated roof assembly components from single source from single
manufacturer.

2.2 VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLIES

A. Continuous Vegetated Roof Assembly: Continuous-coverage assembly consisting of

manufacturer's standard vegetated roof assembly components for installation over roofing
system.
1. Assembly Depth, Nominal: As shown on Drawings, including growing medium.
2. Assembly Weight: Maximum 137 kg/sq. m, including growing medium and plants except
for large perennials and trees and saturated with captured water, but not including weight
of roofing system.
3. Plantings: As shown on Drawings.

B. Tray-Type Vegetated Roof Assembly: Modular assembly consisting of manufacturer's

standard, preplanted trays for field assembly adjacent to and interlocking with each other over
roofing system.
1. Tray Depth, Nominal: Manufacturer's standard for required plantings.
2. Tray Size: As shown on Drawings.
3. Assembly Weight: Maximum 137 kg/sq. m, including growing medium and plants except
for large perennials and trees and saturated with captured water, but not including weight
of roofing system.
4. Plantings: As shown on Drawings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 4 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

2.3 VEGETATED ROOF ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

A. Moisture-Retention Mat: Assembly manufacturer's standard water-retaining fabric manufactured

from recycled synthetic fibers.

B. Drainage Panels: Assembly manufacturer's standard drainage board formed from geotextile-
faced, molded-plastic sheet with a geotextile face and "cups" of the molded sheet facing upward
like small reservoirs to retain water while allowing excess water to drain away below the board
or geotextile-faced, entangled plastic-filament core.

C. Root Barrier: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's standard plastic sheet manufactured
from [recycled] polyethylene or polypropylene plastic; formulated to resist root growth and
bacteria.

D. Erosion-Control Fabric: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's standard erosion-control

fabric>.

E. Anti-Slip Devices: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's standard anti-slip devices.

2.4 MANUFACTURED GROWING MEDIA

A. Growing Medium: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's lightweight, manufactured soil

mixture designed for plants indicated on Drawings.
1. General Condition at Time of Planting: Free of aggregates 13 mm or larger in any
dimension; free of roots, plants, clods, pockets of sand, paint, building debris, oils,
solvents, roofing materials, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free
of weeds, disease-causing plant pathogens, and other undesirable organisms.
2. Maximum Media Density: ASTM E 2399, kg/cu. m for basic growing-medium mixture.
3. Maximum Media Water Retention: ASTM E 2399, <Insert number> percent by volume for
basic growing-medium mixture at maximum media density.
4. Water Permeability: ASTM E 2399, <Insert number> cm/s for basic growing-medium
mixture at maximum media density.
5. Organic Material Content: ASTM F 1647, Method A, organic material as measured using
the loss-on-ignition procedure.

a. Minimum: 4 percent.
b. Maximum: 10 percent.

6. Chemical Properties:

a. Growing-Medium pH (Reaction): 6.0 to 7.0.

b. Cation Exchange Capacity: Minimum 50 meq/100 g of growing medium.
c. Nitrogen: Minimum 0.10 percent by weight.
d. Phosphorous: Minimum <Insert number> percent by weight.
e. Potassium: Minimum <Insert number> percent by weight.

B. Custom Growing Medium: Manufactured soil mixture for plants indicated on Drawings and that
complies with the following:

1. Basic Growing-Medium Mixture: <Insert drawing designation for a specified growing

medium, or insert a manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
2. General Condition at Time of Planting: Free of aggregates 13 mm or larger in any
dimension; free of roots, plants, clods, pockets of sand, paint, building debris, oils,

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 5 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 solvents, roofing materials, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth; free
of weeds, disease-causing plant pathogens, and other undesirable organisms.
3. Mixture Modification: Mix basic growing-medium mixture with the following soil
amendments in the following quantities to modify the mixture's chemical properties and
produce the required custom growing medium:

a. Weight of Lime per Cu. m: <Insert value>.

b. Weight of Sulfur per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
c. Additional Perlite per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
d. Weight of Agricultural Gypsum per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
e. Weight of Diatomaceous Earth per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
f. Weight of Bonemeal per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
g. Weight of Superphosphate per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
h. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per Cu. m: <Insert value>.
i. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per Cu. m: <Insert value>.

2.5 SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, Class T or Class O agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80
percent calcium carbonate equivalent.

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental sulfur, with
a minimum of 99 percent passing through 3.35-mm sieve and a maximum of 10 percent
passing through 0.425-mm sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent
sulfur.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent
passing through 0.30-mm sieve.

F. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; minimum 20 percent available

phosphoric acid.

G. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of

<Insert number> percent fast- and slow-release nitrogen (50 percent derived from natural
organic sources of urea formaldehyde), 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by
weight.

H. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer, consisting of 20 percent nitrogen (50

percent of which is water insoluble), 10 percent phosphorus, and 10 percent potassium, by
weight.

2.6 WALKWAY PAVERS

A. Walkway Pavers: Concrete & stone pavers specified in Section 321400 "Unit Paving."

B. Heavyweight Concrete Walkway Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units,

square edged, manufactured for use as roof- or plaza-deck pavers; with absorption not greater

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 6 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 than 5 percent according to ASTM C 140; with no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss
when tested for freeze-thaw resistance according to ASTM C 67.
1. Thickness: 41 mm.
2. Face Size: As indicated.
3. Weight: 110 kg/sq. m.
4. Compressive Strength: 45 MPa minimum when tested according to ASTM C 140.
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Setting Bed: Aggregate setting-bed material specified in Section 321400 "Unit Paving."

D. Paver Supports: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-density polyethylene, or

polyurethane paver support assembly, including fixed-heightpedestals, shims, and spacer tabs
for joint spacing of 3 mm.

2.7 GEOFOAM FILL

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type X, 21-kg/cu. m density, 104-kPa

compressive strength.

B. Molded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type I, 15-kg/cu. m density, 69-kPa

compressive strength.

1. Treatment: Manufacture molded polystyrene with a termite treatment for below-grade

applications that is an EPA-registered material labeled for use with foam plastic.

C. Geofoam Connectors: Geofoam-fill manufacturer's multibarbed, galvanized-steel sheet

connectors.

D. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made
from polyolefins or polyesters; as recommended by vegetated roof assembly manufacturer.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Protection Board: As recommended by roofing-membrane manufacturer.

B. Access Boxes: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel or aluminum boxes with removable, rigid
covers for accessing drains, valves, and switches beneath the finish elevation of growing
medium; secure each cover with four noncorrosive screws.
1. Size: As shown on Drawings for each location.

C. Soil Retainer: Vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's extruded-aluminum or formed stainless-

steel edging with drainage openings.

1. Configuration: As shown on Drawings.

2. Color: Black or Mill-finish metal.
3. Method of Attachment: Manufacturer's standard adhesive compatible with the roofing
system.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 7 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine each area to receive vegetated roof assembly for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that roof insulation over roofing membrane is in place, secure, and flush along all
seams.
2. Verify that perimeter and other flashings are in place and secure along entire lengths
where they will be covered by vegetated roof assembly.

B. Inspect growing medium.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid, such as paint, paint washout,
concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel,
paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in growing
medium within a planting area.
2. If growing medium is contaminated by foreign or deleterious material or liquid, remove
growing medium and contamination and replace with new growing medium.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Protection Course: Cover roofing system with protection board with butted and fully taped joints
before roofing system is subject to vegetated roof assembly installation work.

B. Install vegetated roof assembly according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Sloped Roofs: Install erosion-control fabric and anti-slip devices for slopes steeper than 1/2 inch
per 12 inches (1:24) according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Small Plant Stabilization: Install erosion-control fabric over planting area to secure small plants
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Geofoam Fill: Install geofoam-fill blocks in as few layers as possible with abutting edges and
ends and with the long dimension of each block placed at right angles to blocks in each
subsequent layer. Offset joints of blocks in successive layers.

1. Install geofoam connectors at each layer, without damaging roofing system, to resist
horizontal displacement of geofoam and according to geofoam-fill manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Cover geofoam fill with separation geotextile before placing overlying growing medium.

F. Access Boxes: Install access box at each drain, valve, and switch and at locations shown on
Drawings. Install top of boxes level with [beneath 25 mm above the finish elevation of growing
medium.

3.3 PLANTING

A. Perform planting according to vegetated roof assembly manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Do not place growing medium or plants during frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 8 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 C. Suspend spreading, grading, and planting operations during periods of excessive moisture until
the moisture content in growing medium reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

D. Uniformly moisten an excessively dry growing medium that is too dusty or unworkable.

E. Preplanted Vegetative Mat: Install in full contact with growing medium and secure in position.

F. Site Planting: Plant vegetated roofs according to requirements specified in Section 329300
"Plants" except as otherwise indicated on Drawings and required by vegetated roof assembly
manufacturer's written instructions. Perform digging carefully to prevent damaging roofing
system below the vegetated roof assembly.

G. Seeding Grasses: Sow seed at a total rate of 2.3 to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq. m.

H. Meadow Grasses and Wildflowers: Sow seed at a total rate of 170 g/92.9 sq. m.

I. Plugging: Plant plugs in holes or furrows, spaced 300 mm apart in both directions.

J. Individual Plant Planting: Set out and space plants other than grasses and wildflowers 225 mm
part [as indicated on Drawings in even rows with triangular spacing.

1. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.

2. Free up or remove girdling roots.
3. Work growing medium around roots to eliminate air pockets.
4. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet growing
medium.
5. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of
recovery from transplanting shock.

3.4 WALKWAY-PAVER INSTALLATION

A. Installation: Install walkway pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Setting Bed: Install setting bed according to paver manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install paver supports according to pedestal manufacturer's written instructions. Adjust for final
level and slope with shims.

D. Loosely set walkway pavers, maintaining a uniform joint width. Tightly seat pavers against
spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align joint patterns parallel in
each direction.

1. Lay out pavers to avoid less-than-half-width pavers at perimeter or other terminations.

E. Tolerances: Do not exceed1.6-mm unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 3 mm in 600 mm
and 6 mm in 3 m from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

3.5 SOIL-RETAINER INSTALLATION

A. Install soil retainer where indicated according to manufacturer's written instructions. Secure with
adhesive.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 9 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests.

B. Perform the following tests:

1. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to procedures in
ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting roofing membrane but before placing
overlaying construction. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains,
and flood with potable water.

a. Flood to an average depth of 64 mm, with a minimum depth of 25 mm and a

maximum depth of 100 mm. Maintain 50 mm of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
b. Flood each area for 48 hours.

2. Electronic Leak-Detection Testing:

a. Testing agency shall test each deck area indicated for testing on Drawings for
leaks using an electronic leak-detection method that locates discontinuities in the
roofing membrane.
b. Testing agency shall perform tests on abutting or overlapping smaller areas as
necessary to cover entire test area.
c. Testing agency shall create a conductive electronic field over the area of roofing to
be tested and electronically determine locations of discontinuities or leaks, if any,
in the roofing.
d. Testing agency shall provide survey report indicating locations of discontinuities if
any.

3. Proceed with installation of vegetated roof assembly only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage roofing-membrane manufacturer's authorized service

representative to provide full-time inspection of vegetated roof assembly installation and
prepare inspection reports.

D. Correct deficiencies in work that do not comply with requirements.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect vegetated roof assemblies from damage, including growing-medium contamination, due
to operations of other contractors and trades. Repair or replace damaged vegetated roof
assemblies.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of vegetated roof assembly

Installer[ approved by roofing-membrane manufacturer. Begin maintenance immediately after
plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but
for not less than the specified maintenance period.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 10 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 1. Assembly and Plant Maintenance: During maintenance period, maintain plantings by
pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers,
adjusting and repairing devices, resetting plants to proper elevations or vertical position,
and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray
or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

a. Replace growing medium that becomes displaced or eroded because of settling or

other processes.
b. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and growing
medium free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management
practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical
controls such as traps, and biological control agents.
c. Use only products and methods acceptable to roofing-membrane manufacturer.

2. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 07 7273 - 11 VEGETATED ROOF SYSTEMS

 SECTION 08 1113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Hollow metal frames for wood doors.
C. Fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
D. Accessories, including louvers, and matching panels.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute.
B. ASCE - American Society of Civil Engineers.
C. HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association.
D. NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.
F. SDI - Steel Door Institute.
G. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B. ANSI/SDI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings
for Steel Doors and Frames; 2007 (R2011).
C. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors; 2011.
D. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (SDI-100); 2014.
E. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames; 2011.
F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.
G. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2015.
H. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and
Ultra-High Strength; 2014.
I. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Steel Frames; 2014 (ANSI/BHMA A156.115).
J. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2009
(ANSI).
K. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.
L. NAAMM HMMA 830 - Hardware Selection for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2002.
M. NAAMM HMMA 831 - Hardware Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; 2011.
N. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors
and Frames; 2007.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1113 - 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES
 O. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
P. NFPA 105 - Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives; 2013
Q. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2012.
R. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; current edition.
S. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
T. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations,
reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one
copy of referenced standards/guidelines.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and any
indicated finish requirements.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 50 mm by 50 mm in size showing factory finishes,
colors, and surface texture.
E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation
instructions relating to this project.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced
document that prescribes installation requirements.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with NAAMM HMMA 840 or ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance with specified
requirements.
B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion and
adverse effects on factory applied painted finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Requirements for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1. Steel used for fabrication of doors and frames shall comply with one or more of the
following requirements; Galvannealed steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, cold-rolled
steel conforming to ASTM A1008/A1008M, or hot-rolled pickled and oiled (HRPO) steel
conforming to ASTM A1011/A1011M, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B for each.
2. Accessibility: Comply with ICC A117.1 and ADA Standards.
3. Exterior Door Top Closures: Flush end closure channel, with top and door faces aligned.
4. Door Edge Profile: Manufacturers standard for application indicated.
5. Typical Door Face Sheets: Flush.
6. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings. Style: Manufacturers standard.
7. Hardware Preparations, Selections and Locations: Comply with NAAMM HMMA 830 and
NAAMM HMMA 831 or BHMA A156.115 and ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100) in accordance
with specified requirements.
8. Zinc Coating for Typical Interior and/or Exterior Locations: Provide metal components
zinc-coated (galvanized) and/or zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) by the hot-dip

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1113 - 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES
 process in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating
thickness, unless noted otherwise for specific hollow metal doors and frames.
a. Based on SDI Standards: Provide at least A40/ZF120 (galvannealed) when
necessary, coating not required for typical interior door applications, and at least
A60/ZF180 (galvannealed) for corrosive locations.
B. Hollow Metal Panels: Same construction, performance, and finish as doors.
C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements
conflict, comply with the most stringent.
2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Door Finish: Factory finished.
B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8 (SDI-100).
a. Level 2 - Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level B, 500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
c. Model 2 - Seamless.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 1.0 mm, minimum.
e. Zinc Coating: A60/ZF180 galvannealed coating; ASTM A653/A653M.
2. Core Material: Polyurethane, 1.8 lbs/cu ft minimum density.
3. Door Thermal Resistance: R-Value of 8.7, minimum, for installed thickness of
polyurethane.
4. Door Thickness: 44.5 mm, nominal unless noted otherwise.
5. Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges.
6. Door Face Sheets: Flush.
7. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 08 7100.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in
accordance with applicable door frame requirements.
B. Frame Finish: Paint finish; factory finished; color and gloss to match door finish, as selected
by Dar Al Riyadh - E & A from manufacturer's full range.
C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance
with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 1.0 mm, minimum.
3. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 150 mm,
maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 1.0 mm, minimum.
3. Frame Finish: Factory finished.
E. Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.
2. Terminated Stops: Provide at interior doors; closed end stop terminated 150 mm,
maximum, above floor at 45 degree angle.
3. Frame Metal Thickness: 1.0 mm, minimum.
4. Frame Finish: Factory finished.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1113 - 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES
 F. Security Resistant Door Frames: With same security resistance as door; face welded or full
profile/continuously welded construction, ground smooth, fully prepared and reinforced for
hardware installation.
1. Frame Metal Thickness: 1.3 mm, minimum.
G. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements in accordance with corresponding
door.
H. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.
I. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be
grouted.
J. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member102 mm high to fill
opening without cutting masonry units.
K. Frames Wider than 1219 mm: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush
with top.
L. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead
structure.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; finish same as door components; factory-
installed.
1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL (BMD) or ITS (DIR) listed fusible link louver, same rating as door.
2. Style: Sightproof inverted V blade.
3. Louver Free Area: (As recommended by door manufacturer) percent.
4. Fasteners: Concealed fasteners.
B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted
corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.
C. Mechanical Fasteners for Concealed Metal-to-Metal Connections: Self-drilling, self-tapping,
steel with electroplated zinc finish.
D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout with maximum 102 mm slump for hand troweling;
thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.
E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for factory- or shop-assembled frames.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
B. Factory Finish: Complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3, manufacturer's standard coating.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
C. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior
to installation.
B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1.6 mm.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1113 - 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related
requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Install prefinished frames after painting and wall finishes are complete.
C. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
D. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
E. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that
pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.
F. Coordinate installation of hardware.
G. Coordinate installation of glazing.
H. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
I. Touch up damaged factory finishes.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified door and
frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1.5 mm measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch; adjust as necessary in
compliance with requirements.
3.06 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Door Schedule and Detail on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 08 1113

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1113 - 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND

FRAMES
 SECTION 08 1416
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Diriyah / Heritage Style solid wooden door.
B. Flush solid core wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field finishing of doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard; 2012.
B. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2012.
C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2005.
E. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
F. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection
Association; 2012.
G. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling,
blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).
2. Include certification program label.
D. Specimen warranty.
E. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, in size cut from top corner of door.
F. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and
sheen.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation
and finishing.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated
class as indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1416 - 1 WOOD DOORS

 C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DOORS AND PANELS
A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Standard Duty performance, in accordance with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS).
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
3. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B. Exterior Door: Custom-designed, best quality solid wood components, and water repellent
treated, as shown on Drawings. Provide decorative metal mouldings and features as indicated
on Drawings.
1. Design: As approved by Owner / Dar Al Riyadh - E & A.
2. Thickness: Minimum 44 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Interior Doors: 44 mm thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with ICC (IBC) -
Positive Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) or Intertek/Warnock Hersey (WHI)
labeled without any visible seals when door is open.
3. Wood veneer facing for field transparent finish where indicated on drawings.
4. Wood veneer facing for field opaque finish where indicated on drawings.
5. High pressure decorative laminate finish where indicated on drawings.
6. Hardboard facing with factory opaque finish where indicated on drawings.
2.02 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and
faces as indicated.
B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core type, with fire resistant composite core (FD), plies and faces as
indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware
without through-bolting.
C. Hollow Core Doors: Type - Standard (FSHC); plies and faces as indicated.
2.03 DOOR FACINGS
A. Wooden Door: Custom-made wooden main door; solid wood construction.
1. Diriyah / Heritage Style Design: Custom-fabricated, as approved by Client / Owner; refer
to photo shown on Drawing.
a. Provide decorative metal moldings, motifs and accessories: As approved by Owner
and Dar Al Riyadh - E & A..
b. Door Hardware: Door manufacturer's proprietary products approved by Owner and
Dar Al Riyadh - E & A.
2. Face Dimensions and Thickness: As shown on Drawings
B. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Red oak, [], plain sliced (flat cut), with book match
between leaves of veneer, running match of spliced veneer leaves assembled on door or panel
face.
1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade.
2. "Running Match" each pair of doors and doors in close proximity to each other.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1416 - 2 WOOD DOORS

 3. "Pair Match" each pair of doors; "Set Match" pairs of doors within 3 m of each other when
doors are closed.
4. Transoms: Continuous match to doors.
C. Veneer Facing for Opaque Finish: Medium density overlay (MDO).
D. Hardboard Facing for Opaque Finish: ANSI A135.4, Class 1 - Tempered, S2S (smooth two
sides) hardboard, 3.2 mm thick.
E. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Fire Doors: NEMA LD 3, SGF; color as
selected; textured, low gloss finish.
F. High Pressure Decorative Laminate Facing for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: NEMA LD 3, HGS; color
as selected; textured, low gloss finish.
G. Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.04 ACCESSORIES (WHERE INDICATED)
A. Wood Louvers:
1. Material and Finish: Teak wood species.
2. Louver Blade: Flush louver.
3. Louver Free Area: (As recommended by door manufacturer) percent.
B. Metal Louvers:
1. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel; pre-painted finish to color as selected.
2. Louver Blade: Inverted V blade, sight proof, light proof.
3. Louver Free Area: (As recommended by door manufacturer) percent.
4. Frame: (As recommended by door manufacturer) style with surface fasteners.
C. Glazed Openings:
1. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048.
2. Glazing: Single vision units, 6 mm glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
D. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for
countersink style tamper proof screws.
E. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face
edge.
F. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face
edge, specifically for double doors.
G. Architrave: Teak wood, best quality.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.
2. Provide solid blocking for other throughbolted hardware.
C. Glazed Openings: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
indicated on drawings.
D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard.
1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.
F. Cut and configure exterior door edge to receive recessed weatherstripping devices.
G. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1416 - 3 WOOD DOORS

2.06 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS
A. General: Finishing: As approved by Client / Dar Al Riyadh - E & A.
B. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS), Section 5 - Finishing for grade
specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Sheen: Flat.
2. Opaque:
a. System - 1, Lacquer, Nitrocellulose.
b. Color: As selected by Architect.
c. Sheen: Flat.
C. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
D. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
F. Install door louvers plumb and level.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION 08 1416

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 1416 - 4 WOOD DOORS

 SECTION 08 3200
SLIDING GLASS DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory fabricated sliding glazed doors with frames and operating hardware.
B. Insect screens.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between door frames and adjacent
construction.
B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Cylinder locks.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; 2017.
B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum
(Combined Document); 2015.
C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).
D. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009.
E. AAMA 1801 - Voluntary Specification for the Acoustical Rating of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Glazed Wall Sections; 2013.
F. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix);
2017a.
G. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating
Appendix); 2017a.
H. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016.
I. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2018.
J. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
K. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
M. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.
N. ASTM E1332 - Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation; 2016.
O. ASTM E1423 - Standard Practice for Determining the Steady State Thermal Transmittance of
Fenestration Systems; 2014.
P. ASTM E1425 - Standard Practice for Determining the Acoustical Performance of Windows,
Doors, Skylight, and Glazed Wall Systems; 2014.
Q. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; 2017.
R. ASTM F842 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Sliding
Door Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 2017.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3200 - 1 SLIDING GLASS DOORS

 S. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, and framed
opening tolerances.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 300 by 300 mm in size illustrating typical sliding door panel
corner construction, accessories, and finishes.
E. Submit two samples of door hardware.
F. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of
the following showing compliance with specified grade:
1. Evidence of AAMA Certification; label or other documentation.
2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.
3. Evidence of CSA Certification.
4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Certificate: Certify that sliding glass doors meet or exceed specified requirements.
H. Test Reports: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit test report(s) by
independent testing agency showing compliance with performance requirements in excess of
those prescribed by specified grade .
I. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning
requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified in this
section, with at least three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to project site and store in manufacturer's protective cartons until openings are
ready for door installation.
B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not
use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or
weather.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3200 - 2 SLIDING GLASS DOORS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SLIDING GLASS DOORS
A. Aluminum Clad Wood Sliding Doors: Extruded aluminum exterior cladding, 1.14 mm minimum
thickness, over wood unit and operable panel frame, factory fabricated, factory glazed;
complete with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchorage devices.
1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel.
2. Wood: As selected from manufacturers standard wood species, clear preservative treated
and type suitable for required finish.
a. Finger joints not permitted in transparent finished exposed surfaces.
b. Scarf joints permitted in transparent finished exposed surfaces only if color and grain
texture match.
3. Exterior Aluminum Finish: Class I natural anodized.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
4. Frame Depth: 152 mm, minimum.
5. Aluminum Members: Factory finished; screw lock corner construction; thermally broken.
6. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces
and for condensation occurring within frame construction.
7. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash.
8. Sill/Threshold: Extruded aluminum, finished to match exterior cladding.
9. Operable Panels: Stainless steel bottom rollers; adjustable.
B. Aluminum Sliding Doors: Extruded aluminum unit frame and operable panel frame, factory
fabricated, factory glazed; complete with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchorage
devices.
1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel.
2. Finish: Powder coat paint finish.
3. Color: White.
4. Frame Depth: 152 mm, minimum.
5. Aluminum Members: Factory finished; screw lock corner construction; thermally broken.
6. Drainage: Provide drainage to exterior for moisture entering joints and glazing spaces
and for condensation occurring within frame construction.
7. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash.
8. Operable Panels: Stainless steel bottom rollers; adjustable.
C. Composite Sliding Doors: Composite unit frame and operable panel frame consisting of 40
percent wood fiber and 60 percent thermoplastic polymer by weight, factory fabricated, factory
glazed; complete with integral sloped sill/threshold, flashings, and anchorage devices.
1. Configuration: One fixed panel and one horizontal sliding panel.
2. Composite Frame: Multiple chambered hollow co-extruded door frames, perimeter frame
sections and installation flanges, with integral interior and exterior face colors.
3. Perimeter Frame Depth at Head and Jamb: 130 mm, minimum.
4. Perimeter Frame Width at Head and Jamb: 44 mm, minimum, on interior side of frame.
5. Perimeter Frame Depth at Sill: 132 mm, minimum.
6. Sliding Door Frame Width: 57 mm, minimum.
7. Frame Flange Style: 25.4 mm flange setback, with stucco key.
8. Interior Door Frame Color: White.
9. Exterior Door Frame Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
10. Frame Joining System: Attachment system for horizontal and vertical multiple door
frames, transom glazing frames, and sidelight glazing frames in compliance with
designated project requirements.
a. Joining Strip: Kerfed and reinforced laminated veneer lumber (LVL), 116 mm wide by
19 mm thick for applying interior and exterior vinyl trim, end plugs, flange and gusset
gasket, and galvanized steel gusset plates.
b. Vinyl trim color to match exposed frame colors.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3200 - 3 SLIDING GLASS DOORS

 c. Fasteners: Corrosion resistant screws as recommended by manufacturer for
required applications.
d. Sealant: As recommended by door manufacturer, refer to Section 07 9200.
11. Glass Stops: Same material and color as frame, sloped for wash, factory applied.
12. Grill Pattern: 19 mm wide contour and set between the glass panels, in pattern as
selected by Architect.
13. Sill/Threshold: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) extrusion, 2.5 mm thick.
D. Construction: Factory assemble door frame as one unit, including head jambs, and sill; factory
assemble operating and fixed panels.
1. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around
perimeter of assemblies.
2. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof; accurately and rigidly
joined corners.
3. Sills: One piece, sloped to drain, with integral roller track.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Glazing: Double glazed, clear, Low-E coated, argon gas filled, fully tempered, with glass
thicknesses as recommended by manufacturer for specified wind conditions.
1. Flat Glass: In accordance with ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat Glass, Quality-Q3
(architectural glass).
2. Fully Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT - Fully Tempered.
3. Outboard Lite: Class 1 - Clear Glass; ASTM C1036.
4. Inboard Lite: Class 1 - Clear Glass; ASTM C1036.
5. Apply magnetron sputtering vapor deposition (MSVD) titanium dioxide (TiO2) coating to
No. 1 surface.
6. Air Space: 12.7 mm.
7. Sound Transmission Class (STC) Glazing: Provide manufacturer's standard STC rated
type; ASTM E90.
B. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh
taut and secure to frame; adjustable spring-loaded top and bottom rollers; screen removable
without use of tools; high-transparency vinyl-coated fiberglass screen mesh.
1. Screen Frame Color: Match door exterior color.
2. Operating Handle: Polycarbonate material with interior and exterior handles and lock
lever; as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
3. Screen handle color to match door frame exterior color, unless noted otherwise.
C. Muntins/Grilles: Removable grilles on interior of windows, not attached to glass.
1. Pattern: 4 lites across by 10 high, in each operable panel.
2. Bar Width: 19 mm.
3. Color: Match interior and exterior of frame.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, Type SD requirements in accordance with the
following:
1. Performance Class (PC): R.
2. Performance Grade (PG): 720 Pa.
B. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with full
recovery of glazing materials.
C. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance: Identical full-size glazed assembly without auxiliary protection,
tested by independent agency in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone 4 - Additional
Protection for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design wind pressure.
D. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled leakage on interior face when tested in
accordance with ASTM E331 at differential pressure of 580 Pa.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3200 - 4 SLIDING GLASS DOORS

 E. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.50 L/sec sq m at 300 Pa differential pressure, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283.
F. Door Frame Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF): CRF of 50, minimum, measured in
accordance with AAMA 1503.
G. Thermal Transmittance: U-factor of 0.35, maximum, that includes window glazing, door and
frame system based on average window size required for project and determined in
accordance with AAMA 1503, ASTM E1423, or NFRC 100.
H. Forced Entry Resistance (FER): Tested to comply with ASTM F842 requirements having at
least Grade 10 performance for each required sliding door assembly.
I. Acoustical Performance: STC rating of 30, when tested in accordance with ASTM E90, ASTM
E1425, or AAMA 1801 and ratings derived from ASTM E413 and ASTM E1332, respectively.
2.04 ASSEMBLY
A. Factory assemble door frame as one unit, including head jambs, and sill; factory assemble
operating and fixed panels.
B. Sizes: Allow for tolerances of rough framed openings, clearances, and shims around perimeter
of assemblies.
C. Joints and Connections: Flush, hairline width, and waterproof; accurately and rigidly joined
corners.
D. Sills: One piece, sloped to drain, with integral roller track.
E. Provide insect screen for each operable panel; finish frame same as door unless otherwise
indicated.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 clear anodic coating not less than
0.018 mm thick.
B. High Performance Organic Coatings: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured
fluoropolymer system.
C. Pigmented Organic Coatings: AAMA 2603; polyester or acrylic baked enamel finish.
D. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
E. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A. Pull Handles: Manufacturer's standard type.
1. Color: As shown on drawings.
2. Include integral locking mechanism.
B. Sliding Panel Bottom Rollers: Stainless steel, adjustable from interior.
C. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.
D. Cylinder Locks: Specified in Section 08 7100.
E. Anchors: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.
F. Sealant for Setting Thresholds: Non-curing butyl type.
G. Bituminous Paint: Fibered asphaltic type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as
indicated on shop drawings.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare opening to permit correct installation of door unit in conjunction with air and vapor seal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3200 - 5 SLIDING GLASS DOORS

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install sliding glass door units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten sliding door assembly to wall construction without
distortion or imposed stresses.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1.6 mm.
C. Maximum Variation from Level: 1.6 mm.
D. Longitudinal or Diagonal Warp: Plus or minus 3.2 mm from 3 m straight edge.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.
B. Remove labels and visible markings.
C. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and sliding glass door
manufacturer; rinse and wipe surfaces clean.
D. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean door aluminum surfaces in accordance with
AAMA 609 & 610.
E. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.
F. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction activities.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3200 - 6 SLIDING GLASS DOORS

 SECTION 08 3459
VAULT DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Burglary-resistance-rated vault door assemblies
B. Fire-resistance-rated vault door assemblies
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Vault wall construction.
B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Vault wall construction.
C. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Connection of automatic door closer to fire alarm
system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FS AA-D-600 - Door, Vault, Security; Federal Specification; 2000d (Amended 2010).
B. FS FF-L-2740 - Locks, Combination; Federal Specification; 2011b (Amended 2018).
C. UL 140 - Standard for Relocking Devices for Safes and Vaults; Underwriters Laboratories;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
D. UL 155 - Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Vault and File Room Doors; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
E. UL 768 - Standard for Combination Locks; Underwriters Laboratories; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets and installation instructions for all major
components including locks; include head, jamb, and sill sections; show elevations, clearances,
opening dimensions, door size(s), materials, finishes, and construction details.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare drawings specifically for this project, showing head, jamb, and sill
cross-sections to illustrate dimensional relationship of doors to adjacent construction and floor
finishes.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's
standard sizes.
E. Certificates: Provide written certify that products of this section comply with specified
requirements.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lock and emergency egress
mechanism.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum
three years of documented experience .
C. Product Test Reports: For each vault door, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver door and frame assemblies to project site in protective covering with manufacturer and
product name clearly marked.
B. Inspect materials for damage upon delivery. Replace damaged materials.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3459 - 1 VAULT DOORS

 C. Store door and frame assemblies under cover, in a dry location free from dust and other
contaminants, and elevated above grade.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BURGLARY-RESISTANCE-RATED VAULT DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Vault Door Assembly: Tested according to UL 608 and listed and labeled for burglary-
resistance ratings indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Burlglary Resistance Rating: UL 608, Class 3, two-hours working hours working time.
C. Door Jambs and head shaped to interlock with frame and with full-height, stainless steel locking
bar that engages verical jambs.
1. Door-contact alarm device
2. Heat detector
3. Emergency vault ventilator complying ULL680, with dame burglary classification as vault
door.
4. Pass-through port
5. In-door telephone jack.
6. Stainless steel back panel to conceal time lock
7. Can be side lifted.
D. Frame: Designed for nongrout installation; adjustable to accommodate wall thickness.
E. Hardware and Accessories:
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Handle: Manufactuer's standard.
3. Combination Locks: UL 768, Group1, four-wheel mechanical type capable of no fewer
than one million possible combinations
a. Quantity: Three per door.
4. Timelock: UL 887, three-movement, 199-hour timelock
5. Day Guard Lock: Secures locking bar in open position to prevent lock in of personnel
6. Sills: Manufacturer's standard
7. Door Stop: Tube-and-bumper style.
8. Trim: Stainless steel, chromium-plated steel or other trim standard with vault door
manufacturer.
F. Grille Gate: Full width of door opening and designed to restrict entry through vault door; with
piano-type or self-closing gravity hinges.
1. Construction: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Lock: Cylinder-type lock, controlled by key on nonsecure side and by knob on secure side.
3. Features:
a. Deal window
b. Automatic closure
G. Finish: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel clad finish applied to door, frame, and wall
flanges.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.02 FIRE-RESISTANCE RATED VAULT DOOR ASSEMBLIES
A. Vault Door Assembly: Complying with NFPA 232, tested according to UL 155, and listed and
labeled for fire-resistance ratings indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Resistance Rating : UL 155, Class 350, 6 hours.
C. Door: Fabricated from all-welded, insulated steel sheet construction, with jambs and head
shaped to interlock with frame.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3459 - 2 VAULT DOORS

 1. Clear Opening Size: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Frame: Fabricated from steel sheet and designed for nongrout installation, adjustable to
accommodated wall thickness.
E. Hardware and Accessories:
1. Hinges: No fewer than three roller-thrust-bearings hinges of design, size, and weight
required for smooth operation of doors and to allow full, clear door opening; with hinge
cover(s).
a. Hinge cover: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Door Bolts: Permanently lubricated, not less than 17 mm in diameter, and fabricated from
nickel-plated steel. On each vertical side of door, provide five door bolts that engage
frame when extended. Bolts automatically retract when handle is operated and
automatically extend whendoor closes.
3. Handle: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Combination Lock: UL 768, Group 2, three-wheel, mechanical type, capable of not less
than one million possible combinations.
a. Provide key locking dials.
5. Relocking Device: UL 140 separate relocking device that automatically deadlocks door
bolts when lock is subjected to mechanical attack.
6. Escape Mechanism: Provide emergency operation of lock from vault side of door.
7. Door Closer Automatic, with electromagnetic system and sensor that releases door on
detection of heat or smoke; with 180-degree, hold-open position.
8. Sill: Reinforced formed- or flat-steel plate.
9. Trim: Stainless-steel, chromium-plated, or other trim standard with door manufacturer.
F. Grille Gate:Manufacturer's standard gate; full width of door opening and designed to restict
entry throughvvault door; with piano-type or self-closing gravity hinges.
G. Painted Finish: Manufacturer's standard factory-applied, baked-on coating applied to vault door,
frame, and wall flanges.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installeer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work.
C. Verify that wall thickness and rough door opening are constructed correctly and of proper
dimensions.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions haven been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate size and location of vauld door assemblies with supporting construction, and furnish
anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their installation.
B. Provide temporary shoring or bracing of floors while transporting vault door assemblies to final
location as required to prevent surface damage to floors or deflection in excess of design loads.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, conditions of labeling authority and
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, with door and frame mounted plumb and true,
securely attached to vault wall construction.
B. Adjust operating components for proper function, free and smooth operation, and secure
locking; partially opened door should remain in position without manual or artificial stops.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3459 - 3 VAULT DOORS

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or replace damaged products prior to Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 3459 - 4 VAULT DOORS

 SECTION 08 4413
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum-framed curtain wall, with vision glazing and glass and metal infill panels.
B. Associated louvers and operable sash.
C. Column covers.
D. Firestopping between curtain wall and edge of floor slab.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Steel attachment members.
B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel attachment devices.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between frames and adjacent construction.
D. Section 08 6300 - Metal-Framed Skylights.
E. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
F. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting of interior surface of infill panels.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain
Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2014.
B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum
(Combined Document); 2015.
C. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).
D. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009.
E. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating
Appendix); 2017a.
F. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures;
Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
G. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
H. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
I. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
J. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2014.
K. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.
L. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.
M. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants;
2015a.
N. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
O. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 4413 - 1 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN

WALLS
 P. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
Q. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.
R. ASTM E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed
Exterior Windows and Doors; 2002 (Reapproved 2018).
S. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2015.
T. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.
2004).
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CURTAIN WALL
A. Aluminum-Framed Curtain Wall: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing
members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Outside glazed, with pressure plate and mullion cover, where indicated on drawings.
2. Fabrication Method: Field fabricated stick system.
3. Glazing Method: Field glazed system.
4. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2-1/2 inches wide by 7-1/2 inches deep.
5. Finish: Class I natural anodized.
a. Factory finish surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or
dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.
6. Provide flush joints and corners, weathersealed, accurately fitted and secured; prepared
to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as
required for imposed loads.
7. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration
harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
8. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
B. Structural Performance Requirements: Design and size components to withstand the following
load requirements without damage or permanent set.
1. Design Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
a. Measure performance by testing in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using test
loads equal to 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum
pressure.
b. Member Deflection: For spans less than 4115 mm, limit member deflection to flexure
limit of glass in any direction, and maximum of 1/175 of span or 19 mm, whichever is
less and with full recovery of glazing materials.
c. Member Deflection: For spans over 4115 mm and less than 12.2 m, limit member
deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, and maximum of 1/240 of span plus
6.4 mm, with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Seismic Loads: Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway
displacement in accordance with requirements of ASCE 7.
3. Movement: Accommodate the following movement without damage to components or
deterioration of seals:
a. Expansion and contraction caused by 82 degrees C surface temperature.
b. Expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 77 degrees C
over a 12 hour period.
c. Movement of curtain wall relative to perimeter framing.
d. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 4413 - 2 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN

WALLS
 4. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) System: For individual glass lites, design framing
members to not exceed a deflection normal to the wall of L/175 between supports with 19
mm maximum, and a deflection parallel to the wall of L/360 with 3.2 mm maximum,
whichever is less.
C. Water Penetration Resistance on Manufactured Assembly: No uncontrolled water on indoor
face when tested as follows:
1. Test Pressure Differential: 480 Pa.
D. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Maximum of 0.3 L/sec sq m of wall area, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283 at 300 Pa pressure differential across assembly.
E. Thermal Performance Requirements:
1. Condensation Resistance Factor of Framing: 50, minimum, measured in accordance with
AAMA 1503.
F. Acoustical Performance Requirements:
1. Sound Attenuation: STC of ___, minimum, from exterior to interior.
2. Test Method: ASTM E90, with calculation in accordance with ASTM E413.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior
section insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.
2. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings.
3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of
structural steel member.
B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.
C. Infill Panels: Insulated, aluminum sheet face and back, with edges formed to fit glazing channel
and sealed.
1. Face Sheet: [] thick.
2. Core: Glass fiber insulation core with RSI-value of ____.
3. Back Sheet: [] thick.
4. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
5. Interior Finish: Field painted in accordance with Section 09 9123.
D. Operable Sash: Aluminum project-in hopper; finished to match curtain wall; turn handle latch.
E. Column Covers: Aluminum, 0.81 mm minimum thickness, finish to match curtain wall framing
members.
F. Beam Covers: Aluminum, 0.81 mm minimum thickness, finish to match curtain wall framing
members.
G. Louvers: Extruded aluminum blades and frame, 100 mm deep; fabricated to eliminate blade
flutter.
1. Blades: 45 degree slope with storm-proof shape.
2. Finish: Same as curtain wall mullion sections.
H. Louver Screening:
1. Bird screen of ____ size at exhaust louvers inside surface.
2. Insect screen of ____ size at intake louvers inside surface.
I. Sun Screens: Shop fabricated, shop finished, extruded aluminum outriggers, louvers, and
fascia, free of defects impairing strength, durability or appearance.
1. Sun Screen Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
2. Louver Type: Bar.
3. Sun Screen Angle: ____ degrees from horizontal.
4. Outrigger Shape: Straight.
5. Design Criteria: Design and fabricate to resist the same loads as curtain wall system as
well as the following loads without failure, damage, or permanent deflection:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 4413 - 3 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN

WALLS
 a. Live: ___ kPa; minimum.
b. Thermal Movement: Plus/minus 3.175 mm, maximum.
6. Sizes: As indicated on drawings.
7. Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible; disassemble if necessary for shipping.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
C. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of
ASTM A123/A123M.
D. Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, with adhesion in compliance with ASTM C794; compatible with
glazing accessories.
E. Sill Flashing Sealant: Elastomeric, silicone or polyurethane, and compatible with flashing
material.
F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.
H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: Zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer
appropriate for use over hand cleaned steel.
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Class I Natural Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41 Clear anodic coating not less
than 0.018 mm thick.
B. High Performance Organic Coatings: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured
fluoropolymer system.
C. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
D. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other related work.
B. Verify that curtain wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive
work of this section.
C. Verify that anchorage devices have been properly installed and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install curtain wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G. Install louvers and associated flashings.
1. Fit blank-off plates tight to ductwork.
H. Pressure Plate Framing: Install glazing and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000,
using exterior dry glazing method.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 4413 - 4 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN

WALLS
 I. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) Adhesive: Install structural sealant glazing adhesive and
weatherseal sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 12 mm/30 m, whichever is less.
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.8 mm.
C. Sealant Space Between Curtain Wall Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 19 mm
and minimum of 6 mm.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of curtain wall manufacturer's field representative to observe for proper
installation of system and submit report.
B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent field testing and inspection
requirements, and requirements for monitoring quality of specified product installations.
C. Provide field testing of installed curtain wall system by independent laboratory in accordance
with AAMA 503 during construction process and before installation of interior finishes.
1. Perform a minimum of two tests in each designated area as indicated on drawings.
2. Conduct tests in each area prior to 10 percent and 50 percent completion of this work.
3. Field test for water penetration in accordance with ASTM E1105 with uniform static air
pressure difference (Procedure A) not less than 200 Pa.
a. Maximum allowable rate of water penetration in 15-minute test is 14 gram that is not
contained in an area with provisions to drain to exterior, or collected on surface of
interior horizontal framing member.
4. Field test for air leakage in accordance with ASTM E783 with uniform static air pressure
difference of 75 Pa.
a. Maximum allowable rate of air leakage is 0.5 L/s sq m.
D. Repair or replace curtain wall components that have failed designated field testing, and retest
to verify performance complies with specified requirements.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sash for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths, take care to remove dirt from corners, and wipe surfaces clean.
C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA
609 & 610.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 4413 - 5 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN

WALLS
 SECTION 08 5113
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Extruded aluminum windows with operating and fixed sash.
B. Factory glazing.
C. Operating hardware.
D. Insect screens.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS: Steel lintels.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between window frames and adjacent
construction.
C. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Operable sash within framing system.
D. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; American Architectural Manufacturers Association/Window and
Door Manufacturers Association/Canadian Standards Association; 2011.
B. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.
C. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum
(Combined Document); 2015.
D. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009.
E. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2015.
G. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
H. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
[Metric]; 2014.
I. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2013.
J. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.
K. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
L. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
M. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
N. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2015.
O. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; 2014.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5113 - 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

 P. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window
Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 2014.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, elevations of different types, framed opening
tolerances, method for achieving air and vapor barrier seal to adjacent construction, anchorage
locations, and installation requirements, and the following:
1. Mullion details for fenestration combinations including reinforcement and stiffeners.
2. Joinery details.
3. Expansion provisions.
4. Flashing and drainage details.
5. Weather-stripping details.
6. Thermal-break details.
7. Glazing details.
8. Accessories.
D. Samples: Submit two samples, 300 x 300 mm in size illustrating typical corner construction,
accessories, and finishes.
E. Hardware Schedule: Submit complete hardware schedule organized into sets based on
hardware specified. Coordinate hardware with related work to ensure proper size, thickness,
hand, function, and finish. Submit two samples of operating hardware.
F. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of
the following showing compliance with specified grade:
1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.
2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.
3. Evidence of CSA Certification.
4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Test Reports: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit test report(s) by
independent testing agency showing compliance with performance requirements in excess of
those prescribed by specified grade.
H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include complete preparation, installation, and cleaning
requirements.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication of commercial
aluminum windows of types required, with not fewer than ten years of experience.
B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of aluminum windows. Aesthetic effects
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profile componentss and assemblies
as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance
characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including
preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Dar Al Riyadh - Engineering
and Architecture (DAR), except with Client's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data for DAR's review and Client's approval in writing.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.
D. Testing of windows will be required. Test method shall be performed according to AAMA
standards for air infiltration, water penetration and wind load resistance.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5113 - 2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of AAMA CW-10.
B. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping paper or strippable coating during installation. Do not
use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to substrate when exposed to sunlight or
weather.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 24 hours after installation of sealants.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a ten year period after the Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WINDOWS
A. Aluminum Windows: Extruded aluminum frame and sash, factory fabricated, factory finished,
with operating hardware, related flashings, and anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Frame Depth: Manufacturer's standard, as approved by Dar Al Riyadh.
2. Operable Units: Double weatherstripped.
3. Provide units factory glazed.
4. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and
secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view;
reinforced as required for operating hardware and imposed loads.
5. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent
construction while allowing expected movement.
6. Movement: Accommodate movement between window and perimeter framing and
deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
8. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate thermal movement caused by 82.2 degrees
C surface temperature without buckling stress on glass, joint seal failure, damaging loads
on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction in performance or other
detrimental effects.
B. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific window type:
a. Performance Class (PC): R.
b. Performance Grade (PG): 720 Pa.
2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with
full recovery of glazing materials.
3. Wind-Borne-Debris Resistance: Identical full-size glazed assembly without auxiliary
protection, tested by independent agency in accordance with ASTM E1996 for Wind Zone
4 - Additional Protection for Large and Small Missile impact and pressure cycling at design
wind pressure.
4. Water Leakage: No uncontrolled leakage on interior face when tested in accordance with
ASTM E331 at differential pressure of 580 Pa.
5. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.5 L/sec sq m per unit area of outside frame dimension, with
300 Pa differential pressure when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5113 - 3 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

 6. Condensation Resistance Factor of Frame: 50, measured in accordance with AAMA
1503.
7. Overall U-value, Including Glazing: 0.35, maximum, measured on the window size
required for this project.
8. Forced Entry Resistance: Tested to comply with ASTM F588 requirements for
performance level of Grade 10 for specific window style required.
C. Outswinging Awning Type:
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Provide screens.
3. Glazing: Single; obscure; transparent.
4. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
5. Interior Finish: Class I natural anodized.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Frames: Manufacturer's standard profile, of 3 mm thick section; thermally broken with interior
portion of frame insulated from exterior portion; flush glass stops of snap-on type.
B. Glass: 24 mm (2+12+6) overall thickness, insulated glass units, tinted, as selected by
Architect.Comply with Section 08 8000.
1. For Exterior Windows: Awning, Sliding and Fixed types.
C. Sills: 3 mm thick, extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 12 mm
beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening jamb angles to terminate sill end.
D. Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with mitered and reinforced corners; screen mesh
taut and secure to frame; secured to window with adjustable hardware allowing screen removal
without use of tools.
1. Hardware: Spring loaded steel pins; four per screen unit.
2. Screen Mesh: Vinyl-coated fiberglass, window manufacturer's standard mesh.
3. Frame Finish: Same as frame and sash.
E. Operable Sash Weatherstripping: Nylon pile; permanently resilient, profiled to achieve effective
weather seal.
F. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
G. Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 8000.
H. Sealant for Setting Sills and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T6 temper.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 5005 alloy, H12 or H14 temper.
C. Concealed Steel Items: Profiled to suit mullion sections; galvanized in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M.
2.04 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel,
carbon steel, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible wih aluminum; designed to
smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows, and sized to
accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in frictional
contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide extruded, cast, or wrought aluminum or
non-magnetic stainless steel.
1. Finish: As selected by the Architect.
B. Manuacturer's standard retractable push-bar handle and opener in aluminum, nylon, and
stainless steel; with cam-action lock, and keeper.
C. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock; provide pole handle 120 mm long.
D. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5113 - 4 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

 E. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings,
removable pivot clips for cleaning.
F. Pulls: Manufacturer's standard type.
G. Limit Stops: Resilient rubber.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Aluminum Finishes:
1. High-performance Powder Coating Finish: Comply with AAMA 2604; factory-applied super
durable polyester powder coating system.
a. Dry Film Thickness: 80 microns minimum; white color; and gloss level as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Operator and Exposed Hardware: Enameled to color as selected from manufacturer's standard
line.
C. Apply 1 coat of bituminous coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
dissimilar materials.
D. Shop and Touch-Up Primer for Steel Components: Zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer
appropriate for use over hand cleaned steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive
aluminum windows.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install window assembly in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
C. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
and other irregularities.
D. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
E. Install sill and sill end angles.
F. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant.
G. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack
fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
H. Install operating hardware not pre-installed by manufacturer.
I. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with requirements specified in Section 08 8000.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 3 mm/3 m, whichever is
less.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test installed windows for compliance with performance requirements for water penetration, in
accordance with ASTM E1105 using uniform pressure and the same pressure difference as
specified for laboratory testing.
1. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.
B. Replace windows that have failed field testing and retest until performance is satisfactory.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5113 - 5 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from factory finished aluminum surfaces.
B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and
wipe surfaces clean.
C. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean aluminum surfaces in accordance with AAMA
609 & 610.
D. Remove excess glazing sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable
to sealant and window manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 5113

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5113 - 6 ALUMINUM WINDOWS

 SECTION 08 5123
STEEL WINDOWS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Factory finished steel windows with fixed sash.
B. Factory-installed glazing and infill panels.
C. Fire-rated steel windows.
D. Operating hardware and framed insect screens.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; 2017.
B. AAMA 502 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Fenestration Products;
2012.
C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
D. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
E. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
F. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
G. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
H. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
I. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
J. ASTM E783 - Standard Test Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed
Exterior Windows and Doors; 2002 (Reapproved 2018).
K. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2015.
L. ASTM E1332 - Standard Classification for Rating Outdoor-Indoor Sound Attenuation; 2016.
M. ASTM E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and Skylights;
2019c.
N. ASTM F588 - Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window
Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 2017.
O. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2019.
P. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
Q. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed.
2004).
R. SWI (INTRO) - Architect's Guide to Steel Windows and Doors; Current Edition.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5123 - 1 STEEL WINDOWS

 S. UL 9 - Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, fasteners, anchors, and glass.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related
work; installation requirements.
D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Test Reports: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit test report(s) by
independent testing agency showing compliance with performance requirements.
F. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage.
G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
H. Installer's Qualification Statement.
I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing windows specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect factory finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
1. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STEEL WINDOWS
A. Steel Windows: Hot rolled steel sections, factory fabricated, factory finished, with vision glass,
infill panels, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Grade: Standard Intermediate design based on SWI (INTRO).
2. Sash Configuration: Provide fixed non-operable, projected awning in, and projected
awning out sash layout.
3. Forced Entry Resistance: Comply with ASTM F588 requirements for performance level of
Grade 10 for window Type A in accordance with standard.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand wind loads without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using pressure equal to
1.5 times specified design pressures, with 10 second duration of maximum load.
B. Design Pressure: In accordance with applicable codes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5123 - 2 STEEL WINDOWS

 C. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 of the longer dimension; with full
recovery of glazing materials.
D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.03 L/s/sq m of wall area, measured at
a reference differential pressure across assembly of 75 Pa as measured in accordance with
ASTM E283.
E. Overall Thermal Transmittance (U-value): 0.35, maximum, including glazing, measured on
window sizes required for this project.
F. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 with a test pressure
difference of 136.85 N/sq m.
G. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing
channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system to the exterior by a weep drainage
network.
H. Acoustic Performance: Minimum outdoor-indoor transmission class (OITC) rating of 34, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E90 and ASTM E1332.
I. Fire-Rated Steel Windows: Comply with UL 9 and labeled with a 3/4 hour or 1 hour fire-test
rating as indicated in window schedule, design and fabricate units to meet glass size and
configuration, window size and opening dimensions in compliance with NFPA 80, and provide
hardware complying with NFPA 80 requirements.
1. Provide operable fire-rated windows that are self-closing and latching by means of heat
activated fusible link operator.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A. Frames: As shown on drawings; []deep profile; flush glass stops of snap-on type.
B. Reinforced Mullion: As shown on drawings; [] deep profile, (as shown on drawings) mm thick,
of shaped steel structural section.
C. Sills: [] thick, []; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash leg to 12 mm beyond wall face; one
piece full width of opening with jamb angles to terminate sill end.
D. Infill Panel: Internally reinforced, glazing edge sealed permitting internal air movement to
glazing space, outside air barrier line:
E. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled steel frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware;
nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.
F. Insect Screens: Woven copper mesh; 14/18 mesh size.
G. Insect Screens: 14/18 mesh, steel strands.
H. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather
seal.
I. Sealant for Setting Sills, Stools, Aprons, and Sill Flashing: Non-curing butyl type.
2.04 MATERIALS
A. Hot Rolled Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M, galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M requirements;
0.4 kg/m; with slot for fitting weather stripping integral with sash section.
B. Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 coating;
0.45 mm thick base metal.
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
D. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20.
2.05 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 8000 of Types as indicated below:
1. Glass in Exterior Lights: Type [].
2. Glass Infill Panels: Type [].

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5123 - 3 STEEL WINDOWS

2.06 HARDWARE
A. Sash lock: Lever handle with cam lock.
B. Operator: Lever action handle fitted to projecting sash arms with limit stops.
C. Projecting Sash Arms: Cadmium plated steel, friction pivot joints with nylon bearings,
removable pivot clips for cleaning.
D. Double Hung Sash: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, each sash, each jamb.
E. Horizontal Sliding Sash: Extruded PVC tracks, with limit stops in head and sill track.
F. Horizontal Sliding Sash: Nylon rollers in steel bracket, screw adjustable, with limit stops in
head and sill track.
G. Window Opening Control Devices (WOCD): Provide operable window sash hardware that
limits openings to only allow passage of 102 mm diameter rigid sphere or less, and are easily
releasable to fully open without use of keys, tools, or special knowledge.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush and hairline.
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D. Arrange fasteners to conceal from view.
E. Prepare components with reinforcement for operating hardware.
F. Reinforce mullions with internal galvanized steel members to maintain rigidity.
G. Provide internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide
internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes.
H. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame
and secure. Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers.
I. Double weatherstrip operable units.
J. Factory-glaze window units.
2.08 FINISHES
A. Window Frames: Baked enamel finish.
1. Factory-finished before forming.
2. Exterior Surfaces: White.
3. Interior Surfaces: White.
B. Screens: Color as selected by Architect.
C. Operator: Enameled with color as selected by Architect.
D. Concealed Steel Items:
1. Galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM A123/A123M.
2. Primed with iron oxide paint.
E. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
treated wood, cementitious, or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify wall openings and adjoining materials are ready to receive work of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install window frames and glass and glazing in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Install windows in accordance with ASTM E2112.
C. Install fire-rated windows in accordance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5123 - 4 STEEL WINDOWS

 D. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances
and other irregularities.
E. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and
alignment with adjacent work.
F. Install sill and sill end angles.
G. Set sill members and sill flashing in continuous bead of sealant.
H. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack
fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
I. Install operating hardware.
J. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, to glazing method required to
achieve performance criteria.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 3 mm/3 m.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of steel window manufacturer's field representative to observe for proper
installation of system and submit report.
B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent field testing and inspection
requirements, and requirements for monitoring quality of specified product installations.
C. Provide field testing of installed steel windows by independent laboratory in accordance with
AAMA 502 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 during construction process and before
installation of interior finishes.
1. Perform tests on three individual windows in designated locations as indicated on
drawings.
2. Conduct tests on individual windows prior to 5 percent and 50 percent completion of this
work.
3. Field test for water penetration in accordance with ASTM E1105 using Procedure B -
cyclic static air pressure difference; test pressure shall not be less than 91 Pa.
4. Field test for air leakage in accordance with ASTM E783 with uniform static air pressure
difference of 300 Pa.
a. Maximum allowable rate of air leakage is 0.5 L/s sq m.
D. Repair or replace fenestration components that have failed designated field testing, and retest
to verify performance complies with specified requirements.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Refer to Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
B. Remove protective material from factory finished surfaces.
C. Remove labels and visible markings.
D. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to window manufacturer; rinse and
wipe surfaces clean.
E. Remove excess glazing sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit continuing construction activities near unprotected finish surfaces.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 5123 - 5 STEEL WINDOWS

 SECTION 08 6223
TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular skylights, consisting of skylight dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 5100 - Built-Up Bituminous Roofing: Flashing-in of skylight base.
B. Section 07 5200 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Flashing-in of skylight base.
C. Section 08 6300 - Metal-Framed Skylights.
D. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for
windows, doors, and skylights; 2017.
B. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance
Rating; 2016.
C. ASTM A463/A463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process; 2015.
D. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
E. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2014.
F. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2018.
G. ASTM D1929 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignition Temperature of Plastics; 2016.
H. ASTM D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or Decomposition
of Plastics; 2019.
I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
J. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2017.
K. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
L. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
M. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
N. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; current edition, including all
revisions.
O. UL 790 - Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. ICC-ES evaluation report.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6223 - 1 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS

 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configurations, dimensions, locations, fastening methods, and
installation details.
D. Grade Substantiation: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit one of
the following showing compliance with specified grade:
1. Evidence of AAMA Certification.
2. Evidence of WDMA Certification.
3. Evidence of CSA Certification.
4. Test report(s) by independent testing agency itemizing compliance and acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Test Reports: Prior to submitting shop drawings or starting fabrication, submit test report(s) by
independent testing agency showing compliance with performance requirements in excess of
those prescribed by specified grade.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with not less than ten years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS
A. Tubular Skylights: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and curb, reflective tube, and
ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces.
1. Fabrication and assembly of components is by single manufacturer.
2. Non-Metal Parts: Flammability less than the following.
a. Roof-Top Components: Class B when tested in accordance with ASTM E108 or UL
790.
b. Self-Ignition Temperature: Greater than 343 degrees C, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D1929.
c. Smoke Developed Index: Maximum of 450, when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84; or maximum rating of 75, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2843.
d. Combustibility - Light Transmitting Parts: Minimum 64 mm/min (ICC Class CC-2),
when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
e. Combustibility - Non-Light Transmitting Parts: Minimum 64 mm/min (ICC Class CC-
2), when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
3. Thermal Movement: Fabricate to allow for thermal movement resulting from temperature
differential from minus 34 to 82 degrees C without damage to components, fasteners, or
substrates.
B. Roof Assemblies: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting
dome and top of tube.
1. Glazing: Acrylic plastic, 3.2 mm minimum thickness.
2. Low-Angled Sun Reflector: Concentric, light refracting etched lines, minimum 51 mm
high, to improve light input when sun is low on horizon.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6223 - 2 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS

 3. Base: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and
top of tube.
4. Base Material: Sheet steel, aluminized, ASTM A463/A463M, 0.61 mm thick, minimum.
5. Base Height: 102 mm.
6. Base Pitch (Slope): Flat, no pitch.
7. Flashing Extensions: Provide manufacturer's standard adaptors or extensions for tile
applications and slopes greater than 8:12.
8. Dome Ring: Attached to top of base section; 2.3 mm nominal thickness injection molded
high impact ABS; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and
channel condensed moisture out of tubing; weather seal of medium density pile weather
stripping.
C. Reflective Tube: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) aluminum sheet, thickness between 0.4 mm and
0.5 mm.
1. Interior Finish: Exposed interior surfaces of high reflectance specular finish; specular
reflectance of 92, total reflectance 95 percent.
2. Tube Diameter: 254 mm.
3. Tube Configuration and Length: As indicated on the drawings.
D. Diffuser Assemblies: Supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube, with
compression seal to minimize condensation and bug or dirt infiltration.
1. Ceiling Ring: Edge trim for ceiling opening; injection molded high impact ABS.
2. Diffuser Trim: Edge and attachment trim for diffuser lens; injection molded high impact
ABS.
3. Diffuser Shape at Solid Ceilings: Round, same diameter as tube.
4. Diffuser Shape in Lay-In Ceiling Grid: Square, 610 by 610 mm, to fit grid; metal transition
box.
5. Diffuser Shape at No Ceiling: Round, same diameter as tube.
6. Lens: Flush frosted lens.
7. Lens Material: Acrylic plastic.
8. Visible Light Transmission (VLT): 90 percent, minimum.
9. Seal: Closed cell EPDM foam rubber.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 requirements for specific tubular skylight:
1. Product Type: Tubular Daylighting Device, Closed Ceiling (TDDCC).
2. Performance Grade (PG): 1680 Pa.
B. No permanent deflection in excess of 0.2 percent of span.
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum 0.5 L/sec sq m per unit area of outside frame dimension at 300 Pa
pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
D. Water Resistance: No uncontrolled water leakage at 300 Pa pressure differential with water
rate of 206 L/h/sq m, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331; design to ensure that water
will not accumulate inside assembly.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal
of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Sealant: Elastomeric, silicone or polyurethane; compatible with materials being sealed.
C. Lighting Fixtures: Bracket mounted inside skylight tube just above diffuser; UL (DIR) listed.
1. Type: Compact fluorescent fixture, for 26 W lamps, 1 lamp per tube.
2. Electrical Requirements: 110 V, 15 amp GFCI circuit.
3. Contractor to furnish lamps.
D. Exhaust Fan: Permanently lubricated in-line fan motor, 52 L/s capacity; less than 2.0 sones
noise level and installed above ceiling level for reduced noise; complying with AMCA 210.
1. Exhaust Duct: Flexible, Class 1, in accordance with UL 181.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6223 - 3 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS

 2. Air Grill: ABS plastic with trim to fit installation conditions.
3. Exhaust Vent Cap: Low-profile roof cap.
4. Electrical Requirements: 110 V; install fan on same switch as internal light fixture.
5. Warranty on Electrical Parts: Five years manufacturer's standard warranty.
6. Warranty on Other Components: 10 years manufacturer's standard warranty.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Set roof assembly flashing in continuous bead of sealant.
C. Seal joints exposed to weather in accordance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Conduct field test for water tightness; conduct water test in presence of Architect. Correct
defective work and re-test until satisfactory.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6223 - 4 TUBULAR SKYLIGHTS

 SECTION 08 6300
METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aluminum skylight framing system.
B. Skylight glazing.
C. Fasteners, anchors, reinforcement, and flashings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Structural support framing for system.
B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Fabricated steel attachment devices.
C. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Skylight counterflashing.
D. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between skylight frames and adjacent
construction.
E. Section 08 8000 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AAMA 503 - Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Newly Installed Storefronts, Curtain
Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems; 2014.
B. AAMA 609 & 610 - Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architecturally Finished Aluminum
(Combined Document); 2015.
C. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating
Appendix); 2017a.
D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
E. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
F. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
G. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2014.
H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.
I. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.
J. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by
Means of a Durometer; 2015.
K. ASTM C793 - Standard Test Method for Effects of Laboratory Accelerated Weathering on
Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005 (Reapproved 2017).
L. ASTM C794 - Standard Test Method for Adhesion-In-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants;
2015a.
M. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.
N. ASTM C1087 - Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants
with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems; 2016.
O. ASTM C1135 - Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of
Structural Sealants; 2015.
P. ASTM C1184 - Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2018.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6300 - 1 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

 Q. ASTM C1249 - Standard Guide for Secondary Seal for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for
Structural Sealant Glazing Applications; 2018.
R. ASTM C1401 - Standard Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing; 2014.
S. ASTM D4479/D4479M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-Free;
2007, with Editorial Revision (2012).
T. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
U. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.
V. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2016).
W. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed
Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure
Difference; 2015.
X. ASTM E2112 - Standard Practice for Installation of Exterior Windows, Doors and Skylights;
2019c.
Y. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and installation
requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate framed opening requirements and tolerances, spacing of members,
anticipated deflection under load, affected related work, expansion and contraction joint
locations and details, and sizes and locations for field welding.
1. Show field measurements on shop drawings.
D. Shop Drawings: Provide details of proposed structural sealant glazing (SSG) and weather
sealant joints indicating dimensions, materials, bite, thicknesses, profile, and support framing.
E. Selection Samples: Submit full range of aluminum finish samples for Architect's color selection.
F. Samples: Submit two samples, not less than 305 by 305 mm in size illustrating appearance of
prefinished aluminum and specified glazing system, including glazed edge and corner.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
H. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering
calculations, and identify dimensional limitations.
I. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Submit product data and calculations showing compliance with
performance requirements.
J. Test Reports: Submit results of full-size mock-up testing. Reports of tests previously performed
on the same design are acceptable.
K. Field Quality Control Submittals: Report of field testing for water penetration and air leakage.
L. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
M. Designer's Qualification Statement.
N. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
O. Installer's Qualification Statement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6300 - 2 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design skylight system under direct supervision of a professional
engineer experienced in design of system type specified and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with not fewer than three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
section with at least three years of documented experience.
D. Full-Size Mock-up Testing: Have a specimen representative of project conditions tested by an
independent testing agency for compliance with specified structural, air infiltration, water
penetration, and thermal criteria.
E. Verify that each component is appropriate for use in structural sealant glazing (SSG)
application in regards to at least the following properties; size, shape, dimensions, material,
shelf-life, storage conditions, and color.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-ups.
B. Construct mock-up that includes examples of materials and conditions required in finished
skylight installation. Size mock-up ___ by ___ m.
C. Locate where directed by Architect.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide wrapping to protect prefinished aluminum surfaces. Do not use adhesive papers or
spray coatings that bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work, including leaks, discoloration, failure of seal at insulated glazing units,
and excessive thermal or structural movement, within a five year period after Date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
A. Metal Framed Skylights: Factory-fabricated, and glazed.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum structural members with integral condensation collection and
guttering system thermally separated from exterior pressure bar.
2. Glazing System: Pressure glazing bar system for sloped joints and two (2)-sided
structural sealant glazing (SSG) for horizontal joints.
3. Glazing: Insulating glass.
4. Aluminum Finish: High performance organic coatings.
5. Fabricate to prevent vibration harmonics, thermal movement transmitted to other building
elements, and loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of
system.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide metal-framed skylights that comply with the following:
1. Structural Design: Design and size components to withstand dead loads and specified
live loads without damage or permanent set.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6300 - 3 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

 2. Wind Loads: Test in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, using loads 1.5 times the
specified design pressures and 10 second duration of maximum load.
3. Design Pressure (DP): In accordance with applicable codes.
4. Concentrated Load: Design to withstand 114 kg concentrated load at any location on
framing members without permanent set.
5. Glazing Support Member Deflection Under Wind Load: 1/180 of span, maximum.
6. Structural Glazing Adhesive: Design system to limit stress on structural glazing adhesive
to 20 percent of tested tensile adhesion and maximum compression or elongation to 25
percent of neutral dimension.
7. Thermal Movement: Design system to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction
over ambient temperature range of 38 degrees C, dynamic loading and release of loads,
creep of concrete structural members and deflection of structural support framing without
damage to skylight system components or loss of weathertightness.
8. Thermal Resistance of Skylight Framing System: RSI-value of ____ K sq m/W.
9. Thermal Resistance of Light Transmitting Areas: RSI-value of ____ K sq m/W.
10. Air Leakage Laboratory Test: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 L/s/sq m for
glazed area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 75 Pa in
accordance with ASTM E283.
11. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) System: For individual glass lites, design framing
members to not exceed a deflection normal to the wall of L/175 between supports with 19
mm maximum, and a deflection parallel to the wall of L/360 with 3.2 mm maximum,
whichever is less.
12. Water Penetration: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at a test
pressure difference of 140 Pa.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper 6063-T5, 6063-T6, or 6061-T6 members complying
with ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), with minimum thickness 3.2 mm for structural members and
1.6 mm for non-structural members.
B. Formed Aluminum: Sheet material of alloy 5052, 5005, or 6061-T651 members complying with
ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), with minimum thickness 3.2 mm for structural members and 1.6
mm for non-structural members.
C. Internal Reinforcement: ASTM A36/A36M; Steel shapes as required for strength and mullion
size limitations, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
D. Insulating Glass: Sealed insulated units, outer pane of clear transparent, laminated glass; inner
pane of clear transparent, laminated glass; space of sealed air, metal edge frame.
E. Glazing Accessories: As recommended by manufacturer of skylight system.
F. Structural Sealant Glazing (SSG) Adhesive: Neutral curing, silicone sealant formulated for
SSG applications in compliance with ASTM C1184 and structural glazing industry guidelines,
ASTM C1401.
1. SSG adhesive in compliance with ASTM C920; Type M - Multicomponent, Grade NS,
Class 50, Use NT, G, and A.
2. Ultimate Tensile Strength: Minimum of 345 kPa as determined by test method ASTM
C1135 under the following conditions.
a. Exposure to air temperatures of 88 degrees C and minus 29 degrees C.
b. Water Immersion for seven (7) days, minimum.
c. Exposure to weathering for 5,000 hours, minimum.
3. Sealant Design Tensile Strength: 139 kPa, maximum.
4. Hardness: 20 to 60 with Type A-2 durometer in compliance with test method ASTM C661.
5. Shelf Life: Six (6) months, minimum.
6. Color: Gray.
7. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Less than 20 g/L.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6300 - 4 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

 8. SSG sealant tested for compatibility with glazing accessories in compliance with ASTM
C1087, tested for accelerated weathering in compliance with ASTM C793, and in
compliance with insulating glass secondary sealant design standards of ASTM C1249.
G. Weatherseal Sealant: Silicone, with adhesion in compliance with ASTM C794; compatible with
glazing accessories.
H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: Zinc rich type.
I. Protective Back Coating: Asphaltic mastic, ASTM D4479/D4479M, Type I.
J. Fasteners: Stainless steel.
K. Flashing: Matching finish of skylight frame system components; secure using un-concealed
fastening method, and seal with weather-tight sealant.
1. Galvanized steel, 0.45 mm minimum base metal thickness.
L. Anchorage Devices: Type recommended by manufacturer, exposed to view.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners with screw and spline; fabricate rigid joints with
connections that are flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
B. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction with minimum clearance and shim
spacing around perimeter of assembly.
C. Drain to exterior any water entering exterior joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels,
or migrating moisture occurring within system.
D. Prepare components to receive concealed anchorage devices, and ensure that fasteners will
be concealed upon completion of installation.
2.05 FINISHES
A. High Performance Organic Coatings: AAMA 2604; multiple coats, thermally cured
fluoropolymer system; interior surfaces only.
B. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that structural curb is ready to receive skylight system. Coordinate installation of roofing
and other adjacent work to ensure weathertight construction.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Apply single coat of protective coating to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact
with dissimilar materials.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal-framed skylights in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install metal-framed skylights in accordance with ASTM E2112.
C. Set skylight structure plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames or glazing
panels. Anchor securely in place in accordance with approved shop drawings.
D. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E. Install base flashings in accordance with Section 07 6200.
F. Touch up damaged finishes so repair is imperceptible from 1.8 m distance, and remove and
replace components that cannot be acceptably touched up.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb, Level, or Line: 1 mm per 1 m, or 9.5 mm total in overall
dimension.
B. Alignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: Within 1.6 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6300 - 5 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide services of metal-framed skylight manufacturer's field representative to observe for
proper installation of system and submit report.
B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for independent field testing and inspection
requirements, and requirements for monitoring quality of specified product installations.
C. Provide field testing of installed metal-framed skylights by independent laboratory in
accordance with AAMA 503 during construction process and before installation of interior
finishes.
1. Perform a minimum of two tests in each designated area as indicated on drawings.
2. Conduct tests in each area prior to 10 percent and 50 percent completion of this work.
3. Field test for water penetration in accordance with ASTM E1105 with uniform static air
pressure difference (Procedure A) not less than 200 Pa.
a. Maximum allowable rate of water penetration in 15-minute test is 14 gram that is not
contained in an area with provisions to drain to exterior, or collected on surface of
interior horizontal framing member.
D. Repair or replace metal-framed skylight components that have failed designated field testing,
and retest to verify performance complies with specified requirements.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, thoroughly clean skylight aluminum surfaces in accordance
with AAMA 609 & 610.
B. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
C. Wash down exposed surfaces; wipe surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 6300 - 6 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

 SECTION 08 7100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for wood, aluminum, and hollow metal doors.
B. Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D. Thresholds.
E. Weatherstripping and gasketing.
F. Gate locks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinet hardware.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealants for setting exterior door thresholds.
C. Section 08 0671 - Door Hardware Schedule: Schedule of door hardware sets.
D. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
E. Section 08 1116 - Aluminum Doors and Frames.
F. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors.
G. Section 08 4313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Door hardware, except as noted in section.
H. Section 28 1000 - Access Control: Electronic access control devices.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B. BHMA (CPD) - Certified Products Directory; Current Edition.
C. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2016.
D. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches;
2017.
E. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2014.
F. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2013.
G. BHMA A156.5 - American National Standard for Cylinders and Input Devices for Locks; 2014.
H. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2015.
I. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; 2016.
J. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;
2015.
K. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000; 2017.
L. BHMA A156.14 - American National Standard for Sliding and Folding Door Hardware; 2013.
M. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder,
Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; 2015.
N. BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2018.
O. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; 2014.
P. BHMA A156.20 - American National Standard for Strap and Tee Hinges, and Hasps; 2017.
Q. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; 2014.
R. BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems
Sponsor; 2017.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE

 S. BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; 2017.
T. BHMA A156.25 - American National Standard for Electrified Locking Devices; 2018.
U. BHMA A156.26 - American National Standard for Continuous Hinges; 2017.
V. BHMA A156.28 - American National Standard for Recommended Practices for Mechanical
Keying Systems; 2018.
W. BHMA A156.30 - American National Standard for High Security Cylinders; 2014.
X. BHMA A156.31 - American National Standard for Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted
Actuators; 2013.
Y. BHMA A156.36 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Locks; 2016.
Z. BHMA A156.115 - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and
Steel Frames; 2016.
AA. BHMA A156.115W - American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Wood Doors with
Wood or Steel Frames; 2006.
AB. DHI (H&S) - Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule; 1996.
AC. DHI (KSN) - Keying Systems and Nomenclature; 1989.
AD. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.
AE. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
AF. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
AG. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2019.
AH. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction,
Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
AI. NFPA 105 - Standard for Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives; 2019.
AJ. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2017.
AK. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
AL. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
AM. UL 437 - Standard for Key Locks; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
AN. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is
installed on.
B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing
work of this section; attendance is required by affected installers and the following:
1. Architect.
2. Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
3. Hardware Installer.
4. Owner's Security Consultant.
D. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation to manufacturers and fabricators of products
requiring internal reinforcement for door hardware.
E. Keying Requirements Meeting:
1. Attendance Required:
2. Agenda:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE

 a. Establish keying requirements.
b. Verify locksets and locking hardware are functionally correct for project requirements.
c. Verify that keying and programming complies with project requirements.
d. Establish keying submittal schedule and update requirements.
3. Incorporate "Keying Requirements Meeting" decisions into keying submittal upon review
of door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Access control requirements.
b. Key control system requirements.
c. Schematic diagram of preliminary key system.
d. Flow of traffic and extent of security required.
4. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with
two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
5. Deliver established keying requirements to manufacturers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog literature for each type of hardware, marked to clearly
show products to be furnished for this project, and includes construction details, material
descriptions, finishes, and dimensions and profiles of individual components.
C. Shop Drawings - Door Hardware Schedule: Submit detailed listing that includes each item of
hardware to be installed on each door. Use door numbering scheme as included in Contract
Documents.
1. Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
2. Comply with DHI (H&S) using door numbers and hardware set numbers as indicated in
construction documents.
3. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence.
4. Provide complete description for each door listed.
5. Provide manufacturer's and product names, and catalog numbers; include functions,
types, styles, sizes and finishes of each item.
6. Include account of abbreviations and symbols used in schedule.
D. Shop Drawings - Electrified Door Hardware: Submit diagrams for power, signal, and control
wiring for electrified door hardware that include details of interface with building safety and
security systems. Provide elevations and diagrams for each electrified door opening as follows:
1. Prepared by or under supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and
Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC).
2. Elevations: Submit front and back elevations of each door opening showing electrified
devices with connections installed and an operations narrative describing how opening
operates from either side at any given time.
3. Diagrams: Submit point-to-point wiring diagram that shows each device in door opening
system with related colored wire connections to each device.
E. Samples for Verification:
1. Submit minimum size of 51 by 102 mm for sheet samples, and minimum length of 102 mm
for other products.
2. Submit one (1) sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, and closer illustrating style, color, and
finish.
3. Return full-size samples to Contractor.
4. Submit product description with samples.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
G. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and
inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
1. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.
2. Bitting List: List of combinations as furnished.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE

 H. Keying Schedule:
1. Submit three (3) copies of Keying Schedule in compliance with requirements established
during Keying Requirements Meeting unless otherwise indicated.
I. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
J. Installer's Qualification Statement.
K. Supplier's Qualification Statement.
L. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
M. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and
conduit.
N. Maintenance Materials and Tools: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of
project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Lock Cylinders: Ten for each master keyed group.
3. Tools: One set of each special wrench or tool applicable for each different or special
hardware component, whether supplied by hardware component manufacturer or not.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for
use by Architect and Contractor.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified for
commercial door hardware with at least three years of documented experience.
D. Supplier Qualifications: Company with certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and
Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC) to assist in work of this section.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code
to match door hardware schedule.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Warranty against defects in material and workmanship for period indicated, from Date of
Substantial Completion.
1. Closers: Five years, minimum.
2. Exit Devices: Three years, minimum.
3. Locksets and Cylinders: Three years, minimum.
4. Other Hardware: Two years, minimum.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated.
B. Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer.
C. Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. Accessibility: ADA Standards and ICC A117.1.
3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101.
4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80, listed and labeled by qualified testing agency for fire
protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure in accordance with
NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE

 5. Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL (DIR), ITS (DIR), or testing
firm acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for application indicated.
6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide
door hardware that complies with local codes, and requirements of assemblies tested in
accordance with UL 1784.
a. Air Leakage Rate: Tested in accordance with UL 1784, with air leakage rate not to
exceed 0.01524 cu m/sec/sq m of door opening at 24.9 Pa of water for both ambient
and elevated temperature tests.
7. Listed and certified compliant with specified standards by BHMA (CPD).
8. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
9. Straps and Tee Hinges: BHMA A156.20.
10. Hardware Preparation for Steel Doors and Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115.
11. Hardware Preparation for Wood Doors with Wood or Steel Frames: BHMA A156.115W.
12. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) as suitable
for the purpose specified.
D. Electrically Operated and/or Controlled Hardware: Provide necessary power supplies, power
transfer hinges, relays, and interfaces as required for proper operation; provide wiring between
hardware and control components and to building power connection in compliance with NFPA
70.
1. Refer to Section 28 1000 for additional access control system requirements.
E. Lock Function: Provide lock and latch function numbers and descriptions of manufacturer's
series. Refer to Section 08 0671 for listing of hardware sets.
F. Fasteners:
1. Provide fasteners of proper type, size, quantity, and finish that comply with commercially
recognized standards for proposed applications.
a. Aluminum fasteners are not permitted.
b. Provide phillips flat-head screws with heads finished to match door surface hardware
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal and aluminum frames.
a. Self-drilling (Tek) type screws are not permitted.
3. Provide stainless steel machine screws and lead expansion shields for concrete and
masonry substrates.
4. Provide wall grip inserts for hollow wall construction.
5. Provide spacers or sex bolts with sleeves for through bolting of hollow metal doors and
frames.
6. Fire-Rated Applications: Comply with NFPA 80.
a. Provide wood or machine screws for hinges mortised to doors or frames, strike plates
to frames, and closers to doors and frames.
b. Provide steel through bolts for attachment of surface mounted closers, hinges, or exit
devices to door panels unless proper door blocking is provided.
7. Concealed Fasteners: Do not use through or sex bolt type fasteners on door panel sides
indicated as concealed fastener locations, unless otherwise indicated.
2.02 HINGES
A. Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1, Grade 1.
1. Self Closing Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.17.
2. Butt Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1 and BHMA A156.7 for templated hinges.
a. Provide hinge width required to clear surrounding trim.
3. Continuous Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.26.
4. Provide hinges on every swinging door.
5. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
6. Provide ball-bearing hinges at each door with closer.
7. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.
8. Provide non-removable pins on interior outswinging doors at locations as indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE

 9. Provide power transfer hinges where electrified hardware is mounted in door leaf.
10. Provide following quantity of butt hinges for each door:
a. Doors up to 1.5 m High: Two hinges.
b. Doors From 1.5 m High up to 2.3 m High: Three hinges.
c. Doors 2.3 m High up to 3 m High: Four hinges.
d. Doors over 3 m High: One additional hinge per each additional 762 mm in height.
e. Dutch Doors: Two hinges each leaf.
2.03 PIVOTS
A. Center-Hung and Offset Pivots: Comply with BHMA A156.4.
B. Self-Closing Pivots: Comply with BHMA A156.17.
C. Door Weight: Medium; standard openings with up to 650 lbs door weight.
2.04 FLOOR CLOSERS
A. Floor Closers: Comply with BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
B. Type: Heavy-duty, with 102 mm nominal depth floor preparation, and having 204 kg carrying
weight.
2.05 TRACK AND HANGERS
A. Pocket Doors: Provide pocket door kit, including header assembly, split studs, hangers, door
hanger plates, bumper, guides, floor plate, and end bracket.
1. Provide flush cup pull on both sides.
2. Provide edge pull in leading edge.
B. Sliding and Bifolding Door Hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.14.
1. Provide track, hanger fasteners, guides, and pulls; size track and hangers in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations for weight of doors.
2. Provide one pull for each pair of panels hinged together.
3. Provide flush cup pull on each sliding panel.
C. Face-Mounted Barn Door Hardware:
1. Provide stainless steel, round track rail, track fasteners, guides, latches and pulls; size rail
and hangers in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for weight of doors.
2. Track Length: 1.2 m, nominal.
3. Track Finish: As selected by Architect.
4. Hardware Style: As selected by Architect.
D. Door Weight: Medium; medium frequency of use with 150 to 200 lbs door weight.
2.06 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Flush Bolts: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Flush Bolt Throw: 19 mm, minimum.
2. Provides extension bolts in leading edge of door, one bolt into floor, one bolt into top of
frame.
a. Pairs of Swing Doors: At inactive leaves, provide flush bolts of type as required to
comply with code.
3. Provide dustproof floor strike for bolt into floor, except at metal thresholds.
4. Manual Flush Bolts: Provide lever extensions for top bolt at over-sized doors.
5. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; manually retracted;
located on inactive leaf of pair of doors.
6. Automatic Flush Bolts: Automatically latch upon closing of door; automatic retraction of
bolts when active leaf is opened; located on inactive leaf of pair of doors.
2.07 EXIT DEVICES
A. Exit Devices: Comply with BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
1. Lever design to match lockset trim.
2. Provide cylinder with cylinder dogging or locking trim.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE

 3. Provide exit devices properly sized for door width and height.
4. Provide strike as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
5. Provide less bottom rod (LBR) at scheduled locations to eliminate use of floor mounted
strikes.
6. Provide UL (DIR) listed exit device assemblies for fire-rated doors and panic device
assemblies for non-fire-rated doors.
7. For electrical options, provide quick connect plug-in pre-wired connectors.
2.08 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Electric Strikes: Comply with BHMA A156.31, Grade 1.
1. Provide UL (DIR) listed burglary-resistant electric strike; style to suit locks.
2. Provide non-handed 24 VDC electric strike suitable for door frame material and scheduled
lock configuration.
3. Provide field selectable Fail Safe/Fail Secure modes.
4. Provide transformer and rectifier as necessary for complete installation.
5. Connect electric strikes into fire alarm where non-rated doors are scheduled to release
with fire or sprinkler alarm condition.
2.09 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS
A. Electromagnetic Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.23, Grade 1.
1. Holding Force: 272 kgs, minimum.
2. Voltage: 12 VDC, and provide power supplies by same manufacturer as locks.
3. Provide electromagnetic locks for fire-rated doors in compliance with UL 10C.
4. Mounting: Surface mounted to door and frame on secure side, with fasteners, brackets,
and spacer bars as required for application.
5. Provide concealed sensing device within device that monitors magnetic holding force to
ensure appropriate door lock.
6. Provide concealed adjustable time delay option to re-lock door, adjustable from 1 to 90
seconds.
2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of each lock, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide standard, electronic, conventional, full size interchangeable core (FSIC), and
small format interchangeable core (SFIC) type cylinders, Grade 1, with six-pin core in
compliance with BHMA A156.5 at locations indicated.
2. Provide high security mechanical type cylinders, Grade 1, with six-pin core in compliance
with BHMA A156.30 or UL 437 at locations indicated.
3. Provide cylinders from same manufacturer as locking device.
4. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices.
5. Within specific Door Sections, when provisions for lock cylinder are being referenced to
this Section, provide specified lock cylinder and keyed to building keying system, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.11 CYLINDRICAL LOCKS
A. Cylindrical Locks (Bored): Comply with BHMA A156.2, Grade 1, 4000 Series.
1. Bored Hole: 54 mm diameter.
2. Latchbolt Throw: 12.7 mm, minimum.
3. Backset: 70 mm unless otherwise indicated.
4. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each latchset or lockset with strike box
and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated requirements.
a. Finish: To match lock or latch.
b. Flat-Lip Strikes: Provide for locks with three piece antifriction latchbolts as
recommended by manufacturer.
c. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: Provide for locks used on frames with applied wood casing
trim.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE

 d. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide strike box fabricated for use with aluminum
framing by framing manufacturer.
e. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for use with rabbeted meeting rails.
5. Provide a lock for each door, unless otherwise indicated that lock is not required.
6. Provide an office lockset for swinging door where hardware set is not indicated.
7. Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of each lock, unless otherwise indicated.
2.12 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Mortise Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, Security, 1000 Series.
1. Latchbolt Throw: 19 mm, minimum.
2. Deadbolt Throw: 25.4 mm, minimum.
3. Backset: 70 mm unless otherwise indicated.
4. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each latchset or lockset with strike box
and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated requirements.
a. Flat-Lip Strikes: Provide for locks with three piece antifriction latchbolts as
recommended by manufacturer.
b. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: Provide for locks used on frames with applied wood casing
trim.
c. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide strike box fabricated for use with aluminum
framing by framing manufacturer.
d. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for use with rabbeted meeting rails.
e. Finish: To match lock or latch.
2.13 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS
A. Electromechanical Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.25, Grade 1.
1. Provide motor-driven or solenoid-driven locks, with strike that is applicable to frame.
2. Type: Mortise deadbolt.
2.14 AUXILIARY LOCKS (DEADLOCKS)
A. Auxiliary Locks (Deadlocks): Comply with BHMA A156.36, Grade 1.
1. Type: Bored (cylindrical).
2. Application: Bored.
3. Backset: 70 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Bolt Throw: 12.7 mm, with latch made of hardened steel.
5. Provide strike that matches frame.
2.15 DOOR PULLS AND PUSH PLATES
A. Door Pulls and Push Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1. Pull Type: Straight, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Push Plate Type: Flat, with square corners, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Edges: Beveled, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Material: Aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Provide door pulls and push plates on doors without a lockset, latchset, exit device, or
auxiliary lock unless otherwise indicated.
5. On solid doors, provide matching door pull and push plate on opposite faces.
6. On glazed storefront doors, provide matching door pulls/push plates on both faces unless
otherwise indicated.
2.16 DOOR PULLS AND PUSH BARS
A. Door Pulls and Push Bars: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1. Bar Type: Bar set, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material: Aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
2.17 COORDINATORS
A. Coordinators: Provide on doors having closers and self-latching or automatic flush bolts to
ensure that inactive door leaf closes before active door leaf.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE

 1. Type: Bar, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material: Aluminum, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Ensure that coordination of other door hardware affected by placement of coordinators
and carry bar is applied properly for completely operable installation.
2.18 CLOSERS
A. Closers: Comply with BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Type: Surface mounted to door.
2. Provide door closer on each exterior door.
3. Provide door closer on each fire-rated and smoke-rated door.
a. Spring hinges are not an acceptable self-closing device, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Where an overlapping astragal is included on pairs of swinging doors, provide coordinator
to ensure door leaves close in proper order.
5. At corridor entry doors, mount closer on room side of door.
6. At outswinging exterior doors, mount closer on interior side of door.
2.19 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Overhead Stops and Holders (Door Checks): Comply with BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
1. Provide stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop
feature of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.20 PROTECTION PLATES
A. Protection Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
B. Metal Properties: Stainless steel.
1. Metal, Standard Duty: Thickness 1.27 mm, minimum.
2. Metal, Heavy Duty: Thickness 1.57 mm, minimum.
3. Metal, Extra Heavy Duty - Diamond Plate: Thickness 3.175 mm, minimum, with raised
diamond plate surface.
4. Metal, Extra Heavy Duty - Flat Plate: Thickness 3.175 mm, minimum, with smooth plate
surface.
C. Edges: Beveled, on four sides unless otherwise indicated.
D. Fasteners: Countersunk screw fasteners.
E. Provide clear anti-microbial coating that is silver ion-based.
F. Drip Guard: Provide at head of exterior doors unless covered by roof or canopy.
2.21 KICK PLATES
A. Kick Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of every door with closer, except
aluminum storefront and glass entry doors, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Size: 203 mm high by 51 mm less door width (LDW) on push side of door.
2.22 MOP PLATES
A. Mop Plates: Provide along bottom edge of push side of doors to provide protection from
cleaning liquids and equipment damage to door surface.
1. Size: 152 mm high by 38 mm less door width (LDW) on pull side and 51 mm LDW on
push side of door.
2.23 STRETCHER PLATES
A. Stretcher Plates: Provide along middle of push side and pull side of doors to provide protection
from stretcher hitting door and damaging door surface.
1. Size: 152 mm high by 38 mm less door width (LDW) on pull side and 51 mm LDW on
push side of door.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 9 DOOR HARDWARE

2.24 DOOR EDGE PLATES
A. Door Edge Plates: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1. Provide along latching edge of door to protect from damage as objects are moved through
door opening.
2. Material: Aluminum, at least 1.27 mm thick.
3. Type: Square edge, mortised into edge of door.
2.25 DOOR HOLDERS
A. Door Holders: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
1. Provide surface mounted door holders when wall or floor stop is not applicable and hold-
open device is mounted on door.
2. Type: Lever, or kick down stop, with rubber bumper at bottom end.
3. Material: Aluminum.
2.26 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: Comply with BHMA A156.15.
1. Type: Wall mounted, single unit, standard duty, with strike plate attached to door.
2. Holding Force, Standard Duty: 177 N, minimum.
3. Voltage: 12 VDC, and provide power supplies by same manufacturer as holders.
4. Fail safe; door released to close automatically when electrical current is interrupted.
5. Provide interface with fire detectors and fire-alarm system for fire-rated door assemblies.
2.27 FLOOR STOPS
A. Floor Stops: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as
described in this standard.
1. Provide floor stops when wall surface is not available; be cautious not to create a tripping
hazard.
2. Type: Manual hold-open, with pencil floor stop.
3. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert.
2.28 WALL STOPS
A. Wall Stops: Comply with BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 and Resilient Material Retention Test as
described in this standard.
1. Type: Bumper, concave, wall stop.
2. Material: Aluminum housing with rubber insert.
2.29 ASTRAGALS
A. Astragals: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
1. Provide surface mounted astragal to cover or fill space for full door height between pair of
doors or door and adjacent jamb.
2. Type: Split, two parts, and with sealing gasket.
3. Material: Aluminum, with neoprene weatherstripping.
4. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.
2.30 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: Comply with BHMA A156.21.
1. Provide threshold at interior doors for transition between two different floor types, and over
building expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide threshold at each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Type: Flat surface.
4. Material: Aluminum.
5. Threshold Surface: Fluted horizontal grooves across full width.
6. Field cut threshold to profile of frame and width of door sill for tight fit.
7. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 10 DOOR HARDWARE

2.31 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING
A. Weatherstripping and Gasketing: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
1. Head and Jamb Type: Adjustable.
2. Door Sweep Type: Encased in retainer.
3. Material: Aluminum, with brush weatherstripping.
4. Provide gasketing for smoke and draft control doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings) that
complies with local codes, requirements of assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784.
5. Provide frame-applied intumescent gasketing on wood doors that are labeled as smoke
and draft control doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings), unless otherwise indicated.
6. Refer to Section 08 1416 when wood door to frame sealing system is applied by door
manufacturer.
7. Provide weatherstripping on each exterior door at head, jambs, and meeting stiles of door
pairs, unless otherwise indicated; .
8. Provide door bottom sweep on each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Provide sound-rated gasketing and automatic door bottom on doors indicated as "Sound-
Rated", "Acoustical", or with "Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating"; fabricate as
continuous gasketing, do not cut or notch gasketing material.
10. Provide applicable gasketing on doors indicated as "Lightproof."
2.32 BUMPER GUARD
A. Bumper Guard: Provide to protect door surface and operating hardware from being damaged
by heavy objects that move through opening.
1. Type: Exit device, surface mounted.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
2.33 COAT HOOKS
A. Coat Hooks: Provide on room side of door, screw fastened.
B. Material: Brass.
2.34 GATE LATCH
A. Gate Latch: Provide to secure a gate used for traffic control to prevent pedestrian traffic into an
area, located on inside of gate with turn piece.
1. Material: Brass.
2.35 PADLOCKS
A. Padlocks: Solid extruded brass case with shackle that locks at heel and toe.
1. Shackle Height: 19 mm, and width of opening is 22.2 mm.
2. Shackle Material: Brass.
3. Shackle Diameter: 6.4 mm.
4. Finish: 606 - Satin Brass.
5. Keying: 7-pin SFIC (Small Format Interchangeable Core).
6. Lock Functions:
a. Key retained (T).
b. Non-key retained (L).
c. Frangible shackle (F3).
d. Double lockout (ZZ).
e. Shrouded with 38 mm cut-resistant shackle (SH).
f. Weather cover (WC).
g. Cut-resistant shackle (XSPL).
h. Car seal slot (S).
2.36 DOOR GUARD
A. Door Guard: Provide as a secondary precaution, typically on dwelling or hotel room entrance
doors, that allows a mechanical means to ensure privacy on inside of locked door with
protection plate.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 11 DOOR HARDWARE

 1. Material: Aluminum.
2.37 KNOCKERS
A. Knockers: Provide both a means of knocking on door without using your hand and an aesthetic
appeal to door design.
1. Type: Ornate door knocker.
2. Material: Brass.
2.38 LATCH PROTECTOR
A. Latch Protector: Provide on door to protect latch from being tampered with while in locked
position.
1. Type: Standard latch protector.
2. Material: Stainless steel.
2.39 MAGNETIC CATCH
A. Magnetic Catch: Provide on doors that are not frequently used and need to latch, and on doors
that must stay in closed position within the frame.
1. Location: Mount magnetic catch at top of door jamb with strike plate fastened to door.
2. Material: Brass.
2.40 VIEWER
A. Viewer: Provide at inside of door at eye level to see who is on outside of door, with integral
door knocker.
1. Material: Brass.
2.41 WIRELESS ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS
A. Wireless Access Management Systems: Comply with guidelines of BHMA A156.25, and
including necessary hardware for fully functional system.
1. Reader Formats: Provide magnetic stripe, proximity, dual validation, or key Fob to
activate access system functionality.
2. Door Locking Hardware: Provide applicable cylindrical locksets, panic hardware, or
mortise locksets in compliance with project access control requirements.
2.42 KEY CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. Key Control Systems: Comply with guidelines of BHMA A156.28.
1. Provide keying information in compliance with DHI (KSN) standards.
2. Keying: Grand master keyed.
3. Include construction keying and control keying with removable core cylinders.
4. Key to existing keying system.
5. Supply keys in following quantities:
a. 1 each Grand Master keys.
b. 6 each Construction Master keys.
c. 15 each Construction keys.
d. 2 each Construction Control keys.
e. 2 each Control keys if new system.
f. 2 each Extra Cylinder cores.
g. 2 each Change keys for each keyed core.
6. Key Management System: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of
consecutively numbered duplicate key tags with hanging hole and snap catch.
7. Security Key Tags: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of matching key tags
for permanent attachment to one key of each set.
8. Provide key collection envelopes, receipt cards, and index cards in quantity suitable to
manage number of keys.
9. Deliver keys with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware
supplier.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 12 DOOR HARDWARE

 10. Permanent Keys and Cores: Stamped with applicable key marking for identification. Do
not include actual key cuts within visual key control marks or codes. Stamp permanent
keys "Do Not Duplicate."
11. Owner or Owner's agent install permanent cores and return construction cores to
hardware supplier. Construction cores and keys to remain property of hardware supplier.
2.43 KEY CABINET
A. Key Cabinet: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with key lock; BHMA A156.28.
1. Mounting: Wall-mounted.
2. Capacity: Actual quantity of keys, plus 25 percent additional capacity.
3. Horizontal metal hook strips with replaceable labels covered with clear plastic.
4. Size key hooks to hold 6 keys each.
5. Finish: Baked enamel, manufacturer's standard color.
6. Key cabinet lock to building keying system.
2.44 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX
A. Fire Department Lock Box:
1. Capacity: Holds 10 keys.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark bronze.
2.45 EXIT MOTION SENSOR
A. Exit Motion Sensor: Interior passive infrared detection device to initiate door release of exit
door magnetic lock.
1. Power: 12 VDC.
2. Provide adjustable detector face to allow for precise pattern configurations, and easy
pattern adjustment.
3. Provide relay that operates before transistor to prevent false alarms.
4. Operating Temperature: 0 to 43 degrees C.
2.46 KEY PAD
A. Key Pad: Indoor or outdoor use, 12-key digital keypad with silicone rubber keys, and
compatible with access control systems using standard Wiegand output.
1. Power: 12 VDC; 35mA Active and 7mA at Rest.
2. Mounts on narrow mullion, 38 mm wide by 178 mm high by 25.4 mm deep.
3. Operating Temperature: Minus 30 to 70 degrees C.
4. Finish: Black.
2.47 KEY SWITCH
A. Key Switch: Tubular key type, single gang, with bi-color LED.
1. Power: 12 VDC.
2. Operating Temperature: 0 to 43 degrees C.
2.48 POWER SUPPLY
A. Power Supply: Hard wired, with multiple zones providing eight (8) breakers for each output
panel with individual control switches and LED's; UL (DIR) Class 2 listed.
1. Power: 24 VAC, 10 Amp; with 120 VAC power supply.
2. Operating Temperature: 0 to 43 degrees C.
3. Provide with emergency release terminals that release devices upon activation of fire
alarm system.
2.49 FINISHES
A. Finishes: Identified in Section 08 0671 - Door Hardware Schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive this work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames
are properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 13 DOOR HARDWARE

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with applicable codes and NFPA
80.
C. Install hardware for smoke and draft control doors in accordance with NFPA 105.
D. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
E. Do not install surface mounted items until application of finishes to substrate are fully
completed.
F. Door Hardware Mounting Heights: Distance from finished floor to center line of hardware item.
As indicated in following list; unless noted otherwise in Door Hardware Schedule or on
drawings.
G. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of contact
with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel
countersunk screws.
1. Refer to Section 07 9200 for additional requirements.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of Section 01 4000 - Quality
Requirements.
B. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to inspect installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
C. Adjust gasketing for complete, continuous seal; replace if unable to make complete seal.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean finished hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions after final
adjustments have been made.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
C. Replace items that cannot be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional
cost.
D. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout
Requirements.
B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 7100 - 14 DOOR HARDWARE

 SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Insulating glass units.
B. Glazing units.
C. Plastic sheet glazing units.
D. Plastic films.
E. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 4100 - Architectural Wood Casework: Cabinets with requirements for glass shelves.
B. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.
C. Section 08 4413 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls: Glazing furnished as part of wall assembly.
D. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.
E. Section 08 6300 - Metal-Framed Skylights: Glazing furnished as part of skylights assembly.
F. Section 10 2800 - Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories: Mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015.
C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures;
Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2015).
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018.
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2016.
G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2018.
H. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.
I. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016.
J. ASTM C1349 - Standard Specification for Architectural Flat Glass Clad Polycarbonate; 2017.
K. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat
Glass; 2015.
L. ASTM D882 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting; 2012.
M. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
N. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2019.
O. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2016.
P. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes; 2017.
Q. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
R. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2008.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 1 GLAZING

 S. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; 2008.
T. GANA (LGRM) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; 2009.
U. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
V. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for
Commercial & Residential Use; 1990 (2016).
W. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
X. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 2017.
Y. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2017.
Z. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and
Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014, with Errata (2017).
AA. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and
Systems; 2017.
AB. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
AC. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
AD. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
AE. UL 263 - Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
AF. UL 752 - Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
AG. UL 972 - Standard for Burglary Resisting Glazing Material; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit, Glazing Unit, Plastic Sheet Glazing Unit, and Plastic
Film Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, special handling and installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify
available colors.
D. Samples: Submit two samples ___ by ___ mm in size of glass units.
E. Samples: Submit ____ mm long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
F. Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
H. Installer's Qualification Statement.
I. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA TM-
3000 for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1. Provide certified glass products through ANSI accredited certifications that include plant
audits and independent laboratory performance testing.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years documented experience.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 2 GLAZING

 1. Provide company, field supervisors, and installers that hold active ANSI accredited
certifications in appropriate categories for work specified.
D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of the type specified in this section.
1.06 MOCK-UPS
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional mock-up requirements.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 4 degrees C.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including providing products to replace failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a five (5) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
delamination, including providing products to replace failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to support assembly dead loads, and
to withstand live loads caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of
glass.
1. Design Pressure: Calculated in accordance with ASCE 7.
2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions,
and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.
3. Seismic Loads: Design and size glazing components to withstand seismic loads and
sway displacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7.
4. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of
supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load.
5. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.
B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity
of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier.
1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.
a. Refer to Section 07 2500.
2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane insulating glass units for the continuity of the
vapor retarder and air barrier seal.
3. To maintain a continuous vapor retarder and air barrier throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide exterior glazing products with performance
properties as indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's
published data as determined with the following procedures and/or test methods:
1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National
Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.
2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 6.3 computer program.
3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Refer to Architectural Drawing Nos. A6.01, A6.02, A6.03. and A6.04 for exterior details of doors
and windows. Refer to "Notes" in these Drawings for thickness, face dimensions and types of
glazing units.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 3 GLAZING

 B. Float Glass: Provide float glass based glazing unless otherwise indicated.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality - Q3.
2. Kind HS - Heat-Strengthened Type: Complies with ASTM C1048.
3. Kind FT - Fully Tempered Type: Complies with ASTM C1048.
4. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 or 16 CFR 1201 criteria for
safety glazing used in hazardous locations.
5. Heat-Soak Testing (HST): Provide HST of fully tempered glass used on canopy, point-
supported, spider wall, high-risk, sloping overhead, horizontal overhead, free-standing
glass protective barrier, or other demanding applications of project, to reduce risks of
spontaneous breakage due to nickel sulfide (NiS) induced fractures in accordance with
industry established testing requirements.
6. Impact Resistant Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B, or 16 CFR 1201 -
Category I criteria.
7. Tinted Type: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, Quality - Q3, with color and performance
characteristics as indicated.
8. Patterned Glass Type: ASTM C1036, Type II - Patterned Flat Glass, Quality - Q5, Form 3
- Patterned glass, with color and performance characteristics as indicated.
9. Wired Glass Type: ASTM C1036, Type II - Wired Flat Glass, Quality - Q6, with color and
performance characteristics as indicated.
10. Safety Wired Glass Type: ASTM C1036, Type II - Wired Flat Glass, Quality - Q5,
complying with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B, or 16 CFR 1201 - Category I impact test
requirements, and with color and performance characteristics as indicated.
11. Thicknesses: As indicated; provide greater thickness as required for exterior glazing wind
load design.
C. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172.
1. Laminated Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 - Class B or 16 CFR 1201 - Category
I impact test requirements.
2. Polyvinyl Butyral (PVB) Interlayer: 0.762 mm thick, minimum.
a. Glass Fins: Tempered, low-iron glass
b. Thicknes and Face Dimensions: As recommended by manufacturer
2.03 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or
magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision
glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.
3. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
4. Spacer Color: Black.
5. Edge Seal:
a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied
between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant
as secondary seal applied around perimeter.
b. Color: Black.
6. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.
7. Capillary Tubes: Provide tubes from air space for insulating glass units without inert type
gas that have a change of altitude greater than 762 m between point of fabrication and
point of installation to permit pressure equalization of air space.
a. Capillary Tubes: Tubes to remain open and be of length and material type in
accordance with insulating glass fabricator's requirements.
b. Inert gas may be installed in the field into air space in accordance with insulating
glass fabricator's and installer's requirements.
B. Insulating Glass Units: Vision glass, double glazed.
1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 4 GLAZING

 2. Space between lites filled with air.
3. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6.4 mm thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Self-cleaning type, on #1 surface.
c. Coating: Low-E (passive type), on #2 surface.
4. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6.4 mm thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: _____, on #3 surface.
5. Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of ____, with special acoustical spacer and edge
seal.
6. Total Thickness: 25.4 mm.
7. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: _____, nominal.
8. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
9. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
11. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: _____ percent, nominal.
12. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
C. Insulating Glass Units: Spandrel glazing.
1. Applications: Exterior spandrel glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space between lites filled with air.
3. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6.4 mm thick, minimum.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Coating: Same as on vision units, on #2 surface.
4. Inboard Lite: Heat-strengthened float glass, 6.4 mm thick.
a. Tint: Clear.
b. Opacifier: Ceramic frit, on #4 surface.
c. Opacifier Color: _____.
5. Total Thickness: 25.4 mm.
6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: _____, nominal.
D. Insulating Glass Units: Safety glazing.
1. Applications:
a. Glazed lites in exterior doors.
b. Glazed sidelights and panels next to doors.
c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
d. Other locations indicated on drawings.
2. Space between lites filled with air.
3. Glass Type: Same as other vision glazing except use fully tempered float glass for both
outboard and inboard lites.
4. Tint: Clear.
5. Total Thickness: 25.4 mm.
6. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: _____, nominal.
7. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
8. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
10. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: _____ percent, nominal.
11. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
2.04 BASIS OF DESIGN - INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Basis of Design - Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, with Low-E coating.
1. Applications: Exterior insulating glass glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Space between lites filled with air.
3. Total Thickness: 25.4 mm.
4. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: _____, nominal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 5 GLAZING

 5. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
6. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
8. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: _____ percent, nominal.
9. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
10. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
11. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or
magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated vision
glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass, Kind CS.
12. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
13. Spacer Color: Black.
14. Edge Seal:
a. Dual-Sealed System: Provide polyisobutylene sealant as primary seal applied
between spacer and glass panes, and silicone, polysulfide, or polyurethane sealant
as secondary seal applied around perimeter.
15. Color: Black.
16. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.
17. Capillary Tubes: Provide tubes from air space for insulating glass units without inert type
gas that have a change of altitude greater than 762 m between point of fabrication and
point of installation to permit pressure equalization of air space.
a. Capillary Tubes: Tubes to remain open and be of length and material type in
accordance with insulating glass fabricator's requirements.
b. Inert gas may be installed in the field into air space in accordance with insulating
glass fabricator's and installer's requirements.
2.05 GLAZING UNITS
A. Monolithic Exterior Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 6.4 mm, nominal.
B. Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: Interior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 6.4 mm, nominal.
C. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Type, thickness, and configuration of glazing that contains
flame, smoke, and blocks radiant heat, as required to achieve indicated fire-rating period
exceeding 45 minutes.
1. Applications:
a. Glazing in fire-rated door assembly.
b. Glazing in fire-rated window assembly.
c. Glazing in sidelites, borrowed lites, and other glazed openings in fire-rated wall
assemblies.
d. Other locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Glass Type: Multi-laminate annealed glass with intumescent fire retardant interlayers.
3. Provide products listed by ITS (DIR) or UL (DIR) and approved by authorities having
jurisdiction.
4. Safety Glazing Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
5. Fire-Rating Period: 60 minutes.
6. Markings for Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Assemblies: Provide permanent markings on
fire-resistance-rated glazing in compliance with ICC (IBC), local building code, and
authorities having jurisdiction.
a. "W" - meets wall assembly criteria of ASTM E119 or UL 263 fire test standards.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 6 GLAZING

 b. "D" - meets fire door assembly criteria of NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UL 10C fire test
standards.
c. "H" - meets fire door assembly hose stream test of NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UL 10C fire
test standards.
d. "T" - meets temperature rise of not more than 232 degrees C above ambient at end of
30 minutes fire exposure in accordance with NFPA 252, UL 10B, or UL 10C fire test
standards.
e. "XXX" - placeholder that represents fire-rating period, in minutes.
D. Monolithic Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
1. Applications:
a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
b. Sliding glass doors.
c. Shower and bathtub enclosures and doors.
d. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
e. Glazed view windows and panels in partitions enclosing athletic activity rooms,
except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
f. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
g. Other locations indicated on drawings.
2. Glass Type: Fully tempered safety glass as specified.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 6.4 mm, nominal.
5. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
6. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
8. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: _____ percent, nominal.
9. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
E. Security Glazing: Laminated glass, multi-ply.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Tint: Clear.
3. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
4. Outer Lite: Annealed glass.
5. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB), thickness as required to meet performance criteria.
6. Inside Lite: Annealed glass.
7. Performance Criteria:
a. Burglary Resistance: Pass UL 972 tests in compliance with level of burglary and
forced-entry resistance indicated; Multiple Impact.
8. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
9. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
11. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: _____ percent, nominal.
12. Glazing Method: As required to meet performance criteria.
F. Hurricane Impact Resistance Glazing: Laminated glass.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Tint: Clear.
3. Thickness: As required to meet performance criteria.
4. Outside Lite: Annealed glass.
5. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB), thickness as required to meet performance criteria.
6. Inside Lite: Annealed glass.
7. Performance Criteria:
a. Hurricane Impact Resistance: Comply with ASTM E1996 windborne debris
requirements for "Enhanced Protection" within Wind Zone 1.
G. Glass-Clad Polycarbonate Security Glazing: Laminated glass and polycarbonate, 2-Ply; ASTM
C1349.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 7 GLAZING

 1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Tint: Clear.
3. Thickness: As required to meet performance criteria.
4. Outer Lite: Tempered glass.
5. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral (PVB), thickness as required to meet performance criteria.
6. Inside Lite: Polycarbonate.
7. Performance Criteria:
H. Wired Glass: Flat glass with embedded wire mesh.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Form: Form 1 - Wired glass, polished both sides; ASTM C1036.
3. Mesh: M1 - Diamond; ASTM C1036.
4. Pattern and Finish: P1 - Linear, F1 - Patterned one side; ASTM C1036.
5. Tint: Clear, Class 1.
6. Glass Type: Annealed.
7. Thickness: 6.4 mm, nominal.
8. Glazing Method: Wet glazing method, compound and compound.
I. Obscure - Patterned Glazing: Textured or rolled glass; translucent, showing shadows but not
form.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Finish: F1 - Patterned one side; ASTM C1036.
3. Pattern: P1 - Linear; ASTM C1036.
4. Glass Patterns: Cast.
5. Style: As indicated on drawings.
6. Tint: Clear.
7. Glass Type: Fully tempered.
8. Thickness: As required for application.
9. Glazing Method: Wet glazing method, compound and compound.
J. Direct to Glass Ceramic Printing: Ceramic frit is fused into glass creating permanent designs.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Color: As indicated on drawings.
3. Printing Style: As indicated on drawings.
4. Glass Type: Fully tempered; monolithic glass system.
5. Thickness: As required for application.
6. Glazing Method: Wet glazing method, compound and compound.
K. Glass Shelves:
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Tint: Clear.
3. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass with ground edges and corners; ASTM C1048.
4. Thickness: 6.4 mm, nominal.
L. Transparent One-Way Mirror: Mirror quality float glass with pyrolytic (hard coat) type coating
located on high light level surface of glass; ASTM C1376.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Thickness: 6 mm.
3. Glass Tint: Grey.
4. Glass Type: Annealed.
5. Lighting Ratio: Maintain at least 8:1 lighting level ratio between coated side (bright-
observed side) and uncoated side (dim-observer side).
6. Glazing Method: Gasket glazing.
M. Bent Glazing: Monolithic glass.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Configuration: As indicated on drawings in compliance with fabricators requirements.
3. Tint: Clear.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 8 GLAZING

 4. Thickness: 6 mm.
5. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
6. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
7. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
8. Glazing Method: As required for application indicated.
2.06 PLASTIC SHEET GLAZING UNITS
A. Polycarbonate Flat Sheet: Ultraviolet (UV) stabilized.
1. Applications: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Type: Cellular (multi-wall, "structured") sheet.
3. Silicone abrasion resistant coating for scratch resistance.
4. Tint: Clear, transparent.
5. Thickness: 6 mm.
6. Width: 1220 mm.
7. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): _____ percent, nominal.
8. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
9. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
10. Glazing Method: As required for application indicated on drawings.
11. Bullet Resistance: Pass UL 752 tests in compliance with ballistic criteria level and
weapon description indicated; Level 1 - 9 mm full metal jacket with lead core.
B. Acrylic Sheet:
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Type: Monolithic (single layer solid) sheet.
3. Ultraviolet stabilized.
4. Tint: Clear.
5. Thickness: 6 mm.
C. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded thermosetting polyester; Type 70, fiberglass fabric reinforcement;
translucent.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index (FSI)/Smoke Developed Index
(SDI) of Class A, 25/450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Exterior surface coated with polyvinyl fluoride film for improved weather resistance.
4. Tint: Clear.
5. Thickness: 2.286 mm.
2.07 PLASTIC FILMS
A. Solar Control Plastic Film: Mylar type.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Color: Blue.
3. Thickness Without Liner: 0.06 mm.
4. Emissivity (Low-E Coating): 0.62.
5. Shading Coefficient: _____, nominal.
6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): _____, nominal.
B. Safety and Security Plastic Film: Polyester type.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread Index (FSI)/Smoke Developed Index
(SDI) of Class A, 25/450, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Tensile Strength: Minimum of 221 MPa when measured in accordance with ASTM D882.
4. Impact Resistance: Comply with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 impact test requirements
when applied to 3.2 mm thick annealed glass.
5. Color: Clear.
6. Thickness Without Liner: 0.051 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 9 GLAZING

2.08 GLASS COATINGS
A. Solar Control Coating: Two-component, metal-oxide nano-particles with 5 percent solids
content, minimum.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Color: Clear, fade resistant.
3. Dry Film Thickness: 0.01 mm, bubble and crack resistant.
4. Visible Light Transmission: Maintains up to 80 percent.
5. Ultraviolet Light Reduction: 99.9 percent.
6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.53.
7. Shading Coefficient: 0.72.
B. Self-Cleaning Photocatalytic Glass Coating: Transparent visible light activated coating that
improves air quality and maintaining clean glass that also breaks down VOC's, odors, and
airborne pollutants; ISO-tested.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Dry Film Thickness: 0.0001 mm.
C. Protective Glass Coating: High performance, poly-siloxane based coating that durably seals
and protects interior and exterior glass against wear, corrosion, and degradation from
environmental exposure.
1. Application: Locations as indicated on drawings.
2. Color: Clear, colorless liquid.
3. Odor: Mild (Ethyl Alcohol), with flash point of 19 degrees C.
2.09 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife
grade consistency; gray color.
B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A, Shore
A hardness of 10 to 20; black color.
C. Polysulfide Sealant: Two component; chemical curing, non-sagging type; ASTM C920, Type
M, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25;
color as selected.
D. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of
20 to 35; color as selected.
E. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of
properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,
and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
Length of 25 mm for each square meter of glazing or minimum 100 mm by width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1.5 mm by height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
Minimum 75 mm long by one half the height of the glazing stop by thickness to suit application,
self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids
compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 cured
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
D. Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option II; color black.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 10 GLAZING

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide shop inspection and testing for all type of glass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for
size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
B. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being provided.
C. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing
system.
D. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively.
E. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours
before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing
material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
glazing referenced standards.
B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA (SM), and manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass
manufacturer.
D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.
F. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of
construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing,
plastering, mortar droppings, etc.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A. Application - Exterior and/or Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from either the exterior or the
interior of the building.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
3.05 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building.
B. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing
junctions with butyl sealant.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 11 GLAZING

 D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full
contact.
E. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
F. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.
3.06 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.
B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight line.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or
unit.
E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous
contact.
G. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.
3.07 INSTALLATION - WET GLAZING METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit.
C. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at
610 mm intervals, 6.4 mm below sight line.
D. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than
9 mm below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal.
E. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.08 INSTALLATION - WET GLAZING METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.
B. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer
shims at 610 mm centers, kept 6 mm below sight line.
C. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips.
D. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool
surface to straight line.
3.09 INSTALLATION - WET/DRY GLAZING METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building.
B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 5 mm below sight line. Seal
corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.
C. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full
perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.
D. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
E. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient
pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.
F. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops 6.4 mm
below sight lines.
1. Place glazing tape on glazing pane of unit with tape flush with sight line.
G. Fill gap between glazing and stop with ________ type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on
glazing, but not more than 9 mm below sight line.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 12 GLAZING

 H. Apply cap bead of ________ type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to
uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.10 INSTALLATION - WET/DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.
B. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight
line.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane
or unit.
E. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 610 mm
intervals, 6 mm below sight line.
F. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with type sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
G. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.
3.11 INSTALLATION - BUTT JOINT GLAZING METHOD (SEALANT ONLY)
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from exterior side of building.
B. Temporarily brace glass in position for duration of glazing process; mask edges of glass at
adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members.
C. Temporarily secure a small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint.
D. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill joint without
displacing foam rod, and then tool sealant surface smooth to concave profile.
E. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod, and then apply sealant to opposite side,
tool smooth to concave profile.
F. Remove masking tape.
3.12 INSTALLATION - PRESSURE GLAZED SYSTEMS
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from exterior side of building.
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
D. Install pressure plates without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
E. Install cover plate.
3.13 INSTALLATION - STRUCTURAL SILICONE GLAZING
A. Refer to Section 08 4413 for wall framing assembly requirements.
B. Refer to Section 08 4426 for structural glass framing assembly requirements.
C. Application - Factory (Shop) Glazed: Follow basic guidelines of structural silicone glazing for
glazing application.
1. Two-Sided Structural: Glass structurally adhered to vertical mullions with horizontal sides
captured in glazing pockets.
2. Four-Sided Structural: Glass with four sides structurally adhered to horizontal and vertical
metal back-up mullion.
3. Two-Sided Structural Strip Window: Glass with two sides structurally adhered to vertical
mullions and horizontal sides and vertical ends captured in glazing pockets.
4. Vertical Structural Strip Window: Glass with two sides structurally adhered to horizontal
mullions and vertical sides and horizontal ends captured in glazing pockets.
5. Glass Mullion: All glass mullion or all-glass system.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 13 GLAZING

 D. Provide design review of the glazing system and project details, adhesion testing, proper
surface preparation, training and a quality service program.
E. Provide only structural silicone sealant, tested and manufactured for structural glazing.
3.14 INSTALLATION - PLASTIC FILM
A. Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions.
B. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion.
C. Install film tight to perimeter of glass and carefully trim film with razor sharp knife. Provide 1.6
mm to 3.2 mm gap at perimeter of glazed panel unless otherwise required. Do not score the
glass.
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their
products.
C. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.16 CLEANING
A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
B. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
C. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.
D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
E. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial
Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 14 GLAZING

 SECTION 08 8000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Insulating glass units (IGU's).
B. Decorative Mirror.
C. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 1116 – Aluminum Doors and Frames: Glazing for doors and windows.
B. Section 08 5113 - Aluminum Windows: Glazing furnished by window manufacturer.
C. Section 08 8300 - Mirrors.
D. Section 10 2800 - Toilet Accessories: Mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.
C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2011.
D. ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
E. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
F. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
G. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2012.
H. ASTM C1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2014.
I. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
J. ASTM C1376 - Standard Specification for Pyrolytic and Vacuum Deposition Coatings on Flat
Glass; 2015.
K. ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2012a.
L. ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
M. BS EN 673:2011 - Glass in building. Determination of thermal transmittance (U value).
Calculation method.
N. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
O. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
P. GANA (LGRM) - GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; Glass Association of North
America; 2009.
Q. IGMA TM-3000 - North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for
Commercial & Residential Use; Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance; 1990 (2004).
R. NFRC 100 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2014.
S. NFRC 200 - Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and
Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence; 2014.
T. NFRC 300 - Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and
Systems; 2014.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 1 GLAZING

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by each of the affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Insulating Glass Unit, Glazing Unit, Plastic Sheet Glazing Unit, and Plastic
Film Glazing Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
limitations, special handling and installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and
environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available
colors.
D. Samples: Submit two samples 400 x 400 mm in size of glass units.
E. Samples: Submit 600 mm long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected.
F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that glass and glazing products meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Insulating Glass Units: One of each glass size and each glass type.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM), GANA (SM), GANA (LGRM), and IGMA TM-
3000 for glazing installation methods. Maintain one copy on site.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UPS
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional mock-up requirements.
B. Provide on-site glazing mock-up with the specified glazing components.
C. Locate where directed.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 4 degrees C.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
C. Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year manufacturer warranty to include coverage for
delamination, including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A. Select type and thickness of exterior glazing assemblies to withstand dead and live loads
caused by positive and negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of glass.
1. Design Pressure: Calculated in accordance with ASCE 7 and as indicated in the
structural drawings.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 2 GLAZING

 2. Comply with ASTM E1300 for design load resistance of glass type, thickness, dimensions,
and maximum lateral deflection of supported glass.
3. Seismic Loads: Design and size glazing components to withstand seismic loads and
sway displacement in accordance with the requirements of ASCE 7.
4. Provide glass edge support system sufficiently stiff to limit the lateral deflection of
supported glass edges to less than 1/175 of their lengths under specified design load.
5. Glass thicknesses listed are minimum.
B. Vapor Retarder and Air Barrier Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity
of building enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier.
1. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane insulating glass units for the continuity of the
vapor retarder and air barrier seal.
2. To maintain a continuous vapor retarder and air barrier throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
C. Thermal and Optical Performance: Provide glass products with performance properties as
indicated. Performance properties are in accordance with manufacturer's published data as
determined with the following procedures and/or test methods:
1. Center of Glass U-Value: Comply with NFRC 100 using Lawrence Berkeley National
Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 5.2/6.3 computer program.
2. Center of Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Comply with NFRC 200 using
Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (LBNL) WINDOW 5.2/6.3 computer program.
3. Solar Optical Properties: Comply with NFRC 300 test method.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Float Glass, General: Provide float glass based glazing unless noted otherwise.
1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality-Q3.
2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048, Kind HS and FT.
3. Fully Tempered Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria.
4. Impact Resistant Safety Glass: Complies with ANSI Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 criteria;
Class B/Category I.
5. Tinted Type: ASTM C1036, Class 2 - Tinted, Quality-Q3, color and performance
characteristics as indicated.
6. Patterned Glass Type (If Any): ASTM C1036, Type II - Patterned Flat Glass, Quality-Q5,
Form 3 - Patterned glass, color and performance characteristics as indicated.
7. Wired Glass Type: ASTM C1036, Type II - Wired Flat Glass, Quality-Q5, color and
performance characteristics as indicated.
8. Safety Wired Glass Type: ASTM C1036, Type II - Wired Flat Glass, Quality-Q5, ANSI
Z97.1 and 16 CFR 1201 impact criteria for Class B/Category I, and color and performance
characteristics as indicated.
9. Thicknesses: As indicated; provide greater thickness as required for exterior glazing wind
load design.
2.03 INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A. Insulating Glass Units (IGU's) – Double glazed units.
1. IGU's - General: Types as indicated.
a. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
b. Coated Glass: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1376 for pyrolytic (hard-coat) or
magnetic sputter vapor deposition (soft-coat) type coatings on flat glass; coated
vision glass, Kind CV; coated overhead glass, Kind CO; or coated spandrel glass,
Kind CS.
c. Metal Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
d. Spacer Color: Black.
e. Edge Seal:
f. Color: Black.
g. Purge interpane space with dry air, hermetically sealed.
h. Panel Face Dimensions: 1500 mm x 3000 mm unless noted otherwise on Drawings.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 3 GLAZING

 2. Insulating Glass Units for Windows and Where Indicated: Vision glass, double glazed.
a. Applications: Facade - Exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
b. Space between lites filled with air.
c. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6 mm thick, minimum.
1) Tint: Clear unless noted otherwise.
2) Coating: Low-E (solar control type), on #2 surface.
d. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 6 mm thick, minimum.
1) Tint: Clear noted noted otherwise.
e. Overall Thickness: 24 mm (6 + 12 + 6).
f. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value), Summer - Center of Glass: 1.0 W/m2 . K,
nominal.
g. Solar Factor, g-value: 0.33
h. Light Transmittance (LT): 60 percent, nominal.
i. Selectivity LT/g: 1.82.
j. Shading Coefficient (SC): 0.32
k. Light Reflectance, Outside: 16 percent, nominal.
l. Light Reflectance, Inside: 17 percent
m. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
2.04 MIRRORS
2.05
2.06 GLAZING UNITS
A. Monolithic Exterior Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: As scheduled.
2. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.
3. Tint: Clear unless noted otherwise.
4. Thickness: 12 mm thick unless noted otherwise on drawings.
5. Visible Light Transmittance (VLT): 88 percent, nominal.
6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.82 percent, nominal.
7. Visible Light Reflectance, Outside: 8 percent, nominal.
8. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
B. Safety Wired Glazing for Door with Vision Panels: Flat glass with embedded wire mesh.
1. Applications: Doors with vision panels.
2. Form: Polished both sides; ASTM C1036.
3. Mesh: Diamond; ASTM C1036.
4. Tint: Clear unless noted otherwise.
5. Glass Type: Annealed.
6. Thickness: 6 mm, minimum.
7. Face Dimensions: As shown on Drawings.
8. Glazing Method: Dry glazing method, gasket glazing.
2.07 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTM
C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of
20 to 35; color as selected.
B. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of
properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,
and G; with cured Shore A hardness range of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.08 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Silicone, with 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
Length of 25 mm for each square meter of glazing or minimum 100 mm x width of glazing
rabbet space minus 1.5 mm x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 4 GLAZING

 B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness; ASTM C864 Option II.
Minimum 75 mm long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,
self adhesive on one face.
C. Glazing Tape, Back Bedding Mastic Type: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids
compound with integral resilient spacer rod applicable to application indicated; 5 to 30 cured
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
1. Width: As required for application.
2. Thickness: As required for application.
3. Spacer Rod Diameter: As required for application.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option II; color black.
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide shop inspection and testing for all glass types.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for
size, squareness, and offsets at corners.
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and support framing is ready to receive glazing
system.
C. Verify that sealing between joints of glass framing members has been completed effectively.
D. Proceed with glazing system installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with appropriate solvent and wipe dry within maximum of 24 hours
before glazing. Remove coatings that are not tightly bonded to substrates.
B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant where required for proper sealant adhesion.
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass, gaskets, and other glazing
material manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
glazing referenced standards.
B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193, GANA Sealant Manual, and
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass
manufacturer.
D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
E. Set glass lites in proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as indicated.
F. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of
construction operations such as, and not limited to the following; weld splatter, fire-safing,
plastering, mortar droppings, etc.
3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building.
B. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing
junctions with butyl sealant.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 5 GLAZING

 C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full
contact.
E. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
F. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.
3.05 INSTALLATION - WET GLAZING METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.
B. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer
shims at 610 mm centers, kept 6 mm below sight line.
C. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips.
D. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool
surface to straight line.
3.06 INSTALLATION - WET/DRY GLAZING METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A. Application - Interior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the interior of the building.
B. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight
line.
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 152 mm from corners.
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane
or unit.
E. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 610 mm
intervals, 6 mm below sight line.
F. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with type sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
G. Carefully trim protruding tape with knife.
3.07 INSTALLATION - BUTT JOINT GLAZING METHOD (SEALANT ONLY)
A. Application - Exterior Glazed: Set glazing infills from the exterior of the building.
B. Temporarily brace glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges of glass at
adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members.
C. Temporarily secure a small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint.
D. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill the joint without
displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to concave profile.
E. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite side, tool
smooth to concave profile.
F. Remove masking tape.
3.08 INSTALLATION - STRUCTURAL SILICONE GLAZING
A. Application - Factory (Shop) Glazed: Follow basic guidelines of structural silicone glazing for
glazing application.
1. Four-Sided Structural: Glass with four sides structurally adhered to horizontal and vertical
metal back-up mullion.
B. Provide design review of the glazing system and project details, adhesion testing, proper
surface preparation, training and a quality service program.
C. Provide only structural silicone sealant, tested and manufactured for structural glazing.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 6 GLAZING

 B. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their
products.
C. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.10 CLEANING
A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
B. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using
solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
C. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.
D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
E. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial
Completion in accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark
heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 08 8000

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8000 - 7 GLAZING

 SECTION 08 8300
MIRRORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glass mirrors.
1. Tempered safety glass.
2. Antique mirror.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 10 2800 - Toilet Accessories: Metal mirror frames.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2014.
B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011e1.
C. ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
D. ASTM C1503 - Standard Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
E. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
F. GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
G. GANA (TIPS) - Mirrors: Handle with Extreme Care (Tips for the Professional on the Care and
Handling of Mirrors); Glass Association of North America; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Submit structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling and installation requirements.
C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Submit chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements, and identify available colors.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Mirror Glazing: One of each type and size.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) and GANA (SM) for glazing installation methods.
1. Maintain one copy on project site.
B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with
recommendations of GANA (TIPS).
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 10 degrees C.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of
same.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8300 - 1 MIRRORS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Mirror Design Criteria: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirror
material deflection to 1/200, or to the flexure limit of glass, with full recovery of glazing
materials, whichever is less.
B. Mirror Glass: ASTM C1036, Type 1 - Transparent Flat, Class 1 - Clear, Quality - Q1 (high-
quality mirrors); silvering, protective coating, and quality requirements in compliance with ASTM
C1503.
1. Thickness: 6 mm.
2. Size: As noted on drawings.
C. Decorative Antique Mirror: Custom-made; design as selected and appproved by the Owner.
1. Face Dimensions, Decorative Elements, Details, and Anchors: As per Approved Shop
Drawings.
2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M and A; single component;
chemical or solvent curing; non-bleeding, non-staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25;
color as selected.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness.
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; on release
paper.
D. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
E. Mirror Attachment, Anchors, Fasteneers, and Accessories: Stainless steel clips.
F. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B. Verify that surfaces of mirror frames or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for
installation of mirrors.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B. Seal porous mirror frames or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime
surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
C. Prepare installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants, and install
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA (TIPS) and manufacturers recommendations.
B. Set mirrors plumb and level, and free of optical distortion.
C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or
backsplashes.
D. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors in proper place with adhesive, applied in accordance with
adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8300 - 2 MIRRORS

3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B. Remove labels after work is complete.
C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.

END OF SECTION

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 08 8300 - 3 MIRRORS

 SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal stud wall framing.
C. Metal channel ceiling framing.
D. Resilient sound isolation clips.
E. Acoustic insulation.
F. Cementitious backing board.
G. Gypsum wallboard.
H. Joint treatment and accessories.
I. Predecorated gypsum board.
J. Textured finish system.
K. Acoustic (sound-dampening) wall and ceiling board.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution requirements.
C. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2018.
B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).
C. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
D. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
E. ASTM A1003/A1003M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Metallic- and
Nonmetallic-Coated for Cold-Formed Framing Members; 2015.
F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.
G. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method; 2017.
H. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 2017.
I. ASTM C514 - Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board; 2004
(Reapproved 2014).
J. ASTM C645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2018.
K. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.
L. ASTM C754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2018.
M. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2019b.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 N. ASTM C954 - Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel
Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84
mm) in Thickness; 2018.
O. ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of
Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2018.
P. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base; 2019.
Q. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum
Backing Panel; 2013.
R. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2017.
S. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Exterior Gypsum Panel Products for
Use as Sheathing; 2018.
T. ASTM C1288 - Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior
Substrate Sheets; 2017.
U. ASTM C1325 - Standard Specification for Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units;
2019.
V. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017.
W. ASTM C1629/C1629M - Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior
Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2018a.
X. ASTM C1658/C1658M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels; 2019.
Y. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016.
Z. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
AA. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
AB. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2019.
AC. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.
AD. ASTM E1414/E1414M - Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between
Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum; 2016.
AE. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016.
AF. GA-224 - Installation of Predecorated Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2008.
AG. GA-226 - Application of Gypsum Board to Form Curved Surfaces; Gypsum Association; 2016.
AH. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2015.
AI. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
AJ. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
AK. UL 325 - Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate special details associated with fireproofing and acoustic seals.
C. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishing
system.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 D. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754,
provide independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings
and deflections.
E. Samples: Submit two samples of predecorated gypsum board, 300 by 300 mm in size,
illustrating finish color and texture.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and
finishing.
B. Copies of Documents at Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document
that prescribes execution requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
1. See PART 3 for finishing requirements.
B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Sound-Rated: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. ______.
2. Head of Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. ______.
3. Fire Rated Ceilings and Soffits: One (1) hour fire rating.
4. Fire Rated Structural Column Framing: UL listed assembly No. ______.
5. Fire Rated Structural Beam Framing: UL listed assembly No. ______.
6. Fire Rated Shaft Walls: UL listed assembly No. ______.
7. Fire Rated Area Separation Walls: UL listed assembly No. ______.
8. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC IBC for the particular
assembly.
9. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the
particular assembly.
10. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular
assembly in the current UL (FRD).
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Non-structural Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and
properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum
deflection of wall framing of L/120 at 240 Pa.
1. Studs: "C" shaped with knurled or emobossed faces.
2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.
3. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.
4. Furring Members: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 22 mm.
5. Resilient Furring Channels: Single or double leg configuration; 12 mm channel depth.
6. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: Steel resilient clips with molded rubber isolators, attaches
to framing; improves noise isolation performance of wall and floor-ceiling assemblies.
B. Area Separation Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and
properties necessary to comply with specified performance requirements.
C. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as
indicated on drawings.
D. Deflection and Firestop Track: Intumescent strip factory-applied to track flanges expands when
exposed to heat or flames to provide a perimeter joint seal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 E. Preformed Top Track Firestop Seal:
1. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems
indicated on drawings.
F. Non-structural Framing Accessories:
1. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
2. Partial Height Wall Framing Support: Provides stud reinforcement and anchored
connection to floor.
a. Materials: ASTM A36/A36M formed sheet steel support member with factory-welded
ASTM A1003/A1003M steel plate base.
b. Height: 908 mm.
3. Framing Connectors: ASTM A653/A653M G90 galvanized steel clips; secures cold rolled
channel to wall studs for lateral bracing.
4. Flexible Wood Backing: Fire-retardant treated wood with sheet steel connectors.
G. Grid Suspension Systems: Steel grid system of main tees and support bars connected to
structure using hanging wire.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to
minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Glass mat faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M, suitable for paint
finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced board.
3. Unfaced fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1278/C1278M, suitable for
paint finish, of the same core type and thickness may be substituted for paper-faced
board.
4. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold-resistant board is required whenever board is being installed before the building
is enclosed and conditioned.
b. Mold resistant board is required at all locations.
5. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
6. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 13 mm.
b. Ceilings: 13 mm.
B. Abuse Resistant Wallboard:
1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.
2. Surface Abrasion: Level 2, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C1629/C1629M.
3. Indentation: Level 1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M.
4. Soft Body Impact: Level 1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C1629/C1629M.
5. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
6. Glass Mat-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M.
7. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM
C1278/C1278M.
8. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.
9. Thickness: 16 mm.
10. Edges: Tapered.
11. Glass Mat Faced Products:
C. Impact Resistant Wallboard:
1. Application: High-traffic areas indicated.
2. Surface Abrasion: Level 3, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C1629/C1629M.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 3. Indentation: Level 1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M.
4. Soft Body Impact: Level 3, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C1629/C1629M.
5. Hard Body Impact: Level 2, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM
C1629/C1629M.
6. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
7. Paper-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M.
8. Glass Mat-Faced Type: Gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM C1658/C1658M.
9. Unfaced Type: Interior fiber-reinforced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM
C1278/C1278M.
10. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.
11. Thickness: 16 mm.
12. Edges: Tapered.
13. Glass Mat Faced Products:
D. Prefinished Gypsum Board: Paper-faced; gypsum wallboard as defined in ASTM
C1396/C1396M with factory applied skim-coat.
1. Application: Areas requiring a Level 5 finish.
2. Thickness: 13 mm.
3. Edges: Tapered.
E. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:
1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and
shower ceilings.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. ANSI Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based; aggregated Portland cement panels
with glass fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces complying with ANSI A118.9
or ASTM C1325.
a. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
4. ASTM Cement-Based Board: Non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying with
ASTM C1288.
a. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
5. Glass Mat Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as
defined in ASTM C1178/C1178M.
a. Regular Type: Thickness 12.7 mm.
b. Fire Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness 16 mm.
F. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in
ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
3. Type: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.
4. Type X Thickness: 16 mm.
5. Regular Board Thickness: 13 mm.
6. Edges: Tapered.
G. Ceiling Board: Special sag resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M;
sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thickness: 13 mm.
3. Edges: Tapered.
H. Acoustical Sound Dampening Wall and Ceiling Board: Two layers of heavy paper faced, high
density gypsum board separated by a viscoelastic polymer layer and capable of achieving STC
rating of 50 or more in typical stud wall assemblies as calculated in accordance with ASTM
E413 and when tested in accordance with ASTM E90.
1. Thickness: 13 mm.
2. Long Edges: Tapered.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
I. Sound-Absorbing Gypsum Board Ceiling System: Perforated gypsum board with acoustic
backer panels and spray-applied finish.
1. Spray-Applied Finish: Acoustically transparent, acrylic based finish coating.
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.80 when measured and calculated in
accordance with ASTM C423.
3. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 44 when tested in accordance with ASTM
E1414/E1414M and classified in accordance with ASTM E413.
J. Exterior Soffit Board: Exterior gypsum soffit board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes
to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Ceilings and soffits in protected exterior areas, unless otherwise indicated.
2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested
assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X.
3. Types: Regular and Type X, in locations indicated.
4. Type X Thickness: 16 mm.
5. Regular Type Thickness: 13 mm.
6. Edges: Tapered.
2.04 PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD
A. Predecorated Gypsum Board: ASTM C1396/C1396M, Class I - Laminated Sheet or Film, sizes
to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Application: Walls in locations indicated.
2. Core Type: Regular and Type X, as indicated.
3. Thickness: 13 mm, and 16 mm, as indicated.
B. Predecorated Facing: Sheet vinyl, fabric reinforced; flame spread/smoke developed index of
25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84; white.
2.05 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness:
25 mm.
B. Acoustical Shielding: Recycled ethylene vinyl acetate (EVA) sheet membrane; applied
between studs and gypsum board.
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum of 25, calculated in accordance with ASTM
E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
2. Fire Resistance: Where fire rating is specified for the wall in which the acoustical
shielding membrane is mounted, provide assemblies that have been tested in accordance
with ASTM E119 for the same rating as the wall.
C. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use
solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.
D. Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
E. Beads, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, galvanized steel, or
rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.
F. Decorative Metal Trim:
1. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5 temper.
2. Finish: Anodized, clear.
3. Type: Profile as selected from manufacturer's standard range.
4. Corner Trim:
a. Products:
5. Reveal Trim:
a. Products:
6. Molding:
a. Products:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 G. Ceiling Pockets with Prewired Raceway: UL 325 listed, extruded aluminum shade pocket with
removable closure panel and ceiling tile support, for recess mounting in acoustical tile or
drywall ceilings; size and configuration as indicated on drawings.
1. Designed to accommodate installation of motor control and wiring accessories within
pocket.
H. Moisture Guard Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic, 1219.2 mm length, applied to bottom edge of
gypsum board.
I. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for
project conditions.
J. Finishing Compound: Surface coat and primer, takes the place of skim coating.
K. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to
take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.
L. Textured Finish Materials: Latex-based compound; plain.
M. Abuse Resistant Finishes:
1. Acrylic, water-based, non-textured, high build, tintable primer and surfacer.
2. Acrylic, integrally colored textured coating.
3. Lime-based tintable veneer finish plaster.
N. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.84
mm in Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping screws, corrosion
resistant.
O. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.84 to 2.84 mm in
Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws, corrosion resistant.
P. Nails for Attachment to Wood Members: ASTM C514.
Q. Staples For Attachment of Base Ply of Two-Ply Assembly to Wood Members: Flattened
galvanized wire type as specified in ASTM C840.
R. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to
suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.
S. Exterior Soffit Vents: One piece, perforated, ASTM B221 6063 T5 alloy aluminum, with edge
suitable for direct application to gypsum board and manufactured especially for soffit
application. Provide continuous vent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Space framing and furring members as indicated.
1. Level ceiling system to a tolerance of 1/1200.
2. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
3. Install bracing as required at exterior locations to resist wind uplift.
C. Studs: Space studs at 406 mm on center.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with
continuous bridging.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not
less than double studs at jambs.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 7 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 E. Acoustic Furring: Install resilient channels at maximum 600 mm on center. Locate joints over
framing members.
F. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: Install resilient sound isolation clips, and where applicable,
associated furring sections and channels, in accordance with clip manufacturer's written
instructions.
G. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600
requirements.
H. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:
1. Framed openings.
2. Wall mounted cabinets.
3. Plumbing fixtures.
4. Toilet partitions.
5. Toilet accessories.
6. Wall mounted door hardware.
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing
members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes, except where
firestopping is provided.
C. Acoustical Shielding: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for application
between studs and gypsum board.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
joints, especially in highly visible locations.
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and
edges occurring over firm bearing.
C. Double-Layer Non-Rated: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed parallel to framing or furring
members, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. Use glass mat faced gypsum
board at exterior walls and at other locations as indicated. Place second layer perpendicular to
framing or furring members. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
D. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of
assembly listing.
E. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-
resistant sealant.
F. Exterior Sheathing: Comply with ASTM C1280. Install sheathing vertically, with edges butted
tight and ends occurring over firm bearing.
1. Seal joints, cut edges, and holes with water-resistant sealant.
2. Paper-Faced Sheathing: Immediately after installation, protect from weather by
application of water-resistive barrier.
G. Exterior Soffits: Install exterior soffit board perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints
over framing members or other solid backing.
H. Cementitious Backing Board: Install over steel framing members and plywood substrate where
indicated, in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.
I. Installation on Wood Framing: For rated assemblies, comply with requirements of listing
authority. For non-rated assemblies, install as follows:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 8 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 1. Single-Layer Applications: Adhesive application.
2. Double-Layer Application: Install base layer using screws or nails. Install face layer using
adhesive.
J. Curved Surfaces: Apply gypsum board to curved substrates in accordance with GA-226.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.
1. Not more than 10 meters apart on walls and ceilings over 16 meters long.
2. At exterior soffits, not more than 10 meters apart in both directions.
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
D. Decorative Trim: Install at locations shown on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Moisture Guard Trim: Install on bottom edge of gypsum board according to manufacturer's
instructions and in locations indicated on drawings.
F. Exterior Soffit Vents: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions and in locations
indicated on drawings. Provide vent area specified.
3.06 JOINT TREATMENT
A. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board and Exterior Glass Mat Faced Sheathing: Use fiberglass joint
tape, embed and finish with setting type joint compound.
B. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, embed with drying type joint compound
and finish with drying type joint compound.
C. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish and other areas
specifically indicated.
2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the
completed construction.
D. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 0.8 mm.
E. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface
after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.
3.07 TEXTURE FINISH
A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and to match approved sample.
3.08 PREDECORATED GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Erect predecorated gypsum board in accordance with GA-224 and manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2116 - 9 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

 SECTION 09 2216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
3. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and
exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof
trusses.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks.

B. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors and power-actuated fasteners, from ICC-ES or
other qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing

members are certified according to the product-certification program of the Steel Framing
Industry Association.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited 1/360 of the wall height based on horizontal
loading of 480 Pa.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M,
Z120, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs and
tracks.

1. Steel Studs and Tracks:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by performance requirements for
horizontal deflection.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations
to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional
ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by horizontal deflection performance
requirements.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a
positive attachment of studs to tracks while allowing 76-mm minimum vertical
movement.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated;
in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 1.367-mm minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
13-mm wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 38 by 38 mm, 1.72-mm thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

H. Resilient Furring Channels: 13-mm deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 1.34-mm uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 13-mm wide
flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 2 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING
 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-
steel thickness of 0.8 mm.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm diameter
wire, or double strand of 1.21-mm diameter wire.

J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 32 mm, wall attachment
flange of 22 mm, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.455 mm, and depth required to fit
insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 1.59-mm diameter wire, or
double strand of 1.21-mm diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01as appropriate for the substrate.

a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.

b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor.
c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941M, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
d. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated:
Alloy Group A1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 738M, and nuts, ASTM F 836M.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 4.12 mm in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, (25 by 5 mm by length indicated.

E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal

thickness of 1.367 mm and minimum 13-mm wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 1.367-mm uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 13-mm wide

flanges, 19 mm deep.
2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.836 mm.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.483 mm.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 3 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING
 4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 22 mm deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.836 mm.

5. Resilient Furring Channels: 13-mm deep members designed to reduce sound

transmission.

a. Configuration: hat shaped.

G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,
and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide[ one of] the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 3.2 mm thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of

overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling
tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 4 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING
 anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not
more than 610 mm o.c.
2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary
for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive
materials below that are required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent
fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to
framing installation.
2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063
that apply to framing installation.
3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that
apply to framing installation.
4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely
fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements]

unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multilayer Application: As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements
unless otherwise indicated.
3. Tile Backing Panels: [As required by horizontal deflection performance requirements
unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports
or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at
suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 5 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING
 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install
track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.

b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 13-mm
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-

rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs
(150 mm o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing.

2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 610 mm o.c.

F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in
place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 610 mm o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with
concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners
spaced 610 mm o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange
extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring
channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more
than 305 mm from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 3
mm from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 6 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL

FRAMING
3.5 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Hangers: 1219 mm o.c.

2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1219 mm o.c.
3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 610 mm o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads

within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 3 mm in 3.6 m
<Insert dimensions> measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2216 - 7 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL
FRAMING
 SECTION 09 2400
CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cement plastering.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 2500 - Weather Barriers.
B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud framing and furring for plaster.
C. Section 09 2236 - Lath: Lath, furring, beads, screeds, and joint accessories for plaster base.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
B. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
C. ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2014.
D. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2006
(Reapproved 2011).
E. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based
Plasters; 2015.
F. ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2019a,
with Editorial Revision.
G. ASTM C1328/C1328M - Standard Specification for Plastic (Stucco) Cement; 2012.
H. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
2019.
I. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. ICC (IRC) - International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings; Most Recent
Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
K. NTMA (SPECS) - NTMA Terrazzo Specifications; Current Edition.
L. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials and trim accessories.
C. Evaluation Service Reports: Show compliance with specified requirements.
D. Installer's Qualification Statement.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Copies of Documents at Project Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced
document that prescribes execution requirements.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Mock-Up Panel: Construct a 1200 mm wide by 2400 mm high sample panel of plaster work at
the jobsite demonstrating installation procedures, finish texture, and color. Show each phase of
installation including framing and reinforcement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2400 - 1 CEMENT PLASTERING

 B. Construct mock-up of exterior and interior wall, ____ m long by ____ m wide, illustrating
surface finish.
1. Locate where directed.
2. Mock-up may remain as part of this work.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CEMENT PLASTER APPLICATIONS
A. Lath Plaster Base: Metal lath.
1. Plaster Type: Factory prepared plaster mix.
2. Number of Coats: Three.
3. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 9 mm.
4. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 9 mm.
5. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 0.79 to 1.6 mm.
6. Finish Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3 mm.
B. Solid Plaster Base: Concrete masonry.
1. Plaster Type: Jobsite mixed plaster.
2. Number of Coats: Three.
3. First Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 6 mm.
4. Second Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 6 mm.
5. Leveling Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 0.79 to 1.6 mm.
6. Finish Coat: Apply to a nominal thickness of 3 mm.
2.02 FACTORY PREPARED CEMENT PLASTER
A. Premixed One-Coat Base: Mixture of Type I Portland cement complying with ASTM
C150/C150M, hydrated lime complying with ASTM C207, fibers and other approved
ingredients; install in accordance with ASTM C926.
B. Premixed Base Coats: Mixture of cement, aggregate, fibers, and proprietary admixtures for
scratch and brown coats; install in accordance with ASTM C926.
C. Premixed Finish Coating: Same product as base coat.
2.03 JOBSITE MIXED CEMENT PLASTER
A. Fire Resistance Rating: Determined in accordance with test procedures in ASTM E119 and
complying with:
1. ICC (IBC), Section __________.
2. ICC (IRC), Section __________.
3. UL (DIR) Assembly Design No. ____.
4. ICC-ES Evaluation Report No. __________.
B. Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Type I.
a. Finish Coat: White color.
2. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91/C91M, Type N.
3. Plastic Cement: ASTM C1328/C1328M.
4. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
5. Sand: Clean, well graded, and complying with ASTM C897.
6. Water: Clean, fresh, potable, and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely
affect plaster.
7. Admixture: Air entrainment type.
8. Plaster Mix Reinforcement: Glass fibers, chopped to 13 mm nominal length, and alkali
resistant.
9. Color Pigment: Mineral oxide type, color as selected.
10. Exposed Aggregate: Marble.
a. Color: As selected by Architect.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2400 - 2 CEMENT PLASTERING

 b. Chip Size: As selected by Architect, and complying with grading standards included
in NTMA (SPECS).
C. Plaster Mixes: Proportioned in accordance with ASTM C926; parts by volume.
1. First Coat Over Lath:
a. Plaster Mix "C": One part Portland cement, with minimum zero part and maximum
3/4 part hydrated lime.
b. Plaster Mix "CL": One part Portland cement, with minimum 3/4 part and maximum 1-
1/2 parts hydrated lime.
c. Plaster Mix "M": One part Type N masonry cement.
d. Plaster Mix "CM": One part Portland cement, and one part Type N masonry cement.
e. Plaster Mix "MS": One part Portland cement, and one part Type M or Type S
masonry cement.
f. Plaster Mix "CP": One part Portland cement, and one part plastic cement.
g. Plaster Mix "P": One part plastic cement.
h. Minimum 2-1/2 parts and maximum 4 parts sand, per total volume of cementitious
materials.
2. First Coat Over High Absorption Solid Base:
a. Plaster Mix "CL": One part Portland cement, with minimum 3/4 part and maximum 1-
1/2 parts hydrated lime.
b. Plaster Mix "M": One part Type N masonry cement.
c. Plaster Mix "CM": One part Portland cement, and one part Type N masonry cement.
d. Plaster Mix "MS": One part Portland cement, and one part Type M or Type S
masonry cement.
e. Plaster Mix "P": One part plastic cement.
f. Minimum 2-1/2 parts and maximum 4 parts sand, per total volume of cementitious
materials.
g. Fiber reinforcement at 0.7 kg per sack of cement.
3. Dash Bond Coat: One part Portland cement, with maximum 2 parts sand.
4. First Coat Over Low Absorption Solid Base:
a. Plaster Mix "C": One part Portland cement, with minimum zero part and maximum
3/4 part hydrated lime.
b. Plaster Mix "CM": One part Portland cement, and one part Type N masonry cement.
c. Plaster Mix "MS": One part Portland cement, and one part Type M or Type S
masonry cement.
d. Minimum 2-1/2 parts and maximum 4 parts sand, per total volume of cementitious
materials.
e. Fiber reinforcement at 0.7 kg per sack of cement.
5. Second Coat: Same mixture as first coat, without fiber reinforcement, except minimum 3
parts and maximum 5 parts sand.
6. Finish Coat:
a. Minimum 1-1/2 parts and maximum 3 parts sand, per total volume of cementitious
materials.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Lath: As specified in Section 09 2236.
B. Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 09 2236.
C. Reinforcing Mesh: 153 g/sq m alkali-resistant mesh.
D. Water Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 07 2500.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions are acceptable prior to starting this work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2400 - 3 CEMENT PLASTERING

 B. Verify masonry joints are flush and surfaces are ready to receive work of this section, and that
there are no existing bituminous or water repellent coatings on masonry surfaces.
C. Verify concrete surfaces are flat, honeycombs are filled flush, and surfaces are ready to receive
work of this section, and that there are no existing bituminous, water repellent, or form release
agent coatings on concrete surfaces that may be detrimental to plaster bond.
D. Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface perimeter accessories are properly
in place.
E. Verify mechanical and electrical equipment and services located within areas to receive this
work have been properly tested and approved.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter using approved acid solutions, solvents, or
detergents, and then rinse surfaces thoroughly with clean water.
C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound in accordance with
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
D. Apply dash bond coat of plaster to solid bases and moist cure for at least 24 hours before
applying first coat of jobsite mixed plaster.
3.03 MIXING
A. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
B. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
C. Protect mixtures from frost or freezing temperatures, contamination, and excessive
evaporation.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply plaster in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and comply with ASTM
C926.
B. Base Coats:
1. Apply base coat(s) to fully embed lath and to specified thickness.
2. Follow guidelines in ASTM C926 and manufacturer's written installation instructions for
moist curing base coats and application of subsequent coats.
C. Leveling Coat:
1. Apply leveling coat to specified thickness.
2. Fully embed reinforcing mesh in leveling coat.
D. Finish Coats:
1. Cement Plaster:
a. Apply with sufficient material and pressure to ensure complete coverage of base to
specified thickness.
b. Apply desired surface texture while mix is still workable.
c. Float to a consistent finish.
d. Aggregate Surfacing: Hand apply to provide full surface coverage.
2. Primer and Acrylic Coatings:
a. Remove surface contaminants such as dust and dirt without damaging substrate.
b. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
c. Apply finish coating in number of coats and to thickness recommended by
manufacturer.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 6 mm in 3 m.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2400 - 4 CEMENT PLASTERING

3.06 REPAIR
A. Patching: Remove loose, damaged or defective plaster and replace with plaster of same
composition; finish to match surrounding area.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2400 - 5 CEMENT PLASTERING

 SECTION 09 2613
GYPSUM VENEER PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Gypsum veneer plaster on gypsum veneer base, masonry, concrete, existing plaster, and other
substrates.
B. Gypsum veneer base and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing acoustical gaps in construction other than gypsum
board or plaster work.
B. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Metal stud framing and furring for plaster.
C. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Metal stud framing and furring for plaster.
D. Section 09 2300 - Gypsum Plastering.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C587 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Veneer Plaster; 2004 (Reapproved 2018).
B. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.
C. ASTM C843 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Veneer Plaster; 2017.
D. ASTM C844 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Base to Receive Gypsum
Veneer Plaster; 2015.
E. ASTM C1047 - Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum
Veneer Base; 2019.
F. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2017.
G. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2016.
H. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2015.
I. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on veneer plaster products.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and
approved by manufacturer.
B. Copies of Documents at Site: Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document
that prescribes execution requirements.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply veneer plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 10 degrees
C nor more than 27 degrees C; for 24 hours prior to, during operations and after, until building
heating system can maintain the above minimum temperature.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2613 - 1 GYPSUM VENEER

PLASTERING
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM VENEER PLASTER ASSEMBLIES
A. Interior Partitions Indicated as Sound-Rated: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on
tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
B. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. ______.
2. Head of Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. ______.
3. Fire Rated Ceilings and Soffits: UL listed assembly No. ______.
4. Fire Rated Structural Column Framing: UL listed assembly No. ______.
5. Fire Rated Structural Beam Framing: UL listed assembly No. ______.
6. Fire Rated Shaft Walls: UL listed assembly No. ______.
7. Fire Rated Area Separation Walls: UL listed assembly No. ______.
8. Coordinate components of fire rated assemblies with materials specified for support of
plaster in other sections.
9. ICC IBC Item Numbers: Comply with applicable requirements of ICC (IBC) for the
particular assembly.
10. Gypsum Association File Numbers: Comply with requirements of GA-600 for the
particular assembly.
11. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular
assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Veneer Plaster: ASTM C587, mixed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Standard Gypsum Veneer Base: ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends
square cut.
1. Thickness as indicated.
2. Edges: Square.
C. Fire-Rated Gypsum Veneer Base: ASTM C1396/C1396M, fire rated Type X; sizes to minimize
joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Thickness as indicated.
2. Edges: Square.
D. Foil Faced Gypsum Veneer Base: ASTM C1396/C1396M, back surface laminated with
aluminum foil; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
1. Thickness as indicated.
2. Edges: Square.
E. Gypsum Veneer Base Trim Accessories: Zinc-coated steel or plastic, complying with ASTM
C1047.
F. Gypsum Board Accessories: Complying with ASTM C1047, GA-216, GA-600, and ____.
G. Joint Reinforcing for Gypsum Veneer Base: As specified in ASTM C587.
H. Fasteners: As specified in ASTM C844.
I. Bond Coat: ASTM C631, vinyl polymer type, bonding compound.
J. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber, friction fit type, unfaced___ mm.
K. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant; do not use
solvent-based non-curing butyl sealant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2613 - 2 GYPSUM VENEER

PLASTERING
 B. Verify masonry mortar joints are cut flush; verify surface is ready to receive work of this section.
Verify no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.
C. Verify concrete surfaces are flat, honeycombs are filled flush, and surface is ready to receive
work of this section. Verify no bituminous, water repellent, or form release agents exist on
concrete surfaces.
D. Verify gypsum board substrate is flat, joints are taped and sanded, and surface is ready to
receive work of this Section. Verify joint and surface perimeter accessories are in place.
E. Verify gypsum plaster base is flat, smooth and surface is ready to receive work. Verify joint and
surface perimeter accessories are in place.
F. Verify electric radiant heat cables are secured to substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces of dust or loose matter.
B. Remove projections greater than 3 mm and fill depressions greater than 6 mm with Portland
cement mortar.
C. Apply color tinted bond coat to prepare masonry surfaces within 24 hours of veneer plaster
application. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GYPSUM PLASTER BASE
A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing
through partitions.
B. Install gypsum base in accordance with ASTM C844.
C. Use drywall screws to fasten gypsum base to framing substrate.
D. Single Layer Base:
1. Install fire rated gypsum board vertical, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.
E. Double Layer Base:
1. Erect first layer of gypsum board, perpendicular to framing or furring members.
2. Place second layer of gypsum board, perpendicular to first layer. Ensure end joints of
second layer do not occur over joints of first layer.
3. Secure second layer with adhesive and sufficient support to hold in place. Apply adhesive
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
F. Install accessories.
G. Tape, fill, and sand filled joints, edges, corners, openings, and trim to produce surface ready to
receive veneer finish.
H. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that joint camber is maximum 0.8 mm.
I. Install acoustical sealant within partition assembly in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
J. Install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
1. Metal Framing: One bead.
2. Perimeter interruptions.
3. Seal penetrations of plaster by conduit, pipe, ducts, and rough-in boxes using acoustic
sealant, except where firestopping is provided.
3.04 INSTALLATION - VENEER PLASTER
A. Install gypsum veneer plaster in accordance with ASTM C843 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply single coat to a thickness of 1.6 mm.
C. Two Coat Applications.
1. Apply final coat over slightly green, almost dry base coat, to a thickness of 1.6 mm.
2. Total Thickness: 4.8 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2613 - 3 GYPSUM VENEER

PLASTERING
 D. Finish surface to flat, smooth, hard trowel finish.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Specified Thickness: Plus or minus 0.4 mm.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic near unprotected finished surfaces.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 2613 - 4 GYPSUM VENEER

PLASTERING
 SECTION 09 3000
TILING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile for floor applications.
B. Tile for wall applications.
C. Tile for counters.
D. Tile for shower receptors.
E. Tile for stairs.
F. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
G. Coated glass mat backer board as tile substrate.
H. Stone thresholds.
I. Ceramic accessories.
J. Ceramic trim.
K. Non-ceramic trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing.
B. Section 07 1400 - Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
C. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between tile work and adjacent construction
and fixtures.
D. Section 07 9513 - Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies: Expansion joint components.
E. Section 09 0561 - Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Concrete slab moisture and
alkalinity testing and remediation procedures.
F. Section 09 2400 - Cement Plastering: Lath and Portland cement scratch coat, where required
by the TCNA (HB) Method specified.
G. Section 22 4000 - Plumbing Fixtures: Shower receptor.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108/A118/A136 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2019.
B. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in
the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar; 2017.
C. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a
Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar;
2017.
D. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-
Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland
Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).
E. ANSI A108.2 - American National Standard General Requirements: Materials, Environmental
and Workmanship; 2019.
F. ANSI A108.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Organic Adhesives or Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive; 2009 (Revised).
G. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 1 TILING

 H. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy; 1999 (Reaffirmed
2010).
I. ANSI A108.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Chemical Resistant Furan Resin Mortar and Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
J. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with
Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
K. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework;
2017.
L. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of
Cementitious Backer Units; 2018.
M. ANSI A108.12 - American National Standard for Installation of Ceramic Tile with EGP (Exterior
Glue Plywood) Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
N. ANSI A108.13 - American National Standard for Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded,
Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone; 2005 (Reaffirmed
2016).
O. ANSI A108.19 - American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Gauged
Porcelain Tiles and Gauged Porcelain Tile Panels/Slabs by the Thin-Bed Method Bonded with
Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar or Improved Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2017.
P. ANSI A118.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012
(Revised).
Q. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water
Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
2013 (Revised).
R. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;
2012 (Revised).
S. ANSI A118.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant Furan
Mortars and Grouts for Tile Installation; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).
T. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement
Grouts for Tile Installation; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).
U. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications
for Cementitious Backer Units; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2016).
V. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,
Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.
W. ANSI A118.11 - American National Standard Specifications for EGP (Exterior Glue Plywood)
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2010).
X. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for
Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.
Y. ANSI A118.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Bonded Sound Reduction
Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile Installation; 2014.
Z. ANSI A118.15 - American National Standard Specifications for Improved Modified Dry-Set
Cement Mortar; 2012.
AA. ANSI A136.1 - American National Standard for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic
Tile; 2008 (Reaffirmed 2013).
AB. ANSI A137.1 - American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile; 2012.
AC. ANSI A137.2 - American National Standard Specifications for Glass Tile; 2013.
AD. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 2 TILING

 AE. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated
Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tiles and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for
Extruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products; 2018.
AF. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2018.
AG. ASTM C1178/C1178M - Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum
Backing Panel; 2013.
AH. ASTM D4068 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) Sheeting for
Concealed Water-Containment Membrane; 2015.
AI. ASTM E492 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound
Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine; 2009, with
Editorial Revision (2016).
AJ. ASTM E2179 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Effectiveness of Floor
Coverings in Reducing Impact Sound Transmission Through Concrete Floors; 2003
(Reapproved 2016).
AK. ICC-ES AC380 - Acceptance Criteria for Termite Physical Barrier Systems; 2014, with Editorial
Revision (2017).
AL. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2019.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of
this section; require attendance by affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories.
Include instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions,
junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic
accessories, and setting details.
D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 457 by 457 mm in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Master Grade Certificate: Submit for each type of tile, signed by the tile manufacturer and tile
installer.
G. Installer's Qualification Statement:
1. Submit documentation of National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA) or Tile
Contractors' Association of America (TCAA) accreditation.
2. Submit documentation of completion of apprenticeship and certification programs.
H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stain
removal methods.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA (HB) on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products
specified in this section, with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of five years of
documented experience.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 3 TILING

 a. Accredited Five-Star member of the National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA) or
Trowel of Excellence member of the Tile Contractors' Association of America (TCAA).
2. Installer Certification:
a. Ceramic Tile Education Foundation (CTEF): Certified Tile Installer (CTI).
b. Apprenticeship Program: Installer has achieved Journeyworker status through an
apprenticeship from the International Union of Bricklayers and Allied Craftworkers
(IUBAC) or a U.S. Department of Labor (DOL)-recognized program.
c. Advanced Certifications for Tile Installers (ACT): Certification in the installation of
membranes, mortar bed (mud) floors, mortar (mud) walls, shower receptors, large
format tile, gauged porcelain tile/panels/slabs, and grouts.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B. Construct tile mock-up where indicated on drawings, incorporating all components specified for
the location.
1. Minimum size of mock-up is indicated on drawings.
2. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature above 10 degrees C and below 38 degrees C
during installation and curing of setting materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
B. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.
3. Shape: Square.
4. Edges: Square.
5. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
8. Mounted Sheet Size: ____by____ mm.
9. Trim Units: Matching bead, cove, and surface bullnose shapes in sizes coordinated with
field tile.
C. Glazed Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.
1. Moisture Absorption: 7.0 to 20.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings.[]
3. Edges: Cushioned.
4. Surface Finish: High gloss.
5. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
6. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
7. Trim Units: Matching bead, bullnose, cove, and base shapes in sizes coordinated with
field tile.
D. Quarry Tile: ANSI A137.1, standard grade.
1. Moisture Absorption: Over 3.0 but not more than 5.0 percent as tested in accordance with
ASTM C373.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings. []
3. Thickness: 12.7 mm, nominal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 4 TILING

 4. Edges: Cushioned.
5. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
8. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove, cove base, and window sill or step nosing shapes in
sizes coordinated with field tile.
E. Pressed Floor Tile: []
1. Moisture Absorption: 0.5 to 3.0 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings []
3. Thickness: 9.5 mm, nominal.
4. Edges: Cushioned.
5. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Pattern: [].
8. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
F. Porcelain Tile: []
1. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
2. Size: As indicated on drawings. []
3. Thickness: 9.5 mm.
4. Edges: Cushioned.
5. Surface Finish: Unglazed.
6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
8. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
G. Natural Stone Tile:
1. Composition: As selected by Architect.
2. Single Tiles:
a. Size: []s indicated on drawings.
b. Thickness: 9.5 mm.
3. Mesh-Mounted Tiles:
a. Size and Shape: Multiple size rectangular tiles on 305 by 305 mm nominal mesh
backing.
b. Thickness: 5.6 mm.
4. Face: Smooth.
5. Surface Finish: Polished.
6. Edges: Square.
7. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.3 percent, maximum.
8. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
9. Coordinating Shapes: Liner.
H. Artificial Stone Tile:
1. Composition: 93 percent quartz aggregate, resin, color pigments.
2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.3 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
3. Size: As indicated on drawings, nominal.
4. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
5. Edges: Square.
6. Surface Finish: Polished.
7. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
I. Glass Tile: ANSI A137.2, standard grade.
1. Large Format Tiles:
a. Size: As indicated on drawings. []

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 5 TILING

 b. Thickness: 8 mm.
2. Mosaic Tiles:
a. Size: 25 by 25 mm, nominal, tiles on 305 by 305 mm, nominal, mesh backing.
b. Thickness: 8 mm.
3. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent as tested in accordance with ASTM C373.
4. Opacity: Opaque as defined in ANSI A137.2.
5. Edges: Square.
6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
8. Coordinating Shapes: Liner.
J. Metal Tile:
1. Composition: Metal wrapped porcelain tile.
2. Metal Material: Stainless steel.
3. Size: As indicated on drawings. []
4. Thickness: 6.3 mm.
5. Surface Finish: Polished.
6. Edges: Square.
7. Mesh-Mounted Tiles: Multiple size rectangular tiles on 305 by 305 mm nominal mesh
backing.
8. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
9. Pattern: [].
10. Coordinating Shapes: Liner.
K. Concrete Tile:
1. Composition: Portland cement, ASTM C150/C150M; marble dust, natural pigmented
powders.
2. Size:As indicated on drawings. []
3. Thickness: 15.9 mm.
4. Surface Finish: Matte.
5. Sealer: As recommended by tile manufacturer.
6. Color(s): To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.
7. Trim Units: Base with straight edge in sizes indicated.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ceramic Accessories: Glazed finish, same color and finish as adjacent field tile; same
manufacturer as tile.
1. Soap Dish: With handle, clam shell design, recess mounted; cast strength sufficient to
resist lateral pull force of 34 Kg.
2. Toilet Tissue Holder: Recessed, for single roll, with spring loaded holder.
3. Towel Bars: Standard design, surface mounted with extensions for casting into small wall
openings; cast strength sufficient to resist lateral pull force of 14 Kg.
B. Pre-Formed Accessories To Be Covered with Tile: High density expanded polystyrene with
ANSI A118.10 waterproofing finish or membrane.
C. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose, double bullnose, cove base, and cove ceramic shapes in
sizes coordinated with field tile.
1. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.
D. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit
application, for setting using tile mortar or adhesive.
1. Applications:
a. Open edges of wall tile.
b. Open edges of floor tile.
c. Wall corners, outside and inside.
d. Transition between floor finishes of different heights.
e. Thresholds at door openings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 6 TILING

 f. Expansion and control joints, floor and wall.
g. Floor to wall joints.
h. Borders and other trim as indicated on drawings.
i. Balcony and terrace edge trim and fascia.
E. Thresholds: 51 mm wide by full width of wall or frame opening; beveled edge on both long
edges; without holes, cracks, or open seams.
1. Thickness: 12.7 mm.
2. Material: Marble, honed finish.
3. Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
4. Applications:
a. At doorways where tile terminates.
b. At open edges of floor tile where adjacent finish is a different height.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Provide setting and grout materials from same manufacturer.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.
1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond
coat is indicated.
C. Improved Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.15.
1. Applications: Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond
coat is indicated.
D. Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3.
1. Applications: Where indicated on drawings.
E. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset mastic type.
1. Applications: [].
2. Use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure.
F. Water Based Adhesive: Multi-purpose type mastic.
1. Applications: [].
G. Adhesive for Bonding Fleece-Backed Underlayments to Non-Cementitious Substrates: Water-
based rubber resin.
H. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.1.
1. Applications: [].
I. Mortar Bond Coat For Exterior Glue Plywood: ANSI A118.11.
1. Applications: Where thin-set installation is indicated over plywood.
J. Furan Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.5.
1. Applications: [].
K. Mortar Bed Materials: Pre-packaged mix of Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
2.04 GROUTS
A. Provide setting and grout materials from same manufacturer.
B. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 3.2 mm wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less
than 3.2 mm wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
C. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
D. Furan Grout: ANSI A118.5 chemical resistant furan resin grout.
1. Applications: Where indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 7 TILING

 2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
E. Premixed Polymer Modified Grout: Single component, stain resistant grout.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
2. Use for joints 1.6 mm to 12.7 mm wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
F. Stain Resistant Grout Additive: Liquid admixture for sanded and unsanded cement-based
grouts; mix with dry grout material in place of water.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
2.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Tile Sealant: Gunnable, silicone, siliconized acrylic, or urethane sealant; moisture and mildew
resistant type.
1. Applications: Between tile and plumbing fixtures.
2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
B. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement
grout.
1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.
C. Tile Sealer: Stain protection for natural stone and concrete tile.
D. Grout Release: Temporary, water-soluble pre-grout coating.
2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12; not
intended as waterproofing.
1. Crack Resistance: No failure at 3.2 mm gap, minimum.
2. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type:
a. Material: Synthetic rubber or Acrylic.
b. Thickness: 0.5 mm, maximum.
3. Peel-and-Stick Sheet Type:
a. Material: Rubberized membrane laminated to reinforcing fabric.
b. Thickness: 0.5 mm, maximum.
B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious
substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.
1. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1.6 mm gap, minimum; comply with ANSI A118.12.
2. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type:
a. Material: Synthetic rubber or Acrylic.
b. Thickness: 0.6 mm, minimum, dry film thickness.
3. Bonded Sheet Membrane Type:
a. Material: PVC sheet membrane with polyester fleece laminated to both sides, 1 mm
thick, nominal.
b. Material: Polyethylene sheet membrane with non-woven fabric laminated to both
sides, 0.5 to 0.8 mm thick, nominal.
4. Peel-and-Stick Sheet Type:
a. Material: Rubberized membrane laminated to reinforcing fabric, 1 mm, thick,
minimum.
C. Waterproofing Membrane: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under
thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10.
1. Fluid or Trowel Applied Type:
a. Material: Synthetic rubber.
b. Thickness: 0.6 mm, minimum, dry film thickness.
2. Mortar Bonded Sheet Type:
a. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 1 mm, thick, minimum.
3. Peel-and-Stick Sheet Type:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 8 TILING

 a. Material: Rubberized membrane laminated to reinforcing fabric, 1 mm, thick,
minimum.
D. Waterproofing Membrane Under Thick Mortar Bed at Showers and Tiled Tubs:
1. Material: Chlorinated polyethylene sheet, 1.0 mm thick, minimum; complying with ASTM
D4068.
E. Cleavage Membrane Under Thick Mortar Bed:
1. Material: 6.9 kg asphalt saturated felt.
F. Reinforcing Mesh: 51 by 51 mm size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.
G. Membrane at Walls:
1. Material: 6.9 kg asphalt saturated felt.
H. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, Flat diamond mesh, of weight to suit application, galvanized finish.
I. Underlayment at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting mortar; not
primarily a waterproofing material and having the following characteristics:
1. Sound Reduction: Comply with ANSI A118.13, bonded membrane, ASTM E492, and
ASTM E2179.
2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1.6 mm gap, minimum; comply with ANSI A118.12.
3. Water Resistance: Comply with ANSI A118.10, bonded waterproofing.
4. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
5. Uncoupling Function: Allow for separation between membrane and the mortar adhering
tile to the membrane when subjected to excessive substrate movement.
6. Suitable for installation over green concrete.
7. Suitable for installation over wood-based substrates.
8. Type: Fluid or Trowel Applied.
9. Type: Thin-Set Mortar Adhered Sheet.
10. Type: Peel-and-Stick Sheet.
11. Type: Peel-and-Stick Sheet - Termite Barrier:
a. Termite Resistance: 100 percent when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC380.
J. Sound Control Underlayment at Floors: Recycled rubber type, fully-adhered.
1. Sound Reduction: Comply with ASTM E492.
2. Thickness: 3.2 mm, nominal.
K. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density, glass fiber
reinforced, 12.7 mm thick; 51 mm wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.
L. Backer Board: Coated glass mat type complying with ASTM C1178/C1178M; inorganic
fiberglass mat on both surfaces and integral acrylic coating vapor retarder.
M. Mesh Tape: 50 mm wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that subfloor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work and are ready to receive tile.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of
work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.
C. Verify that subfloor surfaces are dust free and free of substances that could impair bonding of
setting materials to subfloor surfaces.
D. Cementitious Subfloor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are ready for tiling installation by testing
for moisture and alkalinity (pH).
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tiling material
manufacturer and setting material manufacturer.
E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 9 TILING

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions.
Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of
ANSI A108.1a through ANSI A108.19 , manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB)
recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases
neatly. Align floor joints.
D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make
grout joints without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout.
E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.
F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings.
G. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
H. Install thresholds where indicated.
I. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
J. Keep control and expansion joints free of mortar, grout, and adhesive.
K. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
L. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated.
M. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout, with either
bond breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS
A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F102, with
standard grout.
B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, dry-set
or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated.
2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)
Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout.
3. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)
Method F131.
4. Where furan bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB)
Method F133.
5. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in
accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F115.
3.05 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - MORTAR BED METHODS
A. Over exterior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F101, bonded,
with standard grout.
B. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F111, with
cleavage membrane, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 10 TILING

 D. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as recommended by manufacturer and as specified in the
section in which the product is specified.
E. Mortar Bed Thickness: 15.9 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
3.06 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS
A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B415, mortar bed floor,
and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls.
B. At bathtub walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method B412, over cementitious backer
units with waterproofing membrane.
C. Grout with standard grout as specified above.
3.07 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A. On exterior walls install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244, thin-set over
cementitious backer units, with waterproofing membrane.
B. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244,
using membrane at toilet rooms.
C. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method
W245.
D. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method
W243, thin-set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where mortar bed is indicated, install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W222, one
coat method.
2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at showers and bathtub walls,
install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W222, one coat method.
E. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W202, thin-
set with dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 3000 - 11 TILING

 SECTION 09 5423
LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Linear metal ceilings.
B. Suspended metal support system and perimeter trim.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation.
B. Section 28 4600 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling.
C. Section 23 3700 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
C. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients
by the Reverberation Room Method; 2017.
D. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems
for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.
E. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2009 (Reapproved 2016).
F. ASTM E413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2016.
G. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2017.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Design components to ensure light fixtures will not induce eccentric loads. Where components
may induce rotation of ceiling system components, provide stabilizing reinforcement.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical and electrical
components and with other construction activities affected by work of this section.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.
C. Sequencing: Supply hanger clips during steel deck erection. Supply additional hangers and
inserts as required.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Furnish for component profiles.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate reflected ceiling plan.
D. Samples: Submit two samples ___ by ___ mm in size illustrating color and finish of exposed to
view components.
E. Designer's Qualification Statement.
F. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
G. Installer's Qualification Statement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5423 - 1 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications for Seismic Design: Perform under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed at the State in which the
Project is located.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.
1. Minimum Five years experience.
2. Approved by metal ceiling manufacturer.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.
1.08 MOCK-UP
A. Construct ________ mock-up, ____ m long by ____ m wide; include suspension system,
panels, closures in mock-up.
B. Locate mock-up where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept factory-finished products on site in manufacturer's unopened factory packaging only;
reject opened packages.
B. Protect factory-finished products from damage to appearance by storing products in
manufacturer's unopened factory packaging in dry storage area.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty; include coverage for corrosion resistance and
discoloration of surface finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS
A. Linear Metal Ceiling System: Panels and baffles, suspension members, trim, and accessories
as required to provide a complete system.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Design to support imposed loads of indicated items without eccentric loading of supports.
2. Design for maximum deflection of 1/360 of span.
3. Design to resist seismic load by using practices specified in ASTM E580.
4. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of ________ calculated in accordance with ASTM E413,
based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90, with insulation installed.
5. Sound Absorption Average (SAA): ______, measured in accordance with ASTM C423
with insulation installed.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Linear Metal Panels:
1. Type: Linear panel with reveals; snap-in installation.
a. Size and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
b. Panel Profile: Channel shaped with square edges.
c. Spacing: As indicated on drawings mm reveal between panels.
2. Material: Stainless steel sheet, ASTM A666, Type 304.
a. Finish: Satin.
B. Acoustical Backer: Manufacturer's standard non-woven fabric; as required to achieve specified
acoustic performance.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5423 - 2 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

 C. Edge Molding, Expansion Joints, and Splices: Same material, thickness, and finish as linear
panels.
D. End Caps: Formed metal; same color and finish as sight-exposed surfaces of linear panels.
E. Accessories: Stabilizer bars as required for suspended grid system; sight-exposed surfaces
same color and finish as sight-exposed surfaces of linear panels.
F. Suspension Members: Formed steel sections, with integral attachment points; galvanized
finish; size and type to suit application, seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness
requirement specified.
G. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, 2.91 mm diameter.
H. Subgirt Members: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275
coating; formed to resist imposed loads and to provide attachment for linear ceiling and
accessories.
I. Insulation: Specified in Section 07 2100.
J. Touch-up Paint For Concealed Items: Zinc rich type.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop cut linear panels to accommodate mechanical and electrical items.
B. Factory-form internal and external corners of same material, thickness, finish, and profile to
match exposed linear panels; back brace internal corners.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Suspension Components:
1. Install after above-ceiling work is complete in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
ASTM C636/C636M, and ASTM E580/E580M.
2. Hang carrying members independent of walls, columns, ducts, light fixtures, pipe, and
conduit; where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face panels
with adjacent panels.
3. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
adjacent hangers to span the required distance.
B. Linear Metal Ceiling:
1. Install linear panels, baffles, and other system components in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Stagger end joints minimum 300 mm.
3. Butt interior end joints tight.
4. Set exterior end joints with 2 mm gap for expansion and contraction.
5. Provide expansion joints to accommodate plus or minus 25 mm movement and maintain
visual closure.
6. Field miter corners at changes in panel direction.
7. Install filler strips between linear panels at interior locations.
8. Install edge moldings at junctions with other finishes and at vertical surfaces; use
maximum piece lengths.
9. Where bullnose masonry units occur, install radiused closures to fit edge molding.
10. Install end caps at sight-exposed ends of linear panels.
11. Exercise care when site cutting sight-exposed finished components to ensure surface
finish is not defaced.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5423 - 3 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

 C. Insulation: Install above panel members; fit tight between grid members; place insulation with
facing side down.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 3 mm in 3 m.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
C. Maximum Variation From Dimensioned Position: 6 mm.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean polished surfaces.
B. Replace damaged or abraded components.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5423 - 4 LINEAR METAL CEILINGS

 SECTION 09 5426
SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood veneer panels.
B. Linear wood planks.
C. Wood grilles.
D. Metal suspension system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Metal suspension systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-
Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2017.
B. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
D. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2014.
E. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of
Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2017.
F. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems
for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
H. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2017.
I. ASTM E1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2019.
J. CISCA (WC) - Wood Ceilings Technical Guidelines; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, attachment of wood ceiling
components to grid, accessory attachments, junctions with other ceiling finishes, and
mechanical and electrical items installed in the ceiling.
C. Product Data: Provide data on wood ceiling components and suspension system components.
D. Samples: Submit two full size samples illustrating material and finish of wood ceiling
components.
E. Test Reports: Certified test data from an independent test agency verifying that panels meet
specified requirements for fire, acoustical, and seismic performance.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
G. Designer's Qualification Statement.
H. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
I. Installer's Qualification Statement.
J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5426 - 1 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Provide ____ m by ____ m mock-up including suspension members, trim, and wood ceiling
components.
B. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements for additional requirements.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wood ceiling components to project site in original, unopened packages.
B. Store in fully enclosed space, flat, level and off the floor.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install suspended wood ceiling system until wet construction work is complete and
permanent heat and air conditioning is installed and operating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILING SYSTEM
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Design for maximum deflection of 1/360 of span.
2. Design to resist seismic load by using practices specified in ASTM E580.
3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of ____, smoke developed index of
____, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Wood-Based Materials:
1. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, plain sawn, selected for compatible species, grain and
color, no defects.
2. Composite Wood Panels: Containing no urea-formaldehyde resin binders.
C. Wood Veneer Panels: Composite wood core with wood veneer finish.
1. Panel Size: 610 by 610 mm.
2. Panel Thickness: 19 mm.
3. Veneer Species: Red oak.
a. Veneer Cut: Plain sliced.
b. Veneer Matching: Random matched.
c. End Matching: Manufacturer's recommended matching.
d. Factory Finish: Clear sealer.
4. NRC Range: ____ to ____, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
5. Perforations:
a. Shape: Circular.
b. Size: _____ mm diameter.
c. Open Area: _____ percent.
6. Acoustical Fabric: Manufacturer's standard non-woven fabric.
7. Acoustical Backer: Fiberglass, 25 mm thick.
a. Color: Black.
8. Attachment to Suspension Grid: Lay-in.
9. Edge Profile: Square.
10. Suspension System: Type specified below.
D. Linear Wood Planks: Composite wood core with wood veneer finish.
1. Type: Pre-assembled module of linear planks with battens attached perpendicularly to
back of planks.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5426 - 2 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS

 a. Module Size: 610 by 1219 mm, nominal.
b. Plank Thickness: 19 mm.
c. Plank Width: 102 mm, nominal.
d. Plank Spacing (Reveal): 19 mm.
e. Acoustical Backer: Fiberglass, 25 mm thick.
1) Color: Black.
2. Veneer Species: Red oak.
a. Veneer Cut: Plain sliced.
b. Veneer Matching: Random matched.
c. End Matching: Manufacturer's recommended matching.
d. Factory Finish: Clear sealer.
3. Solid Wood Species: Red oak.
a. Factory Finish: Clear sealer.
4. NRC Range: ____ to ____, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
5. Attachment to Suspension Grid: Direct screw attachment to suspension grid.
6. Suspension System: Type specified below.
E. Wood Grilles: Pre-assembled module of solid wood grilles with battens.
1. Module Size: 610 by 1219 mm, nominal.
2. Grille Size: _____ mm width by _____ mm depth.
3. Grille Spacing (Reveal): _____ mm.
4. Acoustical Backer: Fiberglass, 25 mm thick.
a. Color: Black.
5. Veneer Species: Red oak.
a. Veneer Cut: Plain sliced.
b. Veneer Matching: Random matched.
c. End Matching: Manufacturer's recommended matching.
d. Factory Finish: Clear sealer.
6. Solid Wood Species: Red oak.
a. Factory Finish: Clear sealer.
7. Acoustical Backer: Fiberglass, 25 mm thick.
a. Color: Black.
8. NRC Range: ____ to ____, determined in accordance with ASTM E1264.
9. Attachment to Suspension Grid: Direct screw attachment to suspension grid.
10. Suspension System: Type specified below.
F. Metal Suspension System:
1. General: Comply with ASTM C635/C635M; die cut and interlocking components, with
perimeter moldings, hold down clips, stabilizer bars, clips, and splices as required.
a. Materials:
1) Steel Grid: ASTM A653/A653M, G30 coating, unless otherwise indicated.
2) Aluminum Grid: Aluminum sheet, ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).
3) Stainless Steel Grid: ASTM A666, Type 304.
2. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application,
seismic requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement.
G. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard accessories for installation method indicated, seismic
requirements and above-ceiling accessibility.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate wood ceiling components to the greatest extent possible.
B. Fabricate components to allow access to ceiling plenum as required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5426 - 3 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS

 B. Do not install ceiling until after interior wet work is dry.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Layout wood ceiling components in pattern according to reflected ceiling plan and as shown on
shop drawings.
B. Acclimate wood ceiling materials by removing from packaging in installation area a minimum of
48 hours prior to installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install suspended wood ceiling system in accordance with CISCA (WC).
B. Suspension System:
1. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M,
and manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
2. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for
maximum deflection of 1:360.
3. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent
members.
4. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the
nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
5. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead
load to exceed deflection capability.
6. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 152 mm of each corner,
or support components independently.
7. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
8. Form expansion joints as detailed. Form to accommodate plus or minus 25 mm
movement. Maintain visual closure.
C. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
D. Wood Ceiling:
1. Install wood ceilings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Fit wood components in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
3. Install components in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
4. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
5. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges, seal and finish according to
manufacturer.
6. Install acoustical backer above wood ceiling components; fit tight between grid members.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 3 mm in 3 m.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean and touch up minor finish damage. Remove and replace components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 5426 - 4 SUSPENDED WOOD CEILINGS

 SECTION 09 6340
STONE FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Stone on floors, bases, stair treads, and risers.
B. Thresholds.
C. Stone setting and grouting.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 1200 - Built-Up Bituminous Waterproofing: Waterproofing membrane under mortar
bed.
B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between stone flooring work and adjacent
construction and fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108/A118/A136 - American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of
Ceramic Tile (Compendium); 2019.
B. ANSI A118.3 - American National Standard Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water
Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive;
2013 (Revised).
C. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar;
2012 (Revised).
D. ANSI A118.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Standard Cement Grouts for Tile
Installation; 2010 (Reaffirmed 2016).
E. ANSI A118.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded,
Waterproof Membranes For Thin-Set Ceramic Tile And Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.
F. ANSI A118.12 - American National Standard Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes for
Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation; 2014.
G. ANSI A118.13 - American National Standard Specifications for Bonded Sound Reduction
Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile Installation; 2014.
H. ASTM C503/C503M - Standard Specification for Marble Dimension Stone; 2015.
I. ASTM C568/C568M - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2015.
J. ASTM C615/C615M - Standard Specification for Granite Dimension Stone; 2018, with Editorial
Revision (2018).
K. ASTM E492 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Impact Sound
Transmission Through Floor-Ceiling Assemblies Using the Tapping Machine; 2009, with
Editorial Revision (2016).
L. TCNA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation; 2019.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide instructions for using grout.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate stone layout.
1. Submit stone supplier's installation instructions and field erection drawings.
D. Samples: Mount stone and apply grout on two plywood panels, ___ by ___ mm in size
illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations.
E. Samples: Submit stone samples for sealant compatibility testing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 6340 - 1 STONE FLOORING

 F. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal
methods, and polishes and waxes.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with TCNA (HB) instructions for methods specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with
at least three years of documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Construct ________ mock-up, ____ m long by ____ m wide, illustrating stone, finish grout, and
specified accessories.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STONE
A. Marble: Free of defects detrimental to appearance or durability; ASTM C503/C503M,
Classification I - Calcite:
1. Unit Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Thickness: 6 mm.
3. Color: As selected by Architect.
4. Surface Finish: Polished.
B. Granite: Free of defects detrimental to appearance or durability; ASTM C615/C615M.
1. Unit Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Thickness: 6 mm.
3. Color: As selected by Architect.
4. Surface Finish: Polished.
C. Limestone: Free of defects detrimental to appearance or durability; ASTM C568/C568M,
Classification I - Low Density:
1. Unit Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Thickness: 19 mm.
3. Color: Gray.
4. Surface Finish: Smooth.
D. Base: Match flooring for surface finish and color:
1. Length of Units: Equal to long dimension of floor units.
2. Height: 101 mm.
3. Top Edge: Bullnosed.
4. Internal Corner: Lapped butt joint.
5. External Corner: Bullnosed.
E. Stair Treads and Risers: Match flooring for surface finish and color; free of defects detrimental
to appearance or durability:
1. Color: Match flooring.
2. Surface Finish: Match flooring.
3. Length: 915 mm.
4. Thickness: 25 mm.
5. Riser Height: As indicated on drawings.
6. Nosing: Bull nosed.
2.02 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Provide setting and grout materials from same manufacturer.
B. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand, latex additive, and water.
C. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 6340 - 2 STONE FLOORING

 1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of
bond coat is indicated.
D. Epoxy Adhesive and Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.3.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
E. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 3 mm wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than
3 mm wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
F. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3 chemical resistant and water-cleanable epoxy grout.
1. Applications: Where indicated.
2. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Cleavage Membrane: 6.9 kg asphalt saturated felt.
B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: As specified in Section 07 1200.
C. Underlayment at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting mortar; having the
following characteristics:
1. Sound Reduction: Comply with ANSI A118.13, bonded membrane.
2. Crack Isolation: Comply with ANSI A118.12.
3. Water Resistance: Comply with ANSI A118.10, bonded waterproofing.
4. Uncoupling Function: Allow for separation between membrane and the mortar adhering
tile to the membrane when subjected to excessive substrate movement.
5. Suitable for installation over green concrete.
6. Suitable for installation over wood-based substrates.
7. Type: Fluid-applied.
D. Sound Control Underlayment at Floors: Recycled rubber type, fully-adhered.
1. Sound Reduction: Comply with ASTM E492.
2. Thickness: 3.2 mm, nominal.
E. Reinforcing Mesh: 50 by 50 mm size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.
F. Thresholds: Same stone type as flooring, color to match, honed finish, width as indicated on
drawings by full width of wall or frame opening, beveled one side, rabbeted for door stop, eased
edges.
G. Stone Floor Edging: As indicated..
H. Cleaner: Type not harmful to stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces; recommended by
stone producer and grout manufacturer.
I. Sealer: Colorless, slip and stain resistant type that will not detrimentally affect stone and
adjacent work.
2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MIX
A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site made slurry coat and mortar bed.
B. Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting bed and grout materials in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Control uniformity of mix and
coloration.
2.05 FABRICATION
A. Cut stone into sizes and thickness required.
B. Form stair treads and risers to configuration as detailed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 6340 - 3 STONE FLOORING

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive this work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Vacuum clean substrate surfaces; damp clean stone.
B. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable
flatness tolerances.
C. Clean stone prior to installation, with edges and surfaces free of dirt or foreign material.
D. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install stone flooring in accordance with stone fabricator's instructions.
B. Lay stone units to pattern indicated, and do not interrupt pattern through openings.
C. Place thresholds at door frame openings.
D. Cut and fit stone units tightly to penetrations, leaving sealant joint space. Ensure finish trim will
cover cut edges. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor and base joints.
E. Maintain uniform joint width subject to variance in tolerance allowed in stone unit size. Make
joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout.
F. Maintain joint width of 6 mm where abutting vertical surfaces or protrusions.
G. Sound test the units after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
H. Keep expansion and control joints free of mortar or grout. Apply sealant to joints.
I. Grout joints. Pack and work grout into voids. Neatly tool to flush surface.
3.04 THINSET METHOD
A. Install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113, with mortar bond coat.
B. Allow thinset materials to cure prior to grouting.
3.05 MORTAR BED METHOD
A. Install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F111, over cleavage membrane.
B. Set stone in full mortar bed to support stone over full bearing surface.
C. Allow units to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.
D. To accommodate joint grout, rake out joints 6 to 10 mm.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean stone and grout surfaces with cleaner; seal with sealer.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 6340 - 4 STONE FLOORING

 SECTION 09 9113
EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
3. Exposed walls and bottom of swimming pools and fountains.
4. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. On the roof and outdoors, paint equipment that is exposed to weather or to view,
including factory-finished materials.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-
applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.
B. Section 09 9600 - High-Performance Coatings.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Comply with ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications;
2016.
C. ASTM D4258 - Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating; 2005
(Reapproved 2017).
D. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Based Materials; 2016.
E. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
F. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 1982, with Editorial Revision (2004).
G. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.
H. SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete; 1997 (Reaffirmed 2003).
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of products to be used, with the following information for
each:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9113 - 1 EXTERIOR PAINTING

 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description
of each system.
4. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
5. If proposal of substitutions is allowed under submittal procedures, explanation of
substitutions proposed.
C. Samples: Submit three paper "draw down" samples, 216 by 279 mm in size, illustrating range
of colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified, submit samples in only that sheen.
2. Where sheen is not specified, submit each color in each sheen available.
3. Allow 30 days for approval process, after receipt of complete samples by Architect.
4. Paint color submittals will not be considered until color submittals for major materials not
to be painted, such as masonry, have been approved.
D. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, ____by____ mm in size illustrating range of colors
and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
E. Certification: By manufacturer that paints and finishes comply with VOC limits specified.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
G. Maintenance Data: Submit data including finish schedule showing where each
product/color/finish was used, product technical data sheets, material safety data sheets
(MSDS), care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, repair of painted and finished
surfaces, and color samples of each color and finish used.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Paint and Finish Materials: 4 L of each color; from the same product run, store
where directed.
3. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.07 MOCK-UP
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.
B. Provide panel, ____ m long by ____ m wide, illustrating paint color, texture, and finish.
C. Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint color, texture, and finish.
D. Locate where directed by Architect.
E. Mock-up may remain as part of the work.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 7 degrees C and a maximum of 32
degrees C, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9113 - 2 EXTERIOR PAINTING

 B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Do not apply exterior paint and finishes during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside
the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 10 degrees C for exterior; unless required
otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 860 lx measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL
A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless required to be a field-catalyzed paint.
1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing
and field experience.
3. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
4. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
5. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide paints and finishes that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in
the following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Ozone Transport Commission (OTC) Model Rule, Architectural, Industrial, and
Maintenance Coatings; www.otcair.org; specifically:
1) Opaque, Flat: 50 g/L, maximum.
2) Opaque, Nonflat: 150 g/L, maximum.
3) Opaque, High Gloss: 250 g/L, maximum.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected
later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.
E. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule.
2.02 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Exterior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete, concrete
masonry units, brick, fiber cement siding, primed wood, and primed metal.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Exterior Light Industrial Coating, Water Based.
3. Top Coat(s): Exterior Alkyd Enamel.
4. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at all locations.
b. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
c. High Gloss: MPI gloss level 7; use this sheen at all locations.
5. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9113 - 3 EXTERIOR PAINTING

 B. Concrete Floors to be Painted.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
C. Transparent Finish on Concrete Floors:
1. 1 coat stain.
2. Stain: Semi-Transparent Stain for Concrete Floors.
3. Sealer: Water Based Sealer for Concrete Floors.
4. Sealer Sheen:
a. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.
2.03 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by
manufacturer of top coats.
1. Alkali Resistant Water Based Primer.
2. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
3. Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal.
4. Alkyd Primer for Galvanized Metal.
5. Water Based Primer for Galvanized Metal.
6. Latex Primer for Exterior Wood.
7. Alkyd/Oil Primer for Exterior Wood.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially effect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Exterior Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent.
3. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
4. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces for finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Concrete:
1. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not coat
surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's written instructions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9113 - 4 EXTERIOR PAINTING

 2. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 10,350 to 27,580 kPa at
150 to 300 mm. Allow to dry.
3. Clean concrete according to ASTM D4258. Allow to dry.
4. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer and according to SSPC-SP
13.
G. Masonry:
1. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces or if alkalinity of mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions. Allow to dry.
2. Prepare surface as recommended by top coat manufacturer.
3. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of 4,140 to 10,350 kPa at 150
to 300 mm. Allow to dry.
H. Exterior Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with exterior filler compound. Spot prime defects
after repair.
I. Exterior Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with exterior patching
plaster. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali
surfaces.
J. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with
clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
K. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-
SP 1.
L. Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Prepare surface according to SSPC-SP 2.
M. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
N. Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before
installation.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
C. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
F. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
G. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
H. Wood to Receive Transparent Finishes: Tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
I. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9113 - 5 EXTERIOR PAINTING

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
B. Inspect and test questionable coated areas in accordance with ________.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.
3.07 COLOR SCHEDULE
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9113 - 6 EXTERIOR PAINTING

 SECTION 09 9123
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before
installing equipment.
2. Surfaces inside cabinets.
3. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings.
4. Exposed walls and bottom of swimming pools and fountains.
5. Mechanical and Electrical:
a. In finished areas, paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and
electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items.
c. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that
are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible
surfaces.
d. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard
cabinets to match face panels.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having factory-
applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and
operating parts of equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 6116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Based Materials; 2016.
B. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current
Edition.
C. SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
D. SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; 2007.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL
A. Paints and Finishes: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.
1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9123 - 1 INTERIOR PAINTING

 2. For opaque finishes, tint each coat including primer coat and intermediate coats, one-half
shade lighter than succeeding coat, with final finish coat as base color.
3. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
4. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: Comply with Section 01 6116.
C. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics.
D. Sheens: Provide the sheens specified; where sheen is not specified, sheen will be selected
later by Architect from the manufacturer's full line.
E. Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
1. Selection to be made by Architect after award of contract.
2. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the
wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.
2.02 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum board,
concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, wood, plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed steel,
galvanized steel, and aluminum.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Interior Latex.
3. Top Coat Sheen:
a. Flat: MPI gloss level 1; use this sheen for ceilings and other overhead surfaces.
b. Velvet: MPI gloss level 2; use this sheen at all locations.
c. Eggshell: MPI gloss level 3; use this sheen at all locations.
d. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen for items subject to frequent touching by
occupants, including door frames and railings.
e. Semi-Gloss: MPI gloss level 5; use this sheen at all locations.
f. Gloss: MPI gloss level 6; use this sheen at all locations.
4. Primer: As recommended by top coat manufacturer for specific substrate.
B. Paint I-OP-MD-DT - Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by
occupants, including metals and wood:
1. Medium duty applications include doors, door frames, railings, handrails, guardrails, and
balustrades.
2. Two top coats and one coat primer.
3. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex.
4. Top Coat Sheen:
C. Medium Duty Vertical and Overhead: Including gypsum board, plaster, concrete, concrete
masonry units, uncoated steel, shop primed steel, galvanized steel, and aluminum.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Interior Epoxy-Modified Latex.
D. Dry Fall: Metals; exposed structure and overhead-mounted services in utilitarian spaces,
including shop primed steel deck, structural steel, metal fabrications, galvanized ducts,
galvanized conduit, and galvanized piping.
1. Shop primer by others.
2. One top coat.
3. Top Coat: Alkyd Dry Fall.
4. Top Coat Sheen:
E. Concrete Floors to be Painted.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Alkyd Floor Enamel, Gloss.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9123 - 2 INTERIOR PAINTING

 F. Transparent Finish on Concrete Floors.
1. 1 coat stain.
2. Stain: Semi-Transparent Stain for Concrete Floors.
3. Sealer: Water Based Sealer for Concrete Floors.
4. Sealer Sheen:
2.03 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by
manufacturer of top coats.
1. Alkali Resistant Water Based Primer.
2. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler.
3. Concrete Floor Primer, Waterborne.
4. Interior Latex Primer Sealer.
5. Interior Drywall Primer Sealer.
6. Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal.
7. Interior Rust-Inhibitive Water Based Primer.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding
materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of painted surfaces.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially effect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Plaster and Stucco: 12 percent.
3. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Masonry Units: 12 percent.
4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
5. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: 8 percent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Concrete:
F. Masonry:
G. Concrete Floors and Traffic Surfaces: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with
clear water. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
H. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9123 - 3 INTERIOR PAINTING

 I. Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make
smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
J. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-
SP 1.
K. Galvanized Surfaces:
L. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare
steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-SP
6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". Protect from corrosion until coated.
M. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried;
sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
N. Wood Doors to be Field-Finished: Seal wood door top and bottom edge surfaces with clear
sealer.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.
E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection.
B. Owner will provide field inspection.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
remove daily from site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect finishes until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged finishes after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 09 9123 - 4 INTERIOR PAINTING

 SECTION 10 2800
TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Private-use bathroom accessories.
2. Warm-air dryers.
3. Underlavatory guards.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.

2. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other
work and substrate preparation.
3. Include electrical characteristics.

B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.

1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 10 2800 - 1 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.
2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain private-use bathroom accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.

B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:

1. Description: Double-roll dispenser with hood.
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Capacity: Designed for 114- or 127-mm diameter tissue rolls.
4. Material and Finish: Solid brass, polished.

C. Shower Curtain Rod:

1. Outside Diameter: 32 mm.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Rod Material and Finish: Solid brass, polished.
4. Flange Material and Finish: Polished brass-plated zinc alloy (zamac).
5. Accessories: Integral chrome-plated brass glide hooks.

D. Soap Dish:
1. Description:
2. Mounting: Recessed.
3. Material and Finish: Solid brass, polished.

E. Medicine Cabinet:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 10 2800 - 2 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES
 1. Mounting: Surface mounted.
2. Size: 460 by 610 mm.
3. Door: Framed mirror door concealing storage cabinet equipped with continuous hinge
and spring-buffered, rod-type stop and magnetic door catch.
4. Shelves: Three, adjustable.
5. Material and Finish:

a. Cabinet: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)

b. Mirror Frame: As selected by Architect.
c. Door:. Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)
d. Hinge:. Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)
e. Shelves: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)

F. Facial Tissue Dispenser

1. Mounting: Wall mounted, recessed.
2. Depth: 102 mm.
3. Material and Finish:

a. Dispenser Face: Polished chrome-plated brass.

b. Cabinet: Steel with corrosion-resistant finish.

G. Robe Hook
1. Description: Double-prong unit.
2. Material and Finish: Solid brass, polished.

H. Toothbrush and Tumbler Holder :

1. Description:.
2. Material and Finish: Solid brass, polished.

I. Towel Bar:
1. Description: 19-mm round tube with circular end brackets.
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Length: 762 mm.
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

J. Towel Pin:
1. Description: Projecting minimum of 127 mm from wall surface.
2. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished)

K. Towel Ring:
1. Description: Pin projecting approximately 63 mm from wall with oval ring.
2. Pin Material and Finish: Solid brass, polished.
3. Ring Material and Finish: Matching pin

L. Towel Shelf:
1. Description: Surface-mounted, guest-towel shelf with four 9-mm diameter stainless-steel
tubes mounted in support arms.

a. Towel Bar: 8-mm stainless-steel towel bar below shelf.

2. Length: 610 mm.

3. Material and Finish: Polished brass-plated, stainless-steel.

M. Towel Rack:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 10 2800 - 3 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES
 1. Description: Surface-mounted, guest-towel unit with approximately 6-mm diameter wire
rings welded to upright wire bracket] <Insert description.
2. Capacity: Four sets of bath towels, hand towels, and washcloths.
3. Nominal Height: 533 mm.
4. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac).

N. Retractable Clothesline:
1. Description: Surface-mounted rectangular housing with minimum 1829-mm long,
retractable, spring-actuated, synthetic clothesline and remote retention bracket.
2. Material and Finish Stainless steel, No. 7 finish (polished).

2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain warm-air dryers from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Warm-Air Dryer:
1. Description: Standard-speed, warm-air hand dryer.
2. Mounting: Surface mounted, with low-profile design.
3. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch.

a. Operation Time: 30 to 40 seconds.

4. Cover Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin)].

5. Electrical Requirements: 208-240 V, 9-10 A, 1900-2300 W.

2.5 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS

A. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevents
direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without removing
coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.8-mm minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise
indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products
with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.9-mm
minimum nominal thickness.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with Z180 hot-dip zinc coating.

E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-
and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 10 2800 - 4 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES
 G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and
access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with
corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate

to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 1112 N, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 10 2800 - 5 TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY

ACCESSORIES
 SECTION 10 4400
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a.
B. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.
C. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2013.
D. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of cabinets and cabinet physical dimensions.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination
requirements.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL (DIR) or FM (AG) for purpose specified and as
indicated.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage.
1. Class: A:B:C type.
2. Size and classification as scheduled.
3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, color as selected.
4. Temperature range: Minus 40 degrees C (Minus 40 degrees F) to 49 degrees C (120
degrees F).
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, chrome-plated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure rigidly in place.
C. Place extinguishers in cabinets.
END OF SECTION

1009DP / MISHRIFAH VILLA 10 4400 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION

SPECIALTIES
 SECTION 11 3100
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Kitchen appliances.
B. Laundry appliances.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Plumbing connections for appliances.
B. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical connections for appliances.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of
each piece of residential equipment specified.
C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL (DIR) and complying with NEMA Standards
(National Electrical Manufacturers Association).
C. Gas Appliances: Bearing design certification seal of American Gas Association (AGA).
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators.
C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens.
D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 KITCHEN APPLIANCES
A. Refrigerator: Free-standing, side-by-side, and frost-free.
1. Capacity: Total minimum storage of 0.51 cu m; minimum 15 percent freezer capacity.
2. Energy Usage: Minimum 20 percent more energy efficient than energy efficiency
standards set by U.S. Department of Energy (DOE).
3. Features: Include glass shelves, automatic icemaker, light in freezer compartment, and
in-door water and ice dispenser.
4. Exterior Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.
B. Range: Electric, free-standing, with glass-ceramic cooktop.
1. Size: 762 mm wide.
2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition.
3. Elements: Four (4).
4. Controls: Solid state electronic.
5. Features: Include automatic meat thermometer, storage drawer, oven door window,
broiler pan and grid, and oven light.
6. Exterior Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 11 3100 - 1 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

 C. Modular Cooktop: Electric, with glass-ceramic cooktop.
1. Size: 762 mm wide.
2. Elements: Four (4).
3. Features: Include grille module, griddle module, and downdraft exhaust.
4. Exterior Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.
D. Wall Oven: Electric, single oven.
1. Size: 762 mm wide.
2. Oven: Self-cleaning with electronic ignition.
3. Controls: Solid state electronic.
4. Features: Include automatic meat thermometer, storage drawer, oven door window,
broiler pan and grid, and oven light.
5. Exterior Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.
E. Cooking Exhaust: Range hood.
1. Size: 1067 mm wide.
2. Fan: Two-speed, 236 L/s
3. Exhaust: Rectangular, vented to exterior.
4. Features: Include cooktop light, night light, backdraft damper, removable grease filter,
and retractable visor.
5. Exterior Finish: Painted steel, color as indicated.
F. Microwave: Countertop.
1. Capacity: 0.019 cu m.
2. Power: 700 watts.
3. Features: Include turntable, cooktop light, night light, 2-speed exhaust fan, built-in trim kit,
and undercabinet mounting kit.
4. Exterior Finish: Black.
G. Waste Disposer: Standard type, overload protection, direct wired, dishwasher connection,
drain elbow, drain connector, and sound reduction features.
1. Power: 1/3 HP.
2. Capacity: Large.
3. Height: 368 mm.
4. Depth: 216 mm.
5. Splash Guard: Removable.
6. Drain Outlet Diameter: 38 mm.
7. Controls: Wall switch.
8. Voltage: 115 volts, 60 Hz, 4 amps.
9. Sink Flange Kit: Stainless steel.
10. Exterior Finish: Black.
H. Dishwasher: Undercounter.
1. Controls: Solid state electronic.
2. Wash Levels: Three (3).
3. Cycles: Six (6), including normal, rinse and hold, short, china/crystal, and pot and pan.
4. Features: Include rinse aid dispenser, optional no-heat dry, optional water temperature
boost, adjustable upper rack, and adjustable lower rack.
5. Finish: Porcelain enameled steel, color as indicated.
2.02 LAUNDRY APPLIANCES
A. Clothes Washer: Top-loading stationary.
1. Size: Large capacity.
2. Controls: Solid state electronic.
3. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, delicate, soak, and automatic soak.
4. Motor Speed: Single-speed.
5. Features: Include optional second rinse, bleach dispenser, fabric softener dispenser, self-
cleaning lint filter, sound insulation, and end of cycle signal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 11 3100 - 2 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

 6. Finish: Painted steel, color as indicated.
B. Clothes Dryer: Electric, stationary.
1. Size: Large capacity.
2. Controls: Solid state electronic, with electronic moisture-sensing dry control.
3. Temperature Selections: One.
4. Cycles: Include normal, permanent press, knit/delicate, and air only.
5. Features: Include interior light, reversible door, stationary rack, sound insulation, and end
of cycle signal.
6. Finish: Painted steel, color as indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify utility rough-ins are provided and correctly located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment to provide efficient operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove packing materials from equipment and properly discard.
B. Wash and clean equipment.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 11 3100 - 3 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

 SECTION 12 2216
DRAPERY TRACK AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formed steel track.
B. Extruded aluminum track.
C. Nylon carriers, cords, and accessories.
D. Motorized carrier device.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Wiring from control station to operator.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C. WCMA A100.1 - Safety of Window Covering Products; 2018.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide track profiles, acceptable load data, finishes available, and electrical
characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate end track location, width of window opening, location of blocking for
anchors, appurtenances and interferences, adjacent construction, operating hardware, and
support bracket details.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures, perimeter conditions requiring
attention.
E. Maintenance Data: Include data for motor, shaft and gearing, lubrication frequency, control
adjustments, spare part sources.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Carriers: Quantity equal to 5 percent of those installed.
3. Extra Control Cords/Wands: Two of each type installed.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section,
with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Build mock-up at location and in sized as shown on Drawings.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Construction: Extruded aluminum, slotted for mounting at interval of not more than 610 mm o.c.
and bendable to radii indicated.
1. Lengths and Configurations: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Support Capability: Weight of drape indicated.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Tracks: Extruded aluminum, bi-parting operating traverse rods, regular duty channel track.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 2216 - 1 DRAPERY TRACK AND

ACCESSORIES
 C. Track Brackets: Formed steel wall type, for recessed installation, with screws and inserts for
attachment.
1. Mounting Surface: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Installation Fasteners: Sized to support track assembly and drape, and fabricated from metal
compatible with track, brackets, and supporting construction. Provide two fasteners to fasten
each bracket to supporting construction.
E. Motor Operation: Low-voltage motor with built-in low voltage interface for direct access to
control systems, with thermal- overload switch; sized for weight of drape and track length
indicated; and equipped with stops to prevent overdrawing.
1. Control: Remote control, infrared
2. Draw: Two way, center opening
3. Electrical Requirements: As indicated on Drawings.
4. Travel Speed: 152 mm per second.
F. Carriers: Nylon roller10 per m, rollers with hooks type.
1. Master Carriers: Butt
G. End Stops: Manufacturer's standard with track end cap.
H. Pulleys: Heavy duty.
I. Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop, free end weighted, complying with WCMA A100.1.
J. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; square shape; non-removable type; length of window
opening height less 75 mm.
K. Track Enclosure: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box; internally fitted with hardware for
operation.
L. Tension Pulley: Nylon rollers in metal retainer, fixed with spring loaded tension wall bracket.
2.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Electrical Characteristics, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Motor: NEMA MG 1, ____.
C. Control Station: Three button, open-close-stop, momentary type, control for each electric
operator; surface mounted, switch located at As indicated on Drawings.
D. Remote Control: Hand held transmitter; digital control, resettable.
E. Electric Operator: Center mounted, adjustable friction clutch, enclosed limit switch; mounting
brackets and hardware; manually operable in case of power failure; transit time of ___ mm per
second.
F. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
G. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Exposed Surfaces: Baked enamel, white.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that concealed anchors are in correct position.
B. Verify that electrical service is correctly located and of proper characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install drapery tracks in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend track 300 mm both sides with window trim for single track; 450 mm for double track
where exposed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 2216 - 2 DRAPERY TRACK AND

ACCESSORIES
 C. Mount track and motor support brackets on solid backing. Where mounting location does not
align with solid backing, provide expanding anchors for each screw hole location.
D. Anchor tension pulley to wall.
E. Set cord pulls so that cord pull is 300 mm below window sill in full open position.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust drapery hardware for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 2216 - 3 DRAPERY TRACK AND

ACCESSORIES
 SECTION 12 3530
RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Kitchen cabinets.
B. Kitchen countertops.
C. Vanity cabinets.
D. Vanity countertops.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use;
2016.
B. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2015.
C. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; 2016.
D. KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets;
2017.
E. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, configurations, construction details, and joint
details.
C. Certificate: Submit Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (KCMA) certificate showing
conformance with KCMA A161.1.
D. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, elevations, clearances required, rough-in and
anchor placement dimensions and tolerances.
E. Cabinet Finish Sample: Submit two samples of each type of finish, 51 mm by 75 mm in size,
illustrating color, texture, gloss, and wood species.
F. Cabinet Door and Drawer Sample: Of sufficient size to show cabinet style and finish, with
selected hardware.
G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
H. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
I. Specimen Warranty.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this
section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A. Provide full size mock-up of casework base unit.
B. Locate where directed.
C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for material and workmanship.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3530 - 1 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABINETS
A. Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets: Premanufactured and factory-finished, complying with
construction and testing requirements in KCMA A161.1.
B. Cabinet Box: Framed construction.
1. Side Panels: Particle or plywood.
a. Exposed Side Panel Finish: Wood veneer, coordinate with cabinet door and drawer
color/finish.
2. Back Panel: Plywood.
3. Bottom (and Top) Panel: Plywood.
4. Face Frame: Solid wood.
5. Interior Cabinet Finish: Thermally fused laminate.
a. Color: As selected.
6. Exposed Panel Edges: Finish with manufacturer's standard edge banding, color
coordinated with other exposed finishes.
C. Cabinet Door/Drawer Configuration: Full overlay.
D. Cabinet Doors:
1. Solid wood frame, medium density fiberboard (MDF) center panel with wood veneer finish.
2. Medium density fiberboard (MDF), painted finish.
3. Particle board or medium density fiberboard (MDF), wood veneer finish.
4. Species: As selected.
5. Color/Pattern: As selected.
E. Drawers:
1. Solid wood sides with dovetail joints, plywood bottom panel.
2. Drawer Front: To match cabinet doors in style, material, and finish.
3. Interior Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Shelves: Manufacturer's standard adjustable shelves and shelf supports.
G. Cabinet Hardware: As selected from manufacturer's standard types, styles and finishes.
1. Comply with BHMA A156.9.
H. Countertops: As specified in Section 12 3600.
I. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Wood-Based Materials:
1. Solid Wood: Air-dried to 4.5 percent moisture content, then tempered to 6 percent
moisture content before use.
B. Solid Wood: Clear, dry, sound, plain sawn, selected for species grain and color, no defects.
C. Hardwood Plywood: Veneer core; HPVA HP-1 Grade as indicated; same species as exposed
solid wood, clear, compatible grain and color, no defects. Band exposed edges with solid wood
of same species as veneer.
D. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Composed of cellulosic fibers and resin cured under heat
and pressure; grade to suite application; complying with ANSI A208.2.
E. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL): Melamine resin, NEMA LD 3, Type VGL laminate panels.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps.
C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on adjacent units for rigidity.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3530 - 2 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of support framing.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered.
C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure.
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of _____ mm.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3530 - 3 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

 SECTION 12 3600
COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Countertops for architectural cabinet work.
B. Countertops for manufactured casework.
C. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.
D. Sinks molded into countertops.
E. Epoxy resin sinks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Tile for countertops.
B. Section 12 3200 - Manufactured Wood Casework.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
B. ASTM B211/B211M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Rolled or Cold
Finished Bar, Rod, and Wire; 2019.
C. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2018.
D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
E. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014, with Errata (2018).
F. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.1;
2016, with Errata (2018).
G. IAPMO Z124 - Plastic Plumbing Fixtures; 2017.
H. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.
I. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
J. NFPA 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling
Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth; 2019.
K. SEFA 2 - Installations; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of
cabinets and casework specified in other sections.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's
full range of available colors and patterns.
E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 150 mm square,
representing actual product, color, and patterns.
F. Sustainable Design Submittal: Documentation for sustainably harvested wood-based
components.
G. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3600 - 1 COUNTERTOPS

 H. Certificate: Submit labels and certificates required by quality assurance and quality control
programs.
I. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
J. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and
repair of countertop surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this
section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Quality Certification:
1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the installed work complies with
AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for grade or grades
specified.
2. Provide designated labels on shop drawings as required by certification program.
3. Provide designated labels on installed products as required by certification program.
4. Submit certifications upon completion of installation that verifies this work is in compliance
with specified requirements.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.
B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High-pressure decorative laminate (HPDL) sheet bonded to
substrate.
1. Laminate Sheet: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS, 1.2 mm nominal thickness.
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25, maximum; smoke
developed index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
b. NSF approved for food contact.
c. Wear Resistance: In addition to specified grade, comply with NEMA LD 3 High Wear
Grade requirements for wear resistance.
d. Laminate Core Color: Same as decorative surface.
e. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
f. Surface Color and Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
2. Exposed Edge Treatment: Square, substrate built up to minimum 32 mm thick; covered
with matching laminate.
3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Molded rubber edge with T-spline, sized to completely cover
edge of panel.
a. Color: As indicated on drawings.
4. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.
5. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Custom Grade.
C. Tile Countertops: Tile bonded to substrate after installation of substrate on cabinet.
1. Tile: As specified in Section 09 3000.
2. Adhesive and Grout: Materials and installation as specified in Section 09 3000.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3600 - 2 COUNTERTOPS

 3. Substrate: Plywood.
4. Back and End Splashes: Same material, coved joint, bullnose top edge.
D. Wood Countertops: One-piece, glued-laminated under pressure.
1. Thickness: 32 mm, minimum.
2. Species: Maple; clear grade.
3. Exposed Edges: Rounded to approximately 9 mm radius.
4. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction; 19 mm thick, square edges.
5. Finish: Sanded smooth; two coat boiled linseed oil rubbed in with 48 hours between
coats.
6. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Custom Grade.
E. Epoxy Resin Countertops: Filled epoxy resin molded into homogenous, non-porous sheets; no
surface coating and color and pattern consistent throughout thickness; with integral or
adhesively seamed components.
1. Flat Surface Thickness: 25 mm, nominal.
2. Flammability: Self-extinguishing, when tested in accordance with ASTM D635.
3. Surface Finish: Smooth, non-glare.
4. Color: Black.
5. Exposed Edge Shape: 5 mm radius corner.
6. Drip Edge: Drip groove 3 mm wide and deep, located 12 mm back from edge on
underside of all exposed edges.
7. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; separate for field attachment.
8. Sinks: Same material, same color; integrally molded with counter; bottom sloped to outlet;
molded outlets; drain outlet located in back corner.
a. Sides and Ends: 12 mm minimum thickness.
b. Bottoms: 16 mm minimum thickness.
c. Interior Corners: 25 mm minimum radius.
d. Clamping collars for 38 or 50 mm diameter waste pipe, for sealed but not permanent
connection.
e. Steel channel supports front to back on each side, fastened to underside of top to
support twice full sink weight.
9. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Premium Grade.
F. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous
substrate.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 12 mm, minimum.
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA
LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and
capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface
coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Sinks and Bowls: Integral castings; minimum 19 mm wall thickness; comply with
IAPMO Z124.
b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
c. Color/Pattern Family: Solid color, light colors.
3. Other Components Thickness: 12 mm, minimum.
4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 32 mm thick; square edge; use marine
edge at sinks.
5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 102 mm high.
6. Fabricate in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS), Section
11 - Countertops, Premium Grade.
G. Solid Plastic Wall-Hung Vanity Tops: Factory fabricated top, splashes, skirts, end supports,
and center supports made of solid molded high density polyethylene (HDPE) sheets, tested in
accordance with NFPA 286.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3600 - 3 COUNTERTOPS

 1. Sheet Thickness: 25 mm with edges radiused to 6 mm.
2. Vanity Size: 610 mm deep by length indicated on drawings.
3. Shoes: 76 mm, one piece molded HDPE.
4. Attachment Brackets: 406 mm long, heavy duty extruded aluminum.
5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 75, maximum; smoke developed
index of 450, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
6. NSF approved for food contact.
7. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
H. Solid Surfacing Wall Panels: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous
substrate.
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 6 mm, minimum.
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA
LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and
capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface
coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.
b. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
I. Concrete Countertops: Precast concrete; top and edges formed against melamine-finished
mold; jointing as indicated on drawings; sanded and polished.
1. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
2. Thickness: 38 mm.
3. Color Additive: As selected.
4. Decorative Aggregate: As selected.
5. Sealer: Low gloss penetrating silane/siloxane, transparent.
6. Construct forms with required inserts and knock-outs and support to remain in place
through curing.
7. Concrete Mix: Non-shrinking, machine-mixed commercial grade concrete mix for casting
countertops, requiring only the addition of water.
J. Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possible
with inconspicuous adhesive joints.
1. Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is
acceptable.
2. Color: Uniform light gray.
3. Quarry Name: ________; no substitutions.
4. Stone Thickness: 12 mm, minimum.
5. Surface Finish: Honed, non-glare.
6. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; for field attachment.
K. Stainless Steel Countertops: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel sheet; 1.59 mm nominal
sheet thickness.
1. Finish: 4B satin brushed finish.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B211/B211M, 6463 alloy, T5 temper.
B. Wood-Based Components:
1. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2. Provide sustainably harvested wood, certified or labeled as specified in Section 01 6000 -
Product Requirements.
3. Provide wood harvested within a 805 km radius of the project site.
4. Wood fabricated from timber recovered from riverbeds or otherwise abandoned is
permitted, unless otherwise noted, provided it is clean and free of contamination; identify
source; provide lumber re-graded by an inspection service accredited by the American
Lumber Standard Committee, Inc.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3600 - 4 COUNTERTOPS

 C. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of
materials being joined.
D. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 25 mm except where top butts against
cabinet or wall.
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof
glue.
2. Height: 102 mm, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops and wall panels up to 3657 mm long in one piece; join pieces
with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
D. Stainless Steel: Fabricate tops up to 3657 mm long in one piece including nosings and back
and end splashes; accurately fitted mechanical field joints in lengths over that dimension are
permitted.
1. Weld joints; grind smooth and polish to match.
2. Provide stainless steel hat channel stiffeners, welded or soldered to underside, where
indicated on drawings.
3. Provide wall clips for support of back/end splash turndowns.
4. Sound Deadening: Apply water resistant, fire resistant sound deadening mastic to entire
bottom surface.
E. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, brackets, and braces as indicated on
drawings, finished to match.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets
are installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install laboratory worksurface countertops in compliance with requirements of SEFA 2.
B. Install vanities in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop drawings
C. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;
shim where required.
D. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate
board of 16 mm.
E. Attach wood countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board of 16
mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3600 - 5 COUNTERTOPS

 F. Install tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
G. Attach stainless steel countertops using stainless steel fasteners and clips.
H. Attach epoxy resin countertops using compatible adhesive.
I. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Horizontal: 3 mm in 3 m, maximum.
B. Offset From Wall, Countertops: 3 mm maximum; 1.5 mm minimum.
C. Field Joints: 3 mm wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 3600 - 6 COUNTERTOPS

 SECTION 12 9300
SITE FURNISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Seating.
2. Tables.
3. Trash receptacles.
4. Planters.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts cast in concrete
footings.
2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 152-mm long linear
components and 102-mm square sheet components.

1. Include full-size Samples of bench, table, and trash receptacle.

D. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material Certificates: For site furnishings.

1. Wood Preservative Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating type of

preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained,
and compliance with applicable standards.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 1 SITE FURNISHING

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Bench Replacement Planks: No fewer than two full-size units for each size indicated.
2. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: Five full-size units for each size indicated, but no
fewer than two units.
3. Anchors: Manufacturers standard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEATING AND TABLES See the table at the end of the Evaluations for a list of manufacturers'
products. Use this table in combination with manufacturers' catalogs or product data to insert
series, type, model, and designations of other characteristics.

A. Frame: Cedar Teak.

B. Seat and Back:

1. Material:
a. Wood: Teak; formed into evenly spaced parallel slats.

2. Seat Height: As indicated.

3. Seat Surface Shape: Contoured or dished.
4. Overall Height: As indicated.
5. Overall Width: As indicated.
6. Overall Depth: As indicated.
7. Arms: None.

a. Arm Material: Match frame.

8. Weight: <Insert weight>.

9. Seating Configuration: Multiple units as indicated.

a. Straight shape.
b. Closed shape indicated around a planter.

C. Table Top:

1. Material:
a. Wood: Teak; formed into evenly spaced parallel slats.
b. Planks: Evenly spaced, parallel.
c. Sheet: Solid.

2. Surface Shape: Shape indicated.

3. Feature: Center umbrella hole.

D. Aluminum Finish: Color coated.

1. As indicated in a site furnishing schedule: As indicated color.

E. Steel Finish: Galvanized and PVC-color coated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 2 SITE FURNISHING
 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 6.

G. Wood Finish: Factory-applied stain and transparent finish.

1. Stain: Manufacturer's standard.

H. Fiberglass Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

I. Graphics: Surface-applied copy, content, and style per manufacturer's standard.

2.2 TRASH RECEPTACLES

A. Wood Facing Surrounds: Evenly spaced teak slats.

B. Support Frames: Galvanized steel; welded.

C. Trash Receptacles:

1. Receptacle Shape and Form: As indicated; with opening for depositing trash in lid or top.
2. Lids and Tops: Matching facing panels secured by cable or chain, hinged, swiveled, or
permanently secured.

a. Description: Flat rim ring lid with center opening.

b. Opening for depositing trash covered by self-closing, spring-loaded-hinged, push-
in weather flap.

3. Receptacle Height: As indicated.

4. Overall Width: As indicated.
5. Weight: <Insert weight>.
6. Inner Container: Rigid plastic container with drain holes; designed to be removable and
reusable.
7. Disposable Liners: Provide receptacle designed to accommodate disposable liners.
8. Capacity: Not less than 151 L
9. Service Access: Removable lid or top; inner container and disposable liner lift or slide
out for emptying; lockable with padlock hasps.
10. Post Mount: Galvanized-steel pipe; for mounting three receptacle(s).

D. Aluminum Finish: Color coated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Steel Finish: Galvanized and color coated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 6.

G. Wood Finish: Factory-applied stain and transparent finish.

1. Stain: Manufacturer's standard.

H. Fiberglass Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 3 SITE FURNISHING
 I. Graphics: Surface-applied copy, content, and style per manufacturer's standard] [as indicated
on Drawings.

1. Surface-applied copy, content, and style per manufacturer's standard.

2.3 PLANTERS

A. Wood Facing Surrounds: Evenly spaced teak slats

B. Support Frames: Galvanized steel; welded.

C. Planter Shape and Form: As indicated.

D. Style: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.

E. Overall Height: As indicated.

F. Overall Width: As indicated.

G. Overall Depth: As indicated.

H. Weight: <Insert weight>.

I. Inner Container: Galvanized-steel sheet container with drain holes.

J. Capacity: Not less than 151 L.

K. Installation Method: As indicated on Drawings.

1. Post Mount: Galvanized-steel pipe; for mounting three planter(s).

L. Aluminum Finish: Color coated.

1. Color As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

M. Steel Finish: Galvanized and color coated.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

N. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 6.

O. Wood Finish: Factory-applied stained and transparent finish.

1. Stain: <Insert stain type and color>.

P. Fiberglass Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

1. Finish: Smooth.

2.4 MATERIALS

A.Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use
and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 4 SITE FURNISHING
 1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M).
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
5. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electric-
resistance-welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.
3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.
4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing
complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in
ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.
5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
6. Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than 2.3-mm nominal thickness;
manufacturer's standard perforation pattern.
7. Expanded Metal: Carbon-steel sheets, deburred after expansion, and complying with
ASTM F 1267.
8. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as recommended by fabricator for
type of use intended.
9. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.

C. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666.

2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M.
3. Tubing: ASTM A 554.

D. Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of knots, solid stock of
species indicated.

1. Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard.

a. Douglas Fir: Clear Grade, vertical grain.

b. Pine: Southern pine; No. 2 or better; preservative treated, kiln dried after
treatment.
c. Eastern White Cedar: Select Grade or better.
d. Redwood: Construction heart or better, free-of-heart center.
e. Teak (Tectona Grandis): Clear Grade.

2. Certified Wood: Fabricate site furnishings with components produced from wood
obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with
FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard transparent wood preservative treatment and sealer.

E. Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable,

colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and with
manufacturer's standard finish.

F. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.

1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 5 SITE FURNISHING

 2. Recycled Content of Polyethylene: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than <Insert number> percent.

G. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-

coated or noncorrodible materials; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant]
[, concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged.

1. Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to on-grade

substrate; one per leg.
2. Antitheft Hold-Down Brackets: For securing site furnishings to substrate; extent as
indicated on Drawings.

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.

I. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-

controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by
manufacturer, for exterior applications.

J. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective
zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:

1. Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of

0.27 kg/sq. m of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer
film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not
less than 0.0076 mm thick.
2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or
ASTM A 924/A 924M.

2.5 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment: Pressure-treat wood according to AWPA U1 and the following:

1. Use preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing

no arsenic or chromium. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or
otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials
from untreated materials.
2. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content,
respectively, of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use materials that are warped or do not
comply with requirements for untreated materials.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and
angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length,
full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed
connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after
finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 6 SITE FURNISHING
 C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of
member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

D. Preservative-Treated Wood Components: Complete fabrication of treated items before

treatment if possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to
cut surfaces.

E. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,
barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

F. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize
field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat

finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat

finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-light stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, matte-

textured, dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying with
coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film
thickness.

2.10 IRON FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat

finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including
pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.11 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 7 SITE FURNISHING

 1. Run directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
2. Directional Satin Finish: No 4.
3. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been
completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on
Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set
plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.

E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 19 mm larger than OD of
post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and
concrete with [nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] [or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and
shaped to shed water.

F. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring
material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 12 9300 - 8 SITE FURNISHING

 SECTION 13 1100
POOL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shotcrete concrete pool / wading areas and pool accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 03 3511 - Concrete Floor Finishes: Pool deck surface finish, coping, and gutter.
C. Section 03 3713 - Shotcrete.
D. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Pool deck surface finish, coping, and gutter.
E. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Pool tank surface finish and depth markings.
F. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Piping, valves, and fittings.
G. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Deck drains.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories .
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pool layout.
D. Samples: Submit two sample panels, in size, illustrating pool tank surface finish, color, and
texture.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation procedures.
F. Operation Data: Provide operating instructions.
G. Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance instructions, maintenance schedules.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Designer Qualifications: Design pool tank structural components under direct supervision
of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and
licensed in KSA.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for pools and associated equipment.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for pool equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHOTCRETE POOL MATERIALS
A. Spray-Applied Shotcrete Concrete and Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 3713.
B. Coping: Ceramic tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
C. Gutter: Ceramic tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
D. Deck Surfacing: Ceramic tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
E. Pool Tank Surfacing: Ceramic tile as specified in Section 09 3000.
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Exposed Piping: Copper Type L as specified in Section 22 1005.
B. Concealed Piping: Copper Type L as specified in Section 22 1005.
C. Valves and Fittings: As specified in Section 22 1005.
D. Deck Drains: As specified in Section 22 1006.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 13 1100 - 1 POOL

2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Pool Equipment. – As approved by DAR.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Ladder: As selected by Dar Al Riyadh - Engineering and Architecture (DAR).
B Sealant: As specified in Section 07 9005.
C. Anchors: Non-corrosive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify excavation surfaces are clean, smooth, and without voids or irregularities.
B. Verify grounding of electrical and metallic components before shotcreting.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SHOTCRETE CONCRETE POOL
A. Install mesh reinforcement and gun apply concrete to prepared excavation.
B. Develop concrete average thickness to (As indicated) mm and minimum thickness of (As
indicated). Trowel smooth.
C. Coordinate installation of mechanical and electrical components; connect to utilities.
D. Fill pool, activate filtration and circulation equipment, and chemically stabilize.
3.03 INSTALLATION - POOL AND DECK FINISH
A. Install pool tank finish in accordance with Section 09 3000.
B. Install deck finish in accordance with Section 03 3000.
3.04 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES
A. Install pool accessories and fittings in accordance with component manufacturer's
instructions.
END OF SECTION 13 1100

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 13 1100 - 2 POOL

 SECTION 13 2426
STEAM BATHS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Site constructed steam room enclosure and benches.
B. Steam generator and controls.
C. Light fixture and switch.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing between steam bath enclosure and adjacent
construction.
B. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant placed at exterior periphery of steam room
enclosure and sealant used within the steam room enclosure construction.
C. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping: Domestic water supply to steam generator and faucet.
D. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties: Floor drain in steam room.
E. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Disconnect switch.
F. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Light fixtures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2012.
B. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2011.
C. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; 2009.
D. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
G. RIS (GR) - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber; 2000.
H. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.ul.com.
I. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate room layout, equipment locations, dimensions, door and frame
assembly, details of assembly, anchors, utility rough-in locations.
1. Show field measurements of space into which sauna will be installed.
C. Product Data: Provide data on equipment, accessories, utility characteristics.
D. Samples: Submit two panels of wall finish, 1000 x 1000 mm in size, illustrating color and
texture.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures; characteristics,
location and coordination with required utilities.
F. Operation Data: Describe recommended operation of steam generator unit.
G. Maintenance Data: Describe cleaning procedures for room finishes and maintenance
required for steam generator.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for enclosure construction and operating equipment.
B. Steam Generator: Conform to applicable code for UL approval .
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for steam generator.
1. Include coverage for steam generator.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 13 2426 - 1 STEAM BATHS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Wall Panels: ____ mm (____ inch) nominal thickness, total RSI value of ____ (R value of
____).
B. Wall Construction: As follows:
1. Interior Finish: 19 x 100 mm (3/4 x 4 inch) nominal tongue and groove boards.
2. Vapor Barrier: 0.25 mm (10 mil) thick.
3. Studs: 38 x 89 mm (2 x 4) nominal size.
4. Insulation: RSI of 2.1 (R value of 12).
5. Exterior Finish: 19 x 100 mm (3/4 x 4 inch) nominal tongue and groove boards.
C. Ceiling Panels: (As indicated) mm nominal thickness, total RSI value of (As indicated) (R
value of (As indicated)).
D. Ceiling Construction: As follows:
1. Interior Finish: 19 x 100 mm (3/4 x 4 inch) nominal tongue and groove boards.
2. Vapor Barrier: 0.25 mm (10 mil) thick.
3. Joists: 38 x 89 mm (2 x 4) nominal size.
4. Insulation: RSI of 3.5 (R value of 20).
5. Exterior Finish: 19 x 100 mm (3/4 x 4 inch) nominal tongue and groove boards.
E. Floor Construction: As follows:
1. Interior Finish: 19 x 100 mm (3/4 x 4 inch) nominal tongue and groove boards.
2. Vapor Barrier: 0.25 mm (10 mil) thick.
3. Joists: 38 x 89 mm (2 x 4) nominal size.
4. Insulation: RSI of 3.5 (R value of 20).
F. Door and Frame Unit: (As indicated) mm nominal thickness, wood construction RSI value of
(As indicated) (R value of (As indicated)), with (As indicated) mm size glazing, hydraulic
closer, non-metallic push/pull hardware.
G. Benches: Same wood species as interior wall finish, 19 x 63 mm (3/4 x 2 1/2 inch) board
size, set 12 mm (1/2 inch) apart, secured to framing with galvanized screws.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Lumber (Steam Room Interior): RIS Redwood Clear Grade, S4S, tongue and groove,
maximum moisture content of 12 percent.
B. Lumber (Concealed Framing): RIS Redwood Clear Grade, S4S, maximum moisture
content of 12 percent.
C. Plywood for Sheathing and Underlayment: PS 1 Grade C-D or better; softwood, sanded,
preservative treated.
D. Batt Insulation: ASTM C665, preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit.
E. Vapor Barrier: Black polyethylene film reinforced with glass fiber square mesh, including
seaming tape with permanent adhesive.
F. Glazing: Two panes of ASTM C 1036 clear float glass, hermetically sealed insulated units
with polyurethane sealant edge seal; total unit thickness of (As indicated).
G. Fasteners: Electro galvanized steel, size and type to suit condition.
H. Concealed Reinforcement and Accessories: Steel, non-corrosive.
I. Sealant: (As indicated) specified in Section 07 9005.
J. Light Fixture: Incandescent, (As indicated) watt lamp, sealed vapor tight.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A. Steam Generator and Accessories: Electric unit, floor mounted; (As indicated) kilowatt
rating, (As indicated) volt, (As indicated) ampere, single phase; with controls, copper piping
from unit to room outlet, shut-off valves that are readily accessible after installation, chrome
plated brass steam room outlet.
B. Timer: Mechanical type, surface mounted, sixty minute count-down type, with steam
generator shut-off at 0 minutes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 13 2426 - 2 STEAM BATHS

 C. Thermostat: Surface mounted, low voltage type, reading in Celsius (Fahrenheit) degrees,
with solid state temperature sensor.
D. Pipe and Pipe Materials: Specified in Section 22 1005.
E. Floor Drain: Specified in Section 22 1006.
F. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities,
sizes, and materials indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70.
G. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in control panel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - SITE CONSTRUCTED
A. Construct framing, finishing, and install components in accordance with Drawings.
B. Space studs at 400 mm (16 inches) on center. Space ceiling framing at 400 mm (16
inches) on center.
C. Erect plywood sheathing as detailed.
D. Construct assembly level and plumb.
E. Place insulation into stud and joists spaces, continuous and tightly fitted.
F. Place and secure sheet vapor barrier to interior face of framing. Lap and seal edges and
ends vapor tight, over firm bearing.
G. Erect interior wall, ceiling and floor cladding and benches. Secure to framing with
concealed fasteners.
H. Erect exterior wall cladding. Secure to framing with concealed fasteners.
I. Glaze glass units in accordance with GANA requirements.
J. Carefully cut holes for thermostats and install.
K. Coordinate installation of mechanical and electrical components; connect to utilities.
Connect remote steam generator to room outlets.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust door and frame for smooth operation.
END OF SECTION 13 2426

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 13 2426 - 3 STEAM BATHS

 SECTION 14 2100
ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Complete electric traction elevator systems.
1. Machine Room-Less (MRL) Electric Traction Passenger Elevator type.
B. Elevator Maintenance Contract.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Masonry hoistway enclosure; building-in and grouting
hoistway door frames.
B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting: Field painting of hoistway entrance doors and frames.
C. Section 21 1300 - Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in hoistway.
D. Section 22 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment: Motor for sump
pump in pit.
E. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:
F. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections:
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; Current Edition.
B. AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; 2014 (2015 Errata).
C. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
D. AISC 360 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2016.
E. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings -
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2015.
F. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures;
Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
G. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; 2016.
H. ASME A17.2 - Guide for Inspection of Elevators, Escalators, and Moving Walks; 2017.
I. ASME QEI-1 - Standard for the Qualification of Elevator Inspectors; 2018.
J. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
K. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel
Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.
L. ASTM A1008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable; 2016.
M. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.
N. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate
(Metric); 2014.
O. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.
P. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric); 2013.
Q. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass;
2018.
R. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2015, with Errata (2016).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 1 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 S. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; current edition.
T. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
U. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.
V. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
W. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
X. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2019.
Y. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
Z. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on following items:
1. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, and indicators.
2. Car design, dimensions, layout, and components.
3. Car and hoistway door and frame details.
4. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Include appropriate plans, elevations, sections, diagrams, and details on
following items:
1. Elevator Equipment and Machines: Size and location of driving machines, power units,
controllers, governors, and other components.
2. Hoistway Components: Size and location of car machine beams, guide rails, buffers,
ropes, and other components.
3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to
building structural framing.
4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support.
5. Loads on hoisting beams.
6. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight.
7. Locations in hoistway of traveling cables and connections for car lighting and telephone.
8. Location and sizes of hoistway and car doors and frames.
9. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
10. Indicate arrangement of elevator equipment and allow for clear passage of equipment
through access openings.
D. Samples: Submit samples illustrating car floor material, car interior finishes, car and hoistway
door and frame finishes, and handrail material and finish in the form of cut sheets or finish color
selection brochures.
E. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
F. Initial Maintenance Contract.
G. Maintenance Contract: Submit proposal to Owner for standard one year continuing
maintenance contract agreement in accordance with ASME A17.1 and requirements as
indicated, starting on date initial maintenance contract is scheduled to expire.
1. Indicate in proposal the services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period
and for renewal options.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify each entry with
equipment description and identifying code.
2. Operation and maintenance manual.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 2 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 3. Schematic drawings of equipment, and wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment
with list of corresponding symbols to identify markings on machine room and hoistway
apparatus.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of each quality standard document on site.
B. Designer Qualifications: Design guide rails under direct supervision of a licensed Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in
which the Project is located.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum ten years documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Supervisor along with trained elevator installation personnel on staff of
elevator equipment manufacturer.
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and
inspections of type specified in this section.
F. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by ITS (DIR), UL (DIR), or
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL (DIR) or testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose indicated in construction
documents.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide manufacturer's warranty for elevator operating equipment and devices for one year
from Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
A. Elevator Schedule: Refer on Drawings.
B. MRL Electric Traction Passenger Elevator, No. (As shown on Drawings):
1. Electric Traction Elevator Equipment:
a. Gearless Traction Machine: Single wrapped traction driving sheave, with dual brake.
2. Drive System:
a. Variable voltage alternating current (AC).
3. Operation Control Type:
a. Selective Collective Automatic Operation Control.
4. Interior Car Height: 2362 mm.
5. Electrical Power: 480 volts; alternating current (AC); three phase; 60 Hz.
6. Rated Net Capacity: 900 kgs.
7. Rated Speed: 0.5 m per second.
8. Hoistway Size: As indicated on drawings.
9. Interior Car Platform Size: As indicated on drawings.
10. Elevator Pit Depth: 1664 mm.
11. Overhead Clearance at Top Floor: 4343 mm.
12. Travel Distance: As indicated on drawings.
13. Number of Stops: As indicated on drawings.
14. Number of Openings: 0ne Front.
15. Traction Machine Location: Top of hoistway shaft.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Elevator Equipment:
1. Motors, Controllers, Controls, Buttons, Wiring, Devices, and Indicators: Comply with
NFPA 70 requirements, and refer to Section 26 0583 for additional requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 3 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 2. Guide Rails, Cables, Counterweights, Sheaves, Buffers, Attachment Brackets and
Anchors: Design criteria for components includes safety factors in accordance with
applicable requirements of Elevator Code, ASME A17.1.
3. Buffers:
a. Spring type for elevators with speed less than or equal to 1 m per second.
b. Oil type for elevators with speed greater than 1 m per second.
4. Lubrication Equipment:
a. Provide grease fittings for periodic lubrication of bearings.
b. Grease Cups: Automatic feed type.
c. Lubrication Points: Visible and easily accessible.
B. Electrical Equipment:
1. Motors: NEMA MG 1.
2. Boxes, Conduit, Wiring, and Devices: Complying with NFPA 70 and in accordance with
Sections 26 0533.13 and 26 0583.
3. Sump Pump in Pit: Refer to Section 22 0513.
4. Spare Conductors: Provide ten percent in extra conductors and two pairs of shielded
audio cables in traveling cables.
5. Include wiring and connections to elevator devices remote from hoistway and between
elevator machine room. Provide additional components and wiring to suit machine room
layout. Refer to Section 26 0583.
2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, applicable local codes, and authorities
having jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with ADA Standards.
C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360.
D. Comply with seismic design requirements in accordance with ASME A17.1, applicable local
codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
1. Comply with Elevator Safety Requirements for Seismic Risk Zone in accordance with
ASME A17.1, ASCE 7 and other related requirements.
2. Provide earthquake emergency operations in accordance with ASME A17.1 requirements.
3. Provide seismic switch in accordance with ASME A17.1 and ASCE 7 requirements.
E. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
F. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80 and complying
with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
G. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with venting or pressurization of hoistway design in accordance with HVAC system
requirements and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
I. Comply with fire protection sprinkler system of hoistway design in accordance with NFPA 13
requirements and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). Refer to Section 21 1300.
2.04 OPERATION CONTROLS
A. Elevator Controls: Provide landing operating panels and landing indicator panels.
1. Landing Operating Panels: Metallic type, one for originating "Up" and one for originating
"Down" calls, one button only at terminating landings; with illuminating indicators.
2. Landing Indicator Panels: Illuminating.
3. Comply with ADA Standards for elevator controls.
B. Interconnect elevator control system with building security, fire alarm, card access, smoke
alarm, and building management control systems.
C. Door Operation Controls:
1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor landing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 4 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatch landing with
doors open.
3. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equipped
with photo-electric light rays.
D. Lobby Monitoring Panel:
1. Locate status indicator and control panel as indicated on drawings.
2. Mount panel in console as indicated on drawings.
3. Coordinate size and style of panel with console manufacturer.
4. Etch face plate markings in panel, and fill with paint of contrasting color.
5. Include direction indicator displaying landing "Up" and "Down" calls registered at each
landing floor.
6. Include position and motion display for direction of travel of each elevator; display
appropriate graphic characters on non-glare screen; indicate position of cars at rest and in
motion.
7. Include "Firefighter's Service Switch" that manually recalls each elevator to main floor.
E. Provide "Firefighter's Emergency Operation" in accordance with ASME A17.1, applicable
building codes, and authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
2.05 DESTINATION DISPATCH SYSTEM
A. Destination Dispatch System: Elevator system integrated with building's security and access
control systems to verify proper admission credentials prior to elevator access.
1. Screen: 188 mm display, touch panel.
2. Wall Mounted: 126 mm wide by 284 mm high by 77 mm deep, with card reader on lower
angled side.
a. Color: As selected by Architect.
2.06 OPERATION CONTROL TYPE
A. Single Automatic (Push Button) Operation Control: Applies to car in single elevator shaft.
1. Refer to description provided in ASME A17.1.
2. Set system operation so that momentary pressure of landing button dispatches car from
other landing to that landing.
3. Allow call registered by momentary pressure of landing button at any time to remain
registered until car stops in response to that landing call.
4. If elevator car door is not opened within predetermined period of time after car has
stopped at terminal landing allow car to respond to call registered from other landing.
B. Auxiliary Operations
1. Standby power operation
2. Standby-powered lowering
3. Battery-powered automatic evacuation.
4. Earthquake Emergency Operation: Comply with requirements in ASME A17.1/CSA B44
5. Automatic dispatching of loaded car
6. Automatic operation of lights and ventilation fans
7. Security Features: Card-reader operation.
2.07 EMERGENCY POWER
A. Set-up elevator operation to run with building emergency power supply when the normal
building power supply fails, and in compliance with ASME A17.1 requirements.
B. Building Emergency Power Supply: Supplied by backup generator; provide elevator system
components as required for emergency power characteristics with phase rotation the same as
for normal power.
1. Provide transfer switches and auxiliary contacts.
2. Install connections to power feeders.
C. Emergency Lighting: Comply with ASME A17.1 elevator lighting requirements.
D. Provide operational control circuitry for adapting the change from normal to emergency power.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 5 ELECTRIC TRACTION
ELEVATORS
 E. Upon transfer to emergency power, advance one elevator at a time to a pre-selected landing,
stop car, open doors, disable operating circuits, and hold in standby condition.
2.08 MATERIALS
A. Rolled Steel Sections, Shapes, Rods: ASTM A36/A36M.
B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel), with matte finish.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304; No. 4 Brushed finish unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), natural anodized finish unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), 3105 alloy, O temper.
F. Plywood: PS 1, Structural I, Grade C-D or better, sanded.
G. Tempered Glass: 9.5 mm minimum thickness, fully tempered in compliance with ASME A17.1,
16 CFR 1201, ANSI Z97.1, and ASTM C1048 tempered glass requirements.
H. Stone Flooring: As specified in Section 09 6340; as selected by the Architect.
I. Carpet Flooring: As specified in Section 09 6816.
J. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Type HGS, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard line of colors.
2.09 CAR AND HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Elevator
1. Car and Hoistway Entrances:
a. Framed Opening Finish and Material: Alkyd enamel on steel.
b. Car Door Material: Powder coat on steel, with rigid sandwich panel construction.
c. Hoistway Door Material: Powder coat on steel, with rigid sandwich panel
construction.
d. Door Type: Single leaf.
e. Door Operation: Side opening, two speed.
f. Paint Color: As indicated.
g. Door Width: As indicated on drawings.
h. Door Height: As indicated on drawings.
i. Sills: Extruded aluminum.
B. Sills/Thresholds: Configure to align with frame return and coordinate with floor finish.
C. Gasketing: Provide acoustic type gasketing at hoistway doors and frames to eliminate audible
noise due to car activities in the hoistway, and air pressure differential between hoistway and
landing floors.
2.10 CAR EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Elevator Car:
1. Car Operating Panel: Provide main and auxiliary; [], with illuminated call buttons
corresponding to floors served with "Door Open/Door Close" buttons, "Door Open" button,
"Door Close" button, and alarm button.
a. Panel Material: Integral with front return; one per car.
b. Car Floor Position Indicator: Above door with illuminating position indicators.
c. Locate alarm button where it is unlikely to be accidentally actuated; not more than
1372 mm above car finished floor.
d. Provide matching service cabinet integral with front return panel, with hinged door
and keyed lock in each car.
e. Provide following within service cabinet as part of car operating panel:
1) Switch for each auxiliary operational control, keyed.
2) Switches for fan, light, inspection control, and _____.
3) Emergency light.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 6 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 4) Telephone cabinet and hard-wired connection with telephone.
5) Control for each other special feature specified.
6) Convenience outlet receptacle; 110 VAC, 15 amps.
2. Ventilation: Single speed fan with grille in ceiling.
3. Flooring: Carpeting (As selected by Architect from full range of top quality carpet
materials).
4. Front Return Panel: Match material of car door.
5. Door Wall: Plastic laminate on plywood.
6. [] Rail: Brushed rectangular stainless steel, at three side walls. Provide open clearance
space 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) wide to face of wall.
7. Ceiling:
a. Canopy Ceiling: Stainless steel.
b. Frame Finish: Color anodized aluminum.
c. Lay-in Panel: Stainless steet sheet.
d. Lighting: LED cove lighting.
8. Stainless Steel Wall Panels: Flush, formed-metal construction; fabricated from stainless
steel sheet.
9. Provide emergency access panel for egress from car at ceiling.
B. Materials, Finishes and Car Accessories:
1. Certificate Frame: Stainless steel frame glazed with clear tempered glass, and attached
with tamper-proof screws.
2. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment
3. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
4. Stainless Steel Doors: Fllush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from stainless- steet
sheet.
5. Unfinished-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction, fabricated from cold-rolled steel
sheet, with factory-applied enamel or powder-coating.
6. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
7. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 6.4 mm thick.
8. Stainless Steel Ceiling: Flush panels, with LED lighting.
9. Light Fixture Efficiency: Not less than 35 lumens/W.
10. Ventilation Fan Efficiencey: Not less than 1.4 L/s per W.
11. Protective Pads: Canvas cover, padded with impact-resistant fill material, sewn with
piping edges; fire resistant in compliance with ASME A17.1; brass grommets for supports,
covering side and rear walls and front return, with cut-out for control panel; provide one
set for each elevator.
a. Color: Tan.
b. Provide at least 102 mm clearance from bottom of pad to finished floor.
c. Pad Supports: Stainless steel studs, and mounted from ceiling frame.
2.11 MACHINE ROOM FITTINGS
A. Wall-Mounted Frames: Glazed with clear plastic; sized as required. Provide one chart each for
master electric schematic and for lubrication chart. Install charts.
B. Key Cabinet: Wall-mounted, lockable, keyed to building keying system, for control and
operating panel keys.
1. Provide two key cabinet keys.
2. Provide two control/operating panel keys.
3. Provide two card access keys.
C. Monitoring Device Interface:
1. Fabricate one multiple terminal block in controller relay panel or selector, in location
indicated, for connection of monitoring devices for:
a. Landing and car registration circuits.
b. Motor generator running circuits.
c. Load weighing circuits.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 7 ELECTRIC TRACTION
ELEVATORS
 d. Up and down peak programming circuits.
e. Independent service switches.
2. Label terminals for use with alligator test clips.
2.12 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame
hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size
and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.
2.13 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call
has been fulfilled. Provide vandal-resistant buttons and lighted elements illuminated with LEDs.
B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-controls. Mount in return
panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.
2.14 FINISHES
A. Field Painting: Comply with requirements as specified in Section 09 9123.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304.
D. Textured Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A240, Type 304 with embossed texture rolled into
exposed surface.
E. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A276, Type 304.
F. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A554, Grade MT 304.
G. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063.
H. Powder Coat on Steel: Clean and degrease metal surface; apply one coat of primer; two coats
of powder coat.
I. Finish Paint for Metal Surfaces: Alkyd enamel, semi-gloss, color as selected, comply with VOC
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
J. Color Anodized Finish: Class I, AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A44 Electrolytically deposited colored
anodic coating not less than 0.018 mm thick.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting this work.
B. Verify that hoistway and pit are ready for work of this section.
C. Verify hoistway shaft and openings are of correct size and within tolerance.
D. Verify location and size of machine foundation and position of machine foundation bolts.
E. Verify that electrical power is available and of correct characteristics.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components.
Comply with requirements of Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.
B. Maintain elevator pit excavation free of water.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate this work with installation of hoistway wall construction.
B. Install system components, and connect equipment to building utilities.
C. Provide conduit, electrical boxes, wiring, and accessories. Refer to Sections 26 0533.13 and 26
0583.
D. Mount machines and motors on vibration and acoustic isolators.
1. Place on structural supports and bearing plates.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 8 ELECTRIC TRACTION
ELEVATORS
 2. Securely fasten to building supports.
3. Prevent lateral displacement.
E. Install hoistway, elevator equipment, and components in accordance with approved shop
drawings.
F. Install guide rails to allow for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.
G. Accurately machine and align guide rails, forming smooth joints with machined splice plates.
H. Bolt or weld brackets directly to structural steel hoistway framing.
I. Field Welds: Chip and clean away oxidation and residue with wire brush; spot prime with two
coats.
J. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls; grout sills in place, set
hoistway floor entrances in alignment with car openings, and align plumb with hoistway.
K. Fill hoistway door frames solid with grout in accordance with Section 04 2000.
L. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime
with two coats.
M. Wood Surfaces not Exposed to Public View: Finish with one coat primer; one coat enamel.
N. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with ASME A17.1 and
ASME A17.2.
B. Car Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, without any objectionable lateral or
oscillating movement or vibration.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies certified in accordance with ASME QEI-1 will be
performed at their discretion.
C. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements.
1. Inspectors shall be certified in accordance with ASME QEI-1.
2. Perform tests in accordance with ASME A17.2.
3. Provide at least two weeks written notice of date and time of tests and inspections.
4. Supply instruments and execute specific tests.
D. Operating Test:
1. Load elevator to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over full travel
distance, stopping each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record
temperature rise of elevator machine during 30-minute test period.Record failure to
perform as required.
2. Perform operational tests in the presence of Owner and Architect.
3. Test single elevator system by transporting at least ____ persons up from main floor to top
floor landings during a five minute period.
4. At an agreed time, and the building occupied with normal building traffic, conduct tests to
verify performance.
a. Furnish event recording of each landing call registrations, time initiated, and response
time throughout entire working day.
5. Set period of time elevator takes to travel between typical floor landings at not more than
____ seconds.
a. Measure time from moment doors start to close until car has stopped level at next
floor landing and doors are opening.
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car to minimize passenger discomfort.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 9 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 B. Adjust with automatic floor leveling feature at each floor landing to reach 6.4 mm maximum
from flush with sill.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.
B. Clean surfaces and components in accordance with manufacturers written instructions.
C. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.
3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.
D. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.
1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.
2. Briefly describe function, operation, cleaning and maintenance of each component.
E. Training: Train Owner's personnel on cleaning and operation and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.
4. Location: At project site, unless otherwise indicated.
3.09 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit construction traffic within car after cleaning.
B. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products and materials before Date of Substantial
Completion.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Refer to Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements
relating to initial maintenance service.
B. Provide Initial Maintenance Contract of elevator system and components in accordance with
ASME A17.1 and requirements as indicated for three months from Date of Substantial
Completion.
C. Submit proposal for continuation of Maintenance Contract in accordance with ASME A17.1 and
requirements as indicated for installed elevator equipment.
D. Perform maintenance contract services using competent and qualified personnel under the
supervision and direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or installer.
E. Maintenance contract services shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or other entity
without prior written consent of Owner.
F. Examine system components periodically.
G. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment.
H. Maintain and repair or replace parts, whenever required, using parts produced by original
equipment manufacturer.
I. Replace wire ropes when necessary to maintain the required factor of safety.
J. Perform work without removing cars from use during peak traffic periods.
K. Provide emergency call back service during regular working hours throughout period of this
maintenance contract.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 10 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 L. Maintain an adequate stock of parts for replacement or emergency purposes, and have
personnel available to ensure the fulfillment of this maintenance contract without unreasonable
loss of time.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 14 2100 - 11 ELECTRIC TRACTION

ELEVATORS
 MISHRIFAH VILLA
DIRIYAH, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

SPECIFICATIONS
Part 2 of 3 (Divisions 21 to 28)

ISSUED FOR TENDER

MARCH 2020
 SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
A. 00 0101 - Project Title Page
B. 00 0102 - Project Information
C. 00 0110 - Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS
2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements
B 01 4000 – Quality Requirements
C. 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
D. 01 5500 – Access Roads and Paving Areas
E. 01 6000 – Product Requirements
F. 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Requirement
G. 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals
H. 01 7900 – Demonstration and Training
I. 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements
2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
A. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
B. 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing
C. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
D. 03 3713 - Shotcrete
E. 03 3900 – Concrete Curing
2.04 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
A. 04 0511 – Mortar and Masonry Grout
B. 04 2000 – Unit Masonry
C. 04 2300 – Glass Unit Masonry
D. 04 2723 – Cavity Wall Unit Masonry
E. 04 4200 – Exterior Stone Cladding
2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS
A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing
B. 05 3100 - Steel Decking
C. 05 5000 – Metal Fabrication
D. 05 7300 – Decorative Metal Railing
E. 05 7313 – Glazed Decorative Metal Railing
2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
A. 06 0573 – Wood Treatment
B. 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry
C. 06 2000 – Finish Carpentry
D. 06 4100 – Architectural Wood Casework

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 E. 06 4200 – Wood Paneling
2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. 07 1113 - Bituminous Dampproofing
B. 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing
C. 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation
D. 07 7273 – Vegetated Roof Systems
2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
A. 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. 08 1416 – Wood Doors
C. 08 3200 – Sliding Glass Door
D. 08 3459 – Vault Doors
E. 08 4413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
F. 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows
G. 08 5123 – Steel Windows
H. 08 6223 – Tubular Skylight
I. 08 6300 – Metal-Framed Skylight
J. 08 7100 – Door Hardware
K. 08 8000 – Glazing
L. 08 8300 - Mirrors
2.09 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
A. 09 2116 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. 09 2216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
C. 09 2400 – Cement Plastering
D. 09 2613 – Gypsum Veneer Plastering
E. 09 3000 - Tiling
F. 09 5423 – Linear Metal Ceiling
G. 09 5426 – Suspended Wood Ceiling
H. 09 6340 – Stone Flooring
I. 09 9113 – Exterior Painting
J. 09 9123 – Interior Painting
2.10 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
A. 10 2800 – Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
B. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties
2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT
A. 11 3100 – Residential Appliances
2.12 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
A. 12 2216 – Drapery Track and Accessories
B. 12 3530 – Residential Casework
C. 12 3600 – Countertops
D. 12 9300 – Site Furnishings

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A. 13 1100 – Pool
B. 13 2426 – Steam Baths
2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
A. Electric Traction Elevators
2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. 21 0510 – Fire Protection Systems
B. 21 3000 – Fire Pumps
2.16 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
A. 22 0505 – Valves
B. 22 0593 – Flushing, Cleaning, Disinfection and Chemical Treatment of Piping Systems
C. 22 1005 – Pipe and Pipe Fittings
D. 22 1006 – Piping Specialties
E. 22 1114 – Domestic Water System
F. 22 1122 – Pumps
G. 22 1123 – Domestic Water Pumps
H. 22 1424 – Drainage, Storm and Vent System
I. 22 3000 – Plumbing Equipment
J. 22 4100 – Residential Plumbing Fixtures
K. 22 5100 – Swimming Pool Plumbing Systems
2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
A. 23 0500 – Basic Mechanical Requirements
B. 23 0513 – Electrical Requirements for HVAC Equipment
C. 23 0528 – Hangers and Supports
D. 23 0548 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control
E. 23 0553 – Mechanical Identification
F. 23 0593 – Testing, Commissioning, Adjusting and Balancing
G 23 0713 – Mechanical Insulation
H. 23 3300 – Air Distribution
I. 23 3413 – Fans
J. 23 3710 – HVAC Air Filter
K. 23 6213 – VRF Air Condensing System
L. 23 7412 – Air Handling Units
M. 23 8413 - Dehumidifiers
2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
A. 26 0510 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
C. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D. 26 0529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
E. 26.0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems
F. 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems
G. 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 H. 26 0539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems
I. 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
J. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
K. 26 0573 - Power System Studies
L. 26 0583 - Wiring Connections
M. 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices
N. 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear
O. 26 2413 - Switchboards
P. 26 2416 – Panelboards
Q. 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers
R. 26 2713 - Electric Metering
S. 26 2726 - Wiring Devices
T. 26 2813 – Fuses
U. 26 2816.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers
V. 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches
W. 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers
X. 26 2923 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers
Y. 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors
Z. 26 3533.16 - Low-Voltage Power Factor Correction Equipment
AA. 26 4113 - Lightning Protection for Structures
BB. 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices
CC. 26 5100 - Interior Lighting
DD. 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting
EE. 33 7119 – Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes
FF. 33 7900 – Site Grounding
2.18 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS
A. 27 0500 - Communication Systems - General Requirements
B. 27 0526 - Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Communication Systems
C. 27 0528 - Pathways for Communication Systems
D. 27 0533 - Conduits and Back boxes for Communications
E. 27 0544 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communication Pathways and Cabling
F. 27 1100 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings
G. 27 1116 - Communication Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures
H. 27 1323 - Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Requirements
I. 27 1513 - Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
J. 27 1543 - Communications Faceplates and Connectors Requirements
K. 27 2000 - Data Communications Network Equipment
L. 27 3000 - IP Telephone System
M. 27 4133 – IPTV System
N. 27 4219 - IT Network

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.19 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. 28 0513 - IP CCTV System
B. 28 3115 - Fire Detection and Alarm System
2.20 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
A. 31 1000 - Site Clearing
B. 31 2200 - Grading
C. 31 2316 - Excavation
D. 31 2316.13 - Trenching
E. 31 2323 – Fill
F. 31 3116 – Termite Control
G. 31 3213 – Cement Soil Stabilization
H. 31 3700 - Riprap
2.21 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
A. 32 1123 – Aggregate Base Courses
B. 32 1216 – Asphalt Paving
C. 32 1313 – Concrete Paving
D. 32 1413 – Precast Concrete Unit Paving
E. 32 1713 – Parking Bumpers
F. 32 3119 – Decorative Metal Fences and Gates
G. 32 8423 – Irrigation System
H 32 9300 – Plants
I. 32 9415 - Landscaping
2.22 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
A. 33 0513 – Manholes and Structures
B. 33 1416 – Site Water Utility Distribution Piping
C. 33 3113 – Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping
E. 33 4100 – Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping
E. 33 4211 – Stormwater Gravity Piping
F. 33 4216 – Culvert
G. 33 7119 – Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes
H. 33 7900 – Site Grounding
I. 33 8126 – Communication Underground – Ducts, Manholes and Handholes

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 SECTION 21 3000
FIRE PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire pump package, including fire pump, electric motor drive, controller, and accessories.
B. Fire pump, electric motor drive, controller, and accessories.
C. Electric jockey pump.
D. System maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 21 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for Fire Suppression Equipment.
B. Section 21 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment.
C. Section 21 0716 - Fire Suppression Equipment Insulation.
D. Section 21 0719 - Fire Suppression Piping Insulation.
E. Section 23 1113 - Facility Fuel-Oil Piping.
F. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. FM (AG) - FM Approval Guide; current edition.
B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.
D. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems; Most Recent Edition Adopted by
Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
E. NFPA 20 - Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection; 2018.
F. UL (DIR) - Online Certifications Directory; Current Edition.
G. UL 448 - Centrifugal Stationary Pumps for Fire-Protection Service; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
H. UL 778 - Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 1478 - Fire Pump Relief Valves; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers literature including general assembly, pump curves
showing performance characteristics with pump and system, operating point indicated, NPSH
curve, controls, wiring diagrams, and service connections.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout, general assembly, components, dimensions, weights,
clearances, and methods of assembly.
D. Certificates: Certify that fire pumps meet or exceed specified requirements at specified
operating conditions and that the installation complies with regulatory requirements. Submit
summary and results of shop tests performed in accordance with NFPA 20.
E. Test Reports: Indicate results of hydrostatic test and field acceptance tests.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate support details, connection requirements, for fire pump
system.
G. Designer's Qualification Statement.
H. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
I. Installer's Qualification Statement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 3000 - 1 FIRE PUMPS

 J. Maintenance Contract.
K. Operation Data: Include manufacturers instructions, start-up data, trouble-shooting check lists,
for pumps, drivers, and controllers.
L. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers literature, cleaning procedures, replacement parts
lists, and repair data for pumps, drivers and controllers.
M. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and accessories.
N. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 13 and NFPA 20; where requirements differ comply with the most stringent.
B. Maintain on site at all times one copy of each design and installation standard referenced.
C. Design fire pump system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in
design of this work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.
D. Equipment and Components: Bearing FM (AG) label or marking.
E. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
G. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years experience.
H. Provide certificate of compliance from authority have jurisdiction indicating approval of field
acceptance tests.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fire pumps and components in factory packing. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and
installation instructions.
B. Protect fire pumps and components from physical damage including effects of weather, water,
and construction debris.
C. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps, and maintain in place until installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FIRE PUMPS
A. Horizontal base-mounted type; UL 448; and UL 778 horizontal shaft, single-stage, double
suction, direct connected, horizontally split casing, for 1720 kPa maximum working pressure.
B. Vertical turbine type; UL 448 and UL 778, centrifugal.
C. Accessories:
1. Eccentric suction reducer and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve on suction side of pump.
2. Concentric increaser and check valve in pump discharge and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve
on system side of check valve.
3. Fire pump bypass fitted with OS&Y gate or butterfly valves and check valve.
4. Main relief valve, UL 1478 and enclosed type waste cone.
5. Suction pressure gauge, 110 mm diameter dial with snubber, valve cock and lever handle.
6. Discharge pressure gauge mounted on board attached to pump, with snubber, valve cock
and lever handle.
7. 20 mm casing relief valve.
8. Float operated 20 mm automatic air release valve.
9. Hose valve manifold with 65 mm hose gate valves with caps and chains.
10. Flow metering system for closed loop testing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 3000 - 2 FIRE PUMPS

2.02 ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE:
A. Motor: Squirrel cage induction type, NEMA MG 1; in open drip proof NEMA 250 enclosure,
3500 rpm. Refer to Section 21 0513.
B. Controller: Limited service type with auto-transformer starter, in NEMA 250 enclosure,
including the following:
1. Disconnect Switch: Externally operable, quick break type.
2. Circuit Breaker: Comply with NFPA 20; minimum 65,000 amperes interrupting capacity.
3. Motor Starter: Energized automatically through pressure switch or manually by externally
operable handle.
4. Pressure Switch: Set to cut in at _____ kPa.
5. Running Period Timer: Keeps motor in operation when started automatically, for a
minimum of seven minutes.
6. Pilot Lamp: Indicates circuit breaker closed and power available.
7. Test Accessories: Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
8. Alarm Relay: Energizes alarm to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure.
9. Switch Relay: For remote start.
10. Manual Selector Station: On enclosure marked "Automatic" and "Non-Automatic".
C. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.
2.03 PRESSURE BOOSTER (JOCKEY) PUMP
A. Electrically operated, horizontal turbine type with standard open drip-proof horizontal motor.
B. Control by automatic jockey pump controller with full voltage starter and minimum run timer to
start pump on pressure drop in system and stay in operation for minimum period of time. Fire
pump shall start automatically on further pressure drop or on jockey pump failure.
C. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 20.
B. Provide access space around pumps for service; no less than minimum as recommended by
manufacturer.
C. Install piping in accordance with Section 21 0500. Decrease from line size with long radius
reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried
on pump casings. For base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction
and discharge.
D. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.
E. Mount unit on vibration isolators. Refer to Section 21 0548.
F. Provide piping for fuel supply and return connected to engine drive. Provide piping to and from
exhaust silencer with thimble at wall or roof penetrations. Refer to Section 23 1113.
G. Insulate piping associated with pump, pump casing and exhaust silencer. Refer to Section 21
0716 and Section 21 071922 0716.
H. Provide for connection to electrical service. Refer to Section 26 0583.
I. Lubricate pumps before start-up.
J. Check, align, and certify pumps by qualified installer prior to start-up.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality
Requirements.
B. Perform hydrostatic tests, flushing, and field acceptance tests as specified in NFPA 20.
C. Perform field acceptance tests in the presence of Fire Marshal.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 3000 - 3 FIRE PUMPS

3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration:
D. Demonstrate automatic operation of system including verification of pressure switch set points
to Owner.
E. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration.
F. Briefly describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.
G. Conduct walking tour of project.
H. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel.
4. Location: At project site.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements
relating to maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Perform maintenance using competent personnel in the direct employ of the system installer.
D. Provide service and maintenance of equipment installed under this section for one year from
the Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 3000 - 4 FIRE PUMPS

 SECTION 22 0525
VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing all the valves required for the
mechanical systems as shown on the drawings and specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1. ANSI B2.1 Pipe Threads.
2. ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250,
and 800.
3. ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
4. ANSI B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
5. ANSI B16.24 Bronze Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300.
6. ANSI B16.25 Butt Welding Ends.
B. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
1. ASME B31.1 Power Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.
2. ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping - ASME Code for Pressure Piping.
C. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A 126 Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe
Fittings.
2. ASTM B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including body material, valve
design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim
material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's original new and unopened packages bearing
manufacturer's name and label. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and
corrosion. Protect valve ends against damage to threads, flange faces, and weld-end preps.
B. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than
ambient dew point temperature. Support valve off the ground or pavement in watertight
enclosures.
C.Use a sling to handle valves whose size requires handling by crane or lift. Rig valves to avoid
damage to exposed valve parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the requirements ASME B31.9 and applicable Standards of MSS.
B.
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of valves, of types and
sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
5 years, and shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 VALVEFEATURES
A. General: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping, and ASME B31.1 for power
piping.
B. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising outside screw and yoke stems; except,
non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of rising stems.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 0525 - 1 VALVES

 C. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As scheduled and required to suit system pressures and
temperatures.
D. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.
E. Operators: Provide the following special operator features, where required:
1. Handwheels: Fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter-turn.
2. Lever Handle: On quarter-turn valves 150 mm and smaller, except for plug valves. Provide
one wrench for every 10 plug valves.
3. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 63.5 mm and larger, install 1829 mm or higher above
finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 1524 mm above finished floor
elevation.
4. Gear Actuator:
For quarter turn valves: DN 150 & Large provide Gear actuators.
5. Electric: Provide where specified. Valve shall be designed for actuator mounting furnish
with actuator mounting pads compatible with actuator type.
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated, provide extended stems arranged to receive
insulation.
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
H. End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications.
1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B2.1.
2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI B16.24 for
bronze valves.
3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.
2.2 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves 50mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast
bronze, threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland,
Teflon-impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the
above shall be used where pressure requires.
B. Gate Valves 50mm and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body
and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B, flanged ends, and Teflon impregnated packing
and two-piece backing gland assembly.
2.3 GLOBE VALVES
A. Globe Valves 50mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and screwed bonnet of ASTM
B 62 cast bronze, threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-
silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, Teflon impregnated packing, and malleable iron
handwheel. Class 150 valves meeting the above shall be used where pressure requires.
B. Globe Valves 65mm and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125 iron body and bolted bonnet
conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B, outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends,
and Teflon impregnated packing and 2-piece backing gland assembly.
2.4 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves 50mm and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and cap
conforming to ASTM B62, horizontal swing, Y-pattern, with a bronze disc, and having threaded
or solder ends. Valve shall be capable of being re-ground while the valve remains in the line.
Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications may be used where pressure requires or
Class 125 are not available.
B.Swing Check Valves 63mm and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125, cast iron body and bolted cap
conforming to ASTM A126, Class B, horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with
bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve
remains in the line.
2.5 DOUBLE REGULATING VALVE
A. Up to 50 mm:
1. 1. Y Pattern, bronze double regulating valve. PN20, threaded to BS21. Handwheel

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 0525 - 2 VALVES

 operated.
2. Micrometer style indicator. Rising stem, screwed bonnet. Parabolic and slotted regulating
disk. Complete with bronze metering station, PN20, threaded to BS21. Fitted with Du seal
test points. Memory stop and locking arrangement.
B. 65 mm and Larger:
1. Cast iron double regulating valve, PN16, flanges to BS 4504. Inside screw, non rising
stem, back seating feature. Fitted with double regulating device, indicator, memory stop
and locking device. The valve shall be supplied with stainless steel metering station PN16.
2. Compatible with BS 4504 flanges. Complete with 2 gaskets, and two test points.
3. Extension sleeve shall be of stainless steel (or ) gunmetal.
C. The valve shall be supplied with sufficient quantity of Digital flow meters necessary for the
project (T&B).
2.6 AUTOMATIC AIR VALVES
A. Automatic flush (drain) valves shall be installed at the end of each lateral in which bubblers are
installed and where indicated. Air vents shall be of cast iron body with stainless steel float with
sufficient venting capacity of the point of installation.
2.7 BUTTERFLY VALVE
A. Butterfly valves to be one piece, cast iron, tapped, full lug body, ANSI Class 150, 316 S/S shaft,
aluminum bronze disc, EPDM seat extended on to flange face. Designed for bi-directional
bubble tight shut-off at 150 psi.
B. Manual lever actuator with memory stop for sizes 150mm and below, weather proof worm gear
operator for valves size 200mm and above, valves in excess of 2.44 m (8 ft.) above floor to be
provided with chain wheel.
C. Valves shall meet the following standards:
1. ANSI B16.34, Valves flanged and Butt welded
2. API 609, Butterfly Valves, Lug type and wafer type
3. MSS SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves
2.8 DRAIN VALVES
A. Drain Valves: Bronze body and angle hose end valve with composition discs and rising stems;
working pressure shall be 10.5 kg/cm².
2.9 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves 25 mm and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG
pressure; 2-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular)
port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem,
and vinyl-covered steel handle.
B.Provide solder ends for condenser water, and domestic hot and cold water service; threaded
ends for heating hot water and low pressure steam.
1. Ball Valves 32 mm to 50mm: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG
pressure; 3-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, conventional port,
chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem,
and vinyl-covered steel handle. Valve ends as above.
2.10 STRAINER (ALL STRAINERS SHALL BE "Y" TYPE)
A. Sizes 50mm and larger:
1. Strainer shall be steel body, welded, Ends to match pipe, Y-pattern, 0.5 mm stainless
steel perforated screen and complete with valve drain piped to 400 mm above floor and
equipped with hose end connection. Screen area shall be minimum three times area of
inlet pipe. Strainer shall be rated Class 150 for 1.6 MPa (150 psig) and 37 °C (100 °F).
B. Smaller than 50mm
1. Cast steel, y type, socket weld ends. Mesh size shall be 0.8 mm maximium. Strainer
shall be rated Class 150 for 1.034 MPa (150 psig) and 37° C (100°F).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 0525 - 3 VALVES

2.11 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE:
A. Direct acting type with 1200 KPa. maximum inlet pressure and outlet pressure adjustable from
350 KPa.
B. For sizes up to 50 mm, valve body shall be bronze.
C. For sizes 65 mm and larger, valve body shall be cast iron.
2.12 THE STEM OF STAINLESS STEEL, DISK AND DIAPHRAGM OF SYNTHETIC RUBBER.
A.
The Strainer shall be installed immediately upstream from a reducing valve, the blow-off from
each strainer shall be equipped with a valve and a drain line extended to a drain.
2.13 ANGLE VALVES
A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:
B. Description:
1. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
2. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).
3. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
4. Ends: Threaded.
5. Stem and Disc: Bronze.
6. Packing: Asbestos free.
7. Lever operated - Quarter turn
2.14 HOSE BIBB FAUCETS
A. Brass body, compression type faucets with straight body.
B. Spout with 20 mm external hose threads.
C. Inlet with male pipe threads.
D. Polished chromium - plated finish.
E. Vacuum beaker.
F. Male threaded connection to connect the hose
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VALVEINSTALLATION
A. General Application: Use gate, ball and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe and ball for
throttling duty. Refer to drawings and piping system specification sections for specific valve
application and arrangement. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support
where necessary.
B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow equipment
removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged devices.
C. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling type valves.
D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.
E. Swing check valves shall be installed in horizontal position with hinge pin level.
F. Solder, threaded and flanged connections shall be as per the approved trade practice.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Designate all valves by distinguishing numbers, letters on charts and/or diagrams.
B. Install tags on all valves with numbers and letters corresponding to charts.
C. Fasten tags securely to valves with meter seals with 4- ply, 0.018 copper smooth wire, brass
"S" hooks or brass jack chain in manner for easy reading.
D. Furnish 4 valve charts including valve number, type, size, location, purpose, manufacturer, and
model number.
1. Mount one chart in frame (aluminum with plexiglass) and secure on wall in location
directed by the Client.
2. Include remaining 3 sets in "Operation and maintenance Manuals".
END OF SECTION
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 0525 - 4 VALVES
 SECTION 22 0593
FLUSHING, CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF PIPING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section includes the requirements for Flushing, Cleaning and Disinfection of Piping
Systems
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following Standards and Specifications are applicable:
1. AWWA-B300 Hypochlorites
2. AWWA-B301 Liquid Chloride
3. AWWA-C651 Disinfection of Water Mains
4. AWWA-C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. The contractor shall submit the following materials to the Engineer for the specialist to review
and approval before starting the work.
C. Full description of the materials proposed for use.
D.Full description of the sterilization procedures and sequencing with a description of the rates of
chlorine and bacteria.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of work and materials used, and it must
propose a program of inspection and testing in order to achieve quality standards referred to in
the specifications.
B. The Contractor shall provide a qualified representative of the quality control at the work site
during all operations.
1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE HANDLING
A. The chemicals shall be delivered, stored, handled and protected as per manufacturer's
instruction.
B. The manufacturer's chemicals shelf life should be observed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DISINFECTING AGENT:
A. Manufacturers’ instructions shall be followed with respect to application and handling.
B. Cleaning agent shall be compatible with the piping system components and associated
equipment and shall not damage or abrade the pipe work.
C. Make necessary precautions when using alkaline cleaners as they affect paints.
D. Recommended Agents for disinfection of potable water pipes:
1. Alkaline Oakite Solution.
2. Trisodium Phosphate.
3. Chlorine based sterilisation agent.
4. Liquid Sodium Hypochloride.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION:
A. Cleaning before installation:
1. Pipes shall be hammered, wiped, or washed to loosen sand, dirt, or debris without
damaging surfaces.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 0593 - 1 FLUSHING, CLEANING,

DISINFECTION AND CHEMICAL
TREATMENT OF PIPING
SYSTEMS
 2. Foreign material shall be removed by blowing with air or hosing down with clean water.
B. Prior to flushing, all control valves, safety valves, controllers, orifice plates, and any other
instruments and items, which may be damaged by flushing or cleaning procedures shall be
removed from the system.
C. Protection:
1. Equipment shall be disconnected from all piping to be flushed or temporary strainers
installed directly upstream of equipment.
2. All piping and connected equipment shall be protected from over pressure, collapse from
vacuum and hydraulic shock.
3.2 FLUSHING, CLEANING AND DISINFECTION:
A. General:
1. Contractor shall be fully responsible for providing water, chemical and equipment required
by carrying out the work under this section.
2. Strainer screens shall be removed, cleaned and replaced after flushing and cleaning as
well as after the disinfecting.
3. After flushing and cleaning, it shall be verified that all valves, controls, and related
equipment are fully operable.
4. All items removed shall be replaced with temporary spool pieces, plugs, or blind flanges
5. New gasket and thread lubricant shall be installed when items removed are replaced after
cleaning and flushing.
6. Open ends of piping shall be capped if system testing and operation are not commenced
immediately after flushing and cleaning.
B. Cleaning and Disinfecting Potable and non-potable Water Systems:
1. Prior to disinfecting, hot and cold potable water piping systems and water heaters, shall be
thoroughly flushed at full line pressure until water runs clear, and then drained.
2. The system shall be filled and circulated with trisodium phosphate solution or equivalent
cleaning agent for minimum of 3 hours, and drained thoroughly following circulation period
3. The potable water systems shall be disinfected and bacteriological test conducted in
accordance with requirements of AWWA C 651. As a minimum every part of the system
shall be filled with water containing 50 mg/l chlorine for at least 24 hours.
4. Subsequent to disinfection, the system shall be drained and flushed with water after
desired residual chlorine is obtained and until disinfection effects are within required limits
of AWWA C 651.
5. After the disinfection is completed, water samples must be taken from several points and
sent to a reputable laboratory for testing per AWWA C6551 specifications.
6. If contaminants are detected in the system, sterilization procedures shall be repeated until
satisfactory bacteriological results have been obtained the indicate he absence of
contaminants for a minimum of 48 hours.
C. Cleaning Instrument Tubing and Equipment Drains:
1. Instrument Tubing and Equipment drains shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt debris, and
moisture and thoroughly dried.
D. Cleaning Roof Drainage, Storm Drainage, and Sanitary Waste Piping:
1. Interior of piping shall be cleaned free from joint filler, or other foreign matter.
2. If needed, a dry clean cloth shall be ran through pipe sections prior to jointing.
E. Cleaning of Water tanks.
1. The internal surface shall be washed down with clean water by washing through manhole
and draining thoroughly, or connecting water to inlet and providing water flow in same
direction as service flow, and subsequently draining and re-flushing to remove debris.
2. After the flushing and cleaning the disinfection of the water tanks shall be in accordance
with AWWA C652.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 0593 - 2 FLUSHING, CLEANING,

DISINFECTION AND CHEMICAL
TREATMENT OF PIPING
SYSTEMS
 SECTION 21 0510
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for fire protection systems, as
indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1, for General Requirements.
5. See Section 230500, for Basic Mechanical Requirements.
6. See Section 221006, for Pipes and Pipe Fittings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design criteria: Provide complete fire protection systems as indicated on the drawings.
1. Where there is conflict between local authority requirements (Civil Defense) and the
drawings or specifications, requirements of local authorities shall govern.
2. Design and install entire system in accordance with indicated codes, standards and
regulation.
3. All materials and equipment shall be produced in a plant of recognized reputation and
regularly engaged in the production of pipes and/or equipment conforming to the specified
standards. A single manufacturer shall produce all the pipe of the same type supplied for
the work. Materials and equipment shall be new, of makes and kinds specified herein, or
as indicated on the Contract Drawings, without exception
4. All the work specified in this section shall be installed in accordance with the applicable
provisions of the following codes and standard:
a. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM)
b. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
c. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
d. Calculations: Hydraulic calculations for pipe sizing by Contractor.
B. System standards:
1. Local authority (civil defense) requirements
2. NFPA 10 Standard for portable fire extinguishers.
3. NFPA 13 Standard for the installation of sprinkler systems.
4. NFPA 14 Standard for the installation of stand pipe and hose systems.
5. NFPA 20 Standard for the Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps
6. NFPA 24 Standard for the installation of private fire service mains and their
appurtenances.
7. NFPA 25 Inspection, testing and maintenance of water based fire protection systems.
8. NFPA 2001 Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
9. ANSI American National Standards Institute
10. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
11. ASMEB1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose
12. ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300
13. ASME B16.5 Steel Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
14. ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
15. ASME B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
16. ASME B16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings
17. ASME B16.20 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges: Ring Joint Spiral Wound and
Jacketed
18. ASME B16.25 Buttwelding Ends

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 19. ASME B16.39 Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions, Classes 150,250, and 300
20. ASME B16.42 Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150 and 300
21. ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws - Inch Series
22. ASME B18.2.2 Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
23. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
24. ASTM A53M Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated,Welded
25. ASTM A234M Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel
and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service
26. FM Factory Mutual
27. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section - 013000.
B. Material and equipment information: Shall include catalog cuts and technical data for each
component or device used in the system.
C. The contractor shall provide information outlining the operation and maintenance procedures
that will be required by the Engineer.
D. Sequence of operation, electrical schematics and connection diagrams shall be provided.
E. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate locations, installation details and operation details
of all equipment associated with the fire protection systems.
F. Certification and Guarantees
1. Manufacturer's Guarantees for all proprietary equipment in brochure
2. Certificate of Compliance.
3. Test Reports.
4. Hydraulic calculations.
G. Operation and Maintenance Instructions
1. For all proprietary equipment and assemblies
2. Valve Identification Brochure.
1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Arrange and pay for all permits and inspection required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Use only new, material of first class construction, designed and guaranteed to perform services
required and approved by NFPA and local authority.
2.2 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Piping and fittings shall be selected, fabricated, installed and inspected in accordance with
NFPA 14.
B. Fittings shall be extra-heavy pattern where pressures exceed 12.1 bar (175 psi).
C. Where corrosive conditions exist or piping is exposed to the weather, corrosion-resistant types
of pipe, tube, fittings, and hangers or protective corrosion-resistive coatings shall be used.
D. Steel Pipe: 50 mm (2 in.) and Smaller
1. Pipe
a. ASTM A53M, galvanized, Schedule 40, Grade B, ERW (electric-resistance
welded), plain ends.
2. Fittings
a. ASME B16.3 galvanized malleable iron.
E. Steel Pipe: 65 mm (2½ in.) and Larger Galvanized

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 1. Pipe
a. ASTM A53M, galvanised Schedule 40, Grade B, ERW (Electric Resistance
Welding), plain or beveled ends.
2. Fittings Galvanized
a. ASME B16.9 buttwelding fittings, with same wall thickness as connecting piping.
b. ASME B16.25, buttweld ends.
c. ASTM A234M wrought carbon steel, buttwelding.
d. ASME B16.5 flanged fittings.
F. Unions
1. Unions for Pipe 50 mm (2 in.) and Under
a. ASME B16.39 malleable iron unions, galvanized, female pattern, brass to iron
seat, and ground joint.
G. Flanges
1. General
a. Flanges shall match class and facing of connecting flange.
b. Welded flanges shall be furnished with gaskets of the one piece ring type,
compressed non-asbestos type or steel wound type, suitable for temperature,
pressure and service of system.
2. Flanges for Pipe 65 mm (2½ in.) and Larger
a. Welding Flanges
1) ASME B16.5, Material Group 1.1, forged steel, weld neck or slipon, raised face.
b. Flange Bolting
1) 1) ASTM A307, Grade B Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts.
c. Gaskets
1) 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) thick preformed neoprene or ASME B16.20 gasket.
3. Nuts and Bolts (For Flanged Joints)
a. Steel ASTM A307 Grade A, regular square or hex head machine bolts.
b. Threaded to U.S. National Coarse Threads Series, ASME B1.1, Class 2.
c. Fit per ASME B18.2.1 and furnished with heavy pattern hex nuts, ASME B18.2.2.
d. Threads shall be coated with a rust preventative lubricant.
H. Mechanical Pipe Couplings and Fittings
1. 1. General
a. Mechanical pipe couplings and fittings shall be used, with cut or roll grooved pipe, in
fire service in lieu of welded, screwed or flanged connections.
2. Grooved Mechanical Couplings
a. Housing
1) Malleable iron, ASTM A47M or ductile iron, ASTM A536.
2) Fabricated in 2 or more parts, securely held together by 2 or more track head,
square, or oval neck bolts, ASTM A183.
b. Housing Coating
1) Factory enameled or galvanized.
c. Bolts and Nuts
1) Heat treated carbon steel, zinc electroplated to ASTM B633, track-head
conforming to physical properties of ASTM A183; minimum tensile 758450 kPa
(110,000 psi).
d. Gaskets
1) Rubber product recommended by the coupling manufacturer for the intended
service.
3. Grooved End Fittings
a. Malleable iron, ASTM A47M; ductile iron, ASTM A536; or steel, ASTM A53M or
A106, designed to accept grooved mechanical couplings.
I. Dielectric Fittings
1. Provide where dissimilar conductive pipe materials are joined.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 3 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 2. 50 mm (2 in.) and Smaller
a. ANSI B16.39, threaded dielectric union, water impervious isolation barrier.
3. 65 mm (2½ in.) and Larger
a. ANSI B16.42, flange union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves.
4. Temperature Rating
a. 99°C (210°F) for water systems.
J. The type of joints for pipe greater than 50mm, grooved or Weeded shall be decided by the
client / Supervising engineers.
K. Pressure Gauges
1. Construction: Vacuum, pressure, or compound type to suit the service in which installed;
copper alloy bourdon tube with brass tip and socket; stainless steel and monel movement;
1/2% accuracy within the scale range; black steel case and mounting ring; glass crystal;
integral calibration screw; range to suit service, with normal operating pressure at midpoint
of scale; integral safety blowout plug.
2. Accessories:
a. Needle Valves:
b. Brass body, seat, stem and knurled handle, threaded and connections, graphite packing,
maximum operating pressure: 13.8 MPa; maximum operating temperature: 232 degree
C.
1) Pigrails: Black Iron, threaded.
2) Snubbers: Porous brass.
3. Filter Draft Gauges: Dial type 0 to 100 mm water gauge range, diaphragm actuated, magnetic-
helical movement, 90mm diameter dial, pointer with zero adjustment, statis pressure tips 2%
accuracy.

2.3 HANGERS
A. Hanger and Support Spacing
1. Use hangers with minimum vertical adjustment.
2. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
3. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
4. Adjust hangers to obtain the slope specified in the piping section of these specifications.
5. Space hangers for pipe as follows:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 4 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 6. Hangers, supports and hanger spacing shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 13 and the
manufacturer’s requirements. Contractor shall provide details on the installation drawings for
all proposed means of support.
7. Restrains hangers shall be installed at all sprinkler head location within 1’-0” for a single
restraint and within 5’-0” for two points of restraint. The requirements for hanger restraint for
systems in excess of 100 PSI pressure shall be followed.
8. Hangers shall not compare, distort, cut or abrade the piping and shall allow free movement of
the pipe to permit thermal expansion and contraction.
9. Unsupported length from the last hanger and an end sprinkler for steel piping systems shall be
as follows:
1. 1” piping Not greater than 36”
2. 1-1/4” piping Not greater than 48”
3. 1-1/2” piping Not greater than 60”
4. Or larger

B. Pipe Hangers And Supports

1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½” Through 4”
1. Carbon steel, adjustable swivel ring with 3/8 min. UL/FM approved hanger
rods. B-Line B317ONF, Anvil 69 or 70
2. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard with UL/FM approved size hanger
rods. B-Line B3100, Anvil 260.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 4” Through 8”
1. Carbon steel adjustable swivel ring with ½” min, UL/FM approved hanger rods.
B-Line B3170NF, Anvil 69 or 70
2. Carbon steel, adjustable clevis, standard with UL/FM approved size hanger
rods. B-Line B3100, Anvil 260.
3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 10” And Up
1. Carbon steel adjustable clevis, standard with UL/FM approved size hanger
rods. B-Line B3100, Anvil 260.
2. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers:
1. Manufactured steel channel system with manufactures slotted interlocking pipe
clamps with screw/nut securing and threaded hanger rods or steel channels
with welded spacers and threaded hanger rods.
3 5. Wall Support:
1. Carbon steel welded bracket with hanger. B-Line 3060 Series, Anvil 190 Series
2. Steel channels with pipe clamps.
4 6. Vertical Support:
1. Carbon steel riser clamp. B-Line B3373, Anvil 261 for above floor use.
5 7. Floor Support
1. Carbon steel pipe saddle, stand and bolted floor flange. B-Line B3088T/B3093.
6 8. Copper Pipe Supports:
1. All Supports, fasteners, and clamps, directly connected to copper piping shall
be copper plated or polyvinylchloride coated. Where steel channels are used,
provide flexible elastomeric/thermoplastic isolation cushion material to
completely encircle the piping and avoid contact with the channel or clamp,
equal to B-Line B1999 Vibra Cushion or provide manufacturers clamp and
cushion assemblies, B-Line BVT series, Grinnell PS 1400 series or approved
equal manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 5 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 C. Pipe Hanger Rods
1. STEEL HANGER RODS:
a. Threaded both ends, threated one end, or continuous threaded, complete
with adjusting and lock nuts.
b. Size rods for individual hangers an trapeze support as indicated in the
following schedule
3. Pipe Size Diam. Of Rod
4. Up to and
5. Including 4” 3/8” or 9.5mm min.
6. 5” 6” and 8” ½” or 12.7mm min.
7. 10” and 12” 5/8” or 15.9mm min.

2.4 VALVES AND HOSE CONNECTIONS

A. General
1. All valves shall meet or exceed NFPA 14; of type, construction and class
approved for fire service.
2. All fire-protection service valves shall be UL listed and FM approved,
with minimum 12.1 bar (175 psi) non-shock working-pressure rating.
3. All valves controlling connections to water supplies and
standpipes shall be listed indicating valves (OS & Y or post
indicated).
4. Drain valves shall follow NFPA 14 requirements.
5. Valves shall be capable of being packed under pressure when fully open.
B. Valve Ends Selection
1. Pipe size 50 mm (2 in.) and Smaller
a. Threaded or grooved-end.
2. Pipe size 65 mm (2½ in.) and Larger
a. Flanged or grooved-end.
C. Gate Valves
1. 50 mm (2 in.) and Smaller
a. Outside screw and yoke type, and rising stem; non-shock
bronze body and bronze trim; solid wedge disc and steel hand
wheel.
2. 65 mm (2½ in.) and Larger
a. Iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, non-shock type.
3. Gate valves shall be UL labeled or FM approved (UL 262) for
water service in fire protection systems. Gate valves shall open
by counter clockwise rotation.
4. Check Valves
1. 50 mm (2 in.) and Smaller
a. Check valve shall be horizontal/vertical type, non-slamming
design having bronze body and bronze trim.
2. 65 mm (2½ in.) and Larger
a. Iron body and bolted cap, non-slamming design with bronze
or cast-iron disc, bronze-disc ring, bolted cap/removable
cover.
3. Split-Clapper Check Valves
a. a) Cast-iron body with rubber seal, bronze-alloy discs, and
stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
Check valves shall be UL labeled or FM approved (UL 312) for fire
protection service.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 6 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 5. Butterfly Valves
1. 65 mm (2 1/2 in.) in size and larger shall be cast iron body, iron
or bronze alloy disk, resilient-seated EPDM coated disk; low
torque operation, high cycle life.
2. UL 1091 and FM Global Approved for indicating valves
(butterfly or ball type), Class Number 112.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa.
4. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron with nylon, EPDM, epoxy, or
polyamide coating.
5. Seat: EPDM.
6. Stem: Stainless steel.
7. Disc: Ductile iron, nickel plated.

2.5 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM ( IF APPLICABLE)

A. General Requirements:
1. Sprinkler installations shall comply fully with the requirements of IRC, NFPA13D latest
edition.
2. Provision shall be made for flushing the system.
3. All piping shall be provided where necessary, where shown on the drawings and at all
sectional valves to help draining the major part of the system. On all risers 4" (100 mm) or
larger, drain valve shall be 2" (50 mm) size, on 2½" (65 mm) and 3" (80 mm) risers, 1¼"
(32 mm) valves shall be used and on small risers, ¾" (20 mm) drain valves shall be
provided.
4. No direct interconnections shall be made between sewers and sprinkler drain systems.
5. Sprinkler piping shall not be used, in any way, for domestic water supply purposes.
6. All valves controlling the water supply shall be located where readily accessible.
7. provision shall be make for test connections and valves.
B. Tests:
1. All interior piping and attached appurtenances subjected to system working pressure shall
be hydrostatically tested to 200 Psi (13.8 bars) and shall maintain that pressure without
loss for 2 hours. Loss shall be determined by a drop in gauge pressure or visual leakage.
2. Portions of systems normally subjected to working pressures in excess of 150 Psi (10.4
bars) shall be tested as described above at a pressure of 50 Psi (3.5 bars) in excess of
normal working pressure.
3. The test pressure shall be read from a gauge located at the low elevation point of the
system or portion being tested.
4. piping between the exterior fire department connection and the check valve in the fire
department inlet pipe shall be hydrostatically tested in the same manner as the balance of
the system.
C. Signs:
1. Provide at sprinkler test valve a metal sign 100 × 200 mm size with white letters on red
background, reading "SPRINKLER TEST VALVE". Letters shall not be less than 50 mm in
height.
2. Where required by the architect and to the consent of the client, the sprinkler head shall
be supplied as “concealed type”. (Sprinkler head with cover pate)
D. Sprinkler head - upright / quick response.
1. Sprinkler heads shall be all bronze, spray type 165 ºF (74 ºC) rating, with standard K-
Factor 5.6, quick response type, with bulb operating element of “quartzoid”. Sprinkler
heads shall be UL listed and FM approved.
E. Sprinkler head - pendent / quick response.
1. Sprinkler heads shall be all bronze, spray type 165 ºF (74 ºC) rating, with standard K-
Factor 5.6, quick response type, with bulb operating element of “quartzoid”. Sprinkler
heads shall be UL listed and FM approved.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 7 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 F. Sprinkler head - recessed pendent / quick response.
1. Sprinkler head shall be all bronze, spray type 145 ºF (63 ºC) with standard K-Factor 5.6,
quick response type, with bulb operating element of “quartzoid”. The pendent type spinkler
heads shall be chrome plated and complete with chrome plated escutcheon plate.
Sprinkler heads shall be UL listed and FM approved.
G. Sprinkler head - sidewall / quick response
1. Sprinkler head shall be all bronze, spray type 165 ºF (74 ºC) rating with standard K - factor
5.6, quick response type, extended coverage with bulb operating element of "quartzoid".
The sidewall sprinkler head shall be UL listed and FM approved.
H. Sprinkler head - recessed pendent / quick response / large drop.
1. Sprinkler head shall be all bronze, large drop type 145 ºF (63 ºC) with K - factor 8.1, quick
response type, with bulb operating element of "quertzoid". The recessed pendent large
drop sprinkler heads shall be chrome plated and complete with chrome plated escutcheon
plate. Sprinkler heads shall be UL listed and FM approved.
I. Spare sprinkler heads
1. Spare sprinkler heads shall be provided for any type of sprinkler heads used complete
with special sprinkler head wrenches as per (NFPA - 13) recommendations and as
detailed in item 3.04 of this section.
2. All sprinkler heads and wrenches shall be supported on steel clip in a suitable steel
cabinet with hinged door and hatch. Cabinets shall be finished in red enamel with white
letters on door reading “SPARE SPRINKLER PARTS”. Cabinet shall be wall hung and in
compliance with all authorities having jurisdiction location of cabinet shall be as directed
by the engineer.
J. Flow Switch - Electric Type:
1. The water flow alarm device shall consist of an electrical switching device actuated by
means of a vane extending inside the fire pipe. when water flows inside the pipe, the
moving vane shall close the circuit in the motor switch which shall complete the circuit,
sending a signal to the fire alarm panel.
K. Valve supervisory switches
1. Provide UL listed valve supervisory switches as required, arranged, to detect the open or
closed position of control valves. Switches shall be attached to the various control valves
being supervised and shall be complete with required trim, contacts for connection to main
fire alarm panel and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm
system.
L. Alarm check valve assembly
1. Supply and install one alarm check valve assembly whenever shown on the drawings and
as specified in these specifications and as detailed on the drawings.
2. The assembly shall include:-
3. O. S. & Y. gate valve with tamper switch (or) butterfly valve (indicating type) with tamper
switch.
4. Alarm check valve
5. Water motor alarm and gong. Alarm must be tested at least once each 4 weeks. The gong
shall be complete with drain cock and to be connected to the nearest drain point.
6. Combined drain and test valve.
7. Upstream and downstream pressure gauges.
8. Alarm motor stop valve.
9. Electrical pressure switch.
10. Flow switch to be installed downstream the alarm check valve.
M. Alarm Valve
1. This valve is a part of the alarm check valve assembly and shall comprise a bronze
seating and valve guide, alarm valve clack (Clapper) resting on the seating. The clack is a
flat circular bronze plate fared with special composition disk.
2. When water flows through the alarm check valve, the water will raise the clack disk, and
flows to the system with a small amount passing through a special groove to the alarm
motor and gong and initiating the alarm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 8 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 3. The clack will remain in the raised position until there is no flow of water throw the valve.
4. When sprinklers are in operation during a fire the alarm gong may be shut off by
closing alarm motor stop valve.
N. Floor Control valve assembly
1. Supply and install one floor control valve assembly whenever shown on the drawings
and as specified in these specifications and as detailed on the drawings.
2. The floor control valve assembly shall include:-
a. O.S. & Y. gate valve with tamper switch (or) butterfly valve (indicating type)
with tamper switch.
b. Combined drain and test valve.
c. Flow switch to be installed downstream the control valve.
2.6 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Water supply mains shall be provided with a pressure reducing valve and shall be of the
hydraulically operated globe or angle type, actuated by a diaphragm or piston. Valve ends
shall be threaded and the body and trim shall be made of bronze; the stem of stainless steel,
disc and diaphragm of synthetic rubber. The PRV shall maintain the downstream pressure
at a constant value for any upstream pressure.
B. A strainer shall be installed immediately upstream from a reducing valve. The blow-off from
each strainer shall be equipped with a valve and a drain line extended to a drain.
C. Pressure gauges shall be provided on each side of pressure reducing valves.
D. Valves less than 50 mm shall be spring actuated direct acting type. Bronze construction.
E. The joints shall be threaded.
F. The PRV shall be certified to NSE the pilot controls shall be field adjustable from 15psi to
150psi.

2.7 FIRE HOSE CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fire hose cabinet: Recessed type with right or left inlet as required, 16 gauge steel
construction with 12 gauge full opening door in adjustable frame, approved latching device,
prime coat. Cabinets to contain angle valve, hose rack, hose nozzle. Fire hose cabinet shall
fit opening provided by architectural drawings.
B. Hose rack: Swivel type with pins and water stop.
C. Angle valve: 1-1/2”chrome plated cast or forged brass.
D. Hose and nozzle: 100 feet (30m) of 1-1/2 inch (38mm) latex lined linen, mildew and rot
resistant hose chrome plated couplings, 1-1/2 inch (38mm) chrome plated combination fog-
straight stream and adjustable shut-off nozzle.
2.8 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
A. General: Provide fire protection specialties, U/L-listed, in accordance with the following
listing. provide sizes and types which mate and match piping and equipment connections.
B. Water flow indicators: Water flow indicator shall be of the paddle flow clamp-on type with
vane projecting into pipe through a hole drilled in pipe, instantly recycling operation on 120
volt, single phase, 60 hertz service with contacts for connection to alarm center.
C. Alarm Bells: Provide alarm bell at each water flow indicator and at central location where
indicated. Bells shall be 150 mm seamless unless otherwise indicated, single stroke or
vibrating type as required by the service, and shall operate on 115 volts, single phase, 60
hertz.
D. Water-Motor Gongs: Provide 250 mm weatherproof, red enameled finish, water-motor gongs.
E. Supervisory switches: Provide U/L listed tamper switches where indicated, arranged to
detect the open or closed position of control valves. Switches shall be attached to the
various control valves being supervised and shall be complete with tamper switches, required
trim and electrical characteristics compatible with those of the fire alarm system.
2.9 PORTABLE HAND FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 9 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
 A. Provide multi-purpose pressurized dry-chemical portable fire extinguishers, with hose
and integral shut off nozzle and wall brackets.
1. The fire extinguishers shall be suitable for class A, B and C fires as indicted on
the drawings and as follows:
2. Type FE-1, 6 kg capacity.
B. Provide carbon dioxide portable fire extinguishers, with discharge horn and wall
brackets. The fire extinguisher shall be suitable for class B and C fires as
indicated on the drawings and as follows:
1. Type FE-2, 6 kg capacity.
2.10 MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEM
A. A maintenance schedule showing site visit and system testing shall be submitted to the
Client and local authority (civil defense) for approval. Maintenance shall be as per the
conditions of the contract. The system shall be maintained for a period of one year from the
date of initial handing over and Owner’s acceptance.
2.11 WARRANTY
A. System shall be warranted for parts and labor for not less than a period of one (1) year from
date of initial handing over of the work and Owner’s acceptance. A system checking
schedule showing site visits shall be submitted to the Client and local authority (Civil defense)
for
approval.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Cooperate with other trades to insure adequate space for equipment and piping placement.
B. Review plans, specifications and shop drawings of other trades to coordinate work.
C. Install in strict accordance with approved shop drawings.
D. Install all piping, valves, and connections from mains to building fire protection systems.
E. Do not begin installation until local authority approval is submitted to the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, VALVES AND ACCESSORIES
A. Install piping as shown on drawings.
1. Where conditions of construction require piping installation at a lower elevation,
route piping to avoid interference with work of other trades.
2. Offset, crossover and otherwise route piping to install system in available space. Not
all offsets necessarily shown.
3. Pitch all branch lines, cross mains, feed mains and risers to drainage points.
4. Provide angle drain valves at all low points
5. Plugs permitted at offsets when approved by local authority.
6. Install pressure gauges at top of each standpipe riser and elsewhere as required by
local authority.
7. Install automatic air release valve at top of each riser.
8. All pipe work shall be painted after installation.
B. Provide OS & Y valve and drain valve at base of all standpipes.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect fire protection systems in accordance with
Section 221005 “Pipe & Pipe fittings: After fire piping installation has been completed and
before piping is placed into service flush entire system as required to remove foreign
substances, under pressure as specified in NFPA14. Continue flushing until water is clear.
3.4 EXTRASTOCK
A. Heads: Provide for each style and temperature rating required, furnish additional
sprinkler heads, according to the regulations or NFPA-13. and as per the bill of
quantities.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 10 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

3.5 TESTING
A. Contractor shall test the system for pressure prior to owner tests.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for getting the required approval of the entire fire
protection system from local authority before and after the execution of the system.
C. The system shall be flushed after each pressure test. Clear water shall be pumped into
the system for flushing with adequate flow rate and a velocity of not less than 3 m / sec.
D. Piping system shall be capped and hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times of the working
pressure for 4 hours but not less than 200 psi with no leaks or loss of pressure. The test
source shall be isolated before conducting pressure tests. Each control valve and hydrant
shall be opened and closed while under pressure proper operation.
E. The system and components shall be tested and certified per the requirements of
NFPA 13.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 21 0510 - 11 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS

 SECTION 22 1005
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings, specialties, and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
3. Storm water.
4. Flanges, unions, and couplings.
5. Pipe hangers and supports.
6. Manufactured sleeve-seal systems.
7. Valves.
8. Flow controls.
9. Check.
10. Water pressure reducing valves.
11. Relief valves.
12. Strainers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.
B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.
C. Section 33 0110.58 - Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z21.22 - American National Standard for Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff
Devices for Hot Water Supply Systems; 2015.
B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; 2016.
C. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250; 2016.
D. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.
E. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.
F. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV; 2016.
G. ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes; 2018.
H. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -
DWV; 2017.
I. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; 2018.
J. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; 2017.
K. ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction of
Heating Boilers; 2019.
L. ASME BPVC-IX - Qualification Standard for Welding, Brazing, and Fuzing Procedures;
Welders; Brazers; and Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Operators - Welding Brazing and Fusing
Qualifications; 2019.
M. ASSE 1003 - Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic
Water Distribution Systems; 2009.
N. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999, with
Editorial Revision (2018).
O. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
P. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2017.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING

 Q. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
R. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and
Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2019.
S. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service; 2015a (Reapproved 2019).
T. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).
U. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015a.
V. ASTM B43 - Standard Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2015.
W. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.
X. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2018.
Y. ASTM B306 - Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV); 2013.
Z. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and
Copper Alloy Tube; 2016.
AA. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper
Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2016.
AB. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and
Culvert Pipe; 2015a.
AC. ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, Culvert
Pipe and (Metric); 2015a.
AD. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets; 2012 (Reapproved 2017).
AE. ASTM C443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
AF. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;
2014.
AG. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2018).
AH. ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter; 2012a.
AI. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe
(SDR Series); 2015.
AJ. ASTM D2513 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and
Fittings; 2019.
AK. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2012 (Reapproved 2018).
AL. ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe; 2015.
AM. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and
Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014.
AN. ASTM D2683 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing; 2014.
AO. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2011.
AP. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2019.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING

 AQ. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer & Solvent Cement) Method of
Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and
Piping Components with Tapered Sockets; 2015.
AR. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings; 2016.
AS. ASTM D3262 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Sewer Pipe; 2016.
AT. ASTM D3840 - Standard Specification for "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Pipe Fittings for Nonpressure Applications; 2019.
AU. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2015.
AV. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2017.
AW. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80; 2019.
AX. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2015.
AY. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2019.
AZ. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe;
2014.
BA. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2014.
BB. ASTM F876 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing; 2019a.
BC. ASTM F877 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Hot- and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems; 2019.
BD. ASTM F1281 - Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene/Aluminum/Crosslinked
Polyethylene (PEX-AL-PEX) Pressure Pipe; 2017.
BE. ASTM F1282 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene/Aluminum/Polyethylene (PE-AL-PE)
Composite Pressure Pipe; 2017.
BF. ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings
for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT)
Tubing; 2019.
BG. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010.
BH. AWWA C110/A21.10 - Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings; 2012.
BI. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2017.
BJ. AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; 2017, with Errata (2018).
BK. AWWA C550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants; 2017.
BL. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.
BM. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; 2014.
BN. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through
300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution; 2016.
BO. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and
Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2017 (Revised 2018).
BP. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; 2012 (Revised
2018).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING

 BQ. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2015.
BR. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry
Elements; 2015.
BS. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015.
BT. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete
Elements; 2016.
BU. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation; 2018.
BV. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves; 2017.
BW. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;
2010.
BX. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017.
BY. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.
BZ. PPI TR-4 - PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress (HDS),
Strength Design Basis (SDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), and Minimum Required Strength
(MRS) Ratings For Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe; 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
C. Welder Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.
D. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports, submit detailed layout developed for
this project, with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Comply with ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor
regulations.
D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.
E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification,
potable water certification, water pressure rating.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections
of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that
comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING

2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 1500 MM OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034 DR 35.3034
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets.
C. Concrete Pipe: Nonreinforced, ASTM C14 (ASTM C14M) Class 1.
1. Fittings: Concrete, as specified for pipe.
2. Joints: Elastomeric gaskets; ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M).
D. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.
2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 1500 MM OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: Hub-and-spigot, CISPI HSN compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets
or lead and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.
C. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.
D. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F441/F441M, or ASTM F442/F442M.
1. Fittings: CPVC; ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F437, ASTM F438, or ASTM F439.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement.
E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.04 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.
C. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.29, wrought copper, or ASME B16.23, sovent.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.
D. Aluminum DWV Pipe:
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joints: ASTM C564, thermoplastic rubber coupling and stainless steel clamps.
E. Brass Pipe: ASTM B43, chrome plated.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast bronze, chrome plated.
2. Joints: Mechanical compression.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the following joint types:
1. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.4 cast iron fittings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 5 PLUMBING PIPING

 2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, fittings of same material, and mechanical
couplings.
G. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
H. Fiberglass Pipe: ASTM D3262.
1. Fittings: ASTM D3840.
2. Joints: Epoxy.
2.05 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 1500 MM OF BUILDING
A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1. Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket
with 19 mm diameter rods.
B. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
C. PE Pipe: ASTM D2239.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2609, PE.
2. Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp.
D. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900.
E. Polyethylene/Aluminum Composite Pipe: ASTM F1281 or ASTM F1282, tested for potable
water and residual chlorine use.
1. Fittings and Joints: Brass compression type.
2.06 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 1500 MM OF BUILDING
A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51.
1. Fittings: Ductile or gray iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket
with 19 mm diameter rods.
C. PE Pipe: ASTM D2239.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2609, PE.
2. Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp.
D. Polyethylene/Aluminum Composite Pipe: ASTM F1281 or ASTM F1282, tested for potable
water and residual chlorine use.
1. Fittings and Joints: Brass compression type.
E. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877.
1. PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis:
2.07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.
3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved
or certified, utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the following joint types:
1. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.4 cast iron fittings.
2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, cast iron fittings, and mechanical couplings.
C. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F441/F441M, or ASTM F442/F442M.
1. Fittings: CPVC; ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F437, ASTM F438, or ASTM F439.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 6 PLUMBING PIPING

 D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 or ASTM D2241.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2665, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement.
E. Polyethylene/Aluminum Composite Pipe: ASTM F1281 or ASTM F1282, tested for potable
water and residual chlorine use.
1. Fittings and Joints: Brass compression type.
F. Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877.
1. PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis:
a. 1102 kPa at maximum 23 degrees C.
b. 689 kPa at maximum 82 degrees C.
c. 551 kPa at maximum 93 degrees C.
d. ____ kPa at maximum _____ degrees C.
2. Fittings: Brass and copper.
3. Fittings: Brass and engineered polymer (EP) ASTM F1960.
4. Joints: Mechanical compression fittings.
5. Joints: ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fittings.
G. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 alloy.
1. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved
or certified, utilizing EPDM, non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
2.08 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 1500 MM OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306 DWV.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.
C. Concrete Pipe: Nonreinforced, ASTM C14 (ASTM C14M) Class 1.
1. Fittings: Concrete, as specified for pipe.
2. Joints: Elastomeric gaskets; ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M).
D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D3034 DR 35.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets.
2.09 STORM WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 1500 MM OF BUILDING
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight.
1. Fittings: Cast iron.
2. Joint Seals: ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets, or lead and oakum.
B. Copper Tube: ASTM B306, DWV.
1. Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper, or ASME B16.29, wrought copper.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn50 solder.
C. Concrete Pipe: Nonreinforced, ASTM C14 (ASTM C14M) Class 1.
1. Fittings: Concrete, as specified for pipe.
2. Joints: Elastomeric gaskets; ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M).
D. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.10 STORM WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM A74 extra heavy weight.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.
1. Fittings: PVC.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 7 PLUMBING PIPING

 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.11 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing
segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to
secure and compress gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron, ductile iron, or _____,
galvanized.
3. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 34 degrees
C to 110 degrees C.
4. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.
B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,
water impervious isolation barrier.
2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate
type using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze
hangers.
3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.
5. Floor Supports: Concrete pier or steel pedestal with floor flange; fixture attachment.
6. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of
roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating
the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a. Bases: High density polypropylene.
b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing
assembly.
c. Steel Components: Stainless steel, or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as
indicated for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 150 mm under pipe to top of roofing.
B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 mm to 40 mm: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hook.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.
5. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and
concrete pier or steel support.
6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
C. Plumbing Piping - Water:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 15 mm to 40 mm: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.
2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 50 mm and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 50 mm to 100 mm: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll,
double hanger.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 80 mm: Cast iron hook.
6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 100 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 8 PLUMBING PIPING

 7. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought
steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.
8. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor
flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
9. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 100 mm: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut,
nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 150 mm and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
11. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.
D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
2.13 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and
wall/casing opening.
2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
2.14 BALL VALVES
A. Construction, 100 mm and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 2760 kPa CWP, bronze or
ductile iron body, 304 stainless steel or chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, threaded or grooved
ends with union.
2.15 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Construction 40 mm and Larger: MSS SP-67, 1380 kPa CWP, cast or ductile iron body, nickel-
plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer ends, extended neck, 10
position lever handle.
B. Provide gear operators for valves 150 mm and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves
mounted over 2400 mm above floor.
2.16 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flow Controls:
1. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature
and pressure test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.
2. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure
range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 24
kPa.
2.17 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Up to 50 mm:
1. ASSE 1003, bronze body, stainless steel, and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric
reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded single union ends.
B. Over 50 mm:
1. ASSE 1003, cast iron body with interior lining complying with AWWA C550, bronze fitted,
elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 9 PLUMBING PIPING

2.18 RELIEF VALVES
A. Temperature and Pressure:
1. ANSI Z21.22, AGA certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,
automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 98.9 degrees C, capacity
ASME BPVC-IV certified and labelled.
2.19 STRAINERS
A. Size 50 mm and Under:
1. Threaded brass body for 1200 kPa CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel perforated
screen.
2. Class 150, threaded bronze body 2070 kPa CWP, Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel
perforated screen.
B. Size 40 mm to 100 mm:
1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1.6 mm stainless steel perforated screen.
C. Size 125 mm and Larger:
1. Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern with 3.2 mm stainless steel perforated
screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting.
1. See Section 09 9123 for painting of interior plumbing systems and components.
2. See Section 09 9113 for painting of exterior plumbing systems and components.
C. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
D. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified
solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with
NSF 61 and NSF 372.
E. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
F. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.
G. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 100
mm.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt
with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.
H. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 15 mm space between finished covering and adjacent
work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 10 PLUMBING PIPING

 4. Place hangers within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 40 mm minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe
movement without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of
connected horizontal piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
a. Painting of interior plumbing systems and components is specified in Section 09
9123.
b. Painting of exterior plumbing systems and components is specified in Section 09
9113.
10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
I. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:
1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior
concrete walls at piping entrances into building.
2. Provide sealing elements of the size, quantity, and type required for the piping and sleeve
inner diameter or penetration diameter.
3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.
4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve
and piping.
5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.
6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
J. When installing more than one piping system material, ensure system components are
compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings.
Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to
pipe.
D. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.
E. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate equipment.
G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.
H. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 10 mm vertically of location indicated and
slope to drain at minimum of 1:50 slope.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1:400 and arrange to drain at low points.
3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 33 0110.58.
B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
C. Ensure acidity (pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda
or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 11 PLUMBING PIPING

 E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water
entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations
required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.
B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer and
water meter with by-pass valves, pressure reducing valve, and sand strainer.
1. Provide sleeve in wall for service main and support at wall with reinforced concrete bridge.
Calk enlarged sleeve and make watertight with pliable material. Anchor service main
inside to concrete wall.
2. Provide 1.21 mm galvanized sheet metal sleeve around service main to 150 mm above
floor and 1800 mm minimum below grade. Size for minimum of 50 mm of loose batt
insulation stuffing.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1005 - 12 PLUMBING PIPING

 SECTION 22 1006
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all piping specialities as
indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure and complete installation.
4. See Section 230593 for Basic Mechanical Requirements.
5. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section - 013000.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Thermometers and pressure gauges to read in metric units.
2.2 LIQUID FLOW METERS (IF APPLICABLE)
A. ASME MFC-3M Calibrated venturi orifice plate and flanges with valved taps, chart for
conversion of differential pressure readings to flow rate, with pressure gage in case. Annular
element flow stations with meter set.
B. Measuring Station: Type 316 stainless steel pitot type flow element inserted through welded
threaded couplet, with safety shut-off valves and quick coupling connections, and permanent
metal tag indicating design flow rate, reading for design flow rate, metered fluid, line size,
station or location number.
C. Pressure rating: 1896 kPa.
D. Maximum temperature: 204 degrees C.
E. Accuracy: Plus 0.55 percent to minus 2.30 percent.
F. Portable Meter Set: Dry single diaphragm type pressure gage with 150 mm dial pointer,
stainless steel wetted metal parts, variable pulsation damper, equalizing valve, two bleed
valves, and master chart for direct conversion of meter readings to flow rate, mounted in rust-
proof carrying case with two 3 m long rubber test hoses with brass valves or quick connections
for measuring stations.
2.3 BTU METER (IF APPLICABLE)
A. The Energy Meter shall comply with the following standards: EN1434-1: 2004, EN1434 Class A
and C, Metrological Class 2 and 3, OIML R75: 2002
B. The energy meter shall use Ultrasonic beam principle.
C. The energy meter shall have the minimum range of nominal flows qp from 1.5m3/h to
1000m3/h.
D. The maximum flow rates (qs) shall be twice the nominal flow rates (qp).
E. Energy Meter shall, in no circumstances, show zero flow even above maximum flow (qs).
F. Energy meter shall have dedicated product range for Cooling Applications. Heat Meters must
not be used as Cooling Meter for Cooling Application.
G. The energy meter shall be tested and approved as a complete, hybrid or split meter as per the
H. EN1434 standard, which consists of the following: Energy calculator, flow sensor and paired
temperature sensors.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 1 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 I. All energy meters using the ultrasonic principle shall have a minimum metrological dynamic
range (qi:qs) of 1:200 for all sizes and flow rates.
J. All energy meters shall be sized based on the designed maximum flow rates.
K. A complete set of Energy Meter consists of energy calculator, flow sensor and a factory
matched high accuracy temperature sensors (if applicable temperature sensor pockets or
thermo-wells).
L. The energy meter shall have a standard cable length of 2.5m between the flow sensor and the
energy calculator.
1. Other Features:
2. Unit: KWh
3. Flow speed: 0.01 m/s - 15 m/s
4. Size, mm: DN 15 - DN1000
5. Pressure: 1.0 MPa (or customize to requirement)
6. Working temperature: 2 - 95 deg C.
7. Delta t: 1 - 75 deg C (Air conditioner model: 0.5 - 75 degrees C)
8. Application: Model A (Indoor) Model B (Outdoor) Model C (Industrial)
9. Accuracy Class: 2 or 3 class
10. Temperature Class: 0.1 degrees C.
11. Protection Level: IP65
12. Installation: Any angle installed in incoming or outgoing pipe.
13. Power Supply: Built-in 3.6VDC lithium battery.
14. Battery Life: Approx. 5 years.
2.4 ENERGY CALCULATOR (IF APPLICABLE)
A. The energy calculator shall be approved according to EN 1434 environmental Class C and
MID.
B. The energy meter shall be easily retrofitted on site: battery replacement, matched temperature
sensor replacement, plug and play communication module insertion or removal.
C. The energy meter shall be designed to accept power supply of 230VAC or 24VAC or Battery
supply of minimum 10 years life time in ideal conditions.
D. The energy calculator shall have room for two plug-in communication modules enabling it to
adapt various applications and data reading methods.
E. Each energy calculator shall have a wall mounting kit.
F. The energy calculator shall be mountable directly on the flow sensor or on the wall using the
wall mounting kit.
G. The energy calculator shall be able to provide historical data logging of yearly values of 15
years, monthly values of 36 months and daily values of 460 days.
H. A separate hour logger module shall be available for hour logging of main registers.
I. The energy calculator IP rating shall be IP54.
J. The energy calculator shall contain all the necessary circuits for recording the accumulated
energy and water, minimum and maximum flow rates, minimum and maximum power values
and instantaneous and average values of temperature with date indication on monthly and
yearly basis.
K. All the above mentioned data shall be able to be displayed on energy calculator.
L. The energy calculator shall consist of 8-digit LC display with unit of measurement and
information panel.
M. The energy calculator shall have a monitoring function for important parameters like power
supply and temperature sensors. Whenever a serious error occurs in the measuring system or
in the installation, a flashing “info” has to appear in the display while the error exists and has to

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 be automatically disappears when the error is corrected. An info logger has to be there to
record these info codes.
N. The energy calculator has to have a terminal facility for data collection of two other meters like
electricity and water meters thru pulse interface.
O. The energy meter shall have a backup memory (EEPROM).
2.5 FLOW SENSOR
A. The flow meter shall be approved according to EN 1434 metrological class 2 & 3 and
Environmental class C.
B. The flow meter shall not contain any mechanical moving parts.
C. The flow meter shall be insensitive to sand particles in the water.
D. The reflectors in the sensor shall be made of stainless steel AISI 304.
E. All the flow sensors with small flow rates of up to 40 m3/h shall be moisture resistant to avoid
condensation on the electronics. All critical electronics has to be situated in the calculator side
and minimal electronics situated at the flow part has to be sealed with silica gel.
F. Flow sensors up to 20mm size shall allow mounting of a temperature sensor and/or
temperature sensor pocket (thermo-well) directly in to the flow sensor body.
G. The Flow sensor IP rating shall be IP65.
H. Flow sensor shall measure minimum 20% over the stated maximum flow (qs).
I. Flow sensor must not show zero values in case of heavy over flow but must be capable of
stating at least 20% over maximum flow (qs) value.
J. Medium temperature range shall be from 20 deg C to 1800 deg C.
2.6 ENERGY METER COMMUNICATION INTERFACES (IF APPLICABLE)
A. The energy calculator shall have space for two independent plug-in communication modules to
be used e.g. for Automatic Meter Reading system and Building Management System
simultaneously.
B. Modules shall accomplish with following serial data transmittal standards; M-Bus, LON
works,RF Radio (Wireless Data), 0/4 - 20 mA output/input.
C. One of the modules shall also have two pulse inputs for connection of e.g. water and electricity
meters, enabling it to collect all consumption data with one single automatic data reading.
1. M-Bus baud rate can be selectable and shall range from 300 to 9600 baud based on
design topography.
2.7 TEMPERATURESENSORS
A. Temperature Sensors shall be direct immersion type or pocket type.
B. Temperature sensors shall be either 4-wire or 2-wire Pt-500 or Pt-100, with a standard
temperature cable length of 1.5m and has to be extended up to 10m based on the requirement.
2.8 STEMTYPETHERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E1;
lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish.
1. 1. Size: 225 mm scale.
2. 2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. 3. Stem: (Manufacturer's standard) mm brass.
4. 4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
5. 5. Calibration: Degrees F.
B. Thermometers - Adjustable Angle: Red- or blue-appearing non-toxic liquid in glass; ASTM E1;
lens front tube, cast aluminum case with enamel finish, cast aluminum adjustable joint with
positive locking device; adjustable 360 degrees in horizontal plane, 180 degrees in vertical
plane.
1. 1. Size: 225 mm scale.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 2. 2. Window: Clear Lexan.
3. 3. Stem: 20 mm NPT brass.
4. 4. Accuracy: 2 percent, per ASTM E77.
5. 5. Calibration: Degrees F.
2.9 DIAL THERMOMETERS
A. Thermometers - Fixed Mounting: Dial type bimetallic actuated; ASTM E1; stainless steel case,
silicone fluid damping, white with black markings and black pointer, hermetically sealed lens,
stainless steel stem.
B. Thermometers with 230 mm Scales: Provide for following (Calibration to be decided basedon
service application on supervising consultant’s approval):
1. Domestic hot water 0 to 110 1
2. Domestic cold water 0 TO 70 1
2.10 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS
A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as required,
and with cap and chain.
B.Flange: 75 mm outside diameter reversible flange, designed to fasten to sheet metal air ducts,
with brass perforated stem.
2.11 THERMOMETER WELLS AND TEST GAUGE CONNECTIONS
A.Temperature sensing wells: Brass or stainless steel.
1. Sufficient length to reach mid-way into pipe, with extension necks where installed in
insulated piping.
2. Install in lines using tees or Thread-O-Lets.
3. Provide test thermometer well adjacent to each point, where a temperature sensing device
is required by control specifications and one well where piping drawing indicate
thermometers.
2.12 TEST PLUGS
A.Test Plug: 6 mm or 13 mm brass fitting and cap for receiving 3 mm outside diameter pressure
or temperature probe with neoprene core for temperatures up to 93 degrees C.
1. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 60 mm diameter
pressure gages, one gage adapters with 3 mm probes, two 25 mm dial thermometers.
2.13 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, UL 393 drawn steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon
tube,rotary brass movement, brass socket, with front recalibration adjustment, black scale on
white background.
B. Pressure gauges: ANSI approved, of type suitable for service intended.
1. Unless code requires otherwise, provide pressure gauges with 150 mm dial, surface or
flush type as required, with white faces, black numerals, black pointers, bronze bourdon
tubes.
2. Pressure gauge characteristics:
3. Case: Steel with brass bourdon tube.
4. Size: 150 mm diameter.
5. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.
a. Scale: Psi and KPa. (The graduation to be decided by the service pressure
application by the supervising consultant)
6. Waterlines: With gauge cock and pulsation dampener.
7. Shatterproof glass.
8. Filter type pressure snubbers at equipment.
2.14 PRESSURE GAUGE TRIM AND FITTINGS: PROVIDE FOR EACH GAUGE:
A. Ball valve at point of connection to equipment.
B. Panel mounted gauges: Second ball valve shut-off at gauge location.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 C. 6 mm hard temper copper tubing from gauge to pipe connection.
D. Identification tag with letters 6 mm high.
2.15 PRESSURE GAGE TAPS
A. Gage Cock: Tee or lever handle, brass for maximum 1034 kPa.
B. Needle Valve: Brass, 6 mm NPT for minimum 1034 kPa.
C. Pulsation Damper: Pressure snubber, brass with 6 mm connections.
D. Syphon: Steel, Schedule 40, 6 mm angle or straight pattern
2.16 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGES:
A. Installed for liquid service, coils, heat exchangers, and as shown on drawings.
B. Piston of Diaphragm Sensor: Stainless steel, 115 mm diameter.
C. Differential pressure gauge assembly: shall consist of downstream pressure gauge, upstream
pressure gauge with local sensor to send signal to Building Management System (BMS), and
one differential pressure gauge.
D. Select range that the schedule or specified differential pressure falls between 25-75 percent of
the range.
2.17 STATIC PRESSURE GAGES
A. A. 90 mm diameter dial in metal case, diaphragm actuated, black figures on white background,
front recalibration adjustment, 2 percent of full scale accuracy.
B. Inclined manometer, red liquid on white background with black figures, front recalibration
adjustment, 3 percent of full scale accuracy.
C. Accessories: Static pressure tips with compression fittings for bulkhead mounting, 6 mm
diameter tubing.
2.18 AIR VENTS
A. Air Vents, Manual:
1. Vents shall prevent any part of system from being air-bound.
2. Pipe discharge of vent to a suitable drainage and ventilation point.
3. Vent valves: 6 mm globe angle valve with XH nipple connecting to pipe.
4. Provide at all trapped high points of cooling and heating water piping systems whether or
not indicated.
B. Air Vent, Automatic
1. Provide shut-off valve ahead of air vents.
2. Stamped brass body and cover. Solid, non-metallic float.
3. Install where indicated in the specifications, in the Bills of Quantities, on the Drawings, or
as necessary.
4. The air vent shall be of cast iron body with stainless steel float. With sufficient venting
capacity to depending on the location of the air vent.
2.19 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
A. Flexible connectors for piping:
1. Size and fittings to suit piping served.
2. Provide at each pump suction and discharge, at pipe connections to chillers and where
indicated.
3. For steel piping: Stainless steel hose and braid with steel and fittings.
4. For copper piping: Bronze hose and braid with steel end fittings.
5. For pumps larger than 20 HP, flexible connections shall be provided with tie-rods.
6. Flexible pipe shall be designed, constructed, and rated in accordance with the applicable
requirements of ASME PUB. REF. N_.1 and ANSI B31.1.
7. Working pressure minimum rating shall be 700 KPa at 150 degrees C.
8. Unit length shall be at least 300 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 5 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 9.
Minimum burst pressure shall be four times working pressure at 150 degrees C. bellows
material shall be AISI Type-316L stainless steel. Braid shall be AISI Type 300 series
stainless steel wire.
10. Welded end connections shall be schedule 80 carbon steel pipe, conforming to ASTM
A106, Grade B or C.
11. Threaded end connections shall be hex-collared schedule 40, type 316L stainless steel,
conforming to ASTM A312.
12. Flanged end connection rating and materials shall conform to specifications for system
primary pressure rating.
2.20 STRAINERS
A. Size 50 mm and under:
1. Threaded brass body for 1200 KPa working pressure. Threaded bronze body for 2070
KPa.
2. Y pattern with 0.8 mm stainless steel perforated screen.
B. Size 65 mm to 100 mm:
1. Flanged iron body for 1200 KPa working pressure.
2. Y pattern with 1.2 mm stainless steel perforated screen.
C. Size 125 mm and large:
1. Flanged iron body for 1200 KPa working pressure.
a. Basket pattern with 3.2 mm stainless steel perforated screen.
2.21 UNIONS AND FLANGES
A. Unions: Of same type and material as piping.
1. Where mechanical victualic type couplings are used, they may serve as unions.
2. Make connections between couplings and flanged equipment with slip-on flanges and a
grooved nipple.
B.
Flanged connections; Where flanged valves are used at equipment connections additional
flange unions will not be required.
1. Make connections to flanged valves and equipment using ANSI welding neck or slip on
type welding flanges with raised face.
2. Flanged cast iron ells may be used for connections between pumps, strainers, check
valves and other flanged equipment.
3. Flange pressure rating must be higher than equipment served or system operating
pressure.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves on inlet and outlet to AWWA M6.
Provide full line size valved bypass with globe valve for liquid service meters.
C. Provide one pressure gage per pump, installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe to gage.
D. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide gage cock to isolate each gage.
E. Provide siphon on gages in steam systems. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance
from insulation.
F. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than
60 mm for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure sockets allow clearance from insulation.
G. Install thermometers in air duct systems on flanges.
H. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to controls systems thermostat, transmitter, or sensor
sockets. Refer to Section 23 0943. Where thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 6 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 pipe mounted thermometers are provided on local panels, duct or pipe mounted thermometers
are not required.
I. Locate duct mounted thermometers minimum 3 m downstream of mixing dampers, coils,
orother devices causing air turbulence.
J. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
K. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate
scale.
L. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating
level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.
M. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.
N. Locate test plugs adjacent thermometers and thermometer sockets.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1006 - 7 PIPING SPECIALTIES

 SECTION 22 1114
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM
PART 1 G E N E R AL
1.1 SECTIONINCLUDES
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing a complete water
supply system as indicated on the drawings and as specified in this section.
B. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold and hot water
piping, fittings, and specialties within the building and up to interface point of existing utilities.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. APPLICABLE STANDARDS:
1. DIN 8076 Pressurized thermoplastic pipelines. Compression type metal fitting.
2. DIN 8077 Polypropylene PPR pipes, dimensions.
3. DIN 8078 Polypropylene PPR pipes, general quality requirements-tests.
4. DIN 16960 welding of thermoplastic materials, principles.
5. DIN 16962 Pipe joint assemblies and fittings for types 1 and 2 polypropylenes
6. DVS 2203 Tests of thermoplastic pipe fittings for welding.
7. DVS 2207 welding of thermoplastic materials, principles.
8. DVS 2208 Machinery and equipment for welding of thermoplastics, welding with hot
9. W328 Realization of drinking water installations inside buildings.
10. DIN EN ISO 15874ff Plastic pipe systems for hot and cold-water installation;
Polypropylene
11. SASO 1738 / 1739. Standard for Polypropylene PPR pipes.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. Product and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's product and maintenance data for the
items specified in this section.
C.Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings for the water distribution
piping.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer a written guarantee covering the satisfactory
operation of the plumbing installation in all its parts for a period of one (1) year after date of
acceptance. During this period, the Contractor shall repair or replace any defective work and
pay for any repair or replacement costs.
1.5 QUALITY AS S UR AN CE
A. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)
- 2012 Edition, BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code and the local utility authority.

PART 2 P R O D U C T S
2.1 PIPES ANDFITTINGS
A. The material of Hot and Coldwater Pipe shall be PPR- Polypropylene.
B. The pipe shall be PN20, SDR-6. The pipe shall comply with DIN 8077 / 8078, SASO 1738 /
1739.
C. The injection molded fittings shall be PN 20, SDR-6. The fitting shall comply with the DIN
16962,SASO-ISO15874-3
D. The injection molded brass reinforced fittings shall be to PN 20, SDR-6. The fitting shall comply
with the DIN 16962, SASO-ISO 15874-3
E. The pipe shall withstand to hot water 95Deg C, 6.2 bar for every restart of 5 years. Hot water 80
Deg C for every restart of 25 years

1009DF/ MISHRIFA VILLA 22 1114 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

 F. The product density shall be 0.89 to 0.91 gm/cc
1. The pipe shall be chemically stable and resistant to the hot water and potable water
services.
2.2 VALVES
A. Valves shall be as specified in Section 220525 - VALVES.
2.3 PIPINGSPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated
for 250 psi tested and certified in accordance with PDI WH-201.
B. Flexible Connectors: Stainless steel bellows with a woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing
protective jacket; rated for 150 psig water working pressure, 250oF operating temperature and
suitable for up to maximum 19 mm misalignment. Connectors shall be a minimum of 300 mm
long and have threaded or flanged ends; sweat ends are not acceptable.
C. Hose Bibbs: Bronze body with integrated vacuum breaker, renewable composition disc, tee
handle, 19 mm NPT inlet, 19 mm hose outlet.
D. Backflow Preventers: Reduced pressure principle assembly consisting of shut-off valves on
inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks, and pressure-
differential relief valve located between two positive seating check valves, and comply with
ASSE1013.
E. Automatic Air Vent: Automatic air vent with stainless steel check valve or float shall be of
chromed brass bodywith following features:
1. Automatic operation
2. Quick venting design and positive shut-off check
3. Suitable for cold and hot water
4. Easily maintained
5. Simpletwo piece construction
6. Sizes shall be as shown on drawings.
2.4 PIPEINSULATION
A. Insulation of hot water pipes shall be as per requirements of MECHANICAL INSULATION
23 0713
2.5 PIPE HANGERS ANDSUPPORTS
A. Refer to Section 23 0528 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.
2.6 CLEANING ANDDISINFECTION:
A. Refer to Section 22 0593 - FLUSHING, CLEANING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPING SYSTEMS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WATERSERVICE
A. Water service shall be extended from valved outlets to main at point of tie-in. All valves, meter,
truck filling point and such other components as shown shall be installed to provide a complete
water supply system.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. See Section 23 0500- Basic Pipe and Pipe fittings for general piping installation instructions.
Refer to the drawings for further details.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has
been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer. Expose all such work for testing that has
been covered or concealed before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer.
Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection is to be made. Prepare
inspection and test reports for the Engineer's review.

1009DF/ MISHRIFA VILLA 22 1114 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

 B. Testing: Test water supply and distribution piping, and water tank(s) prior to covering or
concealment. The entire piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of one and a-
half (1-1/2) times the expected operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the
piping system materials, and proven tight at this pressure. Isolate the test source and allow to
stand for a period of 4 hours. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for
each test, complete with diagram of portion of the system tested.
C. Defective Work: Leaks and loss of pressure observed during testing constitute defects that
must be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Repair all leaks and defects with new
materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
D. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action, and submit to the Engineer for
review and approval.
3.4 CLEANING ANDDISINFECTION
A. Clean and disinfect water supply and distribution piping, and water tank(s) as follows:
B.Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been
altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure
described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:
1. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at the
points of outlet.
2. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts
per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for
24 hours.
3. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine
solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand
for 3 hours.
4. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until
chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
5. Submit water samples in sterile bottles, taken in presence of the Engineer, to the
Independent Testing Laboratory for biological examination. Repeat the procedure if the
biological examination made by the Independent Testing Laboratory shows evidence of
contamination.
6. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities, and submit to the Engineer for
review and approval.
3.5 COORDINATIONWITH EXISTINGUTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit as-built utilities drawings in reproducible form to the
Engineer. All revisions, omissions, and demolition or additions to the various piping installations
shall be marked down in red pencil.
B. The contractor shall submit the demolition and re-routing plan of the existing water supply
system to the client for approval before commencement of the work.
ENDOF SECTION

1009DF/ MISHRIFA VILLA 22 1114 - 3 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM

 SECTION 22 1122
PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Work under this Section shall include all labor, materials, and equipment required to
furnish and install the pumps and accessories in the location and quantities shown on
Drawings and as specified.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. HI - Hydraulic Institute Standards
1. Data Book - Hydraulic Institute for Engineering.
B. ASPE - American Society of Plumbing Engineers
1. Data Book - Fundamentals of Plumbing Design, Volume 1 (1983-84), Chapter 11
"Pumps".
C. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
1. Handbook - 1983 Equipment Volume, Chapter 31 "Centrifugal Pumps".
D. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1. UL 778 Motor Operated Water Pumps.
E. ASTM - American Society of Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A 36 Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings.
3. ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc
Coated (Galvanized), Welded and Seamless.
4. ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality.
5. ASTM A 276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.
6. ASTM A 297 Steel Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-Nickel, Heat-
Resistant, for General Applications.
7. ASTM A 536 Ductile Iron Castings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up
instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection
points clearly indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of
components.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to
plumbing pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and
portions to be field-installed.
E. Certificate of Compliance.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of pump, control, and
accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide.
1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver pumps, hardware and accessories in manufacturers’ original new, protective
packing.
B. Handle pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and
scoring. Do not install damaged pumps or components; replace with new.
C. Store pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,
construction debris, and physical damage.
D. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading
plumbing pumps, and moving them to final location.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 1 PUMPS

1.5 WARRANTY
A. All pumping assemblies and components including pumps, motors, controls, etc. shall be
guaranteed by the system manufacturer in writing for a period of minimum 2 years from
date of substantial completion against defective materials and workmanship, including
motor burn-out.
B.Water pressure booster system as a whole shall be also guaranteed in writing by the
manufacturer for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion against any
defects in design, materials, construction or workmanship.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pumps with
characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 5 years, and shall be subject to approval of the
Engineer.
B. Design, manufacture and install pumps in accordance with HI and UL Standards.
C. Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by UL and comply
with NEMA Standards.
D. Provide pumps whose performance, under indicated operating conditions, are certified by
the pump manufacturer.
E. Single Source Responsibility: All the components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.
1.7 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver all hardware in manufacturer original protective packing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 21 3000 - Fire Pumps for more detailed information for fire pumps.
B. Statistically and dynamically balance rotating parts.
C. Construction shall permit complete servicing without breaking piping or motor connections.
D. Pumps shall operate at maximum speed of 1750 r/min unless specified otherwise.
E. Pump connections shall be flanged.
F. Pumps shall be provided with pressure gauges at suction and discharge sides.
G. Pumps shall be selected to operate with non-over loading characteristics.
H. The characteristic curve of a centrifugal pump shall be stable, the head shall increase with
decrease in delivery until maximum head reached at zero flow which shall not exceed the
discharge pressure at rated duty by more than 25%.
2.2 SUBMERSIBLE DRAINAGE PUMPS
A. Furnish and install pumps with sealing flanges, guides, mounting plates, supports, lifting
chains and hooks, switches, control boxes, discharge piping, etc. as may be required for
complete and operating systems.
B. Duplex submersible drainage pumps shall be of type and capacity as shown on the
drawings.
C. A separate mounting plate shall be furnished with each pump, including guide rack support
and discharge elbow. All parts shall be coated with tar base epoxy paint.
D. Provide a double door access frame of fabricated cast iron coated inside and outside with
tar base epoxy paint. Frame shall support guide rails and junction box. Covers shall be
provided with lifting handle and hold-open latch. Pump discharge shall be through the
frame.
E. Provide and install control panel with NEMA 3 weatherproof enclosure for final connection
by electrical contractor. A circuit breaker and magnetic starter shall be provided for each
pump along with alternating relay, interlock relay, switches, run lights, alarm bell, NEMA 4
junction with mounting bracket.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 2 PUMPS

 F.Provide and install sealed float type mercury switches. Float switches shall control:1.
Pump(s)On - 2. Pump(s) Off - 3. High water alarm.
2.3 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS (POTABLE AND NON-POTABLE WATER)
A. Furnish and install a factory-fabricated and tested automatic water pressure booster system
consisting of diaphragm type pressure tank, centrifugal pumps, power and control panels,
instrumentation and operation. Package type booster pumping system shall be of type
capacity as shown on the drawings. Package type booster pumping systems shall consist of
one duty/ 1 or 2 of lag systems as mentioned in drawings and shall be installed where
shown on the drawings.
B. Pumps: Provide centrifugal, multi stage, inline-suction vertical type pumps with mechanical
shaft seals. Mount each pump on vibration isolator and connect them with reinforced
flexible pipe connection on discharge line. Provide temperature probe and eccentric purge
valve immediately upstream of each PRV. Pump capacities shall be shown on the
drawings.
C. Motors: Lead and lag pumps shall be driven by a drip-proof shaft motor, capacity and power
ratings as shown on the drawings. Each pump motor shall meet NEMA standards and
operate within the available service factor at any point on the pump capacity-head curve.
D. Pressure Tank: Provide factory-recharged diaphragm type pressure tank of required size
with replaceable flexible membrane. Construct in accordance with ASME Code and provide
ASME stamp of pressure as indicated in drawings.
E. Method of Operation: The lead pump operates. When the demand exceeds the capacity of
the lead pump, the second pump starts automatically and when the demand exceeds the
capacity of both pumps, (in case of 3 pumps system where required, when the demand
exceeds the capacity of two pumps, the third pump will start automatically). All pumps shall
continue to operate until demand decreases to a point within the capacity of the lead pump.
The controls are programmed to alternate the 1-lead pump every 24 hours to equalize each
pump operating time.
F. Controls
1. Power and Control Panel: Furnish a single enclosure power and control panel, NEMA
1, hinged door, lockable for booster pump system. Enclosure shall be steel and
furnished with an oven-baked enamel. The panel shall include for each pump a fused
disconnect switch with external operating handle, starter with 3-leg overload
protection, running light and multiple position motor control switch and discharge
pressure gauge. It shall also house all control components and include 380 volt control
transformer with control power switch, indicating lights, including time relays, audio-
visual alarm system, suction pressure gauge and other necessary controls. All of the
above shall be factory internally pre-wired and tested in accordance with the
provisions of the National Electrical Code. Panel shall have the UL listings or
equivalent mark for industrial control panels.
2. Control panels shall incorporate hand-off-automatic selector switches, magnetic
starters with thermal overload protectors on all legs, circuit breakers, control
transformer, necessary relays and a green pilot light for each motor. An automatic
alternator changes main pump sequence every 24 hours to equalize pump operating
time.
3. Pressure and temperature sensing control package shall include a thermal sensing
device. If the pump casing temperature rises to an undesirable level during very low
flows, this device activates a purge valve to relieve the system of heated water.
4. Control includes or in combination thereof:
a. Lead Pump Failure: Starts lag pump upon loss of discharge pressure and sounds
optional alarm and/or lights indicator light on panel. Manual reset.
b. Low Suction Pressure Shut-Off: Stops all pumps upon loss of suction pressure.
Indicator light panel. Optional audible alarm. Manual reset.
c. High System Pressure Shut-Off: Instantaneously shuts off pump when pressure in
system reaches predetermined point. Indicator light on panel. Manual reset.
d. No flow shut-off to turn off all pumps at no flow condition. Automatically turns lead
pump back on when system pressure drops a minimum of 10 psi and maintains
operation for a minimum of 2 minutes.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 3 PUMPS

 e. Low liquid level shut-off to shut-off all pumps at low level in pump suction
reservoir, with weatherproof level switch.
G. Factory Pre-Fabrication
1. The entire booster system shall be factory pre-fabricated on a common structural steel
stand with all interconnecting piping and wiring completed and operationally tested
prior to shipment. Complete package shall include isolation valves on the suction and
discharge of each pump. Galvanized steel suction and discharge pipe manifolds, as
well as copper tubing with shut-off cocks for gauges and pressure switches, will be
furnished assembled. The only field connections required will be the system suction
and discharge and power connection at the control panel.
2. All like parts of same type pumps fabricated by the same manufacturer shall be
interchangeable.
3. Whenever possible, the pump shall be manufactured such that it shall be possible to
disassemble the rotor assembly with minimum disassembly of other parts such as
suction and discharge nozzles, bearing supports, etc., being left in place.
4. All castings shall be clean without defect. Casting repairs shall be done only after
agreement is reached between the Consultant and the Contractor.
5. All foundry and machine work shall be in accordance with good practice for the class
of work involved.
6. All parts shall conform to the required dimensions and shall be free from defects that
will prevent proper functioning of the pump.
7. Assembly of parts shall be well fitted and smoothly operating.
8. All internal parts, such as impeller, requiring surface treatment shall be sprayed with
PVC epoxy primer in accordance with pump manufacturer's standard practice.
9. Pump sets shall be assembled as completely as possible as a unit including base
plate, driver, couplings and guards, lubrication, seal flush, etc., as the requirement
allows. Seal flush systems shall be equipped with appropriate controls-strainers and
filters as recommended by the manufacturer.
10. Pump exterior shall be sprayed with PVC epoxy primer and shall be painted to meet
specific application requirements in accordance with pump manufacturer's standard
practice.
2.4 FIRE PUMPS
A. Horizontal Base Mounted Pumps
1. Type: UL 448 and UL 778 horizontal shaft, single stage, double suction, direct
connected, horizontally split casing, for 250 psig (1 720 kPa) maximum working
pressure.
2. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing
wearing rings, seal flush connection, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
3. Impellers: Bronze double suction fully enclosed, balanced and keyed to shaft.
4. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball bearings, replaceable without opening casing.
5. Shaft: Alloy steel with replaceable bronze shaft sleeve.
6. Seals: Packing gland with minimum four rings graphite impregnated packing and
bronze lantern rings, 230 degrees F (110 degrees C) maximum continuous operating
temperature.
7. Drive: Flexible coupling with coupling guard.
8. Baseplate: Cast iron (or fabricated steel) with integral drain rim.
9. Performance: See Design Drawings for Fire Pump Capacity and Ratings.
B. Fire Pump Accessories
1. Eccentric suction reducer and OS&Y gate or butterfly valve on suction side of pump.
a. Concentric increaser and check valve in pump discharge and OS&Y gate or
butterfly valve on system side of check valve.
b. Fire pump bypass fitted with OS&Y gate or butterfly valves and check valve.
c. Main relief valve, UL 1478, and open type waste cone.
d. Suction pressure gage, 4 1/2-inch (110 mm) diameter dial with snubbed,
valve cock and lever handle.
e. Discharge pressure gage mounted on board attached to pump, with snubber,
valve cock and lever handle.
f. Casing 3/4 inch (20 mm) relief valve.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 4 PUMPS

 g. Float operated one inch (25 mm) automatic air release valve.
h. Hose valve manifold with 2 1/2 inch (65 mm) hose gate valves with caps and
chains.
i. Flow metering system for closed loop testing.
C. Electric Motor Drive
1. Motor: Squirrel cage induction type; in open drip proof NEMA MG-1 enclosure, 1750
rpm.
2. Controller: Limited service type with auto-transformer primary resistor reduced
voltage, part winding across-the-line starter, in ANSI/NEMA 250 enclosure, including
the following:
a. Disconnect Switch: Externally operable, quick break type.
b. Circuit Breaker: Trips in each phase calibrated at least to 300% of the motor full-
load current, 10,000 amperes interrupting capacity.
c. Motor Starter: Energized automatically through pressure switch or manually by
externally operable handle.
d. Pressure Switch:
e. Running Period Timer: Keeps motor in operation when started automatically, for
a minimum of seven minutes.
f. Pilot Lamp: Indicates circuit breaker closed and power available.
g. Ammeter test link and voltmeter test studs.
h. Alarm Relay: Energizes alarm to indicate circuit breaker open or power failure.
i. Remote start switch relay.
j. Manual Selector Station: On enclosure marked "Automatic" and "Non-
Automatic."
D. Fire Pumps Controller
1. Controller shall be across-the-line type designed in accordance with NFPA/FM.
2. The controller shall start the fire pump automatically on a pressure drop in the fire
protection system and continue to run until shut down manually.
3. The starter unit shall be housed in a dust and damp protecting sheet steel enclosure
with hinged lockable front access door and removable undrilled gland plates.
4. Mounted on the panel shall be the following:
a. Overriding manual start trip lever to provide emergency start independent of all
other circuitry.
b. Single pole normally open ‘stop’ push button.
c. Isolating handle with provision for padlocking in the ‘on’ position.
d. Spring charge handle for manually compressing the circuit breaker main spring.
e. Moving iron ammeters to give indication of current.
f. Lamps to provide visual indication of mains supply healthy.
1) Auto-start ready.
2) Pump on demand.
3) Pump running.
g. Lamp test push button.
h. Trip indicator lamps.
i. Voltmeter and selector for mains testing.
5. Mounted inside the panel shall be the following:
a. Triple pole air circuit breakers to provide automatic and manual starting of the
motor, and locked rotor and instantaneous short circuit protection.
b. Door interlocking triple pole air circuit breaker.
c. Main neutral link.
d. Relays for monitoring main power supply.
e. HRC fuses to protect indicator and relay circuits.
f. Fused terminals for voltmeter testing.
g. Set of main power terminals.
h. Set of control and alarm terminals.
i. Pressure switches actuated by fall in pressure in the fire protection system.
E. Diesel Engine Drive

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 5 PUMPS

 1. Diesel Engine: Comply with requirements of NFPA 37 and UL 1247; automatic
operation with over speed/over crank switch and drive, two contactor switches, low oil
pressure and high-water temperature warning switches, and fuel shut-off solenoid,
with wiring terminating in junction box.
2. Include following engine accessories:
a. Stub shaft.
b. Oil bath air cleaner.
c. Water cooled exhaust manifold.
d. Heat exchanger.
e. Mechanical speed governor.
f. Fuel filter.
g. Lube oil filter and by-pass valve.
h. Lube oil cooler and relief valve.
i. Fuel pump.
j. Instrument panel with tachometer, hour meter, oil pressure gauge, water
temperature gauge, ammeter, hand speed control and start switch.
k. Starting system including generator/alternator, starting motor and voltage
regulator.
l. Exhaust silencer, residential type.
m. Flexible exhaust tubing, 600 mm long.
3. Cooling water system: Closed system with cooling water supply to heat exchanger
from fire pump discharge. Include four manual shut-off valves (including by-pass line),
two strainers, pressure regulating valve, automatic solenoid valve and pressure gage.
4. Storage batteries: Dual lead acid batteries with cables and battery racks.
5. Fuel system: Capacity (As indicated on Drawings) L above ground storage tank, fill
pipe and cap, manual shut-off valve, flame arrestor, oil level gage, braided bronze
flexible connectors, seamless type L copper tubing with flared joints. Fill tank at
completion.
6. Engine Controller: Automatic; drive enclosed in floor mounted 1.90 mm steel housing,
UL listed and labeled.
a. Controller: Function to automatically start fire pump from water pressure control
switch or test switch.
b. Stop push button: To manually stop engine.
c. Automatic conditions: Controller shall alternate batteries automatically on each 15
second cranking cycle. Alarm if engine not started after six attempts.
d. Battery charger: Dual, built-in, to recharge both batteries within 24 hour period,
with Automatic overload protection (current limiting), individual voltmeters and
ammeters for each battery.
e. Individual pilot lights and common alarm bell for:
1) Charger 1 Failure.
2) Charger 2 Failure.
3) Battery 1 Failure.
4) Battery 2 Failure.
5) AC Power On.
6) Exercise Cycle.
7) High Engine Jacket Water Temperature.
8) Low Engine Oil Pressure.
9) Engine Failure to Start Automatically.
10) Over speeds Shutdown.
11) Engine Run.
12) Main Switch in Auto.
13) Low Fuel Level.
14) Low Water Reservoir Level.
15) Water Reservoir Empty.
16) Low Pump Room Temperature.
17) Low Suction Temperature.
18) Flow Meter On.
19) Relief Valve Open.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 6 PUMPS

 f. Power: 125 volt, single phase, 60 Hz.
F. Pressure Booster (Jockey) Pump
1. General: Jockey pump shall be UL Listed, FM approved, type and capacity as shown
on the drawings. Motor shall be 3 phase, 60 Hertz motor suitable for operation on 380
volts service. The pump shall be peripheral turbine type and shall be furnished with 38
mm threaded discharge outlet.
2. Jockey Pump Control: To include a combination magnetic, across-the-line type starter
with fused disconnect switch, thermal over-current protection and a hand-off-automatic
selector switch in the enclosure. Control cubicle shall incorporate an adjustable
pressure switch with gauge clock.
3. Pressure Gauge: Provide a 115 mm dial brass case pressure gauge on discharge pipe
near jockey pump.
4. Relief Valve: Install a 19 mm relief valve on discharge line of jockey pump to relieve
excess pressure to floor drains.
G. HVAC Pumps
1. Pump Type
a. HVAC pumps shall be of centrifugal, single stage, double suction, horizontally
mounted split case design with electric motor drive. The volute of the pump shall
be supplied with plugged vent, drain and gauge tapping.
b. Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast-iron, suitable for 7 bar working pressure.
Flanges shall be 7 bar ANSI.
c. Capacities and quantities of pumps are as shown on the drawings.
d. Head and flow shall be delivered with shut-off head not more than 25 percent
over rated head.
2. Impeller
a. The impeller shall be of the enclosed double-suction type in bronze construction
and shall be dynamically balanced for quiet operation. The impeller shall be
keyed to the shaft and secured with a slightly press and suitable lock-nut
arrangement.
3. Mechanical Seal
a. Internally-flushed seals shall be mechanical type with ceramic seal on carbon,
suitable for continuous operation at working pressure of 1050 kPa and
temperature of 107 °C. The seals shall be capable of being serviced without
disconnecting the pump from piping.
4. Bearings
a. The pump bearings shall be the re - greaseable cam lock ball bearing type with
provision for purging or flushing through the bearing surface, and capable of
being inspected by removing the bearing covers. The shaft shall be of 18/8
stainless steel on standard mechanical seal models.
5. Couplers
a. A flexible, center drop-out, spacer type coupler, capable of absorbing torsion
vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor. Coupler shall be
shielded by a Coupler Guard securely fastened to the base.
6. Electric Motor
a. The motor shall be heavy duty for industrial use, shall meet NEMA specifications
and shall be of the size to meet final head and flow of approved calculation and
voltage called for on the plans. The motor shall be furnished with re-greaseable
ball bearings adequate for the maximum load for which the motor is designed.
Pump and motor shall be factory mounted and aligned, and shall be realigned by
Contractor after installation prior to start up.
7. Pump Base
a. The pump and motor shall be mounted on a common base plate of heavy
structural steel design and securely welded cross members and open grouting
area. The pump shall be factory tested before shipment.
b. Provide with raised lip for water drainage and threaded drain tapping.
c. Provide holes for grouting.
d. Provide drain pipe to floor drain.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 7 PUMPS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine area and conditions under which pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with
the work until unsatisfactory conditions have corrected in manner acceptable to the
Engineer.
B. Installation shall be done in accordance with NFPA 20, the manufacturer's written
instructions, and as specified herein.
C. Provide access around the pumps for service as indicated or required, but in no case less
than that recommended by the manufacturer.
D. Unless indicated otherwise, install pumps on minimum of 100 mm high concrete base equal
or greater than 3 times total weight of pumps and motors, with anchor bolts poured in place.
E. Piping Connection: Refer to the relevant Sections of Division 15 - MECHANICAL. Provide
ring, valves, gauges, accessories, supports and flexible connection as shown on the
drawings or as required.
F. Electrical Wiring: Refer to the relevant sections of ELECTRICAL for materials and
installation. Install electrical devices furnished by the manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted.
3.2 SHOP TESTING
A. Pump performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with Hydraulic Institute test
codes as described in HI E35.01, E37.01 and E39.01. In addition, each pump shall be
tested at five points of operation from shut-off head to run-out condition, including the
guaranteed pump's performance point.
B. All pumps shall be hydrostatically tested for leaks at 1.5 times the design pressure. There
shall be no leakage during the one hour test period.
C. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's test certificates, including test data to show that
pump meets specifications.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Field performance test of all pumps shall be witnessed by the Engineer.
B. Field testing shall be in accordance with following requirements:
1. All pumps, except for fire pumps, shall be tested in accordance with ANSI B73.1 and
ANSI B73.2.
2. Fire pumps shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 20.
3. All tests shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts or motors and pumps within
recommended tolerances by manufacturer.
B. Start-Up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint.
END OF SECTION

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1122 - 8 PUMPS

 SECTION 22 1123
DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. In-line, seal less centrifugal pumps.
2. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.
3. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
4. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 22 Section "Domestic-Water Packaged Booster Pumps" for booster systems.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50
V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction,
rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B.Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor,
seal less, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with
motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and
motor shaft horizontal.
2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections.
3. Impeller: Plastic.
4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.
C.Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on Drawings.
1. Capacity: (L/s).
2. Total Dynamic Head: (kPa).
3. Minimum Working Pressure: (kPa).
4. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: (104 deg C).
5. Inlet and Outlet Size: (DN).
6. Pump Speed: (rpm).
7. Pump Control: Pressure switch.
8. Motor Horsepower:
22 1123 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA
 9. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated.
a. Volts:
b. Phases:
c. Hertz:
d. Full-Load Amperes:
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity:
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: (A).
2.2 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, SEPARATELY COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, separately coupled,
overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shafts
mounted horizontal.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with
NPS 2 (DN 50) pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) pipe connections.
2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Coupling: Flexible.
5. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and rubber bellows and gasket.
6. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.
7. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment.
C. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly
mounted to pump casing.
D. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on Drawings.
1. Capacity: (L/s).
2. Total Dynamic Head: (kPa).
3. Casing Material: Bronze.
4. Impeller Material: ASTM B 584, cast bronze or stainless steel.
5. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
6. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
7. Inlet and Outlet Size: (DN).
8. Pump Speed: rpm.
9. Pump Control: Pressure switch.
10. Motor Horsepower:
11. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated.
a. Volts: 240.
b. Phases: Three.
c. Hertz: 60.
d. Full-Load Amperes:
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity:
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: (A).
2.3 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled,
overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft
mounted horizontal.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with
NPS 2 (DN 50) pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2
(DN 65) pipe connections.
2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.
4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and rubber bellows and gasket.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1123 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

 5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.
6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment.
C. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and resiliently or rigidly
mounted to pump casing.
D. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on Drawings.
1. Capacity: (L/s).
2. Total Dynamic Head: (kPa).
3. Casing Material: Bronze.
4. Impeller Material: ASTM B 584, cast bronze or stainless steel.
5. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
6. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
7. Inlet and Outlet Size: (DN).
8. Pump Control: Pressure switch.
9. Pump Speed: rpm.
10. Motor Horsepower:
11. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated.
a. Volts: 240.
b. Phases: Three.
c. Hertz: 60.
d. Full-Load Amperes:
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity:
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: (A).
2.4 VERTICALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CLOSE-COUPLED CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, close-coupled,
overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft
mounted vertical.
B. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with wear rings and threaded companion-flange
connections for pumps with NPS 2 (DN 50) pipe connections and flanged connections
for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) pipe connections. Include pump manufacturer's
base attachment for mounting pump on concrete base.
2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.
3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Stainless-steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.
4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic
seat, and rubber bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor
and seal.
5. Bearings: Oil-lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.
6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible or rigid type if pump is provided with coupling.
C. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated ball bearings; and rigidly mounted to pump
casing.
D. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on Drawings.
1. Capacity: (L/s).
2. Total Dynamic Head: (kPa).
3. Casing Material: Bronze.
4. Impeller Material: ASTM B 584, cast bronze or stainless steel.
5. Minimum Operating Pressure: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
6. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 225 deg F (107 deg C).
7. Inlet and Outlet Size: (DN).
8. Pump Control: Pressure switch.
9. Pump Speed: rpm.
10. Motor Horsepower:
11. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated.
a. Volts: 240.
b. Phases: Three.
c. Hertz: 60.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1123 - 3 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

 d. Full-Load Amperes:
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity:
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: (A).
2.5 MOTORS
A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and
efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven
load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical
devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
2.6 CONTROLS
A. Pressure Switches: Electric, adjustable for control of water-supply pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion pressure sensor, for installation in piping.
2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
3. Operation of Pump: On or off.
4. Transformer: Provide if required.
5. Power Requirement: 24 V, ac.
6. Settings: Start pump at (As indicated) and stop pump at (As indicated).
B.
Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.
2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F (18 to 93 deg C).
3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.
4. Operation of Pump: On or off.
5. Transformer: Provide if required.
6. Power Requirement: 24 V, ac.
7. Settings: Start pump at 110 deg F (43 deg C) and stop pump at 125 deg F (52 deg
C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of
connections before pump installation.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Comply with HI 1.4.
B. Install in-line, seal less centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled and close-coupled centrifugal
pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.
D. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft vertical.
E. Pump Mounting: Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with
cast-iron base mounted on concrete base using elastomeric mounts. Comply with
requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
F. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size
required to support pump weight.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1123 - 4 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22
Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
Fabricate brackets or supports as required.
2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 22 Section
"Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
G. Install pressure switches in water supply piping.
H. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
I. Install timers on wall in engineer's office.
J. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage tanks.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles.
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the
following pumps:
a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.
b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
c. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.
d. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping."
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and
throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as
connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22
Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for
strainers specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
3. Install pressure gage and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gage and
snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where
provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around
pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers specified in
Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.
E. Connect pressure switches, and timers to pumps that they control.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Set pressure switches, and time-delay relays for automatic starting and stopping
operation of pumps.
5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is
free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate
until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
7. Start motor.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1123 - 5 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

 8. Open discharge valve slowly.
9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.
10. Adjust timer settings.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1213 - 6 FRP ROOF-MOUNTED

POTABLE WATER STORAGE
TANK
 SECTION 22 1424

DRAINAGE, STORM AND VENT SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Work under this Section consists of furnishing and installing a complete drainage system
including soil, waste, surface drainage, condensate drainage, storm and vent system up to the
interface point as indicated on Drawings and as specified section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM D 2564 Solvent Cement for Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
2. ASTM D 2665 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and
3. ASTM D 2729 Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
4. ASTM D 3138 Solvent Cements for Transition Joints Between
5. ASTM D 3311 Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) Plastic Fittings Patterns.
B. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
1. ANSIA112.21.1M Floor Drains.
2. ANSI A112.21.2 Roof Drains.
C. Trade Association Publications
1. ASPE Data Book, 1983-84 Volume I, Fundamentals of Plumbing Design, Chapter 1
2. ASSE Plumbing Dictionary - Standard 1018 0 Performance Requirements for Trap
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. Product and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's product and maintenance data for the
items specified herein.
C.Coordination Drawings: Prepare and submit coordination drawings for the soil, waste, drainage
and vent piping.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC)
- 2012 Edition, BOCA Basic National Plumbing Code and SASO standard 14 & 15.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Pipes and fittings for drainage (soil, waste, and storm) condensate drain lines shall be
unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (uPVC), Class 4, vent pipe uPVC Class 4 conforming to SASO
14 and 15. Polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pipes jointing system shall be welded using solvent
cement conforming to ASTM D 2564. Pipe sizes shall be as shown on the drawings.
B. Force main will be UPVC class (5)
2.2 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flashing Flanges and Vent Flashing Sleeves: Manufacturer's standard products as approved
by the Engineer.
2.3 DRAINS
A. Floor drains
1. Toilet floor drain (FD)
a. PVC floor drain with adjustable chrome plated cover
2. Heavy duty floor drain
a. ABS type size shown on design drawings, with protector top and polished bronze
strainer head with secured, vandal-proof square hold grate.
3. Parking area floor drain (FD)

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1424 - 1 DRAINAGE, STORM AND VENT

SYSTEM
 a. Epoxy coated cast iron body, heavy duty casketed drain support flange, with
heavy duty slotted grate.
4. Parking channel grating
a. Epoxy coated Cast iron extra heavy duty grating in fabricated steel frame with anchor
tabs.
5. Generator room Drain
a. Cast iron body with bottom outlet, seepage pan, flashing clamp. Cast iron medium
duty slotted grate with sediment bucket.
6. Battery Room Drain
a. Cast iron body with bottom outlet, seepage pan, flashing clamp. Cast iron medium
duty slotted grate with sediment bucket.
B. Roof Drains: Cast iron body, combined flashing collar and gravel stop, cast iron dome, deep
sump body.
C. Trench Drain and Grating: Shall be cast iron with hinged grate and perforated sediment bucket.
Trench drain grating shall be of cast iron, medium duty; size shall be as shown on the drawings.
2.4 AUTOMATIC AIR ADMITTANCE VALVES
A. Automatic air admittance valves shall be of un-plasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC), schedule
40 or equivalent. Sizes shall be as required.
2.5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Refer to Section 230528 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS.
2.6 TRAPS
A. Traps: Cast brass, cast iron and/or galvanized steel, one piece pattern, 80 mm minimum seal.
1. Same material and coating and/or finish as piping system into which they are installed.
2. Provide trap cleanouts in all accessible trap locations.
B. Traps for fixtures: Cast brass "P" traps with 50 mm minimum seal and gasketed cleanout plugs
made of machined bar stock.
C. Traps for floor drains with outlet buried: heavy-cast iron P traps, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Each plumbing fixture shall be separately trapped by a water seal trap placed as close as
possible to the fixture outlet, but not more than 600 mm horizontal developed length from the
outlet of the fixture.
E. Exceptions to the separate trapping requirements are as follows:
1. Fixtures having integral traps.
2. A combination plumbing fixture may be installed on one trap provided one compartment is
not more than 150 mm deeper than the other and the waste outlets are not more than 750
mm apart, and provided the trap is centrally located between the waste outlets.
3. One trap may be installed for a three compartment lavatories or urinals immediately
adjacent to each other in the same room, provides the trap is centrally located between
the three sections.
F. Fixture trap sizes- fixture trap sizes (nominal diameter) shall be sufficient to drain the fixture
rapidly and in no case less than the sizes given in table below. No trap shall be larger than the
drainage pipe into which it discharges.
1. Fixture Trap size (mm)
a. Lavatory 42
b. Water closet(waste outlet) 110
c. Eastern water closet 110
G. All traps shall be accessible and provided with an adequate facility for cleaning. Provide traps
which must be capable of being readily removed.
H. Depth of Seals
1. Traps with outlets for pipes up to and including 50 mm. size should have a minimum water
seal of 75 mm.
2. Traps with outlets for pipes over 50mm.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1424 - 2 DRAINAGE, STORM AND VENT

SYSTEM
 a. Size should have a minimum water seal of 50mm.
3. Traps used on appliances with a trailing waste discharge and installed on ground floors
and discharging to an external gully have a reduced water seal of not less than 40 mm.
2.7 GULLY TRAP
A. The Gully Trap Chambers shall consist of brick masonry chambers suitable for the specified size
of the Gully Traps. The traps shall be glazed stoneware of approved make. Construction of Gully
Trap Chambers shall consist of the following :
1. Excavation and refilling after construction of chamber.
2. 1:3:6 PCC bed concrete required for embedding the Trap.
3. 230mm thick Brick Masonry in C.M. 1:6.
4. 20mm thick W.P plaster from inside and smooth from outside in cm. 1:6 trowell smooth by
cement floating on all surfaces.
5. PCC 1:3:6 coping 100mm thick for having cast iron cover frame. (Dimensions shall suit
the brickwork).
6. Cast iron frame and cover size fixed in coping & painted in 3 coats of anti-corrosive
bitumastic paint.
7. All the work necessary for satisfactory working of the same.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)
A. See execution part in section no. 220593, 221005 and 221006
Refer to the drawings for further details.
3.3 INTERIORDRAINAGE SYSTEM
A. The entire system shall be carefully inspected for damaged materials.
B. Piping shall run as direct as possible making changes in direction with long sweeps, 1/8 or 1/16
bends.
C. Connections shall be made to horizontal lines with Y's and 1/8 bends.
D. Horizontal lines shall be graded not less than 1% for piping 101 mm and larger, and not less
than 2% per for piping 76 mm and smaller.
E. Rough fixture connections and open ends of pipe shall be plugged and capped during
construction using approved test plugs.
F. Open ends of pipe shall be plugged when work is stopped.
G. Location of floor drains for equipment furnished are diagrammatic. Equipment size and final
location shall be verified prior to installation of roughing for floor drains.
H. Roof leader expansion joints shall be installed on all roof leaders immediately below drain.
I. All drip lines or drain tube shall extend to the nearest floor drain or service sink. This shall
include but shall not be limited to the discharge from pressure and temperature relief valves,
automatic air vents, fan coil unit drains, and vent connections on backflow preventers.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPINGSPECIALTIES
A. Cleanouts
1. Cleanouts shall be installed allowing sufficient clearance behind cleanout plugs to facilitate
use of cleaning tools.
2. Cleanouts shall be located on bases of each soil and waste stacks, change of direction of
piping greater than 45 degrees on all horizontal runs, and intervals on all horizontal runs
where required or shown on drawings.
3. Cleanouts shall be full pipe size up to 100 mm diameter.
4. Cleanouts shall be placed in readily accessible locations.
5. Where they occur in floors, cleanouts shall be piped to just below floor level and shall be
provided with plug and floor access plate flush with floor.
6. Where they occur in walls, cleanouts shall be provided with plug and wall access plate.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1424 - 3 DRAINAGE, STORM AND VENT

SYSTEM
 B. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout
passing through waterproof membrane.
C. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack flashing in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF DRAINS
A. Floor Drains
1. Install floor drains in locations indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of
drains flush with finished floor.
3. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.
4. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
B. Roof Drains
1. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane
manufacturer's installation instructions.
2. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it
has been inspected, tested and approved by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction.
Notify the Engineer, in writing, at least 24 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made.
Perform tests specified below in the presence of the Engineer.
B.Piping System Test
1. PVC Plumbing: Test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon
completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system,
and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 3048 mm of head from highest
point. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection
starts, through completion of the inspection for four hours. Inspect all joints for leaks.
2. Finished Plumbing: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water,
test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug the stack openings on
the roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system
equal to a pressure of 250 Pa. Use a U-tube or manometer inserted in the trap of water
closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without the
introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing
fixture connections for gas and water leaks.
3. For storm water piping system fill with water as per item (1) but not less than 6000 mm
of head water from the highest point.
4. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective
action.
3.7 COORDINATION WITHEXISTINGUTILITIES
A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit as-built utilities drawings in reproducible form to the
Engineer. All revisions, omissions, and demolition or additions to the various piping installations
shall be marked down in red pencil.
B. The contractor shall submit the demolition and re-routing plan of the existing sewage and storm
drainage system to the client for approval before commencement of the work.
3.8 ADJUSTING, CLEANING ANDPROTECTION
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt debris as work progresses. Clean drain strainers,
domes and traps, and remove dirt and debris.
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid dirt and debris, and to prevent
from traffic and construction work. Place plugs on uncompleted piping at end of day or
whenever work stops.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 1424 - 4 DRAINAGE, STORM AND VENT

SYSTEM
 SECTION 22 3000
ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATER
PART 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIEDELSEWHERE:
A. 230500 - Basic Mechanical Requirements
B. 221005 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings
C. 220525 - Valves
D. 221006 - Piping Specialties.
E. 230528 - Hangers and Supports
F. 230713 - Mechanical Insulation
G. 221114 - Domestic Water System
H. 230593 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. Refer general-basic mechanical requirements; 1.03 submittals section.
B. Product data: for each type and size of commercial water heater indicated. include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
C. Commercial water heater labeling: certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Operation and maintenance data: for electric, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.
G. Shop drawings
H. Manufacturer’s installation instructions and start-up procedures.
I. Contract closeout information:
1.3 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labelled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. ASME Compliance: Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label
commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
C. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with
potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATER
A. Furnish and install where shown on the drawings factory packaged commercial electric storage
water heaters. The water heater shall have a storage capacity and necessary KW input as
shown in the bills of quantities.
B. The unit shall be Underwriter's laboratories listed and shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories
label. The unit shall meet the standby loss requirements of the U.S. department of energy and
current edition of ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 . The entire unit shall be factory assembled and tested,
requiring only connection to services. Complete operating, adjustment and start-up instructions
shall be furnished in booklet form. Wiring diagrams shall be submitted for approval.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 3000 - 1 ELECTRIC STORAGEWATER

HEATER
 C. The components include the immersion heaters with controls, the glass lined with an alkaline
borosilicate composition that has been fused-t-steel by firing at a temperature range of 1400 °F
to 1600 °F, and insulated tank, which is guaranteed from 5 to 10 years, immersion type
thermostat, safety group fitted on inlet cold water pipes, cold water supply dip tube, hot water
dip tube, immersion heater elements, control panel with main isolator and step controller.
Combination T-P (temperature and pressure) relief value, and drain valve and lines.
D. Water heater are equipped with a high density extruded anode rod, or this may be incorporated
with the hot water outlet tube.
E. Storage Tank Section & Insulation:
F. The outer jacket shall be of backed enamel finish and shall enclose the tank with foam
insulation.
G. The storage section shall be constructed in accordance with the ASME Codes, Section IV,
bearing the HLW stamp
H. Trim
1. The storage tank trim shall include an ASME- rated pressure relief valve set at 1207 KPa
(175 psig), a 90mm dial thermometer with a range between 0°C and 110°C, a 90 mm dial
pressure gauge with a range between 100 and 2000 Kpa, non-return valve and isolating
valve, suspension brackets shall complete the package for wall mounting.
2. High-Limit Control
I. An additional manual-reset thermostatic control shall be factory installed. The purpose of this
control will be to disconnect all electric power to the heating element in the event of an over-
temperature condition in the storage section.
J. Immersion Electric Heating Element
1. The heating element shall be of removable core type. The heating element shall be
medium watt density with zinc plated copper sheets for longer life. Each element shall be
controlled by an individually mounted thermostat and high temperature cutoff switch. The
whole being encased in a protection tube and sealed against moisture. Braze; on to a
screw - on immersion type apparatus plate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
B. Install heater either against the wall or ceiling suspended as indicated on the drawings by using
suitable anchors.
C. Provide piping connections and accessories as necessary.
D. Pipe relief valves to be drained to nearest floor drain, safety pressure values and non- return
values should include.
E. Provide for connection to electrical service.
F. Gound the equipment properly.
3.1 PERFORMANCETEST
A. Working pressure 10 BAR Start and run unit under load for minimum of 8 hours to ensure that
complete system is operating and performing as specified.
3.2 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the period of 1 year
from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and replacement
of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 3000 - 2 ELECTRIC STORAGEWATER
HEATER
 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
a. Electric, domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
b. Prepare test and inspection reports.
5. Remove, replace water heaters that do not pass test, inspections and retest as
specified above.
END OFSECTION

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 3000 - 3 ELECTRIC STORAGEWATER

HEATER
 SECTION 22 4000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water closets.
B. Dual flush water closets.
C. Bidets.
D. Lavatories.
E. Sinks.
F. Service sinks.
G. Mop sinks.
H. Under-lavatory pipe supply covers.
I. Electric water coolers.
J. Bathtubs.
K. Showers.
L. Wash fountains.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing joints between fixtures and walls and floors.
B. Section 12 3600 - Countertops: Preparation of counters for sinks and lavatories.
C. Section 22 1005 - Plumbing Piping.
D. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
E. Section 22 3000 - Plumbing Equipment.
F. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B. ASME A112.18.9 - Protectors/Insulators for Exposed Waste and Supplies on Accessible
Fixtures; 2011 (Reaffirmed 2017).
C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
D. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2017.
E. ASTM C1822 - Standard Specification for Insulating Covers on Accessible Lavatory Piping;
2015.
F. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to
Fungi; 2015.
G. IAPMO Z124 - Plastic Plumbing Fixtures; 2017.
H. ASHRAE Std 18 - Methods of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with Self-Contained
Mechanical Refrigeration; 2013.
I. ASME A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use; 1997
(Reaffirmed 2017).
J. ASME A112.18.1 - Plumbing Supply Fittings; 2018.
K. ASME A112.19.1 - Enamelled Cast Iron and Enamelled Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 2018.
L. ASME A112.19.2 - Ceramic Plumbing Fixtures; 2018.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 M. ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 2017.
N. ASME A112.19.4M - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures; 1994 (R2009).
O. ASME A112.19.14 - Six Liter Water Closets Equipped with Dual Flushing Device; 2013
(Reaffirmed 2018).
P. ASSE 1014 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Prevention Devices for Hand-Held
Showers; 2005.
Q. ASSE 1070 - Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices; 2015.
R. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2017.
S. ICC A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2017.
T. ISFA 2-01 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2013.
U. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.
V. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2017.
W. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2016.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,
trim, and finishes.
C. Samples: Submit two lavatory supply fittings.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
E. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.6 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-up of typical bathroom group.
B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and
NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable codes for installation of plumbing systems.
B. Perform work in accordance with local health department regulations.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 C. Provide certificate of compliance from Authority Having Jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation.
2.3 FLUSH VALVE WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Vitreous china, ASME A112.19.2, wall hung, siphon jet flush action, china bolt
caps.
1. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; 420 mm high with elongated rim.
2. Flush Valve: Exposed (top spud).
3. Flush Operation: Sensor operated.
4. Handle Height: 1117 mm or less.
5. Supply Size: 38 mm.
6. Outlet Size: 50 mm.
7. Color: White.
B. Flush Valves: ASME A112.18.1, diaphragm type, complete with vacuum breaker stops and
accessories.
1. Sensor-Operated Type: Solenoid or motor-driven operator, low voltage hard-wired,
infrared sensor with mechanical over-ride or over-ride push button.
2. Exposed Type: Chrome plated, escutcheon, integral screwdriver stop.
C. Seats:
1. Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, brass bolts, with
cover.
D. Water Closet Carriers:
1. ASME A112.6.1M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable
spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.
2.4 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; wall hung, vitreous china, reverse trap, whirlpool action close-coupled
closet combination with regular rim, insulated vitreous china closet tank with fittings and lever
flushing valve, chrome plated bolt caps.
1. Water Consumption: Maximum 6 liters per flush.
B. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, brass bolts, with cover.
C. Handle Height: 1117 mm or less.
D. Water Closet Carrier:
1. ASME A112.6.1M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable
spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.
2.5 DUAL FLUSH WATER CLOSETS
A. Dual Flush Water Closets: ASME A112.19.14; high efficiency and low consumption, vitreous
china, dual flush, tank type.
1. Bowl: Elongated.
2. Flush Actuator: Manufacturer's standard.
3. Rough In: 305 mm.
4. Seat: Manufacturer’s standard or recommended elongated closed front seat with lid.
5. Color: White.
2.6 BIDETS
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.2; floor mounted, vitreous china bidet with integral overflow, flushing
rim, extended back shelf, 32 mm tailpiece.
B. Supply Fitting: ASME A112.18.1; exposed chrome plated, two valve fitting with backflow
preventer, transfer valve, spray, pop-up waste, indexed acrylic handles.
C. Supply Fitting: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated supply fitting with chain and plug, water
economy aerator, indexed handles.
D. Bidet Carrier:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 1. ASME A112.6.1M; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable
spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers.
2.7 LAVATORIES
A. Vitreous China Wall Hung Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china wall hung lavatory, by
mm minimum, with 100 mm high back, rectangular basin with splash lip, front overflow, and
soap depression.
1. Drilling Centers: 200 mm.
B. Vitreous China Counter Top Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china self-rimming counter top
lavatory, with drillings on 100 mm centers, front overflow, soap depression, seal of
putty, calking, or concealed vinyl gasket.
C. Vitreous China Under-Mount Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china under-mount lavatory,
front overflow, mounting kit and template by manufacturer.
D. Pedestal Basin: ASME A112.19.2; vitreous china pedestal lavatory with integral rear splash
rim, by by mm with drillings on 200 mm centers, front overflow, steel hanger.
E. Supply Faucet: ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated combination supply fitting with pop-up waste,
water economy aerator with maximum flow of 8.3 liters per minute, indexed handles.
F. Sensor Operated Faucet: Cast brass, chrome plated, wall mounted with sensor located on
neck of spout.
1. Spout Style: Standard.
2. Power Supply: Battery, easily replaceable, alkaline or lithium, minimum 200,000 cycles.
3. Mixing Valve: None, single line for tempered water.
4. Water Supply: 9 mm compression connections.
5. Aerator: Vandal resistant, 1.89 LPM, laminar flow device.
6. Finish: Polished chrome.
G. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve, ASSE 1070 listed, with combination
stop, strainer, and check valves, and flexible stainless steel connectors.
H. Provide lavatory with combination stop and strainer.
I. Accessories:
1. Chrome plated 1.37 mm brass P-trap with clean-out plug and arm with escutcheon.
2. Offset waste with perforated open strainer.
3. Wheel handle stops.
4. Rigid supplies.
5. Carrier:
a. ASME A112.6.1M; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall
attachment, threaded studs for fixture hanger, bearing plate and studs.
2.8 SINKS
A. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; by by mm outside
dimensions 0.91 mm thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge
back drilled for trim.
B. Double Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; by by mm outside
dimensions 0.91 mm thick, Type 302 stainless steel, self rimming and undercoated, with ledge
back drilled for trim.
2.9 UNDER-LAVATORY PIPE SUPPLY COVERS
A. General:
1. Insulate exposed drainage piping including hot, cold and tempered water supplies under
lavatories or sinks per ADA Standards.
2. Adhesives, sewing threads and two ply laminated materials are prohibited.
3. Exterior Surfaces: Smooth nonabsorbent with no finger recessed indentations for easy
cleaning.
4. Construction: 3.2 mm PVC with antimicrobial, antifungal and UV resistant properties.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 a. Provide one piece injected molded design with internal bridge at top of J-bend to
prevent separating.
b. Comply with ASTM E84 for flame and smoke development.
c. Comply with ASTM C1822 Type III for covers on accessible lavatory piping.
d. Comply with ASME A112.18.9 for covers on accessible lavatory piping.
e. Comply with ICC A117.1.
f. Thermal Resistance: R value of 0.504 or lower when tested by ASTM C177.
g. Thermal Conductivity: K value of 0.358 or density of 21.61 pcf per ASTM C518.
h. Microbial and Fungal Resistance for Interior and Exterior: Comply with ASTM G21.
5. Color: High gloss white.
6. Fasteners: Reusable, snap-locking fasteners with no sharp or abrasive external
surfaces. No cable ties allowed.
2.10 BATHTUBS AND SHOWERS
A. Bathtub: ASME A112.19.1 enamelled cast iron bathtub with slip resistant surface, contoured
front apron, 1500 mm long, color.
B. Bath Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed over rim supply with spout and indexed handles,
lever operated pop-up waste and overflow.
C. Bath and Shower Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower and over rim supply with diverter
spout, indexed handles, bent shower arm with adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with
maximum 9.5 liters per minute flow and escutcheon, lever operated pop-up waste and overflow.
D. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve, ASSE 1070 listed. Provide with
combination stop, strainer, and check valves, and flexible stainless steel connectors.
2.11 SHOWER RECEPTORS
A. Solid Surfacing Shower Receptors: Solid plastic resin casting, self-supporting, for installation
over conventional subfloor; complying with IAPMO Z124.
1. Material: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin,
renewable material filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being
worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and
pattern consistent throughout thickness.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke
developed index of 450 or less, Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Provide satin or matte, gloss rating of 3 to 20.
4. Color/Pattern Family: Solid color, light colors.
B. Drain Trim: Removable chrome plated strainer and tail piece.
C. ADA Solid Surfacing Shower Receptors: Solid plastic resin casting, self-supporting, for
installation over conventional subfloor; complying with IAPMO Z124.
1. Material: Complying with ISFA 2-01 and NEMA LD 3; acrylic or polyester resin,
renewable material filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and capable of being
worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating; color and
pattern consistent throughout thickness.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke
developed index of 450 or less, Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Provide satin or matte, gloss rating of 3 to 20.
4. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
D. Drain Trim: Removable chrome plated strainer and tail piece.
2.12 SHOWERS
A. Cabinet: ASME A112.19.4M; porcelain enamelled steel, 800 by 800 by 1900 mm with stone
texture receptor, soap dish, removable chrome plated strainer, tail piece, color as selected.
B. Trim: ASME A112.18.1; concealed shower supply with indexed handles, bent shower arm with
adjustable spray ball joint showerhead with maximum 9.5 liters per minute flow, and
escutcheon.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 C. Shower Valve:
1. Comply with ASME A112.18.1.
2. Provide two handle in wall diverter valve body with integral thermostatic mixing valve to
supply 0.094 L/s.
D. Wall Mounted Shower Valve:
1. Comply with ASME A112.18.1.
2. Provide two handle in wall diverter valve body with integral thermostatic mixing valve to
supply 0.094 L/s.
E. Shower Head:
1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated vandal-proof institutional head with integral wall bracket,
built-in 0.16 L/s flow control.
F. Low-Flow Shower Head:
1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated vandal-proof institutional head with integral wall bracket,
built-in 0.094 L/s flow control.
G. Ultra-Low-Flow Shower Head:
1. ASME A112.18.1; chrome plated vandal-proof institutional head with integral wall bracket,
built-in 0.05 L/s flow control.
H. Hand-Held Shower Head:
1. ASME A112.18.1, adjustable spray hand-held shower head with swivel fitting, with ASSE
1014 backflow preventer.
2. Provide pushbutton flow control.
3. Include 1525 mm minimum flexible polished stainless steel hose and in-line vacuum
breaker
4. Provide wall bracket to mount hand spray, allowing use of the unit as either a hand-held
spray or a fixed shower head.
I. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Thermostatic mixing valve, ASSE 1070 listed, with combination
stop, strainer, and check valves, and flexible stainless steel connectors.
2.13 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Water Cooler: Electric, mechanically refrigerated; surface mounted, ADA compliant; stainless
steel top, vinyl on steel body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream
regulator, push button, mounting bracket; integral air cooled condenser and stainless steel
grille.
1. Capacity: 30.3 liters per hour of 10 degrees C water with inlet at 27 degrees C and room
temperature of 32 degrees C, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE Std 18.
2. Electrical: 115 V, 60 Hertz compressor, 2 m cord and plug for connection to electric
wiring system including grounding connector.
2.14 WASH FOUNTAINS
A. Freestanding Wash Fountains:
1. Bowl: Circular, 900 mm diameter, precast stone.
2. Accessories: Foot controlled self-closing valve, spray head, liquid soap dispenser,
manual mixing valve, supporting tube, spud and strainer, operating mechanism, foot
levers and rail, combination stop, strainer and check valves.
2.15 MOP SINKS
A. Material: Stainless steel.
B. Type: Rectilinear.
C. Tiling Flange Construction: Galvanized steel.
D. Grid Strainer: Stainless steel; integral; removable.
E. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
F. Accessories:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 6 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 1. 1.5 m of 13 mm diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.
2. Hose clamp hanger.
3. Mop hanger.
G. Material: Precast terrazzo composed of marble chips cast in Portland cement.
H. Type: Rectilinear, standard height.
I. Tiling Flange Construction: Galvanized steel.
J. Grid strainer: Stainless steel; integral; removable.
K. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
L. Accessories:
1. 1.5 m of 13 mm diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.
2. Hose clamp hanger.
3. Mop hanger.
2.16 SERVICE SINKS
A. Bowl: ASME A112.19.1; 560 by 460 by 300 mm deep, porcelain enamelled (inside only) cast
iron roll-rim sink, with 300 mm high back, concealed hanger, chrome plated strainer, stainless
steel rim guard, cast iron P-trap with adjustable floor flange.
B. Accessories:
1. 1.5 m of 13 mm diameter plain end reinforced plastic hose.
2. Hose clamp hanger.
3. Mop hanger.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough-in schedule for particular fixtures.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and
escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports and bolts.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before
rough-in and installation.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
B. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 7 PLUMBING FIXTURES

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
B. Do not permit use of fixtures by construction personnel.
C. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4000 - 8 PLUMBING FIXTURES

 SECTION 22 4100
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bathtubs.
2. Faucets.
3. Jacuzzi / Whirlpool baths.
4. Bidets.
5. Lavatories.
6. Showers.
7. Bar sinks.
8. Kitchen sinks.
9. Laundry trays.
10. Dishwasher air-gap fittings.
11. Laminar-flow, faucet-spout outlets.
12. Disposers.
13. Hot-water dispensers.
14. Water closets.
15. Toilet seats.
16. Supply fittings.
17. Waste fittings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted
plumbing fixtures.
B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures and faucets to include in
emergency, operation, and operation and maintenance manuals.
1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance
Data," include the following:
a. Servicing and adjustments of whirlpool baths and walk-in baths.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size
installed.
3. Flushometer-Tank Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed,
but no fewer than two of each type.
4. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of walk-in baths
and whirlpool baths that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 1 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 a. Structural failures of unit shell.
b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.
2. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Pumps and Blowers: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
3. Warranty Period for Residential Applications of Electronic Controls: Five years from
date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Selection of All Plumbing / Sanitary Fixtures as to Type, Manufacture / Model, Color, and
Finish: By Client / Dar Al Riyadh - Engineering and Architecture.
B. Refer to Plumbing / Sanitary Fixtures Schedule in the Drawings.
2.2 BATHTUBS
A. Bathtubs: Enameled cast iron, with shower.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2 for enameled cast-iron bathtubs.
b. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.
c. Size: 60 by 30 inches (1525 by 762 mm) with front apron.
d. Color: White.
e. Drain Location: Right end.
f. Drain: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40); chrome-plated brass, pop-up waste and overflow.
2. Faucet: Solid brass, polished chrome plate..
3. Supply Fittings: Included in faucet.
4. Tub Filler: Chrome-plated-brass diverter spout.
5. Waste Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B45.125.2.
b. Drain: Stainless steel or chrome-plated brass, removable strainer.
c. Overflow: Chrome-plated-brass escutcheon with toggle drain-plug device.
d. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) cast-brass overflow, P-trap, and waste.
2.3 BATHTUB FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Bathtub Faucets: Single handle, pressure balance.
1. Standards: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.
2. Faucet:
a. Body Material: Solid brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.) unless otherwise indicated.
d. Mounting: Concealed.
e. Operation: Single handle, push-pull or twist or rotate control, with hot- and cold-
water indicators.
f. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.
g. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- and
cold-water supply connections.
h. Diverter: In-tub filler spout.
i. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
3. Shower Head:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
b. Type: Ball joint with arm and flange.
c. Backflow-Prevention Device: ASSE 1014.
d. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome-plated finish.
e. Spray Pattern: Adjustable.
f. Integral Volume Control: Required.
g. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 1.5 gpm (5.7 L/min.)
h. Temperature Indicator: Integral with faucet.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 2 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 4. Bathtub Filler Spout: Chrome-plated brass.
2.4 JACUZZI / WHIRLPOOL BATHS
A. Whirlpool Baths: Enameled cast-iron hydromassage bathtub.
1. Standards: ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2 and UL 1795 for enameled cast-iron
hydromassage bathtubs.
2. General: Bathtub with air-entrained, water-jet nozzles and water circulation.
3. Fixture:
a. Seating Capacity: Two person(s).
b. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.
c. Size: 66 by 30 inches (1680 by 762 mm).
d. Nominal Water Capacity: (As indicated) L.
e. Apron: Matching unit, covering exposed front and sides, and with access panel.
f. Color: White.
g. Drain Location: Right end.
h. Controls: For pump, timer, and water heater.
4. Faucet:
a. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System
Components - Health Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with
potable water.
b. Description: Fixture manufacturer's chrome-plated, solid-brass mixing valve with
over-rim tub filler.
c. Faucet Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
5. Supplies: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) copper tubing with ball, gate, or globe valves.
6. Waste Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B45.125.2.
b. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).
c. Drain: Chrome-plated exposed parts; brass pop-up waste and overflow.
d. Drain Piping: Cast- and tubular-brass overflow, P-trap, and waste.
7. Water-Circulating System: Electric circulating pump complying with ASME A112.19.7
and with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application and plastic piping.
8. Water Heater: Electric, inline complying with UL 1951, and listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location
and application.
9. Unit Electrical Characteristics:
a. Volts: 240.
b. Phase(s): Three.
c. Hertz: 60.
d. Full-Load Amperes: As indicated.
e. Minimum Circuit Ampacity: As indicated.
f. Maximum Overcurrent Protection: As indicated.
2.5 BIDETS
A. Bidets:
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for vitreous-china bidets.
b. Type: With spray and flushing rim.
c. Hole Punching: Number and spacing to match faucet.
d. Mounting: Floor.
e. Overflow: Not required.
f. Color: As selected.
2. Faucet:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.3.
b. Type: Manufacturer's standard with vacuum breaker, diverter, and submerged
spray, pop-up drain, NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) tailpiece, and chrome-plated finish.
Include manufacturer's standard handles.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 3 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 4.
Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article, except faucet
includes pop-up drain.
2.6 LAVATORIES
A. Fixture:
1. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 for vitreous-china lavatories.
2. Type: Flat rim with ledge.
3. Oval Nominal Size: 20 by 17 inches (508 by 432 mm).
4. Round Nominal Size: 19 inches (483 mm) in diameter.
5. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole.
6. Faucet-Hole Location: None.
7. Color: As selected.
8. Faucet: Copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate.
9. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
10. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
B. Lavatories: Oval vitreous china, pedestal.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1.
b. Oval Nominal Size: 24 by 18 inches (610 by 457 mm).
c. Rectangular Nominal Size: 20 by 18 inches (508 by 457 mm).
d. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole.
e. Faucet-Hole Location: Front wall.
f. Color: As selected.
2. Faucet: Copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
C. Lavatories: Oval, solid surface, integral bowl countertop.
1. Fixture:
a. General: Countertop lavatory with integral bowl(s) for mounting on base unit.
b. Backsplash: Integral with countertop.
c. Overall Rectangular Top Size: 73 by 22 inches (1854 by 559 mm) with one [two]
bowl.
d. Bowl Size: Oval 20 by 17 inches (508 by 432 mm).
e. Faucet-Hole Punching: One hole.
f. Faucet-Hole Location: Countertop.
g. Color: As selected.
2.7 LAVATORY FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Lavatory Faucets: Single-control non mixing valve.
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
2. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
3. Body Material: General-duty, copper or brass underbody with brass cover plate.
4. Finish: Polished brass.
5. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.).
6. Centers: Adjustable.
7. Mounting: Back/wall, concealed.
8. Valve Handle(s): Knob.
9. Inlet(s): NPS 1/2 (DN 15) male shank.
10. Spout: Swivel, gooseneck.
11. Spout Outlet: Spray, 0.5 gpm (1.5 L/min.).
12. Operation: Compression, manual.
13. Drain: Pop up.
2.8 SHOWERS
A. Showers: Standard FRP with base and faucet.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 4 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 1. Standard: ANSI Z124.1.2.
2. Nominal Size: 43 by 39 inches (1090 by 990 mm).
3. Surround: One piece or sealed, multiple piece.
4. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.
5. Color: As selected.
6. Drain Location: Center.
7. Faucet: Solid brass; single handle, pressure balance, mixing valve.
B. Showers: Accessible FRP with seat, grab bar, base, and faucet.
1. Standards: ANSI Z124.1.2 and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for roll-in shower compartments.
2. Nominal Size: 72 by 36 inches (1830 by 915 mm).
3. Surround: One piece or sealed, multiple piece.
4. Bathing Surface: Slip resistant according to ASTM F 462.
5. Color: As selected.
6. Drain Location: Center.
7. Accessibility Options: Grab bar and bench.
8. Faucet: Shower: Solid brass, single handle, pressure balance, mixing valve.
9. Drain: Grid, NPS 2 (DN 50).
2.9 SHOWER FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Shower Faucets: Single handle, pressure balance, mixing valve.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016.
b. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; check stops; and hand head
complying with ASSE 1014 with arm, flange, hose, and bracket. Coordinate
faucet inlets with supplies.
c. Body Material: Solid brass.
d. Finish: Polished brass.
e. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm (9.5 L/min.) unless otherwise indicated.
f. Mounting: Concealed.
g. Backflow-Prevention Device for Hand-Held Shower: Required.
h. Operation: Compression, manual.
i. Antiscald Device: Integral with mixing valve.
j. Check Stops: Check-valve type, integral with or attached to body; on hot- and
cold-water supply connections.
2. Supply Connections: NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
3. Shower Head:
a. Type: Ball joint and head integral with mounting flange.
b. Shower Head Material: Combined, metallic and nonmetallic with chrome-plated
finish.
c. Spray Pattern: Adjustable.
d. Integral Volume Control: Required.
e. Shower-Arm, Flow-Control Fitting: 2.0 gpm (7.6 L/min.).
2.10 BAR SINKS
A. Bar Sinks: Single bowl, counter mounted, stainless steel.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel lavatories.
b. Type: Self-rimming.
c. Overall Dimensions: As indicated.
d. Bowl Dimensions: As indicated.
2. Faucet: Solid brass.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
2.11 KITCHEN SINKS
A. Kitchen Sinks: Two bowl, counter mounted, stainless steel.
1. Fixture:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 5 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 a.
Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel kitchen sinks.
b.
Overall Dimensions: As indicated.
c.
Metal Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm).
d.
Left Bowl:
1) Dimensions: As indicated.
2) Drain: 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) outlet for disposer.
(a) Location: Near back of bowl.
e. Right Bowl:
1) Dimensions: As indicated.
2) Drain: 3-1/2-inch (89-mm) outlet for disposer.
(a) Location: Near back of bowl.
2. Faucet: Solid brass.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article, except include
continuous waste for multibowl sinks.
a. Disposer: Batch.
b. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fitting: Comply with requirements in "Dishwasher Air-Gap
Fittings" Article.
c. Hot-Water Dispenser: Comply with requirements in "Hot-Water Dispensers"
Article.
2.12 LAUNDRY TRAYS
A. Laundry Trays: Enameled cast iron, self-rimming with ledge.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2.
b. Nominal Size: 24 by 23 inches (610 by 584 mm).
c. Color: As selected.
d. Mounting: Freestanding on manufacturer's standard metal stand.
2. Faucet: Comply with "Sink Faucets" Article.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
B. Laundry Trays: Plastic laundry tray.
1. Fixture:
a. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.6.
b. Style: Flat-rim ledge.
c. Material: FRP.
d. Nominal Size: 25 by 22 inches (635 by 559 mm).
e. Color: As selected
f. Mounting: Freestanding on manufacturer's standard legs or separate, painted-
steel stand.
2. Faucet: Comply with "Sink Faucets" Article.
3. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.
4. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article.
2.13 SINK FAUCETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Sink Faucets: Solid brass.
1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
2. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies
and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.
3. Kitchen Sink Option: Separate hand spray complying with ASSE 1025.
4. Finish: Polished brass.
5. Maximum Flow Rate: 4.0 gpm (15 L/min.) unless otherwise indicated.
6. Mixing Valve: Single control.
7. Backflow-Prevention Device for Hand Spray: Required.
8. Centers: Adjustable.
9. Mounting: Back/wall, concealed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 6 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 10. Handle(s): Lever.
11. Spout Type: Rigid, solid brass.
12. Spout Outlet: Spray.
13. Drain: Lift and turn.
2.14 DISHWASHER AIR-GAP FITTINGS
A. Dishwasher Air-Gap Fittings:
1. Standard: ASSE 1021.
2. Description: Device designed to prevent backflow of contaminated liquid into
domestic dishwashers.
3. Material: Plastic body with chrome-plated-brass cover.
4. Hose Connections: 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) ID inlet and 7/8-inch- (22-mm-) IDoutlet.
5. Capacity: At least 5 gpm (0.32 L/s); at inlet pressure of at least 5 psig (35 kPa) and
at temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
6. Mounting: Deck.
7. Hoses: Rubber and suitable for temperature of at least 140 deg F (60 deg C).
a. Inlet Hose: 5/8 inch (16 mm) ID and 48 inches (1219 mm) long.
b. Outlet Hose: 7/8 inch (22 mm) ID and 48 inches (1219 mm) long.
2.15 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet-spout outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Description: Chrome-plated-brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar
stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to
faucets where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.
2.16 DISPOSERS
A. Disposers: Batch-feed household, food waste.
1. Standards: ASSE 1008 and UL 430, and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. General: Include reset button; wall switch; corrosion-resistant chamber with jam-
resistant, cutlery- or stainless-steel grinder or shredder; NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) outlet;
quick-mounting, stainless-steel sink flange; antisplash guard; and combination
cover/stopper.
3. Model: Sound-insulated chamber and stainless-steel outer shell.
4. Motor: 220-V ac, 1725 rpm, 1 hp with overload protection.
2.17 HOT-WATER DISPENSERS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Hot-Water Dispensers: Gooseneck spout with lever handle, flow control.
1. Standard: ASSE 1023.
2. General: Household-type dispenser with instant on-off control; insulated, corrosion-
resistant-metal storage tank that is open to atmosphere; electric heating element;
chrome-plated faucet or spout; removable strainer; thermostat control for water
temperature up to 190 deg F (88 deg C); and thermal-overload protection.
3. Storage Tank Capacity: 0.5 gal. (1.5 L).
4. Heating Element: 750 W minimum, 220-V ac.
2.18 WATER CLOSETS
A. Water Closets: Floor mounted, floor outlet, close coupled (gravity tank), vitreous china.
1. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1, ASME A112.19.5, and ASSE 1037.
b. Bowl Type: Siphon jet.
c. Height: Standard.
d. Rim Contour: Elongated.
e. Water Consumption: Water saving.
f. Color: As selected.
2. Toilet Seat: Comply with "Toilet Seats" Article.
3. Supply Fittings:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 7 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube
matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with
inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
1) Operation: Loose key.
d. Riser:
1) Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
2) Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible
hose riser.
B. Water Closets: Wall mounted, close coupled (flushometer tank), vitreous china.
1. Bowl:
a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.
b. Bowl Type: Siphon jet.
c. Height: Standard.
d. Rim Contour: Elongated.
e. Water Consumption: Water saving.
f. Color: As selected.
2. Toilet Seat: Comply with "Toilet Seats" Article.
3. Supply Fittings:
a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
b. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube
matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
c. Stop: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with
inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
1) Operation: Loose key.
d. Riser:
1) Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
2) Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible
hose riser.
2.19 TOILET SEATS
A. Toilet Seats:
1. Standard: IAPMO/ANSI Z124.5.
2. Material: Plastic.
3. Type: Residential.
4. Shape: Elongated rim (Closed front).
5. Configuration: Open front with cover.
6. Size: Elongated.
7. Hinge Type: Self-sustaining, check.
8. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.
9. Seat Cover: Required.
10. Color: As selected.
2.20 SUPPLY FITTINGS
A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health
Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.
B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.
C. Bidet, Lavatory, Bar Sink, Kitchen Sink, and, Laundry Tray Supply Fittings:
1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching
water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.
2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type or compression stop with
inlet connection matching water-supply piping type and size.
a. Operation: Loose key.
3. Risers:
a. Size: NPS 3/8 (DN 10) for bidets and lavatories] .
b. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) for bar sinks, kitchen sinks, and laundry trays.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 8 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 c.
Material: ASME A112.18.6, braided- or corrugated-stainless-steel flexible hose
riser.
2.21 WASTE FITTINGS
A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.
B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) offset tailpiece for accessible lavatories.
C. Drain: Pop-up type with NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) straight tailpiece as part of faucet for standard
lavatories.
D. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) offset tailpiece for accessible bar sinks and
kitchen sinks.
E. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) straight tailpiece for standard bar sinks and
kitchen sinks, and for laundry trays.
F. Trap:
1. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40)] for bidets and lavatories.
2. Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) for bar sinks kitchen sinks and laundry trays.
3. Material: Stainless-steel, two-piece trap and swivel elbow with 0.012-inch- (0.30-mm-
) thick stainless-steel tube to wall; and stainless-steel wall flange.
2.22 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to
verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation.
B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be
installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.
B. Install floor-mounted water closets on closet flange attachments to drainage piping.
C. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
D. Install pedestal lavatories on pedestals and secured to wood blocking in wall.
E. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind
fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with
fixture. Comply with valve requirements specified in Division 22 Section "General-
Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."
F. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side
of compartment.
G. Install toilet seats on water closets.
H. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if
faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
I. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.
J. Install traps on fixture outlets.
1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 9 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 K. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have a disposer. Install switch where
indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.
L. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have air-gap fitting. Install in sink
deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer.
M. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink.
N. Set bathtubs, baths and shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout.
O. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section
"Plumbing Piping Insulation."
P. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.
Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with
escutcheon requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing
Piping."
Q. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-
part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with
sealant requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent
piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.
B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water
Piping."
C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary
Waste and Vent Piping."
D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste
piping of accessible lavatories and sinks . Comply with requirements in Division 22
Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
fixtures, fittings, and controls.
B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended
cleaning methods and materials.
C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.
D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 4100 - 10 RESIDENTIAL PLUMBING

FIXTURES
 SECTION 22 5100
SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings, Valves, Strainers.
B. Pool Equipment.
C. Circulators and Pumps.
D. Filters.
E. Surge tanks.
F. OZONE GENERATOR (IF APPLICABLE)
G. Pool Water Treatment Systems.
H. Solar Water heating system.
I. Heating boiler.
J. Shell and tube heat exchanger.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 13 1100 - Swimming Pool.
B. Section 22 0513 - Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment.
C. Section 26 2717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME A112.19.8M - Suction Fittings for Use in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas, and
Hot Tubs; 2007.
B. ASME A112.19.17 - Manufactured Safety vacuum Release Systems (SVRS) for
Residential and Commercial Swimming Pool, Spa, Hot Tub, and Wading Pool; 2010.
C. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for
Construction of Pressure Vessels; 2015.
D. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2015.
E. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80; 2006.
F. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
G. NSF 50 - Equipment for Swimming Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs and Other Recreational Water
Facilities; 2015.
H. UL 1081 - Swimming Pool Pumps, Filters, and Chlorinators; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare shop drawings of the swimming pool and equipment based up on
the designers swimming pool package and submit copies to the Owner for review before
ordering the materials, components and equipment or commence the work.
C. Compliance with DESIGNER SWIMMING POOL PACKAGE
The Contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the following swimming pool designer
(otherwise exclusively mentioned)

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 1 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING

SYSTEMS
 Designer:
AQUATIC DESIGN & ENGINEERING, INC.
PROFESSIONAL POOL AND FOUNTAIN CONSULTANTS / AQUATIC ENGINEER
2 WEST OAKLAND AVENUE - SUITE 100
PO BOX 1208
407-656-1105 FAX
D. Product Data:
1. Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.
2. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
3. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-
in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
4. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections
to other equipment and piping.
5. Include heat exchanger dimensions, size of trappings, and performance data.
6. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,
trappings, and drains.
7. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements, and affected adjacent construction.
Submit certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump
and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
8. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
E. Shop Drawings: Indicate detailed assembly of components of each system or sub-system.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation details, components assembly, and
start- up procedures.
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate results of water treatment system set-up
and testing.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controlling devices and
underfloor piping.
I. Operation Data: Include installation instructions, lubrication instructions, and assembly
views.
J. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance and inspection data, replacement part numbers
and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
K. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
L. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controlling devices and
underfloor piping.
M. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Test Kits: One, include supplies and equipment for manual testing of chlorine
residual, pH level, and total alkalinity.
3. Test Probes: Two.
4. Extra Indicator Bulbs and Surge Fuses: One of each type and size.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in
this section and approved by manufacturer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for installation of swimming pool systems.
B. Perform work in accordance with local health department regulations.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation.
D. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 2 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING

SYSTEMS
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept equipment on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect equipment from damage and elements by maintaining shipping packaging in
place until installation. Maintain temporary inlet and outlet caps in place until installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirement
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for water heaters.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 80.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2467, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.
C. Unions for Pipe Sizes 50 mm (2 inches) and Under: PVC for plastic piping; bronze unions
for copper pipe, soldered joints.
D. Flanges for Pipe Sizes over 50 mm (2 inches): PVC for plastic piping; bronze for copper
piping.
E. Valves: PVC plastic body and ball, double lever handle, double union with socket
ends, EPDM seals, teflon seats.
F. Butterfly Valves: Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180
degrees F (82 degrees C) wafer style, 10 position lever handle.
2.2 POOL PUMPS
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. NSF Listing: Provide products that are NSF listed under NSF 50.
C. Type: UL 1081, horizontal shaft, single stage, direct connected, with motor, oil
lubricated, with casing, integral hair and lint strainer, renewable wear ring, impeller,
mechanical seal.
D. Casing: Bronze, self-primary, double volute rated for 860 kPa (125 psi) working pressure,
with pipe flanges.
E. Impeller: Bronze, closed with casing wear rings.
F. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and stainless steel sleeve.
G. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.
H. Strainer: Hair and lint basket built into casing with 12:1 ratio of free area to pipe inlet area,
removable cover.
I. Pump Motors: Operate at 3500 rpm unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Section 22 0513.
J. Performance:
1. Flow capacity: (As indicated on Drawings) L/s.
2. Head: (As indicated on Drawings) kPa.
K. Electrical Characteristics:
1. (As indicated on Drawings) kW.
2. (As indicated on Drawings) Volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
2.3 CLOSE COUPLED PUMPS
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. NSF Listing: Provide products that are NSF listed under NSF 50.
C. Type: Horizontal shaft, single stage, single or double suction, direct connected, radially or
horizontally split casing, for 860 kPa (125 psi) maximum working pressure.
D. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, renewable bronze casing
wearing rings, seal flush connections, drain plug, flanged suction and discharge.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 3 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING
SYSTEMS
 E. Impellers: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to motor shaft extension.
F. Shaft: Stainless steel.
G. Seals: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat, maximum continuous operating
temperature of 107 C (225 F).
H. Performance: Flow capacity and head as indicated on Drawings.
1. Flow Capacity: L/s.
2. Head: kPa.
I. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
1. (As indicated) kW.
2. [] volts, three phase, 60 Hz.
2.4 POOL FITTINGS AND EQUIPMENT
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. NSF Listing: Provide products that are NSF listed under NSF 50.
C. Main Drain:
1. Grate Style: Standard.
2. Material and Size: ABS body, 225 x 225 mm (9 x 9 inch) square frame and grate, 284
cm (44 inch) square open area, PVC outlet coupling, 50 mm (2 inch) bottom
connections with plugs.
D. Frames and Grates:
1. Shape: Round.
2. Material and Size: ABS, white color with stainless steel securing screws, 200 mm (8
inch) nominal diameter, 84 cm (13 inch) square open area.
E. Suction Drain: Complying with ASME A112.19.18M, with safety vacuum release
system complying with ASME A112.19.17.
1. Bronze frame, chrome plated grille, nominal 100 x 250 mm (4 x 10 inch) size, 161 sq
cm (25 sq in) open area, for maximum 400 L/min (105 gpm) flow at 0.46 m/s (1.5 ft/s)
velocity.
F. Wall and Floor Inlets:
1. White ABS, nominal 100 mm (4 inch) diameter, with internal spinner valve disc.
G. Gutter Drain:
1. White ABS, nominal 70 x 114 mm (2.75 x 4.5 inch), 26 sq cm (4 sq in) open area.
H. Ball Inlets:
1. ABS body and ball with stainless steel screws, with 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) water inlet,
13 mm (1/2 inch) air connection, 2.6 L/s (30 gpm) nominal flowrate.
I. Skimmers:
1. NSF approved, ABS molded body, with 250 mm (10 inch) diameter cover, 200 mm (8
inch) wide hinged weir with automatic level adjustment of 140 mm (4.5 inches),
thermoplastic strainer with 2600 cu cm (160 cu in) capacity, 3.3 L/s (55 gpm) flow
rating.
J. Hair and Lint Strainer:
1. ABS molded body with basket with 12:1 ratio of free area to pipe inlet area,
removable lexan cover.
2.5 RESIDENTIAL FILTERS
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. NSF Listing: Provide products that are NSF listed under NSF 50.
C. Filter Media: Cartridge.
D. Tank: Fiberglass reinforced tank with mounting base.
1. Maximum Working Pressure: 345 kPa (50 psi).
2. Minimum Burst Pressure: 2070 kPa (300 psi).
3. Hydrostatic Test: 518 kPa (75 psi).
E. Element Cartridge: Reinforced polyester with gasketed molded end caps.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 4 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING

SYSTEMS
 F. Multi-Position Valve: Construct of corrosion-resistant and corrosion-proof materials with
control handle that registers six positions; Filter, Backwash, Whirlpool, Drain, Test, Rinse
and Winterize.
G. Performance: As indicated on Drawings.
1. Flow Rate: As indicated on Drawings, L/s.
2. Total Effective Area: As indicated on Drawings, sq. m.
3. Filtering Capacity: As indicated on Drawings, L/s/sq m of filter area.
2.6 COMMERCIAL VACUUM FILTERS
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. NSF Listing: Provide products that are NSF listed under NSF 50.
C. Filter Assembly:
1. Total filter area: (As indicated) sq m.
2. Filter rate: (As indicated) L/min.
3. Flow rate: (As indicated) m/min of filter area.
4. Filtering capacity: (As indicated) liters in (As indicated) hours.
D. Filtering Unit: Vacuum type utilizing principle of filtering through a cake of diatomaceous
earth, where filtration operation is concluded on suction side of pump.
E. Filter Tank: 4.77 mm (0.188 inch) thick steel internally lined with white plastic lining
0.025 mm (0.01 inch) thick, and painted on exterior with primer. Continuous weld and
grind smooth joints. Brace externally around perimeter. Slope floor towards drain
nozzle. Support floor with flat bars spaced as required. Flange external connection
larger than 50 mm (2 inches). Internal connections for manifold shall be stainless steel.
Provide full length catwalk.
F. Baffle: Coated steel or stainless steel, secured to sidewall of tank.
G. Filter Element: Rectangular bottom drain filter element shall consist of filter chamber
connected to bottom discharge outlet, both fitted with filter cover. Fabricated filter
chamber of high impact styrene, vacuum formed in two identical halves butted and joined
over entire
contact area.
H. Filter Element Cover: Woven monofilament linear polyethylene, sewn on two sides with
dacron thread with velcro type closure for on-site installation maintenance or
replacement.
I. Element Hold-Down: Coated steel or stainless steel with corrugated PVC foam
spacer, stainless steel fasteners.
J. Collection Tube: Schedule 80 PVC pipe, machined and drilled to accept element
assembly. Finish one end of tube to mate effluent tank internal nozzle and seal opposite
end. Secure element collection tube to bottom of tank with stainless steel clamp assembly.
2.7 SURGE TANKS
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. Tank:
1. Reinforced fiber glass for 345 kPa (50 psi) working pressure with cover and
gasket, fittings, and tappings for accessories, size:
a. Diameter: As indicated.
b. Height: As indicated.
c. Volume: As indicated.
C. Float Valve:
1. PVC flange body with wafer type disc on stainless steel shaft and two stainless
steel float rods and polyethylene floats. Disc shall be 20 percent open with float up
and full open with float down.
D. Remote Control Valve:
1. Diaphragm type, hydraulically operated with threaded connections, and float
actuated, multi-port, two position pilot valves.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 5 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING

SYSTEMS
2.8 OZONE GENERATOR (IF APPLICABLE)

A. A compact cartridge combined with high airflow compressors, ultra violet lump completed
with hardware and causing.
This ozone generator should be selected at rate sufficient for pool capacity. A suitable power
supply shall be supplied from swimming pool control panel ozone generator compact plant shall
be interlocked with filter pump such a way that if the filter pump are running the ozone generator
plant will function.

2.9 POOL WATER TREATMENT (SALINE SOLUTION)

A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. Water Treatment System: Manufacturer-designed packaged system that uses
electrolytic process to produce biocide of hypochlorous acid HOCl and nascent oxygen
from mild salt solution and maintains pH by adding dilute muriatic acid.
1. Design for (As indicated) bathers per day, maximum (As indicated) bathers per
hour density; furnish calculations.
2. Maintain PH between 7.2 and 7.6.
3. Maintain salt level between 4000 and 6000 ppm.
4. Maintain chlorine residual of 1.5 ppm.
C. Components:
1. Electrolysis cells.
2. Main power assembly.
3. Master console containing controls and operation indicating lights.
4. Water sampling system with probes for pH and HOCl residual.
5. pH dosing unit.
2.10 POOL WATER TREATMENT (CHLORINE INJECTION)
A. As mentioned in swimming pool design package.
B. Performance Requirement: UL 1081, injection rate 0.09 to 1.8 kg per day (0.2 to 4
pounds per day).
C. Regulator: Continuously monitor pH and chlorine levels and control chemical feed
pumps. Maintain PH of 7.5 and free chlorine residual of 0.9 ppm. Mount regulator in
surface mounted general purpose enclosure of fiberglass construction and incorporate:
1. On/off switch.
2. Green light to indicate regulator is energized.
3. Toggle switches for chemical feed pumps, with off, manual, and automatic positions.
4. Relays for direct switching of pump motors.
5. Yellow lights to indicate pump operation.
6. Red lights for abnormal conditions.
7. Interlock to prevent chlorine feed when pH is abnormal.
8. 80 mm (3 inch) meters for continuous display of pH and chlorine levels.
9. Calibration controls for pH and chlorine.
D. Sensors: Electrode with coaxial cable for attachment to regulator.
E. Flow Switch: Shuts down controller on no flow through sampling line.
F. Gas Chlorinator: Vacuum-operated chlorinator, comprising cylinder unit, control unit,
and injector.
1. Cylinder Unit with one cylinders incorporating combined pressure reducing and
shut- off valve, and chlorine supply indicator.
2. Control Unit containing injection meter, V-notch orifice, differential regulating
valve, pressure relief valve, and chlorine supply indicator.
3. Connect injector directly into piping.
G. Liquid Chlorinator: System consisting of two tanks with injector pumps to feed
liquid chlorine (bleach) and muriatic acid.
1. Solution Metering Pump: Positive displacement, diaphragm pump with adjustable
flow rate, thermoplastic construction, continuous-duty fully enclosed electric motor
and drive, and built-in relief valve.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 6 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING
SYSTEMS
 2. Solution Tanks: 114 L (30 gallon) capacity, polyethylene, self-supporting, 3.8 L
(one gallon) graduated markings; molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting
pump and liquid level switch, and direct reading scale.

2.11 POOL SOLAR WATER HEATER

A. Pool water heater shall be solar type with electric back up. The collector will be flexible type
made of synthetic flexible rubber “PLOYTUBE “S”. The tubes to be fitted any surface and
shape. The Poly tubes shall be installed with kit complete with all the fixing and connecting
accessories including automatic controller and pump.
B. The contractor will ensure interface between the pool equipment and solar
heating system.
2.12 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS (IF APPLICABLE)
A. Type: Factory-assembled and wired, electric, vertical storage.
B. Performance:
1. Energy Factor: As indicated.
2. First Hour Rating: (As indicated) L.
3. Storage: (As indicated) L capacity.
4. Heating element size: (As indicated) kW.
5. Number of Heating Elements: As recommended by manufacturer.
6. Minimum Recovery Rate: (As indicated) L/s with 56 degrees C temperature rise.
7. Maximum Working Pressure: 1000 kPa (150 psi).
C. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated.
D. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; 100 mm (4 inch) diameter inspection port, thermally
insulated with minimum 50 mm (2 inches) glass fiber encased in corrosion-resistant
steel jacket; baked-on enamel finish.
E. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat; externally adjustable temperature range
from 16 to 82 degrees C (60 to 180 degrees F), flanged or screw-in nichrome elements,
high temperature limit thermostat.
F. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, high-density
magnesium anode, and ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve.
G. The contractor will ensure interface between the electrical water heaters in the pool
equipment room and solar heating system for complete functioning of the system.
2.13 HEATING BOILER (IF APPLICABLE)
A. Performance:
1. Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency: 0.80.
2. Gross input: (As indicated) W, at sea level.
3. Gross output: (As indicated) W, at sea level.
B. Type: Gas-fired water tube boiler, with copper finned tube heat exchanger, steel jacket with
glass fiber insulation, with gas burner, thermometer and pressure gauge, immersion
thermostats for operating and high limit protection, 100 percent safety shut-off electric gas
valve with transformer, electronic spark ignited safety pilot and pilot burner, gas pressure
regulator, manual gas shut-off, low water cut off, ASME rated temperature and pressure
relief valve, automatic boiler fill and expansion tank, draft diverter.
C. Pump:
1. Pump capacity: (As indicated) L/s.
2. Type: Bronze, in-line circulation pump mounted on boiler.
3. Electrical characteristics: As indicated.
4. Control: Tank mounted immersion thermostat set at (As indicated) degrees C.
2.14 SHELL AND TUBE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER (IF APPLICABLE)
A. Shell: Stainless steel with threaded piping connections and necessary trappings, steel
saddle and attaching U-bolts, designed for heating fluid in shell and heated fluid in tubes.
B. Heads: Brass, with brass tube sheets, threaded or flanged for piping connections.
C. Tubes: U-tube type with 19 mm (3/4 inch) OD minimum seamless copper tubes suitable for
860 kPa (125 psi) working pressure, with tube bundle removable for inspection and cleaning.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 7 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING
SYSTEMS
 D. Code: ASME BPVC-VIII-1 for service pressures, ASME "U" symbol stamped on
heat exchanger.
E. Accessories:
1. Wells for temperature regulator sensor and high limit sensor at water outlet.
2. ASME rated pressure and temperature relief valve on water outlet.
3. ASME rated pressure relief valves from tapping on heated water side, set at 820
kPa (120 psi).
4. ASME rated pressure relief valve on water inlet on downstream side of control valve.
5. Thermometers and pressure gage tappings in water inlet and outlets.
6. Vacuum breaker and pressure gage tapping with pigtail siphon in shell.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install piping to conserve building space, not interfere with use of space and other work.
Route piping in orderly manner, and maintain gradient. Group whenever practical at
common elevations.
C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment. Provide access to valves and fittings.
D. Pipe relief valve outlet and backwash to nearest floor drain.
E. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
F. Pumps:
1. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.
2. Provide line sized valve and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated check valve
and valve on discharge.
3. Decrease from line size, with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping
adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. Provide supports
under elbows on pump suction and discharge line sizes 100 mm (4 inches) and over.
G. Filter Tanks:
1. Provide support for tanks independent of building structural framing members.
2. Clean and flush tank prior to delivery to site. Seal until pipe connections are made.
H. Water Heaters:
1. Install water heaters in accordance with AGA requirements.
2. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related fuel piping work to achieve operating
system.
I. Heat Exchangers:
1. Install unit with clearance for tube bundle removal without disturbing other installed
equipment or piping.
2. Pipe relief valves and drains to nearest floor drain. Pitch shell for condensate drain to
traps.
3. Connect steam branch line from top of main. Pipe in flexible manner, pitched with
steam flow, with pipe union connections. Provide steam pressure gage at exchanger
inlet. Provide steam traps and valves as indicated.
3.2 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Provide service and maintenance of water treatment systems for one-year from date
of Substantial Completion.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. As indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 22 5100 - 8 SWIMMING POOL PLUMBING

SYSTEMS
 SECTION 23 0500
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all mechanical work as
indicated in the drawings and in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure and complete installation.
4. See Division-1 for General Requirements.
5. Based on the following design criteria, the contractor shall do, and submit for approval all
HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Fighting - system calculations necessary for sizing the system,
equipment, duct and piping which are shown on the contract drawings:
B. Design criteria:
1. Outside Design Conditions
a. Project Location Riyadh City, Saudi Arabia
b. Latitude 39.2 Deg E
c. Longitude 21.7 Deg N
d. Elevation 612 meters above sea
2. For the purpose of design and sizing of air conditioning equipment the following outside
design conditions are adopted:
a. Summer:
1) External 46° C dry bulb, 24° C wet bulb temperature
2) Daily Range 14° K dry bulb temperature
b. Winter:
1) External 15° C dry bulb temperature
3. Internal Conditions:
a. Temperature (summer):
b. Sitting/ living / Dressing /dining 23° C ± 1’C
c. Bedroom 23° C ± 1’C
d. Kitchen 23° C ± 1’C 1
e. Bath and toilet 23° C ± 1’C
f. Main Areas 23° C ± 1’C
4. Fresh Air and Exhaust Air Provisions
a. Ventilation will be provided in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 “Ventilation for
Acceptable Indoor Air Quality”.
5. Full building shall be under positive pressure to avoid infiltration. Also, each Tenant
space/Anchor/Store shall be under positive pressure by providing 10% extra fresh air than
required total exhaust as mentioned in schedule above.
6. Exhaust ventilation from different areas in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 shall be
as follows:
a. Areas requiring no exhaust shall be pressurized by returning less air than supplied.
b. Areas requiring exhaust (toilets, kitchens, laundries, stores) shall be maintained
under negative pressure by exhausting volumes more than the supply volume.
c. Corridors shall be under positive pressure with respect to exhaust areas, and
negative with respect to other areas.
d. Transfer air grilles shall be provided as required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 1 BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 7. Noise Levels
a. Maximum noise levels (Room Criteria Neutral - RCN) generated by the operation of
the building services installation in various areas shall be as under, based on
ASHRAERecommendations:
1) Living Area NC 35 - 40

8. Drawings use and interpretation:

a. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general arrangements of systems and
equipment, except when specifically dimensioned or detailed.
b. For exact locations of building elements, refer to dimensioned architectural/structural
drawings.
c. Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings.
d. Piping and ductwork plans are intended to show size, approximate location, direction
and general relationship of one work phase to another, but not the exact details or
arrangements.
1) Any sizes, capacities or information not shown on the drawings shall be
determined by the Contractor. Calculations shall be submitted in this respect for
the approval of the Client.
9. Installation of all systems and equipment is subject to clarification as indicated in reviewed
shop drawings and field coordination drawings:
a. Generally, layout pipelines requiring gravity drainage first; followed by large pipe
mains, ductwork and electrical conduits. This procedure is intended to promote
orderly installation, but not to establish precedence of trades.
b. Dimensions indicated anywhere are limiting dimensions. Do not use equipment
exceeding dimensions indicated on detail drawings or arrangements that reduce
required clearances or exceed specified maximum dimension.
10. Description of systems: Furnish and install all materials which result, upon completion, in
functioning systems in compliance with performance requirements specified. Furnish and
install also material required by any modifications resulting from review shop drawings
and field coordinated drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide materials and equipment and perform all work in accord with the latest edition of the
following documents:
1. Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC).
2. Uniform Plumbing Code(UPC).
3. American Gas Association(AGA).
4. National Electrical Code(NEC).
5. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA).
6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA).
8. All authorities having jurisdiction.
9. All codes and regulations specified in each section of the specifications.
10. Equipment manufacturer shall be engaged in the manufacturing of the grade of equipment
specified for at least ten years (unless otherwise specified) and published catalogues
showing equipment performance.
B. All references made to industry standards and codes are intended to indicate the latest issue or
publication of the standard as applicable.
1.3 SUBMITTALS (SEE SECTION 013000)
A. Product Data: Shop drawings will not be reviewed until product data and calculations are
submitted.
B. Shop drawings, test reports and certificates as indicated in each section shall be submitted in
English and Metric Units.
C. Submittal Descriptions (SD): The term "shop drawings" or " submittal descriptions" includes
drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules,
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 2 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 performance and test data, and similar materials furnished by the Contractor to explain in detail
specific portions of the work required by the contract. The following items are descriptions and
definitions of data to be submitted under the term "Shop Drawings" or "Submittal Descriptions".
The requirements to actually furnish the applicable items will be called out in the Technical
Specifications. Except as otherwise specified, submittal shall contain information required by
the following general description, and additionally, such special information required by the
individual technical sections.
1. SD-1, Certificates of Compliance:
a. Certificates of Compliance shall include material or equipment manufacturer's
statement that the supplied material or equipment meets all specified requirements.
Each certificate shall be signed by an official authorized to certify, on behalf of
material supplier or product manufacturer, and shall identify quantity and date or
dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. Certification shall not be
construed as relieving the Contractor from furnishing materials and products
conforming to contract requirements.
2. SD-2, Connection Diagrams:
a. Connection diagrams shall indicate the relations and connections of devices and
apparatus. They shall show the general physical layout of all controls, the
interconnection of one system, or portion of system, with another, and all internal
tubing, wiring, and other devices.
3. SD-3, Control Diagrams:
a. Control diagrams shall show the physical and functional relationship of equipment.
Electric or electronic wiring diagrams shall show size, type and capacity of the
systems.
4. SD-4, Coordination Drawings:
a. Coordination drawings shall be composite drawings showing coordination of work of
one trade with that of another trade and to the structural; and architectural elements
of the work. Composite drawings shall be in sufficient detail to show overall
dimensions of related items, clearances, and relative locations of work in allotted
spaces. Drawings shall indicate conflicts or clearance problems between the various
trades.
b. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and showing on the drawings
(enlarged to 1:50 scale) the following items of work located in or above ceilings.
1) Recessed light fixtures.
2) Material conveying systems.
3) Ductwork and appurtenances.
4) Plumbing waste, vent and roof drainage.
5) Fire protection (sprinkler system).
6) HVAC piping.
7) Domestic water (Hot or Cold).
8) Electrical conduits and cables.
9) All other utilities and services.
10) The above list, in descending order, is the precedence assigned the work items
for space priority. An exception to the precedence listing would be the gravity
flow requirements for plumbing waste, and roof drainage.
c. The Contractor, with reference and consideration to the structural, mechanical,
electrical, fire protection, plumbing and reflected ceiling plans, will draw, to scale, the
proposed installation showing duct sizes, equipment layouts, and dimensions from
column lines and from finished floors to bottom of ducts. Ductwork will be maintained
as tight as possible to the underside of floor slabs and /or beams. In congested
areas, the Mechanical Contractor shall, in coordination with other trades, locate the
HVAC equipment to satisfy the contract documents.
d. When the ductwork and piping drawings for the earliest scheduled area have been
completed, the Contractor shall provide the Client with Three sets of prints for each
particular participant in the effort. The major components to be indicated include (but
are not limited to):
1) Roof drain leaders.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 3 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 2) Large waste piping.
3) Sprinkler mains.
4) Hot water mains.
5) Chilled water mains / Refrigerant pipe
6) Conduit runs.
7) Duct work runs.
(a) Information delineated will be distance from column center lines,
pipe/equipment size and distance from finished floor to bottom of pipe/
equipment.
e. Equipment, ductwork, and piping supports concrete inserts: Fully coordinate the
location of concrete inserts to insure proper location and submit as part of the
coordination drawings the location and selection of inserts for approval.
5. SD-5, Design Analysis And Calculations:
a. Design analysis and supporting calculations shall be those performed in support of
design verification of the individual items and to determine any unidentified sizes or
capacities. The Contractor shall submit to the Client the following calculations for
approval without extra cost:
b. Heat Load Calculations
c. Ventilation Calculations
d. Sizes of Expansion tank.
e. Package units & AHU’s and fans final total pressure loss.
f. All pumps final head.
g. Sound attenuator and silencers design and calculations.
h. Firefighting hydraulic calculations and Gaseous fire suppression system’s
calculations (by specialist supplier appointed to supply the equipment)
i. All other relevant calculations deemed necessary for the systems installation per
client’s requirement.
6. SD-6, Equipment Data:
a. Equipment data shall provide information regarding use life, system functional flows,
safety features, mechanical automated details, automatic interlocks, and such
features as electrical system protective device ratings.
7. SD-7, Equipment Foundation Data:
a. Equipment foundation data shall include equipment weight and operating loads;
horizontal and vertical loads (dead load, light load, and impact); starting torques and
their direction; rpm of equipment; size, location and projection of anchor bolts;
horizontal and vertical clearances for installation, operating and maintenance; plan
dimensions of foundations and relative elevations; and installation requirements such
as noise abatement, vibration isolation, and utility services.
8. SD-8, Spare Parts , Special Tools and Test Kits Data:
a. Four months prior the date of preliminary handing over, the Contractor shall submit to
the Client detailed lists of spare parts recommended for each item of equipment. The
lists shall include complete description of all spare parts, manufacturer source of
supply, part number, where to be used, service life, supply lead times, and the
recommended quantity required for efficient operation and maintenance for one, two
and five years period.
b. The Client shall review and approve these lists, and the Contractor shall furnish the
spare parts in accordance with Section 017800 of the Specification.
c. Four months prior the date of preliminary handing-over, the Contractor shall submit to
the Client lists of all special tools which are not usually available but required for
operation, maintenance and repair of the equipment, and lists of test kits designed
specially for the equipment. The lists shall include complete information such as
description, supplier name and intended uses.
d. After approval by the Client, the Contractor shall provide these spare parts, tools and
kits to the Client in accordance with Section 017800 of the Specifications.
9. SD-9, Operation And Maintenance Instructions: (See section 017800 - Division-1 General
Requirement)

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 4 BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 a. The technical specifications identify requirements for operation, maintenance
instructions and parts, and describe specific testing requirements for certain items of
equipment and/or systems. Where such requirements exist, the Contractor shall
furnish commercially available standard operation and maintenance data, including
operating instruction, maintenance instructions and part listings. Testing procedures
shall be furnished as required to demonstrate full compliance with the technical
provisions. Detailed requirements for these items are as follows:
b. Information required for the preparation of O & M manuals may be furnished in the
schematics, and other printed instructions. Data shall include as a minimum the
following items:
c. Recommended procedures and frequencies for preventive maintenance, inspection,
adjustment, lubrication, cleaning, etc.
d. Special tools and equipment required for testing and maintenance.
e. Parts lists reflecting the true manufacturer 's name, part number, and
nomenclature.
f. Recommended spares by part number and nomenclature and space stocking levels.
g. Integrated mechanical and electrical system schematics and diagrams to permit
operation and trouble shooting after acceptance of the system.
h. Trouble shooting, check-out, repair, and replacement procurement procedures.
i. Operating instructions including start-up and shut- down procedures.
j. The Contractor shall provide in each mechanical room large scale colored diagrams
showing the equipment in this room and the sequences of their operation, as well as,
the other related equipment. These diagrams shall be hung to the wall in a glass
frame. The size of these diagrams shall be approved by the Client.
k.Safety considerations including load limits, speed, temperature, and pressure. Six
copies of this data shall be submitted at Four months prior to initial hand-over and in
accord with section 017800. Test data shall be legible and of good equality. Light
sensitive reproduction techniques are acceptable provided finished pages are clear ,
legible, and not subject to fading. Pages for vendor data and / or manuals shall be
bound in three-ring, loose leaf binder. The binder shall lay flat and sheets printed so
as to be readily readable. Caution and warning indications shall be clear and well
labeled.
1) All above data and information shall be submitted to the Client not later than four
months before the date of preliminary handing over.
l. Contractor shall include in his cost necessary provision to provide classroom and field
instructions in operation and maintenance of systems equipment where required by
the technical provisions. These training services shall be prepared by the Contractor,
using the manufacturer's factory trained personnel or qualified representatives,
without extra cost.
m. Client shall be given seven days written notices of scheduled instructional services.
Instructional materials belonging to the manufacturer or vendor, shall be made
available to the Client with no extra cost.
n. Contractor will submit a schedule showing when each system will be tested.
Schedule shall include anticipated length of each test, a list of test apparatus, number
of personnel required, responsibility of each, and a testing validation procedure
itemized to the extent that will permit recording operating capability performance
system requirements. A remarks column of the testing validation procedure shall
include all necessary references to operating limits of time, pressure, temperature,
volume, voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration, adjustments,
cleaning, and other special system notes. Six copies of the completed test log shall
be delivered to the Client, not later than 48 hours after the completion of each test.
10. SD-10, Test And Balance Reports:
a. Except as otherwise specified, an independent testing and balancing agency
approved by the Client shall do this task and prepare reports of inspections
balancing, testing and laboratory tests, including analysis and interpretation of test
results, where applicable. Each report shall be properly identified and, the testing
agency's certification of the test results shall be provided. Test methods used and
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 5 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 compliance with recognized test standards shall be described.
D. Where specifications require factory representative to supervise installation, startup,
adjustments and/or proper operation of equipment of systems, provide signed statement from
said representative that all services specified have been satisfactorily completed, before final
payment will be made for that portion of the project.
1.4 FACTORY VISIT FOR PERFORMANCE WITNESS TEST
A. The contractor shall facilitate and coordinate, that the testing of the material / equipment /
system is been witnessed by the client before being shipped. Cost incurred due to delay and/or
lack of coordination shall be on the contractor’s account
B. The witness testing shall cover the following at minimum:
1. General Factory Visit. Witness the facilities and line of production
2. Submission of the manufacturer quality procedures for the procured product prior to the
scheduled factory visit.
3. Witness of the final assembly of the product specific to the project
4. Witness the testing of all parameters per manufacturer’s recommendations. A copy of all
testing parameters and recommended methodologies shall be submitted to the client and
consultant at least 10 days prior to the factory visit, which shall facilitate client
familiarization with the testing procedures.
5. Include “factory visit for performance witness test” in relevant specifications sections for all
of the following equipment:
a. Variable Refrigerant Flow System
b. FAHU’S
1.5 PROTECTION
A. Provide covering and shielding for all equipment provided to protect from damage.
B. Protect nameplates on motors, pumps and similar equipment.
C. Protect plumbing fixtures and brass or chromium plated trim, valves and piping from damage.
D. Keep dirt and debris out of pipes and ducts.
E. Repair, restore and replace damaged items.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Examine Contract Documents to determine how other work will affect execution of mechanical
work.
B. Determine and verify locations of all existing utilities on or near site.
C. Make arrangements for and pay for necessary permits, licenses, and inspections.
D. Record drawings:
1. Keep a complete set of all mechanical drawings in job site office for showing actual
installation of mechanical systems and equipment.
a. Use this set of drawings for no other purpose.
b. Where any material, equipment, or system components are installed differently from
that shown, indicate such differences clearly and neatly.
c. At project completion, submit the record set of drawings in accord with Section
017800.
E. ElectricalWork:
1. Under Division 26, MECHANICAL, provide the following items of electrical work which
shall conform with the applicable requirements of Electrical Division
a. Control wiring.
b. Inter lock wiring for mechanical equipment.
2. Under, Electrical Division, Provide:
a. Power wiring complete from power source to motor or equipment junction box,
including power wiring through motor starters.
b. Motor control centers or motor starter panel boards.
c. All miscellaneous individual motor starters unless noted or specified otherwise.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 6 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1.7 EXTRA STOCK AND SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor should provide an adequate amount of spare parts and extra stock as per the
manufacturer recommendations and for operating period as specified in the relevant sections.
But the amount of these spare parts and extra stock should not be less than 15% of the
quantities already required for proper operation of all mechanical systems. These spare parts
and extra stock should be provided accordance with section 017800 of Division-1 “Operation
and Maintenance Data: Spare Parts and Extra Stock”.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Refer to section 017800 of Division-1 for “Operation and Maintenance Data”.
B. Maintenance service during warranty period shall be available 24 hours in a day.
1.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS
A. Words in the singular shall also mean and include the plural, wherever the context so indicates,
and words in the Plural shall mean the singular, wherever the context so indicates.
B. The words "Plans" and drawings' are used throughout the Contract Documents as synonyms,
with the same meaning.
C. "As approved": The terms "as approved", as selected" other similar constructions refer to
actions by the Client, except where specific actions by other parties are specified. Approval,
where required for any item shall be obtained from the Client in writing.
D. "Perform", "Install" etc..: Instructions to "Perform", "Install", "Provide", "Complete" and all other
imperative statements within the Contract Documents refer to actions that shall be performed
by the Contractor or his Subcontractors unless another party is specifically given responsibility.
E. "Provide": The term "Provide", as used in these Contract Documents, shall mean furnish, pay
for, delivery, store, erect, install, attach, clean, put in working order, repair and otherwise
incorporate in the work as a complete, secure, functioning item.
F. "Including", "such as": The terms "including" and "such as ", as used in these Contract
Documents, shall always be taken in the most inclusive sense, namely, "including, but not
limited to", and "such as, but not limited to".
G. "Option" The term "option" as used in these Contract Documents, shall mean a choice among
the two or more specified projects or procedures which shall be made by the Contractor. The
choice is not "whether" the work is to be performed, but "which" Product or "which" procedure is
to be used. The product or procedure chosen by the Contractor shall be provided at no
increase in the cost to the Client and with no lessening of the Contractor's responsibility for its
performance, and shall be coordinated with the rest of the working such a way that the
Performance of the Project is not adversely affected.
H. "As shown" or "as indicated": The terms as used in these contract documents shall mean as
drawn, noted, dimensioned, scheduled, or as specified, all or any, as the case may be. In case
of conflict between drawing, note, dimension, schedule or specification, obtain interpretation
from the Client before Proceeding.
I.The word "The Client", “Owner”, "The Client Representative" and "The Engineer" are used
throughout the Contract Documents as synonyms with the same meaning.
1.10 INSPECTIONS
A. The Client has the right to inspect all material and equipment at all stages of development or
fabrication, and shall be allowed access to the site and to the Contractor’s and supplier’s shops
to conduct such inspection. Inspection by the Client will not release the Contractor from
responsibility or liability with respect to material or equipment.
B. When specified inspections or tests are required by the Contract Documents the work involved
shall not proceed beyond that point until such inspections or tests have been approved by the
Client. The Contractor shall inform the Client of progress of the work and shall give the Client a
minimum of ten (10) working days inspections and tests. Contractor shall insure that the portion
of work to be inspected is safe, accessible, dry, ventilated and well fit.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 7 BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 C. When the Contract Documents require approval and inspection of the work by other agencies
or organizations before installation or operation, the Contractor shall obtain such approval and
submit one signed original and three copies of the approval to the Client.
D. Preliminary Inspection: During the preliminary inspection, equipment shall be operated and
required test procedures performed to demonstrate that individual units of equipment have
been completed and function in accordance with the Contracts Documents and to identify
deficiencies and items of work which are not complete. Required modifications and adjustments
determined during each test shall be completed prior to the pre-final inspection.
E. Pre-final Inspection: During the pre-final inspection, equipment shall be operated and tested to
fully demonstrate to the Client that all individual components functions as required by the
Contract Documents and that all systems are internally coordinated as well as coordinated with
other systems. Manufacturer’s authorized representatives shall be present during this
inspection. All items of deficiencies and required adjustments noted shall be corrected before
the final inspection is scheduled.
F. Final Inspection: After all equipment and systems have passed the pre-final inspection and are
completely installed with controls, instrumentation, safety devices and all items of work
completed including correction of deficiencies, and adjustments, the final inspection and test
shall be scheduled. This inspection shall consist of operating the equipment and systems to
demonstrate that all elements are ready to be placed in operation to meet the design rated
capacity and performance.
1. The Engineer will prepare a punch list of items to be accomplished prior to final
acceptance.
G. Equipment to be Tested: The Contractor shall conduct operation tests of all equipment of this
division and control system.
1.11 TEST REPORTS AND CERTIFICATES
A. Certified Test Reports: Where certified test reports are required by the Contract Documents,
they shall meet the following requirements: Before delivery of materials, for which certified test
reports are required, certified copies of the reports of all tests required in referenced
publications or specified within the Contract Client Documents shall be submitted for approval
to the Client. The testing shall be performed in an approved independent laboratory, within one
year of submittal of the reports for approval. Test reports shall be accompanied by a notarized
certificate from the manufacturer or supplier certifying that the tested material meets the
specified requirements and is of the same type, quality, manufacture and make as that
proposed to be supplied.
B. Certificate of Compliance: At the option of the Client or where specified the Contractor may, in
lieu of the specified tests and other tests required in the various reference documents, furnish a
Certificate of Compliance from the manufacturer. The Certificate shall state that the
manufacturer has performed all required tests, that tests have been performed within one year
of submittal of the Certificate; that products tested were of the same type, quality, manufacture
and make as those proposed to be supplied.
C.Manufacturer’s Certificate:
1. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’s certificates as required by the contract
documents.
2. Manufacturer’s Certificates shall state that the equipment has been installed under either
the continuous or periodic supervision of the manufacturer’s authorized representative,
that it has been adjusted and initially operated in the presence of the manufacturer’s
authorized representative, and that it is operating in accordance with the specified
requirements, to the manufacturer’s satisfaction.
1.12 GUARANTEES
A. All mechanical systems, equipment, installations, components, spare parts, extra stocks and
other mechanical items should be guaranteed in accordance with section 017800 “Guarantees”
of Division-1.
B. All guarantee periods should be as section 017800 or as specified for the relevant item.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 8 BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Use only prime quality, new materials, apparatus and equipment.
B. All materials and apparatus indicated by these specifications shall be procured, when available
and meet the specifications from an in-Kingdom manufacturer.
C.Material and equipment shall be a standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of the products and shall be similar to items that have been in satisfactory use for
at least ten 10 years prior to bid opening.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Structural steel for supports: ASTM A36.
1. Galvanize all steel supports.
2. Shop fabricate for field assembly using bolts.
B. Access doors, panels and frames in ceilings, walls, and floors: Style and type as required for
material in which installed.
1. Size: 300 X 300 mm minimum, as indicated or as required to allow inspection and removal
of items served.
2. 8 mm minimum sheet metal, cadmium-plated or galvanized after fabrication.
3. Key lock, keyed alike, for panels in public areas.
4. Prime Painted.
5. U/L labeled when in fire-rated construction.
6. Furnish to the contractor responsible for the installation of walls, floors, and ceiling to
permit access to all equipment and piping requiring service or adjustment.
C. Equipment Guards;
1. Use suitable structural frames with minimum 2.5 mm, 20 mm galvanized mesh, or
expanded metal mesh.
2. Attach to equipment by removable clips and bolts with wing nuts, or other approved
connectors.
3. At belts, provide opening for measuring RPMS.
4. Provide guard at all belts, couplings, moving machinery and equipment.
5. Design for easy access to belts and other items requiring replacement.
D.Sleeves and Plates:
1. All pipe sleeves shall be constructed of schedule 40 steel pipes unless otherwise indicated
on the drawings.
2. Provide 0.6 mm galvanized sheet metal sleeves for all exposed ductwork passing through
walls and ceilings. Duct sleeves shall be large enough to pass duct with insulation and
have 50 mm flange returned against floor, wall, partition, or ceiling.
3. At all sleeves, seal all openings between pipes and ducts and corresponding sleeve to
prevent sound transmission and maintain fire rating. Penetration seals shall be silicone
rubber sealant.
2.3 MOTORS AND CONTROLS
A. Motor controls and wiring for controls: Provide where indicated as part of Division 15 work.
1. Include line voltage controls, reduced voltage controls, control switches, starters,
disconnect switches, conduit, and wiring.
2. Perform work as specified in Electrical Division.
3. Where equipment provided requires different sizes or additional motors, provide any
additional wiring or controls necessary at no extra cost to Client.
B. Motors: Ball or roller bearing type, high efficiency type, with starting and running characteristics
consistent with torque and speed requirements of driven machine.
1. Use motors rated in accord with NEMA performance standards to carry full nameplate
load continuously at maximum temperature rise of 40 °C above ambient with service
factor of 1.15.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 9 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 2. Motor horsepower as scheduled. Where substitute manufacturers are provided with
different control panels, starters, and electrical characteristics from scheduled equipment,
contractor shall coordinate complete installation and assume any additional costs.
3. Do not allow power requirements of driven machine to exceed nominal nameplate rating
of motor furnished.
4. Do not include service factor when selecting motor horsepower.
5. Provide motors, motor protection and motor starters for all items which require electrical
drive.
a. Motors less than 3/4 HP to be switch start (direct starting).
b. Motors greater than or equal to 3/4 HP but less than 5 HP shall be provided with
contactor and relay protection.
c. Motors greater than 5 HP shall be provided with starter system with protection. All
starters shall conform to the latest applicable NEMA.
d. Standards for type size and duty as specifically applied. Starters shall be of the H-O-
A type with auxiliary contacts as required for interlocking by the Automatic
Temperature Controls or Electrical Contactors.
6. All motors shall be rated as noted in the schedules of the equipment DWGS.
7. If brake horsepower (BHP) requirement of equipment furnished is greater than BHP of
equipment specified, increase motor size to maintain specified BHP/motor horsepower
ratio, without any additional costs.
8. Where specified for special applications, provide motors with class F insulation (500 C
continuous duty).
9. Power factor for motors should not be less than 0.85
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. When changes in location of any work are required, obtain approval of the Client before making
change. make changes at no extra cost.
B. Do not change indicated sizes without written approval of the Client.
C. Provide all necessary offsets and crossovers in piping and ductwork, whether indicated or not.
D. Install piping and ductwork parallel to walls and vertically plumb.
E. In electrical equipment rooms, install no piping except floor drains, and precaution fire
protection piping.
3.2 CUTTING ANDPATCHING
A. Perform or pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing, patching and finishing of work performed under
other sections where it is necessary to disturb such work to permit installation of mechanical
work.
B. Avoid cutting, where possible, by setting sleeves or frames, and by requesting openings in
advance. Coordinate locations with work performed under other sections.
C. Before cutting of structural elements, obtain approval of the Client.
1. Use only approved methods.
2. Cut all holes neatly and as small as possible to admit work.
3. Do not weaken walls or floors; locate holes in concrete to miss structural members.
D. Locate openings and sleeves to permit neat installation of piping, ductwork and equipment.
E. Do not remove or damage fireproofing materials.
1. Install hangers, inserts, supports, and anchors prior to installation of fireproofing.
2. Repair or place fireproofing removed or damaged, at no extra cost.
3.3 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A. Perform all excavating and backfilling for all work in accord with Sections 02201.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Install all equipment in accord with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 10 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 1. Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated.
2. Check loading and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings.
3. Do not cut or weld to building structural members.
C. Verify that equipment will fit support layouts indicated. Where substitute equipment is used,
revise indicated supports to fit.
D. Arrange for necessary openings to allow for admittance of equipment.
E. Where equipment can not be installed as structure is being erected, provide and arrange for
building-in of boxes, sleeves or other devices to allow later installation.
F. Make all penetrations through roofs prior to installation of roofing. For penetrations required
after installation of roofing:
1. Provide approved roofing and flashing repairs of penetrations through previously installed
roofing.
G. Repair and replace roof construction which is damaged by this work in manner which will not
nullify roof guarantee.
H. Install equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance.
1. Maintain easy access to filters, motors, drives, compressors, and all other equipment.
2. Relocate items which interfere with access.
I. Provide concrete foundations or pads required for mechanical equipment, as indicated. Sizes of
pads shall be coordinated with mechanical drawings, and shall be min. 150 mm larger in each
direction than the equipment supplied to the job.
1. Unless otherwise noted, install 100 mm high (above finished floor) concrete pads.
2. Use 30 MPa concrete.
3. Reinforce with (60 x 60 mm) mesh with short dowels into floor.
4. Chamfer top edges 20 mm.
5. Rub all faces smooth with carborundum block.
6. Set anchor bolts for equipment.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY OTHERS
A. Receive, uncrate and set in place all mechanical equipment furnished by Client or other
Divisions.
B. Provide rough-in and final connections to all equipment requiring mechanical services.
1. See plumbing Fixture and Equipment Schedule.
2. For equipment furnished by the Client or other Divisions: obtain rough-in data from final
shop drawings.
C. Install all fittings, valves, and other items furnished as integral part of equipment, but shipped
loose.
3.6 WELDING
A. All welding and brazing under these specifications shall include the furnishing of all plant tools,
equipment, services, materials, and the performance of all operations necessary for or
incidental to a complete object in accordance with the Contact Drawings and these
Specifications.
B. Pressure vessels:
1. The welding of pressure vessels shall meet all the requirements of ANSI/ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Divisions 1, 2 and Companion Codes.
2. The brazing of pressure vessels shall meet all the requirements of ANSI/ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 and companion codes.
C. Piping Systems:
1. The welding of liquid piping systems shall meet all of the requirements of ANSI/ASME
B31.3 and companion codes.
D. Brazed Piping Systems:
1. The brazing of all refrigeration piping systems shall meet all the requirements of ANSI
B31.5 and Companion Codes.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 11 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 E. Non-Structural Systems:
1. The welding of all structural fabrication not associated with pressure vessels, reinforcing
steel, structural sheet or cranes, shall meet requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.1, Structural
Welding Code. Each manufacturer or contractor shall conduct the tests required by this
code to qualify the welding procedures.
2. The welding of reinforcing steel shall meet the requirements of the AWSD 1.4, Structural
Welding Code Reinforcing Steel, and Companion Codes.
3. The welding of structural sheet steel shall meet the requirements of AWSD 1.3,
Specification for Welding Sheet Steel in Structures, and Companion Codes.
F. General Welding Requirements:
1. For any fabrication: Contractor can not start any work prior to official approval of the
applicable welding procedure specifications(s), procedure Qualification Record(s) and
welder qualification records, (WQR) for approval.
2. Welding shall not be done when the surfaces are wet or exposed to rain or high wind.
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of metals adjacent to the welding
operations from spatter. Non-flammable sheets such as mineral fiber cloth shall be used.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all heat affected coating materials
and the progressive coat by coat restoration of the coating.
G. Welding Inspection:
1. Fabrication/erection inspection and tests shall be per formed as necessary prior to
assembly, during assembly, and during welding to ensure that materials and workmanship
meet the requirements of the contract documents. Fabrication/ erection inspection and
testing are the responsibilities of the Contractor.
2. The Client will ascertain that all fabrication and erection by welding is performed in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Prior to the Client's
inspection, all slag and scale shall be removed from all welds. The Procedures employed
shall not produce notches in either the weld metal or the adjacent base metal.
3. All inspections shall be in accordance with the applicable details of the specified code(s).
4. After any required corrections of defects have been satisfactorily completed, welds shall
be cleaned to a bright unpitted, unscarred metal surface and retreated, coated and
finished, and painted accordance with the applicable contract documents.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. End of piping and unconnected valves shall be caffed or plugged at end of each work day with
wood plug or temporary closure.
B. Motors and accessories shall be covered during testing of nearby piping systems and field
painting occurring at the same time.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform indicated tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance.
1. Conduct tests in presence of the Client and if required , inspectors of agencies having
jurisdiction.
2. Arrange date of tests in advance with the Client, manufacturer and installer. Give all
inspectors minimum of 24 hours notice.
3. Furnish or arrange for use of electrical energy, steam , water or gas required for tests.
4. Furnish all lubricating materials required for test.
B. Repair or replace equipment, and systems found inoperative job defective and re-test.
1. If equipment or system fails the re-test, replace it with products which conform with
Contract Documents.
2. Continue remedial measures and re-tests until satisfactory results are obtained.
C. Test equipment and systems as indicated for each item, unless otherwise recommended by
manufacturer. Tests specified in Section 230593 Testing Adjusting and Balancing, need not be
duplicated under other section.
3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Inspect all equipment and put in good working order.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 12 BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 B. Clean all exposed and concealed items:
1. Clean air surfaces of coils, fans (including fan wheels and motors), air handler plenums
and air filter frames.
2. Clean floor drains, cleanouts, and plumbing fixtures.
3. Clean specialties such as traps and strainers and all equipment surfaces such as pumps,
motors, boilers, chillers, etc...
4. Clean finned elements of fin tubes radiation with compressed air.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. All equipment, except in finished rooms, shall be identified by stenciling the title of the
equipment as taken from the plans in a position that is clearly visible from the floor. The letters
shall be made with black paint and shall be not less than 50 mm high. The titles shall be short
and concise and abbreviations may not be used. In finished rooms, equipment shall be
identified by engraved nameplates.
B. No identification shall be done until all painting required under the architectural section of these
Specifications has been accomplished.
C. Identification shall be both in English and Arabic languages on the same size.
3.11 PUTTING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION "START UP"
A. At time agreed to by the Client, put all systems into satisfactory operation.
B. Operate all systems in good working order for a period as required by the Client.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0500 - 13 BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 23 05 13
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HVACEQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTIONINCLUDES
A. Single phase electric motors.
B. Three phase electric motors.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.
B. Section 26 29 13 - Enclosed Controllers.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. IEEE 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators;
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2004.
B. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition
Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and
Supplements.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
C. Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase
motors larger than 1/2 horsepower.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication,
and wiring instructions.
E. Operation Data: Include instructions for safe operating procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Include assembly drawings, bearing data including replacement sizes, and
lubrication instructions.
1.5 QUALITYASSURANCE
A. Conform to NFPA 70.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and
suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment
and store separately.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ANDREQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Service: Refer to Section 26 27 17 for required electrical characteristics.
B. Construction:
1. Open drip-proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
2. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
3. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,
service factor, and motor enclosure type.
C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating motor horsepower, voltage, phase, cycles, RPM, full load amps,
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
23 0513 - 1
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
 locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor, power
factor, efficiency.
D. WiringTerminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials
indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded
conduit connection in end frame.
2.2 APPLICATIONS
A. Exception: Motors less than 250 watts, for intermittent service may be the equipment
manufacturer's standard and need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans, oil burners, and centrifugal pumps: Split phase
type.
C. Single phase motors for shaft mounted fans or blowers: Permanent split capacitor type.
D. Single phase motors for fans, pumps, blowers, and air compressors: Capacitor start type.
E. Single phase motors for fans, blowers, and pumps: Capacitor start, capacitor run type.
F. Motors located in exterior locations, wet air streams downstream of sprayed coil dehumidifiers,
draw through cooling towers, air cooled condensers, humidifiers, direct drive axial fans, roll
filters, explosion proof environments, and dust collection systems: Totally enclosed type.
G. Motors located in outdoors, in wet air streams downstream of sprayed coil dehumidifiers, in
draw through cooling towers, and in humidifiers: Totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy-treated
type.
H. Motors located outdoors and in draw through cooling towers: Totally enclosed weatherproof
epoxy-sealedtype.
2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service
Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.
2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT-SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip-proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise)
insulation, minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset
overloadprotector.
2.5 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
C. Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E. Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors
with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
F. Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

23 0513 - 2
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
 Factor, prelubricated sleeve bearings.
G. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor,
prelubricated ball bearings.
2.6 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Six times full load current.
C. Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B
characteristics.
D. Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B
motors.
E. Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F. Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from
electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data.
G. Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets of
cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
H. Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded
in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter;
refer to Section 26 29 13.
I. Weatherproof Epoxy Sealed Motors: Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with
rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with
waterproof non-washing grease.
J. Nominal Efficiency: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance with
IEEE 112.
K. Nominal Power Factor: As scheduled at full load and rated voltage when tested in accordance
with IEEE 112.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

23 0513 - 3
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
 SECTION 23 0528
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all hangers and supports for mechanical
piping, ductwork and equipment as indicated on the drawings and as specified in this section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1. ASTM A 36 Specification for Structural steel.
2. ASTM A 780 Practice for Repair of Hot-Dipped Galvanized Coatings.
B. MSS-Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry Inc.
1. MSS SP-58 Pipe Hangers and support - Materials Design and
2. MSS SP-69 Pipe Hangers and support - Section and Application.
3. MSS SP-77 Guide Li es for Pipe support contractual relationship.
4. MSS SP-89 Pipe Hangers and Support - Fabrication and Installation.
5. MSS SP90 Guide Lines and Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
C. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
1. ASME B31 Pressure Piping Code.
2. ASME B31.9 Building Service Piping.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation instructions
for each type of support and anchor.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and
anchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated vertical piping clamps to suit vertical piping systems and to
exactly fit pipe size of bare pipe.
Extension clamps shall be of carbon steel and shall be UL listed.
2.2 HORIZONTAL PIPING/DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated horizontal piping/duct hangers and supports to suit
horizontal piping systems. Use only one type by one manufacturer for each piping/duct service.
Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe/duct size, and to exactly fit around
piping/duct insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping/duct. Provide copper-plated
hangers and supports for copper piping system.
B. Clevis Hangers: Galvanised carbon steel with vertical adjustment feature.
C. Swivel Rings: Malleable iron with adjustable hangers.
D. Wrought Rings: Carbon steel with adjustment feature.
E. Concrete Inserts: Inserts shall be of malleable iron body and nut with recessed sides to
accommodate reinforcing rods and lateral adjustments. Inserts shall have 25 mm maximum
body with width between reinforcing bars in ribs.
F. Expansion Shields: Expansion shields shall be provided for rod hanger fasteners with steel
shell sand expander plugs and for concrete fasteners.
G. Eye Rods: Eye rods shall have welded eyes with left or right hand thread as required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0528 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

 H. Tube Straps: Copper-plated steel for copper tubing for pipe sizes up to and including 25 mm
diameter, with securing holes.
I. Beam Clamps: Malleable iron jaw with steel nut and bolt, steel hook rod with nut and spring
washer.
J. C-Clamps: Malleable iron clamps, with hardened steel cup point set screw retainer lip and lock
nut.
K. Toggle Bolts: Cast iron with rod coupling attachment.
L. Expansion Bolts: 10 mm x 150 mm.
M. Hanger Rods: Galvanized carbon steel, threaded at bottom and top, as follows:
1. Pipe Size Rod Size
a. 50 mm and smaller 10 mm
b. 63 mm to 90 mm 13 mm
c. 100 mm and 127 mm 16 mm
d. 150 mm to 150 mm 19 mm
e. 300 mm 25 mm
N. Hanger Rod Schedule
1. Pipe Size Maximum Allowable
a. 25 mm 2130 mm
b. 32 mm 2440 mm
c. 38 mm 2740 mm
d. 50 mm 3050 mm
e. 62 mm 3350 mm
f. 75 mm 3660 mm
g. 100 mm 4270 mm
h. 125 mm 4880 mm
i. 150 mm 5180 mm
j. 200 mm 5790 mm
k. 250 mm 6710 mm
l. 300 mm 7010 mm
2. For trapeze hangers, take spacing of smallest pipe on trapeze.
3. The spacing shown on the schedule is maximum spacing pipe will span. The hanger
supports and structural elements of the building shall be checked for load support.
Spacing may have to be reduced to lighten load on certain hanger supports.
O. Recommended Hanger Sizes for Rectangular Ducts
1. Longest Round Strap Trapeze Maximum
2. Up thru 450 ga.8 wire 25mm x 1.6mm 25x25x3mm 3050 mm
3. 475-750 ga.8 wire 25mm x 1.6mm 25x25x3mm 3050 mm
4. 775-1050 6 mm rod 25mm x 1.6mm 38x38x3mm 3050 mm
5. 1075-1500 10 mm rod 25mm x 1.6mm 38x38x3mm 3050 mm
6. 1525-2100 10 mm rod 38mm x 1.6mm 50x50x3mm 2440 mm
7. 2125-2400 10 mm rod 38mm x 1.6mm 50x50x5mm 2440 mm
8. over 2425 10 mm rod 38mm x 1.6mm 50x50x6mm 2440 mm
2.3 SLEEVES
A. Provide opening around all piping passing through walls, floors, roofs, foundations, footings,
and grade beams sufficient to allow free movement of piping. Provide sleeves as shown on
drawings and as specified.
1. Box out openings larger than 350 mm diameter.
2. Coordinate location of any opening in structural systems with The Engineer.
3. Maintain rating of fire-rated and smoke rated construction.
4. Set all sleeves with ends flush with finished surfaces.
5. Sleeves for insulated piping: Large enough to allow insulation to pass through sleeve.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0528 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

 B. Use steel pipe sleeves in following locations:
1. Fire-rated and smoke-rated construction.
2. Floors: Galvanized.
3. Concrete walls.
4. Mechanical rooms, and stairwells.
C. Sleeves in other locations: As detailed. If not detailed, use 1.2 mm galvanized sheet metal or
0.6 mm spiral duct.
D. Sleeve sizes:
1. Length: Ends shall be flushed with finished surfaces.
2. Diameter: Maximum 80 mm; minimum 25 mm larger than pipe and pipe insulation: in
concrete; 40 mm larger than pipe; diameter suitable for construction tolerances and to
receive sealant, when indicated and as in drawing details.
E. Sealant: Seal annular space around piping.
1. Use U/L listed sealant in following locations:
a. Exterior walls.
b. Foundation walls.
c. Floors.
d. Fire-rated and smoke construction.
2. Use mineral or glass fibre insulation in other locations; stuff space full.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Hangers and supports shall be installed and spaced in accordance with the requirements
of the Uniform Plumbing Code.
2. All hangers, clamps, etc. shall be painted as required.
3. Dielectric spacers shall be provided between copper and steel hangers. In lieu of dielectric
spacers, coated hangers may be used.
B. Vertical Piping
1. Vertical stacks, leaders and risers shall be supported at floor with extension clamps
attached to the pipes above floor with the extended arms of the clamps resting on the
floor.
2. Dielectric spacers shall be provided between copper tubing risers and steel clamps, or
plastic-coated riser clamps shall be used.
C.Suspended Piping
1. Hangers on parallel piping shall be staggered and distributed to avoid overloading.
Threaded pipes, chains and perforated straps shall not be acceptable. No piping shall be
supported from duct work, conduit or other piping.
2. Pipes shall be individually supported.
3. Trapeze hangers may be used where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at
same elevation. Piping shall be individually bolted to trapeze with U-bolts.
4. Place hanger within 300 mm of each horizontal elbow.
5. Coordinate location of hangers with light fixtures as shown on electrical drawings. Only
hangers designed specifically for support of piping will be used.
3.2 HORIZONTAL SPACING OF HANGERS
A. Spacing of hangers shall conform to the requirements of the Uniform Plumbing Code for each
type of piping to be installed.
3.3 SUPPORT
A. All piping shall be supported by hangers secured to structure.
B. Additional structural steel members shall be provided where required either to accommodate
hangers or distribute the load. Use C-clamps and beam clamps for piping as required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0528 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

 C. Piping runs shall be generally supported from hangers secured to cast-in-place concrete inserts
or expansion bolt shields.
D. Branch piping hanger supports may be field drilled into concrete using self-drilling type
expansion shields. Expansion shields shall not be cut or unduly displace reinforcement.
E. Power-driven fasteners shall not be used.
F. Piping at equipment, such as hot water tank, shall be supported independently so that no
weight will be supported by the equipment.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0528 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

 SECTION 23 0548
MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all mechanical sound,
vibration & seismic control as indicated, in accord with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound
secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1, for General Requirements.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS:
A. Vibration isolators and hangers.
B. Bases and rails.
C. Flexible pipe connectors.
D. Isolation pads.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 230500, Mechanical Requirements.
B. Section 221005, Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
C. Section 230528, Hangers and Supports.
D. Section 210510, Fire Protection systems.
E. Section 233413, Fans.
F. Section 237413, Air Handling Units.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASHRAE, ASTM and AASHO standards.
1.5 SUBMITTALS (SEE SECTION 01340)
A. Refer to Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Equipment items specified.
2. Spring isolators:
a. Spring diameter.
b. Deflection.
c. Compressed spring height.
d. Solid spring height.
e. Point location of each isolator.
f. Calculated load at each point.
g. Field static deflection.
h. Calculated horizontal loading and bolt requirements.
i. Indicate bases and rail clearance of 25 mm.
C. Contract closeout information:
1. Operating and maintenance data.
2. Guarantees.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 1 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND

SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems as specified and as indicated on drawings.
B. Select vibration isolators in accordance with weight distribution to produce reasonably uniform
deflection.
C. Provide vibration isolation equipment including mountings, hangers, structural steel bases,
welded concrete pouring forms and flexible pipe connectors from a single manufacturer of
vibration isolation equipment.
D. Coat vibration isolation systems exposed to moisture and an outdoor environment as follows:
1. Steel parts to be hot dipped galvanized.
2. Bolts to be cadmium plated.
3. Springs to be cadmium plated and neoprene coated.
2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS AND HANGERS
A. Equipment mounting isolators:
1. Type 1 isolators: Double deflection neoprene mountings.
a. Minimum static deflection 9 mm.
b. Steel top plate and base plate completely embedded in colour coded neoprene stock.
c. Friction pads both top and bottom to eliminate need for bolting.
d. Where bolting is required, provide bolt holes in base plate and tapped holes in top
plate.
2. Type 2 isolators: Spring type.
a. Freestanding and laterally stable without housings, snubbers or guides.
b. Provide 6 mm neoprene acoustical friction pads between baseplate and support.
c. Provide mounting with levelling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to equipment.
d. Spring diameter: Not less than 0.8 of compressed height of spring at rated load.
e. Spring to have minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of rated
deflection.
3. Type 3 isolators: Spring type with vertical limit stop.
a. Equal to type 2 isolator except that mountings shall incorporate a resilient vertical
limit stop to prevent spring extension during weight changes.
b. Installed and operating heights to be same.
c. Maintain a minimum clearance of 15 mm around restraining bolts and between
housing and spring so as not to interfere with spring action.
d. Limit stops to be out of contact during normal operations.
4. Type 4 isolators: Neoprene wafer pads.
a. Durometer or hardness to suit application.
b. Square waffle pattern on 15mm centers.
c. Standard pads thickness 8 mm provide optional pad thickness to suit application.
d. Provide natural rubber, hycar, butyl, silicone or other elastomers as prior approved
material.
e. Provide type "W" adhesive, both sides, for non- bolted applications.
B. Vibration hangers:
1. Type 5 isolators: Steel spring type hanger.
a. Steel spring and 8 mm deflection neoprene element in series.
b. Neoprene element to be moulded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through
hanger box.
c. Springs to have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of
rated deflection.
d. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
hanger rod to swing thru a 30 °degree arc before contacting hole and short circuiting
spring.
2. Type 6 isolators: Precompressed steel spring type hanger.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 2 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND

SEISMIC CONTROL
 a. Equal to type 5 except spring is precompressed to rated deflection so piping or
equipment are maintained at a fixed elevation during installation.
b. Provide a release mechanism to free spring after installation is completed and hanger
is subjected to its full load.
3. Type 7 isolators: Steel spring in neoprene cup type hanger.
a. Steel spring located in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short
circuiting of hanger rod.
b. Provide steel washer in cup to properly distribute load on neoprene and prevent its
extrusion.
c. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit
hanger rod to swing through a 30 °degree arc before contacting hole and short
circuiting spring.
d. Spring to have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of rated
deflection.
e. Provide an eye bolt on spring end and provision to attach housing to flat iron duct
straps.
4. Type 8 isolators: Double deflection neoprene type hanger.
a. Minimum static deflection 10 mm.
b. Elements to be colour coded neoprene stock for easy identification of rated load
capacity.
c. Provide hanger for direct attachment to flat iron duct straps.
2.3 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS
A. All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the structure
by the use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring loaded supports fixed to either
concrete bases, inertia blocks or supporting frames as shown on the Drawings.
B. Centrifugal fans and motors within air handling units shall be isolated from the frame of the air
handling unit by suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fan scroll casing shall be isolated from the
F W / AHU casing discharge opening by means of an approved internal flexible connection,
and the F W / AHU casing shall be isolated from the connected supply and return ductwork
by means of approved external flexible connections.
C. Axial flow fans shall be mounted on steel legs on diaphragm plates supported on neoprene in
shear anti-vibration mountings, or suspended using spring loaded hangers to suit the
application.
D. Centrifugal pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases consisting of:
1. A steel framework isolated from the supporting structure by means of spring ant vibration
mounts.
2. A reinforced concrete slab contained within a reinforced concrete perimeter frame and
isolated from it and the reinforced concrete slab on which it is fixed by means of cork
composite or flexible polyurethane foam vibration isolation material
3. A reinforced concrete sub-base, anti-vibration mountings and concrete-filled steel upper
plinth as specified in Clause 2.04 below. The mechanical contractor shall be responsible
for providing the steel upper plinth and mountings to the Contractor for building-in.
E. The construction of anti-vibration mountings shall generally comply with the following:
1. 1. Enclosed spring mountings (caged or restrained springs):

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 3 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND

SEISMIC CONTROL
 a.a. Each mounting shall consist of cast or fabricated telescopic top and bottom
housings enclosing one or more helical steel springs as the principal isolation
elements and shall incorporate a built-in leveling device.
b. Springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75 % of the operating height,
and shall be selected to have at least 50 % overload capacity before becoming coil
bound.
c. The bottom plate of each mounting shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed
to attenuate any high frequency energy transmitted by the springs.
d. Mountings incorporating snubbers or restraining devices shall be designed so that the
snubbing damping or restraining mechanism is capable of being adjusted to have no
significant effect during the normal running of the isolated machine.
e. Restrained isolators shall be provided on chillers subject to approval by the chiller
manufacturer.
2. Open spring mountings:
a. a. Each mounting shall consist of one or more helical steel springs as the principal
isolation elements and shall incorporate a built-in leveling device. Springs shall be
fixed or otherwise securely located to cast or fabricated top and bottom plates.
Springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height
and shall be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming
coilbound.
b. b. The bottom plate shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate
any high frequency energy transmitted by the springs.
3. Neoprene-in-shear mountings: Each mounting shall consist of a steel top plate and base
plate completely embedded in oil resistant neoprene. Each mounting shall be capable of
being fitted with a leveling device, and bolt holes in the base plate and tapped holes in
the top plate shall be provided so that the mountings can be bolted to the floor and
equipment where required.
2.4 BASES AND RAILS
A. Type A: Integral structural steel base.
1. Rectangle in shape except for equipment which may require "T" or "L" shaped.
2. Pump bases for split case pumps: Provide supports for suction and discharge base ells.
3. Perimeter members: Beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 of longest dimension of
base.
4. Beam depth need not exceed 350 mm provided that deflection and misalignment is kept
within acceptable limits as determined by manufacturer.
5. Provide height saving brackets in mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 25
mm.
B. Type B: Steel rail.
1. Provide steel members welded to height saving brackets to cradle equipment having legs
or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base.
2. Members must be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in equipment.
C. Type C: Structural steel and concrete base.
1. Rectangular structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations.
2. Minimum base depth: 1/12 of longest dimension of base, but not less than 150 mm.
3. Base depth need not exceed 300 mm unless specially recommended by base
manufacturer for mass or rigidity.
4. Bases for split case pumps: Large enough to provide support for suction
and discharge base ells.
5. Provide minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of 15 mm bars or angles welded in
place on 150 mm centers running both ways in a layer 40 mm above bottom, or additional
steel as required by structural conditions.
6. Provide steel members to hold anchor-bolt sleeves when anchor bolts fall in concrete
locations.
7. Provide height saving brackets in mounting locations to maintain a 25 mm clearance
below base.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 4 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND
SEISMIC CONTROL
 D. Type D: Curb mounted base.
1. Factory assembled isolation base that fits over roof curb and under isolated equipment.
2. Provide extruded aluminium top member to overlap bottom member to provide water run
off independent of seal.
3. Provide cadmium plated spring with a 25 mm minimum deflection with 50 percent
additional travel to solid.
4. Spring diameter: Not less than 0.8 of spring height at rated load.
5. Provide resilient snubbers in corners with minimum clearance of 6 mm for wind resistance.
6. Provide a weather seal of continuous closed cell sponge material both above and below
base and a waterproof flexible duct connection joining outside perimeter of aluminum
members.
7. Foam or other contact seals are not acceptable at spring cavity closure.
2.5 ISOLATION PADS
A. Isolation pads: Type IP1, field assembled for equipment mounting.
1. Construction: 100 mm thick, 21000 KPa concrete pad poured over a 100 mm thick
precompressed glass fiber isolation pad.
2. Glass fiber pads:
a. Inorganic inert material with loading capacity up to 3500 KPa.
b. Covered with an elastomeric coating to increase vibration dampening and to protect
media.
3. Concrete caps:
a. 1 m2 in area or less: Reinforced with 150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm
mesh.
b. Larger than 1 SQ.M in area: Reinforced with No.4 reban 300 mm OC each way.
4. Provide concrete caps with beveled edges.
B. Isolation pads: Type IP2, field assembled equipment isolation bases.
1. Isolation bases: Field assembled concrete pads provided by general contractor. See
Division 3 and structural drawings.
2. Provide isolation bases with an isolation joint to isolate pad from floor slab. See Division 3.
3. Make isolation bases larger each way than equipment mounting base or skid, and size in
accordance with approved equipment shop drawings.
4. Make isolation bases minimum 350 mm thick with top of pad 100 mm above finished floor
slab.
5. Reinforce isolation bases as indicated in specifications and drawings.
6.Type IP2 isolation pads provided by General Contractor and Coordinated by Mechanical
work.
2.6 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS
A. Flexible pipe connectors: Type FPC, neoprene type.
1. Multiple plys of nylon tire cord fabric and neoprene.
2. Do not use steel wire or rings as pressure reinforcement.
3. Connectors 50 mm diameter or less: Threaded or flanged ends.
4. Connectors 65 mm diamter or larger: Floating galvanized steel flanges.
5. Minimum pressure rating 1050 KPa at 104 DEGC
B. Flexible pipe hoses: Type FPH, stainless steel type.
1. Stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings.
2. Sizes 75 mm larger: Flanged.
3. Sizes 65 mm and less: Male nipples.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VIBRATION CONTROL
A. Install vibration control equipment in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions
and as specified.
B. Vibration control equipment shall be selected as specified and sized in accordance with weight
distribution, pull or torque imposed by shop drawing approved equipment being isolated.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 5 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND
SEISMIC CONTROL
 Minimum static deflections may be revised subject to prior approval.
C. Provide revised vibration control equipment to match revised or substituted equipment.
3.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Use type 1 isolators for equipment mounted on floors other than grade supported floor
slabs. Utility fans, 5 HP or less.
B. Use type 2 isolators for equipment mounted on every floor.
1. Utility fans, 7-1/2 HP and larger.
2. SWSI and DWDI blowers.
3. Vane axial type fans.
4. Minimum static deflections 20 mm.
C. Use type 2 isolators for equipment mounted on floors other than grade supported floor
slabs.
1. Pumps, 30 HP and larger.
2. Minimum static deflections 40 mm.
D. Use type 4 isolation pads for equipment mounted on grade supported floor slabs.
1. Utility fans, 5 HP or less.
2. Minimum static deflections 8 mm.
E. Use type 5 vibration hangers for suspended equipment.
1. Individual runs of piping 75 mm and smaller.
2. Inline fans, 3 HP and smaller.
3. Inline pumps, 2 HP and smaller.
4. Minimum static deflection 20 mm
F. Use type 6 vibration hangers for suspended equipment.
1. Trapeze type pipe hangers.
2. Individual runs of piping 100 mm through 150 mm
3. Inline fans, 5 HP through 7 - ½ HP.
4. Inline pumps, 7- ½ HP and larger.
5. Minimum static deflection 65 mm.
G. Use type 6 or type 7 vibration hangers for suspended equipment.
1. Trapeze type pipe hangers.
2. Individual runs or piping 200 mm and larger.
3. Inline fans, 10 HP and larger.
4. Inline pumps, 7-1/2 HP and larger.
5. Minimum static deflections 65 mm.
H. Use type 8 vibration hangers for suspended equipment.
1. Inline fans 1/2 HP or smaller.
2. Fan coil units 1/2 HP or smaller.
3. Utility fans 1/2 HP or smaller.
4. Minimum static deflection 10 mm
3.3 ISOLATION PADS
A. Use type IP1 isolation pads for equipment mounted on floors other than grade supported floor
slabs. Base mounted pumps, 25 HP and less.
3.4 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTIONS
A. Use type FPC flexible connectors in piping systems.
1. Pump suction and discharge. Exception: When 2 or more mechanical grooved pipe
couplings are used at each pump suction or discharge side.
2. Building expansion joints.
B. Use type FPH flexible hose in piping system. Fuel oil pump suction and discharge piping.
C. Install flexible pipe connections and flexible hoses on equipment side of equipment isolation
valves.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 6 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND

SEISMIC CONTROL
 D.Provide flexible connectors and flexible hose to suit application. Indicate specific applications
on shop drawings.
3.5 HORIZONTAL PIPEISOLATION
A. First 3 pipe hangers in main lines near mechanical equipment shall be type 8 isolators.
B. Horizontal runs in other locations throughout building shall be isolated by type 7 isolators.
C. Floor supported piping shall rest on type 3 isolators.
D. Type 7 isolators or first 3 type 8 mounts as noted above will have same static deflection as
specified for mountings under connected equipment.
E. If piping is connected to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceiling under
occupied spaces, first 3 hangers shall have 20 mm deflection for pipe sizes up to and including
75 mm and 65 mm deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 150 mm.
F. Other hangers and mounts will have a minimum steel spring deflection of 20 mm.
G. Locate hangers as close to overhead supports as practical.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0548 - 7 MECHANICAL VIBRATION AND

SEISMIC CONTROL
 SECTION 23 0553
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification markers shall be provided on all piping & duct works including equipment & all
system components.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit samples of all nameplates, valve tags, pile markers, duct stencils and application
sample, valve schedules, equipment schedules, etc. for review by the Engineer.
B. Submit nomenclature system for all valves, equipment, etc. for review.
C. Submit copy of all valve schedules, piping lists, and equipment list with Operating and
Maintenance Manuals.
1.3 COMPLIANCE
A. Proper identification for system and equipment where required by codes, regulations,
authority’s requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER’SIDENTIFICATION
A. Manufacturer's nameplate, catalog numbers, rating identification, name or trademark shall be
permanently affixed with screws or riveted to all equipment and material furnished under this
specification.
B. Identify model number, size, capacity, electrical characteristics, serial number.
C. Leave nameplates clean, legible and with unobstructed view.
2.2 APPARATUS IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment nameplates shall be 50 mm high, 1.5 mm thick, three layer black laminated plastic
plates with 20 mm inch high white lettering engraved through the black layer. Edges shall be
beveled.
B. Equipment identification nameplate shall be securely attached to each piece of
equipment.
C. Secure nameplate to each starter, switch, relay, transformer, etc. that controls the equipment.
D. Nameplates to bear notations corresponding to notations on operating instructions and as built
Drawings.
2.3 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide directional arrows on circulating systems separate from and adjacent to each
identification. Identification in conformance with ANSI 13.1 Scheme of Identification of Piping
Systems (OSHA).
B. Color code all pipes & indentify with suitable identification
C. Plastic Markers: Snap-on laminated plastic protected by clear acrylic coating, “Setmark” by
Seton Name Plate Corp. or approved equal. Each marker must show accepted color-coded
background, proper color of legend in relation to background color, accepted legend letter size,
accepted marker length.
D. 50 mm letter size for pipe or insulation 75 mm or larger. 25 mm letter size for pipe or insulation
65 mm or smaller.
E. Name of contents and directional arrows shall be placed at points of entrance and exit from
mechanical room, adjacent to each valve, on each riser, at each tee fitting, at points of entrance
and exit from building, at least once in each room, and intervals no longer than 6 m on long pipe

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0553 - 8 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

 runs.

F. Color Coding: The following color coding shall be used:

Service A.S.A Color Color of Designation
Background Letter
Refrigerant – Liquid line Green White RFL
Refrigerant – Gas line Green White RGL
Domestic Cold Water Green White DCWS
Domestic Hot Water Supply Green White DHWS
Sewer Green White SEWER
Sewer Vent Green White SV
Rainwater Green White RWP
Sprinkler Red White Sprinkler
Irrigation Water Supply Green White IWS

2.4 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. Duct markers shall be stenciled on to insulation of duct with legend and flow arrow.
Letters shall be 50 mm high. Black lettering shall be on white background.

2.5 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. The contractor shall provide valve tags for all valves attached to handwheel or stem of each
control and line shutoff valve, with heavy brass "S" hook, color-coded plastic laminate or
brass identification tag. Engraved laminate tags shall be at least 25 mm in diameter with
numerals at least 3 mm thick.

B. Identify all fire service valves with above specified tags with "FIRE MAIN - DO NOT CLOSE"
with white letters on red background.

C. Tag all valves except fixture stops.

2.6 VALVE AND EQUIPMENT CHARTS

A. The contractor shall provide typewritten schedules giving numbers, service and locations, and
notations of normal position and future position of all services.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification plate showing function of switches and
manually operable controls, including switches furnished under another Division. Provide
point numbers on all control system components corresponding to programmed and
second drawing point numbers.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0553 - 9 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials of any
materials that will prevent paint to marker adhesion. Equipment Identification

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Equipment Identification
1. Properly identify each piece of equipment and controls pertaining thereto by
nameplates mounted on equipment and controls using round head brass machine
screws or pop rivets. Cardholders in any form not acceptable.
B. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
C. Place warning signs on machines driven by electric motors which are controlled by fully
automatic starters.
D. Identify air handling units, fans and pumps with area served.
E. Small devices, such as inline pumps, may be identified with tags.
F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic
nameplates.
G. Identify equipment out of view behind access doors, in unfinished rooms on the face of the
access door.
3.3 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification of supply air, return air, outside air, exhaust air ducts and all toilet
exhaust, general exhaust by means of stenciled lettering identifying contents and direction of
flow.
B. Ducts coming out of shaft at each floor shall be stenciled, at each junction or branch take- off,
at least once in each room where ducts are concealed, at each access panel, in equipment
rooms and at intervals not longer than 6 m. Stencil shall clearly identify duct service (S for
supply, R for return, X for exhaust), area served by branch, and arrow indicating direction of
flow.
C. Apply to clean surfaces free of dust, grease, oil or any other material which will prevent paint
adhesion.
3.4 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Apply markings after all cleaning and painting of piping and insulation is completed.
B. Location for Pipe Identification:
1. Within 300 mm of each valve, fitting, thermometer or gauge (except on plumbing fixture).
2. At each branch and riser takeoff.
3. At each pipe passage through wall, floor and ceiling construction.
4. On all horizontal runs spaced 6 m maximum but not less than once in each room at
entrance and exit of each concealed space.
5. Where capped piping is provided for future connections, provide legible and durable metal
tags indicating symbol identification.
6. At wall and ceiling access panels.
7. In addition to foregoing identification for piping, identify fire protection piping with 25 mm
wide red painted band, completely encircling pipe adjacent to symbol identifications.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0553 - 10 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

 C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 150 mm to 200 mm inches below finished grade,
directly above buried pipe.
F. In finished areas, label exposed pipes or ducts only adjacent to walls.
3.2 VALVEIDENTIFICATION

A. Valve Identification tags shall have the following abbreviations plus valve number.

Service Abbreviation
Domestic Cold Water DCWS
Domestic Hot Water Supply DHWS
Sprinkler Sprinkler
Irrigation Water Supply IWS

Identification shall be black lettering on white background or in a manner approved by the

Engineer.

3.3 CONCEALED IDENTIFICATION

A. Where acceptable by the Engineer, provide color-coded ceiling tacks to locate coils, fire
dampers, valves, control devices, etc. or other approved label on each T-bar suspended
ceiling push-out tile. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

3.4 SPARE PARTS & TOOLS

A. Contractor shall include in the contract to procure and handover the following minimum
quantity of the spare parts as per the list and / or that recommended by the manufacturer.
These spare parts shall be brand new and similar to the equipment / material being
installed.

1. Pipe Identification
Plastic Marker: 25 Nos.

2. Duct Markers: 25 Nos.

3. Valve Tags: 25 Nos.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0553 - 11 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

 SECTION 23 0593
TESTING, COMMISSIONING, ADJUSTING
AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools, equipment, and services to test, balance and adjust all
mechanical systems as indicated, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances, instruments, and devices incidental to or necessary
for a sound, secure and complete installation, balancing and testing.
4. See Section 230500 for Basic Mechanical Requirements.
5. See Division 1 for General Requirements.
B. Test, Adjust and Balance the following mechanical systems and equipment:
1. Air distribution systems.
2. Air moving equipment.
3. Circulating water piping and hydronic systems.
4. Instrumentation control systems.
C. Test systems and equipment for proper sound and vibration levels.
D. Codes and Standards:
1. The Codes and Standards of the following organizations shall be followed:
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
3. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB).
5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association (SMACNA).
8. Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC).
9. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor, as part of this contract, shall obtain the services of a qualified testing, adjusting
and balancing (TAB) agency to perform the testing, adjusting and balancing works, as herein
specified.
B. The TAB agency shall be independent of the installing contractors or equipment suppliers for
this project.
C. Prior to commencing work under this section of the specifications, the TAB agency shall have
been approved by the Client.
D. The criteria for determining qualifications of the TAB agency shall be membership in the AABC,
or certification by the NEBB, or the TAB agency shall submit proof to satisfy the Client that the
agency meets the technical standards for membership of the AABC as published in the AABC
71679.
E. The agency shall show at least 5 successfully tested projects of similar size and scope.
F. All testing, adjusting and balancing works shall be supervised by a mechanical Engineer.
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES OF TESTING AND BALANCING AGENCY
A. Schedule work with trades involved.
B. Check component parts for function and operation in system.
C. Evaluate operation of systems and advise installer of necessary adjustments and corrective
measures.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 D. Prepare and submit reports of all tests.
1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR
A. Start up all systems and keep in correct operation during balancing operations.
B. Make adjustments and correction to systems as directed by balancing agency.
C. Add dampers required for correct air balance as recommended by Air Balancing agency.
D. Maintain accessibility to test locations and devices requiring adjustment.
E. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Client and the testing agency and provide at least 24
hours notice prior to specified testing. The Contractor shall provide labour and materials, and
necessary facilities at the site as required by the testing. capacity.
1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Balance at time as directed by the Client.
B. If balance is not done during peak cooling season, demonstrate satisfactory balancing during
next peak cooling season.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualifications of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing agency, and sample report forms.
B. Prior to commencing work, submit detailed procedures, agenda & sample report forms.
C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and
balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
D. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies
for Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
E. Provide reports in binder manuals, complete with index page and indexing tabs, with cover
identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment
identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.
F. Test Reports: Indicate data on approved forms. Submit data in S.I. Metric units.
G. Submit Certified Reports for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing bearing the seal and signature of
the TAB Agency. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems and equipment have
been tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Accurately calibrate and maintain all test instruments in good working order.
1. If requested, conduct tests of testing instruments in presence of Client and/or Engineer.
2. Accuracy of instruments: Instruments used for measurements shall be accurate. Provide
calibration histories for each instrument for examination. Calibrate each test instrument by
an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer. The Client has the right to request
instrument recalibration, or the use of other instrument recalibration, or the use of other
instruments and test methodology, where accuracy of readings is questionable.
3. Application of instruments: Comply with manufacturer’s certified instructions.
4. Permanently-installed instruments: Do not install permanently-installed instruments used
for the operation, e.g., gauges, thermometers, until just prior to the tests to avoid damage
and changes in calibration.
5. Accuracy of all thermometers: Plus or minus one graduation at the temperature to be
measured.
B. Do not begin balancing systems until they have been completed and are in good working order.
C. Mark with suitable permanent 23 materials, equipment settings, including damper control
positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show
final settings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 D. Record all inspections, tests and adjustments.
3.2 DUCTWORK LEAKAGE TESTS
A. All ductwork shall be tested for leakage in accordance with the recommendation and manuals
of SMACNA.
B. Leakage rate from any ductwork shall not exceed the permissible limits as determined by
SMACNA.
C. If the leakage rate exceeds the permissible limits, the source(s) of leakage shall be located,
defective materials and workmanship repaired or replaced, and the system retested until
satisfactory results are obtained.
D. Irrespective of the amount of measured leakage, all visible leaks or defects in the ductwork
shall be repaired.
E. Records of all leakage tests shall be prepared and submitted to the Client for approval.
F. Test each high velocity air duct with air pressure not less than 2.5 KPa pressure before external
insulation is applied.
1. Where required, test portions of system to permit finish work.
2. Leakage not to exceed 1/2 percent of air flow to be handled by test section, and total
leakage not to exceed 1 percent of total system air flow.
3. testing procedures shall be as described by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
G. Test low pressure duct work to 1.5 times listed fan operating pressure with 0.5 KPa minimum
before insulation is applied.
H. Use a pressure blower to provide supply air fan test.
3.3 AIR BALANCING METHODS AND TESTING PROCEDURE
A. Balance all air systems which are served by air filters, using artificial static loading of systems
to demonstrate, test and obtain systems design pressure drop data.
1. Inspect all fan scrolls and remove objects or debris. Inspect all coils and remove debris or
obstruction. Verify that all fire dampers are open.
2. Provide dirty filter pressure drop conditions on system.
3. Do not use high efficiency filters (75 percent and above) in testing and balancing.
4. Static pressure losses may be simulated by using wood or sheet steel blanking plates in
high efficiency filter racks and housing.
5. Do not install blanking plates within 600 mm of any low efficiency filter unit or rack.
6. Test and adjust equipment to design requirements and record RPM.
7. Test motor load amperes and fan capacity and rotations.
8. Make pilot tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design LPS at fans. Provide fan
curves and plots.
9. Test system static pressure, suction and discharge.
10. Test and adjust system for design LPS outside air and return air:
a. Maximum outside air setting.
b. Minimum outside air setting.
11. Test coil entering air temperatures:
a. Dry bulb deg C cooling and heating.
b. Wet bulb deg C cooling.
c. Test leaving air temperatures:
1) Dry bulb deg C cooling and heating.
2) Wet bulb deg C cooling.
12. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design LPS.
13. Adjust all zones to proper design LPS, supply and return.
14. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10 percent of design
requirements:
a. Identify location and areas of each grille, diffuser, and register.
b. Identify and list size, type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 c. Use manufacturer’s ratings on all equipment to make required calculations.
d. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall include required air
velocity and test resultant velocity, required LPS and test resultant LPS after
adjustments.
e. Adjust all diffusers, grilles, and registers to minimize drafts.
15. In accordance with control manufacturer’s representative, set automatically operated
dampers to operate as indicated.
a. Check all control for proper calibration and list all controls requiring adjustment by
control installers.
16. Make any changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers, or add balancing dampers as required
for correct balance of systems as recommended by (AABC) or requested by the Client
without extra cost.
17. Check fire dampers and smoke dampers for correct operation and damper position.
18. Submit all data in support of all supply fan deliveries by the following four methods:
a. By summation of the air quantity readings at all outlets.
b. By duct traverses of main supply duct.
c. By a rotating vane traverse across a filter coil bank;
d. By plotting RPM and static pressure readings on the fan curve. Air density corrections
must be indicated.
19. The supply air systems shall be completely balanced prior to the final balancing of the
water systems.
20. Upon completion of all air balancing, all duct dampers, and other throttling devices shall
be marked in the final adjusted position.
21. Submission of test results shall, in no way, relieve the Contractor of fulfillment of
guarantee.
22. The Contractor shall allow sufficient time to perform all tests, adjustments, necessary to
place the various systems in final operating conditions, verify performance requirements
and check all safety devices.
B. Fan Systems Testing:
1. Structural integrity and leakage testing of Fan systems shall be as systems or as duct
mains and branches.
2. All tests shall be performed prior to insulation of surfaces, painting, and concealment of
the work. Systems containing repaired defect shall be re-tested to original criteria to obtain
acceptance, except upon waiving of test by the Client.
3.4 PIPING AND HYDRONIC SYSTEMS TESTING
A. All tests shall be performed prior to insulation of surfaces, painting, and concealment of the
work. Systems containing repaired defects shall be re-tested to original criteria to obtain
acceptance except upon waiving of test by the Client.
B. Tests shall be hydrostatic unless otherwise specified. Only potable water shall be used for
testing.
C. The Contractor may conduct tests for his own purposes, but the acceptance test shall be
conducted as specified herein.
D. In the event that the test demonstrates that leakage rate exceeds specified limits, the source(s)
of leakage shall be determined, defective materials and workmanship repaired or replaced, and
the installation retested until specified requirements are complied with.
E. Irrespective of the amount of measured leakage, all visible leaks or defects in the Pipeline shall
be immediately repaired.
F. Other than standards piping flanges, plugs, caps, and valves, only commercially manufactured
expandable-elastomer plugs shall be used for sealing of piping for test purposes. The safe test-
pressure rating of any plug used shall be not less than two times the actual test-pressure being
applied.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 G. All necessary precautions shall be taken to vent the compressed air trapped during high
pressure hydrostatic testing to preclude injury and damage.
H. The Client may require the removal of any system component such as plugs or caps to
ascertain whether or not the water has reached all parts of the system, if purging or vent valves
are not provided.
I. Components shall be removed from piping systems during hydrostatic testing whenever the
components may sustain damage due to test pressure.
J. Leaking gasket joints shall be replaced with new gaskets. Leaking copper joints shall be
replaced with the new fittings and new tube ends.
K. Piping system components such as valves shall be checked for functional operation under
system test pressure.
L. Underground piping shall be tested with trenches open and joints, valves and thrust blocks
exposed. Ample earth cover shall be maintained to prevent buckling or deformation due to
application of pressure. Sections of underground piping shall be tested between closed valves
to ensure that each section of piping is physically able to withstand alone the pressure.
Adjacent sections of underground piping shall not be hydrostatically tested together.
M. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and operating freely
(automatic type) or to bleed air completely (manual type).
N. When averaging measurement values, take a sufficient number of readings which will result in
repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until
2 consecutive identical values are obtained.
O. Piping and piping components only shall be pressure tested. All connections to equipment such
as pumps, coils, relief valves, expansion joints, instruments, strainers, etc. subject to damage
by test pressure, shall be blocked off or isolated.
P. The duration of a test shall be for a minimum of time indicated in Piping Test Schedule. This
test may be terminated by direction of the Client at any point during this period after it has been
determined that the permissible leakage rates has not been exceeded.
Q. Test records of all piping systems tests shall be prepared and maintained. Records shall show
test-personnel responsibilities, dates, test-gauge identification numbers, ambient and test-water
temperatures, pressure ranges, rate of pressure drop, leakage rates, and other system
characteristics. Test record shall be submitted to the Client for approval.
R. Test gauges:
1. Test gauges, to be acceptable, shall have a dial sized 115 mm or larger, with accuracy of
plus or minus one-half of one percent of full-scale range and dial graduations and pointer
width compatible with readability and one half the accuracy extremes. Maximum
permissible scale range for a given test shall be such that the pointer during a test shall
have a starting position at mid-point of the dial or within the middle third of the scale
range. Certification of accuracy and correction table shall bear a date within 90 days of the
test use, test gauge number, and the project number, unless otherwise approved.
S. The test pressure shall be applied at 1½ times normal working pressure but not less than the
pressure indicated in the following Piping Test Schedule, or as specified elsewhere, whichever
is greater:

1. Water Line (including potable, non-potable) 1200 KPa 6 hrs.

2. Fire protection piping system 1400 KPa 6 hrs.
3. Underground piping 275 KPa 6 hrs.
4. Sanitary drainage, waste and vent piping 30 KPa ½ hr.
3.5 DRAINAGE, WASTE AND VENT PIPING TEST
A. After portions of drainage, waste and vent systems are completed, but before fixtures are set,
the system shall be tested with either water or air.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 B. Water test to piping shall be applied to its entirety or in sections. If applied to entire system, all
openings in piping shall be closed tightly except the highest openings, and the system shall be
filled with water to the point of overflow.
C. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly plugged, except the highest
opening of the section under test, and each section shall be filled with water, but no section
shall be tested with a pressure less than 30 KPa (3 meters head of water). In testing successive
sections, at least the upper 3 meters of the next preceding section shall be tested, so that no
joint or pipe in the building (except the uppermost 3 meters of the system) shall have been
tested with a pressure less than 30 KPa. The water shall be kept in the piping under test for at
least 30 minutes with no apparent leakage in any joint.
1.
D. Air Test shall be made by attaching an air compressor to any suitable opening, and after
closing all other openings of the system, air shall be pumped into the system until there is a
uniform gauge pressure of 35 KPa. This pressure shall be held, without introduction of
additional air, for at least a period of 30 minutes.
3.6 SOUND TEST PROCEDURES (FOR FANS)
A. Sound level measurements shall be made at each selection point by the Client.
B. Timing: Take sound level measurements at times when the building is unoccupied, or when
activity in surrounding areas and background noise levels in areas tested are at minimum and
relatively free from sudden changes in noise levels. Take measurements with all equipment
secured, except that being tested, measure sound levels at any point within a room not less
than 1.8m from an air terminal or room unit, and not closer than 1.0m from any floor, wall, or
ceiling surface.
C. Meters: Measure sound levels with a sound meter complying with the latest ANSI S1.4 use the
“A” scale to measure overall sound levels. To determine the specified octave band levels, the
above sound levels meter, set on “C” scale shall be supplemented by an Octave Bank Analyzer
complying with ANSI S1.11.
D. Certified Report: Record all sound data, and their locations, after final adjustments of air and
water systems involved.
3.7 PREPARATORY WORK FOR COMMISSIONING
A. Before starting balancing, the Contractor shall make sure that each & every equipment has
been satisfactory commissioned.
B. Start-up
1. Contractor shall Coordinate and supervise the start-up of the various pieces of equipment
and systems. Utilize the start-up services of the manufacturer's representative to ensure
that the equipment is operating in a satisfactory manner.
2. Performance of all plant and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers’ ratings.
C. Operation & Testing
1. Test the operation of the individual components and systems. Go through each step of
the sequence of operation and verify that each component operates correctly. Direct and
ensure that all other division work trades involved make the required changes and
adjustments to effect the proper operation of all components and systems. Meet
commissioning test requirements.
2. Document operation and testing.
3. Carry out operational tests for the current season and simulate operation of summer and
intermediate seasons.
D. Demonstration
1. Demonstrate to the Engineer’s representatives the proper operation of all equipment and
systems supplied under this Division. Demonstrations shall occur only after the operation
and testing has been successfully completed. Ensure that equipment suppliers participate
in the demonstration as required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 2. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are completed and that
commissioning have been performed.
3. Examine design data, system descriptions, statement of design conditions and system
output and philosophies about system and equipment controls.
4. Examine approved submittal by various system and equipment.
5. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices
such test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow control devices, balancing valves
and fittings, manual volume control dampers are properly installed and their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
6. Fans and pumps to be operated, at specified loads and checked for misalignment,
imbalance, excess vibration, improper rotation or motor overload. Correct all deficiencies
prior to balancing.
7. Examine FW/AHU equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased and both are aligned, and equipment with functioning controls are ready for
operation.
8. Examine terminal units such as FCU’s to verify their controls are connected and are
functional.
9. Check strainers.
10. Check control valves for proper installation and for their intended function.
11. Check equipment for installation and for properly operation safety interlocks and controls.
12. Check heat transfer coils for correct piping connections.
13. Report deficiencies discovered before and during testing and balancing procedures.
14. Pressure and leak testing of air and piping systems as specified. All testing will be
witnessed by the Engineer’s representative.
15. Air plenum ceilings have been properly constructed and sealed.
16. Equipment is in operable condition, with all accessories installed.
17. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
18. Duct systems are clean of debris.
19. Final filters are clean of debris.
20. Coil fins have been cleaned and combed.
21. Fire dampers are in place and open.
22. Proper strainers are clean and in place.
23. Service and balance valves are open.
24. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
25. Ascertain Control valves and dampers are in proper working order and positioned for full
flow through equipment.
26. Prepare procedures for testing and balancing of all systems.
27. Prepare procedures for balancing of all hydronic systems.
28. Prepare procedures for balancing of secondary chilled water systems.
3.8 TESTINGREQUIREMENTS
A. General
1. Carry out all commissioning and testing necessary for the safe, reliable and satisfactory
operation of the system and equipment installed.
2. The Works shall be commissioned and tested in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, the appropriate ASHRAE commissioning codes, local Government
requirements, and this Specification.
3. At least two month's prior to testing or commissioning any system, furnish the following
information for each system or process to the Engineer for review.
4. Testing procedure and details as well as the relevant report forms to the Engineer for
approval.
5. Type of instruments to be used
6. Manufacturer of instruments
7. Calibration methods for instruments
8. Operating instructions for instruments

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 9. Accuracy and tolerances of instruments
10. Complete schedule and programme of all testing and commissioning activities
11. All instruments and labour necessary for testing and commissioning shall be provided by
the Contractor.
12. All instruments shall have been recalibrated within six months of the start of
commissioning or testing. Calibration of all instruments shall be certified by the instrument
manufacturers or an approved calibration agency.
13. Should the results of any test show that any plant, system or equipment fails to perform to
the efficiencies or duties as given in this Specification, the Contractor shall adjust, modify
and if necessary replace the equipment without further payment in order that the required
performances be obtained.
14. Should it be necessary for the Contractor to modify or replace any item of plant as
described above, he shall be responsible for the cost for making good of any damage or
deterioration to the building or other services consequent on such modifications.
15. Allow in the Contract Price cost for returning to site during the first year of operation from
the date of Completion Certificate issued by the Engineer to test systems under maximum
design conditions. Be aware that such tests may need to be carried out after normal office
hours as required by the employer / end user.
16. All equipment site testing and commissioning shall be carried out by manufacturer’s
qualified field engineers.
17. Factory Hydrostatic or Pressure Tests
Each of the following equipment shall be individually tested to at least 1.5 times of the
maximum anticipated system working pressure.
 All cooling coils
 Heat exchangers
 Pumps
3.9 PRELIMINARY COMMISSIONING CHECK
A. Ensure that all equipment included under this Contract is thoroughly cleaned, lubricated and
checked for serviceability immediately before setting to work. Particular attention is drawn to
the removal of building debris from the air systems, motors, fan bearings and pipe work.
B. All pipe work shall be thoroughly flushed and chemically cleaned to ensure that all foreign
matter is removed and internal surfaces are degreased. During all preliminary flushing, plant
shall be isolated by means of bypasses to avoid dead legs, and the systems shall be
completely isolated from any existing systems to ensure contamination does not occur.
C. Further flushing and chemical treatment shall be carried out on isolated systems by connection
of temporary diesel driven pumps to circulate water and dosing chemicals. Allow for cross-
connection of flow and return pipe work at the extremities.
D. All automatic controls and safety devices shall be inspected and checked for serviceability
before the working fluid or electricity is applied to the system.
E. All ductwork shall be thoroughly cleaned internally. Temporary filter shall be installed.
F. Air Handling Equipment & Ductwork
G. All the commissioning procedures shall comply with those set out in the current edition of the
ASHRAE Standard or CIBSE Guide Commissioning Code Series A or DW/143 standards.
H. Allow for balancing all air diffusers and grilles by means of the regulating dampers provided.
Air quantities shall be set to within +5% - 0% of the design value.
I. The following data shall be recorded on the commissioning sheets:
1. On coil and off coil dry and wet bulb temperatures
2. Dry and wet bulb temperatures within each occupied space, at various locations within
same space as required
3. Temperatures at each main supply and return air duct
4. Fresh air supply flow rate to each air handling unit

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 5.
Air flow, total fan head, and resistance across each main plant item, e.g. filter, cooling coil,
silencers, etc.
6. Air flow at each supply and exhaust duct, and at each supply, return and exhaust air grille
and diffuser.
7. All fan and motor speeds.
8. FCU’s - Area serves, capacity, temperature at grille and in the room.
9. Starting and operating current for each motor.
10. Noise and vibration levels in plant room and occupied space.
11. The following ductwork system shall be tested for leakage rate in accordance with
ASHRAE / SMACNA requirements:
12. All AHU system ductwork
13. All medium and high velocity ductwork
14. All smoke extraction system and pressurization system ductwork
15. All kitchen and fume exhaust system ductwork
16. All smoke purge system ductwork
17. Pipe and Water Systems
18. All the commissioning procedures shall comply with those set out in the current edition of
the ASHRAE Standard or CIBSE Guide commissioning Code Series W.
19. All water pipe work, coils and other fittings shall be hydraulically tested to 1.5 times the
maximum anticipated working pressure but in no case less than 10 Kg/Cm2 for low
pressure system serving Podium and 25 Kg/Cm2 for high pressure system serving terms.
The pressure shall be maintained for a period not less than 8 hours within ±2%
20. Where any section of pipe work or equipment of the plant is unable to withstand the
maximum pipe work test pressure, it shall be isolated during the pipe work tests, then, that
section of pipe work or equipment shall be re-tested at the appropriate test pressure.
3.10 CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Include all thermostatic and automatic controls to be commissioned and tested by the control
manufacturers engineer. Generally, the commissioning procedures shall comply with that set
out in the current edition of ASHRAE Standards or the CIBSE Guide Commissioning Code
Series C.
B. Calibrate all thermostats, humidistat and pressurestats, set the modulating range and set points
on all automatic valves and dampers as required to ensure that operating conditions are
correct. The time and control sequence shall also be tested and verified.
C. Interlocking circuit and safety devices shall be tested to ensure safety operation of the plant.
D. Other site tests as specified in the Control Section of this Specification shall also be performed.
3.11 ELECTRICAL TEST
A. After erection of the switchboard on site, the following tests shall be performed in the presence
of the Engineer.
B. Inspection of switchboard including wiring, electrical and mechanical connection
C. Mechanical test
D. Continuity and dielectric tests
E. Power frequency pressure test
F. Functional checks
G. Earth electrode resistance test
H. Primary and secondary injection tests commission and calibrate all measuring, protection and
control circuits and associated components.
I. On completion of the above tests, commission the switchboard on no-load and perform the
following tests:
1. Voltage test for phase to phase and phase to neutral
2. Phase sequence tests on every outgoing circuits
J. The following tests shall be carried out in full compliance with the IEE Regulations by the
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 9 TESTING, ADJUSTING,
COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 Contractor in the presence of the Engineer
1. Insulation resistance test of all power and control cables
2. Insulation resistance test of all motor windings
3. Test of conductor continuity
4. Test of effectiveness of earthing
5. All thermal overload relays and starters
6. Sequence of operation (Per Contract Drawings)
7. Flick test of motors
8. All other site tests as specified in Division 16 of this Specification or as required by
relevant local authorities shall also be carried out.
3.12 MECHANICAL LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
A. All fire protection systems and life safety features of the building are required to be fully
operational, comply with specifications, and the fully tested and accepted by engineer prior to
admitting operations personnel or general public on the building.
B. The final testing will include the sprinkler system, fire alarm system and smoke control systems.
It is necessary that the installation of these systems is complete, has received prior testing or
adjustment and is ready for full operational use, prior to the witnessing of the final acceptance
tests.
3.13 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM
A. Systems shall be finished and pressure tested by contractor prior to Operator’s testing. All
sprinkler devices connected to fire alarm system will be tested. These devices include water
flow switches, tamper switches, and pressure gauges (if installed) on all zones. Fire pump must
be tested and approved by Project Manager / Architect. A representative of the sprinkler
contractor shall be present and prepared to test system.
3.14 MISCELLANEOUS MEASUREMENT ANDTESTING
A. Room temperature, humidity and noise level (at each octave band mid-frequency from 63Hz to
8,000Hz) shall be measured to ensure design conditions are achieved. Measuring instruments
shall be located 1.5 meter above floor level at points away from the influence of draughts or hot
or cold surfaces. Such measurements shall not be carried out when weather or other
environmental conditions are likely to cause undue influence to the results.
B. Sound and vibration testing shall be carried out to ensure that equipment are operating within
the specified maximum sound and vibration levels and that there is no transmission of
objectionable vibration or through the building structure. Sound levels shall be measured with
and without the plant in operation.
3.15 TESTS AT MANUFACTURER’S WORKS
A. All equipment and components supplied may be subjected to inspection and tests by the
Engineer during manufacturer, erection / installation and after completion. The inspection and
tests shall include but not be limited by the requirements of this contract document. Prior to
inspection and testing, the equipment shall undergo pre-service cleaning and protection.
B. All tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and inspection shall be agreed with
the Engineer prior to commencement of the work. The Contractor shall prepare the details of
the schedule and submit these to the Engineer for approval. It must be ensured that adequate
relevant information on the design code/standard employed, the manufacture
/fabrication/assembly procedure and the attendant quality control steps proposed are made
available to the Engineer who will mark in the appropriate spaces his intention to attend or
waive the invited tests, or inspections.
C. A minimum of twenty-one days’ notice of the readiness of equipment for test or inspection shall
be provided to the Engineer by the Contractor (whether the tests be held at the Contractor’s of
Sub-contractor’s works). The subject items should remain available for Engineer inspection and
test up to a minimum 10 days beyond the agreed date of witnessing the test. Every facility in
respect of access, drawings, instruments and manpower shall be provided by the Contractor
and sub-contractor to enable the Engineer to carry out the necessary inspection and testing of
the Plant.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING,
COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 D. No plant shall be packed, prepared for shipment, or dismantled for the purpose of packing for
shipment, unless it has been satisfactorily inspected, all tests called for have been successfully
carried out in the presence of the Engineer or approved for shipment, or alternatively inspection
has been waived.
E. Functional electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out on completed
assemblies in the works. The extent of these tests and method of recording the results shall be
submitted to, and agreed by, the Engineer in sufficient time to enable the tests to be
satisfactorily witnesses, or if necessary for any changes required to the proposed programme of
tests to be agreed.
F. The Consultant/Engineer reserves the right to visit the Manufacturer’s works at any reasonable
time during fabrication of equipment and to familiarize himself with the progress made and the
quantity of the work to date.
G. Within 30 days of completion of any tests, triplicate sets of all principal test records, test
certificates and correction and performance curves shall be supplied to the Engineer.
H. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all tests, whether
or not they have been witnessed by the Engineer or not. The information given on such test
certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the
certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference title.
I. When all equipment has been tested, the test certificates from all works and site tests shall be
compiled by the Contractor into volumes and bound in an approved from complete with index
and four copies of each volume shall be supplied to Engineer.
3.16 PERFORMANCE TESTS AT MANUFACTURER’S WOKS
A. All equipment may be subjected to routine performance tests at the Manufacturer’s Works in
accordance with the relevant ANSI, ASME, ASTM, BIS standard including operating tests of
complete assemblies to ensure correct operation of apparatus and components.
B. Pumps, fans, compressor, and other rotating equipment shall be given full load tests, and run to
15% overspeed for 5 minutes to check vibration. Main and auxiliary gear boxes shall be
subjected to shock load tests and a six-hour endurance run at rated speed and maximum
torque.
C. The Contractor shall submit single line diagrams including the layout of the Plant together with
the location of test instrumentation and the principal dimensions of the layout. All calculations to
derive performance data shall be made strictly in accordance with format given in the approved
standards. Any alterations or deviations from the approved standard test layout or formulae
shall be subjected to the prior approval of the Engineer.
D. The performance test shall be conducted over the full operating range of the pump to a closed
valve condition and a minimum of five measurement points covering the full range shall be
taken. Curves indicating Quality vs. Head, Quantity vs. Power absorbed, and Quantity vs.
Pump efficiency shall be provided. In addition a curve of the NPSH required vs. Quantity shall
be provided except when the suction conditions do not require this test. Any proposal for the
omission of this test shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
E. On completion of the tests the Contractor shall submit a report showing the test results
obtained together with the curves corrected to the site operating conditions.
F. If Employer/Engineer does not attend test, this does not relieve Contractor of his obligations,
even if waiver to ship is used by Employer.
G. The following items of equipment shall be tested at the manufacturer's works or elsewhere as
appropriate prior to installation. In all cases, test certificates shall be submitted in triplicate.
1. Fan: `Type-test' Certificates showing fan characteristic curves, and Type Test
Certificates for sound power levels.
2. Pumps: ‘Type-test' Certificates for head discharge, speed and power input.
3. Electric Motors: `Type-test' Certificates. For motors of 40 kW output and above, routine
individual test certificates shall also be submitted.
4. Starters and Control Gear:‘Type-test' Certificates. For control panels as a whole, routine
(individual) high voltage test.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 11 TESTING, ADJUSTING,
COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 H. A manufacturer's data report is required to verify pressure vessel construction adherence to
ASME vessel construction requirements shall also be submitted.
I. All instruments, test equipment and consumable materials, and expenses incurred including
certification by an independent authority shall be included in the Contract.
3.17 FACTORY WITNESS TEST
A. The witness testing shall cover the following at minimum:
1. General Factory Visit. Witness the facilities and line of production
2. Submission of the manufacturer quality procedures for the procured product prior to the
scheduled factory visit.
3. Witness of the final assembly of the product specific to the project. Witness the testing of
all parameters per manufacturer’s recommendations. A copy of all testing parameters and
recommended methodologies shall be submitted to the client and consultant at least 10
days prior to the factory visit, which shall facilitate client familiarization with the testing
procedures.
B. Include “factory visit for performance witness test” in relevant specifications sections for all of
the following equipment.
1. VRF System
2. FAHU’S
3.18 HANDING OVER
A. The following procedure shall be adopted prior to handing over the installation:
1. All preliminary testing, checking, adjusting and balancing of the installation shall be carried
out before forwarding notification that the installation is considered to have reached
Practical Completion.
2. After inspection by the Engineer, the plant shall be finally commissioned and Installation
prior to handover to the Employer. Manuals together with as-built drawings shall be
provided as specified.
3. Completion Certificate will be issued only after the plant has been inspected and approved
and the above requirements fulfilled.
3.19 REPORTS
A. Submit progress reports at least three times during the work upon Engineer’s request. Include
preliminary recommendations, and advise Engineer of any situation which may adversely affect
end result of balancing.
B. Submit four copies of the final typewritten report at the completion of the work. Print reports on
letter quality paper and enclose each in hard cover binders.
C. Include the following in each report:
1. Cover sheet identifying project name, address, Engineer name, Contractor name(s).
2. Balancing company, address, name of balancing technician(s), date and time of test,
description of test equipment and ambient conditions at time of test.
3. Complete equipment identification data and location, including manufacturer and model,
size, arrangement, discharge, class, motor type, kW, voltage, phase, frequency and FLA,
belt size/model number and sheave size.
4. Suction and discharge pressure gauge readings and water flow L/s for each pump.
5. Pump curve for each pump showing plotted design conditions, and field conditions.
6. Air on and off temperatures and pressure drops at each major piece of equipment such as
cooling coils.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 12 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 7. Detailed summary of velocity traverses and calculated air quantities for each fan.
8. Actual fan and system curves for each fan showing plotted design and field condition.
D. Static pressure readings across filter bank, coil banks of each air handling system, showing
design and actual readings.
E. Measured suction, discharge and total static pressure for each fan using pitot tube
measurement.
F. Summary showing design and actual air quantity from each low pressure outlet, complete with
description of the method used to obtain same upon request. Submit area factors and velocity
correction factors for all outlets, diffusers, registers and grilles for Engineer’s review prior to first
balance and include in report submissions.
G. Summary showing inlet static pressure and L/s capacity of each variable constant air
terminal control unit under simulated maximum and minimum conditions as previously
described.
H. Temperatures of outside air, return air, mixed air, air off cooling coils and terminal supply air for
each air handling system.
I. Rated and actual motor current, in amperes, of every motor at full load conditions. Schematics
for all systems with all terminals identified.
J. Provide separate test forms for each air and water system.
K. Submit with the report, a summary listing of recommendations for Engineer’s review
L. Certify all reports by the Balancing Engineer and balancing technician before submitting for
Engineer’s review.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0593 - 13 TESTING, ADJUSTING,

COMMISSIONING AND BALANCING
 SECTION 23 0713
MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
A. The work covered under this section shall consist of furnishing all material and performing all
labor required for the thermal insulation of all hot and cold piping, equipment, and ductwork as
called for in these specifications and as indicated on the drawings.
B. Material furnished and installed under this section shall be assembled, erected, and placed in
proper functioning condition in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data,
instructions, and recommendations of the material manufacturer unless exceptions are noted
by the Building Owner’s Representative.
C. Piping insulation shall include the insulation of pipe fittings, valves, strainers, and flanges. Hot
piping insulation shall consist of hot water supply piping. Cold piping shall consist of
refrigerant piping and exposed potable water piping.
D. Interior duct liner insulation is considered part of sheet metal work and shall be as specified in
the Air Distribution section. The duct work insulation shall be in compliance with SMACNA.
E. The installer company should have minimum of 5 years documented experience in similar
works.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM - American Society for Testing Materials
1. ASTM B 209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
2. ASTM C 533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
3. ASTM C 547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
4. ASTM C 552 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
5. ASTM C 553 Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type).
6. ASTM C 612 Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
7. ASTM E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
8. ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
9. FS - Federal Specification
a. FS HH-B-100B Barrier Material Vapor (Fire Retardant, Reinforced for Pipe and
b. FS HH-I-523C Insulation Block and Pipe Covering Thermal(Calcium Silicate, For
c. FS HH-I-551E Insulation Block and Boards, Thermal Cellular Glass.
d. FS HH-I-558B Insulation, Blocks, Blankets, Felts, Sleeving (Pipe and Tube
e. FFHH-I-1751/3A Insulation Sleeving, Thermal, Pipe Covering (Cellular Glass).
f. FS SS-C-160A Cements, Insulation Thermal.& Int. Am-
g. FS WW-H-171D Hangers and Supports, Pipe.
10. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
a. NFPA 255 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
11. Underwriter's Laboratories
a. UL 723 Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number,
K-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.
C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's sample of each piping, duct and equipment insulation type
required. Affix label to sample completely describing product.
D. Certificate of compliance.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 1 MECHANICALINSULATION

1.4 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Protect insulation against, dirt, water, chemicals and mechanical damage before, during and
after installation. Damage prior to final acceptance of work shall be repaired or replaced at no
additional cost.
1.5 WARRANTY
A.Submit written guarantee signed by the manufacturer, and the contractor, agreeing to replace
defective material or workmanship within 2 years of date of substantial handing over.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets, coverings
sealers, mastic and adhesives) with flame spread index of 25 or less, and smoke developed
index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 INSULATION GENERAL
A. The entire insulation work shall be carried out through an approved specialist insulation
Contractor. All allowances shall be included for arranging a specialist subcontract accordingly
and for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all conditions relating to the Contract and for
coordinating his works with the remainder of the works.
B. All allowances shall be included for informing the specialist Sub-contractor of all details of the
building structure, programme arrangements, and other relevant details at the time of contract
and for all necessary visits to site by the Sub-contractor or his workers.
C. All insulation shall be in accordance with British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice
in all respects. Insulation meeting A.S.T.M. Standards will be considered if properly submitted.
D. In addition to complying with the relevant standards, all insulating material shall be free from
Asbestos.
E. All adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers shall be classified as Class 1 surface
spread when tested in accordance with B.S. 476, part 7.
F. Insulating materials shall have thermal conductivity values not more than those listed as
follows:
1. Material Type Thermal Conductivity
a. Mineral wool Sectional 0.04
b. Mineral wool Slabs 0.04
c. Fibre Glass All 0.034
d. Closed Cell All 0.037
e. Polyurethane Sectional 0.025
f. Styrofoam Rigid 0.026
2. All Conductivity figures are rated at an average temperature of 24 deg C.
3. The closed cell elastomeric foam insulation shall have following characteristics :
a. Thermal conductivity 0.037 w/m/Deg C at 24 Deg.C
b. Water vapour permeability 8.91 x 10-11 Kg/ (m.hr.Pa)
c. Density 65 to 80 kg / m3
4. The insulation shall be fire retardant to BS 476 Part 6 and acceptable to civil defence.
5. All material delivered to site shall be new and fully dried out and so maintained throughout
the progress of the works. All insulating materials shall be stored in storage sheds, and in
accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations.
6. In order to ensure that the insulation applied is in accordance with the specification,
sections as required by the Engineer shall be cut from the finished insulation for
inspection.
7. If, defects are revealed, further sections shall be cut out for inspection. and all cutout
sections shall be replaced by the contractor at no cost to the Contract. If further defects
are revealed then the Engineer shall have the right, when in his opinion it is necessary, to
issue instructions for any part or the whole of the insulation to be removed and replaced.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 2 MECHANICALINSULATION

 The replacement with new insulation shall be to the satisfaction of the Consultant and the
cutting out and replacing shall be at no cost to the Contract.
8. Particular attention shall be paid to the finished appearance of all thermal insulation which
must present a neat and symmetrical appearance running true in line with duct layouts,
etc.
9. Any rough, irregular and badly finished surfaces shall be stripped down and re-insulated to
the Engineer satisfaction.
10. In certain cases the type of insulation specified will require a painted finish, in addition to
identifying bands and any signs which are to be applied.
11. All systems are to have been tested and approved by the Engineer prior to installation of
insulation.
2.2 CONCEALED COLD AIR DUCTS
A. Unless otherwise indicated insulate all ductwork (supply air duct in return air path, fresh air and
extract) with 19mm thick closed cell elastomeric rubber foam insulation sheets. Supply duct not
in return air path shall be insulated with 25 mm thick closed cell elastomeric foam insulation
sheet. Fasten the insulation with adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer on 200 to
250 mm centres. Butt all joints tightly and seal all breaks and joints by overlapping with 75mm
wide. All longitudinal & tranverse joints shall be sealed by providing 6 mm thick, 50 mm wide
nitrile rubber tape. Finish all Concealed and exposed duct insulation with a 20x20 woven glass
cloth cover adhered between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive
and a final coat of vapour barrier.
2.3 EXPOSED COLD AIR DUCT
A. Ducts exposed in non air conditioned areas, shall be insulated in the same manner as
described for concealed ducts, using insulation with a minimum thickness of 32mm closed cell
elastomeric rubber foam insulation. Then apply a 20 x 20 woven glass cloth cover adhered
between two coats of fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive and a final coat of
vapour barrier. The woven glass cloth shall have density: 185g/m2, thickness 0.15mm, finish:
Hi clear.
B. All ductwork exposed externally to the building, installed on roof and within plant rooms is to be
insulated using the method described for exposed ducts, but using insulation with a minimum
thickness of 50mm, closed cell elastomeric rubber foam insulation finished the same as
described for concealed air ducts and then clad with SS 316L sheet 0.9mm thick with stoned
finish.
C. Where ducts penetrate the building shell, the duct shall be flashed and waterproofed before any
insulation is applied.
2.4 APPARATUS CASING
A. Ensure that any access panels are insulated to the same standard and are openable.
B. For small units, cover the entire outside assembly with waterproof self adhesive glass fibre
tape. This must be at least 75 mm minimum width and must overlap at least 50% on each
application, to achieve watertight conditions.
C. For larger units, provide a weather resistant enclosure outside the insulation, subject to
Engineer's approval.
D. Ensure that all equipment meets these requirements, regardless of manufacturer's standard
practice, and add insulation as required to the above standard.
E. Where insulation, reinsulation or additional insulation is required to the casing of externally
mounted air conditioning units, the insulation shall be covered with sheet Aluminium, of 0.9 mm
or thicker.
F. Insulation of drain pans is specified as part of the A.H.U. specification. Regardless of the
Manufacturer's standard supply, the contractor shall reinsulate on site if necessary so that the
specification is complied with in full. This standard of insulation is also required for fan coils.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 3 MECHANICALINSULATION

2.5 PIPE INSULATION
A. Cold Water & Hot Water (Plumbing)
1. Insulate all the hot water pipes. Insulate the cold water pipes which are exposed to outside
whether conditions.
2. Pipe covering and insulation shall be manufactured by a recognized manufacturer, and
shall be neatly installed to the following specifications. The general intent is to provide a
sealed insulation which will not permit sweating of the pipes and not retain moisture which
is detrimental to its insulation property.
3. Insulate all hot water pipe with not less than 13mm thick insulation. Pipes shall be
thermally insulated with closed cell elastomeric foam rubber insulation with density of 65 -
80 Kg/M3, UV resistance, having a thermal conductivity factor of 0.037 W/m.K at 20 deg.
C and 0.040 W/m.K at 40 deg. C. Pipe exposed pipes shall be insulated as per obove
specification and cladded with aluminum sheet 0.9mm thick.
4. The insulation, in sizes indicated shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Adjoining
sections of insulation should be butted firmly together with the longitudinal seam of the
jacket located on the bottom half of the pipe.
5. Pipes should be banded with at least three Aluminum bands per section. One at the
centre and one covering the edge of each circumferential strip.
6. Insulate and finish valves and fittings in the same manner and same thickness as piping in
which such items are installed. Moulded, factory shaped sectional pipe covering, factory
may be used subject to satisfactory visual checking by the Consultant.
7. Direct contact between pipe and hanger shall be avoided. Hangers shall pass outside of
the sheet metal protection saddle, which shall cover a section of high density insulation, of
sufficient length to support the pipe without crushing the insulation. The vapour barrier
shall be lapped over the saddle and securely cemented to it. Minimum thickness of metal
saddle is 1.5 mm.
8. Finish all these pipes with 20x20 woven glass cloth cover adhered between two coats of
the fire resistant fungicidal protective lagging adhesive and a final coat of vapour barrier.
2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPES
A. Thermal insulation shall be performed, un-slit , class 0, closed -cell, formed plastic material to
suit the size of the pipe. The density of insulation shall be 65-80 Kg/M3, UV resistance. The
vapor barrier shall be an integral part of the material . Insulation shall have a thermal
conductivity of 0.0375 W/Mk and shall be satisfactory for the temperature range of 0 Deg C to
104 Deg C without deformation or deterioration. The minimum thickens of the insulation shall
be 25mm.
B. Thermal insulation exposed to sunlight shall be provided with protective finish in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations and shall be suitable for outdoor installation.
2.7 LAGGING ADHESIVE
A. Adhesive shall be a flexible, fire resistive compound suitable for vapour sealing insulated ducts
and pipes.
B. Adhesive shall be suitable for indoor and outdoor use and in high humidity environments.
C. Water vapour permeance shall not exceed 0.05 perms at 0:030 inch dry film thickness when
tested in compliance with ASTMF 1249.
D. When tested for surface burning characteristics in compliance with ASTM E84, flame spread
shall be 10 and smoke developed 15.
E. Adhesive shall be UL classified and shall meet or exceed the requirements of NFPA 90A and
90 B 25/50.
2.8 ACOUSTICINSULATION
A. All low pressure ductwork shall be lined with acoustic insulation up to the first take off point, or 3
meters from the fan/ unit outlet which is greater.
B. Duct acoustic lining shall be 25 mm thick, fiberglass, 24 Kg/M3 density with a thermal
conductivity of 0.035 Watts/ m/ deg C with approved coating on inside.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 4 MECHANICALINSULATION

 C. Liner will be attached by a fire resistant adhesive such as Benjamin Foster 81-99, or equivalent.
In addition mechanical fasteners shall be used on 400 mm centres on top and side sections.
These fasteners must be spot-welded to the inside of the duct and must not perforate the duct.
D. All abutting edges must be caulked and at the extremities of lining shall have a sheet metal
nosing of at least 40 mm length. .
2.9 STAINLESS STEEL CLADDING
A. Stainless steel cladding shall be provided to ducts with neat 90 degree joints and finish.
Material shall be with stone finish.
B. In pipework the longitudinal joints shall be cleated or held in position with stainless steel bands
and clips. Elbows and other fittings shall be made with mitred section and riveted. All valves
strainers, flexible connection etc. shall have easy removable boxes with stainless steel
aluminium toggle clips.
C. In ductwork the joints shall be riveted or banded with stainless steel band and clips to avoid
sagging. Boxes to be made around duct traverse joints.
D.All gaps shall be to a minimum and shall be sealed with silicon mastic suitable for outdoor. All
exposed refrigerant pipe shall be cladded with 0.9mm thick stainless steel cladding.
2.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples of all types of insulation for approval. Submit pipe insulation samples 300 mm
long x 25 mm inside x 125 mm outside diameter, and flat samples 300 mm x 300 mm x 25 mm,
minimum size.
B. Submit with samples, the full technical brochures.
C. Where the specification calls for additional treatments, such as wrapping and waterproofing,
submit also a completed sample of similar size.
D. All samples after approval are to be retained on site to be a reference for future work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION.
A. Defective Work or Material. If inspection shows defects, defective work or material shall be
replaced in a manner acceptable to the Ministry Representative.
3.2 PREPARATION.
A. Surfaces. Surfaces to be insulated shall be dry and free of loose scale, rust, dirt, oil or water
when insulation is applied.
B. Tests. The required tests on piping, equipment and ductwork shall be completed and
satisfactory test reports shall be submitted to the Ministry Representative prior to application of
insulation covering joints.
3.3 INSTALLATION.
A. Insulation materials shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation. Insulation shall be installed in a smooth, clean, workmanlike manner. Joints
shall be tight and finished smooth. Cracked or chipped sections shall not be used in the work.
Insulation shall fit tightly against surface to which it is applied.
B. Pipe Insulation.
1. Pipe Insulation (Except Cellular and Calcium Silicate Insulation). Place sections of
insulation around pipe and joints tightly butted into place. Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Secure jacket with fire resistant adhesive, factory-applied self-sealing lap, or stainless
steel outward clinching staples spaced not over 100mm on center (o.c.) and 13mm

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 5 MECHANICALINSULATION

 minimum from edge of lap. Cover circumferential joints with butt strips, not less than
75mm, of mateial identical to jacket material. Overlap longitudinal laps of jacket material
not less than 38mm. Adhesive used to secure butt strip shall be same as that used to
secure jacket laps. Apply staples to both edges of butt strips.
2. Vapors Barrier Jacket. When a vapor barrier jacket is required, provide a vapor barrier
coating or manufacturer's weatherproof coating for outside service unless pipe is supplied
with factory-applied self seal lap. Apply vapor barrier coating at longitudinal and
circumferential lap. Patch damaged jacket material by wrapping a strip of jacket material
around the pipe and cementing, stapling, and coating as specified for butt strips. Extend
patch not less than 38mm past the break in both directions. At penetrations by pressure
gages and thermometers, fill voids with vapor barrier coating for outside service. Seal with
a brush coat of the same coating. Do not use staples to secure jacket laps on pipe
carrying fluid medium at temperatures below 1.7 C.
3. Roof. Where pipe penetrates, insulate piping to a point flush with top of flashing and seal
with vapor barrier coating. Butt top of flashing and interior insulation tightly to exterior
insulation. Extend exterior metal jacket 50mm to fold down beyond end of insulation. Seal
flashing and counter flashing underneath with vapor barrier coating.
4. Flexible Cellular Insulation. Bond cuts, butt joints, ends, and longitudinal joints with
adhesive. Miter 90 degree turns and elbows, tees, and valve insulation. Where pipes
penetrate fire walls, provide mineral-fiber insulation inserts and sheet-metal sleeves.
Insulate flanges, union, valves, and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's published
instructions. Apply two coats of finished as recommended by insulation manufacturer's to
flexible unicellular insulation in outside locations. Do not use vinyl lacquer finish or
equivalent. Use metal jackets on cellular insulation located outside.
5. Cellular Glass and Calcium Silicate Insulation. Provide in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
6. Hangers and Anchors. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers. Where
pipe in supported by insulation, provide galvanized steel shields and protection saddles.
Where shield are used on pipes 50mm and larger, provide insulation inserts at points of
hangers and supports. Insulation inserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass, molded
glass fiber, minimum 128 kg/m3 or other approved materials of the same thickness as
adjacent insulation. Insulation inserts shall cover bottom half pipe circumference and be
not less in length than the protection shield. Vapor-barrier facing of insert shall be of same
material as facing on adjacent insulation. Seal insert into insulation with vapor barrier
coating or weatherproof coating as applicable. Where protection saddles are used, fill
voids with same insulation material as used on adjacent pipe. Where anchors are secured
to chilled piping that is to be insulated, insulate anchors same as piping for a distance not
less than four times the insulation thickness to prevent condensation. Vapor seal
insulation around anchors.
7. Sleeves and Wall Chases. Where interior wall penetrates, extend a stainless steel or
Aluminum jacket, 50mm out on either side of wall and secure on each end with a band.
Where floor penetrates, extend a metal jacket from a point below back-up material to a
point 250mm above floor with one band at the floor and one not more than 25mm from
end of metal jacket. Where exterior wall is penetrated, extend metal jacket through sleeve
to a point 50mm beyond interior surface of wall.
8. Flanges, Unions, Valves and Fittings for Piping. Provide insulation for cold piping and hot
piping of 43 °C or higher. Factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation covers
may be used except with flexible cellular. When nesting size insulation is used, overlap
50mm or one pipe diameter, whichever is larger. Use insulating cement to fill voids. On
pipe sized larger than 63mm, elbows insulated using segments shall not have less than
three segments per elbow. Place and joint segments with manufacturer's recommended
water-vapor resistant, fire retardant, and adhesive appropriate for the temperature limit of
the service. Overlap tape seams 25mm. Extend adhesive onto adjoining insulation not
less than 50mm. Total dry film thickness shall not be less than 1.6mm. Where unions are
indicated not to be insulated, taper insulation to union at a 45 degree angle. Provide finish
coating as follows:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 6 MECHANICALINSULATION

 a. Coating with Embedded Glass Tape. Coat insulation and all purpose jacket with two
coats of lagging adhesive and with glass tape embedded between coats. Total dry
film thickness shall not be less than 1.6mm. Where unions are indicated not to be
insulated, taper insulation to union at a 45-degree angle. For cold piping, seal
insulation and jacket with two coats of vapor carrier coating with glass tape
embedded between coats. Insulate anchors attached with glass tape embedded
between coats. Insulate anchors attached directly to cold pipe for a sufficient distance
to prevent condensation but not less than 150mm from insulation surface.
b. PVC Fitting Covers. Factory premolded one-piece PVC fitting covers may be .
provided in lieu of two coats of adhesive with tape embedded between coats. Provide
factory premolded field-fabricated segment or blanket insert insulation under fitting
covers. Install factory premolded one-piece PVC fitting covers over insulation.
Secure covers with stapling, taping with PVC vapor barrier tape, or with metal or
plastic tacks made for securing PVC fitting covers. Do not provide PVC fitting covers
where exposed to weather. Provide PVC fitting covers only in ambient temperatures
below 66 C.
C. Piping Exposed to Weather.
1. Metal Jackets. Provide over insulation. Machine cut jacket to smooth edge of
circumferential joints. Overlap jacket not less than 50mm at longitudinal and
circumferential joints and secure with metal bands at not more than 225mm on centers.
Overlap longitudinal joints down to shed water. Seal circumferential joints with a coating
recommended by insulation manufacturer for weatherproofing.
2. Flanges, Unions, Valves, Fittings, and Accessories. Insulate and finish as specified herein
before for applicable service. Apply two coats of an emulsion type weatherproof mastic for
hot service and vapor barrier mastic for cold service recommended by insulation
manufacturer. Embed glass tape in the first coat. Overlap tape not less than 25mm and
the adjoining, metal jacket not less than 50mm. Factory preformed metal jackets may be
provided as alternate for hot service.
D. HVAC Ducts, Plenums and Castings Insulation.
1. Rigid Insulation. Secure rigid insulation by impaling over pins or anchors located not more
than 75mm from joint edges of boards, spaced not more than 300mm on center o.c. and
secure with washers and clips. Sport weld anchor pins or attach with a waterproof
adhesive especially designed for use on metal surfaces. Apply insulation with joints tightly
butted. Neatly bevel insulation around name plates and access plates and doors. Each pin
or anchor shall be capable of supporting a 10 kilogram load. Cut off protruding ends of
pins, after clips are sealed with coating compound for inside work or manufacturer's
recommend weatherproof coating for outside work, and reinforced with open weave glass
membrane.
2. Flexible Blanket Insulation. Apply insulation with joints tightly butted. Secure insulation to
duct work with adhesive 150mm wide strips 300mm on centers. Staple laps of jacket with
outward clinching staples on 100mm on centers. Sealing shall be in accordance with
paragraph entitled "Insulation Finishes and Joint Sealing". Provide pins, washers and clips
at 450mm on center and not more than 100mm from duct edge for duct surfaces greater
than 600mm across except for top surfaces of horizontal ducts. For vertical ducts with
surfaces less than 600mm across, provide pins no more than 100mm from duct edge at
450mm on center. Carry insulation over standing seams and trapeze-type hangers. Install
speed washers with pins and pin trimmed to washer. Sagging of flexible duct insulation
shall not be permitted. Cut off protruding ends of pins after securing and sealing clips with
coating compound for inside work. For warm air ducts, overlap insulation not less than
50mm at joints and secure laps with outward clinch staples on 100mm centers. In cold air
ducts, vapor seal joints and staple as specified.
3. Insulation Finishes and Joint Sealing. Fill breaks, punctures, and voids with vapor barrier
coating compound for inside work or manufacturer's recommended weatherproof coating
for outside work. Vapor seal joints by embedding a single layer of 75mm wide open
weave glass membrane, maximum 20 x 20 mesh per 25mm between two 1.6mm wet film

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 7 MECHANICALINSULATION

 thickness coats of vapor barrier coating compound. Draw glass fabric smooth and tight
with a 38mm overlap. At jacket penetration such as hangers, thermometers, and damper
operating rods, fill voids in insulation with vapor barrier coating. Brush a coat of vapor
barrier coating where required on HVAC ducts. Provide vapor barrier jacket continuous
across seams, reinforcements, and projections. Where height of projections is greater
than insulation thickness, carry insulation and jacket over projection. For joints for heating
only systems, provide insulation with two coats of fire resistant adhesive with glass fabric
mesh embedded between coats.
4. Metal Jackets for Ductwork Outside Building. Ensure longitudinal and circumferential joints
at least 50mm wide, with filed-cut edge of circumferential joint turned under 25mm to
provide smooth edge. Place longitudinal joints to shed water. Seal joints with insulation
manufacturer's recommended weatherproof coating. Secure jackets in place with
aluminum or stainless steel bands on 225mm on centers. Do not use dissimilar metals
f o r direct duct connections. Where ducts penetrate exterior walls, continue increase
thickness required for ductwork exposed to weather and metal jackets through sleeve to a
point 50mm beyond interior wall surface. Where metal jacket about an insulated
s u r f a c e , seal joints with a weatherproof mastic recommended by insulation
manufacturer. For rectangular ducts, provide corner angles to exposed corners of
insulation. Apply two coats of weatherproof coating recommended by insulation
manufacturer to entire surface with a layer of glass cloth embedded between coats.
Ensure glass cloth overlaps not less than 50mm at joints and adjoining surface. Each coat
of weatherproof coating shall be 1.6mm minimum thickness.
5. Access Plates and Doors. On acoustically lined ducts, plenums, and casings, provide
insulation on access plates and doors. On externally insulated ducts, plenums, and
casings, provide insulation-filled hollow steel panels and doors for access openings.
Bevel insulation around access plates and doors.
E. Ductwork and Ductwork Accessories. Provide rigid type duct insulation in mechanical rooms
and where indicated; provide blanket type insulation in all other locations. Provide field-applied
insulation to exterior of supply ducts, return ducts outside air intake ducts, duct plenums, and
casings of HVAC units. Ensure full range of motion of equipment actuators. Modify insulation to
avoid obstruction with valve handles, safety reliefs, and other such items. Install insulation with
jackets drawn tight and cement down on longitudinal and end laps. Do not use scrap pieces
where a full length section will fit. Apply insulation and sound deadening materials on outside
rather than inside of ductwork.
1. Duct Sleeves and Pipes Sleeves. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves, wall and
ceiling openings, except at fire dampers in duct systems. Extend surface finishes to
protect surfaces, end, and raw edges of insulation. Apply coatings and adhesives at
manufacturer's recommended coverage per liter.
2. Moisture Seal. Provide a vapor (moisture) seal where insulation terminates against metal
hangers, anchors and other projections through insulation on surfaces for which a vapor
seal is specified. Keep insulation dry during application of finish. Bevel and seal edges of
exposed insulation.
F. Equipment Insulation. Apply equipment insulation suitable for temperature and service in rigid
block or semi-rigid board or flexible form fit as closely as possible to equipment. Groove or
score insulation where necessary to fit contours of equipment. Stagger end joints where
possible. Bevel edges of insulation for cylindrical surfaces to provide tight joints. Join sections
of cellular glass insulation with bedding compound. After cellular glass insulation is in place on
areas to be insulated, except where metal encased, fill joints, seams, chipped edges or
depressions with bedding compound to form a smooth surface, Fill mineral fiber joints with
insulating cement. Bevel insulation around name plates ASME and access plates. For
insulation on equipment that is opened periodically for inspection, cleaning, or repair, construct
insulation to be removable and replaceable without damage. Protect exposed insulation
corners with corner angles under wires and bands.
1. Cold Equipment (Except Pumps). Secure Insulation with 1.63mm diameter, galvanized
steel or copper clad wire or with 19mm wide 0.88mm thick stainless steel bands spaced

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 8 MECHANICALINSULATION

 on 300mm centers. Seal joints with joint sealer. Cover non-removable irregular surfaces
such as corner angles with a smoothing coat of insulating cement. Provide removable
heat exchanger head covers with male-female shiplap type joint. Apply two coats of vapor
barrier coating with a layer of glass cloth embedded between coats. Dry film thickness of
finish shall be 0.88mm minimum.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
A. Visually inspect to ensure that materials provided conform to specifications. Inspect installations
progressively for compliance with requirements.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEAN.
A. Existing insulation and surface finishes disturbed or damaged during the course of the work
shall be restored in a manner acceptable to the Owner's representative.
3.6 SPARE PARTS & TOOLS
A. Contractor shall include in the contract to procure and handover the quantity of spares as
recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 0713 - 9 MECHANICALINSULATION

 SECTION 23 3300
AIR DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The scope of this section comprises of fabrication, installation, testing and commissioning of all
sheet metal/aluminum, ducts including grills, registers, diffusers and smoke dumpers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. The following standards are referred to in this Part:
1. BS 476 Fire tests on building materials and structures (or American Equivalent)
2. BS 1449 Steel plate, sheet and strip (or American Equivalent)
3. BS 1470 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for general engineering purposes
(or American Equivalent)
4. BS 1474 Wrought aluminum and aluminum alloys for general engineering
purposes; bars extruded round tubes and sections (or American
Equivalent)
5. BS CP 352 Mechanical ventilation and air conditioning in buildings (or American
Equivalent)
6. NFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Facilities
7. NFPA 96 Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operation
8. SMACNA Ductwork design and installation
9. UL 555 S Smoke Dampers
1.3 SUBMITTAL
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMISSIONS
A. The Contractor will also prepare an air balance diagram & Matrix for supply, return, exhaust,
make-up, exfiltration etc.
B. The Contractor will prepare full shop drawings, including sections, of distribution systems and
equipment.
C. Hardware Submissions. The Contractor will submit catalogue information for all distribution
equipment including, but not limited to:-
1. Duct work, duct sealants, gaskets and tapes
2. Flexible ductwork
3. Flexible connections
4. Access panels
5. Balancing dampers
6. Motorised dampers
7. Backdraft dampers
8. Splitter dampers
9. Fire dampers
10. Silencers
11. Vibration isolators
12. Diffusers, grilles and registers
13. Louvers, sand louvers
14. Filters.
D. The Contractor will submit samples for any or all of the above as requested by the Engineer
after receipt of the catalogues.
E. Samples will definitely be required of these items which are exposed, such as diffusers, grilles,
louvers. The samples must be of size, specification and finish as relevant to the project.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION

 F. Where a country of origin is given, this refers to the head office in the case of international
corporations. However, for each product not manufactured in that country separate approval
must be obtained from the Engineer.

2.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Follow manufactures guideline for storage and handling for air outlets.

1 General
a. Execute work of this section only by skilled tradesmen regularly
employed in the manufacture and installation of sheet metal ductwork
and components listed.
b. Equipment supplied under this contract shall be new and selected
specifically for this project by manufacturers having at least five years
experience in the production of specific items or equipment supplied.
c. Regulatory Requirements.

B. All ductwork shall comply with the following:

a. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineer's Handbooks,

referred to as ASHRAE.

b. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Incorporated manuals
(SMACNA) except where details or notes on drawings indicate otherwise:

a. Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards - referred to as SMACNA

Manual.
b. High Pressure Duct Construction Standards - referred to as MACNA
High Pressure Duct Manual.
c. Flexible Duct Performance Standard and Flexible Duct Installation
Standard
d. American National Standard Institute (ANSI).
e. National Fire Protection Association Standards, referred to as NFPA
90A, NFPA 90B, NFPA 96, etc.
f. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standards for Safety referred to as
UL 181, UL 555 etc
g. DW 142.

2.3 DUCTWORK
A. Duct work Material
1. All ductwork except in kitchens and laundry extract systems shall be G-90 grade
manufactured from strip mill, cold rolled sheet, continuously hot dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A527 or BS 2989 grade Z2.
2. All flanges and stiffeners used in the construction of galvanized mild steel ductwork shall
be galvanized steel section.
3. Where flexible ductwork is used, it shall conform to ductwork of the type manufactured in
accordance with BS 1470 aluminum strip corrugated and spirally wound with double lock
seam.
4. The length of flexible ductwork shall not exceed 1.5 m per section and shall be supported
as recommended by the manufacturer.
5. Kitchen extract ductwork shall be air and watertight welded construction manufactured
from 16 g stainless steel sheets in accordance with BS 1449 (or American equivalent), Part
1 Grade CR4 GP.
Provide access door per drawing. In any case the distance between access door
shall not exceed 30m.
6. Laundry and kitchen dishwasher extract duct work shall be welded stainless steel
construction in accordance with SMACNA standards.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 2 AIR DISTRIBUTION

 7.
Fabricate indoor pool and pool chlorine storage room duct work from stainless steel as per
SMACNA standards.
2.4 DUCTWORKSPECIFICATION
A. Ductwork fabrication and hanging methods shall be as described in the “Equipment” Volume
of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers Guide and
Data Book, latest edition, and/or current edition of applicable manuals published by the
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc., where methods
described in these volumes are not at variance with the requirements of any authority having
jurisdiction, or do not conflict with methods described hereafter. Ductwork shall not be ship
fabricated until work has been job measured and interference situations co•ordinated.
B. Ductwork shall be constructed of G90 galvanized steel sheet. All duct dimensions indicated
are net clear inside dimensions. Any conversion from the given shape shall be made without
increasing air velocity or friction losses.
C. Fabricated duct work from galvanized sheet metal unless other materials are
specifically indicated. Duct installation shall conform to the following:
1. Duct work shall be smooth on the inside and free of obstructions, vibration and rattle.
2. Fabricate ductwork, except as described in the next item, according to the following
classifications (where applicable):
a. Medium Pressure : Static pressure in duct less than 500 Pa Positive or negative to
750 Pa positive or negative and upto 1500 Pa positive.
b. High Pressure : Static pressure in duct over 1500 Pa positive upto 2500 Pa positive.
3. Comply with the following duct work construction specification:
a. All duct work shall be constructed for 500 Pascal duct pressure class as per SMACNA
standard. The seal class shall be “B” for all duct work. The sheet metal thickness shall
be suitable for the specified pressure class unless indicated otherwise for specific
ductwork mentioned elsewhere in this section.
4. Provide duct transformation with expansion fittings having slopes not exceeding 1 to 7 and
contraction fittings having slopes not exceeding 1 to 4.
5. Provide full radius tees, bends, and elbows for changes in direction except where square
elbows are required due to space restrictions. Provide double thickness 0.8 mm turning
vanes assembled in top and bottom rails in square elbows.
6. Provide balancing dampers free to move in either direction without binding and ratting.
Construct dampers in low and medium pressure ductwork from 1.2 mm galvanized sheet
metal. Use manual quadrants on small ducts. On dampers longer than 375 mm use push
rods with ball joints. Use two push rods on ducts wider than 600 mm.
7. Isolate equipment with neoprene 0.8 mm thick flexible connectors with finished fabric width
not less than 150 mm. Flexible connectors shall have the same fire / temperature rating as
the connecting ductwork.
8. Provide 50 mm insulated sheet metal blank off panels behind unused portions of exterior
louvers.
D. Flexible Ductwork:
1. Provide Flex master Triple Lock Aluminum, flexible ductwork upstream and downstream of
air terminal control units and / or other locations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Construct ductwork from a tape of soft annealed aluminum sheet, spiral wound into a tube
and spiral corrugated to provide strength and flexibility. Provide a triple mechanical lock to
form a continuous secure air joint without the use of adhesives for pressures upto 2000 Pa.
3. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 90 and Underwriters Laboratories classification for
round duct to specification 181 and comply with local Fire Authority requirements.
E. Provide flexible ductwork of maximum lengths of 1500 mm.
F. Wherever possible, rigid ducting should be used for connection to diffusers. If flexible
ducting is used, the following design guidelines shall be followed:
1. Air velocities in the flexible ducts must be reduced by 15% over the velocities for
rigid ducting (specified below).
2. There should be at least 4 equivalent diameters of straight duct directly before the
diffuser.
Bends directly before the diffuser are not acceptable. The best method to ensure this
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 3 AIR DISTRIBUTION
 during construction is to specify rigid ducting before the diffuser and attach this to the
main ductwork with a flexible duct.
3. The inside radius of all bends in the flexible duct must be at least two times the
diameter of the flexible duct.
2.5 DUCTWORK GENERAL
A. All dimensions shall be checked on site before fabrication of ductwork starts.
B. The whole of the ductwork installation shall be carried out by an approved specialist in
ductwork manufacture and installation. No ductwork shall touch the building structure or
building finishes direct, but shall be isolated with insulating spacer.
C. The fabrication shall be carried out in a neat and workmanlike manner with all ductwork true in
size and cross-section, braced and stiffened as specified and with all internal and external
surfaces free from projections and sharp edges.
D. At each main branch in ductwork and at each fan discharge or suction, provide sufficient
number of Pitot tube holes for balancing systems. Also, provide test holes for traverse fan
discharge and at all equipment. Test holes shall be located within easy reach of catwalks or
ladder. Each test hole shall have 20 mm clear opening, provided with a metal ring place with a
threaded hole in the boss, and matching screwed head plug. Where these plugs are installed in
insulated ductwork, provide an extension collar against which the insulation can be finished.
E. Reinforced holes shall be provided where thermometers, manometers, thermostats, gauges,
damper rods etc., occur in ductwork. Extended collars shall be provided for the reinforced holes
where these occur on insulated ductwork. Where copper tubing passes through ductwork, or
casing, provide a rubber grommet to prevent damage to copper tubing.
F. Ductwork shall be rigidly suspended or supported from building structure. Expansion type
concrete inserts shall be placed so that the fastener is in shear rather than tension. Powder
actuated fasteners placed by an explosive charge will not be accepted. Angle type trapeze
hangers with rod supports space at 2 m maximum shall be used. “C” type beam clamps will not
be accepted. Provide necessary steel angle iron required for bracing of ductwork or equipment,
and for supporting ductwork from building structure.
G. A layer of felts strip 12.5 mm compressed thickness shall be provided between any support
member which is designed to clamp or grip the duct (e.g. circular duct band clip) or on which
the duct is to rest. All supports shall be hot dip galvanized.
H. Increase in duct size shall be gradual. Where width or largest dimension of a duct is over 450
mm, duct shall be stiffened by bending in a break across corners in both directions. Ducts shall
be self-supporting and complete in themselves. Single thickness partition between ducts will
not be accepted. Visible internal portions of duct outlets to grilles and registers shall be painted
in dull black.
I. All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made in the installation of the ducts for the
structural framing of the building and when changes or offsets are necessary, the required
cross-sectional areas shall be maintained. All of these changes however, shall be approved,
and installed as directed at the time.
J. During installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected with blank, flanged sheet metal
baffles, securely attached to prevent debris and dirt from entering.
K. Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings and/or along the edges of all plenums
at floors, walls, etc., provide a continuous 30 x 30 x 4 mm galvanized angle iron which shall be
bolted to the structure and made airtight to same by applying caulking compound on the angles
before they are drawn down tight. The sheet metal at these locations shall be bolted to the
angle iron framing.
L. All air ducts, casings, plenums etc., shall be constructed of lock forming quality prime
galvanized steel sheets, which are free from blisters, slivers, pits, imperfectly coated spots etc.
No second quality sheet metal shall be allowed.
M. Where damage (or corrosion) has occurred on galvanized ductwork, the affected section shall
be made good by painting with two coats of zinc-rich paint and approved finishing paint, or
where the damage in the Engineer’s opinion cannot be made good, then a new section of

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 4 AIR DISTRIBUTION

 ductwork shall be provided at no cost to the contract.
N. Duct shall be constructed using double or Pittsburgh lock corner seams. All seams shall be
hammered down and made airtight by applying sealant before hammering down. For
transverse joints, refer to the current ASHRAE guide for low pressure ductwork.
O. Support the vertical ducts installed in the various shafts at each floor level with galvanized
supporting irons of approved size.
P. Install these angles across the width of the shaft, with their ends attached to angle irons
securely anchored into the masonry walls of the shaft, or attached to the framing of the floor
openings. The ducts shall be bolted to these supporting angle irons.
Q. Ensure that all openings required through floors, walls, partitions etc., for the duct system are
provide in the exact location required.
R. Each piece of ductwork shall be wiped inside and out before installation and all open ends shall
be capped and sealed to prevent entrance of dirt during construction. Ensure that ductwork
systems are clean and free from dirt, dust, grime, debris etc., before initial operation of fans.
Fans shall not be operated until the filters are installed and approved from the Engineer has
been obtained.
S. The bottom joint and 150 mm of vertical joint on outside air intake ducts and mixing chamber
ducts shall be soldered and made watertight. Provide drain connection and run copper drain
pipe to nearest floor drain.
T. All fixing devices including nuts, bolts, washers etc., used in the construction or support of
galvanized ductwork shall be sherardized, or cadmium-plated.
U. Final connections to diffusers shall be carried out using flexible ductwork or solid spigots as
detailed in the Project Documentation.
V. The aspects ratios of the supply and return air ducting should not exceed 3:1. If necessary,
wide ducts should be split into two ducts running beside each other.
W. Duct transitions should have a maximum slope of 1:6. Wherever possible there should be no
transitions upto 3 times the equivalent duct diameter downstream from the supply air fan, or
upstream of the return air fan, and 3 times the equivalent duct diameter upstream of the
silencer.
2.6 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK
A. Fire rated ductwork constructed for smoke extract systems to be tested to BS 476 Part 24
(1987) (or American equivalent) for four hours stability and four hours integrity for both inside
(Type B test) and fire outside (Type A test). Duct to maintain a minimum of 75% cross-
sectional area along its whole length when tested for four hours.
B. Duct also to be tested / assessed to BS476 Part 24 (or American equivalent) for all sizes
upto 25 meters x 4 meters cross sectional area.
C. All fire rated ducts to be GI duct, constructed to tested standard and coated with fire rated
materials. The fire duct to be manufactured, and to be pressure tested, if required by Project
Manager / Architect, to DW144 standard, in line with the pressure classification of the duct
being installed.
D. The fire duct support system should be located at a maximum of 1000 mm centres, the size of
the hangers and bearers upgraded to account for reduction in tensile strength of steel, due to a
four hour fire from 430 Newton / mm2 to 6 Newton / mm2.
E. All gaskets and sealants to be non-combustible and installed as fire tested. The flame and smoke
rating shall not be more than 15 and 5 respectively.
F. The fire coating to be non-hydroscopic and have been tested with exposure to UV and
condensation cycling, with no adverse effect on the life of duct for at least 20 years.
G. The fire rated duct shall be connected to the fans with the use of fire rated flexible connections.
Flexible connectors shall be made of glass fabric, coated on the both sides with flame retardant
silver grey polyurethane rubber, tested to BS476 Part 20 (or American equivalent).
H. All access doors / inspection covers and test holes shall be suitably positioned in relation to the
access provided by the false ceiling or other means of concealment supplied and fitted by the
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION
 building contractor.
I. All fire rated ductwork must be manufactured and erected in line with the tested and assessed
certification to BS476 Part 24 and ISO6944 (or American equivalent).
2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
J. Flexible connectors at inlet and discharge to air handling equipment shall be pre-assembled,
0.7 mm galvanized steel with minimum of 100 mm wide (exposed) fabric. For higher
pressure applications, 25 mm of width of fabric shall be used for each 25 mm of static
pressure.
K. Flexible connectors attached to acoustically treated ductwork shall be insulated with 25
mm Fibre glass insulation packed between flexible connector and 16 gauge (1.5 mm)
galvanized steel housing. Housing shall be fastened to duct with sheet metal screws. At
equipment collar caulk between collar and flange on housing with 10 mm thick
permanently flexible sealant. Care shall be taken to ensure that ducts on both sides of
the connection are independently supported and that no “bridging” occurs.
L. All flexible connection will be an approved manufacturer, with ratings of fire spread,
strength etc, listed by a recognised Testing Authority.
M. The fabric shall be rated for use up to 93 ºC working temperature with a tensile strength
of not less than 690 kPa.
N. The material shall also be impervious to moisture, dimensionally stable, and shall not rot.
2.9 ACCESS PANELS
A. Duct access doors shall be minimum 450 x 300 mm. All access panels shall be
constructed from double thickness galvanized steel sheets, thickness to suit the duct
insulation with necessary reinforcing inside for rigidity with space filled with glass fibre
insulation. Panels shall be made airtight with a continuous neoprene rubber gasket.
B. Openings in ductwork shall be provided with continuous galvanized reinforcing bars, which
on insulated ductwork, shall be extended to the face of the insulation. Small panels shall
be provided with at least two brass window sash fasteners. All panels shall have brass
drawer type handle.
C. Apparatus access doors shall be minimum 600 x 1500 mm with angle or channel frame.
Provide two 75 mm strap hinges with brass pins; and two handles minimum, operate from
inside and outside.
D. Provide access panels where shown, required and directed and in the following locations:
1. bottom of all duct risers
2. next to outside intakes and outlets
3. at each fire damper
4. into apparatus casings to facilitate maintenance and cleaning of all components
E. The duct access doors shall be fitted with CAM type to locks spaced to minimise leakage
and drawer type handles.
2.10 DAMPERS
A. Balancing Dampers
1. Install volume dampers in accessible locations at all branch connections and
wherever necessary to adjust the flow of air to secure correct distribution. Casing
& blade shall be made of galvanized sheet metal, and shall be equipped with an
approved device for fastening in any desired position. This device shall be such
that the damper cannot move or rattle and pointer shall indicate the position of the
damper from the outside of the finished duct insulation and shall be clearly marked
with words ‘Open and Shut’.
2. Dampers shall be aerofoil multi-leaf opposed blade with blade height not more
than 180 mm.
3. All blades shall be operated by a single operating quadrant with gears and
links as necessary.
4. Spindles shall be non-corrodible, passing through non-ferrous bushings or ball
bearing supports with seals.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 6 AIR DISTRIBUTION
 5. The whole damper assembly shall be mounted in a galvanized frame with flanges.
6. Seal material shall be rated up to 93 deg.C with low water absorption and
excellent chemical resistance to acids, alkalis and oils.
B. Motorized Dampers
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install, control dampers as required for the
proper functioning of the system.
2. All control dampers shall be opposed blade.
3. Dampers frames shall be formed channels of not less than 1.8 mm galvanized steel
with mounting holes for enclosed duct mounting.
4. Damper blades shall be of not less than 1.5 mm form galvanized steel. Blades on
multi- blade dampers shall not exceed 200 mm in width and 1200 mm in length.
Blade shaft bearings shall be provided at the ends of each blade. Blade side
edges shall seal off against spring stainless steel seals.
5. Dampers shall be supplied in standard sizes, in 50 mm even increments, with
transition as necessary to mating duct sections.
6. Dampers shall be suitable for operation within the temperature limit of -40 deg.C
to 93 deg.C. Horizontal dampers shall have a rated face velocity of 2 m/s at 1500
Pa static pressure differential.
7. Dampers used for shut off function shall be of the low leakage type.
8. Damper blades shall have neoprene or PVC edging on all outside air dampers.
C. Backdraft Dampers
1. Backdraft dampers shall be low leakage with parallel blades and neoprene edge seals.
2. Damper frames shall be constructed from galvanized sheet steel with aluminium
blades.
Bearing shafts shall be stainless steel, in brass bearings.
3. All blades shall be coupled at the blade centres and shall be in width of not more
than 1000 mm, with maximum blade size of 200 mm.
4. 2.8.3.4 Leakage shall not exceed 10 m3/h per m2 at 1000 Pa pressure differential.
5. Pressure relief dampers shall be multi-parallel blade with weighted arm closing assist.
The frame shall be anodised aluminium channel sections with formed aluminium
blades. Maximum blade length shall be 100 mm, and polyester foam seating strips
shall be incorporated on blade edges. Bearing shall be in PVC with non-corrodible
shafts.
D. Splitter Dampers
1. In each low pressure system take off where opposed blade duct dampers are not
specified, splitter dampers shall be provided. The only justification for not providing
splitters is in a system which can be demonstrated to be sized by a static regain
programme and which is run in high pressure fittings. Otherwise splitter dampens
shall be installed at all take offs.
2. Splitters shall consist of hollow blades in a vane rail assembly, made from
galvanized steel by a recognised manufacturer.
3. A lockable quadrant adjustment level shall be located outside the insulation, and
marked clearly to show vane position.
E. Fire Dampers
1. Provide, where required by ordinances or codes, fire dampers UL approved, made to
BS 476 or North American Standards or NFPA 90A, and complete with angle iron
frame of 3 mm thickness, 70 Deg C fusible link, pivot rods, and spring catches. Fire
damper housings shall be galvanized steel duct sections around the fire dampers,
and shall allow 100% unrestricted duct area while in the open position. Provide
approved type access doors, with airtight gaskets, for inspection and servicing of fire
dampers. Fire dampers shall be 2 hour rated and shall be labelled by manufacturer.
The fire damper blades shall be out of the air stream.
2. Provide fire dampers in ducts in the following locations:
a. 2 Hr Fire rated walls
b. 1 Hr Fire Rated Walls where plenum return passes through fire rated wall.
3. Where fire dampers are located remote from fire partition, duct between fire damper
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 7 AIR DISTRIBUTION
 and partition shall be encased in double metal lathe and plaster or other
fireproofing acceptable to Authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Fire damper construction shall be of 1.2MM galvanized steel casing, 0.8mm
galvanized steel blades, fitted with catch plates, stainless steel closure springs
and stainless steel seals. Blades shall be out of the air stream. Fusible links
shall be rated for a fusing temperature of 72 deg. C unless otherwise specified.
5. Fire dampers shall not be installed in kitchen exhaust ductwork. This shall
comply in all respects with NFPA 96.
F. Smoke Dampers
1. Smoke dampers shall be the low leakage type, rated under UL 555 S as leakage
Class I.
2. Frame shall be of formed channel of not less than 1.6 mm galvanized steel.
Blades shall be 1.6 mm, airfoil shaped, double skin construction, opposed blade
type.
3. Blade edge seals shall be silicon rubber and jamb seal shall be flexible
metal compression type.
4. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve type pressed into frame.
5. Damper actuators shall be factory furnished suitable for either 240 volt or
24 volt application. Complete unit shall be factory tested in compliance
with UL 555 S.
6. Damper and actuator shall be qualified under UL 555 S to an elevated temperature 120
ºC.
7. The damper unit shall be supplied with a two-position indicator switch linked directly
to the damper to provide the capability of remotely indicating damper blade
position.
8. Provide smoke dampers in ducts in the following locations:
a. Smoke evacuation ducts in public areas and smoke evacuation ducts in towers.
b. Treated fresh air ducts branches emanating out of treated fresh air risers
on guest floors
c. Diesel generator supply and fresh air ducts
2.11 DIFFUSERS AND REGISTERS
A. General
1. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be arranged for flush mounting in lay-in type
ceilings and over lap mounting in plaster, mineral tile and similar ceilings, with
concealed fixings unless otherwise directed
2. Grilles, register and diffuser locations shall be adjusted to suit reflected ceiling drawings,
or the Engineer's site instructions. All grilles, registers, diffusers, louvers shall the air
outlets shall meet the specs of “Price Industries” or similar manufacturer approved
by the site engineer in consultation with project Architect.
3.Provide plaster frame for grilles, and diffusers installed in plaster ceilings,
4.
All diffusers, grilles and registers shall be supplied completely factory powder
coated. Finish colour shall be to the approval of the Architect. The interior of all
grilles and diffusers is to be factory painted matt black.
5. All supply grilles and diffusers will have opposed blade balancing dampers. All will
have foam rubber sealing band around the edge to seal to the structure. All pivots will
be round section, not of formed sheet, and not relying on a spring steel locking wire.
6. Basic grilles and diffuser materials shall be aluminum extruded sections. Sections in
the air stream shall be carefully selected to minimise turbulence.
7. ALL grilles and diffusers supplied on this project shall be tested and rated in
accordance with ASHRAE Standard 70-72, ADC Test Code 1062-GRD and ISO
3741 or have ARI certification.
8. Linear bar grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium, with 6.4 mm wide bars on 12.5
mm centres pressed into a notched steel retaining bar. The core can be either
welded into the cuter frame, or where the grille is used in a sill application, held in the
outer frame by spring clips fixed to the core retaining bar. The outer frame shall be 35
mm deep and shall have a visible flange 25.4 mm wide, milled end caps shall be
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 8 AIR DISTRIBUTION
 welded to give a near invisible joint.
a. The grille shall be complete with an opposed blade damper painted matt
black, and shall be fixed with universal mounting brackets. Both the damper and
the fixing brackets shall be accessible through the face of the grille. Continuous
grilles shall be provided with positive alignment strips, which fit into special
keyways extruded into the frame of the grille to ensure clean unbroken lines.
9. Ceiling Diffusers shall be multi-core giving 4 way horizontal discharge. The three
centre cores of the diffuser shall be manufactured from pressed aluminium, with the
remaining cores and the outer frame fabricated from extruded aluminium welded at
the corners to give near invisible joints. One, two and three way pattern cores shall
be used as indicated on schedules. All cores shall be interchangeable. The core shall
be removable without the use of special tools, but for safety, shall be fixed to the
outer frame by a small length of chain. The diffuser shall be complete with an
opposed blade damper painted matt black.
10. Wall registers shall be double deflection fabricated from aluminium, the front vanes
being horizontal, the rear vanes vertical. This grille shall be complete with an
opposed blade damper painted matt black and adjustable from the face of the
diffuser. Both sets of vanes shall be fully adjustable without the use of special tools.
11. Eggcrate return or extract grille shall be provided with 12.7 mm x 12.7 mm openings,
giving a free area of 90 %. The core shall be fixed into an extruded aluminium frame,
with welded corners and a 25 mm face flange. The grille is complete with an
opposed blade damper painted matt black and adjustable through the face of the
diffuser.
12. Circular ceiling diffuser shall be of aluminium construction with two concentric inner
spinnings. The diffuser core shall be fully adjustable for vertical or horizontal air
discharge, and shall be removable without the use of special tools. An iris damper
shall be provided in the neck of the diffuser which is adjustable from the diffuser
face.
13. Vision proof door transfer grilles shall consist of an aluminium core with inverted-vee
type blades, and an extruded aluminium frame with matching rear flange. The frame
shall be adjustable from 28 mm to 60 mm to suit the door width. Transfer grilles for
'LIGHT TIGHT' applications such as dark rooms shall be with two vision proof cores
back to back.
14. Linear slot diffusers shall provide an unobtrusive continuous air diffusion with a
pleasing aesthetic appearance. Hairline butt joints shall ensure clean unbroken linear
runs for active and dummy sections. The diffusers shall be complete with pattern
control blades, fully adjustable from face of diffuser through 180 degrees and shall be
fitted with end caps at each end. The diffuser members shall be constructed from
high quality aluminium extrusions to BS 1474 (or American equivalent) while the
pattern control blades shall be of black rigid PVC or aluminium extrusions.
15. The air outlets shall meet the specs of “Price Industries” or similar approved by the
Site Engineer with project Architect.

2.12 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER, SUPPLY

A. Fabricate linear slot diffusers from heavy extruded aluminum factory baked enamel finish.
B. Diffuser length, number of slots, throw and air volume as indicated on the drawings.
Width of slots shall be 20 mm. Number of slots shall be according to drawings.
C. Provide air distribution pattern controller painted matt black in all supply sections. Pattern
controllers shall be face adjustable through full 180°. For multi slot diffusers, each slot
shall be individually adjustable.
D. Provide diffusers with integral air straightener and hit- and-miss volume control
damper, operable from face.
E. Plenums shall be acoustically lined till neck for connection of flexible duct.
F. Provide end caps as required.
G. Colour and finish subject to the Client approval.
H. Provide joining strips to neatly join and align sections to give continuous appearance
without overlapping.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 9 AIR DISTRIBUTION
 2.13 LINEAR SLOT DIFFUSER, RETURN
A. As supply linear slots diffusers but without plenum and
damper.
2.14 LOUVERS
A. Outside Louvers
1. Outside louvers shall be supplied with sleeves for the appropriate openings, and with full
installation instructions.
2. Louvers shall be extruded aluminium frame with aluminium blades of not less than 2 mm
thickness, and shall be firmly fixed so as not to vibrate. Unsupported blade width shall not
exceed 1800 mm. The Shape, Size & Colour shade of the louvers shall be in accordance
with & to suit Architectural requirement.
3. Behind each louver shall be an insect mesh screen 6 x 6 mm made from 2 mm diameter
wire. The screen will be clamped by a 20 mm frame and will be firmly fixed to the outer
edges of the louver. The screen and frame shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication.
4. The connection to the louver shall be flexible and shall ensure no duct load is transmitted
to the louver.
B. Sand Louver
1. Sand louvers shall have a double deflection inlet passage to separate sand from incoming
air by means of centrifugal forces.
2. Separation efficiency shall not be less than 80 % on 20 to 200 micron test dust, and 50 %
on 1 to 70 micron test dust.
3. Sand louver shall be mill finished aluminium sections with casing 2 mm thick and blades
1.5 mm thick. The base of the louver shall have self-emptying sand holes.
4. Pressure drop at 2 m/s average face velocity shall not exceed 85 Pa.
5. Insect mesh shall be included.
6. Sand louvers shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Engineer.
7.
2.15 TESTING OF DUCT WORK

A. Testing for ductwork leakage may be performed for separate sections of the system
or after the complete system is installed.

B. Testing shall be performed in accordance with SMACNA Leak Testing Criteria and
Procedures and in the following steps:
1. Pressurize ductwork section or the complete ductwork system to the design static
pressure and listen for noisy leaks.
2. Depressurize the system and reseal all the leaks thus found.
3. Pressurize the system to 1.5 times the design static pressure. The total
allowable leakage shall not exceed 1% of the total system air flow rate.

C. Balancing and adjusting of air distributing and exhausting system shall be performed
in accordance with the ASHRAE and AMCA standards.

2.16 SPARE PARTS & TOOLS

A. Contractor shall include in the contract to procure and handover the following minimum quantity
of the spare parts as per the list and / or that recommended by the manufacturer. These spare
parts shall be brand new and similar to the equipment / material being installed.
1. Grilles & Diffusers: 5 Sets of each type & size per extension
2. Motorized Actuator: 1 set of each installed size per per extension
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3300 - 10 AIR DISTRIBUTION

 SECTION 23 3413
FANS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air Movers for heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems including, but not limited to:
1. Centrifugal fans.
2. Axial flow fans.
3. Bifurcated axial flow fans.
4. Roof mounted toilet extract fans.
5. Cabinet or duct mounted toilet extract fans.
6. Window and wall mounted fans.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 230500 Basic Mechanical Requirement.
B. Section 23 0513 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment.
C. Section 230548 Noise and Vibration Control.
D. Section 23 3300 Ductwork.
E. Section 23 3300 Ductwork Accessories.
F. Section 230593 HVAC Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 Standard Handbook.
B. AMCA 210 Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.
C. AMCA 410 - 90 Recommended Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial and
Commercial Fans.
D. ARI 670-90 Fans and Blowers.
E. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers -
Fundamentals Handbook.
F. ASHRAE 87.1 Methods of Testing Fan Vibration - Blade Vibrations and Critical Speeds.
G. NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators.
H. SMACNA Steel Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National Association.
I. UL 705 Power Ventilators.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section. Comply with Section
01300.
B. Drawings: Refer to Section 23 0500.
C. Calculations: Submit fan external static pressure (ESP) calculations based on Contractor's
working drawings and the calculation method and data from ASHRAE Fundamentals Handbook
and SMACNA. Particular care shall be taken with the presentation of calculations for axial flow
fans where velocity pressure (VP) shall also be considered.
D. Products: Submit full manufacturer’s data for every unit and component.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3413 - 1 FANS

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of Air Movers whose products
have been in satisfactory use for a similar application for not less than 10 years.
B. Installer: Firms regularly engaged and qualified in the installation of Air Movers with at least 5
years successful installation experience on projects of a similar nature.
C. Obtain applicable test certificates for equipment under this Section to demonstrate adequate
works testing for quality, performance and compliance with relevant codes.
D. For major/critical fans, factory testing witnessed by the Engineer shall be undertaken at the
Contractor’s expense.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Comply with Sections 017800.
1.7 EXTRAMATERIALS
A. Supply 1 spare set of drive belts for each fan.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Comply with Section 017800.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Performance: Values of the resistance to air flow of items of equipment, ductwork and/or the
total distribution system indicated in the Contract Documents are approximate. Verify these
values based on the equipment offered and approved ductwork shop drawings and provide
fans capable of delivering the required air volume when operating against the actual total
system resistance. Fans shall be type-tested in accordance with the requirements of AMCA
210 and shall be selected to give the air volume flow rate at a sound power level not greater
than that specified in the Contract Documents.
B. Construction: All fans shall be constructed to a standard production design and shall be
capable of withstanding the pressures and stresses developed during continuous operation at
the selected duty.
C. Safety Margins: All belt driven fans shall be capable of running continuously at 20 % in excess
of the selected duty speed. Fan and motor assemblies shall be selected to allow a 10 %
increase in fan duty by adjustment or change of belts and pulleys only.
D. Mounting: Fans shall be installed using bolts, nuts and washers with all "as cast" bearing
surfaces for bolt heads and washers counter-faced. Holding-down bolts for fans and motors
shall be provided with means to prevent the bolts turning when nuts are tightened.
Antivibration mountings shall be provided. Fans heavier than 20 kg shall be provided with
eyebolts or other purpose-made lifting facilities.
E. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Systems: Where indicated in the Equipment Schedules, VAV air
handling plant shall be provided with variable speed fans. Fan speed shall be controlled using a
variable frequency inverter drive (VFD) acting on the motor. Inverters and motors shall be
compatible and the inverter power rating shall match that of the motor.
F. Fan Shafts: Fan shafts shall be precision ground, polished and treated to prevent corrosion.
The first critical speed of the shaft shall be at least 30 % higher than the maximum permitted
operational speed.
G. Balancing:
1. Shaft and impeller assemblies of all centrifugal, axial flow and mixed flow fans shall be
statically and dynamically balanced.
2. All propeller fans where the impeller diameter is 750 mm or greater shall be statically and
dynamically balanced.
3. Where indicated, limits of vibration severity shall be in accordance with ASHRAE 87.1.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3413 - 2 FANS

 H. Rotation Direction Marking: Every fan shall have a permanent arrow mark in a conspicuous
position on the casing or frame to indicate the correct direction of rotation of the impeller. The
arrow shall be stamped or otherwise physically marked on the casing or frame or on a metal
plate fixed to it with screws or rivets. Painted markings and self-adhesive labels are not
acceptable.
I. Fan Shaft Bearings:
1. Fan bearings shall be of a type suitable for the installed attitude of the fan. They shall be
grease/oil ball and/or roller type or alternatively, oil lubricated sleeve type.
2. Where the fan shaft is separate from the motor shaft, it shall generally be supported by
sealed, pre-lubricated self-aligning pillow block style ball bearings. For heavier duties,
similar roller bearings shall be used at the drive end. Unless otherwise specified, rolling
bearings shall be selected for a minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours or L50 life of 200,000
hours according to the selected manufacturer's standard.
J. Bearing Housings:
1. All housings for use with regular rolling bearings or sleeve bearings shall be precision
located in position and arranged so that the bearings may be replaced without the need
for realignment. Bearing housings shall be protected against the ingress of dust and,
where fitted with greasing points, they shall be designed to prevent damage from over-
greasing.
2. For non-sealed grease-lubricated systems, the bearings shall be provided with an initial
charge of grease in amount and quality recommended by the bearing manufacturer. All
bearing lubricators (greasing points) shall be located to facilitate maintenance. If a normal
greasing point location would be inaccessible when a fan is placed in position, an
extension of seamless copper tube to an accessible location shall be provided by the
manufacturer.
3. For oil lubricated systems, the bearing housings shall provide an adequate reservoir of oil
and shall include a filling plug and be oil tight and dust proof. Systems other than total
loss types shall include an accessible drain plug.
K. Motors:
1. Motors shall generally be totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC) to NEMA MG1, Design B,
energy efficient squirrel cage type, suitable for 400 Volts, 3-phase, 60 Hz electrical supply
or 230 V single phase, 60 Hz electrical supply as shown on the Drawings.
2. Motors for use with variable-frequency inverter drives shall be certified by the
manufacturer as suitable for this mode of operation.
3. Motors for general use shall have Class F winding insulation as a minimum standard and
be suitable for running continuously in ambient temperatures of 50 °C for fans installed
outside.
4. Motors for smoke handling fans shall have temperature ratings as specified.
L. Special Operating Conditions:
1. Units exposed to outside air shall be suitable for operation in a sand-laden atmosphere
and shall have a suitable cowl preventing ingress of sand-laden air directly into the fan.
2. Where fans are required to handle toxic, corrosive, moisture-laden, flammable, explosive
or high temperature gases, the materials of construction shall be selected to ensure
suitability and all relevant safety regulations shall apply.
3. Bearings and lubrication arrangements shall be suitable for the prevailing conditions.
4. Where a protective coating is required for use with corrosive gases, the coating shall
cover all parts of the complete fan, motor and casing assembly which are in contact with
the corrosive gases. Fans shall not be installed if the protective coating has been
damaged in any way.
5. `Impellers shall be of coated steel, stainless steel or aluminum or plastics as
indicated. Brass rubbing rings and impeller trips shall be used for fans in explosive
atmospheres.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3413 - 3 FANS

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL UTILITY FANS
A. Casings:
1. Fan casings shall be constructed to permit withdrawal of the fan impeller after fan
installation to facilitate cleaning and maintenance of the impeller and shall incorporate
purpose-made air seals.
2. Fans other than those in air handling units shall be provided with a flanged outlet
connection and spigot inlet connection(s) unless otherwise indicated, except that for
negative pressures greater than 500 Pa, inlet connections shall be flanged.
3. Fans in which accumulation of moisture is to be expected or which require regular
cleaning of the impeller shall be provided with a plugged drain tapping at the lowest point
in the fan casing.
B. Impellers:
1. Impellers shall be of aluminum alloy of riveted, welded or other approved construction with
spiders or hubs of robust design.
2. Fans in air handling units (AHUs) shall have backward curved blades and an overall
efficiency not less than 80 %.
3. Fans for high and medium velocity systems and those absorbing more than 7.5 kW at the
fan shaft shall have backward curved blades and an overall efficiency not less than 75 %.
2.3 AXIAL FLOW FANS
A. Casings:
1. Axial flow fan casings shall be rigidly constructed of aluminum alloy, stiffened and braced
where necessary to prevent drumming and vibration. Mounting feet shall be provided
where necessary for bolting to a base or to supports.
2. For in-duct mounting fans, the length of the fan casing shall be greater than the combined
length of the impeller(s) and motor(s). Electrical connections to the motors shall be
through an external terminal box secured to the casing. Inlet and outlet connections shall
be flanged to facilitate removal.
3. Axial flow fans shall be complete with spring anti-vibration mountings and sound
absorbing type flexible inlet and outlet ductwork connections.
4. Inlet and outlet cones shall be supplied where free air inlets or outlets are shown on the
Drawings and shall be protected using maximum 25 mm mesh guards of 1.2 mm diameter
galvanized wire.
5. Where axial flow fans are driven by motors external to the casings of the fans, drive
guards shall be provided. Unless otherwise indicated, a guard is not required for any part
of a drive which is inside the fan casing. An access panel sized and located to facilitate
maintenance of the fan shaft bearings or motor and incorporating a purpose made air seal
shall be provided in the fan casing.
6. Smoke handling fans shall have high temperature ratings as specified.
B. Impellers:
1. Impellers for fixed flow applications shall be of aluminum with airfoil section or laminar
blades as specified in the Fan Schedule. The blades and hub shall be formed in one
piece. The hub shall be keyed to the shaft.
2. For variable flow applications, the motor speed shall be controlled by means of a variable
frequency inverter drive (VFD) controllable by the BMS/HVAC control system.
2.4 IN-LINE TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Casing: Tubular housings shall be constructed of continuously welded heavy gauge steel to
minimize air leakage. The housing and bearing support shall be constructed of structural steel
members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearings. An access panel
sized and located to facilitate maintenance of the fan shaft bearings or motor and incorporating
a purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing.
B. Impeller: Impellers shall be non-overloading centrifugal type, of aluminum construction with
backward inclined blades, direct or belt-driven as specified in the Fan Schedule.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VIILLA 23 3413 - 4 FANS

2.5 IN-LINE SQUARE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
A. Casing: Housings shall be of square design, constructed of heavy gauge steel and shall include
square duct mounting collars. The housing and bearing support shall be constructed of
structural steel members to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearings. An
access panel sized and located to facilitate maintenance of the fan shaft bearings or motor and
incorporating a purpose made air seal shall be provided in the fan casing.
B.Impeller: Impellers shall be non-overloading centrifugal type of aluminum construction with
backward inclined blades, direct or belt-driven as specified in the Fan Schedule.
2.6 ROOF MOUNTED EXTRACT FANS (DOME TYPE)
A. Casing: Hood construction shall be of spun aluminum secured with stainless steel fasteners.
Curb cap shall be one piece formed aluminum sheet with welded corners and integral inlet
venturi.
B. Impeller:
1. Impellers shall be centrifugal type constructed of aluminum with backward inclined
blades, belt or direct driven as indicated in the Fan Schedule.
2. Belt drives shall incorporate adjustable pulleys for final system balancing.
2.7 ROOF MOUNTED EXTRACT FANS (BOX TYPE)
A. Casing:
1. Fan casings shall completely enclose the fan and all drive components and shall be
weatherproof and resistant to solar radiation.
2. Casings shall be manufactured from aluminum sheet with alkyd enamel finish supported
on a framework of aluminum extrusions with stove enamel finish and shall incorporate
access panels for maintenance and fan withdrawal.
3. Provide flanged inlet for ductwork connection or weathering skirt for mounting directly on
to a roof opening curb as specified in the Fan Schedule.
4. Provide flanged outlet for ductwork connection or rain hood with bird guard for free
discharge as specified in the Fan Schedule.
5. Bird guards shall be maximum 25 mm mesh and fabricated from 1.2 mm diameter
aluminum wire.
6. Fans and motors shall be mounted on a frame or support base incorporating slider track
adjustment in two directions and the complete assembly shall be isolated from the casing
to prevent the transmission of vibration.
7. A weatherproof isolator shall be mounted on the casing and pre-wired to the fan(s).
B.Impeller: Impellers shall be centrifugal, high efficiency, double inlet type with forward curved or
backward curved blades, direct or belt-driven as specified in the Fan Schedule.
2.8 WALL MOUNTED PROPELLER FANS (NON-DOMESTIC)
A. Casing:
1. Fans shall be fixed directly to the wall or to a proprietary wall sleeve incorporating a back-
draft damper.
2. Intake louvers or finger guard and wall discharge louvers with bird guard shall be provided
as specified in the Fan Schedule.
3. Finger guards and bird guards shall be maximum 15 mm and 2 mm mesh, both of 1.2 mm
diameter aluminum wire respectively.
B. Impeller:
1. Impellers shall be die-cast aluminum fabricated from a cast aluminum hub and sheet
aluminum blades.
2. Impellers of fans with nominal diameter 600 mm or larger shall be statically and
dynamically balanced.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VIILLA 23 3413 - 5 FANS

2.9 ROOF UPBLAST AND WALL MOUNTED CENTRIFUGAL EXTRACT FANS
A. Casing:
1. Casing and windband construction shall be of spun aluminum, secured with stainless steel
fasteners. The casing shall incorporate an outside air intake tube to the motor
compartment for motor cooling. Curb cap shall be one piece formed aluminum sheet with
welded corners and integral inlet venturi.
2. Roof upblast fans shall have the windband fully welded to the curb cap and incorporate a
rainwater drain tube and access panel for wheel cleaning. Fans used for kitchen hood
exhaust shall additionally be fitted with a drain tube with provision for drainage of grease
and rainwater to a matching kitchen hood via a fully-welded ducting system to NFPA 96.
Casing shall be hinged to facilitate cleaning. A bird guard of aluminum wire mesh shall be
provided.
3. Wall mounted fans shall be fixed directly to a proprietary wall plate and shall incorporate a
bird guard of Stainless Steel wire mesh.
4. Fans shall be supplied with matching back-draft damper.
5. The drive assembly shall be attached to the casing with anti-vibration mounts.
6. Roof-mounted fans shall have a weatherproof isolator mounted on the casing and
prewired to the fan. Wall-mounted fans shall have a lockable weatherproof isolator fixed to
the wall adjacent to the fan.
B. Impeller:
1. Impellers shall be centrifugal type, constructed of aluminum with backward inclined
blades, belt or direct driven as indicated in the Equipment Schedule, and shall incorporate
vanes for inducing cooling air flow through the motor compartment.
2. Belt drives shall incorporate adjustable pulleys for final system balancing.
3.
The impellers of fans used for kitchen hood exhaust shall be coated with heat-resistant,
non-stick plastic to minimize grease buildup and to facilitate cleaning.
2.10 CEILING EXHAUST AND IN LINE CABINET FANS
A. Duct mounted exhaust, supply or return air fans shall be of the centrifugal direct drive type. Fan
housings shall be constructed of steel. The steel duct collar shall be 152 mm (6 in) in diameter
to accept 152 mm (6 in) round ductwork and shall include a backdraft damper. The access for
wiring shall be external. The motor disconnect shall be internal and of the plug-in type.
B.
Motors shall be mounted on vibration isolators. The fan wheel shall be of the forward curved
centrifugal type constructed of calcium carbonate filled polypropylene and dynamically
balanced. All fans shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seal for sound and air performance and
shall be UL Listed.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All fans shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and in the
locations shown on the Drawings.
B. In-line fans shall be supported independently of the ductwork system and connected by means
of heat resistant and sound absorbing flexible connectors.
C. All transit packaging shall be removed from fan/motor assemblies at the installation stage.
D. Roof mounted fans shall be mounted on purpose made curbs and fully weathered.
E. External anti-vibration mountings supplied with fans shall be installed according to the fan
manufacturer'srecommendations.
3.2 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. Air movers and associated equipment and components shall be inspected and tested in
accordance with section 23 0593.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VIILLA 23 3413 - 6 FANS

3.3 TRAINING
A. Comply with Specification.
B. Provide instructions and training to the Owner’s staff for the operation and maintenance of the
equipment. Provide classroom and on the job training. Each training session shall be hours
long.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VIILLA 23 3413 - 7 FANS

 SECTION 23 3710
HVAC- AIR FILTER

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labour, materials, tools equipment and services for air filters in accordance with
provisions of contract documents.
2. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or
miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound,
secure and complete installation.
4. See Division 1, for General Requirements.
5. Work included
a. Panel filters.
b. High efficiency bag filters.
c. Permanent Washable Filters.
d. Sand trap louvers.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 238219 Fan Coil Units
2. Section 233113 Ductworks, and Duct Accessories.
3. Section 237413 Air Handling Units.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Filter media shall be U/L listed, Class 1 or Class II, as approved by the Engineer.
B. Filter components assembled to form filter banks shall be products of same manufacturer.
1.3 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide spare parts in accord with section 01730 minimum 15% extra stock of each type and
size.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. Refer General-Basic Mechanical Requirements; 1.03 Submittals section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMES
A. Fabricate filter frames and supporting structures of galvanized steel or extruded aluminum with
necessary gasketing between frames and walls. Provide holding frames 1.5 mm, "T" section
construction.
2.2 PANEL FILTERS
A. Media: 50 mm thick fibrous glass blanket, factory sprayed with flameproof, non-drip, non-
volatile adhesive.
B. Holding frames: 1.50 mm minimum galvanized frame with expanded metal grid on air leaving
side and steel rod grid on air entering side, hinged with pull and retaining handles.
C. Efficiency 30% based on ASHRAE 62-76 test method.
D. Initial resistance 6 mm WG based on 2.5 M/s face velocity.
2.3 HIGH EFFICIENCY BAG FILTERS
A. Media: Reinforced glass fiber performed into series of pockets and bonded to header. Provide
approximately one square meter of media per 100 liters/second capacity.
B. Holding Frames: gauge 1.50 mm galvanized steel with sealing grooves and gaskets, locking
clips, and provision for front mounted panel prefilter and side removal of filter media.
C. Efficiency: 80-85 % average based on ASHRAE 62-76 test method.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3710 - 1 HVAC- AIR FILTER

 D. Initial resistance. 12 mm W.G. based on 2.5 M/s face velocity.
2.4 PERMANENT WASHABLE FILTERS
A. Media: Metal screen, 25 square mm of screen per 100 square mm of filter area containing at
least 38 M of wire.
B. Holding Frames: 1.2 gauge minimum galvanized frames with retaining handles.
C. Filter equipped with handles and rotary wedge corner latches.
D. Initial resistance 2.5 mm WG based on 2.5 M/s face velocity.
E. Provide two sets of filters for each fan coil unit so that one set can be cleaned while the other is
used.
F. Minimum efficiency shall be 65 percent by ASHRAE Weight Resistant Test Method at 2.5 M/s.
2.5 SAND TRAP LOUVERS
A. Louvers shall be vertical fixed blade type with blades arranged to provide tortuous air flow path
and thus trap sand.
B. Louver shall have self emptying drain holes.
C. Louvers shall be constructed of aluminum to ASTM B209 and ANSI.1. Blades shall be 1.6 mm
thick and casing 2.0 mm thick.
D. Maximum louver face velocity shall be 1.2 M/s and maximum pressure drop 50 Pa.
E. Louvers shall be provided with washable filter and an insect screen of aluminum 2 mm X 2 mm
mesh mounted on a standard U type frame with miter corners. Screens shall be secured to the
interior face of the louver with self-tapping stainless steel screws.
F. Size of louvers shall be as indicated on the drawings. Louvers of heights 1125 mm to 2250
shall have central transom and sand chute and for heights 2250 mm to 4500 mm louver shall
have additional central bracing support as recommended by the manufacturer.
G. Louvers shall have efficiency of 80% with coarse test dust (20 to 200 microns) and 50%
efficiency with fine test dust (1 to 70 microns).
2.6 FILTER GAUGES
A. Provide diaphragm - type filter gauge for each filter bank, with 100 mm dial and pointer
graduated to read from 0 to 0.5 KPa.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Construct and install filters to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide felt, rubber or neoprene
gaskets as necessary.
B. Do not operate fan system connected to filter banks until filters (temporary or permanent) are in
place.
C. Provide new filters at handing over.
D. Replace filters used during construction.
E. Provide filter banks with removal and access space.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 3710 - 2 HVAC- AIR FILTER

 SECTION 23 6213

VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. SYSTEM GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply, deliver, install, set to work and commission the systems and
equipment as detailed in this section of the specification, as shown on the Tender drawings and listed in the
Schedule at the end of this section.

The condensing unit shall have special design suitable for high ambient climatic conditions.

Project cooling shall be covered by using the Variable Refrigerant Volume VRF IV R410A systems with All
Inverter Heat Pump to provide cooling to the zones as required.

2. SYSTEM FEATURES

2.1 General

VRF system shall be control volume flow of refrigerant through the indoor units, by means of
an electronic expansion valve fitted in each indoor unit. It shall be having the following
features:
1) VRF indoor units shall be having inverter-controlled fan motors to allow the system to
accurately respond to head pressure control requirements.
2) The system must be able to vary evaporating and condensing temperatures based on
ambient temperatures and/or load to ensure optimum seasonal efficiency and comfort. Or
alternatively fix the evaporating temperature for continual very high off coil temperatures.
3) Part load conditions must be met by a combination of change of compressor speed and
change in refrigerant temperature at a suitable reaction speed which is set at the condenser
on commissioning.
4) VRF Indoor systems shall be having a minimum of 50 step inverter fan control to allow the
system to accurately respond to head pressure control requirements.
5) Inverter Scroll compressor shall respond to control frequencies from 60 to 402Hz to provide
stepless capacity control.
6) VRF outdoor unit shall having All condenser fans capable of at least 78 Pascal’s of external
static pressure.
7) The refrigerant must be distributed by the use of a refrigerant networking system (Refnet) to
ensure low pipe pressure losses as well as keeping the require pipe work installation space
and material used to a minimum compared to other parallel pipe work systems.
8) The system shall be having the ability to sustain refrigerant piping lengths of up to 165m
(equivalent piping length has to be at least 190 meters) with a level difference of 90m
between fan coil units and condensing unit, providing connection ratios are suitable. The
system shall be capable of having up to 1000m of refrigerant pipe work installed. The system
shall be capable of having up to 90m from the first refnet to the furthest indoor unit, providing
manufacturer system design guidelines are used. The elevation between the highest and
lowest indoor units must be able to be extended up to 30 meters.
9) The system must be able to adjust capacity depending on the load requirements and outside
temperature to ensure that the efficiency is optimised, and responsiveness maintained.
10) The system has to smoothly operate at ambient temperatures ranging at least from -5°CDB
to +55°CDB in cooling. The system operation must be possible outside above-mentioned
limits, unless safety devices are activated.
11) The system shall be operating with Refrigerant R410A, being a zeotropic blend constituted of
a maximum of two different refrigerants providing a maximum temperature glide of less than
0.17K to avoid fractionation problems.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 3 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
 12) The system shall be having the capability to automatically charge the correct volume of refrigerant
during commissioning and, if automatic charging has been utilised, the system must also have the
ability to self-diagnose refrigerant containment for maintenance and service purposes. The unit shall
be capable of carrying out automatically the calculated required additional refrigerant charge
necessary to operate the system within its optimum efficiency. This cycle shall be completely
automatic and provide a warning to the service technician to indicate when charging has been
completed or the charging cylinder is empty. The refrigerant cycle shall not rely upon float valves,
level switches or weighed input of the refrigerant. The calculated refrigerant charge shall be retained
within the memory of the outdoor PCB as a reference for a refrigerant containment check which can
be carried out as required to verify the correct refrigerant charge remains within the system. The
automatic refrigerant charging and containment check facilities shall be capable of being used at any
time during the life of the system for any alterations or service operations which may be required.
13) In the event of compressor failure, the system shall be allowed emergency operation of its
other compressors in order to maintain 8 hours of interim capacity whist spares are sourced.
14) Systems containing multiple outdoor units shall sequentially cycle its start-up sequence to
ensure equalised compressor operation to extend operating life and reduce lifecycle cost.
15) In the outdoors units it is preferable to having a 7-segment decimal display, displaying
detailed error codes, stage of the start-up procedure as well as function and operating data
of the system. For the commissioning of a system and in order to properly set all necessary
data and values for the optimum operation of it, it is recommended for the starting-up the use
of special software provided by the manufacturer of the system. The establishing of the
values and the programming should be possible even offline.
16) The system shall have the capability to monitor and log data in a critical memory which shall
be store and provide 5 minutes of real time operational data prior to any system failure. This
information provides the system with “Black Box” data recording capability which can be
used by a qualified service technician to perform efficient and precise interrogation.

2.2 Equipment manufacturer

The equipment manufacturer must be fully certified and registered to comply in the areas of
CE, ISO9001 and ISO14001 and also must possess the BES 6001 certificate to
demonstrate responsible sourcing throughout the supply chain by proving product
stewardship against social, economic and environmental sustainability criteria. The
equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for the manufacture of the compressor,
refrigerant oil and refrigerant used within the system to maintain integrity of design and
optimise efficiency and reliability of equipment.

2.3 Testing and certification

All equipment shall be run tested in accordance with the following procedures prior to leaving place of
manufacture:
1) A choke test carried out on the refrigerant piping to detect obstacles.
2) The pipework shall be tested to 38bar.
3) Electronic leak testing shall be carried out to ensure maximum system refrigerant containment.
4) System vacuum test to 2 Torr
5) Refrigerant test to within 0.3%
6) Electrical tests shall include flash testing at 1440V AC to ensure that current leaks above 5mA are
detected, megger test at 500V DC to ensure resistance levels are above 10 mega Ohm and earth
continuity tests.
7) The system shall be tested by a recognised 3rd party as per AHRI 1230:2010 and shall meet or exceed
relevant Local Standards like ESMA, Estidama, SASO, & MEW etc.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 4 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.1 OUTDOOR UNITS (Manufacturing source Europe/ USA/ Japan)

1- The outdoor unit must be suitable for outdoor installation. The shell/casing of the unit shall be made
of enameled stainless-steel sheet, with polyester thermal powder coating (minimum 70μ) for high
protection in environment near the seaside. The units shall be air-cooled type incorporating heat
exchanger coils manufactured from copper tubes and aluminium fins. The air-cooled heat exchanger
of the outdoor unit shall be having to having undergone appropriate treatment for protection and
long-life efficient operation against atmospheric corrosion. Specifically, the aluminium fins shall be
coated with a layer of acrylic resin and on top covered with a hydrophilic film or any other material
which shall be provide minimum 1000 hrs of Salt spray protection meeting JIS/Equivalent Standards
e to acid rain and salt corrosion. The bottom of the unit shall be having a sheet of stainless steel for
protection against oxidation.

2- The outdoor units shall be able to deliver cooling capacities ranging from 8HP (22,4kW) and up to
16HP (45,0kW) in a single shell/housing. A combination of two or three outdoor units shall be
possible in order to having systems with cooling capacity reaching 48 HP (135,0 kW). No limitations
on possible combinations shall be accepted while the most appropriate one shall be decided
primarily for operating at the best possible seasonal efficiency. Aforementioned cooling capacities
shall be clearly mentioned in the manufacturer’s official technical documentation and literature and
shall be calculated, based on the following conditions:
Indoor room air temperature: 27oCDB / 19oCWB.
Ambient air temperature: 35oCDB.
Equivalent piping length: 5,0m.
Height difference: 0m.

3- Compressors: In the outdoor unit there shall be either one or two compressors in separate shells, so
in case one fails it shall be not be necessary to replace both. The outdoor units shall be having axial
fan(s) DC inverter driven, air-cooled heat exchanger, piping, wiring and automation, factory-installed
electronic expansion valves, oil separator, accumulator at the suction side of the compressor, high &
low pressure sensors, protection thermostats, fuses, protection against overcurrent, protection for
overloading of the inverter, liquid and gas stop valves and solenoid valves, timers and all the
necessary sensors and protection equipment to ensure continuous, safe and smooth operation.

4- The outdoor unit - and consequently the whole system - shall be keep on operating even if one
compressor is turned off (emergency operation). In case of a multi-outdoor unit system it shall be
possible to isolate one module, while the rest of the system shall be continuing to operate even if
delivering reduced capacity. This ensures continuous air conditioning of the premises, until the cause
of the issue seizes to exist.

5- Outdoor units should have a specific function and appropriate devices to prevent refrigerant in liquid
phase to return to the compressor. This ensures the specified density of the oil and therefore the
adequate lubrication of the compressor. This function increases the efficiency of the system and
extends the lifespan of the compressor.

6- Compressors shall be hermetically closed scroll type with integrated motor and sound absorbing
jacket. They shall be having a DC inverter driven motor and be able to continuously change the
frequency, resulting in a change to the volumetric refrigerant flow from the compressor, in order to
accurately and fast respond to the required load. The change in frequency should be done
incrementally, but in enough steps so the change of delivered capacity can be approximated as
linear. The minimum number of capacity steps shall be no less than 100.

7- The compressors shall be equipped with the technology, providing the minimization or elimination of
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 5 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
 refrigerant backflow within the scroll structure al low load conditions, thus minimizing the losses and
improving the overall seasonal efficiency. This shall be done by means of refrigerant bypass port,
which allows high pressure refrigerant to go partially to pressure equalization chamber on the back
side of movable scroll, thus compensating the scroll compressing force loss at low load conditions.

8- The motor windings shall be specially constructed, in order to achieve the safe and smooth operation
to avoid hazards due to the continuously changing of frequency and voltage. The compressors shall
be protected by an electrical crankcase heater to prevent oil condensation at low ambient
temperatures.

9- The oil supply in the compressor shall be on the high-pressure side, ensuring optimum lubrication of
all moving parts. Therefor a separate lubrication system shall be not be required for the moving parts
of the compressor, since the oil in the center of the crankshaft shall be transported across the
surface of the rotating parts from the center to the perimeter. This optimizes the performance of the
compressor and minimizes stress and wear, extending its lifetime. The compressors’ motors shall
have a cooling system using compressed gas, to avoid sudden changes in temperature resulting in
significant stresses on winding and bearings.

10- Compressors shall be altered the rotation speed linearly and consume energy in accordance with
cooling and heating loads, ensuring operational autonomy and independent temperature control in
each room. The two DC inverter compressors shall be able to vary their speed separately controlling
the volumetric flow more accurately, with lower power consumption, resulting in higher efficiencies
at all loads and connection ratios.

11- For protecting the compressor from frequent start-stops, there shall be an appropriate timer.

12- Oil recovery system: The oil recovery from the piping network and the indoor units has to be
achieved by the use of a microprocessor. The oil shall be recovered at least once every eight hours,
via a special oil recovery function, ensuring smooth operation of compressors.

13- Fans: The fan motor(s) of the outdoor unit shall be DC inverter to further increase energy savings, to
more accurately adjust the fan speed and reduce noise. The setting of the fan speed shall be result in
precise control of system’s performance in accordance with the requirements of indoor and ambient
conditions. The DC inverter fan motors shall be automatically adjusting the rotation speed - thus the
air flow - and having at least 120 different steps. Each fan shall be separately controlled in order to
further increase the accuracy of system control.

14- The impeller shall be made of plastic and with a special configuration to achieve greater air flow with
low noise level. Outdoor units shall be having a protective cover over the fan to guard against
accidents and to avoid foreign objects entering the units. It shall be special design and construction
to minimize the external static pressure drop of the fan.

15- Fans shall be having a high external static pressure setting in order to reach at least 78 Pa. This shall
allow the installation / connection of duct(s) for greater flexibility during installation. In case of an
outdoor unit with two fans, then each fan shall be having the ability to be separately ducted.

16- System control and functions: All indoor units to be connected to a system must be independently
controlled depending on the requirements of each room. The indoor units shall be connected to the
outdoor unit via the wiring and refrigeration piping network. The wiring cables are not required to be
shielded, but the installer shall be having to ensure that it shall be not be closer than 5cm to power
cables.

17- The system’s operation must be based on pressure sensors and thermostats, which via a specially
designed integrated circuit shall be control the frequency of the compressor motor (inverter) by
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 6 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
 varying the compressor’s speed resulting in changes to the refrigerant’s volume and temperature.
The result, combined with ambient temperature and building’s load requirements, shall be always
deliver the necessary capacity while maintaining optimum efficiency.

18- The system shall be having the ability to perform capacity control from down to 9% and up to 100%
of the nominal capacity. The capacity delivered by the system should match the building’s load. This
way the system shall be consume the minimum required energy, at the highest possible efficiency.

19- The room temperature for each room must be controlled by a microprocessor, where processing of
the various parameters and the corrective settings are proportional and according to the integral -
differential method of regulation.

20- Parameters; set temperature and return air temperature for the differential control, gas and liquid
refrigerant temperatures for controlling the superheat

21- Corrective settings; opening of the expansion valve, fan speed

22- Variable Refrigerant Temperature: The system has to automatically adjust the evaporating and the
condensing temperature in order to always deliver the exact capacity for the building’s load, with the
highest possible efficiency. In parallel, it must be possible to also set a target refrigerant
temperature. This way the delivered capacity shall be ambient temperature dependent thus having
very high seasonal efficiency. In addition, it must be possible to operate the system with at least
three different set refrigerant temperatures. With higher evaporating temperatures the system shall
be able to deliver mostly or even only sensible capacity. The adjustment of the evaporating and the
condensing temperature shall be easily field set, without any optional accessories prior or after the
commissioning of the system.

23- Ambient temperature dependent variation of the refrigerant temperature – evaporating and/or
condensing is required, and results in even greater energy savings and optimal seasonal efficiencies,
as per latest directives of the European Union or equivalent local standards.

24- It should also be possible to fix the evaporating temperature at different values in order to having
the system operate with different Sensible Heat Factors. Relative humidity levels can be maintained
within the comfort zone according to international standards and guidelines.

25- Only Humidity sensor in the outdoor unit type system is not acceptable as it is shown drop in
efficiency. System supplied shall not have humidity sensors to avoid mix ups.

26- Refer to schedules for equipment details and provide computerized selection on software based on
actual pipe run for consultant approval

2.2 INDOOR UNITS

A. Ducted type – Medium ESP

The fan motor shall be DC inverter motor. The unit static pressure shall be automatically adjustable from the
unit wired remote controller (service mode). Unit height Shall not exceed 250mm.

The nominal fan external static pressure shall be from 30 to 140 Pa

The sound pressure level of these indoor units shall in no case exceed 45 dbA at high fan speed mode when
measured 1.5m distance from the unit.

A factory installed condensate lift pump shall be provided within the unit and shall be capable of discharging
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 7 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
above the drain outlet.

The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanised steel plate and shall be insulated at all applicable
panels. The use of a polystyrene only construction for the outer casing will not be acceptable. Facility shall
be provided for duct connection for introduction of fresh air to the unit and branch ductwork from the unit.

The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminium fins and have 2 to 3 rows
of cooling coil. It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the
load variation in the conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerised
PID control system to maintain correct room temperature.

The return air to the unit shall be through the back of the unit as standard however shall have bottom return
option

B. 5.2 Ducted type – Large Capacity

The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanised steel plate and shall insulated at all applicable panels.
The use of a polystyrene only construction for the outer casing will not be acceptable. Facility shall be
provided for duct connection for introduction of fresh air to the unit and branch ductwork from the unit. The
return air to the unit shall be through the back of the unit as standard.

The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type, statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise
and vibration free operation.

Return air filter and filter frame shall be field supplied by others, however shall be available as an option.

The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminum fins. It shall have
electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the load variation in the
conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerized PID control system
to maintain correct room temperature.

The condensate shall be drained from the unit using suitable tube and run directly to a main drainage point.
A drain trap shall be fitted to compensate for negative air pressure. Drain Pump shall be available as an
option.

C. Round Flow ceiling Cassette

The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanised steel plate and shall be insulated at all applicable
panels. The use of a polystyrene only construction for the outer casing will not be acceptable. Suitable
provision shall be available for duct connection for introduction of fresh air to the unit and branch ductwork
from the unit.

The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type, statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise
and vibration free operation.

The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminium fins. It shall have
electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the load variation in the
conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerised PID control system
to maintain the designed room temperature.

A dedicated round flow decoration panel shall be provided for each unit. The decoration panel shall
incorporate the return air grille and supply air louvers.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 8 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

A condensate lift pump shall be provided within the unit and shall be capable of discharging above the drain
outlet.

The air filters shall be incorporated within the unit and shall be mold resistant washable resin net type.

D. Ceiling suspended type

The unit casing shall be manufactured from Heat resistant plastic resin. The casing color shall be Fresh
White.

The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type, statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise
and vibration free operation. Fan motor shall be higher efficiency DC Motor.

The return air shall be through the bottom grille while the supply air shall be through the louver situated at
the front of the unit. A facility shall be provided to automatically swing the supply air louvers or lock them at
five adjustable settings and flaps shall be able to close completely when unit is switched off.

The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminum fins. It shall have
electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the load variation in the
conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerised PID control system
to maintain correct room temperature.

The condensate shall be drained from the unit using suitable tube and run directly to a main drainage point.

The air filters shall be incorporated within the unit and shall be washable resin net type.

E. Wall mounted type

The unit casing shall be manufactured from heat resistant plastic. The casing colour shall be Fresh White.
The back plate and the support frames shall be manufactured from galvanised steel plate.

The fan shall be multi blade cross flow type, statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and
vibration free operation.

The heat exchanger coils will be manufactured from copper tubes and aluminium fins. It shall have
electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the load variation in the
conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerised PID control system
to maintain correct room temperature.

The condensate shall be drained from the unit using suitable tube and run directly to a main drainage point.

The air filters shall be incorporated within the unit and shall be washable resin net type. Drain pump shall be
available as an option.

2.3 ANCILLARY ITEMS

Proprietary REFNET joints and headers, manufactured by VRF / VRF equipment supplier
only, shall be used throughout the installation to reduce imbalance in refrigerant flow
between indoor units. Size shall be suggested and approved by the VRF / VRF
manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 9 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

2.4 CONTROLS

Mains Power Wiring shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor who shall provide
3-phase 400V main isolators mounted on the VRF / VRF Condensing Units and a 1-phase
230V fused spur located within 1m of fan coil units. Inverter PCB shall be cooled by
Refrigerant and air-cooled PCBs are not acceptable. All solid-state components shall be
able to withstand 105 C temperature.

Controls wiring shall be the responsibility of the Air Conditioning Contractor who shall provide
system control wiring in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Control Cabling shall be two core flex to BS6500 and 0.75-1.25mm2.

The minimum separation from mains power cabling shall be as follows:

Current Capacity Minimum separation (mm)

of Power Cable Based upon 100M Run of Parallel
(>100V) Cables
0 – 10A 300
11-50A 500
51 – 100A 1000
>100A 1500

2.5 Remote Controller

Local control will be provided via remote controllers mounted within the occupied space,
providing individual start/stop, run/fail indication, set point adjustment and fault code
diagnosis. Time Clock control shall be flexible with seven independent day settings, five
actions per day of ON or OFF which can be configured in any desired pattern. The
controller shall contain an internal temperature sensor, which can be used for system
control or Fabric Protection control. Fabric protection shall be configurable with a start
temperature of between 5 – 150C and adjustable differential for the off temperature of
between 1 – 50C higher. The controller shall have the ability to be locked down without the
need of any other external adapter PCB or Centralised device to leave only the following
functions operable:

LEVEL 1 ACCESS
• All buttons operational

LEVEL 2 ACCESSES
• On/off button
• schedule timer on/off button
• Temperature adjust button
• Operation adjust button
• Fan speed button
• Air direction adjust button

LEVEL 3 ACCESSES
• On/off button
• Temperature adjust button
• Fan speed button

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 10 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

2.6 Intelligent Touch Manager Controller (If Applicable)

Intelligent Touch Manager

Intelligent Touch Manager System shall be provided with a true touch active screen with
colour Liquid Crystal Display with Icon displays to provide simple user-friendly operation:

 Have no physical buttons, all commands via Touch Screen

 Have the capacity to control up to 64 Addressable Groups in standard format and be capable
of controlling up to 512 Addressable Groups with optional expansion adapter DCM601A52
using the one touch screen display
 Be capable of WEB connection via the inbuilt Ethernet port
 Proportional power consumption to make the controller capable of providing energy
monitoring & client billing requests

Controller Display

On/Off selection
Set Point adjustment (Range 16-32oC)
Fan speed adjustment
Heat/cool/auto changeover mode selection
Frost protection set point
Timer settings
Holiday period settings
Priority settings for restriction of local access for start/stop, heat/cool mode and set point adjustment range
limitation
Reset ability for filter maintenance warnings

Indoor Units Monitoring Display

Room set point

Room Temperature Display
Operation mode; Heating or Cooling
Display of number of devices operating within system

 Start/stop operation, set point control, cool/heat mode selection, air volume setting, air flow
direction setting and enabling/disabling operation of the remote controllers by group, zone or
collectively.

 Monitoring of operation status of the indoor units, filter change indication and error code of the
group or the zone.

 Comprehensive schedule set up to start/stop the air conditioning systems. This can be set for year,
month, weekday, hour and minute. This will enable normal day-to-day time clock functions as well as
yearly holiday set up. Up to 5 settings can be configured up to 13 months in advance and allocated to
various groups/zones.

 Volt free forced stop input possible such as fire shut down.

 Flexible Group/ Zone selection Remote monitoring of common operation

 Power proportional distribution

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 11 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
 Running cost per indoor unit via optional software licence and external kWh meter(s).

 Password protection for zone, group operation and setup screen for various functions.

 The controller shall have accessibility from remotely by using PC.

 The controller shall have wide touch screen control colour display and can be wired by a non-polar 2-
wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km away from the outdoor units.

The controller shall accept a direct connection of a 230V AC power supply

2.7 BACnet Gateway (If Applicable)

Integration device will be provided to enable communication between the VRF / VRF system,
and the third party supplied BMS.

Gateway HUB
kWh-meter

BMS

DIII [F1/F2]

VRF /
VRF

Outline of Functions

 The device enables interfacing between VRF / VRF system and central monitoring board.
 Data of up to 256 groups of air-conditioners are controllable by the BACnet Gateway
 Air conditioners are operable, and the state can be monitored from the central monitoring
board by BACnet communication.

Main Functions

The device should monitor and control air conditioners from a maximum of 256 groups, on a
unit by unit basis. Major features are listed below:

 Switches the ON/OFF operation and monitors operational state.

 Monitors indoor units for malfunctions
 Monitors and changes temperatures
 Monitors indoor unit temperature
 Monitors and reset filter clean sign
 Switches the operation mode.
 Sets remote control operation
 PPD data available to BMS-system.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 12 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

 Additional Requirement for Power Proportional Distribution (PPD) (If Applicable)

o Power consumption meter is needed for PPD calculation

o The power consumption meter specifications are:
 pulse contact (kWh meter should not give a voltage output!)
 one pulse for each 1 OR 10 kWh consumed
 pulse width should be between 40 and 400 milliseconds
 maximum cable length between the power consumption meter and the Gateway is
200 metres
o Power consumption meters need to be connected to the 12 Pulse input contacts on the
Gateway option board DAM412B51
o PPD setup tool: SetupPPDV2100; same tool as for iTouch controller

2.8 REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK

The interconnecting refrigerant piping shall be manufactured from seamless quality

phosphorous dioxide soft/medium drawn copper to BS2781 Part II ASTM, DIN 1754/8905,
fully tested by the eddy current method, dehydrated and capped.

The copper tubing shall be of a suitable thickness to be capable of withstanding pressure test
as detailed in the current revision of BS/EN378.

The copper tubing shall be suitably selected with a wall thickness capable of withstanding the
system operating pressures on Refrigerant R410A, all as described within the outdoor
unit’s installation manual.

Pipework shall be supported and not secured at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m.
Preferably to create a method of adequate support ant containment, piping should be laid
on suitably supported galvanised cable tray, insulated and held in position with plastic
coated steel banding. Due care and attention shall be taken at all times to allow pipework
to freely expand and contract naturally.

2.9 Insulation

All Refrigerant pipework to be insulated with slip-on close cell elastomeric pipe insulation, with
a fire performance rating class “O” of the 1985 Building Regulations, having a wall
thickness of not less than 13mm. After commissioning, all joints to be properly sealed to
provide and adequate seal and clearly marked for ease of identification.
Where required external insulation shall be protected with a suitable enclosure to encase the
piping, as to reduce the effects of Bird, Vermin and Environmental attack.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK INSTALLATION

Pipework shall be installed by a Supplier’s Approved Installer in accordance with the current
revision of BS/EN378 and in accordance with Supplier’s Design and Installation
Instructions and the unit’s installation manual.

Brazing shall be carried out by skilled operatives, in accordance with the HVCA Code of
Practice – Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and Sheet.

During brazing, oxygen free nitrogen shall be passed through the pipework to displace oxygen
and ensure that oxidisation does not occur.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 13 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

 Longest possible lengths of copper pipe shall be utilised to minimise joints on site.

Appropriate refrigerant tools shall be utilised at all times. The use of hacksaw or any tool that
creates filings is prohibited.

Pipework shall remain capped at all times other than when actually being installed to prevent
the ingress of moisture and contaminants.

3.2 CONDENSATE PIPEWORK

Condensate pipework shall be installed by the supplier’s approved Installer in accordance with
supplier’s Design and Installation Instructions and the unit’s installation manual.

3.3 POWER CIRCUIT AND CABLE REQUIREMENTS

i) Control Cable shall be two core flex to BS6500 and 0.75-1.25mm2

ii) Power cable & Size shall be as per IOM manual.
iii) Power circuit shall be fitted with suitable Residual Current operated Circuit breakers (type
300mA).

3.4 COMMISSIONING & TESTING

Commissioning shall be carried out by a factory trained engineer. Qualified manufacturers

shall have training academy and is providing direct warranty and not local representatives.
Manufacturer’s shall have service setup that can provide quality service directly and have
history of last 10 years.

The entire refrigeration system shall be pressurised with Nitrogen to 38 bar for a period of
24hours.

Leak testing shall be carried out with a calibrated electronic leak detector, or similar if the
system fails to hold pressure within testing period.

Upon completion of pressure test the pressure shall be released and vacuum pump installed
on the system to remove air and moisture from the system. The system shall be
evacuated to –101.1kPa (-758mmHg, 2 torr) and held for a period of 2 hours with the
vacuum pump switched off.

Refrigerant should be charged to the liquid pipe in its liquid state to ensure that the refrigerant
composition is assured. The refrigerant charge shall be calculated to the system
requirements and in accordance with Supplier’s Design and Installation Instruction
booklet.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 6213 - 14 VRF AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

 SECTION 23 7412

AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. Supply and install as indicated in the schedule of equipment, Air Handling Units (AHUs), each
capable of the duty as mentioned in the schedule of equipment. The space available for the unit
to be physically verified at the site and dimensions of the units shall be selected to fit into the
spaces available. Where necessary the units may be built on site, subject to acceptance of the
finished units for warranty purposes by the original supplier and his local agent.

B. The units shall be double skin construction, draw-thru type comprising of various sections such as
filter section, cooling coil and fan section as per the details shown either in the drawings or
specified in the schedule of equipment.

C. Manufacturer / manufacturer’s representative should carry enough stock of spares including fans,
motors, drives, filters, hardwares (locks, hinges etc.,) locally to minimize breakdown response
time. The stock of spares shall be witnessed by Client / Consultant for necessary approval.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The equipment manufacturer shall strictly adhere to following standards & specification:

1. ISO 9001:2008 certification for Quality Management Systems of the manufacturing facility
required.

2. ISO 14001:2004 certification for Environmental Management Systems

3. OHSAS 18001:2007 certification for Occupational Health and Safety

4. Eurovent certification.

5. Model boxes to be Eurovent certified with both Polyurethane foam and Rockwool insulation
to demonstrate the flexibility of the manufacturer meeting customer requirement.

6. Eurovent certified selection software should have the flexibility of customizing the unit
dimensions meeting the plant requirements.

7. The equipment manufacturer shall submit the mechanical performance report certified by
Eurovent for the following characteristics.

a. Casing strength CLASS D1

b. Casing air leakage minus 400 Pa CLASS L1
c. Casing air leakage plus 700 Pa CLASS L1
d. Thermal transmittance CLASS T2
e. Thermal bridge factor CLASS TB2
f. Filter bypass leakage factor CLASS F9

B. The thermal transmittance and thermal bridge factor shall be relaxed to T3 and TB3 respectively
for re-circulated Air Handling Units installed in conditioned plant rooms.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 1 AIR HANDLING UNITS

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Ballast: 5 years on manufacturing defects.

B. Monitoring electronics: 3 years on manufacturing defects.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT CONSTRUCTION

A. The unit casings shall be of double skinned panels not less than 50mm thickness. Casing shall be
assembled with self- supporting modular panel elements with an integrated base frame made of
zincated steel and sections along upper sides of the units. Suitable for moist and salty outdoor
coordination of Jeddah.

B. The frame work shall be of anodized pentapost construction extruded aluminum, thermal break
construction using polyamide profiles for thermal bridging (thermal bridging using gasket not
acceptable).

C. Sheet metal thickness shall be not less than 1.0 mm thick for both inner and outer skin for panels
having polyurethane foam insulation. Alternatively, sheet metal thickness shall not be less than
1.2mm thick for both inner and outer skin for panels having rock wool insulation of 60 Kg/cu. m
density. The inner and outer skin shall be pre-painted, 270 GSM galvanized steel sheet having 7
to 9 microns of primer coat and 20 to 25 microns of polyester coat on the outer surface. For
additional protection, outer surface of the outer skin shall be provided with vinyl guard film for
scratch protection. Inside and outside of panel walls shall be completely smooth.

D. Floor panels (inner skin) shall be of checkered plate of minimum 3mm thick, galvanized steel
sheet for unit capacity of 40000 CFM and above.

E. All casing panels shall be insulated with injected CFC free polyurethane foam insulation and shall
be in accordance to Class O of ISO 1182.2 standards. The insulation density shall be 45 Kg /m³
and having thermal conductivity (K value) of 0.02 W/m K.

F. The blank offs of the units shall be made out of not less than 1.5mm, 270 GSM galvanized steel
sheet duly epoxy coated for corrosion resistance.

G. The base frame of the units shall be made out of not less than 3.0mm thick up to 10000 CFM and
4.0mm thick beyond 10000 CFM, 220 GSM galvanized steel sheet duly epoxy coated for
corrosion resistance.

H. Access doors shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access doors 400 mm
and larger shall be provided with hinges and handles and access doors with width smaller than
400 mm shall be removable type fitted with quick release flap turn lock with spring pressure
arrangement. Sealant between panels shall be an anti fungicide material.

I. The manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of panels.
In the event that any condensation problems appear after installation, the contractor shall
undertake all remedial measures to rectify and to the satisfaction of the consultants. Any stacked

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 2 AIR HANDLING UNITS

 or double height coils shall have separate drain pans to reduce carry over.

J. All fasteners shall be of stainless steel material.

K. Units shall be factory fitted with Marine lamps for both fan and filter section with view ports.

L. Units installed outdoors shall be fitted with weather proof aluminium canopy.

M. Acoustical insulation through the panel:

1. Hz Mid Frequency Octave Band

a. 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
b. 6.7 14.4 12.5 19.2 29 27.3 38.9

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION

A. The Air Handling Unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor and
drive assembly on spring isolators designed for 93% isolation. The fan discharge shall be
connected to the air handling unit casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer.
In addition to the above the entire unit shall be mounted on additional vibration isolators.

2.3 FILTER SECTION

A. Filter cells shall be of standard sizes with Aluminium Frame and shall be obtained from reputed
European manufacturer. The filters shall be sealed against the filter frame using a permanently
elastic gasket to a standard compatible with the filter efficiency.

B. Pressure drop tapings shall be integrated into the frame to allow a manometer or filter monitor to
be fitted. Filter materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, non-odorous and may offer no
sustenance to vermin. Each filter section has to be provided with manometer.

C. The filter material shall be pleated to provide a large effective area. Filter section should be
provided with an inspection door.

D. The contractor shall supply one set of all filters per AHU as spares for replacement after testing
and commissioning and prior to handing over of the installation.

E. Panel Filter:

1. The Panel filter material shall be synthetic media pleated to provide a large effective area
and shall be supported by a wire mesh and frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side
withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter class shall be EU-4 as per Eurovent 4/5 or G4
as per EN 779.

F. Bag Filter:

1. Bag filter material shall be synthetic media, of standard and readily available sizes. The
filters shall be clamped against the frame using a cam locking bar. The filter class should
be EU7 as per Eurovent 4/5 or G7 as per EN 779.

2. Bag filters shall be provided for both Fresh Air Handling Units and Re-circulated Air
Handling Units.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 3 AIR HANDLING UNITS

2.4 COOLING COIL SECTION
A. DX Coil Section
1. Coils shall be fully enclosed within the coil section.
2. Removable panel shall be assembled at both left and right side of coil section.
3. Coil panels shall be bolted externally; air tight sealed, easy removal and quick reassemble
to facilitate access for service and maintenance.
4. Coils shall be of the cartridge type, mounted on a condensate drain pan with a slide in-out
coil track so that the complete assembly is wholly removable for easy maintenance.
5. Coils shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI 15 Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration (latest edition).
6. Coil assembly shall sit within coil section face area and seal to the casing wall to avoid air
by-pass, and shall be plate by-pass of removable type for easy access to header section
7. Coils shall be housed in factory fabricated frame independent of unit casing and shall be
individually removable. Multiple coils shall be mounted on independent support structure.
Directly stacking coils using coil casing as structural support for other creep is not
acceptable.
8. Drain pan shall be made of stainless steel – 316L (18 gauge).
9. Drain pan shall be mounted in slanted angle at one side for complete and positive
drainage; drain connection shall be at one side.
10. Drain pan shall be insulated with 60 mm panels from all sides.
11. Eliminator shall be provided for coil face velocity more than 2.5m/sec.
12. Mineral reinforced PVC eliminator shall be provided which are highly efficient and can trap
moisture molecules at much higher velocity.
13. Fins shall be a collar type, assembled with 12.7 mm OD copper tubes and mechanically
bonded for greater heat transfer coefficient.
14. Coil construction materials shall be of Seamless copper tube of 12.7 OD with 0.41mm wall
thickness and copper fin 0.12mm thick. The fins shall be provided with Anti-corrosive
coating to prevent corrosion by harsh humid condition.
15. Coil frames shall be made from galvanized steel and painted for additional protection.
16. Suction is made of Copper Tube and the liquid line is provided with Distributor and Nozzle
installed from the factory. TXV is to be installed at site by others. Suction & Liquid line
connections shall be sealed internally and externally with rubber seal to avoid air leaking
through gap at coil panels.
17. Coils shall be “counter” flow.
18. The coil shall be tested at 300-psig submerged under water, designed to operate up to 230
psig (16 Bar) at 200 degrees F (93 degrees C).
19. The manufacturer shall guarantee that each coil can meet the specified duty.
20. Coils shall be pitched and installed as required in the manufacturer’s installation
instructions.

B. Coils need to be AHRI 410 certified for “Forced-Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

C. Cooling coils shall be fabricated from ½” OD copper tubing of 0.41mm thickness expanded into
0.12mm thick Copper fins with anti corrosive coating.. Return bends shall be die formed. Headers
shall be heavy section seamless copper tubing with a copper male adaptor for the ease of piping.
All joints shall be silver brazed. Fittings shall include plugged vent and drain taps for each section.

D. Coil end plates shall be made out of minimum 1.0mm thick, stainless steel – SS 316 material.

E. The coil shall be tested to 21 bar and designed to operate at 16 bar NP. Maximum coil face
velocity shall not exceed 2.5 m/s. Droplet moisture eliminators of PVC material shall be fitted to
all fresh air handling unit cooling coils.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 4 AIR HANDLING UNITS

 F. The cooling coils of all Fresh Air Handling Units and the Air Handling Units handling untreated
fresh air shall be Heresite coated for anti-corrosion.

G. The coil shall be mounted on stainless steel – SS 316 guide rails for side withdrawal. Header
connection through the unit casing shall be sealed with plastic grommet.

H. Drainpan shall be of stainless steel – SS 316 construction and designed with all round edges
allowing complete cleaning & avoiding microbial growth as per ASHRAE 62-1999. Drainpan to be
insulated with minimum of 13 mm thick nitrile foam closed cell rubber insulation.

I. Drain pan of floor mounted units shall have dual slope to facilitate fast removal of condensate and
arrangement to be provided to slide the coil. Any stacked or double height coils shall have
separate drain pan to reduce carry over. Drain pans shall have drain connection to the service
side.

J. U Trap sizing details to be provided by the AHU manufacturer. Details of the same shall be
affixed near the drain pipe to facilitate the contractor to follow.

K. Piping

A. Copper Tube and Fittings:

1. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube per ASTM B280, Type ACR, clean, dry and capped.
2. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube per ASTM B280, Type ACR, clean, dry and capped.
Annealed copper tubing shall not be used for piping larger than 0.625 O.D.
3. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
4. Bronze Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification Bag-7 (50% silver), BCuP5 (15% Silver)

2.5 FAN & FAN MOTOR

A. Fans shall be double inlet, double width, and backward curved centrifugal type with galvanized
steel casings. Fan ratings shall be based on tests and procedures performed in accordance with
AMCA publication 211 and AMCA publication 311. Further, comply with the requirements of the
AMCA certified ratings program and all fans shall bear AMCA seal confirming the same.

B. Fan make shall be Nicotra (Italy) / Kruger (Singapore) / Comefri (Italy). Country of origin
certificate from the respective chamber of commerce to be submitted.

C. Every individual fan shall be run before delivery to check bearing condition and vibration. Fan
shafts shall be mounted in taper sleeve bearings designed for continuous operation and a mean
useful life of 200,000 hours. Backward curved impeller should be coated with 60 micron epoxy
painting of high quality.

D. Fans shall be designed in accordance to the specified operating class of AMCA standard 99-
2408-69 – performance class limits for centrifugal fans. The impeller & fan shaft shall be
statically and dynamically balanced to a balancing grade of G 2.5.

E. The fan shall be connected to the outlet opening by means of an airtight flexible connection. Fans
shall not exceed a maximum outlet velocity of 12 m/sec.

F. Fan motor assembly shall be mounted on common base channel made out of extruded
aluminium channels isolated by spring isolators.

G. Fan drive shall be rated at 150% of the maximum motor power of the units and shall be fitted with
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 5 AIR HANDLING UNITS
 adjustable belt tension arrangement. Sheaves shall be factory painted with two coats.

H. Belt guards or screen protection door (epoxy coated) in Fan section shall be provided in
accordance with CEN Standard.

I. The fan motor shall be IE2 efficiency rated, suitable for operating at 380-415V, 3Ph, 50Hz
electrical power supply. The fan motor shall be wired to the safety isolation switch or connection
box.

J. The degree of protection shall be IP55 with mounting method B3 and Class F insulation for the
electric motors.

K. Motors make shall be AEG (Italy) / Crompton Greaves (India) / Marathon (Netherlands). Motors
of China origin not acceptable.

L. The contractor shall select power input and speed of the fan subsequent to ascertaining system
static pressure in accordance with pressure drop calculations to the approval of the engineer.

M. The fan motor shall meet the safety requirements of the CE and compatible with variable
frequency drives.

N. The motor shall be mounted on a common, torsionally rigid, hot dip galvanized steel base frame.

2.6 FRESH AIR INTAKES( IF APPLICABLE)

A. Sand trap louvers of aluminium construction duly epoxy coated with bird screen and extruded
aluminium, aerofoil construction dampers shall be provided at the intake section of the unit.

B. Fresh air dampers shall be of opposed blade louver type. Blades shall be made of extruded
aluminium, aerofoil construction and shall be rattle-free.

C. Fresh air fans and fresh air intakes shall be per the requirements mentioned in the equipment
schedule. Electrical actuator to be provided to open and close action.

2.7 SAFETYFEATURES

A. All the units must have safety features as under:

B. The fan access door shall be equipped with micro-switch inter locked with fan motor to enable
switching off the fan motor automatically in the event of door opening.

C. Fan and motor base shall be properly earthed from the factory.

D. All screws used for panel fixing and projecting inside the unit shall be covered with PVC caps to
avoid human injury.

2.8 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION

A. All the major components for their make and origin, materials (type of sheet / thickness) shall be
witnessed and certified by a repute third party agency prior to dispatch.

B. Third party certification shall be TUV-SUD / Intertek / DNV.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 6 AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject
insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for steam, hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical
services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using restrained spring
isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements
for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with
requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and
Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 13 mm.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into
structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and
maintenance.

C. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages
on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter
banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using DN 32, ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C)
copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection
to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 7 AIR HANDLING UNITS

 E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section
"Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection.
Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section
"Steam and Condensate Heating Piping." Install shutoff valve at steam supply connections, float
and thermostatic trap, and union or flange at each coil return connection. Install gate valve and
inlet strainer at supply connection of dry steam humidifiers, and inverted bucket steam trap to
condensate return connection.

G. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Refrigerant

Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection.

H. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water and steam coils with water, and test coils and
connections for leaks.
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.
3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
4. HEPA-Filter Operational Test: Pressurize housing to a minimum of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or
to designed operating pressure, whichever is higher; test housing joints, door seals, and
sealing edges of filter with soapy water to check for air leaks.
5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.

D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass
tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 8 AIR HANDLING UNITS

 protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing
operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.
5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-
recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and maintain
minimum outdoor-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
11. Install new, clean filters.
12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected duct systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan
performance.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC"
for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and
air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally
to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets,
dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 7412 - 9 AIR HANDLING UNITS

 SECTION 23 8413
DEHUMIDIFIERS

1. GENERAL

The Dehumidifiers should be high performance units designed for swimming pool applications where it
is necessary to control humidity and to prevent condensation to guarantee optimal comfort.

1. SYSTEM COMPONENTS

1.1 Frame

All units shall be made from hot-galvanised thick sheet metal, painted with polyurethane powder
enamel at 180°C to ensure the best resistance against the atmospheric agents. The frame shall be self-
supporting with removable panels. All screws and rivets are in stainless steel. The colour of the units is
RAL 7035 or similar approved by the site team.

1.2 Refrigerant circuit

The refrigerant gas used in these units is R410 or approved. The refrigerant circuit shall made by using
international primary brands components and according to ISO 97/23 concerning welding procedures.
All units shall be supplied with two circuits, each refrigerant circuit shall be totally independent from the
other. Any incorrect operation of one circuit should not influence the other circuit. The refrigerant
circuit shall include:

liquid line manual shut-off valve, sight glass, filter drier, thermal expansion valve with external equalizer,
Schrader valves form maintenance and control, pressure safety device (according to PED regulation).

1.3 Compressors

The compressors shall be scroll type with crankase heater and thermal overload protection by a klixon
embedded in the motor winding. The compressors shall be mounted on rubber vibration dampers and
they can be supplied with sound attenuation jacket to reduce the noise emission. The compressor
crankcase heater shall be always powered when the unit is in stand-by. The inspection on the
compressors shall be possible only through the unit front panel.

The low noise version LS shall be supplied with compressors jacket and complete acoustic insulation of
the compressor vane with high density sound absorption material.

1.4 Condensers and evaporators

Condensers and evaporators shall be made of copper pipes and aluminium fins. All evaporators shall be
painted with epoxy powders to prevent corrosion problem due to their use in aggressive environments.
The diameter of the copper pipes shall be 3/8" and the thickness of the aluminium fins is 0,1 mm. The
tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the aluminium fins to improve the heat exchange factor. The
geometry of these heat exchangers guarantees a low air side pressure drop and then the use of low

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 8413 - 1 DEHUMIDIFIERS

rotation (and low noise emission) fans. All units shall be supplied, standard, with a Stainless steel drip
tray and all evaporators are supplied with a temperature sensor used as automatic defrost probe.

1.5 Fans

The fans shall be made of galvanized steel, centrifugal type, double inlet with forward curved blades.
They shall be statically and dynamically balanced and supplied complete of the safety fan guard
according to EN 294. They shall be mounted on the unit frame by interposition of rubber vibration
dampers. The electric motors shall be 4 poles (about 1500 rpm), three-phase power supply. The motors
shall be connected to the fans by pulleys and belts. The protection class of the motors is IP 54.

1.6 Air Filter

Air Filters shall be supplied as standard with the unit, it is made of G3 class synthetic fibre filtering media
(efficiency 85% by weight)

2. APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

The following manufacturers are approved for use. No substitutions will be permitted.

1. SPC Hidros- Italy

2. Air Exchange - Australia
3. EMICON - ITALY

3. ANCILLARY ITEMS

3.1 Electric enclosure

The electric switch board is made according to electromagnetic compatibility norms CEE 73/23 and
89/336. The accessibility to the board is possible after removing the front panel of the unit and the OFF
positioning of the main switch. The moisture protection degree is IP55. The unit shall be having the
compressors sequence relay who disables the operation of the compressor in case the power supply
phase sequence is not the correct one. The following components are also standard installed: main
switch, magnetic-thermal switches (as a protection fans and compressors), control circuit automatic
breakers, compressor contactors, fan contactors. The terminal board is supplied with voltage free
contacts for remote ON-OFF and general alarm.

3.2 Microprocessors

All units can be supplied with 2 kinds of controls:

A. Basic control;
It manages the following features:

• Antifreeze protection, compressor timing.

• Compressor automatic starting sequence.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 8413 - 2 DEHUMIDIFIERS

 • Defrost cycle.
• Alarm reset.
• Potential free contact for remote general alarm.

B. Advanced Control

It has the following features:

• Setting the priority operation mode (OPTIONAL)

• Managing of the main and the secondary set points.
• Display of the alarms with historical list.
• Time band operation.
• Modulating valve.
Upon request the advanced control can be connected to a BMS system for the remote control and
management solutions using MODBUS; LONWORKS; BACNET or TREND protocols.

4. COMMISSIONING & TESTING

All units shall be totally pre-assembled and charged with refrigerant R410 or similar approved. The unit
shall be completely tested before the expedition. The Units shall be in accordance to the European/
American Directives and must be provided with CE branding and relative conformity certificate.

Testing, Balancing and Commissioning shall be as referred to throughout this Section, and in accordance
with Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

The test rig and all necessary blanks for the purpose of sealing the ductwork under test shall be
provided, blanks shall be removed after the test has been approved for each section of the ductwork.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 23 8413 - 3 DEHUMIDIFIERS

 SECTION 26 0510
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All general provisions contained herein or within any other Section of the Specifications
shall be fully applicable to each and every other Section.

B. Works on all installations shall be carried out in a neat, efficient and workmanlike
manner, assuring satisfactory operation, maintenance and repair. Work shall be in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification and shall fulfill its true intent and
meaning. No deviations from this Specification and/or the Drawings shall be made
without written approval of the Engineer.

C. This Specification and associated Drawings form a composite set of documents,

intended for the selection and installation of equipment having the general and specific
characteristics as detailed.

D. Unless otherwise specifically stated, the installation shall be left complete, tested and
ready for operation in all respects and fully integrated and coordinated with all other
trades.

E. The Contractor shall submit proof, if requested by the Engineer that the materials,
appliances, equipment or devices that are furnished and installed under the contract
meet the requirements of the reference standards with regard to fire and safety hazards.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work under this division of the Specification shall include furnishing all labor, materials,
equipment and services to install the complete electrical system, putting into operation,
tested and commissioned as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. The work
includes, but is not limited to, the following principal systems and equipment:

1. Incoming power supply from the Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).

2. Medium voltage power distribution system including MV switchgear, RMU, MV

Cables, Oil-type power transformers, DC controls, battery charger unit, protective
relays and accessories.

3. Low voltage power distribution system including LV distribution boards, LV cables,

LV bus-ways, panel boards, etc.

4. All kinds of electrical raceways, underground electrical services, boxes and fittings.

5. All kinds of wiring devices, dimmers, disconnect switches, starters, electric meters,
etc.

6. Interior, exterior lighting, street, flood, façade and other special lighting.

7. Earthing and Lightning protection systems.

B. Electrical installations serving all mechanical plants (HVAC & Plumbing) including all LV
cabling, cable trays, disconnect switches and connections to equipment.

C. Electrical installations serving all special systems and equipment provided under other
divisions of the Specification.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 D. All low current systems as indicated in the tender documents.

E. Complete testing and commissioning of all electrical works.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The entire Electrical Installation shall comply with the requirements of the latest editions of
the standards from the following institutes in all respect, including current additions and/or
amendments:

1. SBC Saudi Building Code.

2. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
3. SEC Saudi Electricity Company.
4. STC Saudi Telecom Company.
5. GDCD General Directorate of Civil Defense.
6. EN European Norms (standards).
7. BS British Standards.
8. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations).
9. CCITT International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee.
10. CENELEC European Committee for Electro-technical Standardization.
11. IEC International Electro-technical Commission.
12. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
13. IES Illumination Engineering Society.
14. CIBSE Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers.
15. IPCEA Insulation Power Cable Engineers Association.
16. ISO International Standardization Organization.
17. NFPA National Fire Protection Association.
18. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials

1.4 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

A. The Medium voltage electrical power supply from Saudi Electricity Company (SEC) shall
be 3 phase, 13.8 kV Delta, 60 Hertz.

B. The Low voltage electrical power supply and distribution system shall be 3 phase, 4 wire,
60 Hertz earthed neutral system. The voltage rating shall be 400/231 Volts for
Residential Villa and Support Facilities, unless specifically shown otherwise on the
Drawings.

1.5 LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Lighting levels shall be in accordance with appropriate standards and agreed upon with the
Engineer. Low energy lighting shall be the preferred source in all areas. The Standards
manual and the standards set forth by IES and CIBSE, the following maintained
illumination levels are recommended:

Areas Illumination Level (lux)

Kitchen 500
Storage Room 300
BMS / Telecom Room 500
Electrical Room 400
Parking Area 100
Roads Area 10
Exit Stair 200
Exterior Paths / Walkways 20
Bedroom 200
Corridor 200
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 2 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
 Areas Illumination Level (lux)
Library 500
Living Area 300

1.6 EARTHING REQUIREMENTS

A. The earthing system shall comply with the following:

1. The International Electro-technical Commission (IEC).

2. Any special requirements of the Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).
3. Any special requirements of separate earthing for low current systems in
accordance with relevant standards or manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Any requirements stated within the Specifications.
5. The IEE Wiring Regulations, 17TH Edition.

B. The earthing system shall take the form of (TN-C) system for the distribution systems
and TN-S system in all buildings. The Contractor shall ensure that the installation of
earthing system complies with the requirements as given in Section 26 0526.

C. The earthing conductor (the final conductor by which the connection to the selected
means of earthing is made) shall be of copper construction.

D. All extraneous conductive parts of any equipment or building installation shall be

protected by equipotential bonding in accordance with IEC 60364 – Electrical
installations of buildings.

1.7 LOW CURRENT AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS

A. Assign a local specialist supplier/designer for all low current and special systems
including earthing and lightning protection systems.

B. Specialist suppliers shall verify the design and submit shop drawings and materials
based on the requirements of the construction documents and related international
standards.

C. Shop drawings and as-built drawings shall be stamped by the suppliers.

D. Suppliers shall support their submittals with catalogues and satisfactory calculations.

E. Bear the cost of any extra items found necessary to provide a properly functional system.

F. Provide the latest up-to-date technology and software.

1.8 CO-ORDINATION

A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the proper co-ordination of all phases of
the work and timely delivery to the site of all equipment and materials for proper
execution of the work.

B. Visit the site and survey in detail the as-built situation of all the areas related to the
project before bidding/signing the Contract.

C. Co-ordinate the work with all or any other disciplines to ensure proper phasing and
continuity of the Works. If it becomes necessary to remake any part of these works or
that of any other discipline or trade as a result of poor or badly timed co-ordination, then
all costs associated with remaking those works shall be borne by the Contractor.

D. Co-ordinate with all supply undertakings and authorities and include for attendance along

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 3 BASIC ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 with all costs involved in re-directing existing services.

E. Take into consideration all statutory and local requirements issued by the Saudi
Electricity Company (SEC), Local Authority, Central Government, Broadcasting
Authority, Telephone and Telecommunications Authorities along with any other
requirements to be considered for the correct and legal operation of the Electrical and
Telecommunication Installation or equipment connected to the Installation as part of this
Contract. Pay all costs due to the requirements of any authority except for connection
fees.

F. The Contractor shall be responsible for co-ordination with all Electrical and Mechanical
systems’ suppliers and shall include in his cost all the electrical requirements (even if
they were not mentioned in the BOQ or drawings) to provide a fully functional
system as specified and as recommended by the manufacturer or applicable codes.
This shall also be applicable to all ancillary systems and equipment such as Security,
Audio-Visual, BMS and all low current & special systems.

G. The Contractor shall coordinate with the SEC “Saudi Electric Company” for the
connection of the new Electrical Room to feed the Residential Villa, Support Facilities
and other future loads etc.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible in coordination with the SEC and other matters
concerning with the power supply of the construction for the new Electrical Room or
either Transformer Room to complete and functional of the system.

I. The Contractor shall prepare, process and coordinate the approval from the SEC for the
connection of power supply / Electrical tie-in Points.

1.9 CLIMATE CONDITIONS

A. External to buildings and in non-air conditioned spaces, all apparatus shall be rated for a
ambient temperature maximum of 55 degrees C, minimum of 0 degrees C, generally
dusty desert conditions, a maximum humidity of 100 percent RH, and an elevation of 630
meters above sea level.

B. In air conditioned buildings (Residential Villa and Support Facilities), all apparatus shall
be rated for ambient temperature of 45 degrees C maximum, minimum of 0 degrees C
and a maximum humidity of 90 percent RH.

C. When equipment is installed in direct sunlight, it shall either be shielded from direct
radiation or suitably rated for additional solar gains. Cables shall always be shielded from
direct sunlight.

D. All apparatus shall be rated for continuous service twenty four hours a day, seven days a
week throughout its normal rated life, except for necessary routine maintenance.

E. All equipment shall be rated for very harsh and corrosive environmental conditions which
persist at the project site. All buried installations shall be suitable for aggressive and salty
soil conditions.

F. All external electrical enclosure must be protected and must comply with the type test.

1.10 ACCESSIBILITY

A. All works within the project and particularly above suspended ceilings or inside vertical
shafts shall be installed so as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and repair. If
necessary, deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this, but no
change shall be made without written approval from the Engineer. Locations of access
doors and panels shall be approved by the Engineer before installation work is

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 commenced.

1.11 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Comply with Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements.

B. All material and equipment fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against corrosion,
deterioration and ingress of foreign matter and moisture.

C. All material and equipment shall be kept clear of the floor or ground by means of wooden
blocks and shall be protected against weather with durable waterproof wrapping and
other appropriate means.

D. The Contractor shall be liable for any loss due to delivery, storage or site security
problems.

1.12 PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION

A. Provision shall be made to minimize noise and vibration. However, different

manufacturer's equipment will have varying sound and vibration characteristics. The
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that equipment installed does not transmit
unnecessary noise or vibration.

B. All equipment installed in plant rooms and outside areas shall not be audible in occupied
areas.

C. Any vibration isolators, isolating bases, flexible connections, silencers, other acoustic
treatment or anti-vibration precautions necessary shall be included in the rates for
equipment’s.

D. Submit proof of the selected noise proofing measures to the Engineer before
commencement of work.

E. Submit to the Engineer for information the noise level generation by the plant selected so
that structural soundproofing measures can be evaluated. This means either data on the
acoustic capacity level in relation to frequency, or the sound pressure level measured at
1 meter from the plant at octave median frequencies from 63 Hz to 4000 Hz. Details of
the spatial and operational conditions shall also be given.

F. All costs of noise sound level measurements and any repeat measurements, necessary
if acoustic requirements are not met, shall be allowed for by the Contractor.

1.13 GUARDS

A. All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately protect
all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment. The guards shall be constructed
in such a manner that the movement of drive belts and rotation of shafts may be readily
observed without removal of the guard.

B. All 'live' parts of electrical equipment shall be protected in such a way to adequately
protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment from injury.

C. Wherever possible, all protective guards shall be supplied by the equipment

manufacturer. All guards shall be strongly attached to equipment and shall be designed
to be easily removed for access, servicing, adjustment and maintenance.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 5 BASIC ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 1.14 SIGNS AND NOTICES

A. All signs and notices shall be in Arabic and English with the Arabic version being above
or to the right of the English version.

B. A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic translations shall be approved
by the Engineer prior to manufacture.

1.15 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Mounting heights of equipment above finished floor level shall be coordinated with
architectural details and other disciplines/equipment. Any discrepancy found between
these heights and other details shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for
clarification and final decision. Unless otherwise indicated in Drawings, mounting heights
of electrical devices shall be as follows:

1. Panel board: 1800 mm (Top of panel above FFL).

2. Isolating switch: 1200 mm.
3. Light switch: 1200 mm (100 mm from door frame horizontally).
4. Push button station: 1200 mm.
5. Wall mounted telephone/intercom: 1350 mm.
6. Fire alarm manual call point: 1350 mm.
7. Fire alarm sounder: 2100 mm.
8. Fire alarm panel: 1800 mm (top of panel above FFL).
9. Power outlet: 300 to 450mm.
10. Data/Telephone outlet: 300 to 450mm.
11. Wall mounted speaker: 2100 mm.

B. Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g. light switch and socket outlet) are
shown in approximately the same location on plan, their center lines shall be aligned
vertically.

C. Where wall mounted accessories are shown adjacent to each other they shall be mounted
with their wall plates separated by 50 mm.

1.16 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Each item of the Electrical Installation including electrical switchgear, control gear,
equipment, devices, etc. shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label clearly indicating its
function giving at least the following information:

1. Manufacturer’s name.
2. Country of origin.
3. Type/model number or code.
4. Rated voltage, current and frequency (as applicable).
5. Short circuit breaking capacity with time.
6. Compliance mark of the international standard(s).

B. Prior to final testing, confirm that all labeling is intact over the whole site and that all
cables have been fitted with circuit markers. 13800 Volt cables shall be clearly labeled
"DANGER High Voltage" every two meters of their exposed length.

C. All conductors shall have their outer covering colored to suit the phase to which they are
connected.

D. An instruction notice giving details of first aid treatment for electric shock shall be
positioned in an approved position in each switch room.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 6 BASIC ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 E. Manufacturer's or Contractor's names or trademarks shall not be exhibited anywhere
through the installation without the prior approval and permission of the Engineer with
exception that the Contractor's name and address may be fixed in an approved position
on the main incoming switchgear.

F. All labels shall be in English and Arabic.

1.17 VERMIN PROOFING

A. All items of electrical equipment shall be adequately vermin proofed.

B. Where cables enter or leave the bottoms of switchboards, or pass through pipe ducts,
they shall be sealed by the use of hard wood plugs treated with vermin repellent and
surrounded by mastic sealant.

C. All spare pipe ducts shall be similarly sealed by the use of solid hard wood plugs.

D. Alternative methods of vermin sealing will be accepted, but the written comments of the
Engineer must be obtained prior to installation.

1.18 FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to minimize the
risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak of fire.

1.19 POWER SHUT DOWN PROCEDURES

A. During the course of construction a situation may arise when a power outage or shut
down of an existing facility will be required to facilitate power connection of a new
installation with the existing facility in operation, or power connection between different
phases of a new construction. For such situations or any other situation which requires
power shut down of an existing facility under operation, submit a work plan for approval
to the Engineer, indicating therein the temporary arrangements he shall make to
maintain the continuity of power supply to the existing facility.

B. The activities of the work plan shall be scheduled in such a way to cause minimum
inconvenience to the users or occupants of the existing facility (e.g. shut down during
holiday or after working hours) and in proper coordination with all concerned authorities.
The work plan shall include, but not limited to the following:

1. List of activities prior to power shut down.

2. List of various authorities to be coordinated prior to power shut down.
3. Sequence of various activities for shut down of power supply.
4. Time duration of each activity.
5. Shut down duration for various activities.
6. Alternate power supply arrangement to maintain continuity of power to the existing
facility.
7. Reliability of alternate power supply arrangement.
8. Step-wise sequence of activities for restoration of power supply.

C. The cost for the provision of activities and other interim arrangements for the continuity
of power supply to the existing facility during power shut down procedures shall be
deemed to be included in the total price of the tender.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 7 BASIC ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 1.20 PENALTY FOR DAMAGE TO EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Study the location of all existing utilities and any other facilities, and perform the Work so
as not to damage them. In the event that any of such facilities are damaged by the
Contractor, the same shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor at his cost and
responsibility.

B. In the event that the Contractor damages the existing utilities or facilities listed below, the
Contractor shall pay to the Client, in addition to the repair costs, an amount specified
below:

1. Power Cable, Control Cable: An amount equal to 100 percent of Instrument Cable
actual repair costs.
2. Telephone Cable: An amount equal to 100 percent of the actual repair costs.
3. Fresh Water Line: An amount equal to one 100 percent of the actual repair costs
4. Sewer Line: An amount equal to 100 percent of the actual repair costs.

1.21 SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTION STUDY

A. Obtain the services of the major Electrical Equipment manufacturer to provide a complete
computerized study of fault current and coordination of relays, fuses, circuit breakers, and
all other protective devices. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Saudi Electricity
Company (SEC) to include protection settings and fault levels of the SEC feeders and
circuit breakers in the study.

B. The study shall include all feeders at medium voltage and low voltage system.

C. The Contractor shall obtain all data, characteristic curves and all necessary information
from all other trades in connection with his work to provide complete study for the system.

D. The study shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. Fault current available at each major equipment bus.

2. A tabulation of all protective relay and circuit breaker trip settings and recommended
fuse sizes and types.
3. Transformer damage curves in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.
4. Motor starting profile for largest motor in each control center.
5. A complete set of time-current coordination curves on logarithmic scale sheets.

E. The short circuit and protection study shall be bound in a standard A4 size report. The final
selection and settings of all protective devices shall be based on this study. The complete
study shall be approved by the Engineer. Protective devices shall be adjusted, tested, and
calibrated in the field prior to energizing the equipment per the settings listed in the study.

1.22 SPARES AND CONSUMABLES

A. Provide an un-priced list of spares and consumables to manufacturer’s recommendation

for 1 year’s operation for every item of plant and system at the time of tendering.

B. Provide operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0510 - 8 BASIC ELECTRICAL

REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 26 0519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single conductor building wire.
B. Underground feeder and branch-circuit cable.
C. Metal-clad cable.
D. Power and control tray cable.
E. Manufactured wiring systems.
F. Wiring connectors.
G. Electrical tape.
H. Heat shrink tubing.
I. Wire pulling lubricant.
J. Cable ties.
K. Firestop sleeves.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements
for grounding conductors and grounding connectors.
B. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional installation requirements
for cables installed in cable tray systems.
C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
D. Section 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional wiring requirements for photovoltaic
systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013 (Reapproved
2018).
B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,
Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for
Electrical Purposes; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2020).
D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded
Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2020).
E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic
Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2017.
F. ASTM D4388 - Standard Specification for Nonmetallic Semi-Conducting and Electrically
Insulating Rubber Tapes; 2013.
G. FS A-A-59544 - Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation); Federal
Specification; 2008a (Validated 2019).
H. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
I. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); 2012.
J. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical
Energy; 2009.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
 K. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
M. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 183 - Manufactured Wiring Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 493 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground Feeder and Branch-Circuit Cables; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
T. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
U. UL 719 - Nonmetallic-Sheathed Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
V. UL 1277 - Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
W. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other
sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor
sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide
terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
3. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings,
listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding.
C. Sustainable Design Documentation: Submit manufacturer's product data on conductor and
cable showing compliance with specified lead content requirements.
D. Manufactured Wiring System Shop Drawings: Provide plan views indicating proposed
system layout with components identified; indicate branch circuit connections.
E. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for copper conductors.
Include proposed modifications to raceways, boxes, wiring gutters, enclosures, etc. to
accommodate substituted conductors.
F. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual
routing for underground circuits.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and
product listing.
B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise
indicated, permitted, or required.

2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system.
D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL
83.
F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.
G. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.
H. Conductors and Cables Installed in Cable Tray: Listed and labeled as suitable for cable
tray use.
I. Conductors and Cables Installed Where Exposed to Direct Rays of Sun: Listed and labeled
as sunlight resistant.
J. Conductor Material:
1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this
project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper.
2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper
conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B787M unless
otherwise indicated.
K. Conductor Color Coding:
1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having
jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.
2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
B. Conductor Stranding:
C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
 D. Insulation:
1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2.

2.04 POWER AND CONTROL TRAY CABLE

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type TC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1277.
B. Where exposed run cable is indicated between cable tray and utilization equipment in
qualifying industrial establishments as determined by authorities having jurisdiction, provide
tray cable marked as Type TC-ER in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Conductor Stranding: Stranded.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.
E. Insulation: Type XHHW or XHHW-2.
F. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.
G. Jacket: PVC or Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE).

2.05 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS

A. Description: Manufactured wiring assemblies complying with NFPA 70 Article 604, and
listed and labeled as complying with UL 183.
B. Provide components necessary to transition between manufactured wiring system and
other wiring methods.
C. Connectors: Keyed and color-coded to prevent interconnection of different voltages.

2.06 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the
conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as
applicable.
B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 0526.
C. Wiring Connectors for Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
terminations designed for terminal lugs.
2. Provide compression adapters for connecting conductors to equipment furnished with
mechanical lugs when only compression connectors are specified.
3. Where over-sized conductors are larger than the equipment terminations can
accommodate, provide connectors suitable for reducing to appropriate size, but not
less than required for the rating of the overcurrent protective device.
4. Provide motor pigtail connectors for connecting motor leads in order to facilitate
disconnection.
5. Copper Conductors 6 mm² and larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression
connectors where connectors are required.
6. Conductors for Control Circuits: Use crimped terminals for all connections.
D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with
conductors without stripping insulation.
E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors.
F. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type.
G. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration.
H. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable
for connection to be made.

2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Electrical Tape:
1. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated;
listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
 abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up
to 221 degrees F (105 degrees C).
2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying
with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); resistant to abrasion, corrosion,
and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F (-18 degrees C) and
suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F (105 degrees
C).
3. Rubber Splicing Electrical Tape: Ethylene Propylene Rubber (EPR) tape, complying
with ASTM D4388; minimum thickness of 30 mil (0.76 mm); suitable for continuous
temperature environment up to 194 degrees F (90 degrees C) and short-term 266
degrees F (130 degrees C) overload service.
4. Electrical Filler Tape: Rubber-based insulating moldable putty, minimum thickness of
125 mil (3.2 mm); suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 176 degrees
F (80 degrees C).
5. Varnished Cambric Electrical Tape: Cotton cambric fabric tape, with or without
adhesive, oil-primed and coated with high-grade insulating varnish; minimum
thickness of 7 mil (0.18 mm); suitable for continuous temperature environment up to
221 degrees F (105 degrees C).
6. Moisture Sealing Electrical Tape: Insulating mastic compound laminated to flexible,
all-weather vinyl backing; minimum thickness of 90 mil (2.3 mm).
B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V;
suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D.
C. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed
and suitable for use at the installation temperature.
D. Cable Ties: Material and tensile strength rating suitable for application.
E. Sealing Systems for Roof Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories as
required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty; suitable for
cables and roofing system to be installed; designed to accommodate existing penetrations
where applicable.
F. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building
elements.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized
to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.
D. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and
cables.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Circuiting Requirements:
1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When circuit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing
required.
3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.
4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft (3.0 m) of
location indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 5 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
 5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and
power-limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.
E. Installation in Raceway:
1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other
contaminants.
2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.
3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure.
4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not
recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same
manner.
G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable
supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent
support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or
other systems.
H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.
1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):
a. Use listed fittings.
b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or
insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.
I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each outlet.
J. Where conductors are installed in enclosures for future termination by others, provide a
minimum of 5 feet (1.5 m) of slack.
K. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other
equipment enclosures.
L. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded
conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.
M. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.
1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or
make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.
2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors.
3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.
4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion,
oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.
5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
N. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable
for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced
conductors.
1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a. For taped connections, first apply adequate amount of rubber splicing electrical
tape or electrical filler tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical
tape.
b. For taped connections likely to require re-entering, including motor leads, first
apply varnished cambric electrical tape, followed by adequate amount of rubber
splicing electrical tape, followed by outer covering of vinyl insulating electrical
tape.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 6 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
 2. Damp Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors,
electrical tape, or heat shrink tubing.
a. For connections with insulating covers, apply outer covering of moisture sealing
electrical tape.
b. For taped connections, follow same procedure as for dry locations but apply outer
covering of moisture sealing electrical tape.
3. Wet Locations: Use heat shrink tubing.
O. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.
P. Field-Applied Color Coding: Where vinyl color coding electrical tape is used in lieu of
integrally colored insulation as permitted in Part 2 under "Color Coding", apply half
overlapping turns of tape at each termination and at each location conductors are
accessible.
Q. Identify conductors and cables in accordance with Section 26 0553.
R. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using
materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
S. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and
devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance
test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as
optional is not required.
1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential
testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs
connected.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0519 - 7 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL

POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
 SECTION 26 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding and bonding requirements.
B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.
C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.
D. Ground bars.
E. Ground rod electrodes.
F. Chemically-enhanced ground electrodes.
G. Ground plate electrodes.
H. Ground enhancement material.
I. Ground access wells.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional
requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.
1. Includes oxide inhibiting compound.
B. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional grounding and bonding
requirements for cable tray systems.
C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
D. Section 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional grounding and bonding requirements
for photovoltaic systems.
E. Section 26 4113 - Lightning Protection for Structures.
F. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional grounding and bonding requirements for
pole-mounted luminaires.
G. Section 33 7900 - Site Grounding.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Grounding System; 2012.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; 2017.
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities Code; 2018.
G. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2020.
H. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with
specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 3. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
grounding and bonding system components.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate proposed arrangement for signal reference grids. Include locations of items to
be bonded and methods of connection.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E. Field quality control test reports.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system
components and connections.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors,
connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
grounding and bonding system.
C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
D. Grounding System Resistance:
1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless
otherwise approved by Architect or Engineer. Precipitation within the previous 48
hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 5 ohms to ground, when tested
according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method.
3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames,
System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested
using "point-to-point" methods.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 E. Grounding Electrode System:
1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to
form grounding electrode system.
a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint.
b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical
damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end
with bonding jumper.
2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s):
a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where
present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10
feet (3.0 m) at an accessible location not more than 5 feet (1.5 m) from the point
of entrance to the building.
b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe
electrically continuous.
c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal
of meter without disconnecting jumper.
3. Metal In-Ground Support Structure:
a. Provide connection to metal in-ground support structure that is in direct contact
with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Concrete-Encased Electrode:
a. Provide connection to concrete-encased electrode consisting of not less than 20
feet (6.0 m) of either steel reinforcing bars or bare copper conductor not smaller
than 4 AWG embedded within concrete foundation or footing that is in direct
contact with earth in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Ground Ring:
a. Provide a ground ring encircling the building or structure consisting of bare copper
conductor not less than 95 mm² in direct contact with earth, installed at a depth of
not less than 30 inches (750 mm).
b. Where location is not indicated, locate ground ring conductor at least 24 inches
(600 mm) outside building perimeter foundation.
c. Provide ground enhancement material around conductor.
d. Provide connection from ground ring conductor to:
1) Perimeter columns of metal building frame.
2) Ground rod electrodes located as indicated.
6. Ground Rod Electrode(s):
a. Provide three electrodes in an equilateral triangle configuration unless otherwise
indicated or required.
b. Space electrodes not less than 10 feet (3.0 m) from each other and any other
ground electrode.
c. Where location is not indicated, locate electrode(s) at least 5 feet (1.5 m) outside
building perimeter foundation as near as possible to electrical service entrance;
where possible, locate in softscape (uncovered) area.
d. Provide ground enhancement material around electrode.
e. Provide ground access well.
7. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding
electrode system resistance.
8. Ground Bar: Provide ground bar, separate from service equipment enclosure, for
common connection point of grounding electrode system bonding jumpers as
permitted in NFPA 70. Connect grounding electrode conductor provided for service-
supplied system grounding to this ground bar.
a. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches (6 by 50 by 300 mm) unless otherwise
indicated or required.
b. Where ground bar location is not indicated, locate in accessible location as near
as possible to service disconnect enclosure.
c. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor unless
otherwise indicated.
9. Ground Riser: Provide common grounding electrode conductor not less than 95 mm²
for tap connections to multiple separately derived systems as permitted in NFPA 70.
F. Service-Supplied System Grounding:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral
(grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise
indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure.
2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral
(grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any
other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of
service disconnect.
G. Grounding for Separate Building or Structure Supplied by Feeder(s) or Branch Circuits:
1. Provide grounding electrode system for each separate building or structure.
2. Provide equipment grounding conductor routed with supply conductors.
3. For each disconnecting means, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect
equipment ground bus to grounding electrode system.
4. Do not make any connections and remove any factory-installed jumpers between
neutral (grounded) conductors and ground.
H. Separately Derived System Grounding:
1. Provide grounding electrode conductor to connect derived system grounded conductor
to nearest effectively grounded metal building frame. Unless otherwise indicated,
make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in source enclosure.
2. Provide bonding jumper to connect derived system grounded conductor to nearest
metal building frame and nearest metal water piping in the area served by the derived
system, where not already used as a grounding electrode for the derived system.
Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor connection.
3. Provide system bonding jumper to connect system grounded conductor to equipment
ground bus. Make connection at same location as grounding electrode conductor
connection. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded)
conductors and ground on load side of separately derived system disconnect.
4. Where the source and first disconnecting means are in separate enclosures, provide
supply-side bonding jumper between source and first disconnecting means.
I. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:
1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses,
metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding
terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing
electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in
accordance with NFPA 70.
2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit
raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.
3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of
equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded
equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or
isolated/insulated ground bus.
6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to
accommodate conduit movement.
7. Provide bonding for interior metal air ducts.
8. Provide bonding for metal building frame.
9. Provide bonding for metal siding not effectively bonded through attachment to metal
building frame.
10. Provide bonding and equipment grounding for pools and fountains and associated
equipment in accordance with NFPA 70.
11. Provide redundant grounding and bonding for patient care areas of health care
facilities in accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 99.
J. Communications Systems Grounding and Bonding:
1. Provide intersystem bonding termination at service equipment or metering equipment
enclosure and at disconnecting means for any additional buildings or structures in
accordance with NFPA 70.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 2. Provide bonding jumper in raceway from intersystem bonding termination to each
communications room or backboard and provide ground bar for termination.
a. Bonding Jumper Size: 16 mm².
b. Raceway Size: 25 mm trade size unless otherwise indicated or required.
c. Ground Bar Size: 1/4 by 2 by 12 inches (6 by 50 by 300 mm) unless otherwise
indicated or required.
d. Ground Bar Mounting Height: 18 inches (450 mm) above finished floor unless
otherwise indicated.
K. Lightning Protection Systems, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 4113:
1. Do not use grounding electrode dedicated for lightning protection system for
component of building grounding electrode system provided under this section.
2. Provide bonding of building grounding electrode system provided under this section
and lightning protection grounding electrode system in accordance with NFPA 70 and
NFPA 780.
L. Cable Tray Systems: Also comply with Section 26 0536.
M. Photovoltaic Systems: Also comply with Section 26 3100.
N. Pole-Mounted Luminaires: Also comply with Section 26 5600.

2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS

A. General Requirements:
1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.
B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:
1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.
a. Exceptions:
1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact
with earth.
2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in
raceway).
2. Factory Pre-fabricated Bonding Jumpers: Furnished with factory-installed ferrules;
size braided cables to provide equivalent gage of specified conductors.
C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:
1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the
conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground,
concealed and other inaccessible connections.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or
exothermic welded connections for accessible connections.
a. Exceptions:
D. Ground Bars:
1. Description: Copper rectangular ground bars with mounting brackets and insulators.
2. Holes for Connections: As indicated or as required for connections to be made.
E. Ground Rod Electrodes:
1. Comply with NEMA GR 1.
2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel.
3. Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter by 10 feet (3.0 m) length, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Chemically-Enhanced Ground Electrodes:
1. Description: Copper tube factory-filled with electrolytic salts designed to provide a
low-impedance ground in locations with high soil resistivity; straight (for vertical
installations) or L-shaped (for horizontal installations) as indicated or as required.
2. Length: 10 feet (3.0 m).
3. Integral Pigtail: Factory-attached, sized not less than grounding electrode conductor
to be attached.
4. Backfill Material: Grounding enhancement material recommended by electrode
manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 5 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 G. Ground Enhancement Material:
1. Description: Factory-mixed conductive material designed for permanent and
maintenance-free improvement of grounding effectiveness by lowering resistivity.
2. Resistivity: Not more than 20 ohm-cm in final installed form.
H. Ground Access Wells:
1. Description: Open bottom round or rectangular well with access cover for testing and
inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location.
2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less
than minimum size requirements specified.
a. Round Wells: Not less than 8 inches (200 mm) in diameter.
b. Rectangular Wells: Not less than 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less
than 10 inches (250 mm).
4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND".

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been
completed.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes
vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle
or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA
70.
D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.
1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without
cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate
insertion into connector.
2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points,
and contact surfaces.
3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the
items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's
recommended torque settings.
5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended
tools and dies.
E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.
D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation
within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.
E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with
specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 6 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0526 - 7 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Support and attachment requirements and components for equipment, conduit, cable,
boxes, and other electrical work.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal
supports.
C. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for conduits.
D. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for cable tray.
E. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Additional support and attachment
requirements for boxes.
F. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
G. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for
interior luminaires.
H. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for
exterior luminaires.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2016a.
C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 2019.
D. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning
of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2018.
E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2019b.
F. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.
G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
I. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment
and components to be installed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials
required for installation.
3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting
surfaces at the installed locations.
4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other
potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
5. Notify Architect or Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete
has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for channel
(strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and
masonry anchors.
C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or
methods other than those indicated are proposed for substitution.
D. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC
Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.
E. Installer's Qualification Statement: Include evidence of compliance with specified
requirements.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and
hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.
2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended,
where applicable.
3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in
accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be
supported. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads
where applicable.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.
5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless
specifically indicated or permitted.
6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment
where installed.
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless
otherwise indicated.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel, stainless
steel, or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated.
c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.
d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM
A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M.
B. Components for Vibration Isolation and/or Seismic Controls: Comply with Section 26 0548.
C. Materials for Metal Fabricated Supports: Comply with Section 05 5000.
D. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be
supported.
1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.
2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.
E. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.
F. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel
(strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of
supports.
1. Comply with MFMA-4.
2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and
labeled as complying with UL 5B.
3. Channel Material:
a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel.
b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use galvanized steel.
4. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch (2.66 mm).
5. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch (41 mm) width by 13/16 inch (21 mm)
height.
G. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.
1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:
a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter.
b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter.
c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27 mm) trade size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) diameter.
d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch (10 mm) diameter.
e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter.
f. Luminaires: 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter.
H. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and
fastener types indicated for the specified applications.
2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.
3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.
4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.
5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.
6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.
7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
8. Wood: Use wood screws.
9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted.
10. Powder-actuated fasteners are not permitted.
11. Hammer-driven anchors and fasteners are not permitted.
12. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically
designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.
a. Comply with MFMA-4.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.
c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch (2.66 mm)
minimum base metal thickness.
d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.
13. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC
Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) for compliance with applicable building code.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES)
evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.
D. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping,
ductwork, or other systems.
E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect or Engineer, do not provide support
from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.
F. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Architect or Engineer, do not provide support
from roof deck.
G. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of
Structural Engineer.
H. Provide required vibration isolation and/or seismic controls in accordance with Section 26
0548.
I. Equipment Support and Attachment:
1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to
support equipment as required.
2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on
hollow stud walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.
3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp
locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted equipment on properly sized 3 inch
(80 mm) high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
5. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies
on its own weight for support.
J. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.13.
K. Cable Tray Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0536.
L. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 0533.16.
M. Interior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5100.
N. Exterior Luminaire Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 5600.
O. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete
seepage during concrete pour.
P. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
Q. Remove temporary supports.
R. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only
where specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support
wires in accordance with NFPA 70.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.
C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment
components.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0533.13
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
C. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).
D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).
E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).
F. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.
H. Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC).
I. Conduit fittings.
J. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits.
B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable
(Type MC), armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems, including uses
permitted.
C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes additional requirements for fittings for grounding and bonding.
D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
F. Section 26 0539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems.
G. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
H. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
I. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance: Additional requirements for
electrical service conduits.
J. Section 31 2316 - Excavation.
K. Section 33 7119 - Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2015.
B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel (EMT-S);
2015.
C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit -- Aluminum
(ERMC-A); 2015.
D. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC);
2005.
E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
F. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); 2013.
G. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); 2003.
H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; 2014.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 1 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 I. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit
and Intermediate Metal Conduit; 2018.
J. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.
K. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;
2016.
L. NEMA TC 13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT); 2014.
M. NEMA TC 14 (SERIES) - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings Series;
2015.
N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
O. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
T. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
U. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
V. UL 1203 - Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in
Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
W. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
X. UL 1653 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Y. UL 1660 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed,
including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop.
2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and
equipment installed under other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the
integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty.
5. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is
complete between outlet, junction and splicing points.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits
and fittings.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete
slabs, where permitted.
2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 2 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground,
conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and
larger.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS
A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA
70 and product listing.
B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types
indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies,
comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular
application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
C. Underground:
1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit.
2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit.
3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit where emerging from underground.
4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided,
use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.
5. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity
of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on
soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide
supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit.
D. Embedded Within Concrete:
1. Within Slab on Grade (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural
Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),
PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, rigid PVC conduit, or reinforced
thermosetting resin conduit (RTRC).
2. Within Slab Above Ground: Not permitted.
3. Within Slab Above Ground (within structural slabs only where approved by Structural
Engineer): Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),
PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or
rigid PVC conduit.
4. Within Concrete Walls Above Ground: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or
rigid PVC conduit.
5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid
metal conduit where emerging from concrete.
6. Where electrical metallic tubing (EMT) emerges from concrete into salt air, use
corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 3 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 of 4 inches (100 mm) on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC-coated
galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
E. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate
metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
F. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
G. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit,
intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
H. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
I. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal
conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
J. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or
intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to:
a. Where exposed below 8 feet (2.4 m), except within electrical and communication
rooms or closets.
K. Exposed, Exterior: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit
(IMC).
L. Concealed, Exterior, Not Embedded in Concrete or in Contact With Earth: Use galvanized
steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit (IMC).
M. Corrosive Locations Above Ground: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.
N. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit.
1. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m).
O. Connections to Vibrating Equipment:
1. Dry Locations: Use flexible metal conduit.
2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
3. Maximum Length: 6 feet (1.8 m) unless otherwise indicated.
4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to:
a. Motors.
P. Fished in Existing Walls, Where Necessary: Use flexible metal conduit.

2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Electrical Service Conduits: Also comply with Section 26 2100.
B. Fittings for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 0526.
C. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system.
D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
E. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
1. Branch Circuits: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
3. Control Circuits: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
5. Underground, Interior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
6. Underground, Exterior: 1 inch (27 mm) trade size.
F. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.

2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI
C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.
B. Fittings:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 4 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.04 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying
with ANSI C80.6 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.
B. Fittings:
1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and
labeled as complying with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and
compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.05 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 6.
B. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil (1.02 mm).
C. Interior Coating: Urethane, minimum thickness of 2 mil (0.05 mm).
D. PVC-Coated Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed.
2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.
3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil (1.02 mm).
E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum
thickness of 15 mil (0.38 mm).

2.06 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and
labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

2.07 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal
conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360.
B. Fittings:
1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.

2.08 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI
C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797.
B. Fittings:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 5 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B.
2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.
a. Do not use die cast zinc fittings.
3. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.
a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.
4. Damp or Wet Locations (where permitted): Use fittings listed for use in wet locations.
5. Embedded Within Concrete (where permitted): Use fittings listed as concrete-tight.
Fittings that require taping to be concrete-tight are acceptable.

2.09 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC
2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated,
Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90
degrees C.
B. Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 651; material to match conduit.

2.10 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT (LFNC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFNC liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit listed and labeled
as complying with UL 1660.
B. Fittings:
1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.
2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying
with UL 514B; suitable for the type of conduit to be connected.

2.11 ACCESSORIES
A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil (0.51 mm).
B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with
the conduit to be installed.
C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of
conduit and fittings to be installed.
D. Sealing Compound for Sealing Fittings: Listed for use with the particular fittings to be
installed.
E. Modular Seals for Conduit Penetrations: Rated for minimum of 40 psig; Suitable for the
conduits to be installed.
F. Sealing Systems for Roof Penetrations: Premanufactured components and accessories as
required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty; suitable for
conduits and roofing system to be installed; designed to accommodate existing penetrations
where applicable.
G. Flashing Panels for Exterior Wall Penetrations: Premanufactured components and
accessories as required to preserve integrity of building envelope; suitable for conduits and
facade materials to be installed.
H. Firestop Sleeves: Listed; provide as required to preserve fire resistance rating of building
elements.
I. Duct Bank Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for
concrete encasement in open trench installation; suitable for the conduit/duct arrangement
to be installed.
J. Bore Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for installation
within casing; furnished with roller wheels to facilitate installation, openings to facilitate grout
flow, and holes for stabilization cable; suitable for the casing and conduit/duct arrangement
to be installed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 6 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.
E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by
the manufacturer.
F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.
G. Install liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) in accordance with NECA 111.
H. Conduit Routing:
1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.
2. When conduit destination is indicated without specific routing, determine exact routing
required.
3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.
4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Electrical rooms.
b. Mechanical equipment rooms.
c. With reflected ceiling area.
5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:
a. Across floors.
b. Across roofs.
c. Across top of parapet walls.
d. Across building exterior surfaces.
6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the
shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel
or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where
practical.
7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.
8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends
between pull points.
9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet (46 m) between pull points.
10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible.
11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at
sealing fittings where moisture may collect.
12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches (150 mm) between conduits and piping for
other systems.
13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches (300 mm) between conduits and hot
surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Heaters.
b. Hot water piping.
c. Flues.
14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack.
I. Conduit Support:
1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 7 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 2. Provide required vibration isolation and/or seismic controls in accordance with Section
26 0548.
3. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
piping, ductwork, or other systems.
4. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support
system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling
tiles.
5. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit.
a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide
space between conduit and mounting surface.
6. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel
surface-mounted conduits.
7. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.
8. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with
accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.
9. Use non-penetrating rooftop supports to support conduits routed across rooftops (only
where approved).
10. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted.
11. Where conduit support intervals specified in NFPA 70 and NECA standards differ,
comply with the most stringent requirements.
J. Connections and Terminations:
1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of
galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections.
2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-
piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads.
3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.
4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of
liquid into connectors.
5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double
lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.
6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect
conductors.
7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical
continuity.
K. Penetrations:
1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and
grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.
2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation.
Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.
4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.
5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible
point to prevent entry of moisture and gases.
6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity
of membrane.
7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings
and curbs where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where
penetrations are necessary, seal as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of
roofing system and maintain roof warranty. Include proposed locations of penetrations
and methods for sealing with submittals.
8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
L. Underground Installation:
1. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 0553 along entire
conduit length All underground installation must provide a warning tape.
M. Embedment Within Structural Concrete Slabs (only where approved by Structural
Engineer):
1. Include proposed conduit arrangement with submittals.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 8 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 2. Maximum Conduit Size: 1 inch (27 mm) unless otherwise approved.
3. Install conduits within middle one third of slab thickness.
4. Secure conduits to prevent floating or movement during pouring of concrete.
N. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are
indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 3000
with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches (76 mm) on all sides unless otherwise indicated.
O. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide
expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or
connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or
deflection.
2. Where calculated in accordance with NFPA 70 for rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conduit installed above ground to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.
P. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential
substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at
an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not
limited to:
1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.
2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior
spaces.
Q. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
R. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
C. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or
abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.

3.05 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide
protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for
installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.13 - 9 CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0533.16
BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), including those used as
junction and pull boxes.
B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches
(1,650 cu cm).
C. Boxes and enclosures for integrated power, data, and audio/video.
D. Boxes for hazardous (classified) locations.
E. Floor boxes.
F. Underground boxes/enclosures.
G. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 08 3100 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed
boxes.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems:
1. Conduit bodies and other fittings.
2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of
bends between pulling points.
E. Section 26 0539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems: Junction boxes for
underfloor duct systems.
F. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
G. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
H. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices:
1. Wall plates.
2. Floor box service fittings.
3. Poke-through assemblies.
4. Access floor boxes.
5. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.
I. Section 33 7119 - Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes: Concrete
manholes for electrical systems.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.
C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; 2014.
D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; 2013.
E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; 2013.
F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.16 - 1 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 H. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; 2017.
I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 508A - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels; 2018.
L. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 514C - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes, and Covers; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
N. UL 1203 - Explosion-Proof and Dust-Ignition-Proof Electrical Equipment for Use in
Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.
4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of
connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.
5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.
7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-
mounted boxes where indicated.
8. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets
and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground
boxes/enclosures.
1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with
SCTE 77 certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon
request.
C. Samples:
1. Floor Boxes: Provide one sample(s) of each floor box proposed for substitution upon
request.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull
boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.
F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.16 - 2 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BOXES
A. General Requirements:
1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted
by NFPA 70 and product listing.
2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway
system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.
3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than
applicable minimum size requirements specified.
5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors
terminate.
B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm), Including Those Used as
Junction and Pull Boxes:
1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.
2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless
otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed
covers.
3. Use cast iron boxes where exposed galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or exposed
intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is used.
4. Use nonmetallic boxes where exposed rigid PVC conduit is used.
5. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.
6. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.
7. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration
where required.
8. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.
9. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.
10. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A.
11. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL
514A; furnish with threaded hubs.
12. Nonmetallic Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2, and list and label as complying with UL
514C.
13. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and
weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting
of luminaire where required.
14. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not
use field-connected gangable boxes unless specifically indicated or permitted.
15. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
16. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 2726.
C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches
(1,650 cu cm):
1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL
508A.
2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches (1,650 cu cm):

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.16 - 3 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
b. Boxes 6 square feet (0.56 sq m) and Larger: Provide sectionalized screw-cover
or hinged-cover enclosures.
4. Cabinets and Hinged-Cover Enclosures, Other Than Junction and Pull Boxes:
a. Provide lockable hinged covers, all locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
b. Back Panels: Painted steel, removable.
c. Terminal Blocks: Provide voltage/current ratings and terminal quantity suitable for
purpose indicated, with 25 percent spare terminal capacity.
5. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Boxes and Enclosures for Integrated Power, Data, and Audio/Video: Size and configuration
as indicated or as required with partitions to separate services; field-connected gangable
boxes may be used.
E. Floor Boxes:
1. Description: Floor boxes compatible with floor box service fittings provided in
accordance with Section 26 2726; with partitions to separate multiple services;
furnished with all components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
2. Use cast iron floor boxes within slab on grade.
3. Use sheet-steel or cast iron floor boxes within slab above grade.
4. Metallic Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable (with integral means for leveling adjustment
prior to and after concrete pour).
5. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of floor box service fittings.
F. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with
legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts.
2. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less
than 12 inches (300 mm).
3. Provide logo on cover to indicate type of service.
4. Applications:
a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate
Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier
8 load rating.
b. Parking Lots, in Areas Subject Only To Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular
Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 15 load
rating.
c. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular
traffic.

2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing Panels for Exterior Wall Penetrations: Premanufactured components and
accessories as required to preserve integrity of building envelope; suitable for boxes and
facade materials to be installed.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install boxes in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting
heights are not indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.16 - 4 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage
systems.
F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are
indicated or permitted.
H. Box Locations:
1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08
3100 as required where approved by the Architect and Engineer.
2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.
3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.
a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 2726.
4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.
5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same
location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.
7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide
minimum 6 inches (150 mm) horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.
8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls
back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches (610 mm) horizontal separation.
9. Fire Resistance Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire
resistance will not be reduced.
a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back;
provide minimum 24 inches (610 mm) separation where wall is constructed with
individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty
pads.
b. Do not install flush-mounted boxes with area larger than 16 square inches
(0.0103 sq m) or such that the total aggregate area of openings exceeds 100
square inches (0.0645 sq m) for any 100 square feet (9.29 sq m) of wall area.
10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of
conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points
in accordance with Section 26 0533.13.
11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or
approved by the Architect and Engineer:
a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings.
b. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.
c. Electrical rooms.
d. Mechanical equipment rooms.
I. Box Supports:
1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 0529 using
suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.
2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other
than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in
accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other
systems.
3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or
ceiling support system.
4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in
hollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive
movement.
J. Install boxes plumb and level.
K. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.16 - 5 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc.
so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished
surface more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) or does not project beyond finished surface.
2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or
associated raised cover is flush with finished surface.
3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete,
tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8
inch (3 mm) at the edge of the box.
L. Floor-Mounted Cabinets: Mount on properly sized 4 inch (100 mm) high concrete pad
constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
M. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.
N. Metallic Floor Boxes: Install box level at the proper elevation to be flush with finished floor.
O. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Cut box flush with finished floor after concrete pour.
P. Underground Boxes/Enclosures:
1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches (150 mm) deep.
2. Flush-mount enclosures located in concrete or paved areas.
3. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch (25 mm) above
finished grade.
4. Provide cast-in-place concrete collar constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000,
minimum 10 inches wide by 12 inches deep (250 mm wide by 300 mm deep), around
enclosures that are not located in concrete areas.
5. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover
bolted in place.
Q. Close unused box openings.
R. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment
installed or designated for future use.
S. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
T. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.

3.04 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until
ready for installation of conductors.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0533.16 - 6 BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0536
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 A. CABLE TRAYAND ACCESORIES
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal cable tray systems:
1. Metal ladder cable tray.
2. Metal ventilated trough cable tray.
3. Metal solid-bottom cable tray.

1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2019a.
C. ASTM A780/A780M - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2009 (Reapproved 2015).
D. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 2019.
E. ASTM D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning
of Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2018.
F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 2019b.
G. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
H. NECA/BICSI 568 - Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling; 2006.
I. NEMA VE 1 - Metal Cable Tray Systems; 2017.
J. NEMA VE 2 - Cable Tray Installation Guidelines; 2013, with Errata (2016).
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
M. UL 568 - Nonmetallic Cable Tray Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the arrangement of cable tray with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid installation of obstructions within cable
tray required clearances.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0536 - 1 CABLE TRAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 2. Coordinate arrangement of cable tray with the dimensions and clearance requirements
of the actual products to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
4. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section;
require attendance of all affected installers. Review proposed routing, sequence of
installation, and protection requirements for installed cable tray.
C. Sequencing:
1. Do not begin installation of cables until installation of associated cable tray run is
complete.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cable
tray system components and accessories. Include dimensions, materials, fabrication
details, finishes, and span/load ratings.
C. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating proposed cable
tray routing, required clearances, and locations and details of supports, fittings, building
element penetrations, and equipment connections.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing of cable tray and locations of supports.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
and NEMA VE 2, except do not store cable tray outdoors without cover as permitted in
NEMA VE 2.
B. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE TRAY SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide new cable tray system consisting of all required components, fittings, supports,
accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Do not use cable tray for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing/classification.
D. Provide cable tray system and associated components suitable for use at indicated
span/load ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, specified span/load ratings are according to NEMA VE 1 (metal
cable tray systems) or NEMA FG 1 (fiberglass cable tray systems) with safety factor of 1.5
and working load only (no additional concentrated static load).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0536 - 2 CABLE TRAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 F. Unless otherwise indicated, specified load/fill depths and inside widths are nominal values
according to NEMA VE 1 (metal cable tray systems) or NEMA FG 1 (fiberglass cable tray
systems) with applicable allowable tolerances.

2.02 METAL CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

A. Comply with NEMA VE 1.
B. Finishes:
1. Zinc Electroplated Steel: Comply with ASTM B633.
2. Mill-Galvanized Before Fabrication (Pre-Galvanized) Steel: Comply with ASTM
A653/A653M, G90 coating.
3. Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication (H.D.G.A.F.) Steel: Comply with ASTM
A123/A123M.
C. Metal Ladder Cable Tray:
1. Material: Mill-galvanized before fabrication (pre-galvanized) steel.
2. Side Rail Construction: I-beam, C-channel flange out, or C-channel flange in.
D. Metal Ventilated Trough Cable Tray:
1. Material: Mill-galvanized before fabrication (pre-galvanized) steel.
2. Bottom Type: Vented corrugated.
E. Metal Solid-Bottom Cable Tray:
1. Material: Mill-galvanized before fabrication (pre-galvanized) steel.
2. Bottom Type: Solid corrugated or flat.
3. Covers: Solid flat flanged.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Metal Cable Tray: Perform factory design tests in accordance with NEMA VE 1, including
electrical continuity and load testing.

PART 3 EXECUTION
4.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that work likely to damage cable tray system has been completed.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C. Verify that the dimensions and span/load ratings of cable tray system components are
consistent with the indicated requirements.
D. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive cable tray and associated supports.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

4.02 PREPARATION
A. Modifications to Existing Cable Tray Systems: Remove inactive or abandoned cables from
existing cable tray system.

4.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install cable tray in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), and NEMA VE 2.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange cable tray to be parallel or perpendicular to building
lines.
D. Arrange cable tray to provide required clearances and maintain cable access.
1. Minimum Clearance Above and Adjacent to Cable Tray: 12 inches (300 mm).
2. Cable Tray for Telecommunications Cables: Maintain recommended separation from
sources of EMI greater than 5 kVA in accordance with NECA/BICSI 568.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0536 - 3 CABLE TRAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 E. Install cable tray plumb and level, with sections aligned and with horizontal runs at the
proper elevation.
F. Hot-Dip Galvanized After Fabrication (H.D.G.A.F.) Steel Cable Tray: After cutting, drilling,
or deburring, use approved zinc-rich paint to repair finish in accordance with ASTM
A780/A780M.
G. Cable Tray Movement Provisions:
1. Provide suitable expansion fittings where cable tray is subject to movement, including
but not limited to:
a. Where cable tray crosses structural joints intended for expansion.
b. Long straight cable tray runs in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
2. Use expansion guides in lieu of hold-down clamps where prescribed in NEMA VE 2.
3. Set gaps for expansion fittings in accordance with NEMA VE 2.
H. Cable Provisions:
1. Use suitable fixed barrier strips to maintain separation of cables as indicated and as
required by NFPA 70.
2. Use suitable drop-out fittings or bushings where cables exit cable tray as required to
maintain minimum cable bending radius.
3. Use suitable cable support fittings for long vertical cable tray runs with heavy cables.
I. Provide end closures at unconnected ends of cable tray runs.
J. Cable Tray Support:
1. Use manufacturer's recommended hangers and supports, located in accordance with
NEMA VE 2 and manufacturer's requirements, but not exceeding specified span
unless otherwise approved by Engineer. Provide required support and attachment in
accordance with Section 26 0529, where not furnished by cable tray manufacturer.
2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from
piping, ductwork, or other systems.
K. Grounding and Bonding Requirements, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:
1. Comply with grounding and bonding requirements of NEMA VE 2.
2. Metal Cable Tray Systems: Use suitable bonding jumpers or classified connectors to
provide electrical continuity.
3. Painted Cable Tray Systems: Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar
coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.
4. Provide suitable equipment grounding conductor in each cable tray, except where
cable tray contains only multiconductor cables with integral equipment grounding
conductors. Do not use metal cable tray system as sole equipment grounding
conductor.
a. Equipment Grounding Conductor for Steel Cable Tray: Use insulated copper
conductor.
b. Minimum Equipment Grounding Conductor Size: 6 AWG copper.
L. Conduit Termination:
1. Use listed cable tray conduit clamps (evaluated for bonding connection) to terminate
conduits at cable tray.
2. Provide insulating bushing at conduit termination to protect cables.
3. Provide independent support for conduit.
M. Cable Installation:
1. Comply with cable installation requirements of NEMA VE 2.
2. Use appropriate cable pulling tools, applied to prevent excessive force on cable tray
system and maintain minimum cable bending radius.
3. Use cable clamps or cable ties to fasten conductors/cables to vertical and horizontal
runs of cable tray.
a. Distance Between Fastening Points for Vertical Runs: 18 inches (450 mm).
b. Distance Between Fastening Points for Horizontal Runs: As required to maintain
spacing and confine conductor/cable within the cable fill area.
N. Penetrations: Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of building elements,
using materials and methods specified in Section 07 8400.
O. Identification Requirements, in Addition to Those Specified in Section 26 0553.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0536 - 4 CABLE TRAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 1. Use warning labels to identify cable tray with the word message "WARNING! Do Not
Use As A Walkway, Ladder, Or Support For Personnel. Use Only As A Mechanical
Support For Cables, Tubing and Raceways." at maximum intervals of 20 feet (6 m).
P. Install cable tray covers where indicated and as follows:
1. For first 6 feet (1.8 m) of cable tray extending vertically from a floor penetration.
2. Where cable tray passes under open walkways.

4.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect cable tray system for damage and defects.
C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective cable tray system components.

4.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque
settings.

4.06 CLEANING
A. Remove dirt and debris from cable tray.
B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.

4.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect cable tray system from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0536 - 5 CABLE TRAYS FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0539
UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Trench duct.
B. Service fittings.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C. UL 209 - Cellular Metal Floor Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
D. UL 884 - Underfloor Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with other trades for the proper placement of concrete
provided under other sections.
1. Verify that no concrete containing chlorides from any source will be used in contact
with duct system.
2. Where approved by the Architect or Engineer, arrange for vibration of concrete at duct
system to ensure complete fill beneath components.
3. Arrange for hand finishing of concrete adjacent to flush components.
B. Where cellular floor deck electrical raceway system is provided under other sections,
coordinate the work to provide compatible electrical service fittings.
C. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section; require
attendance of all affected installers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating system layout,
connection locations and details, insert spacing and height, and service fitting locations.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
dimensions, materials, fabrication details, finishes, conductor and cable fill capacities,
service condition requirements, and accessories.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of ducts, junction boxes, and
service fittings.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for locating preset inserts and
installing afterset inserts.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0539 - 1 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all components, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete duct
system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Do not use duct systems for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product
listing.

2.02 TRENCH DUCT

A. Trench Duct:
1. Description: Steel duct with corrosion-resistant coating, designed for installation flush
with concrete floor surface; furnished with removable gasketed covers for lay-in
installation of conductors and cables.
B. Duct Supports: Steel with corrosion-resistant coating, with integral means for leveling
adjustment prior to concrete pour.
C. Cover Plates: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick steel, furnished with trim suitable for
flooring to be installed.

2.03 SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of duct system to be installed.
B. Description: Service fittings compatible with duct system to be installed with all
components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.
C. Receptacles: Comply with Section 26 2726.
D. Finishes: As specified for floor box service fittings in Section 26 2726.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Unless otherwise indicated, arrange duct to be parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
D. Install duct supports located according to manufacturer's recommendations. Permanently
fasten duct supports to the supporting framework.
E. Provide expansion fittings with suitable bonding jumper where duct crosses structural joints
intended for expansion.
F. Make adjustments such that duct is level at the proper elevation.
1. Trench Duct: Top of cover plate assembly flush with finished floor, accounting for
flooring material and associated trim.
G. Install marker caps in each insert adjacent to junction boxes, at end of each duct run, on
both sides of permanent partitions, and on both sides of change in direction of duct. Adjust

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0539 - 2 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 markers to be flush with finished floor except only extend through backing material for
carpeted areas.
H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
I. Prior to concrete placement, seal duct system connections and openings with duct tape or
manufacturer's recommended compound to prevent entry of concrete.
J. Install service fittings after installation of floor finishes. Cut floors according to
manufacturer's instructions as required.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect duct system components for damage and defects.
C. Service Fittings: Test each wiring device to verify operation and proper polarity.
D. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective duct system components.
E. Repair or replace floors damaged as a result of work of this section.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct system covers to eliminate movement and noise under normal traffic.

3.05 CLEANING
A. After concrete placement and before installation of conductors and cables, clean interior of
duct system to remove moisture and foreign matter.
B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prior to concrete placement, do not use installed duct system as walkway or working
platform.
B. Protect installed duct system from subsequent construction operations. Do not allow
equipment or heavy traffic over the duct system without using ramps that ensure load is not
transferred to the duct.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0539 - 3 UNDERFLOOR RACEWAYS

FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0548
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vibration isolation requirements.
B. Seismic control requirements.
1. Includes requirements for seismic qualification of equipment not specified in this
section.
C. Vibration-isolated equipment support bases.
D. Vibration isolators.
E. External seismic snubber assemblies.
F. Seismic restraint systems.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 4533 - Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures.
B. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Materials and requirements for fabricated metal
supports.
D. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Electrical Component: Where referenced in this section in regards to seismic controls,
applies to any portion of the electrical system subject to seismic evaluation in accordance
with applicable codes, including distributed systems (e.g. conduit, cable tray).
B. Seismic Restraint: Structural members or assemblies of members or manufactured
elements specifically designed and applied for transmitting seismic forces between
components and the seismic force-resisting system of the structure.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other
Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
B. ASCE 19 - Structural Applications of Steel Cables for Buildings; 2016.
C. ASHRAE (HVACA) - ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications; Most Recent Edition Cited
by Referring Code or Reference Standard.
D. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2017.
E. FEMA 413 - Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment; 2004.
F. FEMA E-74 - Reducing the Risks of Nonstructural Earthquake Damage; 2012.
G. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H. ICC-ES AC156 - Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake-Table Testing of
Nonstructural Components; 2010, with Editorial Revision (2015).
I. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; 2004.
J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. SMACNA (SRM) - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems; 2008.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate selection and arrangement of vibration isolation and/or seismic control
components with the actual equipment to be installed.
2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials
required for installation.
3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting
surfaces at the installed locations.
4. Seismic Controls:
a. Coordinate the arrangement of seismic restraints with ductwork, piping,
equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
b. Coordinate the work with other trades to accommodate relative positioning of
essential and non-essential components in consideration of seismic interaction.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete
has fully cured in accordance with Section 03 3000.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Design Documents: Prepare and submit all information required for plan review and
permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, details,
and calculations.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
products, including materials, fabrication details, dimensions, and finishes.
1. Vibration Isolators: Include rated load capacities and deflections; include information
on color coding or other identification method for spring element load capacities.
2. Seismic Controls: Include seismic load capacities.
D. Shop Drawings - Vibration Isolation Systems:
1. Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating proposed arrangement of
vibration isolators; indicate equipment weights and static deflections.
2. Vibration-Isolated Equipment Support Bases: Include base weights, including
concrete fill where applicable; indicate equipment mounting provisions.
E. Shop Drawings - Seismic Controls:
1. Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating proposed electrical
component locations and distributed system routing, with locations and details of
gravity supports and seismic restraints and associated attachments.
2. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
3. Identify anchor manufacturer, type, minimum embedment, minimum spacing, minimum
member thickness, and minimum edge distance requirements.
4. Indicate proposed arrangement of distributed system trapeze support groupings.
5. Indicate proposed locations for distributed system flexible fittings and/or connections.
6. Indicate locations of seismic separations where applicable.
7. Include point load drawings indicating design loads transmitted to structure at each
attachment location.
F. Seismic Design Data:
1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed electrical
components necessary for determining seismic design forces required to design
appropriate seismic controls, including but not limited to the following.
a. Component operating weight and center of gravity.
b. Component elevation in the building in relation to the roof elevation (z/h).
c. Component importance factor (Ip).
d. For distributed systems, component materials and connection methods.
e. Component amplification factor (ap) and component response modification factor
(Rp), determined in accordance with ASCE 7 tables.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 2. Include structural calculations, stamped or sealed by seismic controls designer,
demonstrating suitability of seismic controls for seismic design forces.
G. Certification for seismically qualified equipment; identify basis for certification.
H. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by a
qualified evaluation service, provide current evaluation reports.
I. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
J. Evidence of qualifications for seismic controls designer.
K. Evidence of qualifications for manufacturer.
L. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing and inspection procedures.
M. Field quality control test reports.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with applicable building code.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Design and provide vibration isolation systems to reduce vibration transmission to
supporting structure from vibration-producing electrical equipment and/or electrical
connections to vibration-isolated equipment.
B. Comply with applicable general recommendations of ASHRAE (HVACA), where not in
conflict with other specified requirements:
C. General Requirements:
1. Select vibration isolators to provide required static deflection.
2. Select vibration isolators for uniform deflection based on distributed operating weight
of actual installed equipment.
3. Select seismic type vibration isolators to comply with seismic design requirements,
including conditions of equipment seismic certification where applicable.
4. Select vibration isolators for outdoor equipment to comply with wind design
requirements.
5. Select vibration-isolated equipment support bases and associated vibration isolators to
provide minimum 2 inch (50 mm) operating clearance beneath base unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Equipment Isolation:
1. Transformers:
a. Specified vibration isolators are in addition to any factory-installed internal core
and coil assembly vibration isolators unless otherwise indicated.
b. Floor-Mounted Transformers, Non-Seismic Applications: Use resilent material
isolator pads, resilient material isolator mounts, or open (unhoused) spring
isolators.
c. Floor-Mounted Transformers, Seismic Applications: Use seismic type resilient
material isolator mounts or seismic type restrained spring isolators.
E. Conduit Isolation:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 1. Use flexible conduit or cable for electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment,
including equipment installed under other sections or by others.
a. Minimum Length: 3 feet (0.9 m) unless otherwise indicated.
2. Vibration Isolators:
a. Provide vibration isolators for conduit supports:
1) Located within 50 feet (15.2 m) of connected vibration-isolated equipment
where flexible connection to equipment is not possible.
2) For conduits over 2 inch (53 mm) trade size located below or within 50 feet
(15.2 m) of noise-sensitive areas indicated.
b. Minimum Static Deflection:
1) First Three Supports Closest to Isolated Equipment: Same as static
deflection of equipment; maximum of 2 inch (50 mm) deflection required.
2) Remainder of Supports: 0.75 inch (19 mm) deflection unless otherwise
indicated.
c. Suspended Conduits, Non-Seismic Applications: Use resilient material isolator
hangers, spring isolator hangers, or combination resilient material/spring isolator
hangers.
d. Suspended Conduits, Seismic Applications: Use seismic type resilient material
isolator hangers, seismic type spring isolator hangers, or seismic type
combination resilient material/spring isolator hangers.
e. Use modular seal or approved resilient material where vibration-isolated conduits
penetrate building elements (e.g. walls, floors) arranged to prevent vibration
transmission to structure.

2.02 SEISMIC CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

A. Design and provide electrical component restraints, supports, and attachments suitable for
seismic loads determined in accordance with applicable codes, as well as gravity and
operating loads and other structural design considerations of the installed location.
Consider wind loads for outdoor electrical components.
B. Seismic Design Criteria: ICC (IBC)/ASCE 7.
C. Component Importance Factor (Ip): Electrical components essential to life safety to be
assigned a component importance factor (Ip) of 1.5 as indicated or as required. This
includes but is not limited to:
1. Electrical components required to function for life safety purposes after an earthquake.
2. Electrical components that support or otherwise contain hazardous substances.
D. Seismic Qualification of Equipment:
1. Provide special certification for electrical equipment furnished under other sections
and assigned a component importance factor (Ip) of 1.5, certifying that equipment will
remain operable following a design level earthquake.
2. Seismic qualification to be by shake table testing in accordance with recognized
testing standard procedure, such as ICC-ES AC156, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Notify Architect and obtain direction where mounting restrictions required by conditions
of seismic certification conflict with specified requirements.
4. Seismically qualified equipment to be furnished with factory-installed labels
referencing certificate of compliance and associated mounting restrictions.
E. Premanufactured Modular Electrical Equipment: Where not otherwise seismically qualified,
premanufactured modules 6 feet (1.8 m) high and taller furnished under other sections to be
designed in accordance with seismic provisions for nonbuilding structures.
F. Seismic Restraints:
1. Provide seismic restraints for electrical components except where exempt according to
applicable codes and specified seismic design criteria, as approved by authorities
having jurisdiction.
2. Seismic Restraint Exemptions:
a. Conduit, Cable Tray, and Raceway Exemptions, All Seismic Design Categories:
1) Raceways with component importance factor (Ip) of 1.0 where flexible
connections are provided between cable tray or raceway and associated
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 components, where cable tray or raceway is positively attached to the
structure, and where one of the following apply:
(a) Trapeze supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with trapeze
assemblies using 3/8 inch (10 mm) diameter rod hangers not exceeding
12 inches (305 mm) in length from support point connection to the
supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single
trapeze is 100 pounds (445 N) or less.
(b) Trapeze supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with trapeze
assemblies using 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter rod hangers not exceeding
12 inches (305 mm) in length from support point connection to the
supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single
trapeze is 200 pounds (890 N) or less.
(c) Trapeze supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with trapeze
assemblies using 1/2 inch (13 mm) diameter rod hangers not exceeding
24 inches (610 mm) in length from support point connection to the
supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single
trapeze is 100 pounds (445 N) or less.
(d) Hanger supported conduits, cable trays, or raceways with individual rod
hangers 3/8 inch (10 mm) or 1/2 inch (13 mm) in diameter not
exceeding 12 inches (305 mm) in length from support point connection
to the supporting structure, and the total weight supported by any single
rod is 50 pounds (220 N) or less.
2) Conduits less than 2-1/2 inch (64 mm) trade size.
b. Lighting Exemptions, All Seismic Design Categories:
1) Suspended luminaires where attachments are designed to accommodate
1.4 times the operating weight acting in both the vertical and horizontal
directions and connections to structure allow for 360 degree range of motion
in the horizontal plane; arrange to prevent impact between luminaires and
the structure or other nonstructural components.
2) Lay-in luminaires weighing less than 56 pounds (25 kg) secured to ceiling
grid and provided with safety wires in accordance with ASTM E580/E580M.
3. Comply with applicable general recommendations of the following, where not in
conflict with applicable codes, seismic design criteria, or other specified requirements:
a. ASHRAE (HVACA).
b. FEMA 413.
c. FEMA E-74.
d. SMACNA (SRM).
4. Seismic Type Vibration Isolators:
a. Comply with seismic design requirements, including conditions of equipment
seismic certification where applicable.
5. External Seismic Snubber Assemblies:
a. Provide quantity and arrangement of external seismic snubber assemblies as
required to restrain equipment in all directions (both lateral and vertical).
b. Do not use external seismic snubber assemblies that restrain equipment only in
one or more lateral directions (but not vertical) except where uplift forces are zero
or are addressed by other restraints.
6. Seismic Restraint Systems:
a. Except where otherwise restricted, use of either cable or rigid restraints is
permitted.
b. Use only cable restraints to restrain vibration-isolated electrical components,
including distributed systems.
c. Use only one restraint system type for a given electrical component or distributed
system (e.g. conduit, cable tray) run; mixing of cable and rigid restraints on a
given component/run is not permitted.
d. Size restraint elements, including anchorage, to resist seismic loads as necessary
to restrain electrical component in all lateral directions; consider bracket geometry
in anchor load calculations.
e. Use rod stiffener clips to attach bracing to hanger rods as required to prevent rod
buckling from vertical (upward) compressive load introduced by cable or rigid

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 5 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 restraints loaded in tension, in excess of downward tensile load due to supported
electrical component weight.
f. Select hanger rods and associated anchorage as required to accommodate
vertical (downward) tensile load introduced by rigid restraints loaded in
compression, in addition to downward tensile load due to supported electrical
component weight.
g. Clevis hangers may only be used for attachment of transverse restraints; do not
use for attachment of longitudinal restraints.
h. Where seismic restraints are attached to clevis hangers, provide clevis bolt
reinforcement accessory to prevent clevis hanger deformation.
i. Do not introduce lateral loads on open bar joist chords or the weak axis of beams,
or loads in any direction at other than panel points unless approved by project
Structural Engineer of Record.
G. Seismic Attachments:
1. Attachments to be bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened without
consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity.
2. Post-Installed Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Evaluated and recognized by ICC
Evaluation Service, LLC (ICC-ES) or qualified evaluation service acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for compliance with applicable building code, and
qualified for seismic applications; concrete anchors to be qualified for installation in
both cracked and uncracked concrete.
3. Do not use power-actuated fasteners.
4. Do not use friction clips (devices that rely on mechanically applied friction to resist
loads). Beam clamps may be used for supporting sustained loads where provided with
restraining straps.
5. Comply with anchor minimum embedment, minimum spacing, minimum member
thickness, and minimum edge distance requirements.
6. Concrete Housekeeping Pads:
a. Increase size of pad as required to comply with anchor requirements.
b. Provide pad reinforcement and doweling to ensure integrity of pad and
connection and to provide adequate load path from pad to supporting structure.
H. Seismic Interactions:
1. Include provisions to prevent seismic impact between electrical components and other
structural or nonstructural components.
2. Include provisions such that failure of a component, either essential or nonessential,
does not cause the failure of an essential component.
I. Seismic Relative Displacement Provisions:
1. Use suitable fittings or flexible connections to accommodate:
a. Relative displacements at connections between components, including distributed
systems (e.g. conduit, cable tray); do not exceed load limits for equipment utility
connections.
b. Relative displacements between component supports attached to dissimilar parts
of structure that may move differently during an earthquake.
c. Design displacements at seismic separations.
d. Anticipated drifts between floors.

2.03 VIBRATION-ISOLATED EQUIPMENT SUPPORT BASES

A. Vibration-Isolated Structural Steel Bases:
1. Description: Engineered structural steel frames with integral mounting provisions for
vibration isolators, sized and configured for mounting of equipment.
B. Vibration-Isolated Concrete Inertia Bases:
1. Description: Concrete-filled engineered steel forms with integral mounting provisions
for vibration isolators, sized and configured for mounting of equipment.
2. Minimum Base Depth: 6 inches (152 mm).
3. Minimum Base Mass (Including Concrete): 1.5 times weight of supported equipment.
4. Concrete Reinforcement: Welded or tied reinforcing bars running both ways in a
single layer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 6 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 5. Concrete: Filled on site with minimum 3000 psi (20 mPa) concrete in accordance with
Section 03 3000.

2.04 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. General Requirements:
1. Resilient Materials for Vibration Isolators: Oil, ozone, and oxidant resistant.
2. Spring Elements for Spring Isolators:
a. Color code or otherwise identify springs to indicate load capacity.
b. Lateral Stability: Minimum lateral stiffness to vertical stiffness ratio of 0.8.
c. Designed to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve over
deflection range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection.
d. Designed to provide additional travel to solid of not less than 50 percent of rated
deflection at rated load.
e. Selected to provide designed deflection of not less than 75 percent of specified
deflection.
f. Selected to function without undue stress or overloading.
3. Seismic Snubbing Elements for Seismic Isolators:
a. Air Gap: Between 0.125 inches (3 mm) and 0.25 inches (6 mm) unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Points of Contact: Cushioned with resilient material, minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm)
thick; capable of being visually inspected for damage and replaced.
B. Vibration Isolators for Non-Seismic Applications:
1. Resilient Material Isolator Pads:
a. Description: Single or multiple layer pads utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene,
rubber) or fiberglass isolator material.
b. Pad Thickness: As required for specified minimum static deflection; minimum
0.25 inch (6 mm) thickness.
c. Multiple Layer Pads: Provide bonded, galvanized sheet metal separation plate
between each layer.
2. Resilient Material Isolator Mounts, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Mounting assemblies for bolting equipment to supporting structure
utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material; fail-
safe type.
3. Open (Unhoused) Spring Isolators:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing,
laterally stable steel spring(s) without a housing.
b. Bottom Load Plate: Non-skid molded elastomeric isolator material or steel with
non-skid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions for bolting to supporting
structure as required.
c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported
equipment.
4. Housed Spring Isolators:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing,
laterally stable steel spring(s) within a metal housing.
b. Furnished with integral elastomeric snubbing elements, non-adjustable type, for
limiting equipment movement and preventing metal-to-metal contact between
housing elements.
c. Bottom Load Plate: Steel with non-skid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions
for bolting to supporting structure as required.
d. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported
equipment.
5. Restrained Spring Isolators, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing,
laterally stable steel spring(s) within a metal housing designed to prevent
movement of supported equipment above an adjustable vertical limit stop.
b. Bottom Load Plate: Steel with non-skid elastomeric isolator pad with provisions
for bolting to supporting structure as required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 7 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported
equipment.
d. Provides constant free and operating height.
6. Resilient Material Isolator Hangers, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension
system utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or fiberglass isolator material
for the lower hanger rod connection.
7. Spring Isolator Hangers, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension
system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) in
series with an elastomeric element for the lower hanger rod connection.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees
(plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.
8. Combination Resilient Material/Spring Isolator Hangers, Non-Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension
system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) for
the lower hanger rod connection and elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) or
fiberglass isolator material for the upper hanger rod connection.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees
(plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.
C. Vibration Isolators for Seismic Applications:
1. Resilient Material Isolator Mounts, Seismic:
a. Description: Mounting assemblies for bolting equipment to supporting structure
utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator material; specifically
designed and rated for seismic applications with integral snubbing in all
directions.
2. Restrained Spring Isolators, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly consisting of single or multiple free-standing,
laterally stable steel spring(s) in series with elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber)
isolator material within a metal housing designed to prevent movement of
supported equipment above an adjustable vertical limit stop; specifically designed
and rated for seismic applications with integral snubbing in all directions.
b. Bottom Load Plate: Steel with provisions for bolting to supporting structure as
required.
c. Furnished with integral leveling device for positioning and securing supported
equipment.
d. Provides constant free and operating height.
3. Resilient Material Isolator Hangers, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension
system utilizing elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator material for the lower
hanger rod connection; specifically designed and rated for seismic applications
with vertical limit stop to prevent upward travel of hanger rod and cushion impact.
4. Spring Isolator Hangers, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension
system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) in
series with an elastomeric element for the lower hanger rod connection;
specifically designed and rated for seismic applications with vertical limit stop to
prevent upward travel of hanger rod and cushion impact.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees
(plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.
5. Combination Resilient Material/Spring Isolator Hangers, Seismic:
a. Description: Isolator assembly designed for installation in hanger rod suspension
system utilizing single or multiple free-standing, laterally stable steel spring(s) for
the lower hanger rod connection and elastomeric (e.g. neoprene, rubber) isolator
material for the upper hanger rod connection; specifically designed and rated for
seismic applications with vertical limit stop to prevent upward travel of hanger rod
and cushion impact.
b. Designed to accommodate misalignment of bottom hanger rod up to 30 degrees
(plus/minus 15 degrees) without short circuiting of isolation.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 8 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC
CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
2.05 EXTERNAL SEISMIC SNUBBER ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Steel snubbing assemblies designed for external attachment to both
equipment and supporting structure that, as part of a complete system, restrain equipment
motion in all directions during a seismic event while maintaining vibration isolation during
normal operation.
B. Seismic Snubbing Elements:
1. Air Gap: Between 0.125 inches (3 mm) and 0.25 inches (6 mm) unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Points of Contact: Cushioned with resilient material, minimum 0.25 inch (6 mm) thick;
capable of being visually inspected for damage and replaced.

2.06 SEISMIC RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

A. Description: System components and accessories specifically designed for field assembly
and attachment of seismic restraints.
B. Cable Restraints:
1. Comply with ASCE 19.
2. Cables: Pre-stretched, galvanized steel wire rope with certified break strength.
3. Cable Connections: Use only swaged end fittings. Cable clips and wedge type end
fittings are not permitted in accordance with ASCE 19.
4. Use protective thimbles for cable loops where potential for cable damage exists.
C. Rigid Restraints: Use MFMA-4 steel channel (strut), steel angle, or steel pipe for structural
element; suitable for both compressive and tensile design loads.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive vibration isolation and/or seismic control
components and associated attachments.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 CODE-REQUIRED SPECIAL INSPECTIONS

A. Arrange work to accommodate tests and/or inspections performed by Special Inspection
Agency employed by Owner or Architect in accordance with Section 01 4533 and statement
of special inspections as required by applicable building code.
B. Frequency of Special Inspections: Where special inspections are designated as continuous
or periodic, arrange work accordingly.
1. Continuous Special Inspections: Special Inspection Agency to be present in the area
where the work is being performed and observe the work at all times the work is in
progress.
2. Periodic Special Inspections: Special Inspection Agency to be present in the area
where work is being performed and observe the work part-time or intermittently and at
the completion of the work.
C. Prior to starting work, Contractor to submit written statement of responsibility to authorities
having jurisdiction and to Owner acknowledging awareness of special requirements
contained in the statement of special inspections.
D. Special Inspection Agency services do not relieve Contractor from performing inspections
and testing specified elsewhere.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install products in accordance with applicable requirements of NECA 1 (general
workmanship).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 9 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 C. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with ICC Evaluation Services, LLC (ICC-ES)
evaluation report conditions of use where applicable.
D. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
E. Install flexible conduit and cable connections to provide sufficient slack for vibration isolation
and/or seismic relative displacements as indicated or as required.
F. Vibration Isolation Systems:
1. Vibration-Isolated Equipment Support Bases:
a. Provide specified minimum clearance beneath base.
2. Spring Isolators:
a. Position equipment at operating height; provide temporary blocking as required.
b. Lift equipment free of isolators prior to lateral repositioning to avoid damage to
isolators.
c. Level equipment by adjusting isolators gradually in sequence to raise equipment
uniformly such that excessive weight or stress is not placed on any single isolator.
3. Isolator Hangers:
a. Use precompressed isolator hangers where required to facilitate installation and
prevent damage to equipment utility connection provisions.
b. Locate isolator hangers at top of hanger rods in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
4. Clean debris from beneath vibration-isolated equipment that could cause short
circuiting of isolation.
5. Use elastomeric grommets for attachments where required to prevent short circuiting
of isolation.
6. Adjust isolators to be free of isolation short circuits during normal operation.
7. Do not overtighten fasteners such that resilient material isolator pads are compressed
beyond manufacturer's maximum recommended deflection.
G. Seismic Controls:
1. Provide specified snubbing element air gap; remove any factory-installed spacers,
debris or other obstructions.
2. Use only specified components, anchorage, and hardware evaluated by seismic
design. Comply with conditions of seismic certification where applicable.
3. Where mounting hole diameter exceeds bolt diameter by more than 0.125 inch (3
mm), use epoxy grout, elastomeric grommet, or welded washer to reduce clearance to
0.125 inch (3 mm) or less.
4. Equipment with Sheet Metal Housings:
a. Use Belleville washers to distribute stress over a larger surface area of the sheet
metal connection interface as approved by manufacturer.
b. Attach additional steel as approved by manufacturer where required to transfer
loads to structure.
c. Where mounting surface is irregular, do not shim housing; reinforce housing with
additional steel as approved by manufacturer.
5. Concrete Housekeeping Pads:
a. Size in accordance with seismic design to meet anchor requirements.
b. Install pad reinforcement and doweling in accordance with seismic design to
ensure integrity of pad and associated connection to slab.
6. Seismic Restraint Systems:
a. Do not attach seismic restraints and gravity supports to dissimilar parts of
structure that may move differently during an earthquake.
b. Install restraints within permissible angles in accordance with seismic design.
c. Install cable restraints straight between component/run and structural attachment;
do not bend around other nonstructural components or structural elements.
d. Install cable restraints for vibration-isolated components slightly slack to prevent
short circuiting of isolation.
e. Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated using only specified clamps; do not
weld stiffeners to hanger rod.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 10 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect vibration isolation and/or seismic control components for damage and defects.
C. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative for vibration isolation
systems and seismic controls to observe installation and assist in inspection and testing.
Include manufacturer's detailed testing and inspection procedures and field reports with
submittals.
D. Vibration Isolation Systems:
1. Verify isolator static deflections.
2. Verify required clearance beneath vibration-isolated equipment support bases.
3. Verify vibration isolation performance during normal operation; investigate sources of
isolation short circuits.
E. Seismic Controls:
1. Verify snubbing element air gaps.
F. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective vibration isolation and/or seismic
control components.
G. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.05 ATTACHMENTS
A. Statement of special inspections.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0548 - 11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC

CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0553
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical identification requirements.
B. Identification nameplates and labels.
C. Wire and cable markers.
D. Voltage markers.
E. Underground warning tape.
F. Floor marking tape.
G. Warning signs and labels.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.
B. Section 09 9123 - Interior Painting.
C. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for
power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.
D. Section 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems: Additional identification requirements
for cable tray systems.
E. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Arc flash hazard warning labels.
F. Section 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear: Factory-installed mimic bus.
G. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-
marked wallplates.
H. Section 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional identification requirements for
photovoltaic systems.
I. Section 27 1000 - Structured Cabling: Identification for communications cabling and
devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs;
2011.
B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2018.
E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior
to fabrication of identification products.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings,
until identification products have been installed.
2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are
complete.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide schedule of items to be identified indicating proposed
designations, materials, legends, and formats.
D. Samples:
1. Identification Nameplates: One of each type and color specified.
2. Warning Signs and Labels: One of each type and legend specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by
manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Existing Work: Unless specifically excluded, identify existing elements to remain that are
not already identified in accordance with specified requirements.
B. Identification for Equipment:
1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control
equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components.
a. Switchgear:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main and tie devices.
5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch
device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
6) See Section 26 2300 for factory-installed mimic bus.
b. Switchboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.
5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch
device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
c. Motor Control Centers:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.
4) Use identification nameplate to identify main overcurrent protective device.
5) Use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch
device. Do not identify spares and spaces.
d. Panelboards:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for
panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door,
use identification nameplate or identification label.
5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards
with a door. Identify spares and spaces.
6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to
identify load(s) served for each branch device. Identify spares and spaces.
e. Transformers:
1) Identify kVA rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase for primary and secondary.
3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location.
4) Identify load(s) served. Include location
f. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers:
1) Identify voltage and phase.
2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location
3) Identify load(s) served. Include location.
g. Time Switches:
1) Identify load(s) served and associated circuits controlled. Include location.
h. Enclosed Contactors:
1) Identify ampere rating.
2) Identify voltage and phase.
3) Identify configuration, e.g., E.O.E.H. (electrically operated, electrically held)
or E.O.M.H. (electrically operated, mechanically held).
4) Identify coil voltage.
5) Identify load(s) and associated circuits controlled. Include location.
i. Electricity Meters:
1) Identify load(s) metered.
2. Service Equipment:
a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means.
b. For buildings or structures supplied by more than one service, or any combination
of branch circuits, feeders, and services, use identification nameplate or means of
identification acceptable to authority having jurisdiction at each service
disconnecting means to identify all other services, feeders, and branch circuits
supplying that building or structure. Verify format and descriptions with authority
having jurisdiction.
3. Use voltage marker to identify highest voltage present for each piece of electrical
equipment.
4. Use identification nameplate to identify equipment utilizing series ratings, where
permitted, in accordance with NFPA 70.
5. Use identification nameplate to identify switchboards and panelboards utilizing a high
leg delta system in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote
disconnecting means.
7. Use identification label or handwritten text using indelible marker on inside of door at
each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size.
8. Use identification label on inside of door at each motor controller to identify nameplate
horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, voltage, and phase of
motor(s) controlled.
9. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits
serving fire alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".
10. Use field-painted floor markings, floor marking tape, or warning labels to identify
required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the
authority having jurisdiction.
a. Field-Painted Floor Markings: Alternating black and white stripes, 3 inches (76
mm) wide, painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113.
11. Available Fault Current Documentation: Use identification label to identify the
available fault current and date calculations were performed at locations requiring
documentation by NFPA 70, including but not limited to the following.
a. Service equipment.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 b. Industrial control panels.
c. Motor control centers.
d. Elevator control panels.
e. Industrial machinery.
12. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for
electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels,
meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require
examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized.
a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches (89 mm by 127 mm).
b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word
message "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not
operate controls or open covers without appropriate personal protection
equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or death; Refer to NFPA 70E for
minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.
c. Service Equipment: Include the following information in accordance with NFPA
70.
1) Nominal system voltage.
2) Available fault current.
3) Clearing time of service overcurrent protective device(s).
4) Date label applied.
13. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all rooms and other
guarded locations that contain exposed live parts operating at 600 V nominal or less
with the word message "DANGER; Electrical hazard; Authorized personnel only" or
approved equivalent.
14. Use warning signs to identify electrical hazards for entrances to all buildings, vaults,
rooms, or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating
at over 600 V nominal with the word message "DANGER; HIGH VOLTAGE; KEEP
OUT".
15. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify
electrical hazards for equipment where multiple power sources are present with the
word message "DANGER; Hazardous voltage; Multiple power sources may be
present; Disconnect all electric power including remote disconnects before servicing"
or approved equivalent.
C. Identification for Conductors and Cables:
1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 0519.
2. Identification for Communications Conductors and Cables: Comply with Section 27
1000.
3. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for
ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of
feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch
circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system.
4. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated
for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following
locations:
a. At each source and load connection.
b. Within boxes when more than one circuit is present.
c. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the
enclosure.
d. In cable tray, at maximum intervals of 20 feet (6.1 m).
5. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system
components for grounding electrode conductors.
6. Use underground warning tape to identify direct buried cables.
D. Identification for Raceways:
1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for accessible conduits at
maximum intervals of 20 feet (6.1 m).
2. Use voltage markers or color-coded bands to identify systems other than normal
power system for accessible conduits at maximum intervals of 20 feet (6.1 m).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 a. Color-Coded Bands: Use field-painting or vinyl color coding electrical tape to
mark bands 3 inches (76 mm) wide.
1) Color Code:
2) Field-Painting: Comply with Section 09 9123 and 09 9113.
3) Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Comply with Section 26 0519.
3. Use identification labels, handwritten text using indelible marker, or plastic marker tags
to identify circuits enclosed for accessible conduits at wall penetrations, at floor
penetrations, at roof penetrations, and at equipment terminations when source is not
within sight.
4. Use identification labels or plastic marker tags to identify spare conduits at each end.
Identify purpose and termination location.
5. Use underground warning tape to identify underground raceways.
6. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present for wireways at maximum
intervals of 20 feet (6.1 m).
E. Identification for Cable Tray: Comply with Section 26 0536.
F. Identification for Boxes:
1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present.
2. Use voltage markers or color coded boxes to identify systems other than normal
power system.
a. Color-Coded Boxes: Field-painted in accordance with Section 09 9123 and 09
9113 per the same color code used for raceways.
3. Use identification labels to identify circuits enclosed.
4. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for boxes containing exposed live
parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 V nominal with the word message
__________.
G. Identification for Devices:
1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 27 1000.
2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 2726.
3. Factory Pre-Marked Wallplates: Comply with Section 26 2726.
4. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.
a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification
on ceiling tile below device location.
5. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all
receptacles.
a. For receptacles in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification on inside
surface of wallplate.
6. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify load controlled for wall-
mounted control devices controlling loads that are not visible from the control location
and for multiple wall-mounted control devices installed at one location.
7. Use identification label to identify receptacles protected by upstream GFI protection,
where permitted.
H. Identification for Luminaires:
1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to
emergency power system.
I. Identification for Photovoltaic Systems: Comply with Section 26 3100

2.02 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:
1. Materials:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use stainless steel or aluminum nameplates suitable for
exterior use.
2. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-
conductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm);
engraved text.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 a. Exception: Provide minimum thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) when any dimension is
greater than 4 inches (100 mm).
3. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm); engraved or
laser-etched text.
4. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm);
engraved or laser-etched text.
5. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1
inch (25 mm) high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes.
B. Identification Labels:
1. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and
abrasion resistant.
a. Use only for indoor locations.
2. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text
unless otherwise indicated.
C. Format for Equipment Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch (25 mm) by 2.5 inches (64 mm).
2. Legend:
a. Equipment designation or other approved description.
b. Other information as indicated.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height:
a. System Designation: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
c. Other Information: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
d. Exception: Provide minimum text height of 1 inch (25 mm) for equipment located
more than 10 feet (3.0 m) above floor or working platform.
5. Color:
a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.
D. Format for General Information and Operating Instructions:
1. Minimum Size: 1 inch (25 mm) by 2.5 inches (64 mm).
2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and
safe operation and maintenance.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
5. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.
E. Format for Caution and Warning Messages:
1. Minimum Size: 2 inches (51 mm) by 4 inches (100 mm).
2. Legend: Include information or instructions indicated or as required for proper and
safe operation and maintenance.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 1/2 inch (13 mm).
5. Color: Black text on yellow background unless otherwise indicated.
F. Format for Receptacle Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm).
2. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
5. Color: Black text on clear background.
G. Format for Control Device Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm).
2. Legend: Load controlled or other designation indicated.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
5. Color: Black text on clear background.
H. Format for Fire Alarm Device Identification:
1. Minimum Size: 3/8 inch (10 mm) by 1.5 inches (38 mm).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 2. Legend: Designation indicated and device zone or address.
3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.
4. Minimum Text Height: 3/16 inch (5 mm).
5. Color: Red text on white background.

2.03 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-
around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on,
or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.
1. Do not use self-adhesive type markers.
B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable
ties.
C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Do not use handwritten text.
E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 VOLTAGE MARKERS

A. Markers for Conduits: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl, self-adhesive vinyl cloth,
or vinyl snap-around type markers.
B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl
or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers.
C. Minimum Size:
1. Markers for Equipment: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches (29 by 110 mm).
2. Markers for Conduits: As recommended by manufacturer for conduit size to be
identified.
3. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches (29 by 110 mm).
4. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches (13 by 57 mm).
D. Legend:
1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present.
2. Markers for System Identification:
E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated.
2.05 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE
A. Materials: Use non-detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Non-detectable Type Tape: 6 inches (152 mm) wide, with minimum thickness of 4 mil (0.1
mm).
C. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.
D. Color:
1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.
2. Tape for Buried Communication, Alarm, and Signal Lines: Black text on orange
background.

2.06 FLOOR MARKING TAPE

A. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl or
polyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches (76 mm) wide, with alternating black and white
stripes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 7 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.07 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.
B. Warning Signs:
1. Materials:
a. Indoor Dry, Clean Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid plastic or self-adhesive
vinyl signs.
b. Outdoor Locations: Use factory pre-printed rigid aluminum signs.
2. Rigid Signs: Provide four mounting holes at corners for mechanical fasteners.
3. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
C. Warning Labels:
1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-
adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced
using materials recognized to UL 969.
a. Do not use labels designed to be completed using handwritten text.
b. Provide polyester overlaminate to protect handwritten text.
2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and
accessories recommended by label manufacturer.
3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches (51 mm by 102 mm) unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and
maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:
1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.
2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.
3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with
rear access.
4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.
5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.
6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.
7. Conduits: Legible from the floor.
8. Boxes: Outside face of cover.
9. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.
10. Devices: Outside face of cover.
C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.
D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to
interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.
1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate cannot be
penetrated.
E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or
wrinkles and edges properly sealed.
F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches
(75 mm) below finished grade.
G. Secure rigid signs using stainless steel screws.
H. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other
signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0553 - 9 IDENTIFICATION FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
 SECTION 26 0573
POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Short-circuit study.
B. Protective device coordination study.
C. Arc flash and shock risk assessment.
1. Includes arc flash hazard warning labels.
D. Criteria for the selection and adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices
not specified in this section, as determined by studies to be performed.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for arc flash
hazard warning labels.
B. Section 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear.
C. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards.
D. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.
E. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.
F. Section 26 2816.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers.
G. Section 26 3533.16 - Low-Voltage Power Factor Correction Equipment.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.
B. IEEE 141 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial
Plants; 1993 (Reaffirmed 1999).
C. IEEE 242 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and
Commercial Power Systems; 2001, with Errata (2003).
D. IEEE 399 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
Analysis; 1997.
E. IEEE 551 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems; 2006.
F. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations; 2018.
G. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; 2018.
H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2018.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work to provide equipment and associated protective devices
complying with criteria for selection and adjustment, as determined by studies to be
performed.
2. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0573 - 1 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

 1. Submit study reports prior to or concurrent with product submittals.
2. Do not order equipment until matching study reports and product submittals have both
been evaluated by Architect.
3. Verify naming convention for equipment identification prior to creation of final
drawings, reports, and arc flash hazard warning labels (where applicable).
C. Scheduling:
1. Arrange access to existing facility for data collection with Owner.
2. Where work of this section involves interruption of existing electrical service, arrange
service interruption with Owner.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Study preparer's qualifications.
C. Field testing agency's qualifications.
D. Study reports, stamped or sealed and signed by study preparer.
E. Product Data: In addition to submittal requirements specified in other sections, include
manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for equipment and protective
devices indicating information relevant to studies.
1. Include characteristic time-current trip curves for protective devices.
2. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
3. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
4. Identify modifications made in accordance with studies that:
a. Can be made at no additional cost to Owner.
b. As submitted will involve a change to the contract sum.
F. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Label Samples: One of each type and legend specified.
G. Site-specific arc flash hazard warning labels.
H. Field quality control reports.
I. Certification that field adjustable protective devices have been set in accordance with
requirements of studies.
J. Project Record Documents: Revise studies as required to reflect as-built conditions.
1. Include hard copies with operation and maintenance data submittals.
2. Include computer software files used to prepare studies with file name(s) cross-
referenced to specific pieces of equipment and systems.

1.06 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

A. Scope of Studies:
1. Perform analysis of new electrical distribution system as indicated on drawings.
2. Except where study descriptions below indicate exclusions, analyze system at each
bus from primary protective devices of utility source down to each piece of equipment
involved, including parts of system affecting calculations being performed (e.g. fault
current contribution from motors).
3. Include in analysis alternate sources and operating modes (including known future
configurations) to determine worst case conditions.
a. Known Operating Modes:
1) Utility as source.
2) Maintenance settings.
B. General Study Requirements:
1. Comply with NFPA 70.
2. Perform studies utilizing computer software complying with specified requirements;
manual calculations are not permitted.
C. Data Collection:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0573 - 2 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

 1. Compile information on project-specific characteristics of actual installed equipment,
protective devices, feeders, etc. as necessary to develop single-line diagram of
electrical distribution system and associated input data for use in system modeling.
a. Utility Source Data: Include primary voltage, maximum and minimum three-phase
and line-to-ground fault currents, impedance, X/R ratio, and primary protective
device information.
b. Motors: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. induction, synchronous),
horsepower rating, voltage rating, full load amps, and locked rotor current or
NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.
c. Transformers: Include primary and secondary voltage ratings, kVA rating,
winding configuration, percent impedance, and X/R ratio.
d. Protective Devices:
1) Circuit Breakers: Include manufacturer/model, type (e.g. thermal magnetic,
electronic trip), frame size, trip rating, voltage rating, interrupting rating,
available field-adjustable trip response settings, and features (e.g. zone
selective interlocking).
2) Fuses: Include manufacturer/model, type/class (e.g. Class J), size/rating,
and speed (e.g. time delay, fast acting).
e. Protective Relays: Include manufacturer/model, type, settings, current/potential
transformer ratio, and associated protective device.
f. Conductors: Include feeder size, material (e.g. copper, aluminum), insulation
type, voltage rating, number per phase, raceway type, and actual length.
D. Short-Circuit Study:
1. Comply with IEEE 551 and applicable portions of IEEE 141, IEEE 242, and IEEE 399.
2. For purposes of determining equipment short circuit current ratings, consider
conditions that may result in maximum available fault current, including but not limited
to:
a. Maximum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum motor contribution.
c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source,
utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).
3. For each bus location, calculate the maximum available three-phase bolted
symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. For grounded systems, also calculate the
maximum available line-to-ground bolted fault currents.
E. Protective Device Coordination Study:
1. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.
2. Analyze alternate scenarios considering known operating modes (e.g. utility as source,
generator as source, utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).
3. Analyze protective devices and associated settings for suitable margins between time-
current curves to achieve full selective coordination while providing adequate
protection for equipment and conductors.
F. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:
1. Comply with NFPA 70E.
2. Perform incident energy and arc flash boundary calculations in accordance with IEEE
1584 (as referenced in NFPA 70E Annex D), where applicable.
a. Where reasonable, study preparer may assume a maximum clearing time of two
seconds in accordance with IEEE 1584, provided that the conditions are such that
a worker's egress from an arc flash event would not be inhibited.
b. For single-phase systems, study preparer to perform calculations assuming three-
phase system in accordance with IEEE 1584 using single phase bolted fault
current, yielding conservative results.
3. For equipment with main devices mounted in separate compartmentalized sections,
perform calculations on both the line and load side of the main device.
4. Analyze alternate scenarios considering conditions that may result in maximum
incident energy, including but not limited to:
a. Maximum and minimum utility fault currents.
b. Maximum and minimum motor contribution.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0573 - 3 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

 c. Known operating modes (e.g. utility as source, generator as source,
utility/generator in parallel, bus tie breaker open/close positions).
G. Study Reports:
1. General Requirements:
a. Identify date of study and study preparer.
b. Identify study methodology and software product(s) used.
c. Identify scope of studies, assumptions made, implications of possible alternate
scenarios, and any exclusions from studies.
d. Identify base used for per unit values.
e. Include single-line diagram and associated input data used for studies; identify
buses on single-line diagram as referenced in reports, and indicate bus voltage.
f. Include conclusions and recommendations.
2. Short-Circuit Study:
a. For each scenario, identify at each bus location:
1) Calculated maximum available symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents
(both three-phase and line-to-ground where applicable).
2) Fault point X/R ratio.
3) Associated equipment short circuit current ratings.
b. Identify locations where the available fault current exceeds the equipment short
circuit current rating, along with recommendations.
3. Protective Device Coordination Study:
a. For each scenario, include time-current coordination curves plotted on log-log
scale graphs.
b. For each graph include (where applicable):
1) Partial single-line diagram identifying the portion of the system illustrated.
2) Protective Devices: Time-current curves with applicable tolerance bands for
each protective device in series back to the source, plotted up to the
maximum available fault current at the associated bus.
3) Conductors: Damage curves.
4) Transformers: Inrush points and damage curves.
5) Generators: Full load current, overload curves, decrement curves, and short
circuit withstand points.
6) Motors: Full load current, starting curves, and damage curves.
7) Capacitors: Full load current and damage curves.
c. For each protective device, identify fixed and adjustable characteristics with
available ranges and recommended settings.
1) Circuit Breakers: Include long time pickup and delay, short time pickup and
delay, and instantaneous pickup.
2) Include ground fault pickup and delay.
3) Include fuse ratings.
4) Protective Relays: Include current/potential transformer ratios, tap, time dial,
and instantaneous pickup.
d. Identify cases where either full selective coordination or adequate protection is
not achieved, along with recommendations.
4. Arc Flash and Shock Risk Assessment:
a. For the worst case for each scenario, identify at each bus location:
1) Calculated incident energy and associated working distance.
2) Calculated arc flash boundary.
3) Bolted fault current.
4) Arcing fault current.
5) Clearing time.
6) Arc gap distance.
b. For purposes of producing arc flash hazard warning labels, summarize the
maximum incident energy and associated data reflecting the worst case condition
of all scenarios at each bus location.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0573 - 4 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Study Preparer Qualifications: Professional electrical engineer licensed in the State in
which the Project is located and with minimum five years experience in the preparation of
studies of similar type and complexity using specified computer software.
1. Study preparer must be employed by the manufacturer of the electrical distribution
equipment.
2. Study preparer must be employed by field testing agency.
B. Field Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing organization specializing in
testing, analysis, and maintenance of electrical systems with minimum five years
experience; NETA Accredited Company.
C. Computer Software for Study Preparation: Use the latest edition of commercially available
software utilizing specified methodologies.
1. Acceptable Software Products:
a. EasyPower LLC:
b. ETAP/Operation Technology, Inc:
c. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc:

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ARC FLASH HAZARD WARNING LABELS
A. Provide warning labels complying with ANSI Z535.4 to identify arc flash hazards for each
work location analyzed by the arc flash and shock risk assessment.
1. Materials: Comply with Section 26 0553.
2. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment-
specific data as determined by arc flash and shock risk assessment.
a. Include orange header that reads "WARNING".
b. Include the text "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required" or
approved equivalent.
c. Include the following information:
1) Arc flash boundary.
2) Available incident energy and corresponding working distance.
3) Site-specific PPE (personnel protective equipment) requirements.
4) Nominal system voltage.
5) Limited approach boundary.
6) Restricted approach boundary.
7) Equipment identification.
8) Date calculations were performed.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install arc flash warning labels in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide the services of field testing agency or equipment manufacturer's representative to
perform inspection, testing, and adjusting.
C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
D. Adjust equipment and protective devices for compliance with studies and recommended
settings.
E. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from studies. Obtain direction before
proceeding.
F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results, and final adjusted settings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0573 - 5 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Training: Include as part of the base bid training for Owner's personnel on electrical safety
pertaining to arc flash and shock hazards.
1. Use site-specific arc flash and shock risk assessment report as training reference,
supplemented with additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of eight hours of training.
3. Instructor: Representative of entity performing study.
4. Location: At project site.

3.04 ATTACHMENTS
A. Previous studies.
B. Existing drawings.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0573 - 6 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

 SECTION 26 0583
WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
B. Section 26 0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices.
E. Section 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches.
F. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015).
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and
manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.
2. Determine connection locations and requirements.
B. Sequencing:
1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required.
2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing
dimensions, configurations, and construction.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0583 - 1 WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for
equipment.
1. Colors: Comply with NEMA WD 1.
2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified
equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch
circuit overcurrent protection.
B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 2816.16 and in individual equipment
sections.
C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 2726.
D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 0533.13.
E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 0519.
F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 0533.16.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.

3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible
conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for
temperatures encountered.
D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.
E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required.
F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete
equipment wiring requirements.
H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.
I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete
equipment wiring requirements.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0583 - 2 WIRING CONNECTIONS

 SECTION 26 0917
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Programmable controllers.
B. Remote input/output units.
C. Programmer/loader unit.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements; 2000 (Reaffirmed
2015).
B. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Control and Systems: Medium Voltage Controllers Rated 2001 to
7200 Volts AC; 2005 (Reaffirmed 2010).
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (Reaffirmed 2016).
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements, including
layout of completed assemblies, interconnecting cabling, dimensions, weights, and external
power requirements.
C. Product Data: Provide data for each component specified showing electrical characteristics
and connection requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controller cabinets and input and
output devices connected to system. Include interconnection wiring and cabling
information, and terminal block layouts in controller cabinets.
F. Operation Data: Include bound copies of operating and programming instructions.
G. Maintenance Data: Include card replacement, adjustments, and preventative maintenance
procedures and materials.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities
within 100 miles of Project.
C. Supplier Qualifications: Authorized distributor of specified manufacturer with minimum
three years documented experience.
D. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0917 - 1 PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLERS
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in clean, dry area; maintain temperature to NEMA ICS 1.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) and below 104 degrees F (40
degrees C) during and after installation of products.
B. Maintain area free of dirt and dust during and after installation of products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
A. Description: Programmable controller manufactured to NEMA ICS 3 Part 2.
B. Configuration:
1. Processor Unit: Include processor, power supply, random access memory and
input/output modules.
2. Remote Input/Output Unit: Include input/output modules, interface module and power
supply for system inputs and outputs.
D. Programming Instruction Set:
1. Language Characteristics: Ladder diagram.
2. Logic Operations: AND, OR, XOR, NOT.
3. Register Operations: Store, recall.
4. Arithmetic Operations: Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, square root.
5. Process Control: Proportional-Integral-Derivative.
6. Other Functions: Timing; counter; data moving operations.
E. Processor Unit:
1. Memory Size: 16 KB.
2. Storage Registers: 48.
3. Internal Relay Equivalents: 256 retentive; 256 non-retentive.
F. Input/Output Units:
1. Remote Input Output Communications Unit: RS 232.
G. Power Supply: Input voltage of 220 volts, 60 Hz.
H. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 12.
I. Programmer/Loader Unit: Manual graphic display type.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not install products until major construction is complete and building interior is enclosed
and heated.
C. Connect input and output devices as indicated.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Services: Provide the services of the manufacturer's technical representative
to prepare and start systems.
C. Perform operational testing on control systems to verify proper operation and field wiring
connections.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0917 - 2 PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLERS
3.03 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstrate operation and programming of controller.
D. Provide one hours of instruction each for two persons.
1. Conduct instruction at project site with manufacturer's representative.
2. Include travel and living expenses for Owner personnel.

3.04 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements
relating to maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Provide manufacturer's service and maintenance of programmable controllers for one year
from Date of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 0917 - 3 PROGRAMMABLE

CONTROLLERS
 SECTION 26 2300
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low-voltage (600V and less) arc-resistant metal-enclosed drawout switchgear and
accessories for service and distribution applications.
B. Low-voltage power circuit breakers for switchgear.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and
adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
G. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.
1. Includes Utility Company contact information.
H. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards.
I. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.
J. Section 26 2713 - Electricity Metering: For interface with equipment specified in this
section.
K. Section 26 2813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches.
1. Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
L. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C37.50 - American National Standard for Switchgear - Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit
Breakers Used in Enclosures - Test Procedures; 2012.
B. ANSI C37.51 - American National Standard for Switchgear - Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage
AC Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear Assemblies - Conformance Test Procedures; 2003
(R2010), with Amendment 1, 2010.
C. IEEE C37.13 - IEEE Standard for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in
Enclosures; 2015.
D. IEEE C37.16 - IEEE Standard for Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements, and
Application Recommendations for Low-Voltage AC (635 V and below) and DC (3200 V and
below) Power Circuit Breakers; 2009.
E. IEEE C37.17 - IEEE Standard for Trip Systems for Low-Voltage (1000 V and below) AC
and General Purpose (1500 V and below) DC Power Circuit Breakers; 2012.
F. IEEE C37.20.1 - IEEE Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage (1000 Vac and below,
3200 Vdc and below) Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear; 2015.
G. IEEE C37.20.7 - IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated up to 38 kV for
Internal Arcing Faults; 2007 (Corrigendum 2010).
H. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.
I. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 J. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
K. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
M. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
N. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
O. UL 1066 - Low-Voltage AC and DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 1558 - Switchgear; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
4. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional
constraints of the installation.
5. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B. Service Entrance Switchgear:
1. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide switchgear with suitable provisions for
electrical service and utility metering, where applicable.
2. Coordinate with Owner to arrange for Utility Company required access to equipment
for installation and maintenance.
3. See Section 26 2100 for Utility Company contact information and additional
requirements.
4. Obtain Utility Company approval of switchgear prior to fabrication.
5. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section
to review requirements with Utility Company representative.
6. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
switchgear, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and
accessories.
1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device.
2. Arc-Resistant Switchgear: Indicate IEEE C37.20.7 accessibility type, and maximum
fault current and arc duration.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective
device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, short-time current ratings,
conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and
accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchgear and adjacent equipment
with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Include documentation demonstrating selective coordination upon request.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 4. Include key-type mechanical interlock scheme with sequence of operations, as
applicable.
5. Include proposed mimic bus single-line diagram arrangement.
6. Arc-Resistant Switchgear: Include proposed plenum arrangement, where applicable.
7. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Service Entrance Switchgear: Include documentation of Utility Company approval of
switchgear.
F. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in IEEE C37.20.1
as production tests.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
H. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
I. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchgear and final
equipment settings.
J. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
K. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.
3. Circuit Breakers:
a. Electronic Trip Units: Provide one portable test set.
b. Handles Necessary for Racking of Devices: One for each electrical room
containing drawout switchgear.
c. Lifting Yokes: One of each different yoke required, for each electrical room
containing drawout switchgear.
d. Portable Lifting Devices: One for each electrical room containing drawout
switchgear with no integral top rail-mounted lifting device.
e. Removable Covers: One for blocking each different opening size when circuit
breaker is temporarily removed from its compartment.
4. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchgear in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and IEEE C37.20.1.
B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation
(including outdoor switchgear, which is not weatherproof until completely and properly
installed). Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary
power for permanent factory-installed space heaters.
C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to
protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchgear internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Low-Voltage Switchgear - Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. ABB
2. Eaton Corporation
3. Schneider Electric; Square D
4. Alfanar; Terasaki
5. Siemens
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements
and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor
accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,
including any design fees.
D. Source Limitations: Furnish switchgear and associated components produced by the same
manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and
obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

A. Provide switchgear assemblies consisting of all required components, control power
transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Description: Dead-front standard (arc-resistant) type metal-enclosed drawout switchgear
complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51; listed and labeled as complying with UL
1558; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings.
D. Configuration:
1. Compartmentalization: Provide barriered compartments for each overcurrent
protective device, distribution bus, and rear cable connection area.
2. Arrangement: Rear accessible, front and rear aligned.
3. Rear Access: Bolted covers.
E. Arc-Resistance Rating:
1. Passes criteria for arc-resistant functionality when tested in accordance with
applicable requirements of IEEE C37.20.7 for Type 2 accessibility.
2. Arc exhaust gases must be discharged through a plenum into designated area
approved by Engineer
3. Arc resistant rating valid through maximum current of not less than the available fault
current at the installed location.
F. Service Entrance Switchgear:
1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.
2. For solidly-grounded wye systems, provide factory-installed main bonding jumper
between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for
testing purposes.
3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service.
4. Utility Metering Provisions: Provide separate barriered compartment complying with
Utility Company requirements where indicated or where required by Utility Company.
Include hinged sealable door and provisions for Utility Company current transformers
(CTs), potential transformers (PTs), or potential taps as required.
G. Switchgear With Fire Pump Taps: Provide separate bussed vertical section with suitable
lugs for fire pump connection to line side of main service disconnect device(s).
H. Provide integral top rail-mounted lifting device.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 I. Seismic Qualification: Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for
application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where required.
Include certification of compliance with submittals.
J. Service Conditions:
1. Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for operation under the
following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude: Riyadh Altitude
b. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F (-30 degrees C) and 104 degrees
F (40 degrees C).
2. Provide switchgear and associated components suitable for operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
K. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide switchgear with listed short circuit rating not less than the available fault
current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed in
accordance with Section 26 0573.
L. Short-Time Current (30-Cycle Withstand) Rating: Equivalent to specified short circuit
current rating.
M. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required
to achieve selective coordination.
N. Main Devices: Configure for bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
O. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 1558 temperature rise requirements.
1. Main bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchgear.
2. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each
feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.
3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchgear, with a
suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
4. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
5. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
6. Provide insulated main bus (horizontal cross bus) and vertical section bus, with
accommodations for accessible bus joints.
P. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
1. Line Conductor Terminations:
a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper
conductors only.
b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
2. Load Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
b. Lug Type:
1) Provide mechanical lugs.
Q. Enclosures:
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
3. Outdoor Enclosures:
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.
b. Access Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.
R. Future Provisions:
1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,
connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
2. Arrange and equip through bus and ground bus to accommodate future installation of
additional switchgear sections.
S. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective
devices are provided in accordance with Section 26 4300, list switchgear as a complete
assembly including surge protective device.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 5 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 U. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed
and labeled as complying with UL 1053.
1. Provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
V. Arc Flash Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switching: For circuit breakers rated 1200 A or
higher, provide a local accessory switch with status indicator light that permits selection of a
maintenance mode with alternate electronic trip unit settings for reduced fault clearing time.
W. Owner Metering:
1. Provide microprocessor-based digital electrical metering system including all
instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements
specified.
2. Measured Parameters:
a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase.
b. Current (Amps): For each phase and neutral.
c. Frequency (Hz).
d. Real power (kW): For each phase, 3-phase total.
e. Reactive power (kVAR): For each phase, 3-phase total.
f. Apparent power (kVA): For each phase, 3-phase total.
g. Power factor.
h. Real energy (kWh).
i. Reactive energy (kVARh).
j. Apparent energy (kVAh).
k. Current demand.
l. Power demand: Real, reactive, and apparent.
3. Meter Accuracy: Plus/minus 1.0 percent.
4. Features:
a. Communications Capability: Compatible with system indicated. Provide all
accessories necessary for proper interface.
b. KYZ pulse output.
c. Adjustable demand interval.
d. Remote monitoring capability via PC.
X. Instrument Transformers:
1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.
2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.
3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.
4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means.
Y. Mimic Bus: Provide single-line diagram factory-applied to front of switchgear indicating
component connections.

2.03 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, trip-free low-voltage power circuit breakers with two-
step stored energy closing mechanism; 100 percent rated; complying with IEEE C37.13,
IEEE C37.16, IEEE C37.17, and ANSI C37.50; listed and labeled as complying with UL
1066; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Interrupting Capacity: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to
provide the short circuit current rating indicated.
C. Operation:
1. Provide manually operated circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide electrically operated circuit breakers where indicated.
3. Pad-Lock Provision: For preventing circuit breaker closing operation.
D. Construction: Drawout.
1. Allows withdrawal of circuit breaker into test and disconnected positions, with racking
position indication (connected, test, disconnected, withdrawn).
2. Provide safety interlock to prevent racking of circuit breaker while in the ON position.
3. Pad-Lock Provision: For preventing circuit breaker drawout operation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 6 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 E. Fused Circuit Breakers:
1. Fuses: selected for coordination with circuit breaker trip units.
2. Blown Fuse Protection: Provide blown fuse protection to trip circuit breaker in the
event of the opening, or absence, of a fuse and to prevent closing of circuit breaker
until reset operation is performed; provide blown fuse status indication.
3. Where fuse is not integral with circuit breaker and mounted in a separate
compartment, provide interlock to prevent fuse access with the circuit breaker in the
ON position.
F. Trip Units: Solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms sensing.
1. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
a. Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting
dial.
b. Long time delay.
c. Short time pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup.
1) Include instantaneous function for feeder circuit breakers.
2) Omit instantaneous function or provide ability to turn instantaneous function
off for main and tie circuit breakers.
e. Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.
2. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of
communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault
sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay functions for
system coordination purposes.
3. Provide communication capability where indicated: Compatible with system indicated.
G. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to
complete installation:
1. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.
2. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for
indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.
3. Under-voltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined drop in coil
voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance tripping.
4. Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating
when circuit breaker has tripped.
5. Truck-Operated Cell Switch: For indicating circuit breaker racking position.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Factory test switchgear according to IEEE C37.20.1, including the following production tests
on each switchgear assembly or component:
1. Dielectric tests.
2. Mechanical operation tests.
3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test.
4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 7 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the switchgear and associated components are
consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive switchgear.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install switchgear in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and IEEE C37.20.1.
C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including
accommodations for drawout circuit breakers.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
F. Install switchgear plumb and level.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount switchgear on properly sized 4 inch (100 mm) high
concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
I. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.
J. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fused circuit breakers as indicated.
K. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
L. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent
protective device coordination study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.
M. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.
N. Identify switchgear in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's reports with submittals.
C. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.
Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.
D. Before energizing switchgear, perform preoperation checks in accordance with IEEE
C37.20.1.
E. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.
G. Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS,
Section 7.6.1.2 for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are not required, except
for the following:
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
H. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
required by NFPA 70.
1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-
resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.
I. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 8 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 J. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10.
The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to
ground listed as optional are not required.
K. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
L. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchgear assemblies or
associated components.
M. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the period of one
year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and
replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B. Adjust alignment of switchgear covers and doors.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from switchgear enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
switchgear and associated devices.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed switchgear assemblies from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2300 - 9 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

 SECTION 26 2413
SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) switchboards and associated accessories for service and
distribution applications.
B. Overcurrent protective devices for switchboards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and
adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
G. Section 26 2100 - Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance.
H. Section 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear.
I. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.
J. Section 26 2513 - Low-Voltage Busways.
K. Section 26 2713 - Electricity Metering: For interface with equipment specified in this
section.
L. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e (Amended
2017).
B. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.
C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D. NECA 400 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Switchboards; 2007.
E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
F. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards; 2011.
G. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.
H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
L. UL 891 - Switchboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 1 SWITCHBOARDS

 M. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
4. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional
constraints of the installation.
5. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Service Entrance Switchboards:
1. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide switchboards with suitable provisions for
electrical service and utility metering, where applicable.
2. Coordinate with Owner to arrange for Utility Company required access to equipment
for installation and maintenance.
3. Obtain Utility Company approval of switchboard prior to fabrication.
4. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
switchboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components
and accessories.
1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device upon request.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, overcurrent protective
device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations,
conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of switchboards and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
5. Include documentation demonstrating selective coordination upon request.
6. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Service Entrance Switchboards: Include documentation of Utility Company approval of
switchboard.
F. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 2 as
production (routine) tests.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
H. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
I. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of switchboards and final
equipment settings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 2 SWITCHBOARDS

 J. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
K. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.
3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide one portable test set.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, NECA 400, and NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation
(including outdoor switchboards, which are not weatherproof until completely and properly
installed). Where necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary
power for permanent factory-installed space heaters.
C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to
protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and
finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Switchboards:
1. ABB
2. Eaton Corporation
3. Schneider Electric; Square D
4. Alfanar; Terasaki
5. Siemens
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
C. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements
and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor
accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,
including any design fees.
D. Source Limitations: Furnish switchboards and associated components produced by the
same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and
obtained from a single supplier.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 3 SWITCHBOARDS

2.02 SWITCHBOARDS
A. Provide switchboards consisting of all required components, control power transformers,
instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating
system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Description: Dead-front switchboard assemblies complying with NEMA PB 2, and listed
and labeled as complying with UL 891; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on
the drawings.
D. Front-Connected Switchboards:
1. Main Device(s): Individually-mounted.
2. Feeder Devices: Panel/group-mounted.
3. Arrangement: Front accessible only (not rear accessible), rear aligned.
4. Gutter Access: Bolted covers.
E. Rear-Connected Switchboards:
1. Main Device(s): Individually-mounted.
2. Feeder Devices: Individually-mounted.
3. Arrangement: Rear accessible, front and rear aligned.
F. Service Entrance Switchboards:
1. Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.
2. For solidly-grounded wye systems, provide factory-installed main bonding jumper
between neutral and ground busses, and removable neutral disconnecting link for
testing purposes.
3. Comply with Utility Company requirements for electrical service.
4. Utility Metering Provisions: Provide separate barriered compartment complying with
Utility Company requirements where indicated or where required by Utility Company.
Include hinged sealable door and provisions for Utility Company current transformers
(CTs), potential transformers (PTs), or potential taps as required.
5. See Section 26 2100 for additional requirements.
G. Switchboards With Fire Pump Taps: Provide separate bussed vertical section with suitable
lugs for fire pump connection to line side of main service disconnect device(s).
H. Switchboards With Drawout Devices: Provide integral top rail-mounted lifting device
I. Seismic Qualification: Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for
application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where required.
Include certification of compliance with submittals.
J. Service Conditions:
1. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation under the
following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude: not exceeding 2000 m above sea level
b. Ambient Temperature:
1) Switchboards Containing Molded Case or Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:
40 degrees C.
2. Provide switchboards and associated components suitable for operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
K. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide switchboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed in
accordance with Section 26 0573.
2. Minimum Rating: 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
3. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution
according to NFPA 70.
4. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.
L. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required
to achieve selective coordination.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 4 SWITCHBOARDS

 M. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation. Provide separate pull section and/or top-mounted pullbox as indicated or as
required to facilitate installation of incoming feed.
N. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 891 temperature rise requirements.
1. Through bus (horizontal cross bus) to be fully rated through full length of switchboard
(non-tapered). Tapered bus is not permitted.
2. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each
feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.
3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of switchboard, with
a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
4. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
5. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
O. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
1. Line Conductor Terminations:
a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or
copper conductors.
b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
2. Load Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
b. Lug Type:
1) Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
2) Provide compression lugs where indicated.
P. Enclosures:
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1 or Type 2 (drip-proof).
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
3. Enclosure Space Heaters:
a. Provide in each switchboard section installed in unconditioned indoor spaces.
b. Size according to manufacturer's recommendations for worst case ambient
temperature to prevent condensation.
c. Heater Control: Thermostat.
d. Heater Power Source: Provide connection to transformer factory-installed in
switchboard or suitable external branch circuit as indicated or as required.
Q. Future Provisions:
1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,
connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
2. Equip distribution sections with full height vertical bussing to accommodate maximum
utilization of space for devices.
3. Arrange and equip through bus and ground bus to accommodate future installation of
additional switchboard sections.
R. Surge Protective Devices: Where factory-installed, internally mounted surge protective
devices are provided in accordance with Section 26 4300, list switchboards as a complete
assembly including surge protective device.
S. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed
and labeled as complying with UL 1053.
1. Where overcurrent protective devices equipped with integral ground fault protection
are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip
companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence or residual ground fault detection method unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings.
c. Provide zone selective interlocking capability, capable of communicating with
other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault sensing systems to
control ground fault delay functions for system coordination purposes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 5 SWITCHBOARDS

 T. Arc Flash Energy-Reducing Maintenance Switching: For circuit breakers rated 1200 A or
higher, provide a local accessory switch with status indicator light that permits selection of a
maintenance mode with alternate electronic trip unit settings for reduced fault clearing time.
U. Owner Metering:
1. Provide microprocessor-based digital electrical metering system including all
instrument transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements
specified.
2. Measured Parameters:
a. Voltage (Volts AC): Line-to-line, line-to-neutral for each phase.
b. Current (Amps): For each phase and neutral.
c. Frequency (Hz).
d. Real power (kW): For each phase, 3-phase total.
e. Reactive power (kVAR): For each phase, 3-phase total.
f. Apparent power (kVA): For each phase, 3-phase total.
g. Power factor.
h. Real energy (kWh).
i. Reactive energy (kVARh).
j. Apparent energy (kVAh).
k. Current demand.
l. Power demand: Real, reactive, and apparent.
3. Meter Accuracy: Plus/minus 1.0 percent.
4. Features:
a. Communications Capability: Compatible with system indicated. Provide all
accessories necessary for proper interface.
b. KYZ pulse output.
c. Adjustable demand interval.
d. Remote monitoring capability via PC.
V. Instrument Transformers:
1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.
2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.
3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.
4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means.

2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Circuit Breakers:
1. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements.
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with
upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit
current rating indicated.
2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating
circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with
FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features..
1) Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
2) Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.
b. Minimum Interrupting Capacity:
1) 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC.
c. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping
element for short circuit protection.
1) Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit
breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 6 SWITCHBOARDS

 2) Provide interchangeable trip units.
d. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true
rms sensing trip units.
1) Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
(a) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by
setting dial.
(b) Long time delay.
(c) Short time pickup and delay.
(d) Instantaneous pickup.
(e) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is
indicated.
e. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required
to complete installation:
1) Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip
actuator.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Factory test switchboards according to NEMA PB 2, including the following production
(routine) tests on each switchboard assembly or component:
1. Dielectric tests.
2. Mechanical operation tests.
3. Grounding of instrument transformer cases test.
4. Electrical operation and control wiring tests, including polarity and sequence tests.
5. Ground-fault sensing equipment test.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the switchboards and associated components
are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive switchboards.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install switchboards in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 400, and
NEMA PB 2.1.
C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including
accommodations for any drawout devices.
D. Where switchboard is indicated to be mounted with inaccessible side against wall, provide
minimum clearance of 1/2 inch (10 mm) between switchboard and wall.
E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
F. Install switchboards plumb and level.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount switchboards on properly sized 4 inch (100 mm) high
concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
I. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.
J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
K. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent
protective device coordination study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 7 SWITCHBOARDS

 L. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.
M. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in switchboards.
N. Identify switchboards in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's reports with submittals.
C. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.
Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.
D. Before energizing switchboard, perform insulation resistance testing in accordance with
NECA 400 and NEMA PB 2.1.
E. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.1.
G. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
H. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in
NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are
required.
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
I. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
required by NFPA 70.
1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-
resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.
J. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.
K. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10.
The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to
ground listed as optional are not required.
L. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
M. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective switchboards or associated
components.
N. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the period of one
year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and
replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B. Adjust alignment of switchboard covers and doors.

3.06 CLEANING
A. See Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal, for additional
requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 8 SWITCHBOARDS

 B. Clean dirt and debris from switchboard enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
switchboard and associated devices.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed switchboards from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2413 - 9 SWITCHBOARDS

 SECTION 26 2416
PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Power distribution panelboards.
B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and
adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
G. Section 26 2200 - Low-Voltage Transformers: Small power centers with integral primary
breaker, transformer, and panelboard.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e (Amended
2017).
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; 2015.
D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; 2011.
F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; 2013.
G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
N. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
O. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
P. SASO 1269 Electrical installations of buildings: Part 5: Selection and erection of electrical
equipment - Chapter 53: Switchgear and control gear - Section 537: Devices for isolation
and switching.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 1 PANELBOARDS

 Q. SASO 1609 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies - Part 1: Conforming
assemblies

R. SASO 1611 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies - Part 3: Particular
requirements for the assemblies intended to be installed in places where unskilled persons
have access for their use-distribution boards.
S. IEC 60947-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 1: General Rules.
T. IEC 60947-2: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear: Part 2: Circuit Breakers
U. IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosure (IP Code)
V. IEC 60068-2-30: a tropicalization process must undergo for all circuit breakers.
W. IEC 61439-1/-2: Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies - Part 1: Conforming
assemblies

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-
mounted panelboards where indicated.
4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components
and accessories.
1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device upon request.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit
entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of panelboards and adjacent equipment
with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
5. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in NEMA PB 1 as
routine tests.
F. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 2 PANELBOARDS

 H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual
installed circuiting arrangements.
I. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
E. All materials and products shall be new, sound and uniform in quality, size, shape, color
and texture and shall be free from defects. The work shall be carried out in accordance with
this specification, the contract drawings and the standards listed hereunder. The codes and
standards specified herein provide an acceptable level of quality for materials and products.
F. The work shall be carried out in accordance with this specification, the contract drawings
and the standards listed herein. The referenced codes and standards provide an acceptable
level of quality for materials and products.
G. The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the required standards of quality
control as mentioned in relative sections are maintained for the proposed panel boards.
H. If requested by the Engineer, the supplier shall provide proof of application of a quality
procedure complying with standards. This means:
1. Use of a quality manual approved and signed by a management representative,
2. Regular updating of this manual so that it reflects the most recent applicable quality
control procedures
I. The manufacturer must have a sound experience in the field of LV Panel boards for not
less than five years, and should have a presentable reference list of the already supplied
equipment of the same type and same make and that this equipment has been in
satisfactory operation in Kingdom of Saudi Arabia for at least three years.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NECA 407.
B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of
panelboards:
1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F (-5 degrees C) and
104 degrees F (40 degrees C).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 3 PANELBOARDS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1. ABB
2. Eaton Corporation
3. Schneider Electric; Square D
4. Alfanar; Terasaki
5. Siemens
A. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the
same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and
obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B. Seismic Qualification: Provide panelboards and associated components suitable for
application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where required.
Include certification of compliance with submittals.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1. Altitude: Not exceeding 2000m above sea level.
2. Ambient Temperature:
a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: 40 degrees C.
D. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed in
accordance with Section 26 0573.
2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution
according to NFPA 70.
3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.
E. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service
equipment according to UL 869A.
F. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation.
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.
H. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.
1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each
feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection.
2. Provide 200 percent rated neutral bus and lugs where oversized neutral conductors
are provided or where panelboards are fed from K-rated transformers.
3. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug
for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
4. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where isolated grounding conductors
are provided.
I. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
J. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: IP 45.
b. Outdoor Locations: IP 66
2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.
a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.
b. Increase gutter space as required where sub-feed lugs, feed-through lugs, gutter
taps, or oversized lugs are provided.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 4 PANELBOARDS

 c. Provide painted steel boxes for surface-mounted panelboards, finish to match
fronts.
3. Fronts:
a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.
b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal
rough opening.
c. Finish for Painted Steel Fronts: Manufacturer's standard grey unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.
K. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including
bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
L. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed
and labeled as complying with UL 1053.
1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are
used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip
companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings.
M. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required
to achieve selective coordination.

2.03 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type,
circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations
and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Conductor Terminations:
1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors
only.
2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
C. Bussing:
1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
D. Circuit Breakers:
1. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.
E. Enclosures:
1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating
circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS
W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features.
2. Interrupting Capacity:
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
3. Conductor Terminations:
a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide compression lugs where indicated.
c. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element
for short circuit protection.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 5 PANELBOARDS

 a. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker
frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.
5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms
sensing trip units.
a. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
1) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by
setting dial.
2) Long time delay.
3) Short time pickup and delay.
4) Instantaneous pickup.
5) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.
6. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
7. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to
complete installation:
a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip
actuator.
8. Type: Tested to approved standards, totally enclosed, molded case, constructed from
high quality, high temperature resistant, tropicalised, molded insulating materials, for
normal operation at maximum temperature within enclosures at point of application,
and provided with front operated single toggle type handle mechanism for manual
operation of main contacts in addition to automatic operation under over-current
conditions. Multi-pole breakers are to have common integral trip bar for simultaneous
operation of all poles. Ampere rating is to be clearly visible. All terminals are to be box
lug or clamp type with set screws, suitable for copper conductors.
9. Circuit Breaker Trip Units are to have overload protection function through inverse
time delay time-current curve, And short circuit protection function through
Instantaneous or short time delay trip curve.
10. All Moulded-case circuit breakers must be possible to be supplied from up and down
without decreasing MCCB performance or functionality.
11. Moulded case circuit breakers must be of fixed type or withdrawable if specified.
12. The breaking capacity of the breaker mustn’t change by changing the trip unit.
13. Switching Mechanism: Quick-make, quick-break type, with positive trip-free operation
so that contacts cannot be held closed against excess currents under manual or
automatic operation. Contacts are to be non-welding silver alloy with approved arc-
quenching devices of metallic grid construction.
14. Tripped Position: When tripped automatically by over-current condition, operating
mechanism of circuit breaker is to assume an intermediate position clearly indicated
by the handle between on and off positions.
15. Sealing: Circuit breakers with non-interchangeable trip units are to be sealed. Circuit
breakers with interchangeable trip units are to have trip unit covers sealed to prevent
tampering.
16. All MCCB’s must have breaking capacity greater than or equal to the calculated
prospective short circuit level at the point of installation. All MCCB should be
dimensioned according to the Service Short Circuit Breaking Capacity Ics.
17. Circuit breaker ratings are to be 800 volt rated insulation voltage, 690 volt Ac and 500
volt DC rated operational voltage and with frame size and interrupting capacity to IEC
60947-2, and maximum trip rating as shown on the Drawings. Interrupting capacities
at specified voltage and frequency are to meet IEC 60947-2.
18. Accessories: Circuit breakers are to be designed to accommodate standard
attachments including shunt-trip, under-voltage release, combined auxiliary and alarm
switches, and electrical operator to any circuit breaker of rating (frame size) 100 A and
over. Padlocking devices are to be provided.
19. Residual current operated earth leakage trip devices (RCDs) are provided as add-on
or built in earth leakage accessories, where required and as shown on the Drawings.
Protection against earth fault current, in addition to over-current and short-circuit
protection, is to be in accordance with the Regulations. Trip current sensitivity on
breakers for branch circuits is to be [Residual current value] mA, and for main
breakers ratings are to be as shown on the Drawings. Circuit breakers are to include

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 6 PANELBOARDS

 current transformer with tripping coil assembly, test button and trip free mechanism to
ensure circuit breaker cannot be held closed against earth faults.
20. MCCBs must Comply with IEC60947-2 test sequences I, II, with current limiting
characteristics with utilization category A.

B. Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB’s)

1. Type: Thermal magnetic non-adjustable type.
2. All MCB’s must have breaking capacity greater than or equal to the calculated
prospective short circuit level at the point of installation. The selection of the breaking
capacity for MCB must be according to IEC 60898 for residential applications- use of
indoor, pollution and humidity-free conditions: household or similar installations
overcurrent protection by uninstructed people and not being maintained- and ultimate
breaking capacity Icu as per (IEC 60947-2) for industrial and commercial application
where professional operator and maintenance team exist.
3. Construction: MCBs are to be constructed from high quality, high temperature,
thermoplastics housing and 100% halogen free. Guaranteed duties and characteristics
are to be submitted for temperatures above 40 deg C.
4. MCBs and combination devices are to be modular, of unified profile and suitable for
mounting either to a standard din rail, or a plug-in system.
5. Operation: Under overload conditions, thermal tripping is to provide close protection of
insulated conductors. Under short-circuit conditions, magnetic trip is to operate at 7 –
10 times normal rated current (type C characteristic).and for motor loads to be type K
characteristics.
6. Ratings: Preferred rated currents are to be 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32A, 40A, 63A, 80A,
100A & 125A calibrated at 40deg.c, available as 1, 2, 3 and 4-pole circuit breakers.
7. Residual current devices for earth leakage protective circuit breakers are to be add-on
Devices, or built-in and integral with the standard circuit breaker. Non-adjustable
Sensitivities of 30 ma, 100 ma and 300 ma are to be available for all ratings of 2-pole
and 4-Pole circuit breakers.
8. Residual Devices are to be AC type for AC applications and for any application has
rectifier and inverters inside where DC residual current may occur so residual devices
with B-type must be used.
9. Auxiliaries where shown on the drawings, are to include alarm switch, auxiliary switch,
shunt trip, under voltage trip and similar units which are to be modular additions to the
circuit breakers.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components
are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install panelboards in accordance with NECA 407 and NEMA PB 1.1.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 7 PANELBOARDS

 D. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
F. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
G. Install panelboards plumb.
H. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and
rough opening completely covered.
I. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit
breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches (2000 mm) above the floor or working
platform.
J. Mount floor-mounted power distribution panelboards on properly sized 3 inch (80 mm) high
concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
K. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch (27 mm) trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted
panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.
L. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded
equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus.
2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground
bus only. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus.
M. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.
N. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.
O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.
P. Panel board Interiors: Do not install in cabinets until all conduit connections to cabinet have
been completed.
Q. Wiring inside Panel boards: Neatly arranged, accessible and strapped to prevent tension on
circuit breaker terminals. Tap-off connections are to be split and bolted type, fully insulated.

R. Trim: Fix plumb and square prior to painting. Fix trim for flush mounted cabinets flush with
wall surface finish.
S. Protection: Treat concealed surfaces of recessed cabinets with heavy field application of
waterproof compound prior to installation.
T. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 1880 mm above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
U. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panel boards with
fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
V. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panel
board loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
W. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush or Surface Panel boards: Stub four empty conduits
from panel board into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in
the future. Stub four empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are required.
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
D. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
required by NFPA 70.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 8 PANELBOARDS

 1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-
resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is required.
E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.
F. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.
G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
H. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality
control submittals.
I. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated
components.
J. Generally: Carry out all tests, required by the governing codes and by the Engineer, on
panel boards after installation, to verify compliance with the specifications and standards.
Inspect conditions within panel boards and verify insulation conditions by use of a megger.
K. Circuit Breakers: Tests are to include operation of every circuit breaker manually. Check
automatic operation of selected circuit breakers, as required by Engineer, by applying
necessary short-circuit, overload and earth leakage current for tripping circuit breaker as
applicable and compare with manufacturer's data/characteristic curves. Measure and report
ambient temperature inside enclosure.
L. Insulation Check Tests: Carry out insulation tests on all bus bars, between phases and
between phases and earth/cabinet, and between neutral and earth. Record all readings,
using 500 V megger for equipment on 240 V systems, and 1000 V megger for equipment
on systems up to 600 V, for 1-minute, with circuit breakers in open position.
M. Routine tests on site are to be carried out, in accordance with the Standards, on all panel
boards assembled from standardized components of the manufacturer outside the works of
the manufacturer.
N. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each panel board bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
3. Testing: After installing panel boards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment-grounding connections for panel boards with ground continuity to main
Electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque
tightening Values.

3.04 WARRANTY
A. Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor and manufacturer for the period of one
year from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and
replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.
C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between
each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit
directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 9 PANELBOARDS

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2416 - 10 PANELBOARDS

 SECTION 26 2419
MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low-voltage (600 V and less) arc-resistant NEMA motor control centers.
B. Motor control center units:
1. Feeder units.
2. Combination magnetic motor starter units.
C. Overcurrent protective devices for motor control centers and associated units, including
overload relays.
D. Motor control accessories:
1. Auxiliary contacts.
2. Pilot devices.
3. Control and timing relays.
4. Control power transformers.
5. Control terminal blocks.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and
adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
G. Section 26 0917 - Programmable Controllers.
H. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards: For integration into equipment specified in this section,
where indicated.
I. Section 26 2713 - Electricity Metering: For interface with equipment specified in this
section.
J. Section 26 2813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches.
1. Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
K. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers.
L. Section 26 2923 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers.
M. Section 26 3533.16 - Low-Voltage Power Factor Correction Equipment.
N. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e (Amended
2017).
B. IEEE C37.20.7 - IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated up to 38 kV for
Internal Arcing Faults; 2007 (Corrigendum 2010).
C. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.
D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
E. NECA 402 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Motor Control Centers; 2014.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 1 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

 F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
G. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays
Rated 600 Volts; 2000, with Errata (2008).
H. NEMA ICS 2.3 - Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of
Motor Control Centers; 1995 (Reaffirmed 2008).
I. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2017.
J. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (Reaffirmed 2016).
K. NEMA ICS 18 - Motor Control Centers; 2001 (Reaffirmed 2007).
L. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.
M. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
O. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 845 - Motor Control Centers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
S. UL 977 - Fused Power-Circuit Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
T. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate the work to provide motor controllers and associated overload relays
suitable for use with the actual motors to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work to provide motor controllers and associated wiring suitable for
interface with control devices to be installed.
4. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
5. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
6. Coordinate with manufacturer to provide shipping splits suitable for the dimensional
constraints of the installation.
7. Notify Architect the Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for motor
control centers, enclosures, units, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed
components and accessories.
1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device upon request.
2. Arc-Resistant Motor Control Centers: Indicate IEEE C37.20.7 accessibility type, and
maximum fault current and arc duration.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 2 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, bus ampacities, unit arrangement and sizes,
short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and
installed features and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of motor control centers and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
5. Include documentation demonstrating selective coordination upon request.
6. Arc-Resistant Motor Control Centers: Include proposed plenum arrangement, where
applicable.
7. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
F. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of motor control centers and
final equipment settings.
1. Include nameplate data of actual installed motors and associated overload relay
selections and settings.
2. Motor Circuit Protectors: Include magnetic instantaneous trip settings.
H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.
3. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide one portable test set.
4. Indicating Lights: Two of each different type.
5. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store motor control centers in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, NECA 402, and NEMA ICS 2.3.
B. Store in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Where
necessary, provide temporary enclosure space heaters or temporary power for permanent
factory-installed space heaters.
C. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to
protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
D. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 3 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Motor Control Centers - Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. ABB
2. Eaton Corporation
3. Schneider Electric; Square D
4. Alfanar; Terasaki
5. Siemens
B. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements
and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor
accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,
including any design fees.
C. Source Limitations: Furnish motor control centers and associated components produced by
a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

A. Provide motor control centers consisting of all required components, control power
transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Description: Dead-front arc-resistant type motor control center assemblies complying with
NEMA ICS 18, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 845; ratings, configurations and
features.
D. Configuration:
1. Arrangement: Front- and rear-mounted units.
2. NEMA Classification and Wiring Type: NEMA ICS 18, Class I, Type B (B-T for units
size 3 or smaller).
E. Arc-Resistance Rating:
1. Passes criteria for arc-resistant functionality when tested in accordance with
applicable requirements of IEEE C37.20.7 for Type 2 accessibility.
2. Arc exhaust gases must be discharged through a plenum into designated area
approved by Architect.
3. Arc resistant rating valid through maximum current of not less than the available fault
current at the installed location.
F. Seismic Qualification: Provide motor control centers and associated components suitable
for application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where
required. Include certification of compliance with submittals.
G. Service Conditions:
1. Provide motor control centers and associated components suitable for operation under
the following service conditions without derating:
a. Ambient Temperature: Between 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) and 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C).
2. Provide motor control centers and associated components suitable for operation at
indicated ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
H. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide motor control centers and associated units with listed short circuit current
rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as determined by
short circuit study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.
2. Listed series ratings are not acceptable.
3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 4 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

 I. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required
to achieve selective coordination.
J. Main Devices: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the
installation. Provide top-mounted pullbox as indicated or as required to facilitate installation
of incoming feed.
K. Bussing:
1. Horizontal Main Bus: Size for a maximum temperature rise of 117 degrees F (65
degrees C) over an ambient temperature of 104 degrees F (40 degrees C), in
compliance with NEMA ICS 18 and UL 845 requirements.
2. Vertical Bus: Minimum size of 300 A, in compliance with NEMA ICS 18 requirements.
3. Provide fully rated neutral bus through full length of motor control center where neutral
is indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit requiring a neutral
connection.
4. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus through full length of motor control
center, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding
conductor.
5. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.
6. Ground Bus Material: Copper.
L. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
1. Line Conductor Terminations:
a. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper
conductors only.
b. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.
M. Enclosures:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 6.
2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
N. Future Provisions:
1. Prepare designated spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,
connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.
O. Surge Protective Devices: Comply with Section 26 4300.
P. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed
and labeled as complying with UL 1053.
1. Where overcurrent protective devices equipped with integral ground fault protection
are used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip
companion overcurrent protective devices with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence or residual ground fault detection method unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings.
c. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of
communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault
sensing systems to control ground fault delay functions for system coordination
purposes.
Q. Owner Metering: Comply with Section 26 2713.
R. Instrument Transformers:
1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.
2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.
3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.
4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 5 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

2.03 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER UNITS
A. Feeder Units: Circuit breaker type.
B. Combination Magnetic Motor Starter Units:
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination motor controllers with magnetic
contactor(s), externally operable disconnect and overload relay(s).
2. Configuration: Full-voltage non-reversing type unless otherwise indicated.
3. Use of non-standard starter sizes smaller than specified standard NEMA sizes is not
permitted.
4. Disconnects: Circuit breaker type.
a. Circuit Breakers: Motor circuit protectors (magnetic-only) unless otherwise
indicated or required.
b. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the disconnect in the
ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
c. Provide auxiliary interlock for disconnection of external control power sources
where applicable.
5. Overload Relays: Bimetallic thermal type unless otherwise indicated.
6. Pilot Devices Required:
a. Furnish local pilot devices for each unit as specified below unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
C. Variable-Frequency AC Drive Units: Comply with Section 26 2923.
D. Programmable Logic Control (PLC) Units: Comply with Section 26 0917.
E. Distribution Equipment Units: Where incorporation of low-voltage distribution equipment
within motor control center units is indicated, provide suitable components complying with
applicable specified requirements.

2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Overload Relays:
1. Provide overload relays and, where applicable, associated current elements/heaters,
selected according to actual installed motor nameplate data, in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70; include consideration for motor
service factor and ambient temperature correction, where applicable.
2. Inverse-Time Trip Class Rating: Class 20 unless otherwise indicated or required.
3. Trip-free operation.
4. Visible trip indication.
5. Resettable.
a. Employ manual reset unless otherwise indicated.
b. Do not employ automatic reset with two-wire control.
6. Bimetallic Thermal Overload Relays:
a. Interchangeable current elements/heaters.
b. Adjustable trip; plus/minus 10 percent of nominal, minimum.
c. Trip test function.
B. Circuit Breakers:
1. Interrupting Capacity (not applicable to motor circuit protectors):
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements.
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
2. Motor Circuit Protectors:
a. Description: Instantaneous-trip circuit breakers furnished with magnetic
instantaneous tripping elements for short circuit protection, but not with thermal
inverse time tripping elements for overload protection; UL 489 recognized only for
use as part of a listed combination motor controller with overload protection;
ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
b. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 6 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

 3. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating
circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with
FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated
on the drawings.
b. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping
element for short circuit protection.
c. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true
rms sensing trip units.
1) Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
(a) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by
setting dial.
(b) Long time delay.
(c) Short time pickup and delay.
(d) Instantaneous pickup.
(e) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is
indicated.
2) Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of
communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground
fault sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay
functions for system coordination purposes.
d. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:
1) 100 Percent Rated Circuit Breakers: Listed for application within the motor
control center where installed at 100 percent of the continuous current
rating.
2) Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Without using fusible elements, designed
to limit the let-through energy to a value less than the energy of a one-half
cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current when operating within its
current limiting range.

2.05 MOTOR CONTROL ACCESSORIES

A. Auxiliary Contacts:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.
2. Provide number and type of contacts indicated or required to perform necessary
functions, including holding (seal-in) circuit and interlocking, plus one normally open
(NO) and one normally closed (NC) spare contact for each starter unit, minimum.
B. Pilot Devices:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5; heavy-duty type.
2. Pushbuttons: Unless otherwise indicated, provide momentary, non-illuminated type
with flush button operator; normally open or normally closed as indicated or as
required.
3. Selector Switches: Unless otherwise indicated, provide maintained, non-illuminated
type with knob operator; number of switch positions as indicated or as required.
4. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test type unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide LED lamp source for indicating lights and illuminated devices.
C. Control and Timing Relays:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.
2. Provide number and type of relays indicated or required to perform necessary
functions.
D. Control Power Transformers:
1. Include primary and secondary fuses.
E. Control Terminal Blocks: Include 25 percent spare terminals.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 7 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the motor control centers and associated
components are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive motor control centers.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install motor control centers in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA
402, and NEMA ICS 2.3.
C. Arrange equipment to provide required clearances and maintenance access, including
accommodations for any drawout devices.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
F. Install motor control centers plumb and level.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, mount motor control centers on properly sized 4 inch (100 mm)
high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
I. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.
J. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated.
K. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
L. Set field-adjustable motor controllers and associated components according to installed
motor requirements, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.
M. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent
protective device coordination study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.
N. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as indicated.
O. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces.
P. Identify motor control centers in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's reports with submittals.
C. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential testing.
Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs connected.
D. Before energizing motor control center, perform insulation resistance testing in accordance
with NECA 402 and NEMA ICS 2.3.
E. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.2.1.
G. Motor Starters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.1. Tests
listed as optional are not required.
H. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
I. Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in
NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1 for all main circuit breakers. Tests listed as optional are not
required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 8 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

 J. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
required by NFPA 70.
1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-
resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.
K. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.
L. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10.
The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to
ground listed as optional are not required.
M. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
N. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective motor control centers or associated
components.
O. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.
B. Adjust alignment of motor control center covers and doors.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from motor control center enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of motor controllers to Owner, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of motor
control center and associated devices.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed motor control centers from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2419 - 9 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS

 SECTION 26 2713
ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Equipment for Owner electricity metering:
1. Single circuit electricity meters.
2. Multi-circuit electricity meters.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems: Cabinets and enclosures for metering
system components.
D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E. Section 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear: For interface with meters specified in this
section.
F. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards: For interface with meters specified in this section.
G. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards: For interface with meters specified in this section.
H. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers: For interface with meters specified in this
section.
I. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.
1. Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ANSI C12.1 - Electric Meters - Code for Electricity Metering; 2016.
B. ANSI C12.20 - American National Standard for Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy
Classes; 2015.
C. IEC 62053-21 - Electricity Metering Equipment (A.C.) - Particular Requirements - Part 21:
Static Meters for Active Energy (Classes 1 and 2); 2016 (Corrigendum 2018).
D. IEC 62053-22 - Electricity Metering Equipment (A.C.) - Particular Requirements - Part 22:
Static Meters for Active Energy (Classes 0,2 S and 0,5 S); 2016 (Corrigendum 2018).
E. IEC 62053-23 - Electricity Metering Equipment (A.C.) - Particular Requirements - Part 23:
Static Meters for Reactive Energy (Classes 2 and 3); 2016 (Corrigendum 2018).
F. IEEE 1459 - Standard Definitions for the Measurement of Electrical Power Quantities Under
Sinusoidal, Non-sinusoidal, Balanced, or Unbalanced Conditions; 2010.
G. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.
H. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
I. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
J. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate work to provide equipment suitable for interface with electricity metering
systems to be provided.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2713 - 1 ELECTRICITY METERING

 2. Coordinate the work with other installers to provide communication lines required for
electricity metering system interface.
3. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct meeting with facility representative and other related
equipment manufacturers to discuss electricity metering system interface requirements.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
electricity metering systems and associated components and accessories. Include ratings,
configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, service condition requirements, and
installed features.
C. Shop Drawings: Include system interconnection schematic diagrams showing all factory
and field connections. Include requirements for interface with other systems.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of meters and final equipment
settings.
G. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.
3. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, keep dry and protect from damage
until ready for installation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2713 - 2 ELECTRICITY METERING

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements
and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor
accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,
including any design fees.
B. Source Limitations: Furnish electricity meters produced by a single manufacturer and
obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 EQUIPMENT FOR OWNER ELECTRICITY METERING

A. Provide microprocessor-based digital electricity metering systems including all instrument
transformers, wiring, and connections necessary for measurements specified.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Provide electricity metering systems and associated components compatible with the
equipment and associated circuits to be metered.
D. Service Conditions: Provide electricity meters suitable for operation under the service
conditions at the installed location.
E. Enclosures:
1. Where not furnished by manufacturer, provide required cabinets and enclosures in
accordance with Section 26 0533.16.
2. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.
b. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R or Type 4.
3. Provide lockable door(s) for outdoor locations.
4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

F. Instrument Transformers:
1. Comply with IEEE C57.13, where applicable.
2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.
3. Current Transformers: Compatible with connected meters; replace meters damaged
by connection of incompatible current transformers. Provide shorting terminal blocks
for connection of secondaries where applicable.
4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means.
G. Interface with Other Work:
1. Interface with electrical power monitoring system.

2.03 SINGLE CIRCUIT ELECTRICITY METERS

A. Single Circuit Electricity Meter: Series Enhanced Power and Energy Meter with LCD
screen interface; 5-year warranty; utilizes voltage mode CTs that do not require terminal
shorting blocks; compatible with solid-core, split-core, and rope CTs.
1. Accuracy:
a. Real/Active Power/Energy: Revenue grade; plus/minus 0.2 percent, complying
with ANSI C12.20 accuracy and IEC 62053-22, Class 0.2S.
b. Reactive Power/Energy: Plus/minus 2.0 percent, complying with IEC 62053-23,
Class 2.
2. Measured Parameters:
a. Real/active energy (kWh); per phase and total of all phases.
b. Reactive energy (kVARh) and apparent energy (kVAh); total of all phases.
c. Net present demand over a user-specified interval (block or sliding window);
real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA).
d. Maximum (peak) demand intervals; real/active power (kW), reactive power
(kVAR), and apparent power (kVA).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2713 - 3 ELECTRICITY METERING

 e. Real/active power (kW), reactive power (kVAR), and apparent power (kVA); per
phase and total of all phases.
f. Current; per phase and average of all phases.
g. Voltage; line-to-line and line-to-neutral; per phase and average of all phases.
h. Power factor; per phase and average of all phases.
i. Frequency.
3. Models Available with Data Logging: Logs and retains in non-volatile memory up to
5760 measurement records at time intervals determined by Demand Interval duration
setting (up to 60 days of readings at 15 minute intervals).
4. Alarm capability, with configurable set-points.
a. Low power factor.
b. Current over range.
c. Voltage over range.
d. Frequency out of range.
e. Models available with pulse output overrun.
5. Models Available with Pulse Contact Accumulator Input(s): Up to two; user-
configurable to support measurement of other related energy values (gas, water,
steam, etc.) using pulse-output transducers.
6. Outputs:
a. Models Available with Phase Loss Alarm Output: One; user-configurable phase
loss threshold.
b. Models Available with Pulse Output(s): Up to two.
7. Communications: Compatible with connected systems. Provide all accessories
necessary for proper interface.
a. Models available with Serial Communications:
1) RS-485, 2-wire; support for Modbus RTU protocol.
2) RS-485, 2-wire; support for BACnet MS/TP protocol.
3) LON FT, 2-wire; support for LonTalk protocol.

2.04 MULTI-CIRCUIT ELECTRICITY METERS

A. Multi-Circuit Electricity Meter: Series Panelboard Monitoring System; 5-year warranty;
utilizes voltage mode CTs that do not require shorting terminal blocks.
1. Metering Capacity: As indicated or as required for circuits to be monitored
(configurations available for monitoring up to 84 branch circuits, two 3-phase main
devices, and two neutrals with one meter).
2. Accuracy:
a. Real/Active Power/Energy (for models that measure this parameter): Revenue
grade; plus/minus 1.0 percent (including branch CTs); complying with ANSI C12.1
and IEC 62053-21, Class 1.
b. Voltage (for models that measure this parameter): Plus/minus 0.5 percent.
c. Current: Plus/minus 0.5 percent.
3. Measured Parameters at Main Device:
a. Current; per phase and average of all phases.
b. Maximum current; per phase and maximum average of all phases.
c. Current demand; per phase and average of all phases.
d. Maximum current demand; per phase and maximum average of all phases.
e. Models available with measurements for:
1) Current phase angle.
2) Real/active energy (kWh); per phase and total of all phases.
3) Snapshot of total energy as of the completion of the most recent demand
interval; per phase and total of all phases.
4) Real/active power (kW); per phase and total of all phases; available signed
to indicate whether energy is being imported or exported.
5) Apparent power (kVA); per phase and total of all phases.
6) Power factor; per phase and total, based on three-phase breaker rotation,
signed, to indicate leading or lagging current.
7) Voltage, line-to-line and line-to neutral; per phase and average of all phases.
8) Voltage phase angle.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2713 - 4 ELECTRICITY METERING

 9) Frequency; phase A.
4. Measured Parameters at Branch Circuits:
a. Current; per branch and average of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
b. Maximum current; per branch and maximum average of all phases for multi-
phase logical circuits.
c. Current demand; per branch and average of all phases for multi-phase logical
circuits.
d. Maximum current demand; per branch and maximum average of all phases for
multi-phase logical circuits.
e. Models available with measurements for:
1) Current phase angle.
2) Real/active power (kW); per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase
logical circuits; available signed to indicate whether energy is being imported
or exported.
3) Real/active power (kW) demand; per branch and total of all phases for multi-
phase logical circuits.
4) Real/active power (kW) demand maximum; per branch and total of all
phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
5) Real/active energy (kWh); per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase
logical circuits.
6) Snapshot of total energy as of the completion of the most recent demand
interval; per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase logical circuits.
7) Apparent power (kVA); per branch and total of all phases for multi-phase
logical circuits.
8) Power factor; per branch and average of all phases for multi-phase logical
circuits, signed to indicate leading or lagging current.
5. Alarm capability, with configurable set-points.
a. Current over/under range.
b. Models available with voltage over/under range.
6. Communications: Compatible with connected systems. Provide all accessories
necessary for proper interface.
a. Models Available with Serial Communications:
1) RS-485, 2-wire or 4-wire; support for Modbus RTU protocol.
2) RS-485, 2-wire; support for Modbus RTU and BACnet MS/TP protocols.
b. Models Available with Ethernet Communications:
1) Without RJ-45 10/100 Mbit; requires Modbus TCP Gateway; support for
Modbus TCP protocol.
2) With RJ-45 10/100 Mbit; support for Modbus TCP, BACnet IP, and SNMP
protocols.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of metering systems and associated components
are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive meters.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 0529.
D. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
E. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 as required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2713 - 5 ELECTRICITY METERING

 F. Identify meters and associated wiring in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Meters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.11.2.
D. Instrument Transformers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10.
The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings with secondary windings connected to
ground listed as optional are not required.
E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective metering system components.
F. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Program system parameters according to requirements of Owner or by the Owner
representative Electrical Engineer.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed system components from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2713 - 6 ELECTRICITY METERING

 SECTION 26 2726
WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Wall dimmers.
C. Fan speed controllers.
D. Receptacles.
E. Wall plates.
F. Floor box service fittings.
G. Poke-through assemblies.
H. Access floor boxes.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 09 6900 - Access Flooring.
B. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Manufactured
wiring systems for use with access floor boxes with compatible pre-wired connectors.
C. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 0583 - Wiring Connections: Cords and plugs for equipment.
G. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Devices for automatic control of lighting,
including occupancy sensors, in-wall time switches, and in-wall interval timers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; 2017h.
B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification);
2017g.
C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; 2010.
E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; 1999 (Reaffirmed 2015).
F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Specifications; 2016.
G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
L. UL 1310 - Class 2 Power Units; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 1917 - Solid-State Fan Speed Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc.
installed under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of
actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door
swings.
4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face
block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.
5. Coordinate the core drilling of holes for poke-through assemblies with the work
covered under other sections.
6. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents
to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
B. Sequencing:
1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.
2. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include surge current rating, voltage protection rating
(VPR) for each protection mode, and diagnostics information.
C. Samples: One for each type and color of device and wall plate specified.
D. Certificates for Surge Protection Receptacles: Manufacturer's documentation of listing for
compliance with UL 1449.
E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Wall Dimmers: Include information on operation and setting of presets.
2. GFCI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators.
3. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include information on status indicators.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Screwdrivers for Tamper-Resistant Screws: Two for each type of screw.
3. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Two of each type.
4. Extra Surge Protection Receptacles: Two of each type.
5. Extra Wall Plates: One of each style, size, and finish.
6. Extra Flush Floor Service Fittings: Two of each type.
7. Extra Poke-Through Core Hole Closure Plugs: Two for each core size.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES

 E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS
A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served.
B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with
ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit.
C. Provide weather resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for
receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations.
D. Provide tamper resistant receptacles for receptacles installed in dwelling units.
E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed within 6 feet (1.8 m) of sinks.
F. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles installed in kitchens and toilets or any location that
are located on the wet areas.
G. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles serving electric drinking fountains.
H. Provide isolated ground receptacles for receptacles serving computers.
I. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices.
J. For flush floor service fittings, use tile rings for installations in tile floors.
K. For flush floor service fittings, use carpet flanges for installations in carpeted floors.

2.02 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES

A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated.
B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: White with white nylon wall plate.
C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with white nylon wall plate.
D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Gray with galvanized steel wall plate.
E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: White with specified weatherproof
cover.
F. Isolated Ground Convenience Receptacles:
G. Surge Protection Receptacles:

2.03 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:
B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap
switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed
as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the
drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp
for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 220 V with standard toggle
type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw, double pole single
throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.
D. Lighted Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 220 V with illuminated standard
toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load off; single pole
single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on the drawings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES

 E. Pilot Light Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 220 V with red illuminated
standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; illuminated with load on;
single pole single throw, double pole single throw, three way, or four way as indicated on
the drawings.

2.04 WALL DIMMERS

A. Wall Dimmers - General Requirements: Solid-state with continuous full-range even control
following square law dimming curve, integral radio frequency interference filtering, power
failure preset memory, air gap switch accessible without removing wall plate, complying
with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1472; types and
ratings suitable for load controlled as indicated on the drawings.
B. Power Rating, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required to Control the Load Indicated on the
Drawings:

2.05 FAN SPEED CONTROLLERS

A. Description: 220 V AC, solid-state, full-range variable speed, slide control type with
separate on/off switch, with integral radio frequency interference filtering, fan noise
elimination circuitry, power failure preset memory, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA
WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 1917.
1. Current Rating: 1.5 A unless otherwise indicated or required to control the load
indicated on the drawings.

2.06 RECEPTACLES
A. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and
NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596;
types as indicated on the drawings.
1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp
for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw.
2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.
B. GFCI Receptacles:
1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection
and light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as
complying with UL 943, class A.
a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.
C. USB Charging Devices:
1. USB Charging Devices - General Requirements: Listed as complying with UL 1310.
a. Charging Capacity - Two-Port Devices: 2.1 A, minimum.
b. Charging Capacity - Four-Port Devices: 4.2 A, minimum.
2. USB Charging/Tamper Resistant Receptacle Combination Devices: Two-port (Type
A) USB charging device and receptacle, commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A,
220V, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type; rectangular decorator style.
D. Surge Protection Receptacles:
1. Surge Protection Receptacles - General Requirements: Listed and labeled as
complying with UL 1449, Type 2 or 3.
a. Energy Dissipation: Not less than 240 J per mode.
b. Protected Modes: L-N, L-G, N-G.
c. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): Not more than 700 V for L-N, L-G
modes and 1200 V for N-G mode.
d. Diagnostics:
1) Visual Notification: Provide indicator light to report functional status of surge
protection.
2) Audible Notification: Provide switchable audible alarm to report that surge
protection is not functional.
2. Standard Surge Protection Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A,
220V, rectangular decorator style.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 4 WIRING DEVICES

2.07 WALL PLATES
A. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.
1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding
wiring devices.
2. Size: Standard.

2.08 FLOOR BOX SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Description: Service fittings compatible with floor boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16
with components, adapters, and trims required for complete installation.

2.09 ACCESS FLOOR BOXES

A. Description: Metallic multi-service box suitable for mounting in access floor system
specified in Section 09 6900.
B. Access floor boxes with pre-wired connectors for manufactured wiring systems are
permitted only where manufactured wiring systems are permitted as specified in Section 26
0519.
C. Configuration:

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.
E. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly.
F. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
G. Verify that core drilled holes for poke-through assemblies are in proper locations.
H. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations.
I. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship) and, where applicable,
NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of wiring devices provided under this section.
1. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated.
2. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same
location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common
wall plate.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 5 WIRING DEVICES

 3. Locate wall switches on strike side of door with edge of wall plate 3 inches (80 mm)
from edge of door frame. Where locations are indicated otherwise, notify Architect to
obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.
4. Locate receptacles for electric drinking fountains concealed behind drinking fountain
according to manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent
devices exceeds 300 V.
E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long.
Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals.
F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal
and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use
push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding.
G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit
equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.
H. For isolated ground receptacles, connect wiring device grounding terminal only to identified
branch circuit isolated equipment grounding conductor. Do not connect grounding terminal
to outlet box or normal branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
I. Provide GFCI receptacles with integral GFCI protection at each location indicated. Do not
use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices.
J. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.
K. Install wall switches with OFF position down.
L. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging
as instructed by manufacturer.
M. Do not share neutral conductor on branch circuits utilizing wall dimmers.
N. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted
receptacles with grounding pole on left.
O. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely
covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or
improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this
requirement.
P. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices
installed or designated for future use.
Q. Identify wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.
C. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to
verify proper operation.
D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.
E. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's
instructions.
F. Inspect each surge protection receptacle to verify surge protection is active.
G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 6 WIRING DEVICES

 B. Adjust presets for wall dimmers according to manufacturer's instructions as directed by
Engineer.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2726 - 7 WIRING DEVICES

 SECTION 26 2813
FUSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses.
B. Spare fuse cabinet.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
B. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of protective
devices specified in this section.
C. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards: Fusible switches.
D. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards: Fusible switches.
E. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers: Fusible switches.
F. Section 26 2513 - Low-Voltage Busways: Fusible switches.
G. Section 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches.
H. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers: Fusible switches.
I. Section 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors: Additional requirements for photovoltaic fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; 2012.
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
D. UL 248-4 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 4: Class CC Fuses; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
E. UL 248-8 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 8: Class J Fuses; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
F. UL 248-10 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 10: Class L Fuses; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
G. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
H. UL 248-15 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 15: Class T Fuses; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and
nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed.
2. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current
ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves.
1. Spare Fuse Cabinet: Include dimensions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2813 - 1 FUSES

 C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed.
3. Fuse Pullers: One set(s) compatible with each type and size installed.
4. Spare Fuse Cabinet Keys: Two.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FUSES
A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as
required for a complete operating system.
C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch.
D. Comply with UL 248-1.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class
and ratings as indicated.
F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.

2.02 SPARE FUSE CABINET

A. Description: Wall-mounted sheet metal cabinet with shelves and hinged door with cylinder
lock, suitably sized to store spare fuses and fuse pullers specified.
B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey finish unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's
recommendations and nameplate data for equipment.
B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive spare fuse cabinet.
C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized.
B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
C. Identify spare fuse cabinet in accordance with Section 26 0553.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2813 - 2 FUSES

 SECTION 26 2816.13
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed circuit breakers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and
adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; 2013e (Amended
2017).
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
H. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 1053 - Ground-Fault Sensing and Relaying Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment,
or other potential obstructions within dedicated equipment spaces and within working
clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-
mounted enclosed circuit breakers where indicated.
4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.13 - 1 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS
 5. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for circuit
breakers, enclosures, and other installed components and accessories.
1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of circuit breaker upon
request.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,
short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and
installed features and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed circuit breakers and
adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
5. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of enclosed circuit breakers.
H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
enclosed circuit breaker internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature between 23 degrees F (-5 degrees C) and 104 degrees F (40
degrees C) during and after installation of enclosed circuit breakers.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.13 - 2 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB
B. Eaton Corporation
C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products;
D. Siemens
E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed circuit breakers and associated components
produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for
this project and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Units consisting of molded case circuit breakers individually mounted in
enclosures.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Seismic Qualification: Provide enclosed circuit breakers and associated components
suitable for application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where
required. Include certification of compliance with submittals.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1. Ambient Temperature: Between 23 degrees F (-5 degrees C) and 104 degrees F (40
degrees C).
E. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide enclosed circuit breakers with listed short circuit current rating not less than
the available fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study
performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.
2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution
according to NFPA 70.
3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.
F. Enclosed Circuit Breakers Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for
use as service equipment according to UL 869A.
G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
H. Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers.
I. Provide electronic trip circuit breakers.
J. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection
is required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor.
K. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed circuit breaker, with a
suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
L. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
2. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.
M. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
N. Ground Fault Protection: Where ground-fault protection is indicated, provide system listed
and labeled as complying with UL 1053.
1. Where electronic circuit breakers equipped with integral ground fault protection are
used, provide separate neutral current sensor where applicable.
2. Where accessory ground fault sensing and relaying equipment is used, equip
companion circuit breakers with ground-fault shunt trips.
a. Use zero sequence ground fault detection method unless otherwise indicated.
b. Provide test panel and field-adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay settings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.13 - 3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS
 c. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of
communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault
sensing systems to control ground fault delay functions for system coordination
purposes.
O. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required
to achieve selective coordination.

2.03 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit
breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375
where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
B. Interrupting Capacity:
1. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than:
2. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than
the short circuit current rating indicated.
3. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream
devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating
indicated.
C. Conductor Terminations:
1. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide compression lugs where indicated.
3. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
D. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping
element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short
circuit protection.
1. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit breaker frame
sizes 225 amperes and larger.
2. Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated.
E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true rms
sensing trip units.
1. Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
a. Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by setting
dial.
b. Long time delay.
c. Short time pickup and delay.
d. Instantaneous pickup.
e. Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is indicated.
2. Provide zone selective interlocking capability where indicated, capable of
communicating with other electronic trip circuit breakers and external ground fault
sensing systems to control short time delay and ground fault delay functions for
system coordination purposes.
3. Provide communication capability where indicated: Compatible with system indicated.
F. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.
G. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated:
1. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL
943, class A for protection of personnel.
2. Ground Fault Equipment Protection Circuit Breakers: Designed to trip at 30 mA for
protection of equipment.
3. Current Limiting Circuit Breakers: Without using fusible elements, designed to limit the
let-through energy to a value less than the energy of a one-half cycle wave of the
symmetrical prospective current when operating within its current limiting range.
H. Provide listed switching duty rated circuit breakers with SWD marking for all branch circuits
serving fluorescent lighting.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.13 - 4 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS
 I. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to
complete installation:
1. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.
2. Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for
indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.
3. Undervoltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined drop in coil
voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance tripping.
4. Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for indicating
when circuit breaker has tripped.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed circuit breakers are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed circuit breakers.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
F. Install enclosed circuit breakers plumb.
G. Install flush-mounted enclosed circuit breakers so that trims fit completely flush to wall with
no gaps and rough opening completely covered.
H. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount
enclosed circuit breakers such that the highest position of the operating handle does not
exceed 79 inches (2000 mm) above the floor or working platform.
I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
K. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent
protective device coordination study performed according to Section 26 0573.
L. Set field-adjustable ground fault protection pickup and time delay settings as directed.
M. Identify enclosed circuit breakers in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NETA ATS, except
Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1. Tests listed as required.
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
D. Ground Fault Protection Systems: Test in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as
required by NFPA 70.
1. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.14. The insulation-
resistance test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.13 - 5 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS
 E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.
F. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.
G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed circuit breakers.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from circuit breaker enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.13 - 6 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT

BREAKERS
 SECTION 26 2816.16
ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed safety switches.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of equipment
and associated protective devices specified in this section.
F. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.
G. Section 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers: Manual motor controllers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
C. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
G. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
H. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
4. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.16 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings,
short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and
installed features and accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed switches and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches.
H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperature between -22 degrees F (-30 degrees C) and 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C) during and after installation of enclosed switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB
B. Eaton Corporation
C. Schneider Electric
D. Siemens Industry

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.16 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

 E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed switches and associated components produced by
the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project
and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as
complying with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Seismic Qualification: Provide enclosed safety switches suitable for application under the
seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where required. Include certification of
compliance with submittals.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the
following service conditions:
1. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F (-30 degrees C) and 104 degrees F (40
degrees C).
E. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.
F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage.
G. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side
overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not
less than the available fault current at the installed location as determined by short
circuit study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.
H. Enclosed Safety Switches Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for
use as service equipment according to UL 869A.
I. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open.
J. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
K. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a
suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor.
L. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL
50E.
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250
2. Finish for Painted Steel Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied grey
unless otherwise indicated.
M. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with
capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
N. Heavy Duty Switches:
1. Comply with NEMA KS 1.
2. Conductor Terminations:
a. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.
3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position,
capable of accepting three padlocks.
a. Provide means for locking handle in the ON position.
O. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to
complete installation:

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated
requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.16 - 3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

 C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Install enclosed switches plumb.
F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount
enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed
79 inches (2000 mm) above the floor or working platform.
G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated or as
required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
J. Identify enclosed switches in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or
associated components.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's
instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2816.16 - 4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

 SECTION 26 2913
ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Enclosed NEMA controllers for low-voltage (600 V and less) applications:
1. Magnetic motor starters.
2. General purpose contactors.
3. Manual motor starters.
4. Motor-starting switches without overload protection.
B. Overcurrent protective devices for motor controllers, including overload relays.
C. Control accessories:
1. Auxiliary contacts.
2. Pilot devices.
3. Control and timing relays.
4. Control power transformers.
5. Control terminal blocks.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection and
adjustment of equipment and associated protective devices specified in this section.
F. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.
G. Section 26 2813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches.
1. Includes requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.
H. Section 26 2923 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers; 2016.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
D. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays
Rated 600 Volts; 2000, with Errata (2008).
E. NEMA ICS 5 - Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices; 2017.
F. NEMA ICS 6 - Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures; 1993 (Reaffirmed 2016).
G. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); 2013.
H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
J. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
K. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 1 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 L. UL 60947-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 1: General Rules; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 60947-4-1 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors and Motor-
starters - Electromechanical Contactors and Motor-starters; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate the work to provide motor controllers and associated overload relays
suitable for use with the actual motors to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work to provide controllers and associated wiring suitable for interface
with control devices to be installed.
4. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
5. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the
conductors to be installed.
6. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract
Documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for motor
controllers, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and
accessories.
1. Include characteristic trip curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective
device upon request.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, voltage, controller sizes, short circuit current ratings,
conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and
accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed controllers and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where
acceptable, series rated systems.
4. Include documentation of listed series ratings upon request.
5. Include documentation demonstrating selective coordination upon request.
6. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
F. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
G. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of controllers and final
equipment settings.
1. Include nameplate data of actual installed motors and associated overload relay
selections and settings.
2. Motor Circuit Protectors: Include magnetic instantaneous trip settings.
H. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
I. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Provide one portable test set.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 2 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 3. Indicating Lights: Two of each different type.
4. See Section 26 2813 for requirements for spare fuses and spare fuse cabinets.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure, and finish.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within required service conditions during and after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ABB
B. Eaton Corporation
C. Schneider Electric
D. Siemens Industry
E. Source Limitations: Furnish enclosed motor controllers and associated components
produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

A. Provide enclosed controller assemblies consisting of all required components, control
power transformers, instrumentation and control wiring, accessories, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Description: Enclosed controllers complying with NEMA ICS 2, and listed and labeled as
complying with UL 60947-1 and UL 60947-4-1; ratings, configurations and features as
indicated on the drawings.
D. Seismic Qualification: Provide panelboards and associated components suitable for
application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where required.
Include certification of compliance with submittals.
E. Service Conditions:
1. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation under the
following service conditions without derating:
a. Altitude:
1) Class 1 Km Equipment (devices utilizing power semiconductors, e.g.
variable frequency controllers): Less than 3,300 feet (1,000 m).
2) Class 2 Km Equipment (electromagnetic and manual devices): Less than
6,600 feet (2,000 m).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 3 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 b. Ambient Temperature: Between 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) and 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C).
2. Provide controllers and associated components suitable for operation at indicated
ratings under the service conditions at the installed location.
F. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Provide controllers with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available
fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed in
accordance with Section 26 0573.
2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution
according to NFPA 70.
3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70.
G. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required
to achieve selective coordination.
H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.
I. Enclosures:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 6.
2. Environment Type per NEMA 250.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
J. Instrument Transformers:
1. Comply with IEEE C57.13.
2. Select suitable ratio, burden, and accuracy as required for connected devices.
3. Current Transformers: Connect secondaries to shorting terminal blocks.
4. Potential Transformers: Include primary and secondary fuses with disconnecting
means.
K. Magnetic Motor Starters: Combination type unless otherwise indicated.
1. Combination Magnetic Motor Starters: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination motor
controllers with magnetic contactor(s), externally operable disconnect and overload
relay(s).
2. Configuration: Full-voltage non-reversing unless otherwise indicated.
3. Use of non-standard starter sizes smaller than specified standard NEMA sizes is not
permitted.
4. Disconnects: Circuit breaker type.
a. Circuit Breakers: Motor circuit protectors (magnetic-only) unless otherwise
indicated or required.
b. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the disconnect in the
ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
c. Provide auxiliary interlock for disconnection of external control power sources
where applicable.
5. Overload Relays: Bimetallic thermal type unless otherwise indicated.
6. Pilot Devices Required:
a. Furnish local pilot devices for each unit as specified below unless otherwise
indicated on drawings.
L. General Purpose Contactors: Combination type unless otherwise indicated.
1. Combination Contactors: NEMA ICS 2, Class A combination controllers with magnetic
contactor(s) and externally operable disconnect, but without integral overload relay(s).
2. Configuration: Full-voltage non-reversing unless otherwise indicated.
3. Disconnects: Circuit breaker type.
a. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic unless otherwise indicated or required.
b. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position.
Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the disconnect in the
ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes.
c. Provide auxiliary interlock for disconnection of external control power sources
where applicable.
M. Manual Motor Starters:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 4 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A manually-operated motor controllers with overload
relay(s).
N. Motor-Starting Switches: Horsepower-rated switches without overload protection; toggle
operator.
2.03 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Overload Relays:
1. Provide overload relays and, where applicable, associated current elements/heaters,
selected according to actual installed motor nameplate data, in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70; include consideration for motor
service factor and ambient temperature correction, where applicable.
2. Inverse-Time Trip Class Rating: Class 20 unless otherwise indicated or required.
3. Trip-free operation.
4. Visible trip indication.
5. Resettable.
a. Employ manual reset unless otherwise indicated.
b. Do not employ automatic reset with two-wire control.
6. Bimetallic Thermal Overload Relays:
a. Interchangeable current elements/heaters.
b. Adjustable trip; plus/minus 10 percent of nominal, minimum.
c. Trip test function.
d. Provide isolated alarm contact
7. Melting Alloy Thermal Overload Relays:
a. Interchangeable current elements/heaters.
b. Provide isolated alarm contact
8. Solid-State Overload Relays:
a. Adjustable full load current.
b. Phase loss protection.
c. Phase imbalance protection.
d. Ground fault protection.
e. Ambient temperature insensitive.
f. Thermal memory.
g. Repeat Trip Accuracy: Plus/minus 2 percent, minimum.
h. Trip test function.
i. Provide isolated alarm contact.
B. Fusible Disconnect Switches:
1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, dead-front fusible switch units complying with
NEMA KS 1, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; ratings, configurations,
and features as indicated on the drawings.
2. Fuse Clips: As required to accept indicated fuses.
3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position. Provide
means for locking switch cover in the closed position. Provide safety interlock to
prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of
overriding interlock for testing purposes.
C. Circuit Breakers:
1. Interrupting Capacity (not applicable to motor circuit protectors):
a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short
circuit current rating indicated, but not less than specified minimum requirements.
b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less
than the short circuit current rating indicated.
c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with
upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit
current rating indicated.
2. Motor Circuit Protectors:
a. Description: Instantaneous-trip circuit breakers furnished with magnetic
instantaneous tripping elements for short circuit protection, but not with thermal
inverse time tripping elements for overload protection; UL 489 recognized only for

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 5 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 use as part of a listed combination motor controller with overload protection;
ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
b. Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting.
c. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required
to complete installation:
1) Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip
actuator.
2) Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position.
3) Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated
for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.
4) Under-voltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined
drop in coil voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance
tripping.
5) Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for
indicating when circuit breaker has tripped.
3. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:
a. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating
circuit breakers; listed and labeled as complying with UL 489; ratings,
configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.
1) Provide thermal magnetic circuit breakers unless otherwise indicated.
2) Provide electronic trip circuit breakers where indicated.
b. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time
tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping
element for short circuit protection.
1) Provide field-adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip setting for circuit
breaker frame sizes 225 amperes and larger.
2) Provide interchangeable trip units where indicated.
c. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Furnish solid state, microprocessor-based, true
rms sensing trip units.
1) Provide the following field-adjustable trip response settings:
(a) Long time pickup, adjustable by replacing interchangeable trip unit or by
setting dial.
(b) Long time delay.
(c) Short time pickup and delay.
(d) Instantaneous pickup.
(e) Ground fault pickup and delay where ground fault protection is
indicated.
d. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required
to complete installation:
1) Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip
actuator.
2) Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position.
3) Auxiliary Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated
for indicating when circuit breaker has tripped or been turned off.
4) Undervoltage Release: For tripping circuit breaker upon predetermined drop
in coil voltage with field-adjustable time delay to prevent nuisance tripping.
5) Alarm Switch: SPDT switch suitable for connection to system indicated for
indicating when circuit breaker has tripped.

2.04 CONTROL ACCESSORIES

A. Auxiliary Contacts:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.
2. Provide number and type of contacts indicated or required to perform necessary
functions, including holding (seal-in) circuit and interlocking, plus one normally open
(NO) and one normally closed (NC) spare contact for each magnetic motor starter,
minimum.
B. Pilot Devices:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5; heavy-duty type.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 6 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 2. Pushbuttons: Unless otherwise indicated, provide momentary, non-illuminated type
with flush button operator; normally open or normally closed as indicated or as
required.
3. Selector Switches: Unless otherwise indicated, provide maintained, non-illuminated
type with knob operator; number of switch positions as indicated or as required.
4. Indicating Lights: Push-to-test type unless otherwise indicated.
5. Provide LED lamp source for indicating lights and illuminated devices.
C. Control and Timing Relays:
1. Comply with NEMA ICS 5.
2. Provide number and type of relays indicated or required to perform necessary
functions.
3. Timing Relays: Electronic or pneumatic as indicated.
a. Adjustable Timing Range: As required for application.
4. Multi-Speed Motor Starters: Employ accelerating relays, decelerating relays, and
compelling relays where indicated.
5. Accelerating Relays: Starts motor at low speed and then accelerates automatically
through definite time intervals for each successive speed until selected speed is
attained.
6. Decelerating Relays: Allows motor to decelerate automatically through definite time
intervals for each successive speed until selected speed is attained.
7. Compelling Relays: Requires motor to start at low speed before a higher speed can
be selected.
D. Control Power Transformers:
1. Size to accommodate burden of contactor coil(s) and all connected auxiliary devices.
2. Include primary and secondary fuses.
E. Control Terminal Blocks: Include 25 percent spare terminals.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that ratings of enclosed controllers are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed controllers.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install controllers in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
F. Install enclosed controllers plumb and level.
G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
H. Install all field-installed devices, components, and accessories.
I. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 for fusible switches as indicated.
J. Where accessories are not self-powered, provide control power source as indicated or as
required to complete installation.
K. Set field-adjustable controllers and associated components according to installed motor
requirements, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and NFPA 70.
L. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker tripping function settings as determined by overcurrent
protective device coordination study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 7 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 M. Identify enclosed controllers in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's reports with submittals.
C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
D. Motor Starters: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.16.1.1. Tests
listed are required.
1. Verify motor-running protection.
2. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
E. Fusible Switches: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1.
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section
7.6.1.1. Tests listed as optional are not required.
1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground.
2. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection.
G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed controllers or associated
components.
H. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended
torque settings.

3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from controller enclosures and components according to
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of controllers to Owner, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of enclosed
controllers and associated devices.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed enclosed controllers from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2913 - 8 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

 SECTION 26 2923
VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Variable frequency controllers.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
1. Includes requirements for the seismic qualification of equipment specified in this
section.
C. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
D. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation,
and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems; 2014.
B. NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems: Adjustable-Speed Drives; 2014.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and
enclosure details.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions and
weights shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; and nameplate legends.
1. Identify mounting conditions required for equipment seismic qualification.
D. Manufacturer's equipment seismic qualification certification.
E. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,
preparation, and installation of product.
G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate start-up inspection findings.
H. Operation Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include instructions for starting and operating controllers,
and describe operating limits that may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
I. Maintenance Data: NEMA ICS 7.1. Include routine preventive maintenance schedule.
J. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Air Filters: Two of each type.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2923 - 1 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY

MOTOR CONTROLLERS
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities
within 100 miles (160 km) of Project.
C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements
and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor
accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,
including any design fees.
B. Source Limitations: Furnish variable frequency motor controllers and associated
components produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 DESCRIPTION
A. Variable Frequency Controllers: Enclosed controllers suitable for operating the indicated
loads, in compliance with requirements of NEMA ICS 7. Select unspecified features and
options in accordance with NEMA ICS 3.1.
B. Seismic Qualification: Provide variable frequency controllers and associated components
suitable for application under the seismic design criteria specified in Section 26 0548 where
required. Include certification of compliance with submittals.
C. Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, suitable for equipment application in places regularly open
to the public.

2.03 OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

A. Rated Input Voltage: 400 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz.
B. Motor Nameplate Voltage: 400 volts, three phase, 60 Hertz.
C. Displacement Power Factor: Between 1.0 and 0.95, lagging, over entire range of operating
speed and load.
D. Operating Ambient: 0 degrees C to 40 degrees C.

2.04 COMPONENTS
A. Display: Provide integral digital display to indicate output voltage, output frequency, and
output current.
B. Status Indicators: Separate indicators for overcurrent, overvoltage, ground fault,
overtemperature, and input power ON.
C. Furnish HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC selector switch and manual speed control.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2923 - 2 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY

MOTOR CONTROLLERS
 D. Include undervoltage release.
E. Control Power Source: Separate circuit.
F. Door Interlocks: Furnish mechanical means to prevent opening of equipment with power
connected, or to disconnect power if door is opened; include means for defeating interlock
by qualified persons.
G. Safety Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to inhibit starting under both manual
and automatic mode.
H. Control Interlocks: Furnish terminals for remote contact to allow starting in automatic mode.
I. Manual Bypass: Furnish contactor, motor running overload protection, and short circuit
protection for full voltage, non-reversing operation of the motor. Include isolation switch to
allow maintenance of inverter during bypass operation.
J. Emergency Stop: Use dynamic brakes for emergency stop function.
K. Disconnecting Means: Include integral circuit breaker on the line side of each controller.
L. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Shop inspect and perform standard productions tests for each controller.
B. Make completed controller available for inspection at manufacturer's factory prior to
packaging for shipment. Notify Owner at least 7 days before inspection is allowed.
C. Allow witnessing of factory inspections and tests at manufacturer's test facility. Notify
Owner at least 7 days before inspections and tests are scheduled.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surface is suitable for controller installation.
B. Do not install controller until building environment can be maintained within the service
conditions required by the manufacturer.
C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 7.1 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
C. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
D. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
E. Provide fuses in fusible switches; refer to Section 26 2813 for product requirements.
F. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
G. Identify variable frequency controllers in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Provide the service of the manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start
controllers.
B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.17. The insulation-resistance
test on control wiring listed as optional is not required.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2923 - 3 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY

MOTOR CONTROLLERS
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Make final adjustments to installed controller to assure proper operation of load system.
Obtain performance requirements from installer of driven loads.
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. Demonstrate operation of controllers in automatic and manual modes.
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.
C. Provide service and maintenance of controllers for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 2923 - 4 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY

MOTOR CONTROLLERS
 SECTION 26 3100
PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Photovoltaic system requirements.
B. Photovoltaic modules.
C. Photovoltaic module mounting system.
D. Photovoltaic combiner boxes.
E. Photovoltaic inverters.
F. Charge controllers.
G. Monitoring system.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Materials and installation requirements for
concrete foundations.
B. Section 25 3613 - Integrated Automation Power Meters: Smart (AMI and AMR) Meters.
C. Section 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
D. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
F. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
G. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
H. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.
I. Section 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches.
J. Section 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEC 61215-1 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type
Approval - Part 1: Test Requirements; 2016.
B. IEC 61215-1-1 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type
Approval - Part 1-1: Special Requirements for Testing of Crystalline Silicon Photovoltaic
(PV) Modules; 2016.
C. IEC 61215-1-2 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type
Approval - Part 1-2: Special Requirements for Testing of Thin-Film Cadmium Telluride
(CDTE) Based Photovoltaic (PV) Modules; 2016.
D. IEC 61215-1-3 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type
Approval - Part 1-3: Special Requirements for Testing of Thin-Film Amorphous Silicon
Based Photovoltaic (PV) Modules; 2016.
E. IEC 61215-1-4 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type
Approval - Part 1-4: Special Requirements for Testing of Thin-Film Cu(In,GA)(S,Se)2 Based
Photovoltaic (PV) Modules; 2016.
F. IEC 61215-2 - Terrestrial Photovoltaic (PV) Modules - Design Qualification and Type
Approval - Part 2: Test Procedures; 2016 (Corrigendum 2018).
G. IEEE 1547 - IEEE Standard for Interconnection and Interoperability of Distributed Energy
Resources with Associated Electric Power Systems Interfaces; 2018.
H. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 1 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 I. NECA 412 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Photovoltaic (PV) Power Systems;
2012.
J. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. UL 489B - Outline of Investigation for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case
Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures for Use with Photovoltaic (PV) Systems; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
N. UL 1699B - Outline of Investigation for Photovoltaic (PV) DC Arc-Fault Circuit Protection;
Current Edition; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 1703 - Flat Plate Photovoltaic Modules and Panels; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
P. UL 1741 - Inverters, Converters, Controllers and Interconnection System Equipment for Use
With Distributed Energy Resources; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 2579 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Fuses for Photovoltaic Systems; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
R. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment or other potential obstructions within the spaces dedicated for photovoltaic
system components.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Roof-Mounted Arrays: Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof
penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof
warranty.
4. Notify Architect of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents. Obtain
direction before proceeding with work.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section;
require attendance of all affected installers. Include adequate instruction on the electrical
hazards associated with photovoltaic systems and appropriate safety procedures to be
followed.
C. Utility Interconnection:
1. Prepare and submit documentation as required for securing utility interconnection
agreement between Owner and Utility Company.
a. Include copies of documentation with submittals.
2. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section
to review interconnection requirements and details with Utility Company
representative.
3. Coordinate with Utility Company to provide utility metering suitable for system
requirements.
a. See Section 25 3613 for Utility Company-coordinated smart type metering.
4. Arrange for inspections and secure permits necessary to obtain Utility Company
approval of system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Design Documents: Prepare and submit all information required for plan review and
permitting by authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to floor plans, riser
diagrams, details, and description of operation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 2 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each
product. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, outline and support point
dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features.
D. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations of
system components, required clearances, attachment locations and details, and proposed
size, type, and routing of conduits and cables. Include system interconnection schematic
diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
1. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.
E. Design Data:
1. Include structural calculations, certified by structural engineer, for equipment and
mounting system.
2. Include electrical calculations for array and associated equipment other than the basis
of design products and configuration.
F. Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.
G. Certify that work of this section does not void roof warranty.
H. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.
I. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.
J. Manufacturer's detailed startup procedures.
K. Utility interconnection documentation.
L. Source quality control test reports.
M. Field quality control test reports.
1. Include manufacturer's field reports.
N. Structural Designer's Qualification Statement.
O. Electrical Designer's Qualification Statement.
P. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
Q. Installer's Qualification Statement.
R. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on system operation,
equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended maintenance
procedures and intervals.
1. Include contact information for entity that will be providing contract maintenance and
trouble call-back service.
S. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed
warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
T. Maintenance contracts.
U. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of system components, installed
circuiting arrangements and routing, and final equipment settings.
V. Software: two copy of software provided under this section.
W. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Photovoltaic Modules: Two.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Comply with Utility Company requirements for interconnection.
C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
D. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 3 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 E. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience with photovoltaic systems of similar size, type,
and complexity.
1. Manufacturer's authorized installer.
F. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Same entity as installer or different entity with
specified qualifications.
1. Contract maintenance office located within 50 miles (80 km) of project site.
G. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging, keep dry and protect from damage
until ready for installation.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Specified warranties indicate minimum requirements. Provide additional warranties or
extended warranty periods where required to qualify for rebate and incentive programs.
C. Photovoltaic Modules:
1. Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or replacement due
to defective materials or workmanship.
D. Photovoltaic Module Mounting System: Provide minimum 10 year manufacturer warranty
covering repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.
E. Photovoltaic Combiner Boxes: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering
repair or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.
F. Photovoltaic Inverters: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or
replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.
G. Charge Controllers: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or
replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: For each type of component, furnish products produced by a single
manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide complete photovoltaic system consisting of photovoltaic modules and associated
balance of system components necessary for connection to facility electrical system.
B. System Description:
C. Provide photovoltaic system and associated components suitable for wind loads, snow
loads, seismic loads, and other structural design considerations of the installed location.
D. Provide photovoltaic system and associated components suitable for continuous operation
under the service conditions at the installed location.
E. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc.
as necessary for a complete operating system.
G. DC Arc Fault Circuit Protection: Provide DC photovoltaic arc-fault protection devices listed
as complying with UL 1699B as required for compliance with NFPA 70.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 4 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 H. Rapid Shutdown of Photovoltaic Systems on Buildings: Provide listed equipment arranged
to provide rapid shutdown in accordance with NFPA 70.
I. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
J. Arrange array to provide adequate access to rear of string(s) for maintenance.
K. Arrange array to minimize shading during peak production periods.
L. Roof-Mounted Arrays:
1. Arrange array such that normal roof drainage is not affected.
2. Arrange array to maintain required safety clearances from edges of roof as indicated.
3. Arrange array to maintain access and clearance requirements for other roof-mounted
equipment.
4. Arrange array to avoid spanning of expansion joints.

2.03 PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULES

A. General Requirements:
1. Photovoltaic Modules: Factory assembled; consisting of photovoltaic cells, frame,
junction box, cables for series connection, and bypass diodes for shade tolerance;
rated for 600 V DC; complying with IEC 61215-1 and IEC 61215-2 and listed as
complying with UL 1703.
2. Crystalline Silicon Photovoltaic Modules: Comply with IEC 61215-1-1.
3. Thin Film Photovoltaic Modules: Comply with IEC 61215-1-2, IEC 61215-1-3, or IEC
61215-1-4 as applicable.
4. Frame: Anodized aluminum.
5. Factory-Installed Junction Box: Weatherproof, with factory-installed terminals and
bypass diodes.
6. Factory-Installed Cables: Type USE-2 or listed photovoltaic (PV) wire with polarized
locking connectors.
7. Unless otherwise indicated, specified module performance characteristics are rated
under Standard Test Conditions (STC).
8. Power Rating Tolerance: Plus 10 or minus 5 percent.
a. Include flash test data for each module with source quality control reports to
demonstrate compliance.

2.04 BALANCE OF SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Photovoltaic Module Mounting System:
1. Provide complete mounting system compatible with modules to be installed and
suitable to properly install them in the location indicated, including all necessary
hardware and accessories.
2. Support Structure and Associated Hardware Materials: Use galvanized steel or
stainless steel.
3. Roof-Mounted Arrays:
a. Acceptable System Types: Either non-penetrating or penetrating systems
complying with specified requirements will be considered for this project.
b. Provide system compatible with the roof at the installed location.
c. Module Tilt Angle: As required to provide maximum energy production for
installed location.
d. Provide minimum clearance of 3 inches (76 mm) between roof and module for air
circulation and drainage.
B. Photovoltaic Combiner Boxes:
1. Provide combiner box(es) for termination of strings as indicated or as required for the
array configuration installed.
2. Combiner Boxes: Rated for 600 V DC; current ratings suitable for connected strings;
equipped with fuseholders; listed as complying with UL 1741.
3. Fuseholders: Touch-safe; suitable to accept fuses indicated.
4. Number of Input Circuits: As indicated or as required for termination of strings, with
minimum of 25 percent spare capacity for future expansion.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 5 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 5. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Provide integral load-break rated disconnect.
7. Provide with capability of current monitoring for individual strings.
C. Photovoltaic Inverters:
1. Provide inverter(s) as indicated or as required for connection of the photovoltaic array
DC system to the AC system indicated.
2. Inverters: Suitable for the requirements of the connected array; output configuration
compatible with connected system; listed as complying with UL 1741; furnished with
the following features:
a. Maximum power point tracking (MPPT).
b. LCD display.
c. Integral AC disconnect.
d. Integral DC disconnect.
e. Integral DC ground fault detection and interruption (GFDI).
f. Communications Interface: RS485/Modbus.
3. Grid-Tied Inverters: Comply with IEEE 1547, including over/under grid voltage and
frequency protection, and anti-islanding protection to automatically disconnect upon
loss of utility power and to remain disconnected until utility power restoration has been
maintained for five minutes.
4. Grounded Photovoltaic DC Systems: Furnish with integral isolation transformer.
Transformerless inverters may be used if a separate isolation transformer is provided.
5. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than five percent.
6. Enclosure Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified
for the following installation locations:
D. Enclosed Switches, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 2816.16:
1. Switches for DC System: Rated for 600 V DC.
2. Switches Connected to Supply Side of Service Disconnecting Means: Listed and
labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A.
E. Surge Protective Devices, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 4300:
1. Surge Protective Devices for DC System:
a. Rated for 600 V DC.
b. Listed and labeled as complying with UL 1449, Type 1.
c. Surge Current Rating: Not less than 50 kA per mode.
d. UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current (I-n): 20 kA.
F. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Switches for DC System: Rated for 600 V DC; listed as
complying with UL 489B.
G. Fuses, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 2813:
1. Fuses for DC System: Rated for 600 V DC.
2. Fuses for Protection of Photovoltaic Strings and Arrays: Photovoltaic fuses listed as
complying with UL 2579.
H. Monitoring System:
1. Provide a system to monitor photovoltaic system performance including all sensors,
dataloggers, connections, software, equipment and accessories necessary for a
complete operating system.
2. System communications interfaces to be wired or wireless, with compatible
interconnected components.
a. Provide suitable raceway, minimum 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size, for all required
wired connections.
3. System to monitor and record, in 15 minute intervals:
a. Inverter status.
b. Instantaneous power (kW).
c. Cumulative energy production (kWh).
d. Irradiation.
e. Ambient temperature.
f. Module cell temperature.
g. Current monitoring for individual strings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 6 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 4. Energy Production Meter: Revenue grade, with accuracy of plus or minus two
percent.
5. System real-time and historical data to be accessible from the following locations:
a. Personal computer(s), via internet connection.
b. Remote personal display(s).
c. Remote public display(s).
6. System to provide alarm notification via e-mail or instant message.
7. System to be compatible with third party monitoring service to be selected by Owner.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory test the following products to verify operation and performance characteristics.
Include test reports with submittals.
1. Photovoltaic modules.
2. Photovoltaic inverters.
3. Charge controllers.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the
indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Use open circuiting, short circuiting, or opaque covering to disable modules, array or
portions of array prior to installation and service.
B. Roof-Mounted Arrays: Protect roof and adjacent roof-mounted items from damage.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install photovoltaic system in accordance with NECA 412.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Provide required seismic controls in accordance with Section 26 0548.
F. Mount equipment such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers
or switches does not exceed 79 inches (2000 mm) above the floor, ground, or working
platform.
G. Provide cast-in-place concrete foundations for ground-mounted arrays as required,
constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
H. Foundation-Mounted Poles for Pole-Mounted Arrays:
1. Provide cast-in-place concrete foundations for poles as required, constructed in
accordance with Section 03 3000.
a. Install anchor bolts plumb per template furnished by pole manufacturer.
b. Position conduits to enter pole shaft.
2. Install foundations plumb.
3. Install poles plumb, using leveling nuts or shims as required to adjust to plumb.
4. Tighten anchor bolt nuts to manufacturer's recommended torque.
5. Install non-shrink grout between pole anchor base and concrete foundation, leaving
small channel for condensation drainage.
6. Install anchor base covers or anchor bolt covers as indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 7 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 I. Embedded Poles for Pole-Mounted Arrays: Install poles plumb as indicated.
J. Circuiting Requirements. in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0519:
1. Wiring Methods:
a. Unless otherwise indicated, use exposed module factory-installed cables (not
routed inside building) for module interconnections.
b. Unless otherwise indicated, use exposed type USE-2/RHH/RHW-2 single-
conductor cable (not routed inside building) for wiring between string(s) and
combiner box(es).
c. Unless otherwise indicated, use type THHN/THWN-2 single-conductor building
wire in suitable raceway for wiring between combiner box(es) and point of
interconnection.
d. Secure exposed cables in accordance with NFPA 70. Where possible, conceal
behind array.
e. Install cables in suitable raceway where readily accessible or where required by
authority having jurisdiction.
f. Use suitable twist-on insulated spring connectors, mechanical connectors, or
compression connectors for photovoltaic circuit splices and taps.
2. Photovoltaic DC System Conductor Color Code:
a. Negative Grounded System:
1) Positive: Red.
2) Negative/Grounded: White.
b. Positive Grounded System:
1) Positive/Grounded: White.
2) Negative: Black.
c. Ungrounded System:
1) Positive: Red.
2) Negative: Black.
3. Maintain separation of photovoltaic and non-photovoltaic circuits in accordance with
NFPA 70.
K. Grounding and Bonding Requirements, in Addition to Requirements of Section 26 0526:
1. Ensure that there is only one AC System bonding connection between grounding
system and grounded/neutral conductor, including external connections and
connections internal to equipment.
2. Provide auxiliary electrodes for photovoltaic array grounding in accordance with NFPA
70.
L. Identification Requirements, in Addition to Those Specified in Section 26 0553:
1. Color for Photovoltaic System Identification Nameplates and Labels: White text on red
background, unless otherwise required by NFPA 70 or authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Use identification nameplate or means of identification acceptable to authority having
jurisdiction to identify the presence of multiple power sources and the location of main
service disconnecting means and each photovoltaic system disconnecting means.
Locate at main service disconnecting means and at each photovoltaic system
disconnecting means. Verify format and descriptions with authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Use identification nameplate to identify each photovoltaic system disconnecting means
with text "PV SYSTEM DISCONNECT".
4. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify systems equipped with
rapid shutdown and associated rapid shutdown switch(es). Format, descriptions, and
locations to comply with NFPA 70 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify the information required
by NFPA 70 for marking of direct-current photovoltaic power sources. Locate at each
DC disconnect means requiring marking.
6. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify the interactive system
point of interconnection at the disconnecting means as a power source and with the
rated AC output current and the nominal operating AC voltage.
7. Where the inverter output connection is located in a panelboard on the opposite (load)
end from the input feeder location or main circuit location in order to meet
requirements of NFPA 70, use identification nameplate or identification label to identify

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 8 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 the overcurrent device with the word message "Warning; Inverter output connection;
Do not relocate this overcurrent device".
8. Use warning labels to identify electrical hazards for photovoltaic system disconnecting
means. Include the word message "Warning - Electric Shock Hazard; Terminals on the
line and load sides may be energized in the open position" or approved equivalent.
9. Use warning labels, identification nameplates, or identification labels to identify
electrical hazards for photovoltaic systems equipped with DC ground-fault protection in
accordance with NFPA 70. Include the word message "Warning - Electric Shock
Hazard; If a ground fault is indicated, normally grounded conductors may be
ungrounded and energized".
10. Use wire and cable markers to identify photovoltaic system source, output, and
inverter circuit conductors at all points of termination, connection, and splices.
11. Use voltage markers, identification labels, stenciled text, or suitable permanent
marking approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify exposed raceways, cable
trays, pull boxes, junction boxes, and conduit bodies with the text "Warning:
Photovoltaic Power Source" at maximum intervals of 10 feet (3 m) in accordance with
NFPA 70.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. See article "SYSTEM STARTUP" below for additional requirements related to testing and
inspection.
C. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field
reports with submittals.
D. Inspection and testing to include, at a minimum:
1. Inspect each system component for damage and defects.
2. Verify that equipment enclosures, boxes, and associated connections installed
outdoors are weatherproof.
3. Verify proper wiring connections have been made and check for conductor continuity.
Verify proper polarity.
4. Verify tightness of mechanical and electrical connections are according to
manufacturer's recommended torque settings.
5. Perform insulation resistance tests.
a. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential
testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs
connected.
6. Measure and record ambient conditions, including date and time, ambient
temperature, cell temperature, solar irradiance in the module plane, and wind speed.
7. Measure and record open circuit voltage of each string.
8. Measure and record voltages at the inverter AC and DC inputs.
9. Measure and record operating current for each string, sub-array, and array.
10. Measure and record AC output power.
11. Perform inverter functional test.
a. Grid-Tied Inverters: Include simulation of loss of utility power and subsequent
power restoration.
12. Verify proper operation of monitoring system.
E. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies
with Contract Documents.
F. Diagnostic Period: After successful completion of inspections and tests, operate system in
normal mode for at least 20 days without any system or equipment malfunctions.
1. Record all system operations and malfunctions.
2. If a malfunction occurs, start diagnostic period over after correction of malfunction.
G. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.
H. Repair roof or adjacent roof-mounted items damaged as a result of work of this section.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 9 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

3.05 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to assist in performing
system startup. Include manufacturer's detailed startup procedures with submittals.
B. Grid-Tied Systems: Obtain Utility Company's approval prior to performing system startup.
C. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean modules using only methods recommended by manufacturer to avoid scratches and
other damage. Clean exposed surfaces on other components to remove dirt, paint, or other
foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

3.07 COMMISSIONING
A. See Section 01 9113 - General Commissioning Requirements for commissioning
requirements.

3.08 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of system to Owner, and correct deficiencies
or make adjustments as directed.
D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
photovoltaic system.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of four hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.09 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.

3.10 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements
relating to maintenance service.
B. Provide to Owner, a proposal as an alternate to the base bid, a separate maintenance
contract for the service and maintenance of photovoltaic system for two years from date of
Substantial Completion, to include the work described below; Include a complete
description of preventive maintenance, systematic examination, adjustment, cleaning,
inspection, and testing, with a detailed schedule.
C. Conduct site visit at least once every six months to perform inspection, testing, and
preventive maintenance. Conduct tests similar to those made during original field quality
control testing. Submit report to Owner comparing test results with those of original tests
along with evaluations and recommendations.
D. Provide trouble call-back service upon notification by Owner:
1. Include allowance for call-back service during normal working hours at no extra cost to
Owner.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 10 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 2. Owner will pay for call-back service outside of normal working hours on an hourly
basis, based on actual time spent at site and not including travel time; include hourly
rate and definition of normal working hours in maintenance contract.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3100 - 11 PHOTOVOLTAIC COLLECTORS

 SECTION 26 3533.16
LOW-VOLTAGE POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Capacitors for low voltage (600 V or less) power factor correction applications:
1. Automatic capacitor systems.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
F. Section 26 0573 - Power System Studies: Additional criteria for the selection of equipment
and associated protective devices specified in this section.
G. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.
H. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE 18 - IEEE Standard for Shunt Power Capacitors; 2012.
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 508A - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Panels; 2018.
G. UL 810 - Capacitors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and
working clearances required by NFPA 70.
2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance
requirements of the actual equipment to be installed.
3. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.
4. Notify the Engineer of any conflicts with or deviations from Contract Documents.
Obtain direction before proceeding with work.
B. Pre-installation Meeting: Conduct meeting with facility representative and other related
equipment manufacturers to review requirements for loads to receive power factor
correction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for
capacitor assemblies, including ratings, configurations, materials, fabrication details,
dimensions, finishes, weights, and service condition requirements.
1. Automatic Capacitor Systems: Include quantity and size of switched steps and
information on control and monitoring functions.
C. Shop Drawings: Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, reactive power
(kVAR), and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, and installed features and
accessories.
1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of capacitor assemblies and adjacent
equipment with all required clearances indicated.
2. Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections.
3. Fixed Capacitors for Individual Motor Applications: For each application, include
wiring diagrams showing proposed capacitor connection method in relation to motor
starter contacts and overload devices.
4. Capacitors with Inductors/Reactors (Harmonic Filters): Include frequency tuning
information.
D. Motor Overload Protective Device Calculations: Where capacitors are to be connected on
the load side of motor overload protective devices (when permitted), indicate overload
device ratings adjusted for reduced current.
E. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Include reports for tests designated in IEEE 18 as
design and routine tests.
F. Specimen Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty.
G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
H. Manufacturer’s detailed field testing procedures.
I. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
J. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed ratings and locations of capacitors, and
final equipment settings.
K. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include information on equipment programming and
setup, replacement parts and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
L. Executed Warranty: Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
M. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Capacitor Enclosure Keys: Two of each different key.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience with power factor correction systems of similar
size, type, and complexity.
E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy
canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and
traffic.
B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to
internal components, enclosure, and finish.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Capacitor Assemblies: Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty covering repair
or replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.
C. Capacitor Cells: Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty covering repair or
replacement due to defective materials or workmanship.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Power Factor Correction Capacitors:
1. ABB
2. Eaton Corporation
3. Schneider Electric
4. Siemens
B. Source Limitations: Furnish capacitor assemblies and associated components and
accessories produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

A. Provide complete power factor correction capacitor system consisting of all required
equipment, conduit, boxes, wiring, supports, accessories, system programming, etc. as
necessary for a complete operating system that provides the functional intent indicated.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
C. Total System Power Factor: Achieve corrected total system power factor of not less than
95%.
D. Capacitor Assemblies: Manufactured units consisting of capacitor cells, enclosures, and
associated components specifically designed for three phase power factor correction
applications. Comply with IEEE 18, and list and label as complying with UL 508A or UL 810
as applicable.
E. Provide capacitors and associated components suitable for operation at indicated ratings
under the service conditions at the installed location.
F. Capacitor Cells:
1. Construction: Self-healing, metalized polypropylene film; dry (resin-encapsulated) or
liquid-impregnated with non-PCB, non-toxic, biodegradable dielectric fluid; provide
three phase cells (configurations utilizing factory-wired single phase capacitor cells are
not acceptable).
2. Losses: Not greater than 0.5 W per kVAR.
3. Furnished with pressure-actuated interrupter to prevent cell rupture.
4. Rated Life: 20 years.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
 G. Discharge Resistors: Provide discharge resistors as required to reduce residual voltage to
less than 50 V within one minute after capacitor is disconnected from source of supply in
accordance with NFPA 70.
H. Fuses: Provide fusing for all three phases; provide replaceable fuses (inaccessible fuse
links are not acceptable).
I. Contactors: Suitable for high inrush currents associated with capacitor switching.
J. Enclosures:
1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the
following installation locations:
2. Hinged Doors: Lockable, with all locks keyed alike.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
K. Short Circuit Current Rating: Provide capacitor assemblies with listed short circuit current
rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as determined by
short circuit study performed in accordance with Section 26 0573.
L. Automatic Capacitor Systems:
1. Description: Capacitor assemblies that supply a variable amount of reactive power
(kVAR) in discrete kVAR steps by switching capacitor cell groups using contactors and
microprocessor-based controllers as required to maintain selected power factor.
2. Provide current transformers (CTs) with appropriate ratio as required for system
measurement.
3. Control Functions:
a. Manual and automatic modes.
b. Adjustable target power factor with range of 0.80 inductive to unity.
c. Adjustable step time delay.
4. Status Indications:
a. Power factor.
b. Voltage.
c. Current.
d. Real power (kW).
e. Reactive power (kVAR).
f. Apparent power (kVA).
g. Frequency.
h. Number of energized steps.
i. Total harmonic distortion.
5. Alarm Indications:
a. Power factor over compensation.
b. Power factor under compensation.
c. Overcurrent.
d. Undervoltage.
e. Overvoltage.
f. Capacitor overload.
g. Overtemperature.
6. Features:
a. Integral circuit breaker or disconnect where indicated or required.
b. Integral surge protective device.
c. Remote monitoring capability via PC.
M. Controls
A. All controls shall be mounted on enclosure door for easy inspection and service.
B. A door interlock shall be provided to disconnect control power when enclosure door is
opened.
C. A personnel ground fault breaker shall be provided to disconnect control power upon
accidental contact with control power and earth (ground).
D. Reactive Power Controller/Power Factor Meter:
1. Controller shall be measuring the reactive current on every passage of the
voltage through zero.
2. A LED display shall be provided to indicate the stages that are on.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
 3. To prevent leading power factor, the controller shall be provided with a
programmable target cosine selector.
4. During this switching sequence, a fixed 12-second delay time between each
step is introduced in order to avoid transient problems and to fulfill EMC
requirements.
5. All output contacts shall be disabled when main power interruption. The
controller shall retain its programming after the restoration of supply voltage.
The controller shall bring the capacitor bank back on line in a step, phased and
normal sequence.
6. Controller shall be able to select have switching sequence to obtain the desired
power factor like 1:1:2:4 sequence.
7. Controller shall measure voltage, current, power factor, THDV and THDI
E. On-Off Switch
1. On/Off switch shall control power to all door mounted controls.
2. On/Off switch shall contain pilot light to indicate "On" mode.
F. Blown Fuse Lights
1. Three "Push-To-Test" blown fuse pilot lights, one per phase-door mounted, to
indicate a blown fuse condition.
2. Each fused phase, of each 50 kVAR step, shall have its own blown fuse
indicating light mounted in close proximity to the fuse for easy identification.

2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Factory test capacitors according to IEEE 18, including the following production tests on
each unit:
1. Short-time overvoltage test.
2. Capacitance test.
3. Leak test.
4. Loss determination test.
5. Discharge resistor test.
6. Fuse capability test for internally fused capacitors.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the ratings of capacitors are consistent with the indicated requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive capacitors.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
E. Examine conditions under which centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies
are to be installed. Notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access.
D. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
E. Install capacitor assemblies plumb and level.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 5 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
 F. Unless otherwise indicated, mount floor-mounted capacitor assemblies on properly sized 3
inch (80 mm) high concrete pad constructed in accordance with Section 03 3000.
G. Automatic Capacitor Systems: Locate current transformers (CTs) on line side of capacitor
connection so that measurements include power factor correction.
H. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 0526.
I. Where not furnished by manufacturer, provide fuses complying with Section 26 2813 as
indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations.
J. Remove capacitor fuses prior to bumping motors for testing purposes to prevent blowing
fuses caused by energizing capacitor that has not yet discharged.
K. Identify capacitors in accordance with Section 26 0553.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Provide services of a manufacturer's authorized representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection and testing. Include manufacturer's detailed testing procedures and field
reports with submittals.
C. Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
E. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.20.
1. Disconnect surge protective devices (SPDs) prior to performing any high potential
testing. Replace SPDs damaged by performing high potential testing with SPDs
connected.
F. Current Transformers (CTs) for Automatic Capacitor Systems: Perform inspections and
tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.10. The dielectric withstand tests on primary windings
with secondary windings connected to ground listed as optional are not required.
G. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective capacitors or associated
components.

H. Upon completion of installation of equipment and after circuitry has been energized, test
equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. When possible, field-correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace
with new equipment and retest.
I. Prior to energization of low voltage switchgear and centralized automatic power factor
capacitor assemblies:
1. Perform insulating resistance test on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth
for (1) minute. Minimum test voltage to be 1,000 volts D.C. with a minimum resistance
of 100 megohms.
2. Check centralized automatic power factor capacitor assemblies for continuity and for
short circuits.
3. Notify the Engineer of any abnormalities.
J. After assemblies are energized, demonstrate functioning in accordance with manufacturers
requirements.
K. Submit detailed reports indicating inspection and testing results and corrective actions
taken.

3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 6 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of automatic capacitor systems to Owner,
and correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
D. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of automatic
capacitor systems.
1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with
additional training materials as required.
2. Provide minimum of two hours of training.
3. Instructor: Manufacturer's authorized representative.
4. Location: At project site.

3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed capacitors from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 3533.16 - 7 LOW-VOLTAGE POWER

FACTOR CORRECTION
EQUIPMENT
 SECTION 26 4113
LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Strike (air) terminals and interconnecting conductors.
B. Grounding and bonding for lightning protection.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Electrical system
grounds.
B. Surge Protection for Wiring Systems: Specified in individual system requirements.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems; 2020.
B. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination with Concrete Work: Coordinate the embedding of lightning protection
components in concrete.
B. Coordination with Roofing Work: Ensure adequate attachment of strike terminals and
conductors without damage to roofing.
C. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a meeting at least at least two weeks prior to
commencement of any work affected by lightning protection system requirements to discuss
prerequisites and coordination required by other installers; require attendance by
representatives of installers whose work will be affected.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location and layout of air terminals, grounding electrodes, and
bonding connections to structure and other metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and
conductor sizes, and connection and termination details.
1. Where conductors or grounds are to be embedded or concealed in other construction,
submit shop drawings at least 30 days prior to start of construction.
2. If concrete-encased grounds are to be used and are not shown in Contract
Documents, provide sufficient data to determine concrete encasement dimensions and
location.
3. Include data on actual ground resistance determined by field measurement in
accordance with NFPA 780.
4. Include engineering analysis of equalization of potential to metal bodies within the
structure.
5. Include access panels, test holes, and disconnecting means for maintenance.
C. Product Data: Provide dimensions and materials of each component, indication of testing
agency listing, and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
E. Installation Certification: Submit copy of certification agency's approval.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide recommended inspection and testing plan,
including recommended intervals, to achieve periodic maintenance as recommended in
NFPA 780; provide customized plan reflecting actual installation configuration with specific
installed components identified.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4113 - 1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR

STRUCTURES
 G. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes,
bonding connections, and routing of system conductors in project record documents.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Maintain one copy of each referenced system design standard on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection equipment with
minimum three years documented experience.
C. Designer Qualifications: Person or entity, employed by installer, who specializes in
lightning protection system design with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in lightning protection system design with
minimum three years documented experience.
E. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Lightning Protection Components:

2.02 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

A. Lightning Protection System: Provide complete system complying with NFPA 780,
including air terminals, bonding, interconnecting conductors and grounding electrodes.
1. Provide system that protects:
a. The entire structure.
b. Open air areas within 100 feet (30 meters) of exterior walls at grade level.
c. Open air areas within building footprint.
2. Coordinate with other grounding and bonding systems specified.
3. Determine ground resistance by field measurement.
4. Provide copper, bronze, or stainless steel components, as applicable; no aluminum.
5. Provide disconnecting means and access panels or similar devices to allow complete
periodic inspection and testing as described by NFPA 780 Annex D.
6. Provide system certified by Underwriters Laboratories or the Lightning Protection
Institute.
B. Strike Terminals: Provide strike (air) terminals on the following:
1. Roofs.
2. Parapets.
3. Roof mounted equipment.

2.03 COMPONENTS
A. All Components: Complying with applicable requirements of UL 96.
B. Strike (Air) Terminals: Copper, solid, with adhesive bases for single-ply roof installations.
C. Grounding Rods: Solid copper.
D. Ground Plate: Copper.
E. Conductors: Copper cable.
F. Connectors and Splicers: Bronze.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B. Coordinate work with installation of roofing and exterior and interior finishes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4113 - 2 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR

STRUCTURES
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with referenced system standards and as required for specified
certification.
B. Connect conductors using exothermic welding process; protect adjacent construction
elements and finishes from damage.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Perform visual inspection as specified in NFPA 780 as if this were a periodic follow-up
inspection.
C. Perform continuity testing as specified in NFPA 780 as if this were testing for periodic
maintenance.
D. Obtain the services of the specified certification agency to provide inspection and
certification of the lightning protection system, including performance of any other testing
required by that agency.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4113 - 3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR

STRUCTURES
 SECTION 26 4300
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surge protective devices for distribution locations.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear.
C. Section 26 2413 - Switchboards.
D. Section 26 2416 - Panelboards.
E. Section 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. SPD: Surge Protective Device.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. MIL-STD-220 - Method of Insertion Loss Measurement; 2009c (Validated 2014).
B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2018.
D. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and
Systems; 2017.
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
F. UL 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
G. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate size and location of overcurrent device compatible with the actual
surge protective device and location to be installed. Notify Architect of any conflicts or
deviations from Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to ordering equipment.

1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Include detailed component information, voltage, surge current ratings,
repetitive surge current capacity, voltage protection rating (VPR) for all protection modes,
maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV), nominal discharge current (I-n), short
circuit current rating (SCCR), connection means including any required external overcurrent
protection, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, service
condition requirements, and installed features.
C. Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams showing all factory and field connections with wire
and circuit breaker/fuse sizes.
D. Certificates: Manufacturer's documentation of listing for compliance with the following
standards:
1. UL 1449.
2. UL 1283 (for Type 2 SPDs).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4300 - 1 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

 E. Field Quality Control Test Reports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include information on status indicators and
recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
H. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed
warranty completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of surge protective
devices.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in a clean, dry space in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide minimum five year warranty covering repair or
replacement of surge protective devices showing evidence of failure due to defective
materials or workmanship.
C. Exclude surge protective devices from any clause limiting warranty responsibility for acts of
nature, including lightning, stated elsewhere.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products other than basis of design are subject to compliance with specified requirements
and prior approval of Engineer. By using products other than basis of design, Contractor
accepts responsibility for costs associated with any necessary modifications to related work,
including any design fees.
B. Source Limitations: Furnish surge protective devices produced by a single manufacturer
and obtained from a single supplier.

2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Description: Factory-assembled surge protective devices (SPDs) for 60 Hz service; listed,
classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended; system voltage as indicated.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide field-installed, externally-mounted or factory-installed,
internally-mouonted SPDs.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4300 - 2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

 C. List and label as complying with UL 1449, Type 1 when connected on line side of service
disconnect overcurrent device and Type 1 or 2 when connected on load side of service
disconnect overcurrent device.
D. Protected Modes:
1. Wye Systems: L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L.
E. UL 1449 Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs):
F. UL 1449 Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not less than 115% of nominal
system voltage.

2.03 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES FOR DISTRIBUTION LOCATIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that the service voltage and configuration marked on the SPD are consistent with the
service voltage and configuration at the location to be installed.
C. Verify system grounding and bonding is in accordance with Section 26 0526, including
bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and separately derived systems where
applicable. Do not energize SPD until deficiencies have been corrected.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and NFPA 70.
D. Unless indicated otherwise, connect service entrance surge protective device on load side
of service disconnect main overcurrent device.
E. Provide conductors with minimum ampacity as indicated on the drawings, as required by
NFPA 70, and not less than manufacturer's recommended minimum conductor size.
F. Install conductors between SPD and equipment terminations as short and straight as
possible, not exceeding manufacturer's recommended maximum conductor length. Breaker
locations may be reasonably rearranged in order to provide leads as short and straight as
possible. Twist conductors together to reduce inductance.
G. Do not energize SPD until bonding of neutral and ground for service entrance and
separately derived systems is complete in accordance with Section 26 0526 where
applicable. Replace SPDs damaged by improper or missing neutral-ground bond.
H. Disconnect SPD prior to performing any high potential testing. Replace SPDs damaged by
performing high potential testing with SPD connected.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS Section 7.19.1.
D. Procure services of a qualified manufacturer's representative to observe installation and
assist in inspection, testing, and adjusting. Include manufacturer's reports with field quality
control submittals.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4300 - 3 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

3.04 CLEANING
A. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 4300 - 4 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

 SECTION 26 5100
INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires.
B. Ballasts and drivers.
C. LED retrofit luminaire conversion kits.
D. Accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
E. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Manual wall switches and wall dimmers.
F. Section 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); 2013 (Corrigendum
2019).
B. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-
Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).
C. IES LM-63 - IESNA Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and
Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008).
D. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State
Lighting Products; 2008.
E. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Packages, Arrays, and Modules; 2015, with Errata (2017).
F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
G. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; 2006.
H. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; 2006.
I. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with
Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; 2016.
J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
L. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other
sections or by others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING

 required for mounting. Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with
mounting surfaces at installed locations.
2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping,
equipment, diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential
conflicts installed under other sections or by others.
3. Notify Architect and Engineer of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents
to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product
of the manufacturer.
2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon
request.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories,
and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all
proposed features.
1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.
2. Lamps: Include rated life, color temperature, color rendering index (CRI), and initial
and mean lumen output.
D. Samples:
1. Provide one sample(s) of each specified luminaire where indicated.
E. Field quality control reports.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on
replacement parts.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than
two of each type.
I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of luminaires and any
associated remote components.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 500 (commercial lighting),
NECA/IESNA 502 (industrial lighting), and manufacturer's written instructions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING

 B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for
installation.

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.

1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for LED luminaires, including drivers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize
and protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete
operating system.
F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
luminaires.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5100 - 3 INTERIOR LIGHTING

 C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 500
(commercial lighting) and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).
E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
F. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
G. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:
1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.
2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support
system is certified as suitable to do so.
3. Secure surface-mounted and recessed luminaires to ceiling support channels or
framing members or to building structure.
4. Secure pendant-mounted luminaires to building structure.
5. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four
corners.
6. In addition to ceiling support wires, provide two galvanized steel safety wire(s),
minimum 12 gage, connected from opposing corners of each recessed luminaire to
building structure.
7. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for
additional requirements.
H. Recessed Luminaires:
1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.
2. Non-IC Rated Luminaires: Maintain required separation from insulation and
combustible materials according to listing.
3. Luminaires Recessed in Fire-Rated Ceilings: Install using accessories and
firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
I. Suspended Luminaires:
1. Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to bottom of luminaire.
2. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories
as required for specified mounting height.
3. Provide minimum of two supports for each luminaire equal to or exceeding 4 feet
nominal length, with no more than 4 feet (1.2 m) between supports.
4. Install canopies tight to mounting surface.
5. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.
J. Wall-Mounted Luminaires: Unless otherwise indicated, specified mounting heights are to
center of luminaire.
K. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
L. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
M. Install lamps in each luminaire.
N. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's
recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail
prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Engineer.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as
directed by Architect or Engineer. Secure locking fittings in place.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5100 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial
lighting), and manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign
material and restore finishes to match original factory finish.

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect and Engineer, and
correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
D. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

3.09 ATTACHMENTS
A. Luminaire schedule.
B. Luminaire cut sheets.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5100 - 5 INTERIOR LIGHTING

 SECTION 26 5600
EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Exterior luminaires.
B. Ballasts and Drivers
C. Lamps.
D. LED retrofit luminaire conversion kits.
E. Poles and accessories.
F. Luminaire accessories.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
B. Section 26 0529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
C. Section 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems.
D. Section 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems.
E. Section 26 0919 - Enclosed Contactors: Lighting contactors.
F. Section 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices: Automatic controls for lighting including
outdoor motion sensors, time switches, and outdoor photo controls.
G. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices: Receptacles for installation in poles.
H. Section 26 2813 - Fuses.
I. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEC 60529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code); 2013 (Corrigendum
2019).
B. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2017.
C. IEEE C62.41.2 - IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-
Voltage (1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Corrigendum 2012).
D. IES LM-63 - IESNA Standard File Format for Electronic Transfer of Photometric Data and
Related Information; 2002 (Reaffirmed 2008).
E. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State
Lighting Products; 2008.
F. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
Packages, Arrays, and Modules; 2015, with Errata (2017).
G. IES RP-8 - Recommended Practice for Design and Maintenance of Roadway and Parking
Facility Lighting; 2018.
H. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2015.
I. NECA/IESNA 501 - Standard for Installing Exterior Lighting Systems; 2006.
J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
K. UL 844 - Luminaires for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations; Current Edition, Including
All Revisions.
L. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
M. UL 1598C - Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Retrofit Luminaire Conversion Kits; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

 N. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate placement of poles and associated foundations with utilities, curbs,
sidewalks, trees, walls, fences, striping, etc. installed under other sections or by
others. Coordinate elevation to obtain specified foundation height.
2. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from Contract Documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product
of the manufacturer.
2. Provide photometric calculations where luminaires are proposed for substitution upon
request.
3. Provide structural calculations for each pole proposed for substitution.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including
detailed information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, weight, effective
projected area (EPA), and installed accessories; include model number nomenclature
clearly marked with all proposed features.
1. LED Luminaires:
a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.
b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.
2. Poles: Include information on maximum supported effective projected area (EPA) and
weight for the design wind speed.
D. Samples:
1. Provide one sample(s) of each specified luminaire upon request.
2. Provide one sample(s) of each luminaire proposed for substitution upon request.
3. Provide one sample of each product finish illustrating color and texture upon request.
E. Field Quality Control Reports.
1. Include test report indicating measured illumination levels.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of product.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on
replacement parts.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
2. Extra Lamps: Ten percent of total quantity installed for each type, but not less than
two of each type.
I. Project Record Documents: Record actual connections and locations of pole foundations,
luminaires, and any pull or junction boxes.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5600 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

 D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Receive, handle, and store products according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Keep products in original manufacturer's packaging and protect from damage until ready for
installation.
C. Receive, handle, and store wood poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1.

1.08 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for all LED luminaires, including drivers.
C. Provide three year manufacturer warranty for LED retrofit luminaire conversion kits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE TYPES
A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.
B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.
C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets,
ballasts, reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize
and protect the lamp and distribute the light.
E. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring,
connectors, hardware, poles, foundations, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary
for a complete operating system.
F. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any
damage, distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.
G. Provide luminaires listed and labeled as suitable for wet locations unless otherwise
indicated.
H. LED Luminaires:
1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.
3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen
maintenance, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

2.03 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS

A. Ballasts/Drivers - General Requirements:
1. Provide ballasts containing no polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).
2. Minimum Efficiency/Efficacy: Provide ballasts complying with all current applicable
federal and state ballast efficiency/efficacy standards.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5600 - 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and
are properly sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.
C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.
D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
luminaires.
E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.02 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 0533.16 as required for
installation of luminaires provided under this section.
B. Perform work in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship).
C. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install luminaires in accordance with NECA/IESNA 501.
E. Provide required support and attachment in accordance with Section 26 0529.
F. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent
luminaires.
G. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
H. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
I. Install LED lamps in each luminaire.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.
C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.
D. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or
replace excessively noisy ballasts or drivers as determined by Architect or Engineer.
E. Measure illumination levels at night with calibrated meters to verify compliance with
performance requirements. Record test results in written report to be included with
submittals.

3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as
directed by Architect. Secure locking fittings in place.
B. Luminaires with Field-Rotatable Optics: Position optics according to manufacturer's
instructions to achieve lighting distribution as indicated or as directed by Architect.

3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces according to NECA/IESNA 501 and manufacturer's instructions to remove
dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore finishes to match original
factory finish.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5600 - 4 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of luminaires to Architect, and correct
deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.

3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

3.09 ATTACHMENTS
A. Luminaire schedule.
B. Luminaire cut sheets.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 26 5600 - 5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING

 SECTION 27 0500
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for communications systems, in
accordance with provisions of contract documents.
B. Coordinate with work of other trades and utilities.
C. Furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
1. Division 1 - General Requirements.
2. Electrical General Requirements.
3. Fire Alarm System.
4. IP CCTV System
5. Fiber Optic Network.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data: Refer to individual sections.
B. Samples: Required for Client and/or Engineer review.
C. Project information:
1. If requested by Client and/or Engineer, names and addresses of four like institutions being
serviced by installer's service organization.
2. Sample maintenance contract (s).
3. Name and address of authorized installer/service organization.
4. Written to cover complete maintenance and 24-hour emergency service.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Communications Systems: Manufacturer factory designed and published systems, designed to
operate as complete, coordinated systems, including interfaces to other systems.
B. Include all components.
C. Include all wire, cable, conduit and fittings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Provide manufacturer’s supervision of installation, including electrical connections, cable-
pulling, testing and interfacing of systems.
3.02 WIRING
A. All wiring within equipment: Point to point with appropriate terminal connections for every wire
and component termination.
B. All connections mechanically secure.
C. All wiring and terminals clearly identified to facilitate installation and maintenance.
D. All cable and wire: As specified by communication systems manufacturer.
E. Standard type available from more than one cable manufacturer.
F. Manufacturer and installer are responsible for systems performance; if wire and cable are
inadequate for performance specified, replace wire and cable with adequate cable at no
additional cost.
G. All cabling, wiring, conduits and equipment housings: In strict accordance with
recommendations of equipment manufacturer.
H. Furnish and install all cable, and perform all cable splicing and equipment terminations.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0500 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
3.03 TESTING
A. Test each complete system for proper operation, including all modes of operation.
3.04 CLIENT AND/OR ENGINEER PERSONNEL TRAINING
A. Provide technical training for Client and/or Engineer's maintenance personnel at manufacturer
office.
B. Instruct operating staff in proper operation, including hands-on training.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0500 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 27 0526
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding and bonding for all communication systems, complete.
B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) or Telecommunication Grounding
Busbar (TGB).
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this
Section.
C. Section 260526 - Earthing System.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
B. IEC 60364 Electrical Installations of Buildings.
C. IEC 62305 Guide of Protection against Lightning and Earthing.
D. BS 7671 Requirements for Electrical Installations (IEE Wiring Regulations).
E. IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Resistivity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
2.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals.
B. Wall-mount busbars.
C. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB):
1. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) shall be constructed of 0.25 inches
(6.4 mm) thick solid copper bar.
2. The bus bar shall be 4 inches (100 mm) high and 12 inches (300 mm) long and shall have
18 attachment points (two rows of 9 each) for two-hole grounding lugs.
3. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of ANSI-J-STD
- 607-A and shall accept 15 lugs with 5/8 inch (15. 8 mm) hole centers and 3 lugs with 1
inch (25.4 mm) hole centers.
4. The busbar shall include wall-mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators
creating a 4 inch (100 mm) standoff from the wall.
5. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.
D. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB):
1. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB) shall be constructed of 0.25 inch (6.4 mm)
thick solid copper bar.
2. The bus bar shall be 2 inch (50 mm) high and 10 inch (250 mm) long and shall have 7
attachment points (one row) for two-hole grounding lugs.
3. The hole pattern for attaching grounding lugs shall meet the requirements of ANSI-J-STD
- 607-A and shall accept 4 lugs with 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) hole centers and 3 lugs with 1
inch (25.4 mm) hole centers.
4. The busbar shall include wall-mount stand-off brackets, assembly screws and insulators
creating a 4 inch (100 mm) standoff from the wall.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
 5. The busbar shall be UL Listed as grounding and bonding equipment.
2.03 BONDING ACCESSORIES
A. Compression Lugs:
1. Compression lugs shall be manufactured from electroplated tinned copper.
2. Compression lugs shall have two holes spaced on 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) or 1 inch (25.4 mm)
centers, as stated below, to allow secure two bolt connections to busbars.
3. Compression lugs shall be sized to fit a specific size conductor, sizes #6 to 4/0, as stated
below.
4. Compression lugs shall be UL Listed as wire connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Wall-Mount Bus Bars:
1. Attach bus bars to the wall with appropriate hardware according to the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
2. Conductor connections to the TMGB or TGB shall be made with 2-Hole Bolt-On
Compression Lugs sized to fit the busbar and the conductors.
3. Each lug shall be attached with stainless steel hardware after preparing the bond
according to manufacturer recommendations and treating the bonding surface on the
busbar with antioxidant to help prevent corrosion at the bond.
4. The wall-mount busbar shall be bonded to ground as part of the overall
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding System.
B. Ground Terminal Block
1. Every rack and cabinet shall be bonded to the TMGB or TGB.
2. Minimum bonding connection to racks and cabinets shall be made with a rack-mount 2-
hole ground terminal block sized to fit the conductor and rack and installed according to
manufacturer recommendations.
3. Remove paint between rack/cabinet and terminal block, clean surface and use antioxidant
between the rack and the terminal block to help prevent corrosion at the bond.
C. Bonding to the Metal Frame of Building
1. All bonding conductors and connectors for bonding the metal frame of a building shall be
listed for the purpose intended and approved by a NRTL.
2. In buildings where metal frames (structural steel) are effectively grounded, each TGB shall
be bonded to the metal frame within the room using a No. 6 AWG conductor.
3. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible the metal frame
should be bonded to the TGB with a No. 6 AWG conductor.
4. Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible the metal frame
should be bonded to the TMGB with a No. 6 AWG conductor.
5. When practicable because of shorter distances and other considerations, and where
horizontal steel members are permanently electrically bonded to vertical column
members, TGB's may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical
column members.
6. This Standard does not require the steel bars of a reinforced concrete building to be
bonded to the TGB or TBB.
3.02 TESTING
A. The Telecommunications Ground and Bonding System shall be tested with an Earth Ground
Resistance Tester used in the Two Point Test Method.
B. The Telecommunications Ground and Bonding System shall be tested with an Earth Ground
Resistance Tester used in the Two Point Test Method.
C. The following will be needed to test the grounding and bonding.
1. An Earth Ground Resistance Tester with the attachments.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
 2. All testing should be done with the entire building in operation. Nothing needs to be shut
down to test the grounding and bonding with this tester.
3. If the resistance value is less than 0.1 Ohm between the two test points the bonding is
adequate.
D. Tests to be conducted:
1. The installer / technician conducting these tests must be certified.
2. Test between the TMGB and the service equipment (power) ground.
3. Test between the TMGB and each TGB in the system.
4. Test between the TGB and:
a. Data racks
b. Cable tray
c. Telecommunication conduit
d. Caging
e. Electronic equipment
5. Tests shall be conducted with the systems in operation.
6. Tests shall be recorded and submitted to GOSI.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS
 SECTION 27 0528
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal conduits and fittings.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings.
3. Optical-fiber-cable pathways and fittings.
4. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.
5. Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters.
6. Surface pathways.
7. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
8. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:
A. Section 26 0534 - Conduit: Includes metal and nonmetal conduits and fittings.
B. Section 33 8126 - Communications Underground Ducts, Manholes And Handholes.
C. Section 26 0537 "Electrical Boxes and Fittings" for conduits, wireways, surface raceways,
boxes, enclosures, cabinets, handholes, and faceplate adapters serving electrical systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.
1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For surface pathways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details.
C. Samples: For wireways, nonmetallic wireways, and surface pathways and for each color and
texture specified, 300 mm long.
1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Pathway routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:
1. Structural members in paths of pathway groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with
common supports.
B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For pathway racks, enclosures, cabinets, equipment racks
and their mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which certification is based and
their installation requirements.
4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which certification
is based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control reports.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 1 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with Section 26 0534 - Conduit.
2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with Section 26 0534 - Conduit.
2.03 OPTICAL-FIBER-CABLE PATHWAYS AND FITTINGS
A. Description: Comply with UL 2024; flexible-type pathway, approved for plenum, riser or
general-use installation unless otherwise indicated.
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
2.04 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise
indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints,
adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as
required for complete system.
C. Wireway Covers: Flanged-and-gasketed type unless otherwise indicated.
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS
A. General Requirements for Nonmetallic Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on
cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down
straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
2.06 SURFACE PATHWAYS
A. General Requirements for Surface Pathways:
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for
intended location and application.
2. Comply with TIA-569-B.
B. Surface Metal Pathways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5. Prime
coated, ready for field painting.
C. Surface Nonmetallic Pathways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and
manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors. Product shall comply with UL-94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing
characteristics.
2.07 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Comply with Section 26 0537 - Boxes.
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
1. Comply with Section 271116.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 2 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
 2. Boxes, enclosures and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet
locations.
C. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures:
a. Material: Plastic or Fiberglass.
b. Finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.
D. Cabinets:
1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable
front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.
3. Key latch to match panelboards.
4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.
5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.08 MAINTENANCE HOLE AND HAND HOLE FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND CABLING
A. General Requirements for Maintenance Hole, Hand holes and Boxes:
1. Refer to Section 33 8126 - Communications Underground Ducts, Manholes and
Handholds
2. Maintenance Holes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.
3. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
4. Comply with TIA-569-B.

B. Concrete hand holes: Molded or Concrete material, with reinforced concrete structure, with a
heavy duty Ductile Iron Frame and Cover of rating grade ‘A’
1. Standard: Comply with ASTM C 857.
2. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural
load rating consistent with enclosure and hand hole location.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS" or other custom logos and text.
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
7. Hand holes size and size is 800mm x 800mm x 750mm (W x L x D).

C. Maintenance Hole:
1. Refer to Section 33 8126 - Communications Underground Ducts, Manholes and
Handholds for details.
2. Shall be inside dimensions 2750mm long by 1500mm wide 2000mm high unless
otherwise specified on the Drawings and Specifications. The exact manhole size and
configuration shall be submitted to client for approval.
3. The manhole hole shall be constructed of reinforced pre-cast concrete, 316.4 kg/cm2 and
designed for truck loading.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 3 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Maintenance Holes and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for
compliance with ANSI/SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products
supplied.
1. Tests of materials shall be performed by an independent testing agency.
2. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional engineer shall certify tests by
manufacturer.
3. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying with
ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PATHWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-80-PVC], direct buried
4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Indoors: Apply pathway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT or RNC.
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT
3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT
4. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.
5. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications Cable in Spaces Used for Environmental
Air: Plenum-type, optical-fiber-cable pathway or Plenum-type, communications-cable
pathway
6. Pathways for Optical-Fiber or Communications-Cable Risers in Vertical Shafts: Riser-
type, optical-fiber-cable pathway or Riser-type, communications-cable pathway.
7. Pathways for Concealed General-Purpose Distribution of Optical-Fiber or
Communications Cable: General-use, optical-fiber-cable pathway or General-use,
communications-cable pathway
8. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 1, except use NEMA 250 Type 4 stainless steel
in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.
C. Minimum Pathway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. Minimum size for optical-fiber cables is 1
inch (27 mm).
D. Pathway Fittings: Compatible with pathways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type
of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in
thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.
3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.
F. Install surface pathways only where indicated on Drawings.
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 49 deg C.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1, NECA 101, and TIA-569-B for installation requirements except where
requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum
pathways. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of pathways allowed in specific
occupancies and number of floors.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 4 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
 B. Keep pathways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-
water pipes. Install horizontal pathway runs above water and steam piping.
C. Complete pathway installation before starting conductor installation.
D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Electrical Connections and Supports" for hangers
and supports.
E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.
F. Install no more than the equivalent of two 90-degree bends in any pathway run. Support within
12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. Utilize long radius ells for all optical-fiber cables.
G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.
Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.
I. Pathways Embedded in Slabs:
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch (27-mm) trade size, parallel or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab
support. Secure pathways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot (3-m) intervals.
2. Arrange pathways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.
3. Arrange pathways to keep a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover in all
directions.
4. Do not embed threadless fittings in concrete unless specifically approved by Architect for
each specific location.
5. Change from ENT to GRC or IMC before rising above floor.
J. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:
1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for pathways.
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or
in an enclosure.
K. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply
listed compound to threads of pathway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound
manufacturer's written instructions.
L. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated pathway with a corrosion-preventing conductive
compound prior to assembly.
M. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes
or cabinets. Install insulated bushings on conduits terminated with locknuts.
N. Install pathways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.
O. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings
in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground
path.
P. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits of 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger,
use roll cutter or a guide to ensure cut is straight and perpendicular to the length.
Q. Install pull wires in empty pathways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb (90-kg)tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm)of slack at each
end of pull wire. Cap underground pathways designated as spare above grade alongside
pathways in use.
R. Surface Pathways:
1. Install surface pathway for surface telecommunications outlet boxes only where indicated
on Drawings.
2. Install surface pathway with a minimum 2-inch (50-mm) radius control at bend points.
3. Secure surface pathway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches (1200 mm) and with no less than two supports per straight pathway

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 5 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
 section. Support surface pathway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape
and glue are not acceptable support methods.
S. Pathways for Optical-Fiber and Communications Cable: Install pathways, metal and
nonmetallic, rigid and flexible, as follows:
1. 3/4-Inch (21-mm) Trade Size and Smaller: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 50 feet
(15 m).
2. 1-Inch (27-mm) Trade Size and Larger: Install pathways in maximum lengths of 75 feet
(23 m).
3. Install with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent for each length of pathway
unless Drawings show stricter requirements. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
or terminations at distribution frames or cabinets where necessary to comply with these
requirements.
T. Install pathway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with
listed sealing compound. For concealed pathways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install pathway
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
U. Install devices to seal pathway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all
pathways at the following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where an underground service pathway enters a building or structure.
3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
V. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding PVC conduit and fittings.
W. Expansion-Joint Fittings:
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature
change may exceed 17 deg C, and that has straight-run length that exceeds 7.6 m. Install
in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental
temperature change may exceed 55 deg C and that has straight-run length that exceeds
30 m.
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each
of the following locations:
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 70 deg C temperature change.
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 86 deg C temperature change.
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 70 deg C
temperature change.
d. Attics: 75 deg C temperature change.
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.06 mm per meter of
length of straight run per deg C of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)
that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.0115 mm per meter of length of
straight run per deg C of temperature change for metal conduits.
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure
expansion joints.
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of
installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.
X. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not
individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to
[center] of box unless otherwise indicated.
Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surface to provide a flat surface for a
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 6 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
 Z. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same
vertical channel.
AA. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
AB. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by
conduits.
AC. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.
AD. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench
bottom as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches (150
mm) in nominal diameter.
2. Install backfill as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 300 mm
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling
with normal compaction as specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building
entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts
throughout length of elbow.
5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 300 mm above direct-buried
conduits, but a minimum of 150 mm below grade. Align planks along centerline of
conduit.
6. Underground Warning Tape: Detectable Orange; Comply with requirements in Section
260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.04 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND MAINTENANCE HOLES
A. Install maintenance holes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded
from 12.5-mm sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent
undisturbed earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of
other enclosures 25 mm above finished grade.
D. Install maintenance holes with bottom below frost line, below grade.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and
insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short
enough to preserve adequate working clearances in enclosure.
F. Field cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut
wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings
to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
3.05 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 270544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communications Pathways
and Cabling."

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 7 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
3.06 FIRESTOPPING
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with
requirements in Section 078400 "Firestopping."
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage or deterioration.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating
recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0528 - 8 PATHWAYS FOR

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
 SECTION 27 0533
CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section governs the products and installation of conduits, backboxes, and additional
accessories, connections, fittings, and equipment required for in-building communications
systems, otherwise known as “Electrical Rough-In”.
B. Related Documents
1. The latest versions of the following codes, standards, and guidelines shall be followed.
a. Bring to Client's immediate attention where construction documents or conditions
differ from requirements in codes, standards, guidelines and specifications.
2. National Electrical Code (NEC), Current Edition.
3. The following standards:
a. TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces
b. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) / Building Industry Consulting
Service International (BICSI)-568-2006, Standard for Installing Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling
4. The following guidelines:
a. BICSI, Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
b. BICSI, Information Transport Systems Installation Methods Manual (ITSIMM)
5. The following project specifications:
a. 27 0526 - Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Communication Systems
C. Definitions and Acronyms
1. Conveniently Accessible - being capable of being reached from floor or use of 8’ step
ladder without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, pumps, belt
guards, transformers, piping and duct work.
2. IMC - Intermediate Metal Conduit
3. Listed Communications Cable - A cable Listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to the local authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) as
having met appropriate designated standards or has been tested and found suitable for
installation in specific spaces. Refer to NEC Articles 725, 770 and 800 for listing types and
additional requirements. Assume Outside Plant (OSP) Cables being supplied to the
building by ITS are not Listed.
4. Plenum - A compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and
that forms part of the air distribution system.
5. Plenum-rated - A product that is Listed by a NRTL as being suitable for installation into a
plenum space. Communications cabling shall be Listed and identified as type CMP.
6. Point of Entrance (Building Entrance): The point within a building at which the Outside
Plant (OSP) communications wire or cable emerges from an external wall, from a concrete
floor slab, or from a rigid metal conduit (Type RMC) or an intermediate metal conduit
(Type IMC) connected by a grounding conductor to an electrode in accordance with the
NEC.
7. RMC - Rigid Metal Conduit
8. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)
D. Submittals
1. The following submittals are due at the Pre-Construction Phase, in accordance with
submittal requirements in Section 27 00 00 Communications:
a. Product Information
1) Provide manufacturer’s product information cut sheet or specifications sheet
with the specific product number identified or filled out.
b. Shop Drawings

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0533 - 1 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
 1) Provide scaled drawings indicating routing of conduits and locations of all pull
points (to include pullboxes, communications LB, etc.).
2. The following submittals are due Post-Construction, in accordance with the submittal
requirements in Section 27 00 00 Communications:
a. Record Drawings
1) Provide scaled drawings indicating actual installed routing of conduits and
locations of all pull points. Design or shop drawings modified in the field will not
be accepted.
b. Manufacturer and Maintenance Manuals for all installed equipment
c. Keys for any pullboxes (if applicable)
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to Electrical specification sections for additional information.
B. Conduit
1. Refer to execution section for sizing and installation requirements.
2. Refer to Electrical specifications for list of approved manufacturers.
C. Backboxes
1. Typical communications backbox shall have the following minimum dimensions: 4-11/16”
x 4-11/16” x 2-1/2”
a. Refer to drawings for plaster ring size/opening
b. For outlets in CMU wall, submit appropriate backbox for application.
D. Pullboxes
1. Material shall be aluminum or steel.
2. Refer to execution section for sizing and installation requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Follow all manufacturers’ instructions.
B. Coordinate with all other trades prior to installation.
C. The Contractor’s shall perform weekly inspections during construction to verify the conduits,
backboxes, and other electrical rough-in meet these specifications and referenced documents.
Each week of rough-in installation, the Contractor shall invite the Design Engineer and ITS
Representative to weekly inspections.
1. Should any disparity between construction and these specifications be discovered by the
Contractor, Design Engineer, or Client at any point during the course of construction,
Contractor shall make necessary corrections without cost or schedule change to the
project.
D. Conduit
1. Conduit size to telecommunications outlet shall be trade size 1-1/4” UON.
2. Conduits which enter communications entrance facilities shall extend:
a. 4” AFF, or;
b. 3” below finished ceiling.
c. 3” through wall.
3. Conduits shall be reamed and bushed.
4. Communications Building Entrance Conduits entering a building shall be RMC or IMC
construction, and shall extend to within 50’ cable length from the wall reserved for Building
Entrance Protection in the Communications Entrance Facility.
5. Minimum Bend Radius
a. For trade size conduits 2” or less, maintain a minimum bend radius of (6) times the
actual inside diameter of the conduit.
b. For trade conduits greater than 2”, maintain a minimum bend radius of (10) times the
actual inside diameter of the conduit.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0533 - 2 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
 6. No continuous section of conduit may exceed 100 feet. Utilize pullboxes as necessary.
7. No continuous section of conduit may include more than (2) 90 degree bends (or
equivalent).
a. An offset is considered a 90 degree bend.
b. A pullbox is required wherever a reverse (180 degree) bend is installed.
8. Conduit to Floor Boxes in Slab-on-Grade
a. Slab-on-grade conduits shall not be installed.
9. Flexible Conduit
a. As defined by the NEC.
b. To be utilized only at specific locations identified on the drawings.
c. Sections are to be limited to a maximum of 20 feet in length and the trade size shall
be increased by one.
E. Backboxes
1. Backboxes installed into fire-rated walls shall include appropriate firestopping system (See
Division 7).
2. Where back-to-back with outlet on opposite side of wall, off-set one of the backboxes and
conduits to adjacent stud cavity or masonry block.
F. Pullboxes
1. Directional changes within a pullbox shall not be allowed.
2. Size pullboxes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; refer to Drawings for
sizes and identification of pullboxes.
3. Install pullboxes in conveniently accessible locations.
4. Where identified on drawings as lockable, key all pullboxes the same.
5. Identify pullboxes according to manufacturer's recommendation.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0533 - 3 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
 SECTION 27 0544
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sleeves for pathway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.
2. Sleeve-seal systems.
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.
4. Wires and conduits.
5. Grout.
6. Silicone sealants.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:
A. Division 07 Section "Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fire-resistance-rated
walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without penetrating items.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SLEEVES
A. Wall Sleeves:
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain
ends.
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel
sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal
joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.
C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with
nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:
1. Material: Galvanized-steel sheet.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and with
no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3 mm).
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one
or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5
mm).
2.02 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between
sleeve and pathway or cable.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the
following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following]:
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0544 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PATHWAYS AND CABLING
 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
2.03 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to
match piping OD.
2.04 GROUT
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-
rated walls or floors.
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.05 SILICONE SEALANTS
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
2. Sealant shall have VOC content of [250] <Insert value> g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit
Floors and Walls:
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division
07 Section "Joint Sealants."
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect
material while curing.
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide [1/4-inch (6.4-mm)] <Insert dimension> annular clear space
between sleeve and pathway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed[ or unless
seismic criteria require different clearance].
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.
Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both
surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 50 mm above
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved
opening.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0544 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS
FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PATHWAYS AND CABLING
 2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board
assemblies.
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual pathways and cables with flexible
boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular clear space between
pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves
to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for
installing sleeve-seal system.
3.02 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at pathway
entries into building.
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or
cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical
sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts
against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.03 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and
walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 0544 - 3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS

FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PATHWAYS AND CABLING
 SECTION 27 1100
COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes basic communications room requirements. Refer to drawings for specific
communication room requirements.
B. The design of communications rooms depend on the size of the building, floor space served,
occupant needs, services deployed and future growth.
C. Scope of Work
1. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete and proper
communications equipment room fittings installation.
2. In order to conform to the overall project event schedule, the contractor shall survey and
coordinate the communications equipment room fittings installation with other applicable
trades.
3. In addition to the details specified within this Section, the Contractor shall notify the
Client's Representative of any additional items deemed necessary to guarantee a fully
functional system. The contractor shall furnish and install all necessary items for a fully
functional system at no additional charge.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Communications room: A generic term for an equipment room or telecommunications room.
B. Entrance room: This serves as Entrance Facility.
C. Equipment room: An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications
equipment that usually houses a main or intermediate cross- connect and security equipment.
In this project, this serve as IT Server Room
D. Telecommunications room: An environmentally enclosed architectural space designed to
contain telecommunications equipment, cable terminations, or cross- connect cabling and
security equipment. In this project, it serves as IT Room.
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, Contract Forms, Conditions of the Contract, including Construction Manager/General
Contractor (CM/GC) Agreement, Exhibits and other Specification Sections that apply to this
section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS:
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in
the text by their basic designation only.
B. Specific reference to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s instructions, or
requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the
date of contract unless the document is shown dated.
1. ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
2. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code
3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructure
4. NECA/BICSI-568, Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
5. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-607, Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Planning and
Installation Methods for Commercial Buildings
6. TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
7. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of the date of
installation.
8. Equipment of foreign manufacture shall meet U.S. codes and standards.
9. Submittals shall indicate any product of foreign manufacture and the country of origin.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1100 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS

EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
1.05 COMMUNICATION ROOM REQUIREMENTS
A. The length of horizontal cable from each communications room shall be a maximum of 90
meters (physical cable length is shorter due to the pair-twist within the cable). Notify Design
Engineer of any outlets where a cable run of less than 90 meters is not possible.
B. The equipment room and telecommunications room designs, including location should be
developed in accordance with the security plan of the building.
C. The building shall contain an equipment room (gateway). The equipment room serves the
building and contains the main cross-connect for optical fiber and copper twisted- pair as well
as electronics (e.g., Ethernet router, switches). The equipment room may contain the entrance
facility (e.g., entrance conduits, splice cases, protectors). The equipment room may also serve
as a telecommunications room (containing a horizontal cross-connect). In addition to its
communications function, the equipment room may also serve audio/video and security
equipment.
D. The building may contain one or more telecommunications rooms.
1. Telecommunications rooms contain the horizontal cross-connect for optical fiber and
copper twisted-pair as well as electronics (e.g., Ethernet switches). In addition to its
communications function, the equipment room may also serve security equipment.
E. Function
1. Communications rooms provide an environmentally suitable and secure area for
communications and security equipment, including: cross-connects, interconnects,
backbone terminations, horizontal cable terminations and electronic equipment. They may
also be used to house audio/video equipment and terminations.
2. Communications rooms shall house only equipment directly related to the
telecommunications systems, including audio/video and security systems and, as
required, the room’s environmental support systems.
3. An equipment room may include the functions of a telecommunications room, entrance
room, or both.
F. Location
1. Communications rooms shall be located as close as practicable to the center of the area
being served.
2. Communications rooms shall be located so they are not restricted by building components
that limit expansion.
3. Communications rooms shall be located so as not to be a flood threat. For example,
locations that are below or adjacent to areas of potential water hazard (e.g., restrooms
and kitchens) shall be avoided. Additionally, areas having floor drains shall be avoided.
4. Communications rooms shall be located away from sources of electromagnetic
interference (e.g., electrical power supply transformers, motors, generators,
a. X-ray / MRI equipment radio or radar transmitters).
b. Equipment rooms shall be located as close as practicable to the electrical entrance.
c. Equipment rooms shall be located to allow delivery of large equipment.
G. Access
1. Communications rooms shall be located in an accessible area (e.g., hallway).
2. Communications rooms shall be fitted with card reader access control. The card read shall
control a fail secure electrified lock with integral request to exit switch in the handle.
H. Interior provisioning
1. Equipment not related to the support of the communications room (e.g., piping, ductwork,
pneumatic tubing) shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter a communications room.
With exception of piping for fire sprinklers, all pipes shall be routed around
communications rooms.
2. Communications rooms shall have void-free 19 mm AC grade, fire-resistant plywood
backboards shall be installed (smooth side to the room interior) on the perimeter walls
over the gypsum board mounted 300 mm AFF. All seams shall be sealed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1100 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS

EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
 3. Plywood backboards within communications rooms shall be painted with a white, fire-
retardant paint with exception of the written area on the plywood indicating that it is fire-
retardant.
4. Communications room walls shall extend from floor slab to ceiling deck with no drop
ceilings. The minimum walls height shall be 3048 mm.
5. Communications room floors shall be sealed and tiled with anti-static tile.
6. Equipment rooms shall have a minimum 1829 mm W X 2032 mm H door (double door)
without a door threshold and without windows. The door should open towards the outside
of the room. Hinges shall be pinned with anti-pry guards.
7. Telecommunications rooms shall have a minimum 900 mm W X 2032 mm H door without
a door threshold and without windows. The door should open towards the outside of the
room. Hinges shall be pinned with anti-pry guards.
8. A slot or slots shall be installed to accommodate cable runway entry from a corridor and a
UL approved fire rated assembly. The formed slot shall not have burrs or sharp edges.
9. Floor sleeves or slots should be located adjacent to the door. Sleeves and slots shall
extend 25 - 75 mm AFF and be firestopped at all times except during cable installation.
10. Communications rooms shall be located on floor areas designed with a minimum floor
loading of 50 lbf/ft2.
I. Fire protection
1. Each communications room shall be equipped with fire detection, fire- extinguishing
system and prevention devices. The fire detection devices shall be installed to the building
fire alarm system. A minimum of one smoke detector shall be installed in each
communications room.
2. It’s preferable that the fire sprinkler system for the communications rooms be a dry, pre-
action system. Wire cages shall be installed on all sprinkler heads within the room. The
location of the sprinkler heads shall be positioned so that it is not over equipment. Where
sprinkler heads are positioned over equipment, drainage troughs shall be installed to
protect electronic equipment from leakage.
J. Electrical
1. Communications rooms shall contain their own power panel for circuits specific to the
equipment within that room.
2. Communications room lighting circuits shall be fed from a power panel other than from
within the communications room.
3. Communications room lighting shall be an integrated switch/sensor control that is located
at the entrance of the room. Additional sensors may be required to sense that the room is
occupied.
4. Communications room illumination shall be uniform throughout the room at a minimum of
500 lux (50 foot candles) measure AFF in all aisles between cabinets and racks.
Luminaires shall be installed at a minimum height of 2743 mm AFF and in the middle of all
aisles between cabinets and racks.
5. Communications rooms shall have emergency lighting and signs installed such that the
absence of primary lighting will not hamper emergency exit.
6. Communications rooms shall have a wall phone location near the entry door.
a. The wall phone location shall consist of a 4-11/16” x 4-11/16” x 2-1/8” electrical box
with a single gang mud-ring (flush with face of plywood) and a 1” (minimum) conduit
stubbed to the ladder rack.
b. Electrical feeders/branch circuits shall not be placed or run through any
communications room, except as required to service those rooms.
c. Each equipment rack within a communications room shall have one dedicated 20A
120V NEMA 5-20R duplex outlet mounted 150 mm AFF, placed to the rear of the
vertical management, facing to the rear.
d. Each equipment rack within a communications room shall have one dedicated 30A
208V NEMA L6-30R outlet mounted 150 mm to 300 mm AFF, placed to the rear of
the vertical management, facing to the rear.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1100 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS

EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
 e. The first equipment rack in each communications room shall have one additional
30A 208V NEMA L6-30R outlet on the building’s emergency power to support the
gateway/router and facility network equipment.
f. Security equipment shall have two dedicated 20A 120V NEMA 5-20R duplex outlets
on the building’s emergency power mounted 150 mm AFF. All power circuits specific
to security equipment shall also be on the building’s emergency power; additional
circuits may be necessary - coordinate with security system designer and Client as
necessary.
g. The perimeter of the communications room shall have convenience 20A 120V NEMA
5-20R duplex outlets mounted 150 mm AFF at 1828 mm intervals around perimeter
walls.
h. Bonding and grounding shall meet the requirements of ANSI-J-607-A and
NECA/BICSI-607.
K. Temperature and humidity
1. HVAC shall be included to maintain the equipment within the room. The HVAC shall be
continuous (24 hours per day and 365 days per year). Where a standby (emergency)
power source is available, the HVAC system serving the room should be connected to the
standby (emergency) supply.
2. Temperature: 16-degrees to 26-degrees C.
3. Humidity (non-condensing): 30-percent to 50-percent
4. Sensors shall be installed in communications rooms to monitor temperature and humidity.
5. A positive pressure shall be maintained with a minimum of one air change per hour.
6. The room shall be protected from contaminants and pollutants that could affect electronic
equipment.
L. A shallow room, where required, shall be provided for cable pass-through between floors when
a telecommunications room is not necessary (e.g., a room not being needed due to cable
length limitations). This shallow room should be a minimum of 600 mm deep by 1.20 m wide
with sleeves and a 900 mm doorway, plywood back-board and cable ladder.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Refer to other Division 27 specification sections for product and additional information.
1. Plywood backboard
a. Shall be 4 x 8 x ¾” A/C, fire rated plywood.
b. Shall be painted - white, acrylic, interior, fire-retardant paint.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Notify Design Engineer and Client in writing as soon as possible of any discrepancies between
communications room design (on drawings) and these specifications.
3.02 BACKBOARDS
A. Linear wall space used for anchoring equipment shall be lined for the full closet width with fire
treated BCX grade exterior plywood 19 mm thick and 2400 mm high.
B. Plywood for mounting termination equipment on shall be installed vertically side by side 300
mm above finished floor. Mounting of plywood shall be sufficient enough to support the
equipment.
C. Plywood for supporting riser cables shall be installed vertically resting directly on the finished
floor. Anchoring and mounting techniques of plywood used to support backbone riser cables
shall be sufficient to support a minimum of 680 kg of weight.
D. In no cases shall the heads of mounting screws protrude past the face of the plywood.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1100 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS

EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS
 SECTION 27 11 16

LOW-PROFILE WALL-MOUNT EQUIPMENT RACKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Low-profile, wall-mount equipment racks.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. EIA/TIA 310D – Cabinets, Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment.

B. ISO 9001:2000 – Quality Management Systems – Requirements.

C. UL – Underwriters Laboratories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, including options.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: ISO 9001:2000 registered company.

B. Conform to ISO 14025 and EN 15804 or ISO 21930 in the development of life cycle assessments
(LCA) and Type III environmental product declarations (EPD).

C. All cable and equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. All methods of
construction that are not specifically described or indicated in the contract documents shall be subject
to the control and approval of the Owner or Owner Representative. Equipment and materials shall
be of the quality and manufacture indicated. The equipment specified is based upon the acceptable
manufacturers listed. Where “approved equal” is stated, equipment shall be equivalent in every way
to that of the equipment specified and subject to approval.

D. Strictly adhere to all Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI), Electronic Industries
Alliance (EIA) and Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) recommended installation
practices when installing communications/data cabling.

E. Material and work specified herein shall comply with the applicable requirements of:

1. TIA – 569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces, 2004

2. ANSI/TIA – 568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard,

2009

3. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568-2006 – Standard for Installing Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1116 - 1 LOW-PROFILE WALL-MOUNT

EQUIPMENT RACKS
 4. TIA – 606-A Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
Infrastructure, 2007

5. ANSI-J-STD – 607-A Joint Standard for Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing)

and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications, 2002

6. ANSI/TIA-942 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers, 2005

7. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code, 2008

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide product data for the following:

1. Manufacturers cut sheets, specifications and installation instructions for all products (submit
with bid).

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging,
with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: Product lifetime.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc. Phone (973) 839-1011. Fax (973) 839-1976. Website
middleatlantic.com. E-mail [email protected].

2.2 LOW-PROFILE WALL-MOUNT EQUIPMENT RACKS

2.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS

A. 42U Universal Rack

1. Customizable 42U rack is configured to be compatible with almost all server manufacturer’s
equipment. 42U Racks feature a symmetrical frame to allow enclosures to be bayed in space-
saving layouts, including side-by-side, one in front of another, in a corner, in U or T
arrangements, all without the need for an expensive intermediate frame.

2. The 16-fold frame design allows for the integrated channel above-the-joint on the horizontal
frame section, which prevents liquid from collecting on the gasket and from penetrating the
door or side panel when opened. The frame system provides multiple internal surfaces and
points for mounting equipment and accessories. The top panel of the 42U Rack is secured with
the standard eye-bolts. Whether you require a top panel for cable entry or for ventilation, it can
be quickly replaced by loosening 4 screws. This stable, static design permits use of roof-
mounted cooling units. An integrated water/dust protection lip protects the gasket roof
configurations.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1116 - 2 LOW-PROFILE WALL-MOUNT
EQUIPMENT RACKS
 3. The 42U Rack’s door system includes a four-point locking system. The door can be easily
rotated so it can be hinged from the left or right. The side panels can be screwed on, locked in
place, or hinged to provide side door access.

4. 42U Universal Rack Features

a. Contemporary, sleek appearance, Strong frame structure
b. Multiple vendor equipment compatibility
c. Full line of accessories & a Family of sizes and styles
5. 42U Universal Rack Dimensions
a. Width: EIA Standard 19″ Rack Rails
b. External Width: 23.6″ – 600mm
c. Height: 78.74″ – 2,000mm – Rack Units: 42U
d. Depths: 39.37″ & 41.34″
6. 42U Universal Rack Accessories
a. Sidewalls, Split rear doors
b. Baying Kits, toolless Shelves, casters, Bolt Down Kits, Cable Management
c. Power Strips – vertical or Rackmount, Enclosure Monitoring System
d. Toolless Blanking Panels, Fans

B. Low-Profile, Wall-Mount Equipment Racks:

1. Type: 19-inch, low-profile, wall-mount rack.

2. Compliance: EIA/TIA 310D.
3. UL Listed: US and Canada.
4. Useable Vertical Depth: 23 inches (584 mm).
5. Construction: Fully welded.
6. Weight Capacity: 150 pounds.
7. Body and Backpan: 18-gauge steel.
8. Rackrail:
a. Adjustable: 1-inch increments.
b. 11-gauge steel.
c. Tapped 10-32 mounting holes in universal EIA spacing.
9. Rackspaces: 8.
10. Mounting Brackets: 14-gauge steel.
11. Hinged Top 16-gauge steel with plexi window.
12. Hinged Top and Center Section: Locking and separately keyed.
13. Front: Vented.
14. Fan Mounting Positions: Two, 4-1/2 inches, on bottom, with guards.
15. Finish: Black-textured
16. Knockouts in Backpan:
a. Electrical Knockouts: 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inches.
b. Laser Knockout: 3 inches by 12 inches.

2.3 OPTIONS

A. Keyless Latch: Replaces keylock, fits top and center section.

B. Horizontal cable managers.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive low-profile, wall-mount equipment racks.

B. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1116 - 3 LOW-PROFILE WALL-MOUNT
EQUIPMENT RACKS
 C. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install low-profile, wall-mount equipment racks in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions at

locations indicated on the Drawings.

B. Install low-profile, wall-mount equipment racks plumb, level, square, and secure.

C. Mount racks for left-hand or right-hand swing.

D. Free Standing Relay Racks

1. Assemble relay racks according to manufacturer’s instructions. Verify that equipment mounting
rails are sized properly for rack-mount equipment before attaching the rack to the floor.
2. All racks must be attached to the floor in four places using appropriate floor mounting anchors.
When placed over a raised floor, threaded rods should pass through the raised floor tile and be
secured in the structural floor below. (Use CPI Part Number 40604-003 for concrete slab floors
or 40607-001 wood floors. Raised floor support kits are also available.)
3. Racks shall be grounded to the TGB using appropriate hardware provided by the contractor.
The ground will meet local code requirements and will be approved by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ).
4. In seismic areas, the rack should have additional bracing as required by building codes and the
recommendations of a licensed structural engineer.
5. Ladder rack may be attached to the top of the rack to deliver cables to the rack. The rack shall
not be drilled to attach ladder rack. Use appropriate hardware from the ladder rack
manufacturer.
6. The equipment load will be evenly distributed and uniform on the rack. Place large and heavy
equipment towards the bottom of the rack. Secure all equipment to the rack with equipment
mounting screws. In seismic areas, secure equipment to shelves with additional bracing.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating hardware to operate smoothly without binding.

B. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as approved by
Architect.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed low-profile, wall-mount equipment racks from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1116 - 4 LOW-PROFILE WALL-MOUNT

EQUIPMENT RACKS
 SECTION 27 1323
COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and
installing Telecommunications Cabling for the backbone cabling comprised of Optical Fiber
Cabling, and support systems are covered under this document.
B. Install a structured cabling system that will be able to support interconnections to active
telecommunications equipment for voice and data applications in a multi- vendor, multi-product
environment. The structured cabling system should adhere to ANSI/TIA/EIA 568 B; 569-A; 606-
A; J-STD-607-A and EIA/TIA 942 standards with respect to pathways, distribution,
administration, and grounding of the system. The structured cabling system to be installed
should also follow the guidelines spelled out in this RFP in accordance to local codes and
regulations.
C. The floor serving active data equipment will be interconnected to the facility serving data
equipment via a fiber backbone.
D. Contractor will also be required to make matching additions to the cable tray to complete the
system according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 569
E. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
1. Optical Fiber from Entrance Facility to Equipment Room
2. Optical Fiber from Equipment Room to Telecommunications Room
3. Optical Fiber from Telecommunications Room to Telecommunications Room
4. Fiber WA Patch Cords
5. Optical Fiber Connector Modules
F. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished,
installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the Telecommunications contractor as
detailed in this document.
G. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided
in this document. Quantities of telecommunications outlets, typical installation details, cable
routing and outlet types will be provided as an attachment to this document. If the bid
documents are in conflict, formal clarification shall be obtained from in the form of Question
Clarification Request. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the
cable system described in this document.
1.2 REGULATORY REFERENCES
A. The following current edition of industry standards are the basis for the structured cabling
system described in this document.
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA
a. TIA/EIA-568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
b. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 General Requirements
c. TIA/EIA-568-B.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components Standard
d. TIA/EIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
2. NFPA ISO/IEC
3. TIA/EIA - 942 Telecommunications Infrastructure for Data Centers
4. TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecom Pathways and Spaces
5. TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
6. TD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements
7. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)
8. ISO 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cabling System Warranty

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 1. Cable Products Warranty shall provide a complete warranty to guarantee a high
performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall
include all cable installed in the structured cabling system. The Cable shall be warranted
for a period of at least 25 years.
B. Warranty
1. Warranty shall provide a complete system warranty to guarantee end-to-end high
performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall
include copper connectivity components. The system shall be warranted for a period of at
least 25 years.
C. Product Guarantee
1. All non-consumable products have a 25-year guarantee. When installed per TIA or
ISO/IEC standards, the Network Cabling System will operate the application(s) for which
the system was designed to support.
2. In order to qualify for the guarantee, the structured cabling system must be installed per
the following:
a. Meet all TIA/EIA commercial building wiring standards
b. Provide a single source solution for the end-to-end installation
c. Must be installed by a BICSI certified Installer
3. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 120 miles
of project. The Electrical/Telecommunications contractor must be approved for cabling
and fiber solutions - a qualified BICSI trained installer who also is certified to install
Warrantee-able solution. A copy of certification documents for each must be submitted
with the quote in order for such quote to be valid.
4. The Electrical/Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and
installation practices. Manufacturer will extend a 25-year Static, Dynamic and
Applications Warranty to the end user once the Electrical/Telecommunications contractor
fulfills all requirements. At least 30 percent of the installation and termination crew must be
certified.
5. Note: All Networks shall be installed per applicable standards and manufacturer's
guidelines. If any product fails to perform as stated above, the contractor will provide new
components at no charge
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER OPTICS
A. Indoor/Outdoor Gel-Free All-Dielectric Cable
1. Technical Information
a. Standards Requirements: Telcordia GR-20, Issue 2, GR-409 and with relevant
b. OFNR and OFN-FT4 flame rated: Riser rated design meets UL1666 for standard
compliant safety
c. Fiber Compatibility: 9/125µm OS2
d. Bend radius: Dynamic: 20 x Cable O.D.; Static: 10 x Cable O.D.
e. Tensile rating (_<12 fibers): Installation: 400 lb. (1800 N); Long Term: 180 lb.
f. Tensile rating (>12 fibers): Installation: 600 lb. (2700 N); Long Term: 80lb. (800N)
g. Storage temperature: - 40° to 167°F (-40° to 75°C)
h. Installation temperature: - 22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
i. Operation temperature: - 40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
j. Attenuation: Single mode: 40/.30dB/km @ 1310nm/1550nm
l. Dry water-blocking technology: Allows rapid cable preparation and termination; lower
installation costs and time (no messy gel required)
m. Flexible buffer tube: Superior kink resistance and increased flexibility
facilitates route management in closures; eliminates
need for closure transportation tubing
n. All Dielectric Construction: No metallic elements to bond or ground for

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 applications where armor is not permitted; provides
easy access to cable core
B. Outside Plant All-Dielectric Cable
1. Technical Information
a. Standards Requirements: Telcordia GR-20, Issue 2, and ICEA 640 to ithstand
b. Fiber Compatibility: 9/125µm OS2
c. Outdoor Design: Offers water blocking for aerial and duct applications
for standards compliance and flexibility for outdoor
use.
d. UV resistant cable sheathing: Protects cable and meets the light absorption
requirement defined by Standards
e. All Dielectric Construction: No metallic elements to bond or ground for
applications where armor is not permitted; provides
easy access to cable core
f. Bend radius: Dynamic: 20 x Cable O.D.; Static: 10 x Cable O.D.
g. Tensile rating: Installation: 600 lb. (2700 N); Long Term: 180 lb. (800N)
h. Storage temperature: -40° to 167°F (-40° to 75°C)
i. Installation temperature: -22° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C)
j. Operation temperature: -40° to 158°F (-40° to 70°C)
k. Attenuation: Singlemode: .75 dB/km @ 1310nm/1550nm
l. Dry water-blocking technology: Allows rapid cable preparation and termination; lower
installation costs and time (no messy gel required)
m. Flexible buffer tube: Superior kink resistance and increased flexibility
facilitates route management in closures; eliminates
need for closure transportation tubing
1) Cable Type Rating
2) 9/125um (OS2) SM Dielectric
2.2 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM
A. The telecommunications room (TR) includes those products that connect the networking
equipment to the horizontal and backbone cabling subsystems. These products include
termination hardware (connectors and patch cords), racks, cable management products and
cable routing products.
B. Fiber Termination Hardware
1. LC Fiber Optic Connectors - Field Polish Termination: LC small form factor (SFF) field
polish connectors with rear pivot latch are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible. LC simplex
and duplex connectors are field terminable. The fibers shall terminate in 1.25mm ceramic
ferrules with non-optical disconnect functionality and an average insertion loss of .1dB per
mated pair for multimode and singlemode fiber.
a. Technical Information
1) Standard Requirements: TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-10 compatible; exceeds TIA/EIA-
568-B.3 requirements
2) Fiber compatibility: 9/125µm OS2
3) Fiber cable type: 900µm tight-buffered cable recommended
4) Fiber cable size: 1.6mm - 2.0mm jacketed cable
5) Ferrule type: Zirconia ceramic ferrule
6) Insertion loss: .1dB average (singlemode)
7) Return loss: >20dB (multimode), >40dB (singlemode)
2. LC Pre-Polished Keyed Opticam Fiber Optic Connectors - Pre-Polished Cam Termination:
LC small form factor (SFF) field polish connectors that come in eighteen different keying
features and colors. LC simplex connectors are field terminable. The fibers shall terminate
in 1.25mm ceramic ferrules with non-optical disconnect functionality and an average
insertion loss of 0.1dB per mated pair for singlemode fiber
a. Technical Information

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 1) Standard Requirements: Exceeds TIA/EIA-568-B.3 requirements
2) Fiber compatibility: 9/125µm OS2
3) Fiber cable type: 900µm tight-buffered cable recommended
4) Fiber cable size: 1.6mm - 2.0mm jacketed cable
5) Ferrule type: Zirconia ceramic ferrule
6) Insertion loss: 0.3dB average (singlemode)
7) Return loss: >50dB (singlemode)
3. SC Fiber Optic Connectors: SC Fiber Optic Connectors - Field Polish Termination: SC
field polish connectors are TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant. SC simplex and duplex
connectors are field terminable. The fibers shall terminate in 2.5mm ceramic ferrules with
non-optical disconnect functionality and an average insertion loss of 0.15dB (singlemode)
per mated pair
a. Technical Information
1) Standards requirements: TIA/EIA-604 FOCIS-3 compliant; exceeds TIA/EIA-
568-B.3 requirements
2) Fiber compatibility: 9/125µm OS2
3) Fiber cable type: 900µm tight-buffered cable recommended
4) Fiber cable size: 3.0mm or 1.6mm - 2.0mm
5) Jacketed cable Ferrule type: Zirconia ceramic ferrule
6) Insertion loss: 0.15dB (singlemode)
7) Return loss: >40dB (singlemode)
4. Splice Closure Fiber (SCF) - 288 single-fiber splice capacity. Splice Closure (SCF) with
Mechanical End Cap is designed for splicing fibers in aerial, duct and buried applications.
These sealed canister closures are available in configurations that can accommodate from
72 to 576 single fiber splices, or from a 288 - to 1296 -fiber capacity if splicing ribbons

a. Technical Information
1) Standard Requirements: Telcordia GR-771 tested
2) Application: Customer premises environments, environments
3) Mounting Type: Pole-mount, Wall-Mountable
4) Product Type: FOH Closures
5) Fiber Management: Configuration Full slack storage basket - tray stacker
6) Ground Feed through Cable Entries: 1
7) Number of Feeder Ports: 2 2 / 8 ports: 2 feeder ports and 6 drop ports
8) Number of Ports 8
9) SCF Type 8-inch canister, 28 in LID
10) Splicing Capacity 288
11) Splice Tray Stacker Configuration 0.4-in tray height (single-fiber or ribbon).
12) Dimensions: Diameter and Length 20.8 cm x 71.1 cm8.2 in x 28 in
13) Outside Diameter with Clamp 12.1 in (30 cm)
14) Weight 10 kg (22 lb)

2.3 Rack, Cabinet, and Cabling Management Equipment

A. Enclosures
Rack Mount fiber optic enclosures shall be shall be capable of doubling the capacity by
increasing fiber cable density within the allotted space when using LC connections.
Enclosures shall provide patch cable protection. Enclosures shall protect fiber optic
connections for patching or splicing requirements.

B. CABLE MANAGEMENT
1. The Cable Management System shall be used to provide a neat and efficient means for
routing and protecting fiber and copper cables and patch cords on telecommunication
racks and enclosures. The system shall be a complete cable management system

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 comprised of vertical and horizontal cable managers to manage cables on both the front
and rear of the rack. The system shall protect network investment by maintaining system
performance, controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief.
2. Rack System: Cable Management shall be provided using the applicable rack system that
supports heavy equipment and high capacity cable for cross connect or interconnect
applications in a telecommunications closet. The Rack system shall be modular and
support copper and fiber cables. The rack system solution shall be constructed of steel
material and support both assembled to accommodate both 483 mm and 584 mm
components. The rack system solution shall provide integral cable management including
vertical channels, pass through holes and slots for additional cable management
accessories. Pass through holes shall be located on the front, back and side of the rack
for maximum flexibility. The rack shall accept removable, hinged doors.
3. Vertical Cable Management: Vertical cable managers shall include components that aid in
routing, managing and organizing cable to and from equipment. Panels shall protect
network equipment by controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief.
Panels shall be a universal design mounting to EIA 483 mm or 584 mm racks and
constructed of steel bases with PVC duct attached. The covers shall be able to hinge from
either side yet still be easily removed to allow for quick moves, adds, and changes.
4. Horizontal Cable Management: Horizontal cable managers shall include components that
aid in routing, managing and organizing cable to and from equipment. Panels shall
protect network equipment by controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain
relief. Panels shall be a universal design mounting to EIA 483 mm or 584 mm racks and
constructed of steel bases with PVC duct attached. The duct fingers shall include retaining
tabs to retain the cables in place during cover removal. The covers shall be able to hinge
from either side yet still be easily removed to allow for quick moves, adds, and changes.
5. Cabinet Cable Management: Cabinet cable management system shall include
components that aid in routing, managing and organizing cable to and from equipment
within a cabinet. Panels shall protect network equipment by controlling cable bend radius
and providing cable strain relief. Panels shall be a flexible design with adjustable
mounting. Panels shall be constructed of steel bases with PVC duct attached. Duct
fingers shall have score lines for easy removal.
6. Grounding and Bonding
a. The facility shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB).
This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields,
equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the
potential to act as a current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed
independent of the building’s electrical and building ground and shall be designed in
accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/J-STD-607-A
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard.
b. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a
telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications
room shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB
shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of
this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building
electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized
between telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is
attached.
c. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice
cases, cable trays, etc. entering or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded to the
respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding
conductor and compression connectors.
d. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a
green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with
a wrap of green tape. All cables and bus bars shall be identified and labeled in
accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 G. Fire stop
a. A fire stop system is comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated
structure, the opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the
materials used to seal the penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise an
effective block for fire, smoke, heat, vapor and pressurized water stream.
b. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be
sealed with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through
penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of
a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves,
cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped. Firestop
systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and shall be approved by a
qualified Professional Engineer (PE), licensed (actual or reciprocal) in Kingdom of
Saudi Arabia. A drawing showing the proposed firestop system, stamped/embossed
by the PE shall be provided to the Owner’s Technical Representative prior to
installing the firestop system(s).

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber splice tray or enclosure. No slack loops shall
be allowed external to the fiber panel.
B. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective fiber enclosure by mechanical
means. The cables strength member shall be securely attached the cable strain relief bracket
in the enclosure.
C. Each fiber bundle shall be stripped upon entering the splice tray and the individual fibers routed
in the splice tray.
D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the splice enclosure. Cables labeled
within the bundle shall not be acceptable.
E. A maximum of 24 strands of fiber shall be spliced in each tray. All spare strands shall be
installed and stored into spare splice trays.
3.2 BACKBONE CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal distribution cables
B. A pull cord (nylon; 1/8" minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit.
C. Where cables are housed in conduits, the backbone and horizontal cables shall be installed in
separate conduits
D. Where cables are installed in an air return plenum, riser rated cable shall be installed in metallic
conduit.
E. Where backbone cables and distribution cables are installed in a cable tray or wireway,
backbone cables shall be installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal distribution
cables.
F. All backbone cables shall be securely fastened to the sidewall of the TR on each floor.
Backbone cables spanning more than three floors shall be securely attached at the top of the
cable run with a wire mesh grip and on alternating floors or as required by local codes.
G. Vertical runs of cable shall be supported to messenger strand, cable ladder, or other method to
provide proper support for the weight of the cable.
H. Large bundles of cables and/or heavy cables shall be attached using metal clamps and/or
metal banding to support the cables.
3.3 RACKS
A. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using minimum 10mm hardware or as
required by local codes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 B. Racks shall be placed with a 914 mm (minimum) clearance from the walls on all sides of the
rack. When mounted in a row, maintain a minimum of 914 mm from the wall behind and in front
of the row of racks and from the wall at each end of the row.
C. All racks shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar in accordance with
Section 2.4 of this document.
D. Rack mount screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged
and left with the rack upon completion of the installation.
E. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on 100mm x 200mm x 20mm void free
plywood. The plywood shall be mounted vertically 300 mm above the finished floor. The
plywood shall be painted with two coats of white fire retardant paint.
F. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be installed with the lowest edge of the mounting
frame 457 mm from the finished floor.
3.4 FIRE STOP SYSTEM
A. All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local inspection authorities
prior to cable system acceptance.
3.5 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. The TBB shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that the
work is to be performed. The TBB shall adhere to the recommendations of the J-STD- 607-A
standard, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice.
B. A licensed electrical contractor shall perform installation and termination of the main bonding
conductor to the building service entrance ground.
3.6 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. The contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling system for the cable
installation. The Owner will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the successful
contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the
system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall designate the cables origin
and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. Racks and patch panels
shall be labeled to identify the location within the cable system infrastructure. All labeling
information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the
appropriate labeling scheme.
B. All label printing will be machine generated by an approved software and desktop and hand-
held printers using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges. Self- laminating labels will be used on
cable jackets, appropriately sized to the OD of the cable, and placed within view at the
termination point on each end. Outlet, patch panel and wiring block labels shall be installed on,
or in, the space provided on the device.
3.7 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General
1. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100 percent tested for defects in installation
and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the
requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B-1 Section 11. All pairs of each installed cable shall
be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation
including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and
connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100 percent useable
conductors in all cables installed.
2. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, the NSI/TIA/EIA standards,
and best industry practice. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall bring any
discrepancies to the attention of the project team for clarification and resolution.
3. On-reel Test must be performed for Material receiving of optical fiber cable
B. Fiber Testing

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 7 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 1. All installed fiber shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 section 11.
2. For horizontal cabling system using singlemode optical fiber, attenuation shall be
measured in one direction at 1310 nm using an LED light source and power meter.
3. Backbone fiber cabling shall be tested at both 1310 and 1550 nm for single mode in both
directions.
4. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14
Standard, Method B.
5. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall test
each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. ONLY BASIC LINK
TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete the
circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be the same used for the
test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in the
ANSI/TIA/EIA Standard. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a two meter (2m)
reference quality cable assembly using a stable launch condition using two-meter jumpers
to attach the test equipment to the cable plant. The light source shall be left in place after
calibration and the power meter moved to the far end to take measurements. Refer to
document PN445 “Permanent Link Testing of Fiber Optic Cabling Systems”
3.8 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the telecommunications contractor shall provide three (3)
full documentation sets to the Engineer/Owner for approval. Documentation shall include the
items detailed in the sub-sections below.
B. Documentation shall be submitted within ten (10) working days of the completion of each
testing phase. This is inclusive of all test results and draft as-built drawings. Draft drawings may
include annotations done by hand. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be
submitted within 30 working days of the completion of each testing phase. At the request of the
Engineer, the telecommunications contractor shall provide copies of the original test results.
C. The Engineer may request that a 10 percent random field re-test be conducted on the cable
system, at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those
defined above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the telecommunications
contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the
Engineer, including a 100 percent re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the
Owner.
D. Test Results documentation shall be provided in electronic format within three weeks after the
completion of the project. The media shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the
words “Project Test Documentation”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and
year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and
cable (or outlet) I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The
test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last
calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer
specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test
equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and
the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used
in the field test equipment.
E. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. The appropriate
level III tester shall be used to verify Category 6 cabling systems.
F. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire (or fiber) test instrument shall be submitted as
part of the documentation package. Alternately, the telecommunications contractor may furnish
this information in electronic form. The media shall contain the electronic equivalent of the test
results as defined by the specification along with the software necessary to view and evaluate
the test reports.
G. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall
be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 8 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 H. The As-Built drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Their sequential number
as defined elsewhere in this document shall identify outlet locations. Numbering, icons, and
drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided. The
Owner will provide floor plans in paper and electronic (DWG, AutoCAD Current Version)
formats on which as-built construction information can be added. These documents will be
modified accordingly by the telecommunications contractor to denote as-built information as
defined above and returned to the Owner.
I. The Contractors shall annotate the base drawings and return a hard copy (same plot size as
originals) and electronic (AutoCAD Current Version) form.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1323 - 9 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL

FIBER BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 27 1513
COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and
installing Telecommunications Cabling for the horizontal cabling comprised of Copper Cabling
and support systems are covered under this document.
B. Install a structured cabling system that will be able to support interconnections to active
telecommunications equipment for voice and data applications in a multi- vendor, multi-product
environment. The structured cabling system should adhere to ANSI/TIA 568 C; 569-A; 606-A;
J-STD-607-A and TIA 942 standards with respect to pathways, distribution, administration, and
grounding of the system. The structured cabling system to be installed should also follow the
guidelines spelled out in this RFP in accordance to local codes and regulations.
C. For Reference of the drops, each Standard drop will consist of two terminations that can be
interoperable to accommodate either voice or data applications. Each meeting room drop will
consist of four drops each consisting of two terminations can be interoperable to accommodate
either voice or data applications. There will also be phone drops that will consist of a single
termination that will be installed in the proper faceplate for each location’s phone.
D. Install, terminate, test, and guarantee each drop according to customer all applicable standards
and customer preferences.
E. Horizontal cables will be rated Cat 6A in performance rated to connector outlets at the work
area. The Horizontal cables will home run back to a floor serving telecommunications room and
will terminate on individual Cat 6A enhanced rated jacks to populate a modular 48 port angled
patch panel. All cables will be patched at cutover as an interconnection into the floor serving
active equipment using RJ45 modular equipment cables rated to Cat 6A enhanced.
F. The floor serving active data equipment will be interconnected to the facility serving data
equipment via a fiber backbone terminated in 483 mm rack mounted 48 port enclosures which
will utilize SC or LC connections. This will serve to connect the Main Telecommunications
Room to an additional Telecommunications Room serving the locations that exceed the
distance limitations (90 meters) of the Main Telecommunications Room for the horizontal Data
and Voice drops.
G. Contractor will also be required to make matching additions to the cable tray to complete the
system according to ANSI/TIA/EIA 569
H. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
1. UTP Cable from TR to Work Area
2. UTP//Coax /WA Patch Cords
3. Category 6A UTP Connector Modules
I. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished,
installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the Telecommunications contractor as
detailed in this document.
J. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided
in this document. Quantities of telecommunications outlets, typical installation details, cable
routing and outlet types will be provided as an attachment to this document. If the bid
documents are in conflict, formal clarification shall be obtained from in the form of Question
Clarification Request. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the
cable system described in this document.
1.02 REGULATORY REFERENCES
A. The following industry standards are the basis for the structured cabling system described in
this document.
1. ANSI/TIA/EIA

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 a. TIA/EIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
b. TIA/EIA-568-C.0 General Requirements
c. TIA/EIA-568-C.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components Standard
d. TIA/EIA-568-C.2.10 Specifications for Augmented Category 6 Cabling
e. TIA/EIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
f. TIA/EIA - 942 Telecommunications Infrastructure for Data Centers
g. TIA/EIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecom Pathways and Spaces
h. TIA/EIA-606-A Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings
i. J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements
2. NFPA
a. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)
3. ISO/IEC
a. ISO 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises
B. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, then the more stringent requirement shall
apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents. The
Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when
developing the proposal for installation.
C. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be
aware of local codes that may impact this project.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cabling System Warranty
1. A Cable Products Warranty shall provide a complete warranty to guarantee a high
performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall
include all cable installed in the structured cabling system. The Cable shall be warranted
for a period of at least 25 years.
B. Warranty
1. A Warranty shall provide a complete system warranty to guarantee end-to-end high
performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall
include copper connectivity components. The system shall be warranted for a period of at
least 25 years.
C. Product Guarantee
1. All non-consumable products have a 25-year guarantee. When installed per TIA or
ISO/IEC standards, the Network Cabling System will operate the application(s) for which
the system was designed to support.
2. In order to qualify for the guarantee, the structured cabling system must be installed per
the following:
a. Meet all TIA commercial building wiring standards
b. Provide a single source solution for the end-to-end installation
c. Must be installed per instruction sheets by a BICSI certified.
3. Installer: Company specializing in installing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 120 miles
of project. The Electrical/Telecommunications contractor must be approved for copper
cabling and fiber solutions - a qualified BICSI trained installer who also is certified to install
Warrantee-able solution. A copy of certification documents for each must be submitted
with the quote in order for such quote to be valid.
4. The Electrical/Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and
installation practices. Manufacturer will extend a 25-year Static, Dynamic and Applications
Warranty to the end user once the Electrical/Telecommunications contractor fulfills all
requirements.
5. Note: All Networks shall be installed per applicable standards and manufacturer's
guidelines.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 6. If any product fails to perform as stated above, the contractor will provide new
components at no charge
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS
A. UTP 4-pair Cable.
B. UTP connector.
C. Patch Panel
D. UTP Patch Cord.
2.02 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS
A. One manufacturer shall manufacture all products, including but not limited to cable
management, faceplates, copper modules, patch panels, racks, patch cords, labels, grounding
lugs and fiber connectivity products for the purpose of this document.
B. One manufacturer shall manufacture all data/telecommunication and fiber optic cable.
2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS - (NO EXCEPTIONS)
A. This is a performance-based single source solution. Therefore, substitutions are highly
discouraged. Substitutions must follow the same rigid standards for quality and termination
style as those described in section 2.3 and 2.5.
B. Any Contractor wishing to offer structured cabling products other than those specified herein
shall submit a request for product substitution in writing no less than one week in advance of
bid. Written requests for substitution shall be accompanied by all drawings, specification sheets
and engineering documents, as well as third party laboratory performance test results proving
equivalency in performance and manufacturing style.
C. This written documentation shall be accompanied by samples of the substitution product
offered for evaluation. Equal product acceptance must be received in writing.
D. Contractor shall be responsible and assume all costs for removal and replacement of any
substituted product installed without prior written approval. Such costs shall include, but not be
limited to labor, materials as well as any penalties, fees or costs incurred for late completion.
2.04 WORK AREA SUBSYSTEM
A. The Work Area shall consist of the connectivity equipment used to connect the horizontal
cabling subsystem and the equipment in the work area. Both copper and fiber media shall be
supported. The connectivity equipment shall include the following options:
1. Patch (equipment) cords and modular connectors
2. Outlets and surface mount boxes
3. Surface raceway and outlet poles
4. Consolidation point / MUTO
B. Patch Cords and Modular Connectors
1. The modular connectors and patch cords will be chosen to match the horizontal cabling
medium and rating. The same manufacturer shall provide the modular connectors and
patch cords. The total patch cord length at the work area is not to exceed 3 meters.
Exception: When implementing an open office cabling system as specified under TIA
TSB-75 (see section 3.4).
2. Copper Connectivity: The network cabling system shall be comprised of modular
connectors in support of high-speed networks and applications designed for
implementation on copper cabling. All outlets shall utilize fully interchangeable and
individual connector modules that mount side-by-side to facilitate quick and easy moves,
adds and changes.
3. Modules shall be Category 6A modules. The eight position modules shall be used in all
work areas and shall exceed the connector requirements of the TIA/EIA Category 6A
standard. Termination shall be accomplished by use of a forward motion termination cap
and shall not require the use of a punch down tool. The termination cap shall provide

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 strain relief on the cable jacket, ensure cable twists are maintained to within 1/8” (3.18
mm) and include a wiring scheme label. The wiring scheme label shall be available with
both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. All terminations for this project shall use the
T568B (B) wiring scheme. The modules shall terminate 4 pair 23-AWG 100-ohm solid
unshielded twisted pair cable. The modules shall be universal in design, including
complying with the intermateability standard IEC 60603-7 for backward compatibility.
Category 6 modules shall have UL and CSA approval. The modules shall have ETL
verified Category 6 performance and ISO Class E performance (as defined in ISO/IEC
11801) in both the basic and channel links. They shall be universal in design, accepting 2,
3, or 4 pair modular plugs without damage to the outer jack contacts. The modules shall
be able to be re-terminated a minimum of 10 times and be available in 11 standard colors
for color-coding purposes. The jack shall snap into all outlets and patch panels. The
module shall include a black base to signify Category 6A 500 MHz performance.
4. Category 6A Patch Cords shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring a one-
piece, tangle-free latch design and black strain-relief boots to support easy moves, adds
and changes. They shall be constructed with Category 6A 23-AWG stranded UTP cable.
Each patch cord shall be 100 percent performance tested at the factory in a channel test
to the TIA/EIA Category 6 standard. The patch cords shall come in standard lengths of 3,
5, 7, 9 14, and 20 feet and 6 standard colors of Off White, Black, Blue, Green, Red and
Yellow
a. Additional Copper Cabling Connectors
5. Additional Modules for copper shall include the following:
a. 50 and 75 Ohm BNC coax coupler modules, male-male
b. F-Type coax coupler module, male-male threaded
c. RCA connector modules with black, red, yellow, and white inserts
d. Solder, pass through and punchdown termination types
e. S-Video connectors’ modules - coupler and punchdown termination types
f. Blank module to reserve space for future additions
g. The connectors shall snap into all outlets and patch panels.
6. Copper Cable:
a. Meets requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6A, IEEE 802.3an-2006, and ISO
11801 Class EA channel standards
b. Meets requirements of IEEE 802.af and IEEE 802.3at for PoE applications
c. Meets requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 6A and IEC 61156-5 Category 6A
component standards
d. Patent-pending cable design suppresses alien crosstalk with enhanced internal
electrical performance.
e. Round cable design with reduced cable diameter enables improved cable bundling
and optimizes fill capacity
f. Cable diameter: 0.310 in. (7.9mm) nominal
g. Installation temperature range: 32°F to 140°F (0°C to 60°C)
h. Operating temperature range: -4°F to 167°F (-20°C to 75°C)
i. Descending length cable markings enable easy identification of remaining cable
which reduces installation time and cable scrap
C. MUTOA's and Consolidation Points
1. Consolidation Point and MUTO assembly configurations shall be implemented in open
office applications where the office area is split into zones and the cabling system utilizes
short runs from an intermediate connection to facilitate frequent moves, adds and changes
(MAC's) as specified per TIA/EIA TSB-75. The MUTO and consolidation point equipment
will be chosen to match the horizontal cabling medium and performance category. The
same manufacturer shall provide the modular connectors and patch cords.
2. Maximum length of horizontal and work area cables
a. Horizontal Area Cable Max Combined Length Max Work Area of Patch Cords, Work
Area Cable Length & Equip. Cable (C) (W)

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 b. 90 m (295 ft) 10 m (33 ft) 5 m (16 ft)
c. 85 m (279 ft) 14 m (46 ft) 9 m (30 ft)
d. 80 m (262 ft) 18 m (59 ft) 13 m (44 ft)
e. 75 m (246 ft) 22 m (72 ft) 17 m (57 ft)
f. 70 m (230 ft) 27 m (89 ft) 22 m (71 ft)
g. Formulas: C = (102 - H)/1.2 W = C - 5, <22m
h. modular accepting all MINI-COM modules. The faceplate frames shall be releasable
from the front to provide access to the modules and terminated cable. Modules shall
be mounted to the patch panel using MINI-COM mounting features for added
strength. Patch panels shall be available with and without labels
2.05 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLING
A. The horizontal distribution cabling system is the portion of the telecommunications cabling
system that extends from the work area telecommunications outlet/connector to the horizontal
cross-connect in the TR / IT Room.
1. Horizontal cabling in an office should terminate in a TR located on the same floor as the
work area being served
2. Horizontal cabling is installed in a star topology (home run)
3. Bridged taps and splices are not permitted as part of the copper horizontal cabling
2.06 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM
A. The telecommunications room (TR) / IT room includes those products that connect the
networking equipment to the horizontal and backbone cabling subsystems. These products
include termination hardware (connectors and patch cords), racks, cable management products
and cable routing products.
B. Cable Termination Hardware
1. Each horizontal or backbone cabling run will be terminated using appropriate connectors
or connecting blocks depending upon the cable type. Matching patch cords will be used to
perform cross-connect activities or to connect into the networking/voice hardware.
C. Category 6A Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
1. Four-pair Category 6A UTP cabling shall be terminated onto a four-pair Category 6
module. All modules shall be terminated using the T568B wiring scheme. The eight-
position module shall exceed the connector requirements of the TIA/EIA Category 6
standard. The jack termination to 4-pair, 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall
be accomplished by use of a forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use
of a punch-down or insertion tool.
2. Patch Cords shall be used between modular patch panels configured as a cross- connect
or between the patch panel and networking hardware when the patch is used as an
interconnect. The patch cords shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring a
one-piece, tangle-free latch design and black strain-relief boots to support easy moves,
adds and changes.
3. They shall be constructed with Category 6A 24-AWG stranded UTP cable. Each patch
cord shall be 100 percent performance tested at the factory in a channel test to the
Category 6A standard.
4. Patch Panels - Four-pair Category 6A UTP cabling shall be terminated onto four-pair
punch-down style connecting hardware mounted to the rear of integral patch panels and
routed to Category 6 modules on the front face of the patch panel. Patch panels shall be
universal for T568A and T568B wiring configurations. The patch panels shall have a
removable 6-port design that allows a 6-port module to be removed without disrupting the
other ports. Integral cable tie mounts shall be included in the panel for cable management
on the back of the panel. Port and panels shall be easy to identify with write-on areas and
optional label holder for color-coded labels. Rack mountable patch panels shall mount to
standard EIA 19" and 23"racks.
5. PATCH Cords shall be used between modular patch panels configured as a cross-
connect or between the patch panel and networking hardware when the patch is used as

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 an interconnect. The patch cords shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring
a one-piece, tangle-free latch design and black strain-relief boots to support easy moves,
adds and changes. They shall be constructed with Category 6A 24-AWG stranded UTP
cable. Each patch cord shall be 100 percent performance tested at the factory in a
channel test to the TIA/EIA Category 6A standard. The patch cords shall come in standard
lengths of 3, 5, 7, 9 14, and 20 feet
D. Power over Ethernet (PoE)
1. The power midspan shall comply with IEEE 802.3af to provide power to compliant
devices. The power midspan shall provide eight shielded RJ45 ports to accommodate
incoming data and outgoing data combined with 48 VDC power output on pairs (1,2) and
(3,6). A status LED for each port shall designate when the port is actively supplying
power. An additional front mounted LED shall indicate overall power midspan status.
Labeling sections above both port banks shall accommodate TIA-606-A compliant
labeling. An RJ45 port on the rear provides network connectivity and access to
management settings. The power midspan shielding shall maintain immunity to
electromagnetic and radio frequency interference.
2. PoE panels shall comply with IEEE 802.3af and to provide power to compliant devices,
while supporting 1 GbE data throughput for higher bandwidth connections. The panels
shall provide 24 RJ45 ports to accommodate incoming data connectivity. A status LED
above each port shall designate when the port is actively supplying power.
3. An additional front panel LED shall indicate overall panel status. Labeling sections above
each of six ports shall accommodate TIA-606-A compliant labeling. Rear 110 punchdown
connections shall accommodate TIA 568A and TIA 568B wire map and 48 VDC power
output on pairs (1, 2) and (3, 6) and data on all pairs. Two RJ45 ports in the rear shall
allow for network connectivity and management.
4. The power system shall occupy 1 RU of space. The power system shall accommodate
modular rectifiers capable of supplying from 500W to 3,750W through combinations of
10A and 25A rectifier modules. All rectifier modules shall support 48 VDC output voltages.
The power supply chassis shall accommodate up to three interchangeable rectifier
modules. The rectifiers shall be hot pluggable and shall load share to meet versatile power
needs. The chassis and panel combination shall operate at 93 percent efficiency. The
rectifier modules shall be 500 watt or 1250 watt.
E. Grounding and Bonding
1. The facility shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB). This
backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields, equipment, racks,
cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a
current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed independent of the building’s
electrical and building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the
recommendations contained in the ANSI/J-STD-607-A Telecommunications Bonding and
Grounding Standard.
2. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a
telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room
shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB shall be
connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of this system is
to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building electrical ground
system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized between
telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is attached.
3. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases,
cable trays, etc. entering or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded to the respective
TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and
compression connectors.
4. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a green
insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of
green tape. All cables and bus bars shall be identified and labeled in accordance with the
System Documentation Section of this specification.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 F. Fire stop
1. A firestop system is comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure, the
opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the
penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise an effective block for fire, smoke, heat,
vapor and pressurized water stream.
2. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed
with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations
(complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire
rated structure). Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable
tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped. Firestop systems shall be UL
Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and shall be approved by a qualified Professional
Engineer (PE), licensed (actual or reciprocal) in the state where the work is to be
performed. A drawing showing the proposed firestop system, stamped / embossed by the
PE shall be provided to the Owner’s Technical Representative prior to installing the
firestop system(s).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to
house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. In hollow wall
installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. No more
than 300 mmof UTP and 914 mm of fiber slack shall be stored in an in-wall box, modular
furniture raceway, or insulated walls. Excess slack shall be loosely configured and stored in the
ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to
store slack cable.
B. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
TIA/EIA-568-C document, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices.
C. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125 inch).
D. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside
diameter of the cable.
E. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25mm (one inch) of the termination point. Data
jacks, unless otherwise noted in drawings, shall be located in the bottom position(s) of each
faceplate. Data jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the right-most position(s).
F. Voice jacks shall occupy the top position(s) on the faceplate. Voice jacks in horizontally
oriented faceplates shall occupy the left-most position(s).
3.02 HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and best industry
practices.
B. A pull cord (nylon; 3 mm minimum) shall be co-installed with all cable installed in any conduit.
C. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the TIA/EIA-569-A maximum fill for the particular
raceway type
D. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for
transition points, or consolidation points. Where transition points, or consolidation points are
allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and
suitable for the purpose.
E. The cable’s minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded.
F. If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be
supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch (1.2 to 1.5 meter) intervals. At no point shall cable(s)
rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 7 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 G. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 25 cables. Cable
bundle quantities in excess of 25 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the
bundle and degrade cable performance.
H. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or
any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed
so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices.
I. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal
cable is required, the contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling.
J. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall
be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner.
K. Cables shall be identified by a self-adhesive label in accordance with the System
Documentation Section of this specification and ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A. The cable label shall be
applied to the cable behind the faceplate on a section of cable that can be accessed by
removing the cover plate.
L. Unshielded twisted pair cable shall be installed so that there are no bends smaller than four
times the cable outside diameter at any point in the run and at the termination field.
M. Pulling tension on 4-pair UTP cables shall not exceed 25-lbf for a four-pair UTP cable.
3.03 VERTICAL OUTLET POLE AND SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Vertical outlet poles and Surface Raceway refers to a surface raceway system used for branch
circuit wiring and/or data network, voice, video and other low-voltage cabling. Surface raceway
shall be used in solid wall applications or for applications where moves, additions and changes
are very typical to the workflow.
B. The raceway system shall consist of raceway, appropriate fittings and accessories to complete
installation per electrical drawings. Non-metallic surface raceway is to be utilized in dry interior
locations only as covered in Article 352, part B of the NEC, as adopted by the NFPA and as
approved by the ANSI.
C. Equivalent Products - one manufacturer shall manufacture all raceway products, including but
not limited to those listed below. The raceway shall conform to the manufacturing and
compatibility requirements listed in appendix E and there will be no substitutions allowed.
3.04 HORIZONTAL CROSS CONNECT INSTALLATION
A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
TIA/EIA-568-C standard, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices.
B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18 mm (0.125 inch).
C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter
of the cable.
D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or
block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable
entrance into the rack or frame.
E. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
F. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that
can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,
where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.
3.05 COPPER TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
ANSI/TIA-568-C standard, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practice.
B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125 inch). Bend radius of the cable
in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 8 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 C. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or
block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable
entrance into the rack or frame.
D. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25 mm (one inch) of the termination point. Each
cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can
be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle, where
the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.
3.06 RACKS
A. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using minimum 3/8” hardware or as
required by local codes.
B. Racks shall be placed with a 914 mm (minimum) clearance from the walls on all sides of the
rack. When mounted in a row, maintain a minimum of 36 inches from the wall behind and in
front of the row of racks and from the wall at each end of the row.
C. All racks shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar in accordance with
Section 2.4 of this document.
D. Rack mount screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged
and left with the rack upon completion of the installation.
E. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on 4’ x 8’ x.75” void free plywood. The
plywood shall be mounted vertically 300 mm above the finished floor. The plywood shall be
painted with two coats of white fire retardant paint.
F. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be installed with the lowest edge of the mounting
frame 457 mm from the finished floor.
3.07 FIRE STOP SYSTEM
A. All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local inspection authorities
prior to cable system acceptance.
3.08 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. The TBB shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that the
work is to be performed. The TBB shall adhere to the recommendations of the J-STD- 607-A
standard, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice.
B. A licensed electrical contractor shall perform installation and termination of the main bonding
conductor to the building service entrance ground.
3.09 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. The contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling system for the cable
installation. The Owner will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the successful
contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the
system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall designate the cables origin
and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. Racks and patch panels
shall be labeled to identify the location within the cable system infrastructure. All labeling
information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the
appropriate labeling scheme.
B. All label printing will be machine generated software and hand-held printers using indelible ink
ribbons or cartridges. Self- laminating labels will be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized
to the OD of the cable, and placed within view at the termination point on each end. Outlet,
patch panel and wiring block labels shall be installed on, or in, the space provided on the
device.
3.10 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General
1. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100 percent tested for defects in installation
and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 9 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C-1 Section 11. All pairs of each installed cable shall
be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation
including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and
connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100 percent useable
conductors in all cables installed.
2. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, the ANSI/TIA/EIA standards,
guidelines and best industry practice. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall
bring any discrepancies to the attention of the project team for clarification and resolution.
B. Copper Channel Testing
1. All twisted-pair copper cable links shall be tested for compliance to the requirements in
ANSI/TIA/EIA/568-C.2 for the appropriate Category of cabling installed.
2. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm
3.11 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the telecommunications contractor shall provide three (3)
full documentation sets to the Engineer/End User for approval. Documentation shall include the
items detailed in the sub-sections below.
B. Documentation shall be submitted within ten (10) working days of the completion of each
testing phase. This is inclusive of all test results and draft as-built drawings. Draft drawings may
include annotations done by hand. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall be
submitted within 30 working days of the completion of each testing phase. At the request of the
Engineer, the telecommunications contractor shall provide copies of the original test results.
C. The Engineer may request that a 10 percent random field re-test be conducted on the cable
system, at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those
defined above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the telecommunications
contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the
Engineer, including a 100 percent re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the
Owner.
D. Test Results documentation shall be provided in electronic format within three weeks after the
completion of the project. The media shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the
words “Project Test Documentation”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and
year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and
cable (or outlet) I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The
test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last
calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer
specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test
equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and
the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used
in the field test equipment.
E. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C. The appropriate
level III tester shall be used to verify Category 6A cabling systems.
F. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire (or fiber) test instrument shall be submitted as
part of the documentation package. Alternately, the telecommunications contractor may furnish
this information in electronic form. The media shall contain the electronic equivalent of the test
results as defined by the specification along with the software necessary to view and evaluate
the test reports.
G. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall
be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented.
H. The As-Built drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Their sequential number
as defined elsewhere in this document shall identify outlet locations. Numbering, icons, and
drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided. The
Owner will provide floor plans in paper and electronic (DWG, AutoCAD latest version) formats
on which as-built construction information can be added. These documents will be modified

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 10 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 accordingly by the telecommunications contractor to denote as-built information as defined
above and returned to the Owner.
I. The Contractors shall annotate the base drawings and return a hard copy (same plot size as
originals) and electronic AutoCAD form.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1513 - 11 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER

HORIZONTAL CABLING
 SECTION 27 2000
DATA COMMUNICATIONS – NETWORK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Specifications throughout all Divisions of the Project Manual are directly applicable to this
Section, and this Section is directly applicable to them.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes network switch requirements including installation.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. The latest published edition of a reference shall be applicable to this Project unless identified by
a specific edition date.
B. All reference amendments adopted prior to the effective date of this Contract shall be
applicable to this Project.
C. All materials, installation and workmanship shall comply with the applicable requirements and
standards addressed within the following references
1.4 SCOPE OF WORK:
A. This section establishes a network switching design. Contractor shall:
1. Comply with all Master Specifications documents and the following requirements for a
complete project installation.
2. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation described
herein. Provide add/deduct unit pricing for all components as part of the bid response. All
requirements and specifications will be enforced.
3. Coordinate with electrical / Infrastructure tradespersons to verify location of all switches
and the number of switches needed at each location.
4. Follow industry standard installation procedures for the specified network switches.
B. Work of this section covers a complete installation of all network switches. The Contractor shall:
1. Provide, install, and test, all switches
C. Provide all appropriate consumable items required to complete the installation.
D. Provide complete documentation and demonstration of work.
E. Completion of all punch list deficiencies within 10 working days.
F. Provide indexed and organized complete Test Results of all specified solutions and their
components.
G. Provide Submittals as outlined below.
H. Conduct a final document handover meeting with client, consultant, and PM to review, discuss
and educate the Owner on the test results and As-Built Drawings.
I. Provide a Manufacturer’s Extended Product Warranty.
1.5 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS INCLUDES:
A. The Owner may separately purchase and/or provide certain equipment and miscellaneous
items that will be installed during the course of the installation process. Such items may not be
indicated in the documents. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and his suppliers when
considering alternate products / subcontracted work and workers.
1.6 ALTERNATES:
A. If an alternate material is proposed that is equal to or exceeds specified requirements,
Contractor shall provide manufacturers’ specifications in writing for Owner approval prior to
purchase and installation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 2000 - 1 DATA COMMUNICATIONS –

NETWORK EQUIPMENT
 B. Substitutions of material by the Contractor shall be in writing complete with written
manufacturers’ specifications. The material substituted shall not void, alter or change
manufacturers’ structured cabling system warranty.
C. Owner will not pay for additional work performed by the Contractor without signed approval of
these changes. Contractor will submit a copy of signed change order upon billing.
1.7 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Substitution may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents. Include in each request for substitution:
1. Product identification, manufacturer’s name and address.
2. Product Data: Description, performance and test data, reference standards, finishes and
colors.
3. Samples: Finishes
4. Complete and accurate drawings indicating construction revisions required (if any) to
accommodate substitutions.
5. Data relating to changes required in construction schedule.
6. Cost comparison between specified and proposed substitution.
C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
D. The Owner will be the final judge of acceptability. No substitute shall be ordered, installed or
utilized without prior written verification of acceptance from the Owner.
1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:
A. The objective of this section is to provide a complete network switching environment to support
end point devices including information outlets, wireless access points and IP cameras.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Not Applicable
B. Certifications:
1. Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid certification verifying qualifications of the
Contractor and installers to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission.
2. Contractor shall have a complete working knowledge of network switching design and
configurations.
3. Contracting firm shall have installed similar systems in at least ten (10) other projects in
the last five years prior to this bid and be regularly engaged in the business of installation
of the types of systems specified in this document.
4. Certification shall include, but not be limited to, items such as name and location of project
contacts and numbers.
5. Contractor shall provide certificates for the appropriate insurance coverage as defined in
contract documents.
6. Contractor shall submit evidence of compliance with these requirements prior to beginning
work on the project.
7. Network contractor shall be a Cisco Network Partner
C. Administrative Requirements and Coordination:
1. The Contractor shall:
a. Provide a specified contact person (name and contact number) for coordination to
attend project meetings with the Owner and others.
b. Coordinate work of this section with Owner’s telephone system specifications,
workstations, equipment suppliers, and installers.
c. Coordinate installation work with other vendors

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 2000 - 2 DATA COMMUNICATIONS –

NETWORK EQUIPMENT
 d. Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and
installation interfaces. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record
to other participants, Owner and others
e. When requested by Owner, furnish extra materials that match specified products and
that are factory packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
D. Contract Administration:
1. Change orders shall be submitted to the Owner/Project Manager complete with price
breakdown and description for approval before any work is done.
2. Owner’s Representative will provide job field reports upon inspection of Contractor's
installation, materials, supporting hardware, coordination with other trades and progress to
schedule to the client.
3. Job Field Report outline:
a. General installation progress in relation to scheduled work made by the Contractor up
to that date. All deficiencies noted in the cable installation to be corrected by the
Contractor.
E. Pre-Installation Meetings - Contractor shall:
1. Attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work
of this section.
2. Agenda: This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing related to work to be
performed, scheduling, coordination, etc. with Owner.
3. Attendance: Network Switch project manager/supervisors shall attend meetings arranged
by General Contractor, Owner’s representatives, and other parties affected by work of this
document.
4. An individual from each organization shall be required to attend the pre- installation
conference.
F. Post-Installation Meetings:
1. At the time of substantial completion, or shortly thereafter, the Contractor shall call and
arrange for a post-installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to
include, but not limited to as-built drawings, test reports, warranty documentation, etc.
Attendees shall be Owner staff, Owner’s Representative, General Contractor, and others
that the General Contractor deems appropriate.
2. At this meeting the Contractor shall present and explain all documentation, and asking for
feedback on its completeness. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by
participants shall be remedied by Contractor and resubmitted within one week of meeting.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Coordination with delivery companies, drivers, site address, and contact person(s) will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
B. Contractor Shall:
1. Be responsible for prompt material deliveries to meet contracted completion date.
2. Coordinate deliveries and submittals with the General Contractor to ensure a timely
installation.
3. No equipment materials shall be delivered to the job site more than three weeks prior to
the commencement of its installation.
4. Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification
clearly marked.
5. Equipment shall not be damaged in any way and shall comply with manufacturer’s
operating specifications.
6. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature
variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Equipment damaged prior to system
acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
7. Contractor shall be responsible for all handling and control of equipment. Contractor is
liable for any material loss due to delivery and storage

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 2000 - 3 DATA COMMUNICATIONS –

NETWORK EQUIPMENT
 C. Owner/General Contractor shall supply a list of security requirements for Contractor to follow.
1.11 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. For all environmental recommendations, refer Division 01.
B. After completing system installation, the Contractor will repair damaged finishes, including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
C. Contractor shall provide daily a clean work environment, free from trash/rubbish accumulated
during and after cabling installation.
D. Contractor shall keep all liquids (drinks, sodas, etc.) off finished floors, carpets, and tiles. If any
liquid or other detriment (cuts, soils, stains, etc.) damages the above finishes, Contractor shall
provide professional services to clean or repair scratched/soiled finishes, at Contractor’s
expense.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Record Documents:
C. Manufacturer's warranty form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Contractor shall provide a minimum five (5) year warranty on equipment
1.14 MAINTENANCE
A. Support Availability: The Contractor shall commit to make available local support for the product
and system during the Warranty period.
B. Local on-site support will have all necessary certifications to provide ongoing Maintenance.
Remote support shall have all necessary certifications to provide ongoing maintenance.
C. Project Management / ongoing MAC support shall have all necessary certifications to provide
ongoing management and implementation support.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All materials shall meet or exceed all applicable referenced standards, federal, state and local
requirements, and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Network Router

2-port GE or 2‑port SFP

24-port 10-/100-/1000-Mbps managed switch (8-ports PoE capable with integrated power
supply) 802.11a/g/n Option Integrated USB 2.0/AUX/Console

RJ45 ports support 10/100/1000 Ethernet connections. A WAN port is active only if the
corresponding SFP port is empty. By default, the WAN1 port is set to DHCP Client.

SFP ports are hot-swappable and support 10/100/1000 fiber SFP modules. If an SFP module
is plugged in, then the SFP port is active, and the corresponding WAN port is deactivated. By
default, the SFP1 port is set to DHCP Client.

2. 48-Port Gigabit NETWORK SWITCH

 Forty-eight 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 2000 - 4 DATA COMMUNICATIONS –

NETWORK EQUIPMENT
 ● 4 mini Gigabit Interface Converter (mini-GBIC) slots (shared with 4 Ethernet ports) for
fiber Gigabit Ethernet expansion
● IEEE 802.3af PoE delivered over any of the forty-eight 10/100/1000 ports
● 15.4W available power to a Gigabit Ethernet port for PoE-enabled wireless access point
or VoIP handsets (maximum per-device PoE delivery of 360W available for all ports)
● Dual images for resilient firmware upgrades
● 96 Gbps nonblocking, store-and-forward switching capacity
● Simplified QoS management using 802.1p, differentiated services (DiffServ) or type of
service (ToS) traffic prioritization
● Power redundancy when used with the Redundant Power Supply Unit
● Fully resilient stacking provides optimized growth with simplified management
● ACLs for granular security and QoS implementation
● Configuration and monitoring from a standard web browser
● Secure remote management of the switch via Secure Shell (SSH) and SSL encryption
● 802.1Q-based VLANs enable segmentation of networks for improved performance

3. In Wall WIFI Access Point

Dimensions 139.7 x 86.7 x 25.75 mm (5.5 x 3.41 x 1.01")

Weight 210 g (7.41 oz)
Networking Interface = (3) 10/100/1000 Ethernet Ports
Power Method 802.3at PoE+ Supported

PoE Out 48V Pass-Through (Pins 1, 2+; 3, 6-)

Maximum Power Consumption with PoE Pass through 22W
Maximum TX Power
2.4 GHz = 22 dBm
5 GHz = 22 dBm
Antennas = Dual-Band Antenna, Single-Polarity
2.4 GHz = 5 dBi
5 GHz = 6.5 dBi
Wi-Fi Standards 802.11 a/b/g/n/r/k/v/ac
Wireless Security WEP, WPA-PSK, WPA-Enterprise (WPA/WPA2, TKIP/AES)
BSSID Up to 8 per Radio
Mounting 1-Gang Electrical Wall Box (Not Included)

VLAN 802.1Q
Advanced QoS Per-User Rate Limiting
Guest Traffic Isolation Supported
WMM Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background
Concurrent Clients 250+

4. UPS: APC 5-KVA with 1-Battery pack

a. APC 5KVA UPS
b. APC 1-battery Pack
5. Industrial Switch (to be use for CCTV):
a. 8 Ethernet 10/100 ports and 2 Dual-Purpose Uplinks (Each Dual Purpose Uplink port
has one 10/100/1000 Ethernet Port and one SFP based Gigabit Ethernet port, one
port active)
b. 1Gbps Single mode rugged SFP

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLERS
A. Submit written proof that the following experience requirements are being met:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 2000 - 5 DATA COMMUNICATIONS –

NETWORK EQUIPMENT
 B. The Network Contractor shall be a Cisco networking partner.
C. The Networking Contractor shall have no less than ten (10) years of Network Switch design and
implementation experience and no less than (5) years of experience. The Contractor shall have
all necessary staff and certifications to accomplish the specified implementation.
D. Provide and pay for all labor, supervision, tools, equipment, test equipment, tests and services
to provide and install completed, specified switching network. Pay all required sales, gross
receipts, and other taxes.
E. All members of the installation team shall be certified on all proposed systems, having
completed the necessary training to complete their part of the installation and are capable of
performing an installation that falls under manufacturer’s guidelines necessary to obtain the
Manufacturer’s System Assurance Warranty.
F. Resumes & Certifications of the entire team shall be provided along with documentation of
completed training courses.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall meet or exceed all applicable international and local requirements, referenced
standards and conform to codes and ordinances of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. All installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published recommendations
C. Training and support staff shall be available to the customer’s staff for the following timeline,
but not limited to: The day before system cut-over, the day of system cut- over, and the day
after system cut-over.
D. Wireless contractor shall perform a formal site survey towards the end of construction and prior
to installation to ensure the number of access points specified are accurate.
3.3 TESTING
A. All components shall be completely tested to meet or exceed all application referenced
standards and in accordance with the manufacturer’s published recommendations
3.4 TRAINING
A. Training for IT Network staff shall be provided by the contractor.
1. Basic switch programming
2. Basic Access Point Configuration
B. Training is designed to be done during the business hours of 8:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m., Sunday –
Thursday.
C. A minimum of four (4) hours of Basic System Administration will be provided for up to 1 on-site
support individual.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 2000 - 6 DATA COMMUNICATIONS –

NETWORK EQUIPMENT
 SECTION 27 1543
COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all labor, materials, tools and equipment required for the complete installation of work
called for in the Construction Documents
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and
installing Telecommunications faceplates and connectors for the horizontal cabling comprised
of Copper and Optical Fiber Cabling, and support systems are covered under this document.
B. Install a structured cabling system that will be able to support interconnections to active
telecommunications equipment for voice and data applications in a multi-vendor, multi-product
environment. The structured cabling system should adhere to ANSI/TIA 568 C; 569-C; 606-B;
607-B and 942 standards with respect to pathways, distribution, administration, and grounding
of the system. The structured cabling system to be installed should also follow the guidelines
spelled out in this RFP in accordance to local codes and regulations.
C. For Reference of the drops, each Standard drop will consist of three terminations that can be
interoperable to accommodate either voice or data applications. Each meeting room drop will
consist of four drops each consisting of two terminations can be interoperable to accommodate
either voice or data applications. There will also be convenience phone drops that will consist
of a single termination that will be installed in the proper faceplate for each location’s phone.
D. Install, terminate, test, and guarantee each drop according to customer all applicable standards
and customer preferences.
E. Horizontal cables will be rated Cat 6 enhanced in performance rated to connector outlets at the
work area. The Horizontal cables will home run back to a floor serving telecommunications
room and will terminate on individual Cat 6 enhanced rated jacks to populate a modular 48 port
angled patch panel. All cables will be patched at cutover as an interconnection into the floor
serving active equipment using RJ45 modular equipment cables rated to Cat 6 enhanced.
F. The floor serving active data equipment will be interconnected to the facility serving data
equipment via a fiber backbone terminated in 19” rack mounted 48 port enclosures which will
utilize SC or LC connections. This will serve to connect the Main Telecommunications Room to
an additional Telecommunications Room serving the locations that exceed the distance
limitations (90 meters) of the Main Telecommunications Room for the horizontal Data and Voice
drops.
G. Contractor will also be required to make matching additions to the cable tray to complete the
system according to ANSI/TIA 569
H. This section includes minimum requirements for the following:
1. Category 6 UTP Connector Modules
2. Optical Fiber Connector Modules
3. Faceplates and Modules
I. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished,
installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the Telecommunications contractor as
detailed in this document.
J. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided
in this document. Quantities of telecommunications outlets, typical installation details, cable
routing and outlet types will be provided as an attachment to this document. If the bid
documents are in conflict, formal clarification shall be obtained from in the form of Question
Clarification Request. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the
cable system described in this document.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
1.3 REGULATORY REFERENCES
A. The following industry standards are the basis for the structured cabling system described in
this document.
1. ANSI/TIA
a. TIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
b. TIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
c. TIA-568-C.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling and Components Standard
d. TIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
e. TIA-569-C Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces
f. TIA-606-B Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
g. TIA-607-B Generic Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)
for Customer Premises
h. TIA-942-A Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers
Requirements
2. NFPA
a. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC), Current Edition.
3. ISO/IEC
a. ISO/IEC 11801 Generic Cabling for Customer Premises
B. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, then the more stringent requirement shall
apply. All documents listed are believed to be the most current releases of the documents.
The Contractor has the responsibility to determine and adhere to the most recent release when
developing the proposal for installation.
C. This document does not replace any code, either partially or wholly. The contractor must be
aware of local codes that may impact this project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cabling System Warranty
1. A Cable Products Warranty shall provide a complete warranty to guarantee a high
performance cabling systems that meet application requirements. The guarantee shall
include all cable installed in the structured cabling system. The Cable shall be warranted
for a period of 1year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following:
1. COMMSCOPE
2. Approved Equivalent
2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. This is a performance-based single source solution. Therefore, substitutions are highly
discouraged. Substitutions must follow the same rigid standards for quality and termination
style as those described in section 2.3 and 2.5.
B. Any Contractor wishing to offer structured cabling products other than those specified herein
shall submit a request for product substitution in writing no less than one week in advance of
bid. Written requests for substitution shall be accompanied by all drawings, specification sheets
and engineering documents, as well as third party laboratory performance test results proving
equivalency in performance and manufacturing style.
C. This written documentation shall be accompanied by samples of the substitution product
offered for evaluation. Equal product acceptance must be received in writing.
D. Contractor shall be responsible and assume all costs for removal and replacement of any
substituted product installed without prior written approval. Such costs shall include, but not be
limited to labor, materials as well as any penalties, fees or costs incurred for late completion.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
2.3 WORK AREA SUBSYSTEM
A. The Work Area shall consist of the connectivity equipment used to connect the horizontal
cabling subsystem and the equipment in the work area. Both copper and fiber media shall be
supported. The connectivity equipment shall include the following options:
1. Patch (equipment) cords and modular connectors
2. Outlets and surface mount boxes
3. Surface raceway and outlet poles
4. Consolidation point / MUTO
B. Patch Cords and Modular Connectors
1. The modular connectors and patch cords will be chosen to match the horizontal cabling
medium and rating. The same manufacturer shall provide the modular connectors and
patch cords. The total patch cord length at the work area is not to exceed 3 meters (10 ft).
Exception: When implementing an open office cabling system as specified under TIA/EIA
TSB-75 (see section 3.4).
2. Copper Connectivity
a. The network cabling system shall be comprised of modular connectors in support of
high-speed networks and applications designed for implementation on copper
cabling. All outlets shall utilize fully interchangeable and individual connector
modules that mount side-by-side to facilitate quick and easy moves, adds and
changes.
2.4 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS NON-PLENUM (7851A) PLENUM (7852A)
A. The eight position modules shall be used in all work areas and shall exceed the connector
requirements of the TIA Category 6 standard. Termination shall be accomplished by use of a
forward motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punch down tool. The
termination cap shall provide strain relief on the cable jacket, ensure cable twists are
maintained to within 1/8” (3.18 mm) and include a wiring scheme label. The wiring scheme
label shall be available with both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. All terminations for this
project shall use the T568B (B) wiring scheme. The modules shall terminate 4 pair 23 100-ohm
solid unshielded twisted pair cable. The modules shall be universal in design, including
complying with the intermateability standard IEC 60603-7 for backward compatibility. Category
6 modules shall have UL and CSA approval. The modules shall have ETL verified Category 6
performance and ISO Class E performance (as defined in ISO/IEC 11801) in both the basic
and channel links. They shall be universal in design, accepting 2, 3, or 4 pair modular plugs
without damage to the outer jack contacts. The modules shall be able to be re-terminated a
minimum of 10 times and be available in 11 standard colors for color-coding purposes. The
jack shall snap into all outlets and patch panels. The module shall include a black base to
signify Category 6 400 MHz performance.
B. Category 6 Patch Cords shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring a one-piece,
tangle-free latch design and black strain-relief boots to support easy moves, adds and changes.
They shall be constructed with Category 6 23-AWG stranded UTP cable. Each patch cord shall
be 100% performance tested at the factory in a channel test to the TIA Category 6 standard.
The patch cords shall come in standard lengths of 3, 5, 7, 9 14, and 20 feet and 6 standard
colors of Off White, Black, Blue, Green, Red and Yellow
C. Outlets and Surface Mount Boxes
1. The outlets and surface mount boxes shall support the network system by providing high-
density in-wall, surface mount or modular office furniture cabling applications. The outlets
consist of faceplates for flush and recessed in-wall mounting as well as mounting to the
modular office furniture systems. The surface mount boxes can be mounted where in-wall
applications are not possible or to support applications where surface mount is the best
option. All outlets shall utilize fully the interchangeable and individual connector modules
that mount side by side to facilitate quick any easy moves, adds and changes. All outlets
shall be manufactured from high-impact thermoplastic material with a U.L. flammability
rating of 94 HB or better.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 2. Wall Faceplates
a. Faceplates shall be 2 port horizontal single gang faceplates with combination screw
head covers. The faceplates shall mount to standard U.S. NEMA boxes and adapters
with screw-to-screw dimensions of 3.28" (83.3mm). The insert labels shall meet UL
969. Each faceplate shall accept modules that can be individually inserted and
removed as required.
3. Faceplate Frames and Inserts
a. Faceplate Frames shall be single and double gang frames with combination head
screws, screw covers, labels, and a curved designer appearance. The faceplates
shall mount onto standard U.S. NEMA boxes and adapters with screw-to-screw
dimensions of 3.28" (83.3mm). Each faceplate frame shall accept flat, sloped, sloped
shuttered, sloped recessed and blank 1/2 and 1/3 size module inserts that can be
individually inserted and removed as required from the front of the frame without
removing the frame.
4. Ruggedized Outlet Housing
a. Modular ruggedized outlet housing assembly with dual port box for use in industrial
applications where potential exposure to liquid and dust is expected. Can be mounted
in an appropriately sized aperture, or in a corrosion-resistant faceplate that can be
mounted to a standard-sized single or double wall outlet box. Meets Ingress
Protection Specifications IP65 and IP67 for dust and water ingress. The box is
equipped with two MIR Ruggedized Receptacles and two MIR-CAP. Patch cord to be
use must provide a ruggedized plug assembly and provides seal with the cord, as
well as strain, flex and impact relief.
2.5 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOM
A. The telecommunications room (TR) includes those products that connect the networking
equipment to the horizontal and backbone cabling subsystems. These products include
termination hardware (connectors and patch cords), racks, cable management products and
cable routing products.
1. Cable Termination Hardware
B. Each horizontal or backbone cabling run will be terminated using appropriate connectors or
connecting blocks depending upon the cable type. Matching patch cords will be used to
perform cross-connect activities or to connect into the networking/voice hardware.
1. Category 6 Enhanced Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP)
C. Four-pair Category 6 UTP cabling shall be terminated onto a four-pair Category 6 module. All
modules shall be terminated using the T568B wiring scheme. The eight-position module shall
exceed the connector requirements of the TIA Category 6 standard. The jack termination to 4-
pair, 100 ohm solid unshielded twisted pair cable shall be accomplished by use of a forward
motion termination cap and shall not require the use of a punchdown or insertion tool.
D. Patch Cords shall be used between modular patch panels configured as a cross-connect or
between the patch panel and networking hardware when the patch is used as an interconnect.
The patch cords shall be factory terminated with modular plugs featuring a one-piece, tangle-
free latch design and black strain-relief boots to support easy moves, adds and changes.
E. They shall be constructed with Category 6 24-AWG stranded UTP cable. Each patch cord shall
be 100% performance tested at the factory in a channel test to the Category 6 standard. The
patch cords shall come in standard lengths of 3, 5, 7, 9 14, and 20 feet
F. Patch Panels - Four-pair Category 6 UTP cabling shall be terminated onto four-pair punchdown
style connecting hardware mounted to the rear of integral patch panels and routed to Category
6 modules on the front face of the patch panel. Patch panels shall be universal for T658A and
T568B wiring configurations. The patch panels shall have a removable 6-port design that
allows a 6-port module to be removed without disrupting the other ports. Integral cable tie
mounts shall be included in the panel for cable management on the back of the panel. Port and
panels shall be easy to identify with write-on areas and optional label holder for color-coded
labels. Rack mountable patch panels shall mount to standard EIA 19" and 23"racks.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 1. Fiber Termination Hardware
a. Fiber Connectors and Patch Cords
b. SC/LC Fiber Optic Connectors shall be field terminable simplex fiber optic connectors
for both multimode and single mode glass fiber that fully complies with the fiber optic
connector performance requirements specified in TIA-568-C.3 and the
intermateability requirements specified by the TIA 604-2 FOCIS-2 document. The
multimode ST connector shall be compatible with 62.5/125mm and 50/125mm, 3.0
mm jacketed or 900 mm tight-buffered, multimode or 9/125mm single mode glass
fiber. The connector shall have an insertion loss typically less than 0.3 dB per fiber.
They shall be capable of field termination with commonly available tools. The boots
of the multimode ST connector shall be available in beige or blue for single mode
fiber. They shall incorporate pre-radiused ceramic ferrules to ensure consistent end
face geometry and high performance connector mating.
c. ST, SC and LC Optical Fiber Patch Cords shall be constructed from high
performance 50/125mm multimode cable and ST / SC / LC simplex connectors with
ceramic ferrules. Integral boots shall be provided to provide strain relief and help
maintain consistent polarity. They shall come in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3 and 10
meters.
2. Rack, Cabinet, and Cabling Management Equipment
a. Enclosures
1) Rack Mount and Wall Mounted fiber optic enclosures shall be shall be capable
of doubling the capacity by increasing fiber cable density within the allotted
space when using LC connections. Enclosures shall provide patch cable
protection. Enclosures shall protect fiber optic connections for patching or
splicing requirements.
b. Cable Management
1) The Cable Management System shall be used to provide a neat and efficient
means for routing and protecting fiber and copper cables and patch cords on
telecommunication racks and enclosures. The system shall be a complete cable
management system comprised of vertical and horizontal cable managers to
manage cables on both the front and rear of the rack. The system shall protect
network investment by maintaining system performance, controlling cable bend
radius and providing cable strain relief.
G. Rack System
1. Cable Management shall be provided using the applicable rack system that supports
heavy equipment and high capacity cable for cross connect or interconnect applications in
a telecommunications closet. The Rack system shall be modular and support copper and
fiber cables. The rack system solution shall be constructed of steel material and support
both assembled to accommodate both 19" and 23" components. The rack system
solution shall provide integral cable management including vertical channels, pass through
holes and slots for additional cable management accessories. Pass through holes shall
be located on the front, back and side of the rack for maximum flexibility. The rack shall
accept removable, hinged doors.
H. Vertical Cable Management
1. Vertical cable managers shall include components that aid in routing, managing and
organizing cable to and from equipment. Panels shall protect network equipment by
controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief. Panels shall be a universal
design mounting to EIA 19" or 23" racks and constructed of steel bases with PVC duct
attached. The covers shall be able to hinge from either side yet still be easily removed to
allow for quick moves, adds, and changes.
I. Horizontal Cable Management
1. Horizontal cable managers shall include components that aid in routing, managing and
organizing cable to and from equipment. Panels shall protect network equipment by
controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain relief. Panels shall be a universal

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 design mounting to EIA 19" or 23" racks and constructed of steel bases with PVC duct
attached. The duct fingers shall include retaining tabs to retain the cables in place during
cover removal. The covers shall be able to hinge from either side yet still be easily
removed to allow for quick moves, adds, and changes.
J. Cabinet Cable Management
1. IN-Cabinet cable management system shall include components that aid in routing,
managing and organizing cable to and from equipment within a cabinet. Panels shall
protect network equipment by controlling cable bend radius and providing cable strain
relief. Panels shall be a flexible design with adjustable mounting. Panels shall be
constructed of steel bases with PVC duct attached. Duct fingers shall have score lines for
easy removal.
2. Grounding and Bonding
a. The facility shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB).
This backbone shall be used to ground all telecommunications cable shields,
equipment, racks, cabinets, raceways, and other associated hardware that has the
potential to act as a current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed
independent of the building’s electrical and building ground and shall be designed in
accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA-607-B
Telecommunications Bonding and Grounding Standard.
b. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a
telecommunications main grounding bus bar (TMGB). Each telecommunications
room shall be provided with a telecommunications ground bus bar (TGB). The TMGB
shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. The intent of
this system is to provide a grounding system that is equal in potential to the building
electrical ground system. Therefore, ground loop current potential is minimized
between telecommunications equipment and the electrical system to which it is
attached.
c. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice
cases, cable trays, etc. entering or residing in the TR or ER shall be grounded to the
respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding
conductor and compression connectors.
d. All wires used for telecommunications grounding purposes shall be identified with a
green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point
with a wrap of green tape. All cables and bus bars shall be identified and labeled in
accordance with the System Documentation Section of this specification.
3. Fire stop
a. A firestop system is comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated
structure, the opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the
materials used to seal the penetrated structure. Firestop systems comprise an
effective block for fire, smoke, heat, vapor and pressurized water stream.
b. All penetrations through fire-rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be
sealed with an appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through
penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of
a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves,
cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.
Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814 (UL 1479) and shall be
approved by a qualified Professional Engineer (PE), licensed (actual or reciprocal) in
the state where the work is to be performed. A drawing showing the proposed
firestop system, stamped/embossed by the PE shall be provided to the Owner’s
Technical Representative prior to installing the firestop system(s).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 WORK AREA OUTLETS
A. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall or surface-mount boxes if adequate space is present to
house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. In hollow wall

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. No more
than 12” of UTP and 36” of fiber slack shall be stored in an in-wall box, modular furniture
raceway, or insulated walls. Excess slack shall be loosely configured and stored in the ceiling
above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store
slack cable.
B. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
TIA-568-C document, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices.
C. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125 inch).
D. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside
diameter of the cable.
E. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25mm (one inch) of the termination point.
F. Data jacks, unless otherwise noted in drawings, shall be located in the bottom position(s) of
each faceplate. Data jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the right-most
position(s).
G. Voice jacks shall occupy the top position(s) on the faceplate. Voice jacks in horizontally
oriented faceplates shall occupy the left-most position(s).
3.2 VERTICAL OUTLET POLE AND SURFACE RACEWAY
A. Vertical outlet poles and Surface Raceway refers to a surface raceway system used for branch
circuit wiring and/or data network, voice, video and other low-voltage cabling. Surface raceway
shall be used in solid wall applications or for applications where moves, additions and changes
are very typical to the workflow.
B. The raceway system shall consist of raceway, appropriate fittings and accessories to complete
installation per electrical drawings. Non-metallic surface raceway is to be utilized in dry interior
locations only as covered in Article 352, part B of the NEC, as adopted by the NFPA and as
approved by the ANSI.
3.3 HORIZONTAL CROSS CONNECT INSTALLATION
A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
TIA-568-C standard, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices.
B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18 mm (0.125 inch).
C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter
of the cable.
D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or
block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable
entrance into the rack or frame.
E. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
F. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that
can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,
where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.
3.4 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber splice tray or enclosure. No slack loops shall
be allowed external to the fiber panel.
B. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective fiber enclosure by mechanical
means. The cables strength member shall be securely attached the cable strain relief bracket
in the enclosure.
C. Each fiber bundle shall be stripped upon entering the splice tray and the individual fibers routed
in the splice tray.
D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the splice enclosure. Cables labeled
within the bundle shall not be acceptable.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 7 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 E. A maximum of 12 strands of fiber shall be spliced in each tray
F. All spare strands shall be installed into spare splice trays.
3.5 COPPER TERMINATION HARDWARE
A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
ANSI/TIA-568-C standard, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practice.
B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 3.18mm (0.125 inch). Bend radius of the cable
in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable.
C. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels or blocks. Each panel or
block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable
entrance into the rack or frame.
D. The cable jacket shall be maintained to within 25 mm (one inch) of the termination point.
E. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that
can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,
where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable.
3.6 RACKS
A. Racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using minimum 3/8” hardware or as
required by local codes.
B. Racks shall be placed with a 36-inch (minimum) clearance from the walls on all sides of the
rack. When mounted in a row, maintain a minimum of 36 inches from the wall behind and in
front of the row of racks and from the wall at each end of the row.
C. All racks shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar in accordance with
Section 2.4 of this document.
D. Rack mount screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged
and left with the rack upon completion of the installation.
E. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on 4’ x 8’ x .75” void free plywood. The
plywood shall be mounted vertically 12” above the finished floor. The plywood shall be painted
with two coats of white fire retardant paint.
F. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be installed with the lowest edge of the mounting
frame 18” from the finished floor.
3.7 FIRE STOP SYSTEM
A. All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local inspection authorities
prior to cable system acceptance. The firestop solution must be DHEC approved.
3.8 GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. The TBB shall be designed and/or approved by a qualified PE, licensed in the state that the
work is to be performed. The TBB shall adhere to the recommendations of the J-STD-607-A
standard, and shall be installed in accordance with best industry practice.
B. A licensed electrical contractor shall perform installation and termination of the main bonding
conductor to the building service entrance ground.
3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. The contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling system for the cable
installation. The Owner will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the successful
contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the
system: racks, cables, panels and outlets. The labeling system shall designate the cables
origin and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. Racks and patch
panels shall be labeled to identify the location within the cable system infrastructure. All
labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall
reflect the appropriate labeling scheme.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 8 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 B. All label printing will be machine generated by hand-held printers using indelible ink ribbons or
cartridges. Self-laminating labels will be used on cable jackets, appropriately sized to the OD of
the cable, and placed within view at the termination point on each end. Outlet, patch panel and
wiring block labels shall be installed on, or in, the space provided on the device.
3.10 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
A. General
1. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to
verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the
requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C-1 Section 11. All pairs of each installed cable shall be
verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including
but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector
blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors in all
cables installed.
2. All cables shall be tested in accordance with this document, the ANSI/TIA standards,
guidelines and best industry practice. If any of these are in conflict, the Contractor shall
bring any discrepancies to the attention of the project team for clarification and resolution.
B. Copper Channel Testing
C. All twisted-pair copper cable links shall be tested for compliance to the requirements in
ANSI/TIA568-C.2 for the appropriate Category of cabling installed.
D. Fiber Testing
1. All installed fiber shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 section 11.
2. For horizontal cabling system using multimode optical fiber, attenuation shall be measured
in one direction at either 850 nanometer (nm) or 1300 nm using an LED light source and
power meter.
3. Backbone multimode fiber cabling shall be tested at both 850 nm and 1300 nm (or 1310
and 1550 nm for single mode) in both directions.
4. Test set-up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/TIA-526-14
Standard, Method B.
5. Where links are combined to complete a circuit between devices, the Contractor shall test
each link from end to end to ensure the performance of the system. ONLY BASIC LINK
TEST IS REQUIRED. The contractor can optionally install patch cords to complete the
circuit and then test the entire channel. The test method shall be the same used for the
test described above. The values for calculating loss shall be those defined in the
ANSI/TIA Standard.
6. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using two-meter
jumpers to attach the test equipment to the cable plant. The light source shall be left in
place after calibration and the power meter moved to the far end to take measurements.
3.11 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Upon completion of the installation, the telecommunications contractor shall provide three (3)
full documentation sets to the Engineer/End User for approval. Documentation shall include
the items detailed in the sub-sections below.
B. Documentation shall be submitted within ten (10) working days of the completion of each
testing phase. This is inclusive of all test results and draft as-built drawings. Draft drawings
may include annotations done by hand. Machine generated (final) copies of all drawings shall
be submitted within 30 working days of the completion of each testing phase. At the request of
the Engineer, the telecommunications contractor shall provide copies of the original test results.
C. The Engineer may request that a 10% random field re-test be conducted on the cable system,
at no additional cost, to verify documented findings. Tests shall be a repeat of those defined
above. If findings contradict the documentation submitted by the telecommunications
contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent determined necessary by the
Engineer, including a 100% re-test. This re-test shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 9 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 D. Test Results documentation shall be provided in electronic format within three weeks after the
completion of the project. The media shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the
words “Project Test Documentation”, the project name, and the date of completion (month and
year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair and
cable (or outlet) I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The
test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last
calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer
specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test
equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and
the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used
in the field test equipment.
E. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C. The appropriate level
III tester shall be used to verify Category 6 cabling systems.
F. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire (or fiber) test instrument shall be submitted as
part of the documentation package. Alternately, the telecommunications contractor may furnish
this information in electronic form. The media shall contain the electronic equivalent of the test
results as defined by the specification along with the software necessary to view and evaluate
the test reports.
G. When repairs and re-tests are performed, the problem found and corrective action taken shall
be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented.
H. The As-Built drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Their sequential number
as defined elsewhere in this document shall identify outlet locations. Numbering, icons, and
drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided. The
Owner will provide floor plans in paper and electronic (DWG, AutoCAD) formats on which as-
built construction information can be added. These documents will be modified accordingly by
the telecommunications contractor to denote as-built information as defined above and returned
to the Owner.
I. The Contractors shall annotate the base drawings and return a hard copy (same plot size as
originals) and electronic (AutoCAD) form
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 1543 - 10 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND

CONNECTORS REQUIREMENTS
 SECTION 27 3000
IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of conduits and pathway for telephone and
data systems as shown on Drawings and as specified.
B. Coordination with Service Provider.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
1. SASO 410 - Basic requirements for telephone sets.
2. SASO 821 - Cast iron manhole and hand hole covers and frames for telephone purposes
3. SASO 969 - Methods of test for telephone sets.
4. SASO 1345 - Low Frequency Cables and Wires With PVC Insulation And PVC Sheath -
Part 1: General Testing and Measuring Methods
5. SASO 1346 - Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath - Part
2 Telephone wire for inside applications.
6. SASO 1357 - Electrical Installations of Buildings - Part 7: Requirements For Special
Installations or Location Section 707: Earthing Requirements for Special Installation of
Data Processing.
B. IEC - International Electro technical commission
1. EC 60189Low Frequency Cables and Wires with PVC Insulation and PVC Sheath.
C. STC - Saudi Telecommunication Company
1. Material Specifications.
D. ISO - International Standards Organization
1. ISO/IEC 1180 Information Technology - Generic Cabling for Customer Premises.
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code.
2. NFPA 78 Lightning Protection Code.
F. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturer Association
1. NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
G. EIA - Electric Industries Association
1. RS-453 Dimensional, Mechanical and Electrical Characteristics Deferring Phone Plugs
and Jacks.
2. RS-464 Private Branch Exchange (PBX) Switching Equipment for Voiceban
Applications.
H. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
1. Measuring Transmission Performance of Telephone Sets
I. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1. All Relevant Standards.
J. ITU - International Telecommunication Union
1. All Relevant Publications.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data on telephone and data systems and
components.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of telephone and data systems and accessories
including, but not necessarily limited to, service-entrance penetrations, mounting panels,
apparatus, racks, terminals, and switching equipment.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 3000 - 1 IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

 C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for telephone and data systems, including rack and
terminal connections. Also show wiring connections to electrical power feeders.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Deliver equipment and components in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which
properly protect equipment from damage.
B. Store equipment and components in original packaging. Store inside in a well-ventilated space
protected from weather, moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperatures.
C. Handle equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of
finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer’s written warranty for period of 1 year from Preliminary Handover
Certificate for the repair or replacement of defective materials and workmanship.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of systems and ancillary
equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory
use in similar service for not less than 10 years.
B. Installer Qualifications: Specialist subcontractor with at least 10 years of successful installation
experience with projects utilizing systems and equipment similar to that required for this project.
Subcontractor shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.
C. Materials and installation shall comply with the specified Codes and Standards.
D. Single Source Responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TELEPHONE SYSTEM
A. Provide complete digital Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) of capacity as shown on
the drawings, and shall include, but not limited to following:
1. PABX Switching Equipment
2. Operator's Consoles
3. Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
4. Power Supply and Backup Power
5. Raceways up to MDF
6. Local Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Port with TTY, Remote O&M Port with Dial-up
Modem
7. Software package
8. Auto Attendant and Voice Messaging System
9. Call Billing System
10. Power plant and Test Equipment
11. Special Tools
B. PABX Equipment:
1. PABX Equipment: The Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) shall be compatible
with (IP) technology features. The Private Automatic Branch Exchange (PABX) shall be
manufacturer's standard voltage as shown on drawings 60Hz complete with group
switches and related accessories and all other necessary works to complete the system
as shown on the drawings and specified herein confirming to Reference Codes and
Standards. The system shall have spare capacity of 25 percent and capability of
extending the capacity by 50 percent at any time.
2. The system shall be modular digital communication system of decentralized control
supporting simultaneous voice and data transmission over single pair of wires. Modular
architecture shall consist of Line Interface Modules (LIM) and Group Switch (GS). A LIM
can function as autonomous system or part of larger network. Each LIM shall contain all

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 3000 - 2 IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

 the processors, memory circuits, service circuits, line circuits and trunk circuits necessary
for call processing. Group switches shall be provided for interconnecting LIMs, and shall
be possible to support remote LIM operation.
3. PABX hardware shall be of compact design, i.e minimum of 16 digital/analog extensions
per PCB and 8 analog PTT lines per PCB with built-in filter. Each LIM switch shall be
totally non-blocking and of at least 1 Kilo time slot.
4. The system shall be manufactured for optimum video conference system (of other
manufacturers) via highest performance using 384 KB/s data streams from the Integrated
Services Digital Network (ISDN2) signaling system suitable for Video Conferences and
employs intelligent data system allocation for vision, data and control so as to ensure at
least 8 KHz (analog equivalent) audio bandwidth. It shall also be capable of higher data
rates using Ethernet or satellite circuits.
5. The system shall accommodate rotary dialing, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) and
Digital system telephone sets.
6. PABX equipment shall consist of a free standing cabinet(s) of modular construction to
facilitate maintenance, repair, replacement of parts, and expansion. Standard commercial
parts shall be utilized to the maximum extent possible.
7. Network System: The switching system shall be digital on high-speed multiplexed busses,
industry standard 2 Mbps pulse code modulation. The equipment shall have given a
reliable and efficient service to a reputable user carrying similar loads for a period of at
least two years.
8. The switching system shall employ stored program control (SPC). The modular software
executed by 32-bit processor shall control all telephone functions. The software operating
features and system configuration shall be changeable from either the attendant console
or from a maintenance console. The program must be backed-up on built-in hard disk unit
for quick reload after main power failure, i.e. reload shall not exceed 5-7 minutes. Program
shall be easily updated as new features are developed.
C. Line Requirements: As indicated on Drawings.
D. System Configurations:
1. Public Exchange Trunks: Two-way trunks to public exchange using loop start seizure of
public exchange and Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) pulsing of selected numbers to
public exchange. Loop disconnected pulsing to PABX for direct inward dialing. Trunks
shall be universal in that they provide Central Office Interface, Direct Inward Dialing (DID),
Recorded Announcement and Paging Interface features in addition to direct seizure of
PABX attendant trunks on incoming side and Direct Out Dialing (DOD) and attendant
access outgoing. The system shall support integrated Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
package to direct incoming calls to specific departments, should it be required by the
Owner in future. The system shall provide Message Intercept facility, automated attendant
function and voice mail system, if required by Owner. Dial tone will be furnished from
public exchange on seizure. Addition of unequipped trunks shall consist of plugging in
circuit boards and activating circuit by software change. Number of trunk lines shall be as
shown on the drawings. The system shall be capable of connections with Digital Trunks.
2. Attendant Console: Attendant console is primarily used for answering and extending
incoming calls, dialing out for restricted stations and general assistance. The console shall
have Visual Display Unit (VDU) indicating station and trunk status when dialing. Audible
tones shall be adjustable in volume level. Console shall be digital and capable of
operating with handset and/or headset. Operator console shall be hardwired over 2 wires
only.
E. System Features:
1. All plug-in modules (cards) must be inspected by hand and by computer. All cards must
be subjected to a minimum of 100 hour full operating time as a burn-in procedure before
placing in the PABX for acceptance tests. All cards must be shipped to site either plugged
into the exact position used for factory acceptance testing or individually identified as to
specific position used for acceptance testing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 3000 - 3 IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

 2. Station Restriction from Trunk: All stations may be denied the ability to place call on public
exchange and/or tie line trunk group.
3. All public exchange and PABX tie lines shall be transferred to pre-selected stations on
total PABX power failure.
4. Automatic Station Release with Lockouts: Any station going off-hook and not keying a digit
within 15 (max.) seconds between digits shall be released and transferred to line lockout.
Identification of station on lockout shall be given to attendant.
5. System shall support international interfaces, i.e. ISDN, S0, PRI, BRI, DPNSS, ISDN-
QSIG, CAS and CCS.
6. Maintenance Capacity: Faults shall be identified by time and date diagnosed, circuit board
to be replaced and then all function or replaced board shall be retested.
7. The subsequent commissioning of additional trunk plates, station line circuit board to be
replaced and then all function or replaced board shall be retested.
8. Timed supervision to disconnect an extension line and apply lockout condition in the
following circumstances.
a. The extension is seized and after 15 (max.) seconds no digit has been keyed.
b. An incomplete number is keyed 15 (max.) seconds.
c. A fault condition on the extension line, e.g. a permanent loop.
9. Emergency blocking to provide a method of degrading service to non-priority extensions in
the event of a major system fault.
10. A first party release on extension to extension calls.
11. Extension Line Testing: The system shall allow manual testing of extension lines.
12. Trunk Line Testing: The system shall allow manual and automatic testing of exchange
trunks.
13. Traffic Measurement: The system shall provide a traffic measurement of exchange trunks.
14. Fault Diagnosis: The system shall provide a means for detecting and diagnosing faults
automatically.
F. Basic Facilities and Requirements: The electronic key set shall be capable of functioning either
as a satellite of a PABX or for direct connection to the public telephone exchange. It shall be
suitable for executive/ secretarial systems, queuing systems and multi-line groups for internal
communications via local trunks and for external communications via direct exchange lines.
The system shall include the following features:
1. Last number redialing
2. Music on hold
3. Hands free telephone sets
4. Paging interface
5. Manual Message waiting
6. Display the dialing number and intercom calling station number for some sets
7. Ring again
8. Follow me
9. Facilities of tie lines with other PABX
10. Facility of using extension lines as data lines for computer
11. Classification of extensions
12. Extension to operator calls
13. Outgoing calls
14. Booking outgoing calls
15. Operator to extension calls
16. Inquiry calls
17. Transfer calls
18. Conference calls up to 8 parties per call
19. Priority
20. Common night service
21. Universal night service
22. Individual night service

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 3000 - 4 IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

 23. Direct in lines
24. Automatic call back
25. Individual call diversion
26. Individual call diversion when no answer
27. Flexible numbering
28. Line lockout
29. Choice of individual trunk line
30. Group hunting
31. Control of long-distance dialing
32. Direct speech connection
33. Call pick up
34. Grouping of trunk lines
35. Call waiting indication to extension
36. Common abbreviated dialing
37. Hot line
38. Trunk to trunk transfer
39. Calling names numbers display on digital instruments
40. Incoming external calls with:
a. Camp-on busy
b. Break-in and forced release
c. Operator recall
G. Telephone Wires, Cables and Raceways
1. The Work shall consist of furnishing and installation of all conduits and pathway for
telephone system. For raceways/trunking refer to Section 27 0500 - Communications
Systems - General Requirements.
2. The Contractor must provide new telecom ducts connecting the existing tie in points and
the service provider room. The contractor has the responsibility to coordinate and to
comply with all requirements of the service provider.
3. All telephone cables will be service provider scope of work such as:
a. Double shielded telephone cable shall be laid from M.D.F. to P.T.T. telephone
cabinet outside the building.
b. Cables from MDF to telephone terminal cabinets and outlets shall be solid copper
conductors, polyethylene insulated, twisted into pairs. This is part of service provider.
c. Outdoor multi-pair telephone distribution cables shall be of solid copper conductors,
polyethylene insulated, twisted into pairs, stranded into 25-pair groups. Core shall be
protected by a polyester film, longitudinally applied shield of copper, polyethylene
outer jacket. Underground cables shall be filled with petroleum jelly to prevent
moisture ingress.
H. Cable Splice Kits: Cable splicing kits shall be as per cable manufacturer's recommendations.
Closure sleeves shall be heat-shrinkable types.
I. Battery and Charger: Battery back-up shall consist of the required number of Lead Acid cells
mounted on a steel rack; DC voltage shall be as per manufacturer's written recommendations,
but shall not be in any case lower than 48 VDC. Battery shall be suitable for a minimum of 8
busy hour’s operation of PABX and all services in case of power failure. Battery charger, of
solid state circuitry, shall have voltage as shown on drawings AC input.
J. Test Equipment: The manufacturer shall provide all test equipment required to install the PABX
and associated equipment.
K. Tools: The manufacturer shall provide all specialized tools required to install the PABX and
associated equipment.
L. Main Distribution Frame (MDF): Shall be manufacturers’ standard wall mounted MDF for
equipment termination including carbon protection on trunks only; capacity as shown on the
drawings. MDF shall be compatible with telephone system equipment.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 3000 - 5 IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

 M. Telephone Terminal Cabinets: Shall be manufacturer's standard fabricated of painted
galvanized sheet steel with hinged door and locking arrangements and shall be provided with
terminal blocks. Weathertight cabinets shall be provided for external installations. Size of
cabinets shall be as shown on the drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
N. Surge Arresting System: Telephone system shall be equipped with surge arresting system for
external incoming lines and lines between buildings to protect telephone system terminals and
interface equipment from transients on telephone lines. Surge arresting system devices shall be
designed to be able to protect both analogue voice frequency equipment and high-speed digital
circuits providing optimum protection irrespective of the type of circuits in use. PABX and
switching centers shall be provided with surge arresting devices integrated with power filters to
provide complete protection scheme. Surge arresting system shall be subject to the Engineer
approval and shall be installed as per the approved manufacturer instructions and
recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The entire system shall be installed by specialist subcontractor approved by the Engineer.
B. Installation shall be in accordance with the approved drawings and manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. The incoming external cables will be jointed after entering the building with dry plastic type
cable prior to connection to the MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
D. For excavation and backfilling refer to applicable Sections in Division 31 - Earthwork.
3.02 ELECTRICAL SAFETY
A. Separation of telecommunication circuits from the building electrical system and electrical
equipment shall conform to the latest publications of Articles 800-3 (a) and 820-13 of National
Electric Code (NEC).
B. An earth or ground shall be provided and extended to the termination box and connected to
each station protector. The earth or ground shall be installed and bonded in accordance with
Article 250, 800 and 820 of National Electric Code (NEC).
3.03 TESTING
A. After installation of entire system and prior to acceptance of work, manufacturer's standard
tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer to show proper operation of each
equipment and the system entirely.
3.04 CONNECTION TO SAUDI-TELEPHONE LINES
A. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and follow-up with Saudi Telephone
Company for telephone connections and provide them required information and help to
complete all paperwork. Charges for telephone connection (by Saudi Telephone Company)
shall be borne by the Owner.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 3000 - 6 IP TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

 SECTION 27 4133

INTERNET PROTOCOL TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,
Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this section.
B. Requirements specified in the following sections apply to this Section:
1. Section "Basic Division 16 Requirements."
2. Section "Conduit Rough-In Systems."
3. Section “Raceways”
4. Section “Cabinets and Racks”
5. Section "Structured Cabling Systems."
6. Section “Data Network Electronics”
7. Section “Real Time Location Systems”

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Internet Protocol Television Distribution System for distribution of live and
recorded sources in high definition format including all software, hardware, licensing and
programming.

B. This Section includes requirements for video and sound system components including, but not
limited to, the following:

1. IPTV Middleware Servers.

2. IPTV VOD Server
3. Set-Top-Boxes.
4. IPTV Headend Devices.
5. Equipment Cabinets and Racks.
6. LCD Monitors.
7. Mounting Brackets.
8. Equipment Cabling.

C. The system shall comply the latest technology equipment.

1.3 DESIGN INTENT

A. To provide personalized and interactive information, education, services and entertainment

(including High Definition TV channels and High Definition on-demand video) to TV locations in
The building.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General: Provide an Digital Video Distribution System throughout the facility.

1. The system shall be able to deliver IP video and signaling over the Ethernet network to
enable video distribution and control throughout the whole building.

2.
The video distribution system shall be capable of distributing a digital video signal, CATV
and satellite program sources as well as locally generated program sources (e.g. DVD,
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 1 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 Character Generator, video on demand, etc) to any data network output locations as
described in these specifications and shown on Drawings. The system shall provide High
Definition video and audio to these locations.

a. The initial installed distribution system shall contain componentry to distribute 140
standard and high definition television stations, additional new satellite television
stations, Hotel locally generated program sources (VCR, billboard, DVD, laser disk,
satellite), local video origination stations and digitally stored content on demand
services.
3. Refer to video distribution riser diagram on Drawings and details for general information of
the system intent and functionality.
4. Provide video servers, IP receivers to receive incoming High definition and standard
definition signals from all stations, new satellite stations, video on demand server content
and Owner provided local origination channels, to distribute the streaming channels (high
definition) on the data network.

B. Extent of Digital Video Distribution System, modulators, high definition LCD flat panel televisions
and brackets as shown on Drawings. Digital Video Distribution system shall be comprised of, but
not limited to, IP distribution equipment for two-way communication over a single data cable.
Include servers, encoders, decoders, set top boxes, cable connectors, patch cords, splices,
software and licensing. System shall utilize the data network as its transport medium. Utilizing
equipment, components and cabling as listed in these documents and as shown on Drawings.

1. The main video head end shall be server based. It shall be connected to the data network
for connectivity throughout the building.
2. The system shall be controlled locally via set top box (STB).
a. The STB shall be connected to the local monitor (LCD high definition flat panel
television), with HDMI cable. The STB shall not require a fan or be PC based.

1.5 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. The installation shall include comprehensive audio/video systems consisting of modern solid state
type equipment providing the following:

1. Distribution of IPTV content to all television locations designated with a set top box from a
centralized IPTV headend located at the ground floor in the existing part.
a. The IPTV content shall include broadcast TV channels provided by appropriate TV
channel programming providers and arranged by the owner.
b. The IPTV content shall include interactive Electronic Program Guide (EPG) if the
data is available to the region and selected TV channels.
c. The IPTV content shall include on-demand entertainment content, including movies,
concerts, fitness, health. The IPTV system shall be flexible to accommodate such
content from the Owner and other content service providers, such as the
manufacturer.
1) When on-demand entertainment content are provided by content service
providers, such service providers typically will require royalty and service fees
from the Owner.
d. The IPTV content shall include a set of customized information pages facilitating
services and/or describing facilities of the properties. These customized information
pages shall be created by the manufacturer specifically for the hotel with guided
input from the Owner and be appealing and informative to guest rooms.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 2 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 2. System shall allow staff to have time-shift viewing flexibility in watching TV programming.
a. System shall provide Network Personal Video Recorder (NPVR) capability so that
guests can record interesting TV programs and watch them at convenient and
comfortable time to them, instead of being restricted by the broadcast time.
3. System shall have comprehensive management capabilities so that Owner and the
operational staffs can have clear, complete and detail understanding of the system’s
operations.
4. System shall provide the highest available quality of content, such as High Definition TV
quality for audio and video content.
5. Provide software to allow Owner to create and customize various forms of user interface
graphics, entertainment content, and TV channel selection and setting.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings and manufacturer’s literature shall include all information necessary to confirm
that the proposed system is in complete compliance with the Specifications.

1. All items of equipment must be new, in current production and currently eligible for
maintenance coverage.

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract, Division 01

Specification Sections and Section Basic Division 16 Requirements:

1. Detailed bill of materials/equipment list.

2. Manufacturer's product data for each type of product specified.
3. Details of IP video distribution system including, but not limited to the following.
a. Rack arrangements.
b. Network Interfaces and connections.
c. System interconnection with other systems.

4. Scaled diagrams indicating head end equipment layout and dimensions. Include
layout of equipment in relation to room size and other new system equipment in
that room. Include rack equipment layout.

a. Indicate connections to equipment supplied by others.

5. Wiring Diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring. Identify
wiring interface to other systems.
6. Field Testing Data.
7. Record Documents:

a. Provide record documents in accordance with Division 01 and Division 16

Specification Sections.

8. Warranty information.
9. Qualifications as required herein.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 3 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 1. Firms regularly engaged in manufacture and installation of professional
audio/visual systems, components and accessories, of types, capacities and
characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years and who shall be able to refer to similar
installations rendering satisfactory service.

B. Supplier's Qualifications:

1. Engage an experienced product supplier who is a factory-authorized sales and

service representative regularly engaged in the design and installation of such
systems to oversee the installation, trouble-shoot and make final connections at
headend equipment.
2. Supplier shall have represented the product and components being installed for a
minimum of 2 years.

C. Installer Qualifications:

1. Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience with projects

installing professional audio and video systems similar to that required for this
project.

a. Provide the names and certifications of two qualified Manufacturer certified

programmers currently on staff that are capable and experienced in this
type of installation.

2. Provide reference list of at least five similar installations successfully completed

within the last three years within a 500 mile radius. Include scope of work, contact
name, title and telephone number.

D. Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable requirements of

NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

E. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of

the authority having jurisdiction and NEC 800-Series articles as applicable to
installation, and construction of television equipment and signal distribution
systems.
2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 78, "Lightning
Protection Code," pertaining to television and antenna systems.
3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards 486A
Provide television systems and components which are UL-listed and labeled.
4. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with requirements of Stds Pub/No. WC 41,
"Coaxial Communication Cable," pertaining to coaxial cable.
5. EIA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Electronic Industries
Association Standards RS-170, 222, 232, 312, 330, 403, 412, 420, 439, and 455
pertaining to television equipment and accessories.
6. NESC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Safety Code requirements
pertaining to materials and installation of antenna supporting structures for MATV
systems.
7. FCC Compliance: Comply with Subpart J of PART 15, FCC Rules pertaining to
computing devices including Class A, Class B, personal and peripheral types.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 4 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 Provide equipment which complies with technical standards for both radiated and
power line conducted interference.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver digital video distribution system components properly packaged in factory-

fabricated type containers. Store components in original cartons and in clean dry space;
protect from weather and construction traffic. Dispose of all packaging materials and
include the cost of packaging material disposal as part of the base bid.

B. Handle equipment and components carefully to avoid breakages, impacts, denting and
scoring finishes. Do not install damaged equipment; replace and return damaged units to
equipment manufacturer.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all work to be performed with actual field and project conditions. At a minimum,
perform the following tasks prior to submitting bids or shop drawings for the project:

1. Perform field investigations to determine all necessary incidental items which will be
required for complete and proper installation of all work. Verify all items affecting the bid
price prior to bidding.
2. Perform all necessary field measurements to provide complete, accurate, and coordinated
shop drawing submittals.
3. Organize and attend all necessary coordination meetings required to assure proper
coordination and installation of all related work included in the project.
4. Coordinate will all vendors to provide the proper connectivity and interfaces for this
equipment to work in conjunction with other systems.

1.10 PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. At the time of Contract execution, the A/V Contractor shall assign a Project Manager to this
Project that will be responsible for administering all correspondence between the A/V
Contractor, administering all other trades, Construction Manager, Owner and
Architect/Engineer. The Project Manager shall also be responsible for the following:

1. Attending all meetings and reporting on project status, schedule, deliverables,

manpower, shutdowns, etc.
2. Approving all submittal information.
3. Supervising and providing implementation, installation, testing, certification
cutover, acceptance and documentation for all installed work.

B. The project team will consist of a Project Engineer that will be responsible for all on-site
day-to-day tasks, installation, and data collection and programming at the site.

C. Kickoff Meeting – Purpose of the meeting is to introduce the project team to the Owner and
Engineer and to identify any schedule conflicts, equipment lead times, review any
previously approved substitutions, environmental and space requirements, additional
data/electrical requirements and customer responsibilities.

1. Provide a list of milestone dates to meet the installation schedule including shop
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 5 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 drawing review, equipment delivery, programming review, customer review, etc.

D. Programming Design Meetings:

1. Provide a configuration review session for the operation of the system component
sources and outputs for the Owner’s review and input prior to beginning
programming. Be prepared with sample control scenarios and each system
input/output criteria for the design session. Provide follow-up information in
submittal format for written approval.

E. Installation Review

1. Complete a review meeting with the Owner and review all the required
inputs/outputs and scenarios discussed in the design meetings and implement to
verify with all the equipment in operating condition.

1.11 WARRANTY

All equipment, software, services, and programming shall be covered by a three (3) years parts
and labor warranty from date of acceptance. Acceptance will be provided in writing by Engineer
after system is installed, programmed, and tested to the satisfaction of the Owner use if systems
are being extended and there is a current warranty on the equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer
supplier to operate as a complete system and shall be accompanied by complete service
notes and drawings detailing all inter-connections.

B. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Each major component shall
bear the manufacturer's name and catalog number.

C. Careful attention has been made to specify current production models for all equipment
listed, however due to frequent updates of equipment in this field some model numbers
may become with the same features by the time this project is built. In such cases the
nearest equivalent product discontinued by the same manufacturer shall be provided.

D. Equipment manufactured by:

1. InfoValue.
2. Tangerine Global.
3. Exterity.
4. Tandberg.
5. Or approved identical.

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide complete and satisfactory operating IP digital video distribution as described herein, using
materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated. Use materials
and equipment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's standard design and

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 6 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 construction, in accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all
materials and equipment so they form an integrated system, with components and
interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions.

B. The digital video system shall integrate with the Owner's Wide Area Network (WAN)/Local Area
Network (LAN). Provide all necessary hardware/software required to connect to the data network.
Coordinate with Division 16 Section “Data Network Electronics” for connectivity and compatibility
requirements.

C. The digital video distribution system shall consist of centrally and/or remotely located multimedia
sources, file server(s), and streaming server(s) with local user control of the sources via the local
or wide area network. This system shall provide:
1. On-demand viewing of stored digital content over the television
2. Television on-screen video navigation, using graphical depiction of scheduled media,
allowing the user to have easy access to all scheduled media with a single remote control
button press.

3. Digital Video File integration:

a. Playback and control of MPEG-2, MPEG-4, windows media video files streaming to
the television
b. Ability to stream a video file to the set top box (STB).
c. Universal access to videos over the facility WAN.
d. Copyright management across the WAN. The system will allow only the maximum
number of concurrent viewers across the WAN to access each video file based on
the licensing for that specific file.
e. Ability to automatically delete expired digital video files when/if copyright license
expires.
f. Ability to add digital videos to the system at any time.

4. Unified control, at each TV location , of all remote resources and the local television or
projector from a single IR remote control or Web browser (via the local workstation), the
user can control all remote resources (play, stop, forward, reverse) and have the ability to
control the local television or projector (on/off, channel, volume, mute). When a multimedia
resource is selected, the television or projector shall automatically tune to the appropriate
channel; no user interaction is required.

5. IP multicast to minimize bandwidth and allow an unlimited number of simultaneous viewers.

6. IP unicast for stored video content delivery and control of content.
7. Support simultaneous multicast streaming video and unicast video on demand delivery.
8. Remote and local system configuration via Web browser interface.
Interactive User Help via Web browser interface.

D. VIEWING REQUIREMENTS
1. The proposed line up must support similar broadcast content provided by the local cable
television providers.
2. The vendor platform must provide international/foreign FTG content.
3. The platform must provide FTG video-based promotional materials. This is intended to be
a looping channel of video that can be added or subtracted as required.
4. The platform must provide that the guest can select a FTG digital music line up that.
5. The platform should allow a guest the ability to pause live TV for a maximum of 20 minutes.
6. The platform should support a customized channel lineup that can be configured for each
room based on a profile or selected input (e.g. a line up customized for a single room).
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 7 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 7. The platform must have an interactive program guide listing the program schedule for the
FTG video content.
8. The platform must allow custom program data to be imported from Client Systems to
update EPG with Client Systems channel and content information.
9. The platform must provide "instant" Response Channel Changing. Instant refers to a
channel change time of less than 1.5 seconds.
10. The platform must support digital rights management as required by content provider
agreement that specifies that DRM is a condition of carriage. (i.e. DRM may not be
mandatory for all broadcast channels).
11. The platform must support passing through 708CC / 608CC closed captioning data.
12. The platform must provide 'Television Episodes' as part of its VOD content library. A
"Television Episode' is a single 30 or 60 minute episode of a full season of network
programming which was recorded as a VOD asset and available to the guest to purchase..
13. The platform must support 'Specialized' content as part of its VOD content library. A
"Specialized' asset is defined as a VOD asset which is not sourced by a major studio..
14. The platform must allow users to Pause, Stop, FF, RW All Content
15. The platform must implement trick play support using an open standard RTSP
implementation.
16. The platform must provide an interactive screen for displaying VOD asset listings
17. The platform must provide the guest with a list of VOD assets based on a category.
18. The platform shall provide the guest with a search tool to allow the guest to search available
titles for specified keywords (i.e. action, western, director, actor, title etc.).
19. The platform should support multiple audio track capabilities where a guest can select
which language the VOD asset is to be played back in. This is only applicable to VOD
assets that are encoded with multiple audio track support.
20. The platform shall support audio subtitles for VOD programs.
21. The platform shall support the feature of providing the guest with a free preview on selected
assets prior to purchase.
22. The platform shall support the feature of providing the guest with a movie trailer prior to
committing to a purchase.
23. The platform must support a digital rights management as required by content provider
agreement that specifies that DRM is a condition of carriage.
24. The platform must display studio metadata for each VOD asset
25. The platform must provide sufficient VOD servers throughout the network. VOD
concurrency of 20% and a high availability configuration to achieve 99.99% availability
minimum, with 99.99996% is preferred.

E. INTERACTIVE REQUIREMNTS

1. The application hosting platform must be scaleable to support all concurrent connections.
2. The platform proposed must support the development for new applications which can be
created and/or purchased from 3rd parties.
3. The platform must allow the guest the ability to see a user interface in their chosen
language.
4. The platform must allow the user interface language to be preset on guest registration.
5. The user interface must be based on open standards and not be proprietary to a particular
vendor. (i.e. HTML, HTTP, HTTPS, JavaScript, etc)
6. The platform must provide the means to filter particular URLs from being received by a
guest set-top box.
7. The platform must provide an interactive weather application that allows the guest to see
the weather forecast for the local geographic area and simultaneously their home area as
described by their ZIP code in PMS.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 8 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 8. The platform must provide an interactive weather application that allows the guest to see
the weather forecast based on staff-entered ZIP code.
9. The vendor must provide an application that allows guests the ability to check their web-
based email using a Client user interface optimally designed for the television screen.
10. The platform should allow the integration of RSS content into the portal. This would be
used, for example, to import up-to-date news, weather & sports information based on guest
ZIP code.
11. The welcome screen must be configurable to provide the individual guest welcome. For
example, personalized with guest name, conference session – if guest part of a
conference, personal agendas, surveys, abstracts, etc.

F. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. The platform must provide operational metrics and reports so that Owneris able to report
on and analyze throughput, success/exception ratios.
2. The platform must provide scalability features which allow for channel, user, location, and
functionality growth.
3. The platform must be remotely accessible by both Owner and vendor with appropriate
measures to ensure secure platform access.
4. The platform must ensure guest information will be secure and protected from unauthorized
use.
5. The platform must provide the ability to remotely upgrade the STB population on a
scheduled basis, en mass or individually
6. The platform must have the ability to sustain a wholesale reboot by all the set top box
population (i.e. handles a "boot storm" without undo platform failures and wait for service
restoration).
7. The platform must provide help screens, dialogue tags, drop down instructions to assist
guests with their in room experience.
8. The platform must provide the support desk with the ability to remotely restart / upgrade
any set top box.
9. The platform must provide reports of active set top box, idle set top box, and set top boxes
not responding.
10. The normal operation is to have the service on in guest rooms. The specific guest greeting
portal will be created when guest registers at the hotel so that when the guests turn their
TV on they have their welcome page on their TV and "immediate" access to their services.
11. The platform must provide all status, alarm & performance information to one central
operations center.

2.3 Head End Requirements

A. The platform should be capable of running in a hardware load balanced environment.
B. The platform should be capable of operating behind generic Internet firewalls.
C. The platform must provide high availability and provide failover in the event of a failure in
a multicast control server.
D. The platform must support Moving Picture Expert Group standards. The platform must
support native MPEG-2 HD content at 16-20 MBPS or better, MPEG-2 SD at 2.5-3.0
MBPS or better, and MPEG-4 HD at 8-9 MBPS or better, SD at 2.2 MBPS or better.
E. The platform must allow for content updates with no service interruptions. Specify
exceptions which are in your proposed platform.
F. The platform must allow for remote content updates.

2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 9 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 A. IPTV Middleware Server

1. Windows 2008 or Linux Server OS

2. IPTV Middleware Server (Software)
3. VOD Server (Software)
4. Content Server (Software)
5. 1 TB RAID-5 hard drive.
6. 1 GB network interface (minimum).
7. Intel i7 processor.
8. Power cord.
9. Rack mount kit.

B. Set-top Box (STB) shall be used to convert the digital signal provided over the data network
into a signal that is connected into the TV. The STB should have the following features and
functionality:
1. VGA, HDMI output.
2. 100 MB network interface.
3. Embedded OS and browser.
4. IR remote control
5. Low profile; mount on back of TV.
a. Coordinate with mounting bracket to limit profile of bracket and Monitor.
b. Provide remote sensor for IR operation if necessary.
c. Integrate with monitor to display channel/program name on screen if STB
display is not visible to user.
6. Integrate with a LCD/Plasma Display and be capable of natively rendering HD
video at 720p and 1080i.
7. Support SD and HD content.
8. Support Dolby AC-3 audio content.
9. Keep all content in the digital domain when displaying on a LCD/Plasma display.
10. Must be able to be turned off remotely (remote network reboot).
11. Support IGMP v2 and V3.
12. Support unicast video on demand access using RTSP.
13. Capable of being controlled using an on-board RS-232 interface which is capable
of being controlled by a 3rd party serial IR automation controller.
14. FCC certification.
15. Noiseless, fan less and diskless.
16. Must solely rely on IP over Fast Ethernet for receiving all data - FTG, VOD, PPV,
applications, etc.
17. Tamper-proof form factor.
18. Allow definition of a pre-set volume limit.
19. Include audio outputs which can feed an external speaker platform.
20. Enable the ability to display a graphic over the video.
C. IPTV Set-top Box Management Server
1. Linux OS.
2. 1 GB network interface.
3. IPTV Set-top box management server (software)

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 10 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 D. IPTV Headend server equipment to be identified per manufacturer requirements to service
the client now and in the future.

1. High Definition Encoders – Shall convert analog signal to digital signal for the
purpose of storing content digitally and streaming live and stored content across
the data network. Encoders shall support the following general features:

a. Support multicast, unicast and simultaneous streaming.

b. Various analog sources including, but not limited to video cameras, VCRs,
AVD’s cable TV (CATV).
c. Support High Definition 1080p video.
d. Support s-video, composite and SDI video input and output.
e. Support balanced and unbalanced audio.
f. Support 10/100/1000 Mbps connectivity to the data network.
g. Provide (2) serial ports.
h. GUI based management via the web with SNMP.
i. DHCP and static IP addressing.
j. Encode 2-channel simultaneously; minimum
k. Encoders shall process the following video:

(1) MPEG 2 – 2 Mbps to 15 Mbps.

(2) MPEG 4 – 8 Kbps to 2 Mbps.
(3) Window Media – Video 28 Kbps to 4 Mbps.
Audio 5 Kbps to 192 Kbps.
l. Encoded video shall allow the digital stream to be recorded to a content
19” rack mount server.
m. Encoders shall be rack mounted.
n. Provide portable units to be used with video cameras for live streaming
and/or recording.

2. Content/Video on Demand (VOD) server(s) shall be used to store digital video

content for retrieval by the end user on an as-needed basis. The VOD server shall
have the following features and functionality and be sized to serve the campus
based on manufacturers distribution requirements:

a. Capable of streaming MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4 and Windows Media.

b. Capable of streaming video to set top boxes (STB).
c. Shall support the following controls:

(1) Fast forward.

(2) Rewind.
(3) Pause.
(4) Play.
(5) Stop.
(6) Display elapsed and remaining time.

d. Multiple VOD servers can be networked to increase storage and increase

throughout.
e. ADA compliant for “Closed Captions."
f. System management through the web.
g. 19” rack mountable.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 11 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 h. 1 Gbps connectivity to the network.
i. Support Linux or Windows 0S, coordinate with Owner IT staff prior to
ordering.

j. Large Linux OS Based VoD Server:

(1) Shall support 250 simultaneous users at 1 Mbps video stream

(2) 8 GB RAM
(3) 1 TB storage
(4) RAID 5

k. Large Windows OS Based VoD Server:

(1) Shall support 300 simultaneous users at 1 Mbps.

(2) 8 GB RAM.
(3) 1.2 TB storage.
(4) RAID 5.

3. Control server will provide authentication, authorization, permissions, program

guides and scheduling of the Digital Video Distribution System. The control server
will provide the following features and functionality:

a. Distribution of live streams and stored content.

b. Scheduling of events and system resources.
c. System administration of all system components.
d. Support LDAP, Microsoft active directory and Novell networking
application.
e. Support networking of VoD servers and load balancing.
f. Support digital signage application.
g. Search tool for locating content.
h. Support license tracking and control content usage as required to avoid
copyright infringement.
i. Control and schedule recording of live content or VoD server.
j. Program guide for all channels and live content including source and
program information.
k. Support creation and distribution of emergency events.
l. 19” rack mounted.
m. 1 Gbps network connectivity.

4. Program Sources

a. CATV Signal Input:

(1) Locate the Incoming Cable Television (CATV) Company signal

and re-route it to the Video Distribution System Headend for re-
distribution throughout the network. Provide amplification of
signal as indicated or as required in these specifications.
b. Satellite dish equipment

1. Parabolic metalized fiberglass reflector

2. Operating frequencies: 3.7 to 4 GHZ
3. Gain: High Gain Antenna(to be specified by vendor
4. Elevation-Over –azimuth mounts

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 12 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 5. Diameter 1.8 meter minimum
6. Front to back ratio: to be specified by vendor
7. Polarization: Horizontal and Vertical

E. 46" LCD Flat Panel Monitor:

a. Aspect Ratio: 16 x 9.
b. Resolution: 1366 x 768.
c. HD Display Standards: 480i, 480p, 720p, 1080i.
d. Contrast Ratio: 800:1.
e. Inputs: DVI-D, composite, S-Video, component, RS-232, RCA audio.
f. External speakers.
g. PIP/POP/Split Screen.
h. Wall mounted.
i. Support integration with flat panel overlay.
j. 3 year warranty.

F. LCD TV Wall Mount Bracket:

1. Low profile, less than 2 inches.
2. Pitch-Adjustable (Pull-N-Pitch Adjustment Control).
3. Q-Laser Locking Mechanism System.
4. 90 deg. Rotation adapter.
5. Use tamper resistant hardware.
6. Chief PLP series or approved equal.

2.5 CABLES/WIRES

A. Utilize factory-manufactured patch cords in lieu of field terminated cables and components
at rack connections and wherever possible.

1. Utilize industry standard color coded connectors.

2. Verify patch cord length and routing through sleeves/conduits prior to submittal
stage.
3. Utilize compression type connectors for all field terminated components where
required. Provide industry standards identifiable color rings indicating connection
type.

B. All cabling shall be plenum rated.

C. Provide all video cabling/connectors to produce the optimal video signal available from the
source to the display as available from the equipment.

D. Amplify video signals as required for intended video resolution.

E. A/V UTP Cable:

1. Enhanced skew free cabling.

2. 4-unshielded twisted pairs, in an exterior jacket.
3. 23 AWG solid copper insulated conductors.
4. Outer jacket shall be blue and identified per NEC.
5. Cable shall be plenum rated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 13 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
2.6 LABELING

A. Identify all system components and label for simple coordination with the operating and
maintenance manuals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the
performance of the IPTV system work.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install system in accordance with NFPA 70 and other applicable codes. Install
equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. All installation practices shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, these specifications
and drawings. Installation shall be performed in accordance with the applicable standards,
requirements and recommendations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. If, in the opinion of the installer, an installation practice is desired or required, which is
contrary to these specifications or drawings, a written request for modification shall be
made to the Consultant. Modifications shall not commence without written approval from
the Consultant.

D. Maintain a competent supervisor and supporting technical personnel, acceptable to the

University and Engineer during the entire installation. The Contractor shall submit the
name and contact information of the supervisor. Change of supervision during the project
is not acceptable without prior written approval from the Owner.

E. Install all equipment to industry safety and ergonomic standards and provide full
engineering and technical support throughout the installation process.

F. Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceway except within accessible ceiling spaces, where
open cable wiring methods may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable. Conceal wiring.

1. Install cabling in conduit/raceway in all areas with exposed structure.

2. Install all cabling as required for proper system operation.
3. Cable shall be homerun per manufacturer’s specifications.

G. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances and signal
levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks where required.

H. Install cables/conduits parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables/conduits by straps or
similar fittings so designed and installed as not to damage the cables. Secure cable at
intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from every cabinet, box, or
fitting.

I. Wiring Within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors to allow sliding cabinet
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 14 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 to open and rotate 90 degrees. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points
with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.

J. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered
terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment
enclosures.

K. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Use color coding of conductors and apply wire
and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in
coordination with system wiring diagrams.

L. Repairs: Wherever walls, ceilings, floors, or other building finishes are cut for installation,
repair, restore, and refinish to original appearance.
M. Adjust and balance all circuits as specified herein. Set all controls and software parameters
to render a fully and optimally operating systems and subsystems. All computer-controlled
functions shall require complete audio/computer/software setup, balancing, label-entry and
documentation.

N. Provide intelligible, permanent identification on or adjacent to all patching jacks,

connectors, receptacles, terminal blocks meters, indicators, switches, equalizers, mixers,
amplifiers, etc. The identification shall clearly indicate the function or circuit.

O. The installer must take such precautions as are necessary to guard against
electromagnetic and electrostatic hum, to supply adequate ventilation, and to install the
equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the operator.

P. Care shall be exercised in wiring so as to avoid damage to the cables and to the equipment.
All joints and connections shall be made with rosin-core solder or with mechanical
connectors approved by the Consultant.

Q. Coordinate all programming and protocols with the data network electronics provider to
ensure proper streaming and QoS to ensure clear delivery of signal to all set top boxes.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Mount all equipment in equipment racks designed to support the equipment.

B. Install all equipment per manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Meet with Owner for detailed system design and configuration review. Meeting to explain
features, functionality and operability of system. Provide two (2) sessions.

D. Identify, initiate, coordinate and complete all required programming of all equipment for
proper and safe operation of equipment and users.

E. Utilize optimal video inputs for connection of IPTV to encoder and set-top box.

F. Properly test all equipment for proper operation and provide final adjustments as required
for optimal audio and visual performance.

G. Provide all equipment test reports, signed and certified to Owner and Engineer prior to
substantial completion.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 15 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
3.4 LCD INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate exact unit location with drawings and exact field dimensions.

B. Install wall mount as required including bracing in wall as required.

C. Install all A/V patch cords, test and adjust unit per manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.5 LABELING

A. Provide labels on all cabling and patch cords identifying source, output, type to easily and
correctly indicate operation and use.

B. Provide at equipment (rack) and outlet as required.

1. Engrave faceplates for A/V outlets with input type or provide factory provided (non-
removable) markings acceptable to Owner and Engineer.

C. Provide labels at all equipment controls requiring user interface or not for Owner
troubleshooting and easy identification for future re-programming or configuration.

D. Labels shall be affixed free of smudges and fingerprints within three inches of termination.

E. Labels shall be viewable without rotating or removing patch cords or cables.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for systems. Division 16 will provide ground
conductor to signal grounding busbar per J-Std 607A.

B. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to

assure permanent and effective grounds.

C. Ground equipment, conductor, and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize
to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross
talk, and other impairments. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service

representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the
pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

B. Before final acceptance of the system, manufacturer-supplier of system shall, in presence

of Owner's representative, test each and every component and device in the system. Test
shall be documented with signed copy submitted to the Owner and Architect/Engineer.

C. The system shall be physically inspected by the Owner's representative and the
Architect/Engineer to assure that all equipment is installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner as called for in the plans and specifications.

3.8 SYSTEM TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 16 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 A. Upon completion of the system installation, and after circuitry has been energized with the
normal power source, the manufacturer/supplier shall test the system to verify the
following:

1. All components are operational and functioning properly to the system designs
intent.
2. Perform all necessary adjustments and balancing of all signal and amplifier level
controls to insure proper operation. Ensure output levels of sources are equal.
3. The complete system is free from grounds, open and shorts except for made
grounds required by the system installation.
4. The system is free of hum or noise including but not limited to ground loops,
improper impedance matching or improper shielding.
5. Configure signal processor to perform all gating, precedence, equalization and
compression to provide optimal performance.
6. Correct all of the above and retest to demonstrate compliance where required by
Engineer.
7. All testing shall be documented. Provide a signed copy to the Owner/Engineer
verifying the system is complete, and fully functional.
8. Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled and
interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

B. The manufacturer/supplier shall set all field adjustable components to optimize the system.
Balance all signals, adjust and verify input voltages, current settings and frequency
settings.

C. Occupancy Adjustments:

1. When requested by the Architect, within one year of date of substantial completion,
provide on-site assistance in re-programming systems to suit user operation and
actual, occupied conditions.
2. Provide up to three visits for this work.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Provide cutting and patching necessary to perform work per appropriate Sections. Clean
all equipment on a day-to-day basis and final cleaning of all equipment prior to turning over
to the Owner. All necessary cleaning referred to herein shall be cleaned to the satisfaction
of the Owner's representative.

B. Equipment:

1. Clean all equipment completely inside and out prior to testing.

2. Furnish cleaning consisting of vacuuming all panels, terminations, enclosures
(inside and out), etc. If equipment is wet or contains moisture, it shall be thoroughly
dried before testing.

C. Raceways and Junction Boxes:

1. Blow out and dry all raceways and conduits prior to installation of cabling.

D. Final Cleaning:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 17 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 1. Clean all devices, device plates, etc. left in "like new" condition to the satisfaction
of the Owner's representative prior to Owner occupancy.
2. Dispose of all rubbish and discarded materials and remove from the site, as
required.
3. Clean all equipment to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative.
4. Include all costs for service such as travel, mileage, expenses, labor, etc.

3.10 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare, set up, and supervise installation of system equipment to the satisfaction of the
Owner’s Representative and requirements of manufacturer warranty.

B. Include services of technician to review installation techniques and service final

connections, and system testing.

C. Final Adjustment Upon Achieving Substantial Completion of the Work: Adjust all operable
components to ensure that they are properly installed and functioning smoothly. Replace
any component which cannot be adjusted for proper operation.

3.11 OPERATION INSTRUCTION

A. The installer shall provide on-the-job training by a suitably qualified instructor, to personnel
designated by the Owner, to instruct them in the operation and maintenance of the
systems. At no additional cost to the Owner, the Installer shall provide a manufacturer’s
representative for such instruction in the event the Installer does not have qualified
instructors on staff for certain sophisticated equipment. All training shall take place after
the systems are operational, but before the acceptance tests. There shall be a total of 40
hours of training on the systems included in this specification, at the discretion of the
Owner. There shall be 2 follow-up training visits after 6 months, each an 8 hour training
session for a refresher on equipment as determined by the Owner.

B. The Installer shall orally instruct and demonstrate, to personnel selected by the Owner, the
Owner’s Operating Manual and all final drawings as provided for in this Section.

C. This training session shall be performed independent of any acceptance testing

procedures, and factory training at any manufacturer’s facility. This training session shall
be performed independent of any other clause in this Section.

D. Off-site Training - Provide the cost of tuition for six people, designated by the Owner, to
attend a service school held at the manufacturer’s location. Include transportation, meals,
etc.

1. 2 people shall attend programming and operational instruction.

2. 4 people shall attend service and maintenance instruction.

3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Equipment Manuals:

1. Approved copy of system submittal.

2. Provide a complete set of equipment cut sheets, parts list, including maintenance
criteria, "trouble-shooting" guide, distributor information and service information for
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 18 INTERNET PROTOCOL
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 all equipment provided.
3. Provide a complete set of instruction manuals; including complete written
programming instructions, programming documentation and system set-up
documentation.

a. Provide an additional quick-start guide with all commonly used procedures

for operating the system. Laminate and provide copies during training
session.

4. Provide all test results performed. Include manufacturer's certifications that

installed system complies with specification requirements.

B. Equipment Drawings:

1. Contractor shall provide a revised set of system wiring diagrams upon the
completion of the installation for subsequent testing of the system to show actual
cable routing, connections with other systems cable lengths values of all
equipment as installed and actual signal values as tested.
2. Utilize architectural floor plans for system layout.

C. Software:

1. Provide copies of all system programming for backup of systems and future
reworking/reconfiguration.
2. Provide all documentation to Owner on CD in PDF and Word format.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4133 - 19 INTERNET PROTOCOL

TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM
 SECTION 27 4219
IT NETWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Scope of work shall include supply, install, test and commission a complete Active
Networking Solution to encapsulate the entire project.
B. All LAN equipment must not use or rely on any proprietary features or functionality in order to
ensure interoperability with other IT Systems.
C. It is required to build a LAN infrastructure which can support data, voice, video and emerging
high bandwidth applications. The solution should be based on state of the art, standards based
products.
D. The proposed network solution must have at least a 10 Gigabit back-bone connection between
core switches, for supporting advanced converged applications including but not limited to IP
Telephony, Video on Demand and demanding data applications. A minimum of 1 Gb single
mode fiber optic uplink shall be provided from each core switch to each IDF.
E. All end users ports shall be 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet auto sensing & auto negotiation ports.
F. As the network will be required to support both Voice, Data and mobile applications the network
must support Quality of Service including but not limited to IEEE 802.1P and 802,1Q
prioritization and multiple VLAN trunking. All end user ports must also support Power over
Ethernet (PoE) for providing power to IP telephones. The Power Supplies provided within the
Edge Switch chassis are of a suitable rating to support the inline power cards.
G. The Core Switches must include 1+1 redundant power supplies. The Core Switch racks will
also house the wireless controller modules.
H. The above requirements together with the need to support LAN Telephony will require a highly
reliable infrastructure. Hence extensive resilience and redundancy must be built into the
network. The environment needs to be fully redundant. Where possible, any single point of
failure within the network should be avoided.
I. The preferred network protocol in use in the network will be TCP/IP. It is strongly recommended
that if other protocols are required, they be encapsulated in IP.
J. The network should have the required security components in order to protect the internal
network.
K. The design of the network will be based on the following principles.
1. An integrated network where a single network provides all communication services
2. A converged design that will permit a single access point to provide data, voice, video
services. This would mean that the network infrastructure should deliver a high quality of
service requirement and rapid recovery in case of failure of any component.
3. Scalability: All components of the architecture must support scaling to provide continuous
growth to meet the user demand and business requirements.
4. Availability: Components of the Architecture must provide redundancy to contain faults.
The redundancy must not compromise the utilization of the devices within the network.
5. Security: The architecture must provide an end to end security model that protects data
and infrastructure from malicious theft. The design of the network shall be done so as to
be secure in order that unauthorized individuals are not permitted to enter the network or
use its services. The design will aim to ensure complete privacy of information at all times.
6. Manageability: Ease of configuration, ongoing health monitoring and failure detection are
vital goals and must match the growth of the networking environment.
L. Network Model
1. The network will consist of core LAN switches which will be used to aggregate traffic from
all locations. All buildings must have access to the Core backbone switches through a
distribution layer interconnecting the access layer switches which provide Ethernet

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 1 IT NETWORK

 connectivity to the end user devices. The Core backbone and the Distribution layer
switches must be of the Active –Active load sharing mode capability.
2. The network will be divided into several broadcast domains in order to guarantee the
optimum performance. Broadcast protection is a mandatory feature on the backbone layer
of the LAN design.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions.
2. Bill of materials.
3. Detailed description of system operation (format similar to system description).
4. Name, address and telephone number of nearest full equipped service organization.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring and /or schematic diagrams of the complete system as proposed to be installed
(standard diagrams will not be acceptable).
2. Drawings showing mounting of all head-end equipment.
D. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 10 years documented experience with similar
scope as this Project.
E. Installer's Qualifications: Not less than 10 years documented experience with similar scope as
this Project.
F. Installer Qualifications.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer’s Qualifications: The persons installing the work of this section and their supervisor
shall be personally experienced in IT Network installation, and shall have been engaged in
such installations for a minimum of ten years.
1. Furnish to the director the names and addresses of five similar projects which the
foregoing people have worked on during the past three years.
B. Test Facility: The Company producing the system shall have test facilities available which can
demonstrate that the proposed system meets contract requirements.
1. If brand names other than those specified are proposed for use, pay all costs, including
travel expenses to the test facility for the director’s representative to witness test
demonstration.
1.04 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a 3-year period after Date of Preliminary Handover Certificate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS-ACTIVE NETWORK INFRASTRUCTURE
A. Core Switches
1. Core Switches shall be provided and installed in the Server Room at the ground floor. The
purpose of the Core Switches is to provide high speed (minimum 4Gbps) resilient
connectivity via diverse cabling routes to Distribution switched that aggregate the Access
Switches.
2. It is essential that the Core Switches shall be Layer 2/3 architecture and fully support the
VoIP, and other multimedia applications and are capable of Protocol Independent
Multicast (PIM), Source-Specific Multicast (SSM), Pragmatic General Multicast (PGM),
Fast Leave I Fast Join and IGMP V1 & V2 Snooping protocols.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for complete compatibility between the network equipment
and the services that are required to run on the network.
4. The Core & Distribution Switches shall provide the following minimum performance and
features:
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 2 IT NETWORK
 a. Dual hot pluggable power supplies with support for 30% expansion in switch capacity
b. Passive backplane architecture
c. 6-slot (minimum) modular Chassis.
d. Minimum 600-Gbps architecture.
e. Minimum hardware based forwarding rate on Layers 2, 3 and 4 of 350 Mpps.
f. RIP and OSPF routing protocol Support, IPv6 hardware support.
g. MPLS hardware support.
h. Support of multicast and broadcast suppression
i. High speed backplane for future expandability
j. Automated failover capability to ensure high network availability
B. The Core Switches shall provide support for the following protocols:
1. Layer 1:
a. IEEE 802.3ae Gigabit Ethernet.
b. IEEE 802.3ak 10G Base-CX4
c. IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit over Copper.
d. IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet.
e. Auto MDI/MDIX.
f. Auto Speed/Duplex.
g. IEEE 802.af Power over Ethernet.
2. Layer 2:
a. Store and Forward Switching
b. IEEE 802.1D Bridging.
c. IEEE 802.1w RSTP.
d. IEEE 802.1s MSTP.
e. IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation.
f. No less than 36 trunks, each containing no less than 8 links (ports) per trunk.
g. Trunking across modules must be supported.
h. IEEE 802.1Q.
i. 2048 VLANs simultaneously.
j. Broadcast storm thresholding.
k. Port mirroring
l. One to one.
m. Many to one.
n. VLAN to one.
3. Layer 3:
a. ARP (RFC826)
b. DHCP Relay.
c. BootP/DHCP helper.
d. Static routes.
e. IPv4, IPv6 ready.
f. ECMP,RIPv1, RIPv2.
g. OSPF.
h. VRRP (RFC2338).
i. IGMPv1, v2
j. PIM-SM and PIM-DM.
C. Quality of Service (QoS):
1. 8 Priority levels mapped to 8 queues.
2. IP/TOS and IPServ.
3. CoS - IEEE 802.1p priority tag based on the following
a. IP Address.
b. IP Type of Service (TOS)
c. Layer 3 protocols.
d. TCP/UDP port number.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 3 IT NETWORK

 e. Source port.
f. DiffServ.
4. Bandwidth shaping.
5. Rate limiting – per-port ingress-based enforced bandwidth maximums.
6. Guaranteed minimums – per-port, per-queue egress-based guaranteed bandwidth
minimums.
D. Security:
1. IEEE 802.1x
2. Switch CPU protection.
3. Virus throttling.
4. ICMP throttling.
5. Access Control Lists (ACLs)
6. Port security (MAC based, learned or specified).
7. MAC address lockout.
8. Source-port filtering.
9. Radius/TACACS+.
a. SSHv2.
b. SSL (Secure web management interface).
c. SNMPv3.
E. Network Management:
1. Ethernet in-band management.
2. Industry standard CLI.
3. Web Interface (GUI)
4. Telnet.
5. SSH.
6. BOOTP,TFTP.
7. NTP.
8. SNMPv1, v2c and v3.
9. RMON (4 groups), XRMON and sFlow v5.
10. Multiple configuration files (stored to flash).
11. Dual flash images.
12. IEEE 802.1AB Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
13. Friendly names for ports.
14. VLAN trunks.
15. Support for 1900 VLANs per switch.
16. IGMP Snooping v1 and v2.
17. Link aggregation across line cards.
18. Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP).
19. Jumbo Frames (up to 9216 bytes).
F. The Core Switches shall provide support for the following Security Features:
1. TACACS+ or RADIUS, to enable centralized control of the switch and restrict
unauthorized users from altering the configuration.
2. Standard and extended Access Control Lists (ACL) on all ports
3. 802.1 X user authentication (with VLAN assignment, voice VLAN, port security, and user
VLAN extensions).
4. 802.1 x accounting.
5. VLAN ACL (VACL). Port ACL (PACL). Port security. SSHv1 and SSHv2
6. The Core Switches shall be Cisco, HP, Extreme Networks or an equal approved
alternative.
7. To ensure network resilience, a full duplex 10Gbps connection should be provided to link
the core switches. The IT contractor should provide the appropriate bandwidth between
switches and demonstrate the connection capacity is suitable.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 4 IT NETWORK

 8. Multi-port fiber connectivity modules providing a full duplex fiber connection supporting a
minimum of 1Gbps data rates shall be provided from each Distribution Switch to each
Access Switch via diverse routing for resilience. Core switches are not to be used to
directly support Cat 6 copper access layer connections or external PoE devices. Separate
multi-port copper connectivity modules shall be included to provide 10/100/1000 Mbps
connection to local servers.
2.02 ADVANCED EDGE SWITCHES
A. Advanced Edge Switches shall be provided and installed in each unit/building. The purpose of
these switches is to provide high speed Ethernet connectivity to all connected systems and
other active IP devices and to link them to the network.
B. They shall supply power to devices supporting or requiring Power over Ethernet (PoE),
including IP CCTV fixed cameras, wireless access points, digital video intercom, IP protocol
conversion gateways etc.
C. The required Edge layer will be deployed in all locations requiring end user connectivity and
should be setup to realize the following:
1. Each edge switch should dual-home to the distribution layer switches via 10 Gigabit
uplinks
2. Support an STP technology that enables using both links from the edge to the distribution
3. concurrently and thus eliminate wasting bandwidth
4. Support L2, L3, and L4 capabilities
D. The required edge switch should meet the below shown requirements:
1. Layer 1:
a. IEEE 802.3ae Gigabit Ethernet.
b. IEEE 802.3ak 10G Base-CX4
c. IEEE 802.3ab Gigabit over Copper.
d. IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet.
e. Jumbo Frames 9KB.
f. Auto MDI/MDIX.
g. Auto Speed/Duplex.
h. IEEE 802.af Power over Ethernet.
2. Layer 2:
a. Store and Forward Switching
b. IEEE 802.1D Bridging.
c. IEEE 802.1w RSTP.
d. IEEE 802.1s MSTP.
e. IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation.
f. No less than 36 trunks, each containing no less than 8 links (ports) per trunk.
g. Trunking across modules must be supported.
h. IEEE 802.1Q.
i. Broadcast storm thresholding.
j. Port mirroring
1) One to one.
2) Many to one.
3) VLAN to one.
E. Quality of Service (QoS):
1. 8 Priority levels mapped to 8 queues.
2. IP/TOS and IPServ.
3. CoS - IEEE 802.1p priority tag based on the following
a. IP Address.
b. IP Type of Service (TOS).
c. Layer 3 protocol.
d. TCP/UDP port number.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 5 IT NETWORK

 e. Source port.
f. DiffServ.
4. Bandwidth shaping.
5. Rate limiting – per-port ingress-based enforced bandwidth maximums.
6. Guaranteed minimums – per-port, per-queue egress-based guaranteed bandwidth
minimums.
2.03 FIREWALL SECURITY DEVICE
A. Individual Firewall Security Devices shall be provided in the Recreational building Main telecom
room, in order to provide the network with secure connectivity, protection from malware and
malicious attack and to enable the establishment and enforcement of an application policy
within the development.
B. The specification of the Firewall Security Device shall be as follows:
1. Support of multiple 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet interfaces.
2. Support of VLAN.
3. Support of VPN
4. Support of Client VPN Services
5. Support of Site to Site VPN
6. Support of minimum throughput of up to 100 Mbps Support of 3 DES throughout up to 10
Mbps Support of active/active or active/standby failover.
C. Intrusion Protection
1. An Intrusion Protection module shall be supplied. The IP module shall detect, classify, and
stop malicious traffic.
2. The specification of the Intrusion Protection module shall be as follows:
a. Minimum 100 Mbps traffic throughput
b. Multiple 10/100 monitoring interfaces.
c. IDS and IPS service
d. Embedded web based management / administrative software tool.
3. If the Client’s performance expectations for any high bandwidth services cannot be
satisfactorily met by VLAN applications, consideration shall be given to use of dedicated
fiber pairs within the common optical fiber infrastructure. Any such requirements shall be
detailed and agreed with Client.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with the company’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preliminary System Test:
1. Preparation: have the company field advisor adjust the completed system and then
operate it long enough to assure that it is performing properly.
2. Run a preliminary test for the purpose of:
a. Determining whether the system is in a suitable condition to conduct an acceptance
test.
b. Checking and adjusting equipment.
c. Training facility personnel.
B. System Acceptance Test:
1. Preparation: Notify the client’s representative at least three working days prior to the test
so arrangements can be made to have a Facility Representative witness the test.
2. Make the following test:
3. Test each system function step by step as summarized in system description.
4. Supply all equipment necessary for system adjustment and testing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 6 IT NETWORK

 5. Submit written report of test results signed by company field advisor and the director’s
representative. Mount a copy of the final report in a Plexiglas enclosed frame assembly
adjacent to the console cabinet.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 27 4219 - 7 IT NETWORK

 SECTION 28 0513
IP CCTV SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Security Video System shall be an IP network based digital video system. The system will
utilize standard video cabling UTP CAT6A Ethernet and Fiber Optic Cable as a transmission
medium for video, and IP video encoders to create a high performance recording and virtual
matrix control system. The system shall provide full video control at the main security console in
the Basement, with an additional workstation in the Security administration office located in
ground floor. The IP network based digital video system shall provide unlimited expansion
capability for the addition or modification of video inputs. The system must support unlimited
cameras expansion without any additional licenses.
B. All cameras cables shall be in daisy chain loop as shown on the drawings. Monitoring and
recording location shall be in the Main Building & Fire Station.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and install all security video cameras, mounts, housings, power
supply systems, UTP cable, FO cable, network cables, connectors, industrial network switch,
field equipment cabinet and all other hardware and software to provide a fully operational
system.
D. Video monitoring of all new cameras shall be possible to integrate and monitor at the existing
security center. Review capabilities for the digitally recorded video via the secure network
specified without interruption to recording capabilities.
E. Additional Network video recorders and storage expansion recorders (if required) shall be
configured using fault-tolerant RAID-6 drive arrays. No other drive array configuration will be
accepted. Network video recorders and storage expansion shall be sized as per client
requirements. All inputs will be recorded at 30 images per second, 4-CIF resolution. Data will
be stored for a minimum of 15 days with 100% activity level at MPEG or H.264 compression.
F. The intent of this specification is to provide to the owner a networked digital security system
supplied by the Contractor and shall be a complete and operational system per the
performance requirements and objectives of these specifications. Contractor shall be
responsible for the coordination of related work with other trades affecting his work or the work
of others.
G. All system components shall be provided from single vendor. Single vendor solution shall
insure full integration & interoperability between all system components. Thus, resulting in
optimum functionality for the system & avoiding any compatibility problems.
H. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of a toll-free. 24-hour
technical assistance from the manufacturer itself.
I. The technical assistance shall allow for immediate technical assistance for either the
dealer/installer or the end user at no charge for as long as the product is installed.
J. All systems and components shall be provided with a one-day turnaround repair express and
24-hour parts replacement. The repair and parts express shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer on warranty and non-warranty items.
K. All manufactured products shall be thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
L. The manufacturer shall repair or replace without charge, manufactured products proven
defective in material or workmanship for the stated warranty period from the date of shipment.
M. The system shall be installed by a certified dealer/integrator. The dealer/integrator must submit
copy of his staff certificates before installation. Certification for installation shall be conducted
by the manufacturer and shall provide all necessary knowledge to fulfill the systemization and
deployment across diverse networks and infrastructures, as well as provide commissioning
abilities at the integrator level.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 1 IP CCTV SYSTEM

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable national and local codes or
standards current at the commencement of installation. The following list summarizes
applicable standards:
1. National Electrical Safety Code, current edition.
2. National Fire Protection Association National Fire Codes, current edition.
3. EIA/TIA - 568: Commercial Building Telecommunications Wiring Standard.
4. EIA/TIA - 569: Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and
Spaces.
5. EIA/TIA - 606: Administrative Standards for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of
Commercial Buildings.
6. IEEE, RS 170 Variable Standard.
7. NTSC/PAL
8. IEEE 802.3 digital data network standard.
9. Premises cabling standard EIT/TIA 568A.
10. Member, MPEG-4 Industry Forum
11. Member, Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) Forum
12. Member, Universal Serial Bus (USP) Implementers Forum
13. Contributor, International Standards for Organization/Electrotechnical Commission
(ISO/IEC) Joint Technical Committee 1 (JTC1), “Information Technology” Subcommittee
29, Working Group 11
14. Compliance, ISO/IEC 14496 standard (also known as MPEG-4)
15. Compliance, International Telecommunication Union (ITU) Recommendation G.711,
“Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of Voice Frequencies”
B. Where more than one code or regulation is applicable, the more stringent regulation shall
apply.
1.03 IP NETWORKED VIDEO SECURITY SYSTEM CAPABILITES
A. The IP networked video security system network shall be arranged so each area will operate
independently and shall communicate via a 1000baseT (Giga-bit) network at a minimum to the
System Manager. The system shall utilize Data network with IP protocols as a transmission
system & utilizing PoE feature to power up part of system components. Data network system
must have emergency power supply (UPS) in case for any power failure. The system shall
utilize virtual matrix switcher capabilities through the use of a System Manager. The System
Manager shall provide a user interface and database management of the IP networked video
security system. The System Manager shall allow for users to be restricted via software to
logical configurable groups of cameras, monitors and system operations.
B. The System Manager shall be capable of performing as a NTP Server for the entire system.
The IP networked video security system shall be synchronized to an NTP server so that all
system components are on the same time clock basis. The NTP server shall reside within the
system, and be capable of being driven by external time sources if needed. All time-zone
corrections shall automatically be provided in the system.
C. The System Manager shall be capable of performing as a DHCP and UPnP server for the entire
system and components. The System Manager shall provide all connection and management
communications between system devices
D. The System Manager shall be capable of incorporating RSA 256 bit public/private key
authentication in addition to custom bit public/private key’s. The system shall be capable of
authenticating any video produced by the encoder that originally produced the stream, NVR
recording the stream, operator who exported the stream, all with time/date stamped video. The
system must utilize IP encryption protocols to fulfill transmission security demands.
E. The System Manager shall manage rights and permissions for all devices, persons, and any
system video or other data.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 2 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 F. The IP networked video security system based digital recording and monitoring system shall
incorporate a fault tolerant architecture and shall include redundancy in critical areas of
concern. Encoder power supplies and NVR/storage box power supplies shall be capable of
redundancy. In addition, all NVR’s and storage boxes shall provide RAID 6 redundancy as a
standard in case of any system failure. In addition, Storage units’ pool should support hot
swapping between boxes in case of any failure.
G. The system shall provide an API/SDK that is capable of being used at a level that is consistent
with a full-featured gateway. The gateway shall provide RS232 ASCII interface, Ethernet
interface, and the ability to create custom plug-ins to the system user interface. The system
shall provide full API for all components, allowing other manufacturer’s to develop interfaces for
and leverage from the system’s capabilities.
H. The system must provide interfaces to other third party cameras, as well as, fiber channels or
iSCSI- based storage solutions. Allowing system administrators to utilize SAN storage
expansions for video recording. The IP networked video security system must be compatible
with other low current systems in the building. System should allow a level of integration
between it and Building Management System, Access Control System.
I. The IP networked video security system must support Analog cameras to be included in the
system. Special encoders/decoders to be integrated in the network. Encoders/ decoders must
be from the same manufacturer to avoid integration incompatibility issues.
J. The system shall provide multi-level diagnostics of each component in all critical areas. These
diagnostics shall be reported to a diagnostic console for processing. In addition, the diagnostic
data shall be capable of being scripted into actionable events within the system.
K. The IP networked video security system shall be able to handle future expansion of an
unlimited total capacity from what is shown in the drawings & bill of quantities, including but not
limited to cameras, monitors, alarm circuits and relay closures. No licenses cost needed for
expansion.
1.04 BASIC SYSTEM CAPABILITES
A. The following capabilities are considered essential for IP networked video security system
described in this specification.
B. The IP Based IP networked video security system software shall provide a built-in Digital Video
Virtual Matrix Switcher. The IP networked video security system shall support the ability to
switch any camera in the system to any monitor in the system, either through a PC
Keyboard/Mouse or a joystick controller to either an analog or VGA Monitor.
C. All components of the system shall utilize a Linux® Based Operating System for maximum
reliability, with the exception of the Workstation.
D. The IP networked video security system shall be an integrated hardware and software platform.
It shall provide distributed administration of multiple devices and administer rights and
privileges for all attached devices.
E. The IP networked video security system shall be optimized for surveillance monitoring
applications. as such, the system is designed to accommodate the expectation that video is
always live and at the maximum resolution the camera can support. To mitigate the costs and
maintain performance, the system utilizes streaming video compression standards such as
MPEG4 and H.264. H.264 delivers the same video quality at a fraction of the bit-rates and
associated storage costs as traditional compression standards such as JPEG and even
MPEG4. In addition, support for Baseline, Main, and High Profile H.264 means the system will
have the flexibility and performance required to optimize the benefits that this new standard has
to offer.
F. The IP networked video security system shall provide easy to use GUI (Graphical User
Interface). Such GUI shall be utilized for programming, configuration, monitoring & controlling
for the system. The IP networked video security system shall support multi-language interface
for workstations. English & Arabic language interface must be supported.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 3 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 G. The System Manager shall manage system security, functioning as a key manager for user and
device authentication, and it shall route communication between all devices on large, sub-
netted security networks. The system manager shall store and administer secure keys and shall
have multi-level and user permission management. The system manager could be access via
management workstations.
H. The System Manager shall function as the default system time network video recorder, using
the industry standard NTP protocol, to ensure integrated devices are synchronized. The system
manager shall support UpnP architecture and shall provide DHCP services, supporting the
dynamic addition of network devices.
I. The System Manager shall store a database of device errors, alarms, and other system events,
and the comprehensive database shall be accessed and searched through the system log
window. The system manager shall allow for connection to an intelligent uninterruptible power
supply (UPS), and it shall allow for a message to be sent to the UPS in the case of a power
failure. As an additional feature, the system manager supports data replication if required: a
duplicate set of critical system data can be stored on a second System Manager, enabling
quick and easy transition to IP Video Security equipment. Recording capabilities must be
featured on a separated hardware units rather than the system manager.
J. The IP networked video security system encoders, workstations, all cameras, monitors, alarms,
relays, etc. shall be configurable.
K. Provide for unlimited system operators with personal identification numbers (PINs) with priority
levels, operator facilities, system roles, and camera and monitor groupings
L. The IP networked video security system shall have the capability of the following functionalities:
1. The system shall be fully distributed in nature so that each system device can remain
operational in a majority of modes without dependence on other devices.
2. Each individual entry in a sequence shall have the capacity to trigger PTZ camera presets,
patterns or auxiliaries.
3. Multiple users shall be able to view the same camera view or sequence simultaneously.
The system shall utilize Multi-cast streaming video to allow multiple users to view the
same video stream, though not necessarily synchronized with each other, without
affecting the bandwidth of the network.
4. Video titling shall provide for a 100 character camera site description (on/off), display time
/ date (on/off), set the display color (black/white), display a site message (on/off) and
define the screen block position for the title.
M. The IP networked video security system shall have the capability to create and execute a
system script used to control any system function, and may be combined into any order. The
configuration of such scripts shall be easy to use and follow the rules of drag and drop
configuration. The following actions are minimal requirements
N. Display video from any camera to a specific monitor or screen division, including changing
screen division views.
O. Reset any monitor to its’ original screen division and image.
P. Move system PTZ cameras to a specified preset location.
Q. Activate predefined patterns on system PTZ cameras.
R. Start/stop recording an event from any indicated video source.
S. Utilize Script Nesting, a means of running another script within any given script.
T. Activate system relays and send e-mail notification to any recipient via pop3.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 4 IP CCTV SYSTEM

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.00 MANUFACTURER

A. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer supplier
to operate as a complete system and shall be accompanied by complete service notes and
drawings detailing all inter-connections.
B. Equipment shall be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Each major component shall bear
the manufacturer's name and catalog number.
C. Careful attention has been made to specify current production models for all equipment listed,
however due to frequent updates of equipment in this field some model numbers may become
with the same features by the time this project is built. In such cases the nearest equivalent
product discontinued by the same manufacturer shall be provided.
D. Equipment manufactured by:
1. As per KACST requirements

2.01 SYSTEM MANAGER

A. The system manager shall be an integrated hardware and software platform that serves as the
system management component.
B. The system manager shall support database redundancy if requested by utilizing two servers
and maintaining constant synchronization between the two servers. In the event of a system
manager failure, the hot standby shall assume management responsibilities until the failed unit
is restored. No loss of functionality, recording, or monitoring capability shall occur during the
failover process.
C. The system manager shall be capable of serving as an NTP Server for the entire system. The
IP video security system shall be synchronized to an NTP server so that all system components
function on the same time basis. The NTP server shall reside within the system, and it shall be
capable of being synchronized to a more accurate external time source if required. All time-
zone corrections shall automatically be provided in the system.
D. The system manager shall be capable of performing as a DHCP server for the entire system
and components. The system manager shall assign IP addresses and manage leases for
automatic provisioning.
E. The system manager shall manage system security, functioning as a key server for user and
device authentication. The system manager shall store and administer secure keys and shall
have multi-level and user permission management.
F. The system manager shall manage rights and permissions for all devices, persons, and any
system video or other data.
G. The system manager shall maintain a system log of all user activity on the system including
time and date of user log-in, log-off, configuration changes made, video exported.
H. The system manager shall store the database of device errors, alarms, and other system
events, and the comprehensive database shall be accessed and searched through the system
log window in an interface.
I. The system manager shall allow for connection to an intelligent uninterruptible power supply
(UPS), and it shall allow for the initiation of a graceful shutdown should the UPS deplete its
stored charge.
J. The system manager shall be installed by a certified dealer/integrator. Certification for
installation shall be conducted by the manufacturer and shall provide all necessary knowledge
to fulfill the systemization and deployment across diverse networks and infrastructures, as well
as provide commissioning abilities at the integrator level.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 5 IP CCTV SYSTEM

2.02 NETWORK STORAGE MANAGER
A. The network storage manager shall record video and audio streams from IP cameras and video
encoders on the network.
B. The network storage manager shall incorporate the server functions and storage elements into
a purpose-built chassis.
C. The network storage manager shall use RAID 6 parity across the storage drives to protect
recorded data against a hard disk drive failure.
D. The network storage manager shall only use enterprise-level hard disk drives specifically rated
for operation in RAID systems.
E. The network storage manager chassis shall be designed for video surveillance recording
applications and encompass redundancy at all vital points:
1. Redundant, hot swappable power supply modules
2. Redundant, hot swappable system fans
3. Hot swappable O/S drive
4. Hot swappable CPU fans
F. The network storage manager chassis shall be designed for online service and maintenance
and cannot be removed from the rack when hard disk drives, fans, power supplies, or operating
system drives must be replaced.
G. The network storage manager shall be built upon a reliable and robust approved operating
system.
H. The network storage manager shall support a guaranteed recording throughput of 250 Mbps
per storage device with a minimum of 64 Mbps of read throughput. This throughput shall be
guaranteed under normal and error (RAID rebuild) conditions.
I. The network storage manager shall support any number of cameras so long as the maximum
throughput required is less than 250 Mbps.
J. The network storage manager shall support the recording of MPEG-4 and H.264 baseline, and
high profile streams from standard resolution and megapixel cameras.
K. The network storage manager shall support continuous, scheduled, alarm/event (including
analytics alarms), motion, and manual recording. Pre- and post-alarm periods shall be
configurable up to the total capacity of the system.
L. The network storage manager shall support bookmarking and locking/unlocking of video
content on the drives.
M. The network storage manager shall support privacy tools that allow administrators to establish
maximum retention times for normal, alarm, and locked video.
N. The network storage manager shall support an intelligent video grooming protocol that can
reduce the frame rate of recorded video as the video ages. Administrators shall have the
flexibility to determine whether to groom alarm video or leave it at its real-time level.
O. The network storage manager shall have the ability to report all diagnostic events, including
software status diagnostics to a centralized user interface. In addition, Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) traps shall be available for monitoring through a third-party
SNMP management console.
P. The network storage manager shall be fully managed from a remote workstation, including the
ability to configure settings and update firmware and software.
Q. The network storage manager shall be capable of interfacing with the Smart-UPS using a USB
connector. The network video recorder shall receive status and control signals from the
uninterruptible power supply (UPS) when it is in backup mode. This function shall inform the
operator about the amount of charge remaining and trigger a controlled shutdown when the
charge becomes zero.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 6 IP CCTV SYSTEM

2.03 RACK, 3 RU PER UNIT (RACK RAILS AND HARDWARE PROVIDED)
A. System Specifications
1. System Drive Linux CompactFlash system drive
2. RAID Level RAID 6 for storage drives
3. Effective Capacity Up to 27.2 TB
4. Drive Interface SAS/SATA II
5. Network
a. Interface 2, 1 Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports (1000Base-T)
6. Warranty
a. Ten years warranty from material defects and workmanship.
7. Capacities of storage must be determined by the tenderer that suffice the overall network.
2.04 VIDEO CONSOLE DISPLAY
A. The video console display shall decode and display IP streams from cameras and encoders
across the network.
B. The video console display shall drive two HD (maximum of WQXGA resolution, 2560 x 1600)
monitors through DVI connections.
C. The video console display shall decode video streams encoded in MPEG-4 ASP and H.264
baseline, main, or high profiles.
D. The video console display shall decode two 1080p H.264 baseline streams, four 720p H.264
baseline streams, twelve 4CIF H.264 baseline streams, or sixteen 4CIF MPEG-4 streams in
real time. Up to a maximum of 32 cameras can be displayed across both monitors.
E. The video console display shall use technology to automatically subscribe to a lower resolution,
lower bit-rate secondary stream from the camera to reduce network bandwidth and CPU
processing requirements as screen configurations dictate.
F. The video console display shall allow for simultaneous live and playback viewing of the same
camera on the same monitor.
G. The video console display shall utilize a heads-up, icon-based menu structure coordinated with
a CCTV-style keyboard, which shall allow operators to navigate through functionality without
losing view of the scene.
H. The video console display shall support searching for video content through camera, time, date,
or event.
I. The video console display shall support jog-shuttle-based rewind, fast-forward including frame
by frame advance and 300X fast forward.
J. The video console display shall support locking and unlocking archived video as well as
exporting evidence-worthy clips and snapshots to a USB solid state device or CD/DVD ROM.
K. The video console display shall be built upon the Linux operating system.
L. The video console display shall support systemized diagnostics with a management server or
user interface as well as transmit Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) messages
and traps to a network monitoring system. SNMP shall be compatible with SNMP versions 1
and 2.
2.05 VIDEO DECODER
A. The HD network video decoder shall be fully compatible with the system and from the same
manufacturer.
B. The HD video decoder shall support any digital video stream on the network and allow for the
decoding of up to 32 simultaneous streams from any video encoder or recorder. It shall also
allow for simultaneous and independent viewing of both live and recorded video.
C. The HD video decoder shall decode MPEG-4 and H.264 baseline, main, and high profile
encoded video streams.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 7 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 D. The HD video decoder shall decode up to sixteen 4CIF resolution, 30 images per second (ips)
MPEG-4 encoded video streams simultaneously, or up to twelve H.264 baseline, 4CIF
resolution, 30 ips video streams simultaneously, or up to two 1080p streams encoded in H.264
baseline profile. Additional streams shall be decoded minimizing the network bandwidth
consumption and CPU processing requirements by automatically subscribing to a lower
resolution, lower bit-rate stream from a given camera depending on current load and screen
configuration.
E. The HD video decoder shall drive two high-resolution monitors through DVI connections for
displaying the video footage.
F. Diagnostics shall be systemized with other system components. Any faults shall be reported to
users that have subscribed to diagnostic alarms regardless of where the user is located. In
addition, the HD video decoder shall also support SNMP messages and traps and be
compatible with SNMP versions 1 and 2.
G. Supplied Accessories
2.06 JOYSTICK CONTROLLER / KEYBOARD
A. The keyboard shall be compatible with all system components distributed, network video
management components. One keyboard can control all system cameras through a video
console display or DVR display.
B. The keyboard controls are located on three modules in the keyboard. Modules shall be capable
of rotating to suit user preferences. The keyboard modules shall include a variable speed,
vector-solving joystick for precise PTZ control, jog/shuttle for playback control and pattern
control, a keypad for camera and monitor control, and a built-in speaker. The keyboard shall
have LED buttons that work in conjunction with the feature being used.
C. The keyboard shall be part of an integrated system and shall be configured so any number of
keyboards can be added to the system. When combined with user interfaces (UIs), network
storage managers (NSM’s), encoders, IP camera, and video consoles, the keyboard forms an
integral part of a complete network-based video control system.
2.07 WORKSTATION
A. The workstation shall be a high end personal computer with two DVI-I monitor outputs, USB
keyboard, and mouse.
B. The workstation shall use a graphical user interface and keyboard/mouse that runs on
C. 64-bit Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate for monitoring live and recorded video, and virtual matrix
functionality that shall allow operators to see and respond to any alarm from any device on the
network as well as direct any camera to any monitor on the network.
D. The workstation shall allow administrators to configure devices, set up users, adjust network
settings, and create recording schedules. Permission to access these functions and all other
system services shall be configured to a fine level of detail including the ability to restrict
cameras from viewers, restrict PTZ operation, allow or restrict digital zoom, Zone of Interest
operations, or the ability to configure maps. In addition, user permissions shall allow for
designated users to receive and respond to alarm and system diagnostic messages.
Administrators shall have the ability to prioritize user access to PTZ cameras.
E. The workstation shall have advanced search capabilities, event logging, and alarm interface
displays. The workstation shall export video and still images in multiple formats, including, AVI,
BMP, and JPG. The unit shall provide a front panel USB port and DVD/CD-RW drive to make it
capable of exporting video clips and still images to external media. Authentication software
shall be exported automatically for any exports.
F. The workstation shall allow users with authority to monitor content from standard resolution and
megapixel resolution cameras and encoders throughout the network. The workstation shall
display content encoded in MPEG-4 and H.264 baseline, main, and high profiles. The
workstation shall support cameras from multiple manufacturers.
G. The workstation shall be capable of decoding up to 16 simultaneous 4CIF resolution,

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 8 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 H. 30 images per second (ips) video streams encoded in MPEG-4; or 12 simultaneous
I. 4CIF resolution, 30ips video streams encoded in H.264 baseline profile; or 2 simultaneous
1080p video streams encoded in H.264 baseline profile.
J. The workstation shall be capable of minimizing the CPU processing load and network
bandwidth, a scheme that shall automatically seek out and subscribe to a secondary stream
from the cameras or encoders at a lower resolution when the display is changed to a
multichannel display.
K. The workstation shall support CCTV-style (joystick) keyboard control of Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ)
cameras and camera call-up.
L. The workstation shall detect the monitor’s native resolution; provide users with single,
M. 2 x 2, 3 x 3, 4 x 4, 1 + 5, 1 + 12, 2 + 8 displays for 4:3 aspect ratio monitors, and provide 3 x 2
and 4 x 3 displays for 16:9 aspect ratio monitors.
N. The workstation shall retain the camera’s aspect ratio and allow mixing standard resolution and
megapixel resolution cameras on the same display.
O. The workstation shall allow any combination of live or playback video on the same monitor at
the same time. The workstation shall provide time-synchronized playback of up to 16 cameras
simultaneously.
P. The workstation shall provide digital zoom capability for any camera in live or playback mode.
Q. The workstation shall provide a Zone of Interest feature that can generate up to six
independently controlled and zoomed images from a single image and allow operators to
maintain a panoramic view of the scene while closely monitoring selected areas. This shall be
accomplished without requiring additional network throughput.
R. The system shall be capable of customizing the display area to suit user preferences. All
aspects of the graphical user interface shall be capable of being resized, torn-off and moved to
other monitors, or simply hidden. The system shall allow up to 6 customizable workspaces to
be created and loaded with camera groups to facilitate easy and efficient monitoring. The
system shall allow for up to two detachable video display windows to accommodate up to a 32-
camera display.
S. The workstation shall automatically load a user’s language preferences, camera groups, and
screen configurations upon log on. The workstation shall also support languages that do not
use the Latin alphabet such as Chinese, Korean, Turkish, and Arabic.
T. The workstation shall notify designated operators of all alarms on the system in an alarm tab.
Video thumbnails shall be available for visual verification within the alarm monitoring
workspace. The system shall allow alarms to be acknowledged or snoozed by the operator.
The workstation application shall support the functionality to view procedures and instructions
for given alarms triggered to appear during alarm events, while generating detailed written or
verbal instructions to the operator as to the actions to be taken. An operator shall have the
capability of entering his or her own feedback to the given alarm. All user alarms and user
actions shall be kept in the system log for audit purposes.
2.08 OUTDOOR PANORAMIC NETWORK CAMERA
A. Fixed dome with multiple sensors that provides a broad overview with great detail.
B. With 180° panoramic view, smooth capture of movements at up to 30 fps in 3 x 4K or 20 fps in
33 MP resolution.
C. The factory-focused lenses eliminate the need for manual focusing.
D. The camera is effectively installed indoors or outdoors with a wide operating temperature range
powered by standard PoE+.
E. With weather shield that protects against sun and rain.
F. Equipped with video motion detection and active tampering alarm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 9 IP CCTV SYSTEM

2.09 OUTDOOR FIXED NETWORK CAMERA
A. Outdoor ready camera with IP66-rated operating that can operate at -40 to 50 deg. Celsius.
B. The network camera shall offer dual video streams in progressive scan format. Color and
day/night models shall be available.
C. Shall operate in all light conditions, including low-light environments and shall automatically
compensate for changing light conditions.
D. Must operate in total darkness, the nature of the possible events will be analyzed to determine
whether the situation requires a special application camera such as one that uses infra-red
illumination.
E. The extended platform shall give real-time video (30) ips with 720p HD resolution using H.264
compression for optimized bandwidth and storage efficiency.
G. The network camera shall an alarm input and relay output shall be built in for integration with
hard wired external sensors.
H. The network camera shall provide a removable, local storage medium (Mini SD) for scheduled
and event-based recording of images.
I. The network camera shall provide an accessory port for hardware expansion and two-way
audio and additional alarm inputs.
J. Color and day/night models shall be available for outdoor environments.
K. The network camera shall be capable of firmware upgrades remotely, over the network. In
addition, a built-in accessory jack shall provide hardware expansion capabilities for future
accessories such as two-way audio and hard drive.
L. The network camera shall provide auto back focus (ABF) functionality through a push button on
the camera. ABF parameters shall be configurable through a standard Web browser interface.
M. The network camera shall provide auto back focus (ABF) intervals and initiate when IR cut filter
is removed or when temperature thresholds are exceeded.
N. The network camera shall provide a service connector to assist the installer to set field of view
and focus the camera.
O. The network camera shall provide advanced low-light capabilities for color and day/night
models with sensitivity down to 0.12 Lux in color and 0.03 Lux in black-white (B-W).
P. The network camera (day/night model) shall have a removable IR cut filter mechanism for
increased sensitivity in low-light installations. The sensitivity of the IR cut filter removal shall be
configurable through a Web browser.
Q. The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams. H.264 and
MJPEG compression formats shall be available for primary and secondary streams with
selectable Unicast and Multicast protocols. The streams shall be configurable in a variety of
frame rates, bit rates, and GOP (a group of pictures) structures.
R. The extended platform shall give real-time video (30 ips) with HD resolution using H.264
compression for optimized bandwidth and storage efficiency.
S. The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af
to supply power to the camera over the network. The network camera shall also offer 24 VAC
power input.

2.10 OUTDOOR THERMAL PTZ NETWORK CAMERA

A. PTZ outdoor ready camera with IP66-rated operating that can operate at -40 to 50 deg.
Celsius.
B. The network camera shall offer dual video streams in progressive scan format. Color and
day/night models shall be available.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 10 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 C. Shall operate in all light conditions, including low-light environments and shall automatically
compensate for changing light conditions.
D. Must operate in total darkness, the nature of the possible events will be analyzed to determine
whether the situation requires a special application camera such as one that uses infra-red
illumination.

E. The extended platform shall give real-time video (30) ips with 720p HD resolution using H.264
compression for optimized bandwidth and storage efficiency.
F. Can pan 360° endlessly and tilt between -45° to +20° with a preset accuracy of 0.02°.The
operating temperature ranges between -30 ºC to45 ºC (-22 ºF to 113 ºF).
G. The network camera shall an alarm input and relay output shall be built in for integration with
hard wired external sensors.
H. The network camera shall provide a removable, local storage medium (Mini SD) for scheduled
and event-based recording of images.
I. The network camera shall provide an accessory port for hardware expansion and two-way
audio and additional alarm inputs.
J. Color and day/night models shall be available for outdoor environments.
K. The network camera shall be capable of firmware upgrades remotely, over the network. In
addition, a built-in accessory jack shall provide hardware expansion capabilities for future
accessories such as two-way audio and hard drive.
L. The network camera shall provide auto back focus (ABF) functionality through a push button on
the camera. ABF parameters shall be configurable through a standard Web browser interface.
M. The network camera shall provide auto back focus (ABF) intervals and initiate when IR cut filter
is removed or when temperature thresholds are exceeded.
N. The network camera shall provide a service connector to assist the installer to set field of view
and focus the camera.
O. The network camera shall provide advanced low-light capabilities for color and day/night
models with sensitivity down to 0.12 Lux in color and 0.03 Lux in black-white (B-W).
P. The network camera (day/night model) shall have a removable IR cut filter mechanism for
increased sensitivity in low-light installations. The sensitivity of the IR cut filter removal shall be
configurable through a Web browser.
Q. The network camera shall support two simultaneous, configurable video streams. H.264 and
MJPEG compression formats shall be available for primary and secondary streams with
selectable Unicast and Multicast protocols. The streams shall be configurable in a variety of
frame rates, bit rates, and GOP (a group of pictures) structures.
R. The extended platform shall give real-time video (30 ips) with HD resolution using H.264
compression for optimized bandwidth and storage efficiency.
S. The network camera shall support industry standard Power over Ethernet (PoE) IEEE 802.3af
to supply power to the camera over the network. The network camera shall also offer 24 VAC
power input.
T. The network camera shall have a window blanking feature to conceal user-defined privacy
areas that cannot be viewed by an operator. The network camera shall support up to four
blanked windows. A blanked area shall appear on the screen as a solid gray window.
U. The network camera shall use a standard Web browser interface for remote administration and
configuration of camera parameters including ABF.
V. The network camera shall support standard IT protocols.
W. The network camera shall support open architecture best practices with a published API
available to third-party network video recording and management systems.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 11 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 X. The network camera shall provide an additional processor for running Video analytics.
1. Analytic Suites shall be configured and enabled using a standard Web browser.
2. Analytic Suites shall allow remote operation and alarm notification when used with its
system or a third-party system that supports Analytics API.
3. Analytics for EP High Definition Digital Network Cameras including:

a. Abandoned Object: Detects objects placed in a defined zone and triggers an alarm if
the object remains in the zone longer than the user-defined time allows. An airport
terminal is a typical installation for this behavior. This behavior can also detect objects
left behind at an ATM, signaling possible card skimming.
b. Adaptive Motion: Detects and tracks objects that enter a scene and then triggers an
alarm when the objects enter a user-defined zone. This behavior is primarily used in
outdoor environments with light traffic to reduce the number of false alarms caused by
environmental changes.
c. Camera Sabotage: Detects contrast changes in the field of view. An alarm is triggered if
the lens is obstructed with spray paint, a cloth, or a lens cap. Any unauthorized
repositioning of the camera also triggers an alarm.
d. Directional Motion: Generates an alarm in a high traffic area when a person or object
moves in a specified direction. Typical installations for this behavior include an airport
gate or tunnel where cameras can detect objects moving in the opposite direction of the
normal flow of traffic or an individual entering through an exit door.
e. Loitering Detection: Identifies when people or vehicles remain in a defined zone longer
than the user-defined time allows. This behavior is effective in real-time notification of
suspicious behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school grounds.
f. Object Counting: Counts the number of objects that enter a defined zone or cross a
tripwire. This behavior might be used to count the number of people at a store
entrance/exit or inside a store where the traffic is light. This behavior is based on
tracking and does not count people in a crowded setting.
g. Object Removal: Triggers an alarm if an object is removed from a defined zone. This
behavior is ideal for customers who want to detect the removal of high value objects,
such as a painting from a wall or a statue from a pedestal.
h. Stopped Vehicle: Detects vehicles stopped near a sensitive area longer than the user-
defined time allows. This behavior is ideal for airport curbside drop-offs, parking
enforcement, suspicious parking, traffic lane breakdowns, and vehicles waiting at gates.
4. Analytic Suites shall be preloaded or configuration and alarm notification when used with
its system or a third-party system that supports Analytics API.
5. Multiple behaviors can be scheduled to work during a certain time or condition.
Y. Object Video Analytics for EP High Definition Digital Network Cameras
1. Object Video (OV) intelligent video analytics technology shall be embedded in EP network
cameras, enabling rule configuration and alarm notification when using OV ready systems.
2. OV analytics shall be made available in three suites: OV Security Suite, OV Security Suite
Plus and OV Event Counting Suite. These suites shall provide a spectrum of settings to
allow use of the behaviors in a variety of applications. The technology shall help users
identify situations of interest, such as surveillance and business effectiveness analysis.
3. OV Security Suite shall include Tripwire Detection, Inside Area Detection, and Camera
Tamper Detection behaviors: Tripwire Detection shall identify objects that cross a user-
defined line drawn within the camera’s field of view; Inside Area Detection shall identify
objects entering, appearing, or moving within a user-defined area; and Camera Tamper
Detection shall detect changes in the camera field of view, including obstruction of lens
(such as by cloth, spray paint, or a lens cap cover) and unauthorized movement of the
camera.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 12 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 4. OV Security Suite Plus shall include (in addition to all behaviors of the Security Suite) Multi-
Line Tripwire Detection, Loitering Detection, and Leave Behind Detection behaviors: Multi-
Line Tripwire Detection shall track objects that cross two defined lines, which can be
defined by parameters such as direction, sequential order, and the time it takes to cross
both tripwires; Loitering Detection shall analyze how frequently people remain for a
specified period of time within a defined area, allowing for real-time notification of
suspicious behavior around ATMs, stairwells, and school grounds; and Leave Behind
Detection shall detect objects placed in a defined zone and trigger an alarm if the object
remains in the specified zone longer than the user-defined time allows.
5. OV Event Counting Suite shall use advanced object calibration and additional features for
schedules, parameters, and multiple rules. The suite shall include behaviors for Tripwire
Counting, Enters/Exits Counting, Loiter Counting, Occupancy Sensing, and Dwell-Time
Monitoring: Tripwire Counting shall count people or objects that cross a user-defined line;
Enters/Exits Counting shall calculate the number of people that enter and exit an area
without using a tripwire; Loiter Counting shall calculate people who stop in front of a
defined area of interest (such as a display or product); Occupancy Sensing shall count
people, generating a new value every time the occupancy level changes and time
stamping each occupancy output, allowing the data to be used to determine average
occupancy levels or to correlate data to point-of-sale or other business scenarios; and
Dwell-Time Monitoring shall determine the time between which an object enters and exits
an area, provide queue size information, and allow assessment of wait times.

Z. Video Streams up to 2 simultaneous streams, Live stream at 30fps and recording stream at
5fps.
AA. Accessories shall include pan-tilt motor and power supply unit for pan-tilt motor.
BB. Field equipment cabinet to house the industrial switch.

2.11 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCH

A. 8 Ethernet 10/100 ports and 2 Dual-Purpose Uplinks (Each Dual Purpose Uplink port has one
10/100/1000 Ethernet Port and one SFP based Gigabit Ethernet port, one port active)
B. Extended temperature, vibration, shock and surge, and noise immunity ratings comply to
specifications for automation, ITS, and substation environments
C. DIN-rail, wall, and 19” rack mount options allow for deployments in a variety of control systems
D. 24/48/125VDC and 100-220VAC power input options cover a wide range of power
requirements for Industrial Ethernet applications
E. Support for SFP modules provides uplink connectivity supporting 100BASE-LX, 100BASE-FX,
1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX, and 1000BASE-ZX options. (GLC-LX-SM-RGD – 1Gbps Single
mode rugged SFP)
F. Alarm relay contacts can be used for an external alert system
G. To be housed in a Field Equipment Cabinet.

2.12 CAMERA ACCESSORIES

A. Housing
1) Outdoor Housing
2) Aluminum casing, polycarbonate sunshield and cable cover
3) IP66- and NEMA 4X-rated, IK10 impact-resistant aluminum enclosure
4) Include all necessary accessories
B. Pan-Tilt Motor

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 13 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 1) Pan range 0° to 355°
2) Tilt range 10° to -80°
3) Pan speed 7.5°/s
4) Tilt speed 6°/s
5) Designed for operator control
6) Consumption: 30 W
7) Input: 24 V AC 50/60 Hz
8) Include all necessary accessories
C. Pole Mount Accessories
D. Power Supply Unit
1) Vandal proof – PSU Box
2) AC Input: 100-120VAC / 220-240VAC, max 800mA / 400mA, 80VA
3) AC Output: 24VAC, max 63VA
2.13 SINGLE-CHANNEL ENCODERS
A. The dual-stream video encoder shall be a high performance, single-input video encoding unit,
and it shall be able to convert live analog video signals into dual MPEG-4 streams. The dual-
stream video encoder shall process up to 30 high quality images per second, per stream, and
shall use motion adaptive deinterlacing technology to eliminate jitter in 4CIF images.
B. The dual-stream video encoder shall incorporate video optimization technology. The video
optimization shall allow for selection of the best image quality and frame rate for the target
component (decoder, workstation, console) without affecting the recording rate. In addition the
encoder shall provide three programmable alarm inputs (supervised or unsupervised) and one
relay output. The dual-stream video encoder shall be capable of encoding and processing
video and audio.
C. The dual-stream video encoder shall offer both unsecured and secured modes and shall use a
proprietary key system in the secured mode to prevent unauthorized devices from
communicating with the encoder. The dual-stream video encoder shall allow for maximum
system integration and shall be operated by either a 12VDC or a 24 VAC power source. Each
unit shall support NTSC and PAL video formats.
D. The dual-stream video encoder shall offer video loss indicator, audio input support, and PTZ
support via Pel P/Pel D (RS-422) and Coaxitron (up the coax) protocols.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All video signals from cameras in the system shall be home run to the terminating location as
indicated on the drawings. Video signal cable shall be CAT6AAA cable or equivalent. The
contractor shall ensure video signal integrity against loss or attenuation and provide clean roll
free switching. CAT6AAA cable lengths must not exceed Data network standards limitation (90-
100 meter)
B. Video and control data cable shall not be contained in any conduits with high voltage.
C. All wire shall meet code. Circuitry powering and connecting the camera units and the
monitoring equipment shall be concealed within building confines, conduit or wire troughs. No
wiring shall be left exposed and accessible to tampering or the harsh elements of the
environment. Conduit, greenfield or junction boxes will be used where necessary to conceal the
wiring. All cable utilized shall be identified with descriptive labels or keying system.
D. Final code and local requirements for all security related equipment is the responsibility of the
contractor and vendors. This includes but is not limited to National Electric Code, ANSI

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 14 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 standards, ADA requirements, state and local codes and others required. Client no
responsibility for these issues or their correction.
E. All wire will be tagged for its purpose, origination and termination. Conduit will be required
where necessary to protect wire, prevent interference and for code issues.
F. All CCTV components require a clean, centralized and independent power circuit of 120 VAC.
Supply circuit shall be indicated in the breaker panel.
G. The power outlets will need a clean and independent power circuit with an isolated ground
circuit. The circuit breakers for these outlets will be in a secure location in a locked electrical
panel. Surge Protection will be required for each circuit to the CCTV system.
H. The security vendor will be responsible for final calculations of power and signal runs to insure
the wiring supplies a non-degraded signal and power requirements that meets manufactures
specifications for the equipment.
I. Bending and pulling tensions will not be exceeded per the cable manufacturer specifications.
Contact manufacturer for specific requirements of the cable to be pulled.
J. All wiring/cabling must be clearly labeled and easily accessible with the beginning and
termination point with correct identification.
K. The security vendor will make every effort to prevent and reduce Ground loop problems.
L. The security vendor shall ensure that the equipment in the main command center provides the
lowest resistance path to ground.
3.02 NETWORK DISTRIBUTION
A. Encoder cable runs, and any IP transmission shall be of CAT6A with matching RJ-45 crimp
type connectors, and shall be installed with a control crimp tool, specified by the connectors’
manufacturer.
B. All video signals from cameras in the system shall be home run to the closest respective IP
Security Video System encoder secured in an electrical room or in a separate secured rack and
connected to the IP Network and recorded on the network video recorder.
3.03 CABLE TESTING
A. The following tests will be performed to ensure that the cable is installed correctly:
1. Wire Map
2. Length
3. Insertion loss (Attenuation)
4. NEXT loss (Near-End Crosstalk)
5. PSNEXT loss (Power Sum Near-End Crosstalk)
6. ELFEXT loss
7. PSELFEXT loss (Power Sum Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk)
8. Return loss
9. ACR (Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio)
10. PSACR (Power Sum Version of ACR)
11. Propagation Delay
12. Delay Skew
3.04 POWER
A. Provide power supplies as required at each camera location as designated on the power riser
drawing. Otherwise, Data network switches should provide injected power via cables (PoE).
Switches must be secured with backup power source.
B. All source voltage shall be conditioned to protect from environmental conditions, power surge,
power sag, under-voltage, over-voltage, line noise, frequency (variation of the waveform),
transients and harmonic distortion.
C. The circuit breakers adequate for the system load shall not draw over 80 percent of the rated
capacity under normal operating conditions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 15 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 D. Power quality shall be measured using a power quality analyzer.
3.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The installation site shall be completely clean and devoid of the dust and debris created during
the construction process. Operation of the equipment should not begin (even for testing
purposes) until all construction has been completed.
B. The HVAC system shall be sized to meet the requirements of the CCTV system. All BTU
calculations must be taken from the product specification sheet with a 25 percent growth factor
for future expansion.
C. The operating environment must comply with the environmental specifications (Ambient
Temperature, Storage Temperature, Operating Humidity, Maximum Humidity Gradient,
Operating Altitude and Operating Vibration) as defined in Section 2.
D. Upon completion of the work, remove excess debris, materials equipment, apparatus, tools and
the like and leave the premises clean neat and orderly.
3.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of a toll-free (U.S. and
Canada), 24-hour, technical assistance program (TAP) from the manufacturer. The TAP shall
allow for immediate technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the end user at no
charge for as long as the product is installed.
B. All systems and components shall be provided with a one-day turnaround repair express and
24-hour parts replacement. The repair and parts express shall be guaranteed by the
manufacturer on warranty and non-warranty items.
C. The Contractor or its designated subcontractor shall submit Certification of successfully
completing a Factory Certification and evidence that is completed at least three (3) projects of
similar design and is currently engaged in the installation and maintenance of systems herein
described.
3.07 WARRANTY
A. All security system components, Software, Hardware, and are to be fully warranted for parts
and workmanship for a minimum of one year from the final successful acceptance of the CCTV
system. In the event any component manufacturer warranties the item for longer than one year,
the vendor will repair or replace parts and/or labor per the warranty for the length of this
warranty at no cost to the client. Software/Firmware versions or other replaceable programming
and revisions are guaranteed to be the latest versions/revisions for this one year.
B. The vendor will contact the equipment's manufacturer one month before the warranty is to
expire to establish if a new version has become available. If newer versions become available it
will be provided and installed at no cost. If it is later determined that a new version had become
available and was not provided, the vendor will provide and install the current version at no cost
no matter when the discovery was made.
3.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include detailed manufacturer’s product specifications for each component
specified. Include data sheets reflecting the model numbers, features, ratings, performance,
power requirements, and dimensions
B. Shop Drawings: For the IP Video Security System equipment shall include plans, elevations,
sections, details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Include dimensioned plans and elevation views of components and enclosures. Show access
and workspace requirements. Shop drawings shall include mounting details for all racked
equipment. Such details shall include all mounting brackets, hardware, and connections to the
building.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring point-to-point diagrams. Differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 16 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 E. It is the Contractors responsibility to submit for approval the complete designed system
configuration and layout showing all devices, wiring, conduit, and locations along with other
required information as specified herein for the completely integrated system proposed for
installation
F. Coordination Drawings: Plans drawn to scale and coordinating locations of IP Video Security
System equipment. Show the following:
G. Location of items requiring installation coordination including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and other architectural features.
H. Product Certificates: Signed by the manufacturer as Certified for installation of equipment and
components certifying that products furnished to the Contractor comply with requirements
I. Installer Certificates: Signed by the manufacturer certifying that installers comply with
manufacturers requirements for Installation
J. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements of installed systems
K. Maintenance Data: Maintenance Data for Distributed Network Video Surveillance System
equipment and components shall be a part of the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout,” include the
following:
1. Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
2. Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
3. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended are to be stored at the
site for ready access.
4. Calculations and Parameters; Contractor shall submit for approval by the Owner, the
calculations used and plans and diagrams for the Field of View calculations, and
bandwidth calculations for the IP Video Security System. Submission as a minimum shall
include and address Low Level Lighting. Backlight compensation, and Lens conformance
with this Specification.
3.09 TRAINING
A. The entire system shall be tested and demonstrated in the presence of Client representatives.
The Contractor shall promptly make all corrections and adjustments necessary for intended
operation to the satisfaction of the owner. Vendor will be required to provide training in the
complete use of all parameters of the system to the staff as part of this contract, at no additional
cost. Training should be configured so as to take a person to a level of competence that will
permit their being melded into the ongoing daily console operations with a minimum of
disruption to the integrity of their normal daily functions. Training is to be provided at the site or
a facility maintained either by the vendor or manufacturer. All expenses such as transportation,
lodging and meals are to be borne by the vendor.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 0513 - 17 IP CCTV SYSTEM

 SECTION 28 3115
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent
reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It
shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire
Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on
the drawings and specified herein.
B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for Local
Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this
specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-
directed polling of field devices.
1. The Secondary Power Source of the fire alarm control panel will be capable of providing at
least 24 hours of backup power with the ability to sustain 5 minutes in alarm at the end of
the backup period.
C. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the
requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994.
D. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100 percent by a single-source U.S.
manufacturer .
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes
2. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station
3. UL 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
4. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
5. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications
6. UL 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
7. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances
8. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
9. UL 864 Standard for Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
10. UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
11. UL 1610 Central Station Burglar Alarm Units
12. UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances
13. UL 1971 Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired
14. UL 2017 General-Purpose Signaling Devices and System
15. The FACP shall be ANSI 864, Current Edition.
F. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level II Fire Alarm Technology)
technicians on site to guide the final check-out and to ensure the systems integrity.
1.02 SCOPE

A. The Aspirating Smoke Detector (ASD) shall offer various classifications to include Very
Early Warning Smoke Detection (VEWFD), Early Warning Smoke Detection (EWFD), and
Standard Smoke Detection (SFD) settings as identified per the requirements of NFPA.

B. The ASD shall be self-contained and monitored by a display featuring LEDs and/or LCD
to include a control system utilizing microprocessor-based technology with all functions
fully programmable, LED displays, alarm indications, airflow and detector faults.

C. The system shall constantly sample air from the environment. In operation, air shall be
drawn from the air sampling piping network, through a particle separator and a 30 micron
filter assembly being pulled through the detection chamber by the aspirator. The system

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 1 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 shall not rely on air currents to bring smoke to the detector. Inside the smoke detection
chamber, air shall be exposed to a blue LED and infrared laser light source. Light
scattered by smoke particles shall flow through the chamber and be detected by solid
state receivers, which shall convert the light to an electronic signal.

D. The ASD shall incorporate a dual light source technology system for the automatic
discrimination of signals from non-fire related sources, such as dust. The system shall
automatically compensate for changes in environmental conditions and the negative
effect of filter contamination.

E. The ASD shall display a series of LEDs or be visible via an interactive LCD. The ASD
shall include a Reset, Isolate, and Test functions on the front of the panel. The system
shall be configured by a programmer that is PC based via PipeIQ software.

F. The program shall allow the following detector parameters to be configured:

1. Up to five threshold alarm levels (Alert, Action 1, Action 2, Fire 1, and Fire 2).
2. Test, reset, and isolate functions from remote locations.
3. Design pipe network and ability to calculate obscurations levels, transport times,
sample hole diameters, flow and pressure levels.
4. Shall allow the ability to program the detector to three different settings: day,
night, and weekend mode.
5. Acclimate mode shall automatically adjust alarm levels within user-specified
parameters to reduce nuisance alarms.

G. The program shall allow the ASD firmware to be updated in the field by system installers
and maintainers.

H. The ASD shall have the capability to connect to the building automation/management
system via Modbus Protocol utilizing a TCP server or serial connection using RS-485.

I. Provide local networking capability and monitoring through the onboard Ethernet
connection allowing for up to six email addresses. Each address shall be configured to
notify the recipient of a specific alarm level, fault level, or isolate condition.

J. Detector Performance Requirements

1. Detectors shall be tested and approved to cover up to 8,000 sq. ft. / (744 sq. m).
2. Detectors shall be approved to monitor up to five alarm levels. Each level shall
be programmable and able to select desired sensitivity, ranging from 0.00029%/ft
– 6.0%/ft. UL approval compliance recognizes sensitivity ranges from
0.00029%/ft – 4.0%/ft.
3. Detectors shall report alarms and faults using fault relays or direct connection via
the SLC loop, if applicable.
4. Detectors shall include a field-replaceable filter and an internal particle separator
to reduce the amount of non-combustible materials reaching the detection
chamber.
5. The software shall provide pipe design, system configuration, and system
monitoring in a single software program. It shall store up to 18,000 events.
Events shall include smoke levels, alarm conditions, operator actions, and faults.
The date and time of each event shall be recorded.
6. The front panel of the detector shall indicate flow faults, configuration, external
monitor, time, communication, trouble, filter, isolation, voltage, and high flow
faults via dedicated LEDs or an LCD display.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 2 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 7. The ASD shall use ultrasonic sensors to confirm proper air flow through the pipe
network and produce a fault when there is a change of a user-settable
percentage from nominal air flow.
8. The ASD shall store vital statistics including airflow, obscuration signal level,
alarm levels, fan speed, and temperature. The frequency with which these
statistics are stored shall be adjustable.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. System shall be complete in all ways and shall include all engineering and electrical
installation, all detection and control equipment, auxiliary devices and controls, alarm
interfaces, functional testing, training, and all other operations necessary for a functional,
UL Listed, and FM Approved system.

2. Provide the services of a qualified technician to perform all system software modifications,
upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4
hours.
3. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to
modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of
devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for
devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or
extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-
down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.
B. Shop Drawings
1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with
drawings and specifications.
2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, equipment
layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.
3. Show annunciator layout, configurations, and terminations.

4. Prepare product data and site drawings indicating the system layout, including location of
modules, detection/aspiration unit, air intake ports, flow calculations, transport times,
power requirements, and sample hole obscuration sensitivity level calculations.
5. Show method and spacing of hanger supports on aspirating tube to the building structure.
C. Manuals
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance
manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets.
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections
between the items of equipment.
3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information
required to properly operate the equipment and system.
D. Software Modifications
1. Provide the services of a qualified technician to perform all system software modifications,
upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4
hours.
2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to
modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of
devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for
devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or
extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-
down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.
3. System commissioning data shall be supplied as recommended per manufacturer’s
instructions within 30 days of installation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 3 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 E. As-Built Drawings:
1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall revise aspirating detection system
design files, calculations, manuals, and operating instructions to agree with on-site
conditions.
2. Submit a copy of the manufacturer’s installation, operation, and maintenance manuals.
3. A Professional Engineers (PE) license in Fire Protection Engineering, a PE license in
Electrical Engineering, a PE who is regularly engaged in the design of fire detection and
alarm systems, or a NICET Level III or equivalent certified fire alarm technician working
under the direct supervision of a PE as qualified above. The PE shall have evidence of
not less than 4 years experience in designing fire detection and alarm systems.
4. Final construction drawings shall be signed and stamped/sealed and issued by a PE
registered in the jurisdiction where the installation is to be made either by the System
Designer or Engineer Consultant.
1.04 GUARRANTY
A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free
from defects and shall remain so for a period of ten years from the date of acceptance. The full
cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year
period shall be included in the submittal bid.
B. Manufacturer
1. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years of production experience in the
manufacturing and design of smoke detection devices.
C. Detector Requirements
1. The ASD shall have dual source (blue LED and infrared laser) optical smoke detection for a
wide range of fire detection, with enhanced immunity to nuisance particulates. The ASD shall
operate in air flows from 0-4000 ft/min (0-1,219 m/min). The system software shall provide
pipe design, system configuration, and system monitoring in a single software program.

D. The ASD shall offer Very Early Warning Smoke Detection, Early Warning Smoke Detection,
and Standard Smoke Detection settings. The ASD shall offer a wide range of sensitivity settings
from 0.00029%/ft – 4.0%/ft. The detector shall be capable of operating in temperatures from
32°F (0°C) to 100°F (38°C). Sampled air temperatures shall range from –4°F (–20°C) to 140°F
(60°C). Operating humidity shall range from 10-95% non-condensing.
E. Installer
1. The equipment installer shall be authorized and trained by the manufacturer and shall have
the ability to design a system based on code requirements. The installer shall be capable of
providing calculations, design, and testing documents upon request.

1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance and testing shall be on a semi-annual schedule or as required by the local AHJ. A
preventive maintenance schedule shall be provided by the contractor describing the protocol for
preventive maintenance. The schedule shall include:
1. Systematic examination, adjustment and cleaning of all detectors, manual fire alarm
stations, control panels, power supplies, relays, water flow switches and all accessories of
the fire alarm system.
2. Each circuit in the fire alarm system shall be tested semiannually.
3. Each smoke detector shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72
Chapter 10.
B. As part of the bid/proposal, include a quote for a maintenance contract to provide all
maintenance, tests, and repairs described below. Include also a quote for unscheduled
maintenance/repairs, including hourly rates for technicians trained on this equipment, and
response travel costs for each year of the maintenance period. Submittals that do not identify

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 all post contract maintenance costs will not be accepted. Rates and costs shall be valid for the
period of five (5) years after expiration of the guaranty.
1.06 POST CONTRACT EXPANSIONS
A. The contractor shall have the ability to provide parts and labor to expand the system specified,
if so requested, for a period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance.
B. As part of the submittal, include a quotation for all parts and material, and all installation and
test labor as needed to increase the number of intelligent or addressable devices by ten
percent (10percent). This quotation shall include intelligent smoke detectors, intelligent heat
detectors, addressable manual stations, addressable beam detectors, addressable monitor
modules and addressable control modules equal in number to one tenth of the number required
to meet this specification (list actual quantity of each type).
C. The quotation shall include installation, test labor, and labor to reprogram the system for this 10
percent expansion. If additional FACP hardware is required, include the material and labor
necessary to install this hardware.
D. Do not include cost of conduit or wire or the cost to install conduit or wire except for labor to
make final connections at the FACP and at each intelligent addressable device. Do not include
the cost of conventional peripherals or the cost of initiating devices or notification appliances
connected to the addressable monitor/control modules.
E. Submittals that do not include this estimate of post contract expansion cost will not be
accepted.
1.07 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall
fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. No. 13 - Sprinkler Systems
2. No. 70 - National Electric Code (NEC), Current Edition
3. No. 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
4. No. 101 - Life Safety Code
C. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the
appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation
shall be in compliance with the UL listing.
D. SASO - Saudi Arabian Standards Organization.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition.
F. Factory Mutual.
G. CAN/ULC - S527-99 - Standard for Control Units for Fire Alarm Systems.
H. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL
A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The
materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally
recognized approvals agency for use as part of a fire protective signaling system, meeting the
National Fire Alarm Code.
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers
recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams,
schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.
C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in
place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and
supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 5 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 D. All equipment must be available "over the counter" through the Security Equipment Distributor
(SED) market and can be installed by dealerships independent of the manufacturer.
2.02 CONDUIT AND WIRE
A. Conduit
1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state
requirements.
2. Where required, all wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not
exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are
contained within a single conduit.
3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and
shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors,
per NEC Article 760-29.
4. With the exception of telephone connections, wiring for 24 volt DC control, alarm
notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may
be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be
provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit
simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals.
5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control
panel equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP
manufacturer.
6. Conduit shall be 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) minimum.
B. Wire
1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760)
and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of
conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less
than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14
AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use
with a protective signaling system.
4. Wire and cable not installed in conduit shall have a fire resistance rating suitable for the
installation as indicated in NEC 760 (e.g., FPLR).
5. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted non-shielded
and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet when sized at 12 AWG.
6. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault.
7. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of T-tapping NFPA Style 4 (Class B)
a. Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions for
the number of T-taps, length of T-taps etc., are not acceptable.
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets:
1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose.
D. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit,
maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as
FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control
panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. The
control panel enclosure shall feature a quick removal chassis to facilitate rapid replacement of
the FACP electronics.
1. The FACP shall be capable of coding Notification Appliance Circuits in March Time Code
(120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2), and California Code. Main panel notification
circuits (NACs 1 & 2) shall also automatically synchronize any of the following
manufacturer’s notification appliances connected to them: System Sensor, Wheelock, and
Gentex, with no need for additional synchronization modules.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 6 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

2.03 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A. The FACP shall contain a microprocessor- based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU
shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the
system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules,
printer, annunciators, Digital Dialer and Ethernet Communicators and other system controlled
devices. Central station supervisory equipment shall be listed to UL-864 standards.
B. Operator Control
1. Acknowledge Switch:
a. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or
troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and
trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble
conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD
display to the next alarm or trouble condition.
b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo
sounders.
2. Alarm Silence Switch
a. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm notification
appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The
selection of notification circuits and relays that are silence able by this switch shall be
fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP
software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers.
3. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch
a. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits. The drill
function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset.
4. System Reset Switch
a. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically-latched initiating
devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and
circuits, to return to their normal condition.
5. Lamp Test
a. The System RESET switch shall also function as a Lamp Test switch and shall
activate all system LEDs and light each segment of the liquid crystal display.
C. System Capacity and General Operation
1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of, expansion to 50 intelligent/addressable
devices of any type, detector or module
2. The control panel shall include two Form-C programmable relays, which can be used for
Alarm, and Supervisory and a fixed Trouble relay rated at a minimum of 2.5 amps @ 30
VDC. It shall also include 2 programmable Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) capable
of being wired as NFPA Style Y (Class B) or NFPA Style Z (Class A). Either
programmable Notification circuit shall also be capable of providing auxiliary power when
programmed as such.
3. The fire alarm control panel shall include an operator interface control and annunciation
panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color-coded
system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of
the fire alarm system.
4. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without
special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm
control panel. The system shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expandable in
the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based
programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming
changes. The control unit will support the ability to upgrade its operating program using
FLASH memory technology. The unit shall provide the user with the ability to program
from either the included keypad, a standard PS2-style PC keyboard or from a computer
running upload/download software.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 7 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 5. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of
outputs. Systems which have limited programming (such as general alarm), have
complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or REQUIRE a laptop personal
computer are not considered suitable substitutes.
6. The FACP shall provide the following features:
a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. Drift compensation shall
also include a smoothing feature, allowing transient noise signals to be filtered out.
b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Maintenance alert, with
two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive smoke
detector dirt or dust accumulation.
c. The ability to display or print system reports.
d. Alarm verification, with counters and a trouble indication to alert maintenance
personnel when a detector enters verification an excessive number of times.
e. Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS presignal), meeting NFPA 72 requirements.
f. Rapid manual station reporting.
g. Non-alarm points for general (non-fire) control.
h. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software.
i. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.
7. The FACP shall be capable of coding Notification Appliance Circuits in March Time Code
(120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 ), and California Code. Main panel notification circuits
(NACs 1 & 2) shall also automatically synchronize and be programmable for any of the
following manufacturer’s notification appliances connected to them: System Sensor,
Wheelock, Gentex, with no need for additional synchronization modules.
D. Central Microprocessor
1. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art; high speed, 16-bit RISC device and it shall
communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include an EPROM
for system program storage, non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage,
and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure.
2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all specific actions to be taken in the
condition of an alarm. Control programming shall be held in non-volatile programmable
memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.
3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system
displays, printer, and history file.
4. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors.
5. An auto-programming capability (self-learn) shall be provided to quickly identify devices
connected on the SLC and make the system operational.
6. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program
utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off-line program the system with
batch upload/download. This program shall also have a verification utility which scans the
program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old
program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing
of any system operating changes. This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72
requirements for testing after system modification.
E. Local Keyboard Interface
1. In addition to an integral keypad, the fire alarm control panel will accept a standard PS2-
style keyboard for programming, testing, and control of the system. The keyboard will be
able to execute the system functions ACKNOWLEDGE, SIGNALS SILENCED, DRILL and
RESET.
F. Display
1. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator and
may also be used to program all system operational parameters.
2. The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all
intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 8 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 3. The display shall contain an alphanumeric, text-type display and dedicated LEDs for the
annunciation of AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, and ALARM
SILENCED, conditions.
4. The display keypad shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to
command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field
programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized
system control or programming.
5. The display shall include the following operator control switches:
a. ACKNOWLEDGE/STEP, ALARM SILENCE, DRILL (alarm activate), and SYSTEM
RESET.
G. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)
1. The SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 50 devices of any
type including: intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) addressable pull
stations, addressable Beam Detectors, intelligent modules (monitor or control). Each SLC
shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring.
2. The CPU shall receive information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to
determine whether normal, alarm, pre-alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector.
The software shall automatically compensate for the accumulation of dust in each detector
up to allowable limits. The information shall also be used for automatic detector testing
and for the determination of detector maintenance conditions.
3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72, Chapter 10 requirements and be certified by
UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument.
H. Serial Interfaces
1. An annunciator RS-485 bus shall be used to connect an UL-Listed 80-column printer
anywhere within the 6,000 range of the serial bus connection. The printer shall
communicate with the control panel using an RS-485 converter/interface complying with
Electrical Industries Association standard EIA-232D. Power to the printer shall be 120
VAC @ 60 Hz. The interface shall contain both a 9-pin serial and standard centronics
parallel connector. Either shall be capable of connection to a serial or parallel printer.
The bus shall also provide connection to additional addressable modules supporting
remote 80 character LCD text annunciators that mimic the standard panel display and
controls. Said annunciators shall support remote acknowledge, silence, drill and reset
functions and shall be enabled via a key switch. The bus shall also provide connection to
addressable modules supporting up to 40 LEDs for use with a graphic annunciator.
I. The control panel will have the capability of Reverse Polarity Transmission or connection to a
Municipal Box for compliance with applicable NFPA standards.
J. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) and Internet Protocol Digital Alarm
Communicator Transmitter (IPDACT). The DACT is an interface for communicating digital
information between a fire alarm control panel and a UL-Listed central station. When the
optional IPDACT Ethernet module is connected to the on board DACT, the system shall be
capable of transmitting contact ID formatted alarms to a central station equipped with a
compatible IP receiver via Ethernet over a private or public WAN/LAN, Intranet or Ethernet
1. The IPDACT communicator shall be an integral module component of the fire alarm
control panel enclosure.
2. The IPDACT communicator shall include connections to the alarm panel’s phone outputs
and shall convert the contact ID protocol in DTMF form into UDP Ethernet Packets. It shall
include the ability for simultaneous reporting of panel events up to three different IP
addresses.
3. The IPDACT communicator shall be completely field-programmable locally from a PC via
a serial port or via Ethernet and Telnet.
4. The IPDACT communicator shall be capable of transmitting events in contact ID format.
5. Communication shall include vital system status such as:
a. Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory)
b. Independent Addressable Device Status

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 9 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 c. AC (Mains) Power Loss
d. Low Battery and Earth Fault
e. System Off Normal
f. 12 and 24 Hour Test Signal
g. Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements)
h. EIA-485 Communications Failure
i. IP Line Failure
6. The IPDACT communicator shall support independent zone/point reporting via the
Contact ID format. In this format, the IPDACT shall support the transmission of
addressable points within the system. This format shall enable the central station to have
exact details concerning the location of the fire for emergency response. The IPDACT
communicator shall be capable of providing simulated phone lines to the FACP and panel
communication over IP shall be transparent to the panels normal operation over phone
lines.
7. The IPDACT communicator shall utilize a supervisory heart beat signal of no less than
once every 90 seconds insuring multiplexed level line supervision. Loss of Internet or
Intranet connectivity shall be reported in no more than 200 seconds. Alarm events shall
be transmitted to a central station in no less than 90 seconds from time of initiation to time
of notification.
8. The supervising station shall consist of smart card for backup of all account data. Backup
smart card shall initiate a new receiver with all account information in Less than 60
seconds from power up.
K. Enclosures
1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or semi-flush
mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected and painted red via the
powder coat method with manufacturer's standard finish.
2. The back box and door shall be constructed of steel with provisions for electrical conduit
connections into the sides and top.
3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall provide for the viewing of all indicators.
4. The cabinet shall accept a chassis containing the PCB and to assist in quick replacement
of all the electronics including power supply shall require no more than two bolts to secure
the panel to the enclosure back box.
5. The cabinet shall also support a mechanical secured optional dress panel limiting access
to the internals of the panel.
L. Field Charging Power Supply
1. The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24-volt power supply or as a
booster for powering Notification Appliances.
2. The FCPS shall offer up to 8.0 amps (6.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It
shall include an integral charger designed to charge 18.0 amp hour batteries.
3. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be
a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a control relay. Four
NAC outputs, wired NFPA Style Y or Z, shall be available for connection to the Notification
devices.
4. The FCPS shall optionally provide synchronization of all connected strobes or horn strobe
combinations when installed.
5. The FCPS shall function as a sync follower as well as a sync generator.
6. The FCPS shall include a surface mount backbox.
7. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the reporting of an AC
fail condition per NFPA requirements.
8. The FCPS shall provide 24 VDC regulated and power-limited circuitry per UL Standards.
Should this be updated to latest UL standard?
M. Power Supply
1. The main power supply for the fire alarm control panel shall provide up to 3.0 amps of
available power for the control panel and peripheral devices.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 10 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required by
adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies.
3. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over-current
protection shall be provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall provide an
integral battery charger or may be used with an external battery and charger systems.
Battery arrangement may be configured in the field.
4. The main power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground
conditions.
5. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary
power for the FACP.
N. Programmable Electronic Sounders
1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.
2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to
provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least
90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.
3. Electronic sounders shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans.
O. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971 and shall meet
1. the following criteria:
2. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second.
3. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
4. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971.
P. Audible/Visual Combination Devices
1. Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility.
2. Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility.
Q. Specific System Operations
1. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the system may
be independently programmed for verification of alarm signals. The alarm verification time
period shall not exceed 2 minutes.
2. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be
enabled or disabled through the system keypad.
3. Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic
functions:
a. Device status
b. Device type
c. Custom device label
d. Device zone assignments
4. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report
will be generated and printed, listing all system status.
5. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a
history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 500 events. Each of these activations will
be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The contents
of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its
entirety.
a. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory
for history storage are not acceptable substitutes.
6. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically
interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a
period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is
above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the
particular detector will be annunciated on the system display. This feature shall in no way
inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special
hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 11 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 7. Pre-Alarm Function: The system shall provide two levels of pre-alarm warning to give
advance notice of a possible fire situation. Both pre-alarm levels shall be fully field
adjustable. The first level shall give an audible indication at the panel. The second level
shall give an audible indication and may also activate control relays. The system shall also
have the ability to activate local detector sounder bases at the pre-alarm level, to assist in
avoiding nuisance alarms.
8. The fire alarm control panel shall include Silent and Audible Walk Test functions
a. - Silent and Audible. It shall include the ability to test initiating device circuits and
Notification Appliance Circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the
system. The operation shall be as follows:
b. The Silent Walk Test will not sound NACs but will store the Walk Test information in
History for later viewing.
c. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected
to participate in Walk Test.
d. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs.
e. Walk Test shall be selectable on a per device/circuit basis. All devices and circuits
which are not selected for Walk Test shall continue to provide fire protection and if an
alarm is detected, will exit Walk Test and activate all programmed alarm functions.
f. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer.
9. Waterflow Operation: An alarm from a waterflow detection device shall activate the
appropriate alarm message on the control panel display; turn on all programmed
Notification Appliance Circuits and shall not be affected by the Signal Silence switch.
10. Supervisory Operation: An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate
indication on the control panel display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause
the system to enter the trouble mode.
11. Signal Silence Operation: The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit
(notification circuit or relay) to deactivate upon depression of the Signal Silence switch.
12. Non-Alarm Input Operation: Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used
as a non-alarm input to monitor normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions
are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices.
2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Addressable Pull Box (Manual Station)
1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module
status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after
actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a
key.
2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key
type reset.
3. Manual pull stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating
a. instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the
b. stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.
B. Intelligent Multi-Sensing Detector
1. The intelligent detector shall be an addressable device which is capable of detecting
multiple threats by employing photoelectric and thermal technologies in a single unit. This
detector shall utilize advanced electronics which react to slow smoldering fires
(photoelectric) and heat (thermal) all within a single sensing device.
2. The multi-detector shall include two bicolor LEDs for 360-degree viewing.
3. Automatically adjusts sensitivity levels without the need for operator intervention or
programming. Sensitivity increases with heat.
C. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector
1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke
density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 12 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 2. The detectors shall be ceiling-mounted and available in an alternate model with an integral
fixed 135-degree heat-sensing element.
3. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch.
4. Detector shall be provided on a twist-lock base.
5. It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the detector
without the need for the generation of smoke. The test method shall test all detector
circuits.
6. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Diodes
(LEDs), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level over 360 degrees. These
LEDs shall periodically flash to indicate that the detector is in communication with the
control panel.
7. The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 1500 feet per
minute (fpm).
8. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the
detector chamber.
9. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate
and screw.
F. Intelligent Thermal Detectors
1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees
Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F
(9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel
signaling line circuit.
G. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module
1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of
conventional alarm initiating devices (any normally open dry contact device) to one of the
fire alarm control panel SLCs.
2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54
mm) deep electrical box.
3. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided
that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational
and in regular communication with the control panel.
4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package
and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7
mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.
H. Two-Wire Detector Monitoring
1. Means shall be provided for the monitoring of conventional Initiating Device Circuits
populated with 2-wire smoke detectors as well as normally-open contact alarm initiating
devices (pull stations, heat detectors, etc).
2. Each IDC of conventional devices will be monitored as a distinct address on the polling
circuit by an addressable module. The module will supervise the IDC for alarms and
circuit integrity (opens).
3. The monitoring module will be compatible, and listed as such, with all devices on the
supervised circuit.
4. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B (Class A or B) operation. An LED shall
be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is
operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
5. The monitoring module shall be capable of mounting in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm
square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box or in an surface mount backbox.
I. Addressable Control Relay Module
1. Addressable control relay modules shall be provided to control the operation of fan
shutdown and other auxiliary control functions.
2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep electrical
box, or to a surface mounted backbox.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 13 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 3. The control relay module will provide a dry contact, Form-C relay. The relay coil shall be
magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100
percent of all auxiliary relays may be energized at the same time on the same pair of
wires.
4. The control relay module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a
minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.
J. Isolator Module
1. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an
SLC Style 6 (Class A) or Style 4 (Class B branch). The isolator module shall limit the
number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault
on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for
each floor or protected zone of the building.
2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit
(disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module
shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.
3. The isolator module shall not require any address-setting, and its operations shall be
totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its
normal operation.
4. The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4-inch (101.6 mm) deep electrical box or in
a surface mounted backbox. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that
the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit
condition has been detected and isolated.
K. Serially Connected Graphic LED driver module
1. An LED driver module shall communicate with the fire alarm control panel via a two wire
EIA 485 (multi-drop) communications circuit.
2. The annunciator shall require no more than two wires for operation and two wires for
power. Annunciation shall include Outputs for up to 40 LEDs.
a. Up to 8 total devices of any kind, LCD, printer gateway, LED, Relay or I/O module
may be installed on the ANN-BUS.
L. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator
1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back-lit
eighty (80) characters LCD display for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system.
3. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display.
4. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application.
5. It shall be possible to connect up to 8 LCD displays and be capable of wiring distances up
to 6,000 feet from the control panel.
6. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated "terminal mode" EIA-RS-485
interface using two-wire loop connection and 2 wires for power. Each terminal mode LCD
display shall mimic the main control panel.
M. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks
1. For ease of connection for heavy solid gage wire, all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall
be screw type barrier strips and have sufficient capacity for #18 to #12 AWG wire.

N ASPIRATING SMOKE DETECTOR

1. The ASD shall allow up to 5 programmable alarm levels with time delays, including Alert,
Action 1, Action 2, Fire 1, and Fire 2. The ASD shall allow for Acclimate or
Day/Night/Weekend settings to accommodate environmental changes. The Acclimate
mode shall automatically adjust alarm levels within user-specified parameters to reduce
nuisance alarms. It shall continually adapt to current environmental conditions when
activated. Day/Night/Weekend settings shall allow the user to create specific thresholds
and delays during the day, night, or weekend.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 14 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 2. The ASD shall provide up to 8 form C, programmable, latching or non-latching relays or
the ability to connect directly to the FACP via the SLC. It shall include a field-replaceable
filter and an internal particle separator to reduce the amount of non-combustible materials
reaching the detection chamber. It shall be tested and approved for coverage up to 8,000
sq. ft. /744 sq. m. The unit shall use ultrasonic sensors to confirm proper air flow through
the pipe network and store up to 18,000 events. Events shall include smoke levels, alarm
conditions, operator actions, and faults. The date and time of each event shall be
recorded.

3 DESIGN PARAMETERS
A. The ASD design shall comply with all national and local code requirements and UL and
FM approved listings. The ASD shall be designed with the following parameters:

1. NFPA Classifications:

a. SFD: Standard Fire Detection. The sample port spacing shall not exceed 900 sq. ft.
(83.7 sq. m) and shall initiate an alarm/alert in less than 120 seconds from the
furthest sample port. The detector shall be programmed to alarm at 2.0%
obscuration per foot at the sample port for Fire 1 setting.

2. Return Air Monitoring:

a. Sampling of return air grills shall comply with the requirements of NFPA-76 and
manufacturer’s recommendations. The sample port spacing shall not exceed more
than 4 sq. ft. (0.37 sq. m) per return air grill. The sample ports must be aligned at
an angle between 20 to 45 degrees in the direction of the airflow. The sample pipe
shall stand-off between 2”-8” (.05 - .2 m) from the return air grill.

3. In-Duct Sampling:

a. The ASD monitoring in-duct applications shall be installed and designed based on
the manufacturer’s recommendations and verified via PipeIQ software calculations.

4. Sampling point flow and pressure requirements:

a. Minimum Flow: 2 L/min.

b. Minimum Pressure: 25 Pa

B. A test port shall be provided at each pipe run located at 18” above the finished floor for
under floor systems, or 5ft above the finished floor when pipe network is above the ceiling.
The test port shall be constructed using a vented end cap. Provide a decal indicating the
install date, detector zone, pipe number, test point ID, transport time and suction pressure
(Pa).

C. Provide appropriate number of ASD apparatuses to efficiently and adequately cover

designated area(s).

4 INTELLIGENT FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL CONNECTIVITY

A. The ASD shall be capable of connection to an Intelligent Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)
via a Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) using the communications protocol native to the system,
without the use of any additional hardware. The FACP shall be capable of monitoring and
annunciating up to five smoke event thresholds on the ASD and ten trouble conditions.
Each event threshold shall be capable of being assigned a discrete type ID at the FACP,
including Aspiration Alarm, Aspiration Pre-Alarm, Aspiration Supervisory, Aspiration Non-

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 15 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 Fire, and Aspiration Air Reference, which will determine how the event will be annunciated
at the FACP. The FACP shall support flexible system programming for all event levels,
and shall be capable of simultaneous activation of multiple event levels.
B. The following operations shall be able to be performed on the ASD via the FACP:

1. Disable/enable reset airflow baseline,

2. Reset.
C. Trouble conditions annunciated at the FACP shall include indications for: Low air flow,
configuration (programming) fault, device in service mode, communications loss, time lost
or not set, aspiration fault, filter fault, high air flow fault, detector fault, detector initializing
warning, and power fault.
5 MONITORING:
A. The ASD shall provide up to three Fault types to indicate the priority of faults generated in
the system. Fault indication shall be provided for the following:

1. Low flow – If the device has decreased in air flow, a Fault shall be generated at a user-
settable decrease in air flow.
2. High flow – If the device has increased in air flow, a Fault shall be generated at a user-
settable increase in air flow
3. Configuration – Device configuration failure. A Fault shall be generated if a configuration
update did not transfer.
4. Sensor – If the particulate sensor is not operating properly and needs immediate
replacement, a Fault shall be generated.
5. External Monitor – If the external monitor detects an open a Fault shall be generated.
6. Time – If the internal time base needs to be updated, a Fault shall be generated.
7. Communication – If the device fails to communicate to one of its peripherals and cannot
function properly, a Fault shall be generated.
8. Aspiration – If the aspirator is not working and requires immediate attention, an Fault
shall be generated.
9. Filter – As the filter approaches a pre-set threshold, an initial warning shall be given to
change the filter and a Fault shall be generated.
10. Isolate – If the device is put into the Isolate mode, an Isolation fault shall be generated.
6 DISPLAYS
A. The system shall provide a user interface at the front of the detector with the following
displays:

1. Air Flow/Fault Display – The air flow/fault display shall consist of 10 bicolor LEDs and
operate in one of two modes: air flow or fault indication. Green segments shall indicate
how close the current air flow is to the high or low air flow threshold. The default
threshold for a fault condition is + or – 20% from the airflow baseline. During normal
operation two adjacent indicators shall be green and correspond to the current airflow
entering the detector. When airflow is at a balanced level, the two green segments
shall be centered on the graph. As airflow rises and falls, the green segments shall
move right and left accordingly. If a fault is activated on the device, the corresponding
LEDs shall illuminate in amber and an additional “fault” LED shall be triggered to
signal a fault has been generated. All 10 faults shall be indicated on the User
Interface.
2. 10 particulate levels – The particulate level display shall consist of ten amber LEDs that
correspond to the current level of the particulate detected. The LEDs shall illuminate in
order from Level 1 to Level 10, starting from the bottom of the display and moving up
as the particulate level increases. Each LED shall represent a 10% increase in the
particulate level necessary to reach the Alert Alarm level.
3. (3) 5 alarm levels – All (3) 5 Alarm levels shall be indicated on the User Interface. The
Alarm Level Display shall consist of (3) 5 red LEDs that correspond to the current

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 16 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 alarm level. These LEDs shall be located directly above the Particulate Level LEDs.
They shall illuminate sequentially upward as the severity of the alarm increases.
4. On/Off indication
5. Low Voltage indication
B. The user interface shall offer an interactive panel. The panel shall have a security
passcode system to prevent unauthorized access if chosen. The panel shall allow the
following features to be activated at the device:

1. Test
2. Reset
3. Isolate
4. Information Generation – the detector shall provide the local device address and the IP
address of the device through a coded sequence or via the LCD interactive function.
5. Password input if required to activate detector.
C. Liquid Crystal Display for XS and XT models shall provide detailed information of the
de¬vice status and configuration. The LCD will enter a sleep state if the screen has
re¬mained unchanged for a period of 30 seconds. The home screen shall display the
device’s current state which includes local address, date, time, current percent of smoke,
and the highest priority state. The LCD shall support multiple languages. Navigation
through the menus shall be done with the keypad located on the right hand side and shall
be able to perform the following functions:

1. Isolate
2. Disable
3. Reset Baseline
4. Monitor Airflow per pipe
5. Test
6. Sounder Test
7. Reset IP Network
8. Password input if required to activate detector.
7 SOFTWARE
A. The software shall be based on a single program, PipeIQ, which provides pipe network
design, ASD configuration, and system monitoring. The software shall provide the ability
to remotely monitor the system and provide the following functions:

1. Test, reset, and isolate functions from remote locations

2. Bill of Materials for the pipe network
3. Pipe layout of the pipe network
4. Generate transportation time from the sampling holes to the detector and sampling hole
pressure
5. Live event monitoring
6. Historic event retrieval
7. Custom message function to input messages about a device or site
8. Configuration settings
9. Network settings
10. Trend graph reflecting obscuration over time
11. Shall support up to 255 devices.
8 NETWORK CONNECTIVITY
A. The ASD shall include an onboard Web server interface to enable remote monitoring.
Connection to the device shall be through an RJ45 Ethernet jack. A password shall be
required to access the Web server. The software shall include the ability to enter up to six
(6) e-mail addresses to send automatic updates for alarms and/or faults. Each e-mail
address shall have the ability to select the type of notification desired.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 17 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 B. The ASD shall communicate Modbus protocol using the onboard Ethernet connection.
The device shall be able to receive remote configuration, as well as be monitored
remotely, when the Modbus function is employed.
C. The Modbus/TCP communications shall be enabled through port 502 without inhibiting the
functions of the PipeIQ server, the e-mail service (port 25), or the device’s integral web
server. Each of these communication capabilities shall be available simultaneously.
D. Modbus communications shall be enabled without inhibiting the functions of the PipeIQ
server or the device’s integral web server. Each of these communication capabilities shall
be available simultaneously.
9 SAMPLE PIPE NETWORK
A. The ASD shall consist of a pipe network to transport air to the detection system supported
by calculations from a computer-based design modeling tool.

1. The internal pipe diameter of the network may range from 0.59 inches to 1.03 inches
(15-26 mm) with a smooth bore internal surface.
2. The ASD shall accept both nominal 3/4 inch and 25 mm pipe diameters.
3. Inflow and Exhaust pipes shall enter the device from either the top or the bottom of the
unit so that the unit does not have to be inverted.
4. The system exhaust must be located back into the room being monitored. If the ASD is
located within the same room being monitored, no exhaust pipe is required to be
connected to the ASD.
5. Material for pipe and fittings shall be orange chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC)
PIPE. The pipe shall be UL Listed as an accessory for plenum use as per UL 1887
standard.
6. The pipe shall be identified as “Smoke Detector Sampling Tube” along its entire length,
in requirements per local codes and standards and manufacturer’s recommendations.
7. Pipe material substitution may be acceptable to accommodate environments where pipe
network will be installed but must be approved by the specifying engineer and
authority having jurisdiction, and if applicable, insurance underwriters.
8. The substitution pipe must comply with both inner and outer pipe diameter
requirements.
9. All joints and sampling pipes must be glued and connected, free of any air gaps using
solving cement throughout the pipe network, with the exception of the pipe connected
to detector.
10. The pipe network shall be designed based on a multi-branch system from a single pipe
inlet. The system shall have the ability to cover up to 8,000 sq. ft. (744 sq. m) per
detector. Final square footage shall be based on classification requirements per
NFPA.
11. A single pipe network cannot exceed a maximum of 262 linear ft (80 m) on a single run
and 450 ft (137 m) on an aggregate pipe network. Final pipe lengths shall be verified
with PipeIQ software and comply with NFPA classifications.

10 SAMPLING PORT
A. Sample port spacing shall comply with the requirements of NFPA classifications and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
B. The minimum sample port diameter must not be less than 5/64” and shall not exceed a
diameter larger than 1/4".
C. All sample ports must be identified in accordance with NFPA.
D. In areas with a suspended ceiling the pipe network shall be installed above the ceiling
utilizing a 3/8 inch diameter, flexible capillary tubing attached to an approved
manufacturer’s capillary sample port supported by the ceiling.
E. The size of sample ports shall be verified and confirmed with PipeIQ calculations software.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 18 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 11 SYSTEM OPERATING POWER

A. Provide power supply/charger to convert 115 VAC/60 Hz input into a single 12 VDC or 24
VDC Class 2 Rated power limited output, with UL listing UL1481.

B. Power supply shall be provided with appropriately sized batteries to accommodate the
system’s power requirements in the event main AC power is interrupted.

C. Upon loss of AC power, the external battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire
alarm system for not less than 24 hours plus 5 minutes of alarm.

12 FILTER ASSEMBLY

A. Internal non-replaceable particle separator shall remove larger contaminates before

entering the detection chamber and filter.

B. Multi-stage 30 micron field-replaceable filter. A fault shall be generated when the filter
needs replacement due to a reduction of air of more than 20%.

13 WIRING
A. Wire gauge shall range from 24 to 12 AWG (0.5-2.05 mm). Wire or conduit shall enter the
detector from either the top or the bottom of the device. Pluggable terminals shall be used
to wire the detector.
2.05 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
A. Addressable Devices - General
1. Addressable devices shall employ the simple-to-set decade addressing scheme.
Addressable devices which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP
switch, are not an allowable substitute.
2. Detectors shall be addressable and intelligent, and shall connect with two wires to the Fire
alarm control panel signaling line circuits.
3. Addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors shall provide dual alarm and
power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the
detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both
LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm
condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to
connect an external remote alarm LED.
4. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance.
The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements
of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 10.
5. Detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper
proof feature. Base options shall include a base with a built-in (local) sounder rated for a
minimum of 85 DBA, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications.
6. Detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and
report that condition to the control panel.
7. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use
to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
8. Detectors shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches.
2.06 BATTERIES
A. Upon loss of Primary (AC) power to the control panel, the batteries shall have sufficient
capacity to power the fire alarm system for required standby time (24 or 60 hours) followed by 5
minutes of alarm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 19 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 B. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks
for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.
C. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery/charger systems may be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as
1. shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished
1. areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed
prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this
period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and
physical damage.
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall
1. be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when
2. located in unfinished areas.
D. Manual pull stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi-flush mounting as shown on
the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches
(122 mm) above the finished floor.
E. The entire system shall be installed in accordance with national and local codes and per the
manufacturer’s installation manual.
F. Aspirating Smoke Detector Installation
1. ASD shall be mounted on a secured wall at a height of approximately 36 to 60 inches (0.9-
1.5 m) above the finished floor.
2. ASD shall be located in an unobstructed location and shall maintain 36 inches (0.9 m)
clearance in front of the unit.
3. All pipes and fittings shall be glued using solvent cement, except at entry of the ASD.
G. Sampling Pipe Network
1. Sampling pipe network shall be installed and designed so that the transport times from the
most remote sample port location complies with the classifications of NFPA; ( VEWFD)
(EWFD) (SFD).
2. Sampling pipe shall be installed within 4 to 12 inches (0.1-0.3 m) from the ceiling in
smooth ceiling applications.
3. All pipes shall be supported by mechanical hangers attached to the structure of the
building, at no greater than five foot centers.
4. All pipes must be labeled throughout its entire length, as required per NFPA.
5. Piping network(s) shall be installed/design to provide detection points and spacing as
indicated on the drawings (or as required). All changes to the direction of the pipe shall be
made with standard elbows or tees. Piping shall be verified per manufacturer's modeling
software.
H. Sampling Port
1. Sample port spacing shall comply with the requirements of NFPA classifications and
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. All sample ports shall be drilled directly at the bottom of the pipe and equal the diameter
as indicated per the PipeIQ reports.
3. In high air flow environments being used as plenums the sample ports must be aligned at
angle between 20 to 45 degrees in the direction of the airflow, as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 20 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

3.02 TEST
A. The service of a competent, NICET level II technician shall be provided to technically supervise
and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 10.
B. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits,
ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
C. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.
D. Verify activation of all waterflow switches.
E. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
F. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
G. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.
H. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
I. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
J. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk
test.
K. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the
system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the
correct activation of the control points.
L. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be
consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items
as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity
monitoring, verification functionality and similar.
M. The ASD system shall be maintained and tested as required per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
O. Annual testing of the ASD shall be conducted as required per NFPA requirements. The system
shall be verified that transport times meet the intended classification. All alarm levels and
communication to the FACP shall be tested to insure integrity of the system.
P. Maintenance to the pipe network shall be conducted when the filter needs replacement or in
harsher environments periodically to avoid clogging of the tubing. The time frame shall be
determined based on the flow characteristics of the detector or schedule maintenance as
required by the facility.
Q. Upon maintaining the pipe network an isolation ball valve and tee fitting with an end cap of the
suction side on the sampling pipe shall be installed approximately 6 inches to 1 foot (15cm to
30cm) from the ASD.
1. The detector must be placed into either disable or isolation mode when cleaning out the
pipe network.
2. The isolation valve must be closed when conducting pipe maintenance.
3. The end cap on the maintenance tee fitting shall be removed and a vacuum shall be
connected to remove and debris from within the pipe network.

3.03 INSPECTION
A. At the final inspection, a minimum NICET Level II technician shall demonstrate that the system
functions pr 1. Perform a visual inspection of the physical installation, checking adequate size
batteries are used, piping is securely connected and installed, and all sample ports comply with
the design.
B. Verify ASD communicates to fire alarm control, and if applicable, has the ability to network via a
dedicated IP address and Modbus protocol.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 21 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 C. Check the controller to ensure the following functions are operational and programmed in
accordance with the specification:

a. Alarm Levels and Indicators

b. Time Delays
c. Particulate Level Display
d. Detector Fault Test Indicator
e. Detector Test and Indicator
f. Isolate/Reset Function
g. Air Flow Fault Indicators
h. Configuration Fault
i. Sensor Fault
j. External Monitor Fault
k. Time Fault
l. Communication Fault
m. Aspirator Fault
n. Filter Fault

3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. The system shall be commissioned in the presence of the manufacturer or installing contractor
representative and client representative. The contractor shall provide the following necessary
instrumentation, equipment, materials, and labor for the test:
1. PipeIQ Pipe Layout Report
2. Aerosol smoke (Home Safeguard Industries Model 25S or equivalent)
3. Stopwatch capable of measuring 1 second intervals
4. A total of two (2) qualified personals when testing is being performed

B. Acceptance testing shall be conducted in front of specifying engineer or client representative,

and if required, in front of the Authority Having Jurisdiction using the following testing methods:

1. Introduce canned smoke (Home Safeguard Industries Model 25S or equivalent) directly
into the sampling hole in to farthest sample hole for a duration of 2 seconds at a distance
of 6 inches from the sample hole. Start the timer once the smoke has been introduced.

2. Stop the timer once the first particulate bar is illuminated on the front of the device, above
what was displayed during normal device operation. The device need not go into alarm to
verify the transport time – an increase on the particulate meter is a successful
measurement of transport time.

3. Compare the observed transport time with the results on the Pipe Layout report from
PipeIQ. If there is more than a 20% discrepancy, verify the sample hole quantity, sizes,
location, and the integrity of pipe and that the installed pipe network is identical to the
PipeIQ Pipe Layout report.

4. Once transport times for the farthest sample points are verified, test the remaining holes
for airflow by introducing smoke into each hole and verifying a response at the device or
panel. Transport times are not required on each of the remaining holes, only a verification
that air is flowing.

5. Document test results as required per NFPA to include the client’s contact information,
transport times, and sensitivity levels.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 22 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 6. Upon completion of a successful test, installer shall so certify the system in writing to
Owner’s Representative.

3.05 INSTRUCTION
A. Instruction shall be provided as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of
the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and
functions shall be provided.
B. The contractor or installing dealer shall provide a user manual indicating "Sequence of
Operation."
3.4 TRAINING
A. CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
1. All contractors involved with the design and installation of ASD systems shall be very
experienced with the systems that they are designing / installing per the occupancy use.
A minimum of 5 years experience in the installation of fire alarm systems and a NICET
level III fire alarm technician or equivalent on staff to supervise the design and installation
is required.
2. The installing contractor shall have passed the manufacturer certification training and be
certified to model, design, install, program, test and maintain the ASD system and shall be
able to produce a certificate stating such upon request.
3. The installing contractor shall maintain appropriate licensing and certifications from the
jurisdiction in which the work occurs.
3.5 WARRANTY
A. The manufacturer shall guarantee the product by warranty for a period of three years. All
components of the detector shall be replaced with the exception of regular maintenance
accessories: replaceable micron filter. Any damage to the ASD due to poor handling or
operating outside of the listed criteria will void any such warranty. The installation and
programming of the ASD shall be completed by factory-trained installer.
3.6 OWNER TRAINING
A. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain ASD systems.
B. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide operational training to each shift
of Owner’s personnel. Each training shall include ASD system operation, trouble procedures,
supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency procedures.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 28 3115 - 23 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

 MISHRIFAH VILLA
DIRIYAH, KINGDOM OF SAUDI ARABIA

SPECIFICATIONS
Part 3 of 3 (Divisions 31 to 33)

ISSUED FOR TENDER

MARCH 2020
 SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
1.01 DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
A. 00 0101 - Project Title Page
B. 00 0102 - Project Information
C. 00 0110 - Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS
2.01 DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements
B 01 4000 – Quality Requirements
C. 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls
D. 01 5500 – Access Roads and Paving Areas
E. 01 6000 – Product Requirements
F. 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Requirement
G. 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals
H. 01 7900 – Demonstration and Training
I. 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements
2.02 DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
2.03 DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
A. 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories
B. 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing
C. 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
D. 03 3713 - Shotcrete
E. 03 3900 – Concrete Curing
2.04 DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
A. 04 0511 – Mortar and Masonry Grout
B. 04 2000 – Unit Masonry
C. 04 2300 – Glass Unit Masonry
D. 04 2723 – Cavity Wall Unit Masonry
E. 04 4200 – Exterior Stone Cladding
2.05 DIVISION 05 -- METALS
A. 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing
B. 05 3100 - Steel Decking
C. 05 5000 – Metal Fabrication
D. 05 7300 – Decorative Metal Railing
E. 05 7313 – Glazed Decorative Metal Railing
2.06 DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
A. 06 0573 – Wood Treatment
B. 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry
C. 06 2000 – Finish Carpentry
D. 06 4100 – Architectural Wood Casework

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 E. 06 4200 – Wood Paneling
2.07 DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
A. 07 1113 - Bituminous Dampproofing
B. 07 1300 - Sheet Waterproofing
C. 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation
D. 07 7273 – Vegetated Roof Systems
2.08 DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
A. 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. 08 1416 – Wood Doors
C. 08 3200 – Sliding Glass Door
D. 08 3459 – Vault Doors
E. 08 4413 – Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
F. 08 5113 – Aluminum Windows
G. 08 5123 – Steel Windows
H. 08 6223 – Tubular Skylight
I. 08 6300 – Metal-Framed Skylight
J. 08 7100 – Door Hardware
K. 08 8000 – Glazing
L. 08 8300 - Mirrors
2.09 DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
A. 09 2116 – Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. 09 2216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing
C. 09 2400 – Cement Plastering
D. 09 2613 – Gypsum Veneer Plastering
E. 09 3000 - Tiling
F. 09 5423 – Linear Metal Ceiling
G. 09 5426 – Suspended Wood Ceiling
H. 09 6340 – Stone Flooring
I. 09 9113 – Exterior Painting
J. 09 9123 – Interior Painting
2.10 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
A. 10 2800 – Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories
B. 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties
2.11 DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT
A. 11 3100 – Residential Appliances
2.12 DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
A. 12 2216 – Drapery Track and Accessories
B. 12 3530 – Residential Casework
C. 12 3600 – Countertops
D. 12 9300 – Site Furnishings

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.13 DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
A. 13 1100 – Pool
B. 13 2426 – Steam Baths
2.14 DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
A. Electric Traction Elevators
2.15 DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. 21 0510 – Fire Protection Systems
B. 21 3000 – Fire Pumps
2.16 DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
A. 22 0505 – Valves
B. 22 0593 – Flushing, Cleaning, Disinfection and Chemical Treatment of Piping Systems
C. 22 1005 – Pipe and Pipe Fittings
D. 22 1006 – Piping Specialties
E. 22 1114 – Domestic Water System
F. 22 1122 – Pumps
G. 22 1123 – Domestic Water Pumps
H. 22 1424 – Drainage, Storm and Vent System
I. 22 3000 – Plumbing Equipment
J. 22 4100 – Residential Plumbing Fixtures
K. 22 5100 – Swimming Pool Plumbing Systems
2.17 DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
A. 23 0500 – Basic Mechanical Requirements
B. 23 0513 – Electrical Requirements for HVAC Equipment
C. 23 0528 – Hangers and Supports
D. 23 0548 – Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Control
E. 23 0553 – Mechanical Identification
F. 23 0593 – Testing, Commissioning, Adjusting and Balancing
G 23 0713 – Mechanical Insulation
H. 23 3300 – Air Distribution
I. 23 3413 – Fans
J. 23 3710 – HVAC Air Filter
K. 23 6213 – VRF Air Condensing System
L. 23 7412 – Air Handling Units
M. 23 8413 - Dehumidifiers
2.18 DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL
A. 26 0510 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. 26 0519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
C. 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
D. 26 0529 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
E. 26.0533.13 - Conduit for Electrical Systems
F. 26 0533.16 - Boxes for Electrical Systems
G. 26 0536 - Cable Trays for Electrical Systems

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 H. 26 0539 - Underfloor Raceways for Electrical Systems
I. 26 0548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
J. 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems
K. 26 0573 - Power System Studies
L. 26 0583 - Wiring Connections
M. 26 0923 - Lighting Control Devices
N. 26 2300 - Low-Voltage Switchgear
O. 26 2413 - Switchboards
P. 26 2416 – Panelboards
Q. 26 2419 - Motor-Control Centers
R. 26 2713 - Electric Metering
S. 26 2726 - Wiring Devices
T. 26 2813 – Fuses
U. 26 2816.13 - Enclosed Circuit Breakers
V. 26 2816.16 - Enclosed Switches
W. 26 2913 - Enclosed Controllers
X. 26 2923 - Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers
Y. 26 3100 - Photovoltaic Collectors
Z. 26 3533.16 - Low-Voltage Power Factor Correction Equipment
AA. 26 4113 - Lightning Protection for Structures
BB. 26 4300 - Surge Protective Devices
CC. 26 5100 - Interior Lighting
DD. 26 5600 - Exterior Lighting
EE. 33 7119 – Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes
FF. 33 7900 – Site Grounding
2.18 DIVISION 27 -- COMMUNICATIONS
A. 27 0500 - Communication Systems - General Requirements
B. 27 0526 - Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Communication Systems
C. 27 0528 - Pathways for Communication Systems
D. 27 0533 - Conduits and Back boxes for Communications
E. 27 0544 - Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Communication Pathways and Cabling
F. 27 1100 - Communications Equipment Room Fittings
G. 27 1116 - Communication Cabinets, Racks, Frames and Enclosures
H. 27 1323 - Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Requirements
I. 27 1513 - Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling
J. 27 1543 - Communications Faceplates and Connectors Requirements
K. 27 2000 - Data Communications Network Equipment
L. 27 3000 - IP Telephone System
M. 27 4133 – IPTV System
N. 27 4219 - IT Network

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.19 DIVISION 28 -- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
A. 28 0513 - IP CCTV System
B. 28 3115 - Fire Detection and Alarm System
2.20 DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
A. 31 1000 - Site Clearing
B. 31 2200 - Grading
C. 31 2316 - Excavation
D. 31 2316.13 - Trenching
E. 31 2323 – Fill
F. 31 3116 – Termite Control
G. 31 3213 – Cement Soil Stabilization
H. 31 3700 - Riprap
2.21 DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
A. 32 1123 – Aggregate Base Courses
B. 32 1216 – Asphalt Paving
C. 32 1313 – Concrete Paving
D. 32 1413 – Precast Concrete Unit Paving
E. 32 1713 – Parking Bumpers
F. 32 3119 – Decorative Metal Fences and Gates
G. 32 8423 – Irrigation System
H 32 9300 – Plants
I. 32 9415 - Landscaping
2.22 DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
A. 33 0513 – Manholes and Structures
B. 33 1416 – Site Water Utility Distribution Piping
C. 33 3113 – Site Sanitary Sewerage Gravity Piping
E. 33 4100 – Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping
E. 33 4211 – Stormwater Gravity Piping
F. 33 4216 – Culvert
G. 33 7119 – Electrical Underground Ducts, Ductbanks, and Manholes
H. 33 7900 – Site Grounding
I. 33 8126 – Communication Underground – Ducts, Manholes and Handholes

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 00 0110 - 5 TABLE OF CONTENTS

 SECTION 31 1000
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Clearing and protection of vegetation.
B. Removal of existing debris.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 1000 - Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises.
B. Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers,
and waste removal.
C. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.
D. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of
bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of
removed products.
E. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Limitations on disposal of
removed materials; requirements for recycling.
F. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil removal.
G. Section 32 9300 - Plants: Relocation of existing trees, shrubs, and other plants.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Site Plan: Showing:
1. Vegetation removal limits.
2. Areas for temporary construction and field offices.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Clearing Firm: Company specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of three years of documented experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -- NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SITE CLEARING
A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.
B. Minimize production of dust due to clearing operations; do not use water if that will result in ice,
flooding, sedimentation of public waterways or storm sewers, or other pollution.
3.02 EXISTING UTILITIES AND BUILT ELEMENTS
A. Coordinate work with utility companies; notify before starting work and comply with their
requirements; obtain required permits.
B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage.
C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction.
D. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
3.03 VEGETATION
A. Scope: Remove trees, shrubs, brush, and stumps in areas to be covered by building structure,
paving, playing fields, lawns, and planting beds.
B. Do not begin clearing until vegetation to be relocated has been removed.
C. Do not remove or damage vegetation beyond the limits indicated on drawings.
1. Exception: Specific trees and vegetation indicated on drawings to be removed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 1000 - 1 SITE CLEARING

 2. Exception: Selective thinning of undergrowth specified elsewhere.
D. Install substantial, highly visible fences at least 1 m high to prevent inadvertent damage to
vegetation to remain:
1. At vegetation removal limits.
2. Around trees to remain within vegetation removal limits; locate no closer to tree than at the
drip line.
3. Around other vegetation to remain within vegetation removal limits.
4. See Section 01 5000 for fence construction requirements.
E. In areas where vegetation must be removed but no construction will occur other than pervious
paving, remove vegetation with minimum disturbance of the subsoil.
F. Vegetation Removed: Do not burn, bury, landfill, or leave on site, except as indicated.
1. Chip, grind, crush, or shred vegetation for mulching, composting, or other purposes;
preference should be given to on-site uses.
2. Trees: Sell if marketable; if not, treat as specified for other vegetation removed; remove
stumps and roots to depth of 450 mm.
3. Sod: Re-use on site if possible; otherwise sell if marketable, and if not, treat as specified
for other vegetation removed.
4. Fill holes left by removal of stumps and roots, using suitable fill material, with top surface
neat in appearance and smooth enough not to constitute a hazard to pedestrians.
G. Dead Wood: Remove all dead trees (standing or down), limbs, and dry brush on entire site;
treat as specified for vegetation removed.
H. Restoration: If vegetation outside removal limits or within specified protective fences is
damaged or destroyed due to subsequent construction operations, replace at no cost to Owner.
3.04 DEBRIS
A. Remove debris, junk, and trash from site.
B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 1000 - 2 SITE CLEARING

 SECTION 31 2200
GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Removal of topsoil.
B. Rough grading the site for site structures.
C. Finish grading.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation.
C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling and compaction.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by
horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: See Section 31 2323.
B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 31 2323.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B. Verify the absence of standing or ponding water.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities.
C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain.
D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
E. Provide temporary means and methods to remove all standing or ponding water from areas
prior to grading.
F. Protect site features to remain, including but not limited to bench marks, survey control points,
existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, from damage by grading equipment
and vehicular traffic.
G. Protect trees to remain by providing substantial fencing around entire tree at the outer tips of its
branches; no grading is to be performed inside this line.
H. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain as a portion of final
landscaping.
3.03 ROUGH GRADING
A. Remove topsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded, without mixing
with foreign materials.
B. Do not remove topsoil when wet.
C. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2200 - 1 GRADING

 D. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture
content.
E. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
F. Benching Slopes: Horizontally bench existing slopes greater than 1:4 to key fill material to
slope for firm bearing.
G. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.
H. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and which are excessively moist
due to lack surface water control.
3.04 SOIL REMOVAL
A. Stockpile excavated topsoil on site.
B. Stockpile excavated subsoil on site.
C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 2.5 m; protect from erosion.
3.05 FINISH GRADING
A. Before Finish Grading:
1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.
2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.
B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 13 mm in size. Remove soil
contaminated with petroleum products.
C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 75 mm.
D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 75 mm.
E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding are indicated.
F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade.
G. Place topsoil to thickness as indicated.
H. Place topsoil during dry weather.
I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.
J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.
K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of
subgrade.
L. Lightly compact placed topsoil.
M. Maintain stability of topsoil during inclement weather. Replace topsoil in areas where surface
water has eroded thickness below specifications.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 30 mm from required elevation.
B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 13 mm.
3.07 REPAIR AND RESTORATION
A. Existing Facilities, Utilities, and Site Features to Remain: If damaged due to this work, repair or
replace to original condition.
B. Trees to Remain: If damaged due to this work, trim broken branches and repair bark wounds; if
root damage has occurred, obtain instructions from Architect as to remedy.
C. Other Existing Vegetation to Remain: If damaged due to this work, replace with vegetation of
equivalent species and size.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 31 2323 for compaction density testing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2200 - 2 GRADING

3.09 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing
water.
B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2200 - 3 GRADING

 SECTION 31 2316
EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavating for building volume below grade, footings, pile caps, slabs-on-grade, paving, site
structures, and utilities within the building.
B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
C. Temporary excavation support and protection systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of
bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of
removed products; temporary bracing and shoring. General requirements for dewatering of
excavations and water control.
B. Section 02 4100 - Demolition: Shoring and underpinning existing structures.
C. Section 21 0553 - Identification for Fire Suppression Piping and Equipment: Underground
warning tapes at underground fire suppression lines.
D. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Underground warning
tapes at underground plumbing lines.
E. Section 23 0553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Underground warning tapes
at underground HVAC lines.
F. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Underground warning tapes at
underground electrical lines.
G. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Grading.
H. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility
main connections.
I. Section 31 2316.26 - Rock Removal: Removal of rock during excavating.
J. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Fill materials, backfilling, and compacting.
K. Section 31 3700 - Riprap.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926 - U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Temporary Support and Excavation Protection Plan.
C. Project Record Documents: Record drawings at project closeout according to 01 7000 -
Execution and Closeout Requirements. Show locations of installed support materials left in
place, including referenced locations and depths, on drawings.
D. Field Quality Control Submittals: Document visual inspection of load-bearing excavated
surfaces.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Temporary Support and Excavation Protection Plan:
1. Indicate sheeting, shoring, and bracing materials and installation required to protect
excavations and adjacent structures and property.
2. Include drawings and calculations for bracing and shoring.
3. Bracing and shoring design to meet requirements of OSHA’s Excavation Standard, 29
CFR 1926, Subpart P.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 1 EXCAVATION

 B. Designer Qualifications: For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
C. Shoring Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the shoring and bracing
work of this section with minimum ____ years of documented experience.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Bedding and Fill to Correct Over-Excavation:
1. See Section 31 2323 for bedding and corrective fill materials at general excavations.
2. See Section 31 2316.13 for bedding and corrective fill materials at utility trenches.
B. Underground Warning Tapes:
1. See Section for 21 0553 underground warning tapes at underground fire suppression
lines.
2. See Section for 22 0553 underground warning tapes at underground plumbing lines.
3. See Section for 23 0553 underground warning tapes at underground HVAC lines.
4. See Section for 26 0553 underground warning tapes at underground electrical lines.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
B. Survey existing adjacent structures and improvements and establish exact elevations at fixed
points to act as benchmarks.
1. Resurvey benchmarks during installation of excavation support and protection systems
and notify Owner if any changes in elevations or positions occur or if cracks, sags, or
other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
C. Determine the prevailing groundwater level prior to excavation. If the proposed excavation
extends less than 305 mm into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with
perimeter drains routed to sump pumps, or as directed by Architect. If the proposed excavation
extends more than 305 mm into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with
a comprehensive dewatering procedures, or as directed by Geotechnical Engineer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B. See Section 31 2200 for topsoil removal.
C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage.
D. Notify utility company to remove and relocate utilities.
E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and
curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
F. Protect plants, lawns, rock outcroppings, and other features to remain.
G. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.
Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to maintain surface water diversion until
no longer needed, or as directed by Architect.
H. See Sections 01 7000 and 02 4100 for underpinning and shoring of adjacent structures that
could be damaged by excavating work.
3.03 TEMPORARY EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION
A. Excavation Safety: Comply with OSHA’s Excavation Standard, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P.
1. Excavations in stable rock or in less than 1.5 m in depth in ground judged as having no
cave-in potential do not require excavation support and protection systems.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 2 EXCAVATION
 2. Depending upon excavation depth, time that excavation is open, soil classification,
configuration and slope of excavation sidewalls, design and provide an excavation support
and protection system that meets the requirements of 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P:
a. Sloping and benching systems.
b. Support systems, shield systems, and other protective systems.
B. Leave excavation support and protection systems, used as formwork or within 3.03 m of
existing foundations, permanently in place, unless otherwise noted.
1. Cut off top 1.22 m below grade, abandon remainder.
C. Excavation support and protection systems not required to remain in place may be removed
subject to approval of Owner or Owner's Representative.
1. Remove temporary shoring and bracing in a manner to avoid harmful disturbance to
underlying soils and damage to buildings, structures, pavements, facilities and utilities.
3.04 EXCAVATING
A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations.
1. Excavate to the specified elevations.
2. Excavate to the length and width required to safely install, adjust, and remove any forms,
bracing, or supports necessary for the installation of the work.
3. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
4. See Section 31 2316.26 for required excavation clearances for pipes in utility trenches.
5. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.
B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area
until notified to resume work.
C. Preparation for Piling Work: Excavate to working elevations. Coordinate special requirements
for piling.
D. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 1.2 meters to angle of repose or less until shored.
E. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
F. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
G. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.
H. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 0.25 cu m measured by volume. See
Section 31 2316.26 for removal of larger material.
I. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see
Section 31 2323.
J. Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water from excavations until
directed by Architect. Remove and replace soils deemed suitable by classification and which
are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control.
K. Determine the prevailing groundwater level prior to excavation. If the proposed excavation
extends less than 305 mm into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with
perimeter drains routed to sump pumps, or as directed by the Architect. If the proposed
excavation extends more than 305 mm into the excavation, control groundwater intrusion with a
comprehensive dewatering procedures, or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer.
L. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.
M. Remove excess excavated material from site.
3.05 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. See Section 31 2323 for subgrade preparation at general excavations.
B. See Section 31 2316.13 for subgrade preparation at utility trenches.
3.06 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
A. Do not fill or backfill until all debris, water, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and
deleterious materials have been removed from excavation.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 3 EXCAVATION

 B. Install underground warning tape at buried utilities according to Sections 21 0553, 22 0553, 23
0553, and 26 0553.
C. See Section 31 2323 for fill, backfill, and compaction requirements at general excavations.
D. See Section 31 2316.13 for fill, backfill, and compaction requirements at utility trenches.
E. See Section 31 2200 for rough and final grading and topsoil replacement requirements.
3.07 REPAIR
A. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see
Section 31 2323.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing.
B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces by Architect before placement
of foundations.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with
Section 31 2200.
B. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.
C. Remove excess excavated material from site.
3.10 PROTECTION
A. Divert surface flow from rains or water discharges from the excavation.
B. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil
stability.
C. Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as
to maintain foundation subgrade in satisfactory, undisturbed condition.
D. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.
E. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete
placement.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 4 EXCAVATION

 SECTION 31 2316.13
TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Site grading.
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Building and foundation excavating.
C. Section 31 2316.26 - Rock Removal: Removal of rock during excavating.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Backfilling at building and foundations.
E. Section 33 4100 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage
systems.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-
kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18 in.) Drop; 2017.
B. ASTM C136/C136M - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates; 2014.
C. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015).
D. ASTM D1556/D1556M - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
Sand-Cone Method; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
E. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015).
F. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method; 2015.
G. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System); 2011.
H. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2017.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: 4.5 kg sample of each type of fill; submit in air-tight containers to testing laboratory.
C. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source.
D. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials
used.
E. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination.
3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 1 TRENCHING

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. General Fill: Conforming to the Ministry of Transportation standard.
B. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
1. Graded.
2. Free of lumps larger than 75 mm, rocks larger than 50 mm, and debris.
3. Complying with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL.
C. Structural Fill: Conforming to the Ministry of Transportation standard.
D. Structural Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
E. Concrete for Fill: Lean concrete.
F. Granular Fill - Gravel: [] [] stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits:
a. 50 mm sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. 25 mm sieve: 95 percent passing.
c. 19 mm sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing.
d. 16 mm sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing.
e. 9 mm sieve: 55 to 85 percent passing.
f. 4.75 mm sieve: 35 to 60 percent passing.
g. 1.18 mm sieve: 15 to 35 percent passing.
h. 450 micro m: 10 to 25 percent passing.
i. 75 micro m: 5 to 10 percent passing.
G. Granular Fill: Natural stone; []free of clay, shale, organic matter.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits:
a. Minimum Size: 6 mm.
b. Maximum Size: 16 mm.
H. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; []free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and
organic matter.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M; within the following limits:
a. 4.75 mm sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. 1.40 mm sieve: 10 to 100 percent passing.
c. 300 micro m sieve: 5 to 90 percent passing.
d. 150 micro m sieve: 4 to 30 percent passing.
e. 75 micro m sieve: 0 percent passing.
I. Topsoil: See Section 31 2200.
J. Topsoil: [].
1. Select.
2. Graded.
3. Free of roots, rocks larger than 12 mm, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.
4. Acidity range (pH) of 5.5 to 7.5.
5. Containing a minimum of 4 percent and a maximum of 25 percent inorganic matter.
6. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol OH.
7. Limit decaying matter to ____ percent of total content by volume.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven[].
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis
of soil material.
B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples
for compliance before delivery to site.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 2 TRENCHING

 C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements.
C. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage.
D. Grade top perimeter of trenching area to prevent surface water from draining into trench.
Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to maintain surface water diversion until
no longer needed, or as directed by the Architect.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area
until notified to resume work.
B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 1.2 meters to angle of repose or less until shored.
C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.
F. Remove large stones and other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent
backfilling or compaction.
G. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock up to 0.25 cu m measured by volume. See
Section 31 2316.26 for removal of larger material.
H. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.
I. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site.
J. Remove excess excavated material from site.
K. Provide temporary means and methods, as required, to remove all water from trenching until
directed by the Architect. Remove and replace soils deemed unsuitable by classification and
which are excessively moist due to lack of dewatering or surface water control.
L. Determine the prevailing groundwater level prior to trenching. If the proposed trench extends
less than 305 mm into the prevailing groundwater, control groundwater intrusion with perimeter
drains routed to sump pumps, or as directed by the Architect.
3.04 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT
A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.
B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 3 TRENCHING

 F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 150 mm
compacted depth.
G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 200 mm
compacted depth.
H. Slope grade away from building minimum 50 mm in 3 m, unless noted otherwise. Make
gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
I. Correct areas that are over-excavated.
1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete.
2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97
percent of maximum dry density.
J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry
density.
2. At _______: 95 percent of maximum dry density.
3. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density.
K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.06 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated.
B. Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank[]:
1. Bedding: Use general fill.
2. Cover with general fill.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
4. Compact in maximum 200 mm lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
C. At Pipe Culverts:
1. Bedding: Use general fill.
2. Place filter fabric specified in Section 33 0513 over compacted bedding.
3. Cover with general fill.
4. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
5. Compact in maximum 200 mm lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
D. Over Subdrainage Piping at Foundation Perimeter and Under Slabs:
1. Drainage fill and geotextile fabric: Section 33 4100.
2. Cover drainage fill with general fill.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
4. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
E. At French Drains:
1. Use granular fill.
2. Fill up to 200 mm below finish grade.
3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 25 mm from required elevations.
B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm from required elevations.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing.
B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM
D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D6938.
C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in
accordance with ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), AASHTO T 180, or ASTM D698 ("standard
Proctor").

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 4 TRENCHING

 D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.
E. Frequency of Tests: ________.
3.09 CLEANING
A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile.
B. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade
stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.
C. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2316 - 5 TRENCHING

 SECTION 31 2323
FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for building volume below grade and paving.
B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on Drawings.
B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on Drawings.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg
(10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials; 2010
B. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012.
C. ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-
Cone Method; 2007.
D. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012.
E. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method; 2008.
F. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System); 2011.
G. ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: 4.5 kg (10 lb ) sample of each type of fill; submit in air-tight containers to testing
laboratory.
C. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source.
D. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials
used.
E. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination.
3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
1. Graded.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2323 - 1 FILL

 2. Free of lumps larger than 75 mm (3 inches), rocks larger than 50 mm (2 inches), and
debris.
3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL.
B. Structural Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
1. Graded.
2. Free of lumps larger than 75 mm (3 inches), rocks larger than 50 mm (2 inches), and
debris.
3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL.
C. Concrete for Fill: Lean concrete.
D. Granular Fill: Coarse aggregate, conforming to applicable SASO standard.
E. Sand Fill: Conforming to []elevant SASO standard.
F. Topsoil: See Section 31 2200.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.
B. Vapor Retarder: 0.25 mm (10 mil) thick, polyethylene.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis
of soil material.
B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples
for compliance before delivery to site.
C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
C. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements.
D. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected.
E. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill.
F. Verify underground tanks are anchored to their own foundations to avoid flotation after
backfilling.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 150 mm (6 inches) to identify soft spots.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.
C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.03 FILLING
A. Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2323 - 2 FILL

 F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 150 mm (6
inches) compacted depth.
G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 200 mm (8
inches) compacted depth.
H. Slope grade away from building minimum 50 mm in 3 m (2 inches in 10 ft), unless noted
otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
I. Correct areas that are over-excavated.
1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Fill with concrete.
2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97
percent of maximum dry density.
J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry
density.
2. At all locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density.
K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated.
B. Structural Fill:
1. Use general fill.
2. Fill up to subgrade elevations.
3. Maximum depth per lift: 150 mm (6 inches), compacted.
4. Compact to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density.
C. Pervious Structural Fill:
1. Use granular fill.
2. Fill up to subgrade elevations.
3. Maximum depth per lift: 150 mm (6 inches), compacted.
4. Compact to minimum 95 percent of maximum dry density.
D. At Foundation Walls and Footings:
1. Use general fill.
2. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
3. Compact each lift to 90 percent of maximum dry density.
4. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls.
5. Backfill simultaneously on each side of unsupported foundation walls until supports are in
place.
E. Over Subdrainage Piping at Foundation Perimeter and Under Slabs:
1. Drainage fill and geotextile fabric: Section 33 4600.
2. Cover drainage fill with general fill.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
4. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
F. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches:
1. Bedding: Use general fill.
2. Cover with general fill.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
4. Compact in maximum 200 mm (8 inch) lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
G. Inside Planter Boxes:
1. Use granular fill, 100 mm (4 inches) deep.
2. Cover with geotextile fabric.
3. Cover with sand, 50 mm (2 inches) deep.
4. Finish with topsoil, to within 50 mm (2 inches) of planter rim, lightly tamped.
H. At Planted Areas:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2323 - 3 FILL

 1. Use general fill.
2. Fill up to 150 mm (6 inches) below finish grade elevations.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevations.
4. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
5. See Section 31 2200 for topsoil placement.
I. Under Pavers Set on Sand Leveling Bed:
1. Use granular fill.
2. Fill up to bottom of sand leveling bed.
3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
4. See unit pavers section for leveling bed placement.
J. Under Monolithic Paving and Monolithic Paver Setting Beds:
1. Compact subsoil to 95 percent of its maximum dry density before placing fill.
2. Use general fill.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
4. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
5. See Section 32 1123 for aggregate base course placed over fill.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch) from required elevations.
B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 25 mm (1 inch) from required
elevations.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing.
B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM
D2167, ASTM D3017, or ASTM D6938.
C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in
accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or
AASHTO T 180.
D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.
E. Frequency of Tests: As indicated.
F. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile.
B. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 2323 - 4 FILL

 SECTION 31 3116
TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Soil treatment.
2. Wood treatment.
3. Bait-station system.
4. Metal mesh barrier system.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for wood preservative treatment by pressure process.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for custom-fabricated, metal termite
shields.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,

and profiles for termite control products.
2. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product.

C. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for
Owner's records and include the following:

1. Date and time of application.

2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.

D. Wood Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report
for Owner's records and include the following:

1. Date and time of application.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3116 - 1 TERMITE CONTROL

 2. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
3. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
4. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
5. Areas of application.

E. Bait-Station System Installation Report: After installation of bait-station system is completed,

submit report for Owner's records and include the following:

1. Location of areas and sites conducive to termite feeding and activity.

2. Plan drawing showing number and locations of bait stations.
3. Dated report for each monitoring and inspection occurrence, indicating level of termite
activity, procedure, and treatment applied before time of Substantial Completion.
4. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
5. Quantities of termiticide andnontoxic termite bait used.
6. Schedule of inspections for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is
located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install
manufacturer's products and who is accredited by manufacturer.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Soil Treatment:

1. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated
or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of
the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Related Work: Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and
concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported
slabs before construction.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and
Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment will
prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes
formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period,
re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Wood Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and
Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied wood termiticide treatment
will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites (Coptotermes
formosanus) requirement. If subterranean termite damage is discovered during warranty period,
repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation and treat replacement wood.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3116 - 2 TERMITE CONTROL

 1. Warranty Period: 12 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain termite control products from single source from single
manufacturer].

2.2 SOIL TREATMENT

A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an

aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.
1. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five
years against infestation of subterranean termites.

2.3 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Borate: EPA-Registered borate termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in an

aqueous solution for spray application and a gel solution for pressure injection, formulated to
prevent termite infestation in wood.

2.4 BAIT-STATION SYSTEM

A. Description: EPA-Registered system acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide bait

stations based on the dimensions of building perimeter indicated on Drawings, according to
product's EPA-Registered Label and manufacturer's written instructions.

2.5 METAL MESH BARRIER SYSTEM

A. Stainless-Steel Mesh: 0.64-by-0.45-mm) mesh of 2.0-mm diameter, stainless-steel wire,

Type 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label, interfaces with earthwork, slab
and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance
of termite control.

B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3116 - 3 TERMITE CONTROL

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare work areas according to the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction
and according to manufacturer's written instructions before beginning application and
installation of termite control treatment(s). Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and
other edible materials, such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and
construction waste wood from soil within and around foundations.

B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide
manufacturer.

1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, according
to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT

A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute treatment
uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for maximum
specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical
termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction.

1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction,

including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil
materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls;
along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit
penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along
the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas, including
around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only
where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground.
4. Masonry: Treat voids.
5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and below-grade
walls will be penetrated.

B. Post warning signs in areas of application.

C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,

landscaping, or other construction activities following application.

3.4 APPLYING WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Treatment: Apply wood treatment after framing, sheathing, and exterior weather
protection is completed but before electrical and mechanical systems are installed.

B. Application: Mix borate wood treatment solution to a uniform consistency. Apply treatment at the
product's EPA-Registered Label volume and rate for the maximum borate concentration allowed
for each specific use so that wood framing, sheathing, siding, and structural members subject to
infestation receive treatment. Apply treatment to the height of 244 mm above grade] <Insert
requirement>.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3116 - 4 TERMITE CONTROL

 1. Framing and Sheathing: Apply termiticide solution by spray to bare wood and with
complete coverage.
2. Heavy Wood Members: For wood greater than 100 mm thick, inject termiticide gel
solution under pressure into holes of size and spacing required by manufacturer for
treatment.
3. Exterior Uncoated Wood Trim and Siding: Apply termiticide solution to bare wood only
when forecasted weather conditions indicate no precipitation or fog before application of
seal coat. After 48 hours, verify that surface is sufficiently dry for seal coat and apply seal
coat of paint as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."

3.5 INSTALLING BAIT-STATION SYSTEM

A. Bait-Station System: Install during construction to determine areas of termite activity and after
construction, including landscaping, is completed.

B. Place bait stations according to product's EPA-Registered Label and manufacturer's written
instructions, in the following locations:

1. Conducive sites and locations indicated on Drawings.

2. In and around infested trees and stumps.
3. In mulch beds.
4. Where wood directly contacts soil.
5. Areas of high soil moisture.
6. Near irrigation sprinkler heads.
7. Each area where roof drainage system, including downspouts and scuppers, drains to
soil.
8. Along driplines of roof overhangs without gutters.
9. Where condensate lines from mechanical equipment drip or drain to soil.
10. At plumbing penetrations through ground-supported slabs.
11. Other sites and locations as determined by licensed Installer.

C. Spacing: Place bait stations according to manufacturer's written instructions and at a frequency
no less than the following:

1. One bait station per 6.1 linear meters.

2. One cluster of bait stations per 6.1 linear meters, with no fewer than three bait stations
per cluster.

3.6 INSTALLING METAL MESH BARRIER SYSTEM

A. Install metal mesh barrier system to provide a continuous barrier to entry of subterranean
termites, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fit mesh tightly around pipes and other penetrations and terminate at slab and foundation
perimeters.
2. Install mesh under the perimeter of concrete slab edges and joints after vapor retarder
and reinforcing steel are in place.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3116 - 5 TERMITE CONTROL

 B. Protect termiticide solution dispersed in treated soils and fills from being diluted by exposure to
water spillage or weather until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier
according to EPA-Registered Label instructions.

3.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include

12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of termite-control-treatment Installer. Include
monthly maintenance as required for proper performance according to the product's EPA-
Registered Label and manufacturer's written instructions. Parts and supplies shall be
manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide from termite-control-treatment Installer to Owner, in

the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial
maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for
agreement period and for future renewal options.

1. Include annual inspection for termite activity and effectiveness of termite treatment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3116 - 6 TERMITE CONTROL

 SECTION 31 3213.16
CEMENT SOIL STABILIZATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavating, treatment, and placement of soil cement mix.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: General site and building excavation.
B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Soil and aggregate materials.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
B. ASTM D558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-
Cement Mixtures; 2011.
C. ASTM D1556/D1556M - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
Sand-Cone Method; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
D. ASTM D1633 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement
Cylinders; 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Submit mix design and materials mix ratio that will achieve specified requirements.
C. Test reports on compressive strength of mix.
D. Samples: Submit 4.5 kg sample of each type of fill in air-tight containers, to testing laboratory.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with []inistry of Transportation standards. Maintain one copy on
site.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install mixed materials in wind in excess of 16 k/h or when temperature is below 5
degrees C.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MIX MATERIALS
A. Coarse Aggregate: Granular fill as specified in Section 31 2323.
B. Fine Aggregate: Sand fill as specified in Section 31 2323.
C. Subsoil: General fill as specified in Section 31 2323.
D. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Portland cement, Type I, Normal.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment: Capable of excavating subsoil, mixing and placing materials, wetting,
consolidating, and compacting material.
2.03 SOIL CEMENT MIX
A. Mix subsoil, cement,[] and aggregate in accordance with [].
1. Quantity of cement is not to exceed 10 percent of dry mixed materials by volume.
B. Mix to obtain a minimum compressive strength of 3 MPa at 7 days.
1. Test mix for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D1633.
C. Add water to the mix to achieve a homogeneous damp mixture without lumping, yet not
creating a wet plastic consistency.
D. Obtain approval of the mix before proceeding with placement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3213.16 - 1 CEMENT SOIL STABILIZATION

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Curing Seal: Asphalt emulsion primer.
B. Geotextile Fabric: Non-woven polypropylene.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not backfill over frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate requirements with piling operations.
3.03 EXCAVATION
A. Protect adjacent structures from damage by this work.
B. Excavate subsoil to depth sufficient to accommodate soil stabilization, construction operations,
and ______.
C. Proof roll subgrade to identify soft areas; excavate those areas.
D. Do not excavate within normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation.
E. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue affected Work in area until
notified to resume work.
F. Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with Section 31 2316.
3.04 SOIL TREATMENT AND BACKFILLING
A. Site mix subsoil, backfill and compact. Blend treated subsoil mix to achieve mix formulation
and required stabilization.
B. Place mix material in continuous layers not exceeding 200 mm depth.
C. Maintain optimum moisture content of mix materials to attain required stabilization. If more than
one layer, maintain lower layer at optimum moisture until next layer is placed.
D. Place mixed materials within 2.5 hours of adding water to mix.
E. Do not exceed 30 minutes in placing adjacent mixed material.
F. Commence compaction of mix no later than 60 minutes after placement.
G. Compact mix to minimum of 97 percent of maximum density determined in accordance with
ASTM D558; test in-place density in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M.
H. Slope grade away from building minimum 51 mm in 3 m, unless noted otherwise.
I. Shape to required line, grade, and cross section.
J. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
K. At end of day, terminate completed Work by forming a straight and vertical construction joint.
L. Replace damaged fill with new mix to full depth of original mix.
M. Remove surplus mix materials from site.
3.05 CURING
A. Immediately following compaction of mix, seal top surface with curing seal.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Fill: Plus or minus 25 mm from required elevations.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 4000 - Quality
Requirements.
B. Compression test and analysis of hardened fill material will be performed in accordance with
ASTM D1633.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3213.16 - 2 CEMENT SOIL STABILIZATION

 C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest
at no cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3213.16 - 3 CEMENT SOIL STABILIZATION

 SECTION 31 3700
RIPRAP
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Riprap in sacks.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Aggregate requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the Ministry of Transportation standards.
B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Riprap: Broken stone, 150 mm minimum size, 300 mm maximum size; solid and nonfriable.
B. Aggregate: Granular fill as specified in Section 31 2323.
C. Bags: Woven jute.
D. Binder: Portland cement.
E. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.
2.02 BAGGED RIPRAP
A. Mix riprap, cement, sand and aggregate dry. Limit quantity of cement to 10 percent of dry
mixed materials by volume.
B. Fill bags with dry ingredients to 70 percent capacity and close by sewing or stapling to a
straight seam.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
3.02 PLACEMENT
A. Place geotextile fabric over substrate, lap edges and ends.
B. Place riprap at culvert pipe ends, embankment slopes, and as indicated.
C. Place bags into position. Knead, ram, or pack filled bags to fit with the contour of adjacent
material and other bags previously placed.
D. Place bags in a staggered pattern. Remove foreign matter from bag surfaces.
E. Installed Thickness: 125 mm average.
F. Place rock evenly and carefully over bagged riprap to minimize voids, do not tear bag fabric,
place bags and rock in one consistent operation to preclude disturbance or displacement of
substrate.
G. After placement, spray with water to moisten the bagged mix. Maintain moist for 24 hours.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 31 3700 - 1 RIPRAP

 SECTION 32 1123
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate base course.
B. Paving aggregates.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for base course.
B. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Compacted fill over utility trenches under base course.
C. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving: Finish and binder asphalt courses.
D. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course.
E. Section 32 1440 - Stone Paving.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-
kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18 in.) Drop; 2017.
B. ASTM C136/C136M - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates; 2014.
C. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015).
D. ASTM D1556/D1556M - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by
Sand-Cone Method; 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
E. ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012, with Editorial Revision (2015).
F. ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method; 2015.
G. ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System); 2011.
H. ASTM D6938 - Standard Test Methods for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-
Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: 4.5 kg sample of each type of aggregate; submit in air-tight containers to testing
laboratory.
C. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source.
D. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual
materials used.
E. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When aggregate materials need to be stored on site, locate where indicated on drawings.
C. Aggregate Storage, General:
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination.
3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1123 - 1 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate, complying with []inistry of Transportation standard.
B. Coarse Aggregate: [][] stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW.
2. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits:
a. 50 mm sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. 25 mm sieve: 95 percent passing.
c. 19 mm sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing.
d. 16 mm sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing.
e. 9 mm sieve: 55 to 85 percent passing.
f. 4.75 mm sieve: 35 to 60 percent passing.
g. 1.18 mm sieve: 15 to 35 percent passing.
h. 450 micro m: 10 to 25 percent passing.
i. 75 micro m: 5 to 10 percent passing.
C. Blended Aggregate: [][] stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW.
2. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits:
a. 50 mm sieve: ____ percent passing.
b. 25 mm sieve: ____ percent passing.
c. 19 mm sieve: ____ to ____ percent passing.
d. 16 mm sieve: ____ to ____ percent passing.
e. 9 mm sieve: ____ to ____ percent passing.
f. 4.75 mm sieve: ____ to ____ percent passing.
g. 1.18 mm sieve: ____ to ____ percent passing.
h. 450 micro m: ____ to ____ percent passing.
i. 75 micro m: ____ to ____ percent passing.
D. Medium Aggregate: Natural stone;[][] free of clay, shale, organic matter.
1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GM.
2. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits:
a. Minimum Size: 6 mm.
b. Maximum Size: 16 mm.
E. Fine Aggregate: Sand; complying with []inistry of Transportation standard.
F. Fine Aggregate: Natural river or bank sand; []free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials,
and organic matter.
1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol SW.
2. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M; within the following limits:
a. 4.75 mm sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. 1.40 mm sieve: 10 to 100 percent passing.
c. 300 micro m sieve: 5 to 90 percent passing.
d. 150 micro m sieve: 4 to 30 percent passing.
e. 75 micro m sieve: 0 percent passing.
G. Herbicide: ________________.
H. Geotextile Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis
of aggregate materials.
B. Where aggregate materials are specified using ASTM D2487 classification, test and analyze
samples for compliance before delivery to site.
C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1123 - 2 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

 D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
B. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-
compacting.
B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Spread aggregate over prepared substrate to a total compacted thickness of ____ mm.
B. Place aggregate in maximum 100 mm layers and roller compact to specified density.
C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated.
D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction.
E. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to
reduce moisture content.
F. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.
G. Apply herbicide to finished surface.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 6.4 mm measured with 3 m straight edge.
B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 6.4 mm.
C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 12.8 mm.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing.
B. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in
accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M, ASTM D2167, or ASTM D6938.
C. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted
material in accordance with AASHTO T 180, ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), or ASTM D1557
("modified Proctor").
D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.
E. Proof roll compacted aggregate at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile.
B. Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1123 - 3 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES

 SECTION 32 1216
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate base course.
B. Single course bituminous concrete paving.
C. Double course bituminous concrete paving.
D. Surface sealer.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Concrete curbs.
B. Section 32 1723.13 - Painted Pavement Markings: Concrete bumpers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types; 2015.
B. AI MS-19 - A Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual; Fourth Edition.
C. ASTM C136/C136M - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates; 2014.
D. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in
Pavement Construction; 2009a.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of Ministry of Transportation:
1. Design paving and subbase at [______] for movement of trucks up to 60,000 lbs (27 200
kg).
2. Design paving and subbase at [______] for parking.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the Ministry of Transportation standard.
B. Mixing Plant: Conform to Ministry of Transportation standard.
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not place asphalt when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 4 degrees C
(40 degrees F), or surface is wet or frozen.
B. Place bitumen mixture when temperature is not more than 8 C degrees (15 F degrees) below
bitumen supplier's bill of lading and not more than maximum specified temperature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for paving work on public property.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D946.
B. Aggregate for Base Course : Angular crushed washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable
material and debris.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M, within the following limits:
a. 50 mm (2 inch) sieve: 100 percent passing.
b. 25 mm (1 inch) sieve: 95 percent passing.
c. 19 mm (3/4 inch) sieve: 95 to 100 percent passing.
d. 16 mm (5/8 inch) sieve: 75 to 100 percent passing.
e. 9 mm (3/8 inch) sieve: 55 to 85 percent passing.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1216 - 1 ASPHALT PAVING

 f. 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve: 35 to 60 percent passing.
g. 1.18 mm (No. 16) sieve: 15 to 35 percent passing.
h. 450 micro m (No. 40): 10 to 25 percent passing.
i. 75 micro m (No. 200): 5 to 10 percent passing.
C. Aggregate for Binder Course: In accordance with Ministry of Transportation standards.
D. Aggregate for Wearing Course: In accordance with Ministry of Transportation standards.
E. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with Ministry of Transportation standards.
F. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of
foreign matter.
G. Fiber Reinforcement: Synthetic fibers shown to have long-term resistance to deterioration
when in contact with alkalis and moisture; 12 mm (1/2 inch) length.
H. Primer: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt.
I. Tack Coat: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt.
J. Seal Coat: AI MS-19, sand type.
2.03 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN
A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.
B. Base Course: 3.0 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI
MS-2.
C. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI
MS-2.
D. Wearing Course: 5 to 7 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI
MS-2.
E. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of work.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test mix design and samples in accordance with AI MS-2.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02 BASE COURSE
A. Place and compact base course.
3.03 PREPARATION - PRIMER
A. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply primer on aggregate base or subbase at uniform rate of 1.5 L/sq m (1/3 gal/sq yd).
C. Use clean sand to blot excess primer.
3.04 PREPARATION - TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces over subgrade surface at uniform rate of 1.5
L/sq m (1/3 gal/sq yd).
C. Apply tack coat to contact surfaces of curbs and gutters.
D. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack
coat these surfaces.
3.05 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - SINGLE COURSE
A. Install Work in accordance with Ministry of Transportation standards.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1216 - 2 ASPHALT PAVING

 B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.
C. Place to thickness identified in schedule at end of Section.
D. Install gutter drainage grilles and frames in correct position and elevation.
E. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from
position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
F. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.
3.06 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE
A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.
B. Place binder course to thickness identified in schedule at end of section.
C. Place wearing course within two hours of placing and compacting binder course.
D. Place wearing course to thickness identified in schedule at end of section.
E. Install gutter drainage grilles and frames in correct position and elevation.
F. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from
position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
G. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller
marks.
3.07 CURBS
A. Install extruded asphalt curbs of (As shown on drawings) profile as indicated.
3.08 SEAL COAT
A. Apply seal coat to surface course and asphalt curbs in accordance with AI MS-19.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 6 mm (1/4 inch) measured with 3 m (10 foot) straight edge.
B. Compacted Thickness: Within 6 mm (1/4 inch) of specified or indicated thickness.
C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 12 mm (1/2 inch).
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for quality control.
B. Provide field inspection and testing. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with AI MS-
2.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury for ____ days or until
surface temperature is less than 60 degrees C (140 degrees F).
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1216 - 3 ASPHALT PAVING

 SECTION 32 1313
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete sidewalks, stair steps, integral curbs, gutters, median barriers, parking areas, and
roads.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; 1991 (Reapproved 2009).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete; 2016.
C. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; 2000
(Reapproved 2009).
D. ACI 305R - Guide to Hot Weather Concreting; 2010.
E. ACI 306R - Guide to Cold Weather Concreting; 2016.
F. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
G. ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2017b.
H. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2017a.
I. ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2016.
J. ASTM C309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2011.
K. ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2014.
L. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004, with Editorial
Revision (2013).
M. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction; 2004a (Reapproved
2013).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Samples: Submit two sample panels, 300 by 300 mm in size illustrating exposed aggregate
finish.
C. Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and
typical details.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PAVING ASSEMBLIES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301.
B. Design paving for parking and residential streets.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1313 - 1 CONCRETE PAVING

 C. Concrete Sidewalks and Median Barrier: 20.7 MPa 28 day concrete, 100 mm thick, buff color
Portland cement, exposed aggregate finish.
D. Parking Area Pavement: 27.6 MPa 28 day concrete, 125 mm thick, 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9
mesh reinforcement, wood float finish.
2.02 FORM MATERIALS
A. Form Materials: As specified in Section 03 1000, comply with ACI 301.
B. Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D1751) or sponge rubber or cork
(ASTM D1752).
1. Thickness: 12 mm.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel and Welded Wire Reinforcement: Types specified in Section 03 2000.
B. Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M, Grade 280 MPa yield strength; deformed billet steel bars;
unfinished finish.
2.04 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Obtain cementitious materials from same source throughout.
B. Concrete Materials: As specified in Section 03 3000.
C. Fiber Reinforcement: Synthetic fibers shown to have long-term resistance to deterioration
when in contact with alkalis and moisture; 12 mm length.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Acid Etch Solution: Muriatic type mixed to a ____ percent solution.
B. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class A.
C. Liquid Surface Sealer: ________.
D. Surface Retarder:
1. Color: As indicated.
E. Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 13 mm thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 13 mm deep sealant pocket after removal.
1. Material: ASTM D1751, cellulose fiber.
2.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B. Concrete Strength: Establish required average strength for each type of concrete on the basis
of field experience or trial mixtures, as specified in ACI 301.
1. For trial mixtures method, employ independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Fiber Reinforcement: Add to mix at rate of 0.89 kg per cubic meter, or as recommended by
manufacturer for specific project conditions.
E. Concrete Properties:
1. Compressive strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days; As
indicated on drawings.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
4. Silica Fume Content: Maximum 5 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
5. Cement Content: Minimum ___ kg per cubic meter.
6. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
7. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
8. Maximum Slump: 75 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1313 - 2 CONCRETE PAVING

 9. Maximum Aggregate Size: __ mm.
2.07 MIXING
A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685/C685M. Mix each
batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.02 SUBBASE
A. Prepare subbase in accordance with []inistry of Transportation standards.
3.03 PREPARATION
A. Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B. Coat surfaces of manhole frames with oil to prevent bond with concrete pavement.
C. Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
3.04 FORMING
A. Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B. Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C. Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete
placement.
3.05 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place reinforcement at top of slabs-on-grade.
B. Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints.
C. Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
D. Provide doweled joints ____ mm on center at transverse joints.
3.06 COLD AND HOT WEATHER CONCRETING
A. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
B. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface temperature is less than 4 degrees C, or surface is
wet or frozen.
3.07 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Coordinate installation of snow melting components.
B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
C. Do not place concrete when base surface is wet.
D. Place concrete using the slip form technique.
E. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
F. Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
G. Place concrete to pattern indicated.
H. Apply surface retarder to all exposed surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08 JOINTS
A. Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1313 - 3 CONCRETE PAVING

 B. Place 10 mm wide expansion joints at 6 m intervals and to separate paving from vertical
surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated.
1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 13 mm of finished
surface.
2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C. Provide scored joints.
1. At 1 m intervals.
2. Between sidewalks and curbs.
3. Between curbs and pavement.
D. Provide keyed joints as indicated.
E. Saw cut contraction joints 5 mm wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth of
slab.
3.09 EXPOSED AGGREGATE
A. Wash concrete surfaces to which surface retarder has been applied with clean water, and scrub
with stiff bristle brush exposing aggregate to match sample panel.
3.10 FINISHING
A. Area Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to pavement direction.
B. Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and
radiused edge 6 mm radius.
C. Median Barrier: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and
radiused edge 6 mm radius.
D. Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.
E. Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.
F. Place sealer on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 6 mm in 3 m.
B. Maximum Variation From True Position: 6 mm.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01
4000 - Quality Requirements.
1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed
firm.
2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for
review prior to commencement of concrete operations.
3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure
compliance with specified requirements.
B. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M; for each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 76 cu m or less of each class of concrete placed.
1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under
same conditions as concrete it represents.
2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.
C. Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
3.13 PROTECTION
A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1313 - 4 CONCRETE PAVING

 B. Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1313 - 5 CONCRETE PAVING

 SECTION 32 1413
PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interlocking concrete paver units .
B. Non-interlocking concrete paver units .
C. Random and regular sandstone tiles.
D. CIP concrete paving.
E. Artificial turf.
F. Pebbles / loose gravel.
G. Topsoil filler.
H. Edge restraints.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete slab substrate.
B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil for pavers.
C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted fill for pavers.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C936/C936M - Standard Specification for Solid Concrete Interlocking Paving Units;
2013.
B. ASTM D5268 - Standard Specification for Topsoil Used for Landscaping Purposes; 2013.
C. ASTM D 638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics
D. ASTM D 790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical
Insulating
E. ASTM D 1525 -Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide characteristics of paver unit, dimensions, and special shapes.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of each paver type, illustrating style, size, color range and
surface texture of units being provided.
D. Samples:
1. Pedestals: Submit sample of each type of pedestal.
2. PVC Pipe: Submit 300 mm long sample of PVC pipe.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate substrate requirements and installation
methods.
F. Shop Drawings: Show general layout of paved areas, and layout of pedestal system, including
sloped conditions; include dimensions, edge details, adjacent construction, and special
conditions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: Company with no less than three (3) years documented experience in the installation
of exterior pedestal mounted pavers.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store pedestal support system and pavers on platforms a minimum of 100 mm off the ground.
Cover with polyethylene and protect from contact with materials which would cause staining or
discoloration.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1413 - 1 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT

PAVING
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The contractor performing this work, warrants that their work will remain free from defects of
labor and materials used in conjunction with their work in accordance with the general
conditions for this project, or for a maximum period of three (3) years, whichever is less.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST CONCRETE PAVERS
A. Interlocking Concrete Pavers: Hydraulically pressed concrete, configured for interlocking with
adjacent units and complying with ASTM C936/C936M.
1. Compressive Strength: 55 MPa average, with minimum of 50 MPa.
2. Absorption: 5 percent average, with maximum of 7 percent.
B. Non-interlocking Concrete Pavers:
1. Compressive Strength: Minimum of 50 MPa.
2. Absorption: 5 percent average, with maximum of 7 percent.
3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 7 percent.
C. Pattern, Size, Color, Style, Thickness, Surface Texture and Finish: As indicated on Drawings
(Hardscape details).
D. Topsoil Fill: For filling voids and joints, provide topsoil conforming to ASTM D5268.
E. Edging: Concrete curb; made from normal-weight concrete with a compressive strength not
less than 41 MPa and water absorption not more than 5 percent, in shapes and sizes as
indicated on Drawings.
2.02 SANDSTONE TILES
A. General: Type, Pattern, Color, and Texture: As selected by the Architect and approved by
KAUST.
2.03 ARTIFICIAL TURF
A. General: Type, Pattern, Color, and Texture: As selected by the Architect and approved by
KAUST.
2.04 PEBBLES AND OTHER TILE PAVERS
A. Gravel / Pebble Stones: Provide round edge white pebble stones with varied sizes ranging from
20 mm to 50 mm minimum overall thickness.
B. Tile Pavers: Provide durable (heavy-duty) tile pavers suitable for hard landscaping..
1. Material, Pattern, Size and Finish: As indicated on Drawings.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.
2.06 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.
B. Delete first paragraph below if latex-modified portland cement mortar mix is specified for setting
bed.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
D. Revise first paragraph below for latex-modified portland cement mortar bed if latex-additive
manufacturer requires coarser aggregate complying with ASTM C 33.
E. Sand: ASTM C 144.
F. Retain first paragraph below for thickset applications if latex additive is required to improve
flexibility and other properties of mortar setting bed or if latex additive is used for mortar-bed
bond coat.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1413 - 2 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT

PAVING
 G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all
of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with
field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.
H. Product in first paragraph below can be used for bond coat.
I. Thinset Mortar: Latex-modified portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.
J. Water: Potable.
K. Retain paragraph below if reinforced mortar bed is required. See Evaluations.
L. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm) by
0.062 inch (1.57 mm) in diameter; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M
except for minimum wire size.
2.07 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.
1. Retain subparagraph below if job-mixed pigmented grout is used. See Evaluations.
2. Colored Mortar Pigments for Grout: Natural and synthetic iron and chromium oxides,
compounded for use in mortar and grout mixes. Use only pigments that have proved,
through testing and experience, to be satisfactory for use in portland cement grout.
B. Retain one of first two paragraphs below if packaged grout is used instead of job-mixed grout.
C. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6, sanded.
D. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Water: Potable.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate is level or to correct gradient, smooth, capable of supporting pavers and
imposed loads, and ready to receive work of this Section.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of substrate are correct.
C. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work
constitutes acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by
prior observable conditions.
D. Verify that substrates, membranes, and protection boards are ready for installation of pedestal
system, and pavers.
1. The substrate that is to receive pedestals shall have positive slope to provide adequate
drainage in accordance with good building practices.
2. Inspect to insure that all substrates have been properly prepared to accept the pedestals.
Any surface defect which may impair performance of the pedestals or waterproofing
membrane shall be appropriately repaired. Commencement of work shall imply
acceptance of surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Establish accurate lines, levels, and pattern.
B. Assure that the surface to accept the pedestals is clean and free of debris which would impair
the performance of the pedestal system.
C. Insulation and/or protection board must be applied over the waterproofing/roofing substrate. If
specified, drainage mat, insulation and/or protection board must be installed according to
manufacturer's recommendations. If protection is specified only under the pedestal, then each
pad must extend beyond the edge of the pedestal system bottom cap or buffer pad, by a
minimum of 50 mm.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1413 - 3 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT

PAVING
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be
visible or cause staining in finished work.
B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors
and textures.
C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped
edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units
without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.
1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.
D. Handle protective-coated brick pavers to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or
edges of other units. If, despite these precautions, coating does contact bonding surfaces of
brick, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting brick.
E. Retain one of six options in first paragraph below or revise to suit Project. Patterns are not
applicable to all paver shapes.
F. Joint Pattern: As shown on Drawings.
G. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8
inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or
indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.
H. Retain one of two "Expansion and Control Joints" paragraphs below if joints are required.
I. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths
indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints unless otherwise
indicated; where unfilled joints are indicated, provide temporary filler until paver installation is
complete. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
J. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide cork joint filler at locations and of widths indicated.
Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers.
K. Retain first paragraph below if applicable; revise to suit Project. Aggregate and bituminous
setting-bed applications in areas without surrounding walls require edge restraints.
L. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.
1. Retain first subparagraph below if plastic or metal edge restraints are retained in Part 2. If
job-built edge restraints are required, indicate details on Drawings.
2. Install edge restraints to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install stakes at
intervals required to hold edge restraints in place during and after unit paver installation.
3. Retain first subparagraph below for metal edge restraints.
4. For metal edge restraints with top edge exposed, drive stakes at least 25 mm below top
edge.
5. Retain first subparagraph below for job-built concrete edge restraints; delete if specified in
another Section.
6. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Division 03 Section
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
7. Retain one of two subparagraphs below and detail on Drawings if pavers set in mortar or
embedded in concrete are used as edge restraints for aggregate-set pavers.
8. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing
aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it
will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.
9. Where pavers embedded in concrete are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in
aggregate setting bed, install pavers embedded in concrete and allow concrete to cure
before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Hold top of concrete
below aggregate setting bed.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1413 - 4 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT

PAVING
3.04 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS
A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove
surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.
B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing
mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not
exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.
C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at
subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.
D. Delete paragraph above or first two paragraphs below. Retain above if reinforcing wire is not
used; retain below if reinforcing wire is used.
E. Place reinforcing wire over concrete subbase, lapped at joints by at least one full mesh and
supported so mesh becomes embedded in the middle of mortar bed. Hold edges back from
vertical surfaces approximately 1/2 inch (13 mm).
F. Place mortar bed with reinforcing wire fully embedded in middle of mortar bed. Spread and
screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of
pavers to finished grades indicated.
G. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set.
Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that
has reached initial set.
H. Retain first paragraph below if brick pavers are used.
I. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar
bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver
with a flat trowel.
J. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed
and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single operation
before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of
realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.
K. Joint widths in first paragraph below are examples only. Retain tolerance to suit manufacturing
tolerances of pavers; rough-stone pavers and Application PA brick pavers require large
tolerances.
L. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 13-mm nominal joint width with variations not exceeding plus or
minus 1.5 mm.
M. Retain three paragraphs below for grouted joints.
N. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.
O. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.
1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces.
2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to remove
smears before tooling joints.
3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or
rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.
P. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended
by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.
3.05 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and
install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of
replacement.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1413 - 5 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT

PAVING
B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point
joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant
application.
C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.
1. Retain two subparagraphs below if applicable for brick pavers.
2. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as
acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers.
3. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating
material.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1413 - 6 PRECAST CONCRETE UNIT

PAVING
 SECTION 32 1713
PARKING BUMPERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2016.
B. ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2017.
C. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a
(Reapproved 2016).
D. ASTM C330/C330M - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural
Concrete; 2017a.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide unit configuration, dimensions.
C. Samples: Submit two concrete bumper units, illustrating surface finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, complying with the following:
1. Profile: Rectangular cross section with sloped vertical faces, square ends.
2. Cement: ASTM C150/C150M, Portland Type I - Normal; white color.
3. Concrete Materials: ASTM C330/C330M aggregate, water, and sand.
4. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished, strength and size
commensurate with precast unit design.
5. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M.
6. Concrete Mix: Minimum 34 MPa compressive strength after 28 days, air entrained to 5 to
7 percent.
7. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish.
Maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
8. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels.
9. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as
non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
10. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired.
B. Dowels: Steel, unfinished; 12 mm diameter, ____ mm long, pointed tip.
C. Adhesive: Epoxy type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units.
B. Install units in alignment with adjacent work.
C. Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 1713 - 1 PARKING BUMPERS

 SECTION 32 3119
DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:
1. Decorative steel fences.
2. Swing gates.
3. Gate operators, including controls.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete bases for gate operators, drives,
and controls and post concrete fill.
2. Section 281300 "Access Control" for access control devices installed at gates and
provided as part of a security system.
3. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for system disconnect
switches and powered devices including, but not limited to, motor operators, controls, and
limit switches.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For fencing and gates.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate locations, post spacing, and mounting,
attachment details, and grounding details.
2. Gate Operator: Show locations and details for installing operator components, switches,
and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting,
and grounding provisions.
3. Wiring Diagrams: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples: For each fence material and for each color specified.

1. Provide Samples 300 mm in length for linear materials.

2. Provide Samples 300 mm square for bar grating and sheet or plate materials.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For gate operators to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate
aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Include 3-m length of fence complying with requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 1 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Wind Loading:

1. Fence Height: 4.57 to 6.10 m.

2. Wind Exposure Category: B.
3. Design Wind Speed: 193 kph.
4. Design Wind Pressure: As indicated in design criteria.

B. Lightning-Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal

dry conditions.

2.2 DECORATIVE STEEL FENCES

A. Decorative Steel Fences: Fences made from steel tubing bars and shapes, hot-dip galvanized.

B. Posts: Square steel tubing.

1. Line Posts: 76 by 76 mm with 4.76-mm wall thickness.

2. End and Corner Posts: 102 by 102 mm with 4.76-mm wall thickness.
3. Swing Gate Posts: 102 by 102 mm with 4.76-mm wall thickness.

C. Post Caps: Formed from steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after forming.

D. Rails:

1. Steel Tube Rails: Square steel tubing (64 by 64 mm with 3.2-mmwall thickness.
2. Steel Channel Rails: Steel channels 51 by 25 mm.

E. Pickets: As indicated on drawings

F. Infill: Custom design as indicated on Drawings.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel carriage bolts and tamperproof nuts.

H. Fabrication: Assemble fences into sections by welding pickets to rails.

1. Fabricate sections with clips welded to rails for field fastening to posts.
2. Drill posts and clips for fasteners before finishing to maximum extent possible.

I. Fabrication: Fabricate bar grating infill into sections of size indicated.

1. Fabricate rails with clips welded to rails for field fastening to posts.
2. Drill posts, clips, and bar grating for fasteners before finishing to maximum extent
possible.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 2 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 J. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #4 - good-quality, uniform
undressed weld with minimal splatter.

K. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

1. Hot-dip galvanize posts and rails.

2. Hot-dip galvanize rail and picket assemblies after fabrication.
3. Hot-dip galvanize bar grating infill after fabrication.
4. Hot-dip galvanize custom-design rail and infill assemblies after fabrication.

L. Finish for Bar Grating Infill: Powder coating.

M. Finish for Steel Items Other Than Bar Grating Infill: High-performance coating.

N. Finish for Metallic-Coated-Steel Items Other Than Bar Grating Infill: High-performance coating.

2.3 SWING GATES

A. Gate Configuration: As indicated.

B. Gate Frame Height: As indicated.

C. Gate Opening Width: As indicated.

D. Automated vehicular gates shall comply with ASTM F 2200, Class I.

E. Galvanized-Steel Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from square tubes 64 by 64 mm

formed from 2.74-mm nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or formed from 2.66-mm
nominal-thickness steel sheet and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 7.9-mm diameter,
adjustable truss rods for panels 1.52 m wide or wider.

G. Additional Rails: Provide as indicated, complying with requirements for fence rails.

H. Infill: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

I. Picket Size, Configuration, and Spacing: Comply with requirements for adjacent fence.

1. Treillage: Provide iron castings of pattern indicated between each pair of pickets. Finish
as specified for [adjacent fence] [gates].

J. Hardware: Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, hinges, and keepers for each
gate leaf more than 1.52 m wide. Provide center gate stops and cane bolts for pairs of
gates. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both
sides of gate.

K. Spring Hinges: BHMA A156.17, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 320 - Gate spring pivot hinge. Adjustable tension.

2. Material: Malleable iron; galvanized.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 3 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
L. Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 39 - Full surface, triple weight, antifriction bearing.

2. Material: Wrought steel, forged steel, cast steel, or malleable iron; galvanized.

M. Rim Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 621 - Latchbolt by key from outside and by turn from inside. Latchbolt is held
retracted by device from inside.
2. Material: Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze.
3. Mounting Plate: Configuration necessary for mounting locks. Fabricate from 3.2-mm
thick, steel plate; galvanized.

N. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: F17 - Deadlock.

2. Material: Brass or bronze.
3. Levers: Cast, forged, or extruded brass or bronze.
4. Mounting Box: Configuration necessary to enclose locks. Fabricate from 3.2-mm thick,
steel plate; galvanized.

O. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31, Grade 1, of configuration required for use with lock specified,
fail-safe, and suitable for exterior use.

1. Mounting Plate: Configuration necessary for mounting electric strikes. Fabricate from 3.2-
mm thick, steel plate; galvanized.
2. Mounting: Mortise into post.

P. Exit Hardware: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, Type 1 (rim exit device), with push pad actuating bar,
suitable for exterior use.

1. Function: 01 - Exit only, no trim or blank escutcheon.

2. Mounting Channel: Bent-plate channel formed from 3.2-mm thick, steel plate. Channel
spans gate frame. Exit device is mounted on channel web, recessed between flanges,
with flanges extending 3.2 mm beyond push pad surface.

Q. Cane Bolts: Provide for inactive leaf of pairs of gates. Fabricated from 19-mm diameter, round
steel bars, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Finish to match gates. Provide galvanized-steel
pipe strikes to receive cane bolts in [closed position] [both open and closed positions].

R. Finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA Guideline 1, Finish #4 - good-quality, uniform
undressed weld with minimal splatter.

S. Galvanizing: For items other than hardware that are indicated to be galvanized, hot-dip
galvanize to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M. For hardware items, hot-dip galvanize to comply
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

T. Metallic-Coated-Steel Finish: High-performance coating.

U. Steel Finish: High-performance coating.

V. Aluminum Finish: Baked enamel or powder coating.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 4 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
2.4 GATE OPERATORS

A. Provide factory-assembled automatic operating system designed for gate size, type, weight,
and operation frequency. Provide operation control system with characteristics suitable for
Project conditions, with remote-control stations, safety devices, and weatherproof enclosures;
coordinate electrical requirements with building electrical system.

1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch

adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator.
2. Provide operator with UL-approved components.
3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic feature.
4. Provide unit designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening, permitting
universal installation.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. UL Standard: Manufacturer and label gate operators to comply with UL 325.

D. Emergency Access Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction

for automatic gate operators on gates that must provide emergency access.

E. Motor Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated
speeds, within installed environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding
nameplate rating or considering service factor. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and the following:

1. Voltage: 208-220 V.
2. Horsepower: Not less than 3/4.
3. Enclosure: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 1005 m
above sea level.
5. Service Factor: 1.15 for open dripproof motors; 1.0 for totally enclosed motors.
6. Phase: Polyphase.

F. Gate Operators: Concrete base mounted and as follows:

1. Hydraulic Swing Gate Operators:

a. Duty: Heavy duty, residential.

b. Gate Speed: Minimum 18.2 m per minute.
c. Maximum Gate Weight: 363 kg.
d. Frequency of Use: Continuous duty.
e. Operating Type: Wheel-and-rail drive with manual release.
f. Hydraulic Fluid: Of viscosity required for gate operation at ambient temperature
range for Project.
g. Locking: Hydraulic in both directions.
h. Heater: Manufacturer's standard track and roller heater with thermostatic control.

2. Mechanical Swing Gate Operators:

a. Duty: Heavy duty, residential.

b. Gate Speed: variable speed.
c. Maximum Gate Weight: 1360 kg.
d. Frequency of Use: Continuous duty.
e. Operating Type: Crank arm, with manual release.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 5 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 f. Drive Type: Enclosed worm gear and chain-and-sprocket reducers, roller-chain
drive.
g. Drive Type: V-belt and worm gear reducers, roller-chain drive.

G. Remote Controls: Electric controls separated from gate and motor and drive mechanism, with
NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure for concrete base mounting, and with space for additional
optional equipment. Provide the following remote-control device(s):

1. Control Station: Keyed, three-position switch with open, stop, and close function; located
remotely from gate. Provide two keys per station.
2. Control Station: Momentary-contact, three-button-operated with open, stop, and close
function; located remotely from gate. Key switch to lock out open and close buttons.
3. Card Reader: Functions only when authorized card is presented. Programmable,
multiple-code system, permitting four different access periods; face-lighted unit fully
visible at night.

a. Reader Type: Touch plate.

b. Features: Capable of monitoring and auditing gate activity.

4. Digital Keypad Entry Unit: Programmable, multiple-code capability of not less than 500
possible individual codes, consisting of 1 to 7-digit codes, and permitting four different
access periods.

a. Features: Capable of monitoring and auditing gate activity.

b. Face-lighted unit with keyless-membrane keypad fully visible at night.

5. Radio Control: Digital system consisting of code-compatible universal receiver for each
gate, located where indicated, with remote antenna with coaxial cable and mounting
brackets designed to operate gates. Provide two programmable transmitter(s) with
multiple-code capability permitting validating or voiding of not less than 1000 codes per
channel configured for the following functions:

a. Transmitters: Three button operated, with open and close function.

b. Channel Settings: Four independent channel settings controlling separate
receivers for operating more than one gate from each transmitter.

6. Telephone Entry System: Hands-free, voice-communication system for connection to

building telephone system with digital-entry code activation of gate operator and auxiliary
keypad entry.

a. Residential System: Designed to be wired to same line with telephone.

H. Vehicle Loop Detector: System includes automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay timer
cutoff switch, and loop detector designed to open and close gate. System includes electronic
detector with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and
panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop
of wire and to emit a signal activating the gate operator. System includes number of loops
consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement, as
recommended in writing by detection system manufacturer for function indicated, at location
indicated on Drawings.

I. Vehicle Presence Detector: System includes automatic closing timer with adjustable time
delay, timer cutoff switch, and presence detector designed to open and close gate. System
includes[retroreflective detector with adjustable detection zone pattern and sensitivity, designed

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 6 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 to detect the presence or transit of a vehicle in gate pathway when infrared beam in zone
pattern is interrupted, and to emit a signal activating the gate operator.

J. Obstruction Detection Devices: Provide each motorized gate with automatic safety sensor(s).
Activation of sensor(s) causes operator to immediately function as follows:

1. Action: Reverse gate in both opening and closing cycles, and hold until clear of
obstruction.
2. Action: Stop gate in opening cycle and reverse gate in closing cycle, and hold until clear
of obstruction.
3. Internal Sensor: Built-in torque or current monitor senses gate is obstructed.
4. Sensor Edge: Contact-pressure-sensitive safety edge, profile, and sensitivity designed for
type of gate and component indicated, in locations as follows. Connect to control circuit
using gate edge transmitter and operator receiver system.

a. Along entire gate leaf leading edge.

b. Along entire gate leaf trailing edge.
c. Across entire gate leaf bottom edge.
d. Along entire length of gate posts.
e. Along entire length of gate guide posts.
f. Where indicated on Drawings.

5. Photoelectric/Infrared Sensor System: Designed to detect an obstruction in gate's path

when infrared beam in the zone pattern is interrupted.

K. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically
stop gate at fully retracted and fully extended positions.

L. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick-disconnect release of operator drive system of the

following type, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Design system so control-circuit
power is disconnected during manual operation.

1. Type: Integral fail-safe release, allowing gate to be pushed open without mechanical
devices, keys, cranks, or special knowledge.

M. Operating Features:

1. Digital Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting, changing,

and adjusting control features with capability for monitoring and auditing gate activity.
Provide unit that is isolated from voltage spikes and surges.
2. System Integration: With controlling circuit board capable of accepting any type of input
from external devices.
3. Master/Slave Capability: Control stations designed and wired for gate pair operation.
4. Automatic Closing Timer: With adjustable time delay before closing and timer cutoff
switch.
5. Open Override Circuit: Designed to override closing commands.
6. Reversal Time Delay: Designed to protect gate system from shock load on reversal in
both directions.
7. Maximum Run Timer: Designed to prevent damage to gate system by shutting down
system if normal time to open gate is exceeded.
8. Clock Timer: 24-hour programmable for regular events.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 7 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 N. Accessories:

1. Warning Module: Visual, constant-light alarm sounding three to five seconds in advance
of gate operation and continuing until gate stops moving; compliant with the United
States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.
2. Battery Backup System: Battery-powered drive and access-control system, independent
of primary drive system.

a. Fail-Safe: Gate opens and remains open until power is restored.

b. Fail-Secure: Gate cycles on battery power, then fail-safe when battery is
discharged.

3. External electric-powered solenoid lock with delay timer allowing time for lock to release
before gate operates.
4. Fire box.
5. Fire strobe sensor.
6. Intercom System: <Insert requirements>.
7. Instructional, Safety, and Warning Labels and Signs: Manufacturer's standard for
components and features specified.
8. Equipment Bases/Pads: Precast concrete, depth not less than 305 mm, dimensioned and
reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and
as indicated on Drawings.

2.5 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability
properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form
required.

B. Extrusions: ASTM B 221M, Alloy 6063-T5.

C. Tubing: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

D. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209M, Alloy 6061-T6.

E. Die and Hand Forgings: ASTM B 247M, Alloy 6061-T6.

F. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy A356.0-T6.

2.6 STEEL AND IRON

A. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bars (Pickets): Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

C. Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Bar Grating: NAAMM MBG 531.

1. Bars: Hot-rolled steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel, Type B.
2. Wire Rods: ASTM A 510/A 510M.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 8 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 E. Uncoated Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel,
Grade 310 or cold-rolled steel sheet, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel, Grade 340.

F. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 340, with Z180 coating.

G. Aluminum-Zinc, Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality, Grade 340,
with AZM180 coating.

H. Castings: Either gray or malleable iron unless otherwise indicated.

1. Gray Iron: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30.

2. Malleable Iron: ASTM A 47/A 47M.

2.7 COATING MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers for Steel: Provide primers that comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings."

B. Shop Primer for Steel: Manufacturer's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-
inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer for Uncoated Steel: Complying with MPI #20 and compatible with
coating specified to be applied over it.

D. Epoxy Primer for Galvanized Steel: Epoxy primer recommended in writing by topcoat
manufacturer.

E. Epoxy Intermediate Coat for Uncoated Steel: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with
primer and topcoat.

F. Intermediate Coat for Uncoated Steel: Epoxy or polyurethane intermediate recommended in

writing by primer and topcoat manufacturer.

G. Polyurethane Intermediate Coat and Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with
undercoat.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.

1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be

welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in

Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 20
MPa, 75-mm slump, and 25-mm maximum aggregate size or dry, packaged, normal-weight
concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to
manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying

with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior
applications.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 9 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
2.9 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Grounding Conductors: Size as indicated on Drawings. Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and
smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.

1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.

2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.
3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 41 mm wide and 1.6 mm thick, woven of
No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

C. Grounding Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.

1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic-welded type.

2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.

a. Size: 16 by 2440 mm.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of
0.05 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion
coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's designations

2.11 STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces according to SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast
Cleaning. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be
applied over it.

B. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat finish
consisting of epoxy primer and TGIC polyester topcoat to a minimum total dry film thickness of
not less than 0.20 mm. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full.

C. Primer Application: Apply zinc-rich epoxy primer immediately after cleaning, to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm per applied coat, to surfaces that are exposed after
assembly and installation, and to concealed surfaces.

D. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."

E. High-Performance Coating: Apply intermediate and polyurethane topcoats to prime-coated

surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions and with requirements in
SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of
Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates recommended by coating manufacturer.

1. Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or
recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 10 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
2.12 METALLIC-COATED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Galvanized Finish: Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of oil and other contaminants. Use cleaning methods that
do not leave residue. After cleaning, apply a zinc-phosphate conversion coating compatible with
the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded
areas and apply galvanizing repair paint, complying with SSPC-Paint 20, to comply with
ASTM A 780/A 780M.

C. Powder Coating: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard
TGIC polyester powder-coat finish to a minimum dry film thickness of 0.05 mm.

1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

D. High-Performance Coating: Apply epoxy primer, polyurethane intermediate coat, and

polyurethane topcoat to prepared surfaces. Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions and with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop,
Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Apply at spreading rates
recommended by coating manufacturer.

1. Match approved Samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish, or
recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site
clearing, earthwork, pavement work, construction layout, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.

B. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by
Architect.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 152.5 m or
line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground
structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.

1. Construction layout and field engineering are specified in Section 017300 "Execution."

3.3 DECORATIVE FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Install fences according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 11 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 B. Install fences by setting posts as indicated and fastening rails and infill panels to posts.[ Peen
threads of bolts after assembly to prevent removal.

C. Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts in firm, undisturbed soil. Excavate holes
to a diameter of not less than 4 times post size and a depth of not less than 600 mm plus 75
mm for each 300 mm or fraction of a 300 mm that fence height exceeds 1.2 m.

D. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete with mechanical anchors by mechanically driving into soil at
indicated spacing into firm, undisturbed soil.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in
position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices.
2. Concrete Fill: Place concrete around posts and sleeves] and vibrate or tamp for
consolidation. Protect aboveground portion of posts from concrete splatter.

a. Exposed Concrete: Extend 51 mm above grade. Finish and slope top surface to
drain water away from post.
b. Concealed Concrete: Top 51 mm below grade as indicated on Drawings to allow
covering with surface material. Slope top surface of concrete to drain water away
from post.

3. Posts Set in Concrete: Extend post to within 150 mm of specified excavation depth, but
not closer than 75 mm to bottom of concrete.
4. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use galvanized-steel pipe sleeves with inside
diameter at least 20 mm larger than outside diagonal dimension of post, preset and
anchored into concrete for installing posts.

a. Extend posts at least 125 mm into sleeve.

b. After posts have been inserted in sleeves, fill annular space between post and
sleeve with nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's
written instructions; shape and smooth to shed water. Finish and slope top surface
of grout to drain water away from post.

5. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 20 mm larger than
outside diagonal dimension of post.

a. Extend posts at least 125 mm into concrete.

b. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post
and concrete with nonshrink grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout
manufacturer's written instructions. Finish and slope top surface of grout to drain
water away from post.

6. Mechanically Driven Posts: Drive into soil to depth of 914 mm. Protect post top to prevent
distortion.
7. Space posts uniformly at 2.44 m o.c.

3.4 GATE INSTALLATION

A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full
opening without interference. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means.
Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and
lubricate where necessary.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 12 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
3.5 GATE OPERATOR INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gate operators according to manufacturer's written instructions, aligned and true
to fence line and grade.

B. Excavation for Concrete Bases: Hand-excavate holes for bases in firm, undisturbed soil to
dimensions and depths and at locations as required by gate operator component
manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.

C. Concrete Bases: Cast-in-place or precast concrete, depth not less than 300 mm, dimensioned
and reinforced according to gate operator component manufacturer's written instructions and as
indicated on Drawings.

D. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Cut grooves in pavement and bury and seal wire loop according
to manufacturer's written instructions. Connect to equipment operated by detector.

E. Comply with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions for grounding of electric-powered
motors, controls, and other devices.

3.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Comply with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 450 m except as follows:

1. Fences within 30 m of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at

maximum intervals of 225 m.

a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.

1) Bond metal gates to gate posts.

2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except at openings indicated
as intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least
460 mm below finished grade.

C. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of

crossing and at a maximum distance of 45 m on each side of crossing.

D. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2

unless otherwise indicated.

E. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is
150 mm below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect
conductor to each fence component at grounding location.

F. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.

G. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in
direct contact are galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make

contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 13 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

H. Bonding to Lightning-Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or

structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning-protection
down conductor or lightning-protection grounding conductor, complying with NFPA 780.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at

each grounding location. Measure grounding resistance not less than two full days after
last trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than
natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of
reducing natural grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to
IEEE 81.
2. Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value,
notify Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance
and a proposal to accomplish recommended work.
3. Report: Prepare test reports of grounding resistance at each test location certified by a
testing agency. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect
test results.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire
operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without
forcing or binding.

B. Automatic Gate Operators: Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Adjust
operators, controls, safety devices, alarms, and limit switches.

1. Hydraulic Operators: Purge operating system, adjust pressure and fluid levels, and check
for leaks.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls, alarms, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.

C. Lubricate hardware, gate operators, and other moving parts.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain gates.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 3119 - 14 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES

AND GATES
 SECTION 32 8423
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The purpose of this work is to supply, install, test and commission an automated irrigation
system including all related components.
B. The automated irrigation system shall consist of a irrigation pump system, irrigation filtration
system, main line, regular irrigation controller, and/or irrigation central control system, irrigation
control wires, field AC electric control valves, lateral lines, sprinklers, integrated dripper lines,
drippers, bubblers, flush valves and other necessary components and accessories.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. General: Comply with IRRIGATION NOTES - IRRIGATION WATER NETWORK and
IRRIGATION SCHEDULE as indicated on Drawings.
B. Scope of work shall be read in conjunction with the contract material specifications, contract
drawings and installation details and it includes, but not limited to, the following:
1. The contractor shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to The Main line
route and sizes, laterals route and sizes, solenoid valves, control wires route and
numbers, irrigation controllers, sprinklers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers,
bubblers and flush valves.
2. The contractor shall submit for client approval all technical information and samples of the
materials he intends to use. These materials should be in accordance with the material
specifications of this project.
3. The contractor shall commission the irrigation system upon completing the work and then
shall be handed over.
4. The contractor and upon completing the work shall provide the client with three original
sets of As-Built drawings accurately reflecting the executed works and installation details.
5. The Contractor shall upon completing the works provide the client with detailed Operation
and Maintenance Manuals (with Arabic translations) in three originals. The manuals shall
include, but not limited to, the following:
a. Complete and marked literature of all products used on the project and its reordering
part numbers.
b. List of the recommended spare parts for a period of 5 years.
c. Original print of the As Built drawings.
d. The client prior to issuing the project handing over certificate shall approve the As-
Built drawings and the operation & maintenance manual
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manu­facture of irrigation equipment, central
control systems, pumps and fittings whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for five years.
B. Contractor’s site supervisor shall have knowledge of referenced standards and at least five (5)
years of documented experience in works related to irrigation of landscaped areas and shall
have successfully completed works similar in design, material, and extent to that indicated for
the Project.
C. Installers shall be familiar with the material and installation procedures indicated and shall be
skilled and trained.
D. Contractor’s Internal Quality Control shall include but not limited to:
1. Checking supplier’s test certificates and certificates of compliance to conform to
specification and referenced standards prior to first delivery.
2. Checking supplier’s delivery tickets of each delivery for completeness and compliance
with supply order and specification

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 1 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 3. Checking labels and condition of pipes, components and irrigation equipment of each
delivery, particular to ensure that; pipes, components and irrigation equipment are
undamaged protective coatings of pipes and fittings are undamaged where pipes are
provided with factory applied jointing material, this material is in proper condition
4. Checking if equipment and tools are in a serviceable condition at least every week
5. Checking the correct storage of pipes, components, and irrigation equipment at least
every week
6. Field Quality Control as indicated.
E. Packing and Shipping
1. Moving pipes and equipment shall be held to a minimum to reduce the possibility of
damage. Whether moved by hands, hoists, or other acceptable method, pipes and
equipment shall not be thrown, dropped, dragged, bumped, or allowed to impact on
objects that cause damage.
F. Storage and Protection
1. All the products shall be delivered in the manufacturers’ original protective packaging and
shall be inspected at time of delivery. Any product which are damaged and not in
accordance with specifications, or date stamp expired shall be immediately removed from
the site and replaced.
G. Evidence must be submitted to verify materials, such as uPVC pipes, solvent cement, and
rubber gaskets, have been properly protected during transport and storage prior to delivery to
the site.
H. All products shall be handled and stored in accordance with printed recommendations of the
manufacturer.
I. All site storage areas shall be shaded at all time. Pipe stacks shall be designed to ensure that
pipes and especially pipe sockets are not deformed during storage and/or affected by sunlight.
J. Precautions shall also be taken to protect items sensitive to sunlight or hear prior to backfilling
operation. uPVC pipes shall on no account be exposed to sunlight for more than two days in
summer, or one week in winter. Any pipe, whether installed or not, which is observed to be
sunburn, or oval, shall immediately be removed from the site and replaced.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWWA C901- Polyethylene (PE) pressure Pipe & Tubing, ½ inch through 3 inch for water
B. AWWA C906 - Polyethylene (PE) pressure Pipe & Fittings, 4 inch through 63 inch for water
C. ASTM D3035 - Standard Spec for PE Pipe (DR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
D. ASTM D3261- Butt Heat Fusion PE Fittings for PE Pipe & Tubing
E. ASTM D3350 - Standard Specification for PE Pipe & Fittings Materials
F. ASTM D1238 - Melt Flow Index
G. ASTM D1505 - Density of Plastics
H. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008.
I. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010.
J. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
K. ASTM D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2004 (Reapproved 2011).
L. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe
(SDR Series); 2009.
M. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2012.
N. ISO R 161 - Confirming to German Standards Din 8061 & 19532
O. SASO 14 &15 - Confirming to Saudi Pipes Standards

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 2 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 P. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
Q. NSF Std.#14 Plastic Piping Components & Related Materials
R. BS: CP312 Code of Practice for Plastics Pipe work (Thermoplastic Materials) of uPVC Pipe
work and Fittings
S. BS: 1780 - Specification for bourdon tube pressure and vacuum gauges.
T. BS: 3505 - Specification for uPVC pressure pipes for cold potable water.
U. BS: 4346 - Joints and fittings for use with uPVC pressure pipes.
V. BS: 5150 - Specification for cast iron wedge and double disk gate valves for general purposes.
W. BS: 5154 - Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves
for general purposes
X. BS: 8010 - Code of Practice for pipelines.
1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. In case the final design is part of the Contract and has to be prepared by the Contractor, the
following shall be considered in the final design:
1. A seasonal profile of the water requirement of the landscaped area shall be determined to
assess how often, and by how much, the area or individual plants and trees need to be
watered. This shall include the peak water requirement to determine the irrigation system
capacity. The method to determine the individual crop water requirements shall be
approved by the Engineer.
2. The design of pipework and fittings shall consider all friction losses and shall provide a
correct overall system performance.
3. The design water velocity in any pipeline when operating at system capacity generally
shall not exceed 1.5 m/s.
4. The irrigation system shall be designed to avoid any water hammer and surge. This may
include but shall not be limited to:
a. Reducing the effective length by the incorporation of more valves of a suitable
specification in the pipeline
b. Reducing the velocity
c. Increasing the closing time of valves
d. Installing suitable pressure regulating valves
B. All outlets shall have adequate capacity at the design working pressure to deliver the design
flow to the distribution system at the design operating pressure of the system; that means
sprinklers, bubblers, and emitters.
1.06 ADMISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with site backfilling, landscape grading and delivery of plant
life.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Material & Equipment Schedule: All catalogue cuts, diagrams, samples, drawings & such other
data may be required to demonstrate compliance with the specification.
B. Existing Service and No Objection Certificate:
1. Prior to start of any work at site the contractor has to approach all Service Authorities to
get their no objection for the work included in this contract and a record drawing for their
existing services. Copy of these drawings and no objection certificate should be
submitted to the Engineer before starting the actual work at site.
C. Shop Drawings: The Contractor to prepare the project shop drawings in three sets which to be
approved by the client representative prior to commencing installation work. The contractor
shall prepare the shop drawings showing but not limited to the main line route and sizes,

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 laterals route and sizes, solenoid valves, control wires route and numbers, irrigation controllers,
sprinklers, integrated dripper lines, on line drippers, bubblers and flush valves.
1. The successful contractor shall submit shop drawings, for approval by the Engineer, for
the following:
a. In case of any conflict between contract drawings and any existing of future services
which may necessitate re-routing proposed irrigation Main or laterals, the contractor
has to prepare the shop drawings accordingly and submit it to the Engineer for
approval. This should be considered as integral part of the contract.
b. Details of mainline, profile drawings for main line, lateral pipes and other typical
connections.
c. Wiring diagrams including conduits, pull boxes, sizing and calculations to verify that
cable sizing is in accordance with regulations and equipment manufacturer’s
recommendations.
d. Electrical power and control wiring diagrams for irrigation controllers, field wiring and
grounding including all decoders and interfaces.
e. Sketch plans for drip line layout.
f. Sketch plans for Sprayer and Sprinkler layouts.
g. Details of valve chambers and any modification to the existing feeding chambers.
h. The approvals shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibility under the
contract for successful completion of the work.
D. Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams. The contractor shall
submit for client approval prior to commencing installation works; the products he intends to use
with all technical details and literature in accordance with the specifications below.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall submit three sets of the detailed
Operation & Maintenance Manual with equipment reordering codes and literature. O & M
manuals shall include the following information:
1. Description of equipment
2. Operation of equipment
3. Maintenance of equipment & lubrication schedule
4. Servicing of equipment
5. Control Diagrams
6. Irrigation valve operation schedule c/w controller station no., valve no., size, flows, and
operating time.
7. Diagrams of the system
8. Logic of operation of the Systems
9. Valve charts
10. Performance characteristics: Curves & charts for equipment (data shall refer to, & identify
specific model in service & shall not be general advertising data).
11. Spare parts list.
12. Names, contact numbers & addresses of spare part suppliers.
13. Test report
14. Certificates
15. Bill of Quantities of Material used in the contract
16. Letter of satisfaction
17. Guarantees
F. A digital copy of Valve operation schedule, circuit & control diagrams shall be submitted along
with As-built drawings.
G. As-Built Drawings: The contractor shall submit three sets of the complete project as-built
drawings reflecting the actual site installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Irrigation Network Component:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 4 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 1. uPVC pipes & fitting
2. P.E tube & accessories
3. Root watering series
4. Single outlet emitter
5. Pressure compensated in-line emitter
6. Solenoid valve
7. Pressure regulating module
8. Quick coupling valve
9. Isolation valve.
10. Air release valve
11. Valve boxes
12. Control unite
13. 24-VAC electric cable
14. Automatic backwashing screen filter
15. Pumps
2.02 HDPE PIPE AND FITTINGS (HIGH-DENSITY POLYETHYLENE)
A. HDPE Pipe and Fittings: Complies with applicable Codes and Standards listed in Article 1.03
Reference Standards above.
B. SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio): 11
C. PN (Nominal Pressure: 16
2.03 PE TUBE & ACCESSORIES
A. Polyethylene pipe and fittings for emitter lines shall be manufactured from linear low-density
polyethylene incorporating a minimum of 2.8percent carbon black and shall have a working
pressure of 4kg/cm2.
B. The flexible polyethylene tubing shall be brown provides unmatched resistance to chemicals,
algae growth and UV damage.
C. The flexible polyethylene tubing shall be of outside diameter 16.1 mm and wall thickness 1.2
mm and accepts an approved compression fittings. Dripline Insert Fittings and 17mm insert
fittings. The bend radius shall be 3 inches whether bending the tubing with the natural bend of
the coil or against it.
D. Random samples of drip irrigation pipes shall be subjected to the Teepol stress crack
resistance test. Fittings shall be compression type manufactured from UV resistant break
resistant plastic and shall be compatible with the pipe used. Insert barbed type fittings secured
by plastic ratchet clips shall not be used.
E. Connections to pop-up sprays shall be by heavy duty Superior flexibility pipe (swing pipe) with
spiral barb fittings allows pipe to be efficiently routed around hardscape, terraces, and uneven
terrain to turn landscape design into reality.
F. The swing pipe shall be flexible black tubing constructed of linear low density polyethylene
material. The tubing shall have a wall thickness of 0.098”. It shall have a nominal inside
diameter of 0.487” for use with spiral barb fittings without the necessity of glue or clamps. The
model number, manufacturer’s name and date of manufacture shall be printed at intervals of
between 3’ and 6’ along the length of the tubing. Each 18” (46 cm) length of tubing shall be
capable of pressure testing at the rate of 80 pounds per square inch (5.5 bar) per second to a
minimum burst pressure of 350 psi (24.1 bar). The swing pipe shall be capable of 8 gallons per
minute (gpm) maximum. The tubing shall have an operating pressure rating of 80 psi at 110oF
(5.5 bar at 43 degrees C).
2.04 ROOT WATERING SERIES (RWS)
A. The Root Watering Series is the smart watering product line designed to maximize tree and
shrub transplanting survivability. It shall consist of a perforated polyethylene cylinder in three
different lengths - 36" (91 cm) for large trees, 18" (46 cm) for small trees, and 10" (25 cm) for

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 5 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 shrubs and row plantings - and two different widths - 4" (10 cm) for trees and 2" (5 cm) for
shrubs and row plantings.
B. The rigid mesh material shall help support the horizontal movement of water into the root zone
and adjacent soil. The cylinder shall support pea gravel fill to provide better top-to-bottom water
dispersion and firmness against root compression.
C. RWS shall be designed with an integrated bubbler with adjustable outlets and optional check
valve. The water being emitted from the bubbler will help train roots away from surfaces and
hardscapes, minimize surface erosion and reduce waste due to runoff. The factory-assembled
RWS shall come configured with swing assemblies and/or spiral barbed fittings in order to
promote irrigation design flexibility, accommodate all tree and shrub sizes, and help save
installation time by being ready to install out of the box. The assemblies and fittings shall
enable RWS to be directly connected to PVC or polyethylene lateral lines. Models shall be
provided without fittings that support integration with drip line.
D. It shall help trees and shrubs establish deeper and broader roots for better stability against high
winds and quicker, healthier growth. The subsurface irrigation design shall improve watering
efficiency by minimizing the total volume of water used to irrigate trees and shrubs and
minimize water lost due to evaporation and run-off.
E. It shall improve the aesthetics of the landscape by installing at finish grade level and minimizing
root damage to hardscapes.
F. RWS shall support an extra-wide molded collar to provide convenient access to the bubbler
and drip line fastener. It shall support a locking grate cover to help deter vandalism. It shall offer
a purple, reclaimed water grate cover option. It shall offer a sock option in order to prevent
small particles from penetrating the RWS cylinder.
G. RWS units should be installed on their own watering zone in order to improve irrigation
efficiency and management.
2.05 SINGLE OUTLET WITH MEDIUM FLOW RATE 5 / 7 / 10 / 12 /18 / 24 G.P.H
A. The pressure-compensating modules shall be made of UV resistant acetyl externally.
B. The pressure-compensating modules shall be color-coded on the outlet side to identify flow
rate. A tan outlet shall indicate an emitter with a flow rate of 5 gallons per hour (18,93 l/h), a
violet outlet shall indicate a flow rate of 7 gallons per hour (26,50 l/h), a green outlet shall
indicate a flow rate of 10 gallons per hour (37,85 l/h), a dark brown outlet shall indicate a flow
rate of 12 gallons per hour (45,42 l/h), a white outlet shall indicate a flow rate of 18 gallons per
hour (68,13 l/h) and an orange outlet shall indicate a flow rate of 24 gallons per hour (90,84 l/h).
C. The pressure-compensating modules shall be available with two inlet options: self-piercing barb
inlet and 10-32 threaded inlet. The pressure-compensating modules with self-piercing barb inlet
shall permit one-step insertion into ½” or ¾” drip tubing.
2.06 SUB-SURFACE PRESSURE COMPENSATED IN-LINE EMITTER
A. The flexible, copper-colored polyethylene tubing shall have factory installed pressure-
compensating, inline emitters spaced evenly per listed spacing. The flow rate from each
installed inline emitter shall be 0.6 or 0.9 gallons per hour when inlet pressure is between 8.5
and 60 psi.
B. The inline emitter diaphragm shall have a pressure-regulating diaphragm with a spring action
allowing it to self-rinse if there is a plug at the outlet hole. The flexible tubing allows for easy
non-linear installations. The inline emitter shall have copper shield technology installed to
protect the emitter from root intrusion. The inline emitter inlet shall be raised off the inside tube
wall to minimize dirt intrusion.
C. The installation of sub-surface in-line emitter shall include air relief valve with suitable size, auto
flush for lateral lines and all necessary accessories as per manufacturer recommendation.
2.07 ELECTRICAL REMOTE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A. Electrical Remote Control Solenoid Valve For Potable Water:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 6 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 1. “PEB Electric Remote Control Plastic reclaimed Water Valve”
a. The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
(cycles/sec) solenoid actuated globe pattern design capable of having a designed
flow. The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 200 psi (13.8 bar).
b. The valve body shall be constructed of heavy-duty glass-filled UV-resistant nylon and
have stainless steel studs and flange nuts; diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced
nitrile rubber.
c. The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control (internal
and external bleed) for manually opening and closing the valve without electrically
energizing the solenoid. The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve
box.
d. The valve shall house a fully-encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The solenoid shall
have a captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy servicing and a leverage
handle for easy turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz solenoid shall open with 19.6 VAC
minimum at 200 PSI (13.8 bar). At 24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed
.41 amps. Average holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps.
e. The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or
shut-off of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 200 PSI
(13.8 bar) and less than 30 seconds at 20 PSI (1.4 bar).
f. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be
removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
B. Electrical Remote Control Solenoid Valve for Reclaimed Water:
1. “PESB-R Electric Remote Control Plastic reclaimed Water Valve”
a. The electric remote control valve shall be a normally closed 24 VAC 50/60 Hz
(cycles/sec) solenoid actuated globe pattern design capable of having a flow rate of
0.2 - 200 gpm flow with valve pressure rating 1.38 - 13,8 bar.
b. The valve body shall be constructed of heavy-duty glass-filled UV-resistant nylon and
have stainless steel studs and flange nuts; diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced
EPDM rubber.
c. The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control (internal
and external bleed) for manually opening and closing the valve without electrically
energizing the solenoid. The valve internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve
box.
d. The valve shall house a fully-encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The solenoid shall
have a captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy servicing and a leverage
handle for easy turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz solenoid shall open with 19.6 VAC
minimum at 13.8 bar. At 24 VAC, average inrush current shall not exceed .41 amps.
Average holding current shall not exceed 0.28 amps.
e. The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or
shut-off of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 13.8 bar
and less than 30 seconds at 1.4 bar.
f. The PESB-R valve shall have a self-cleaning stainless steel screen designed for use
in dirty water applications.
g. The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be
removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
h. The valve shall have a purple flow control handle to indicate to the user that non-
potable water is being used.
C. Pressure regulating module
1. Pressure regulating module capable of regulating outlet pressure between 15 and 100 PSI
(+/- 3 PSI) (1.04 and 6.90 bar +/-0,21 bar). The PRS-D module shall have an adjusting
knob for setting pressure and Schrader valve connection for monitoring pressure. The
pressure shall be adjustable from the PRS-D when the valve is internally manually bled or
electrically activated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 7 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

2.08 QUICK COUPLING VALVES
A. Two Piece Quick Coupling Valve
1. The quick coupling valve shall be a two piece type capable of having a discharge rate of
30 gpm with a pressure loss not to exceed 0.83 bar.
2. The valve shall be constructed of red brass and shall have a purple, thermoplastic, locking
rubber cover with molded-in warnings of "DO NOT DRINK" in English and Spanish, for
use on systems using non-potable water.
3. The valve shall be opened and closed by a brass key of the same manufacturer having a
1" (MNPT) and 1 " (FNPT) outlet. The valve throat shall have a key-way with detent
positions for regulating water flow.
2.09 ISOLATION VALVES
A. Isolation valves for 50 mm (2 inches) diameter mains and smaller shall have a body complying
with ASTM B 61 bronze, or ASTM B 30 copper alloy 908 or alloy 954. They shall have a
nonrising stem, double wedge disc and a threaded inlet and outlet. Valves shall be rated for 1.5
MPa working pressure and have the capability of being repacked while under pressure.
Operation of the valves shall be by a handwheel.
B. Isolation valves of 63 mm (2 ½ inches) size and larger shall be the non_rising stem, outside
screw and yoke type with cast or ductile iron body and bronze trim. Ductile iron shall conform to
ASTM A 536, Grade 60_40_18 and cast iron to ASTM A 126, Class B. Valve spindles shall be
stainless steel complying with ASTM A 479, Type 316. Valves shall have a solid wedge bronze
or brass disc quipped with operating nut (unless otherwise approved) and a flanged inlet and
outlet. Valves shall be rated for 1.5 MPa water working pressure and have the capability of
being repacked while under pressure.
C. The rubber or wedge in sealing rings and the like shall be of a synthetic quality which can
withstand storage in the KSA climate for at least five years and shall be suitable for the water
qualities specified.
2.10 AIR RELEASE VALVES
A. Air release valve shall be installed on any high inflection of the mainline as indicated on the
drawings. The relative location is indicated on the irrigation plans, but should be field adjusted
to the highest point. All swing assembly fittings shall be of brass or bronze or uPVC
construction pressure rating 16 bar.
B. Combination Air/Vacuum release valves shall be rated PN 16 and combine the function of a
large orifice air and vacuum relief valve with the features of a small orifice continually acting air
vent valve. Body to be ductile iron, coating shall be fusion-bonded epoxy or plastic powder.
Internal components to be stainless steel or protected by injection moulded intrile rubber that
ensures that there are no metal parts in contact with the water. Valves shall have controlled
closing speed to eliminate surge generation from sudden closing.
2.11 VALVE BOXES
A. 10” Round Valve Boxes
1. Valve boxes shall be used as durable, rigid enclosures for valves or other irrigation system
components requiring subsurface protection for installation or maintenance. The valve box
shall be made of structural foam HDPE resin that is resistant to UV light, weather,
moisture, and chemical action of soils.
2. The body shall have knock-outs molded into the sides that can easily be removed. The
knock-outs shall remain an integral part of the body unless to run pipes or wires through
the valve box.
3. The valve box shall have corrugated sides. The valve box shall have a stepped feature on
the bottom that securely interlocks two boxes together when mated bottom - to- bottom for
use in a deep installation.
4. There shall be no hole in the valve box lid unless the bolt-hole knock-out is removed in
order to use the locking bolt. Lids shall have beveled edges to minimize potential damage
from lawn equipment. Lids shall be clearly marked with the words "Irrigation Control

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 8 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 Valve" molded onto the top. Lids shall have a marking area measuring at least 6" by 2"
that is suitable for branding or other means of identification.
5. The locking bolt, washer, and clip shall be made of stainless steel.
B. Jumbo Series Valve Boxes
1. Valve boxes shall be used as durable, rigid enclosures for valves or other irrigation system
components requiring subsurface protection for installation or maintenance. The valve
box shall be made of structural foam HDPE resin that is resistant to UV light, weather,
moisture, and chemical action of soils.
2. The jumbo rectangular body shall have knock-outs molded into the ends that can be
readily removed. The knock-outs shall remain an integral part of the body unless removed
to run pipes or wires through the valve box.
3. The valve box shall have corrugated sides. Rectangular valve boxes shall have a grooved
feature on one side, just below the lid at the top of the box, for inserting a shovel blade or
other prying tool to provide easy lid removal. This is useful following compaction of the
surrounding soil or after the eventual accumulation of thatch over the valve box.
4. Extension models shall have vertical ribs inside that make them capable of being mounted
directly over the top of another box.
5. Boxes shall have a stepped feature on the bottom that securely interlocks two boxes
together when mated bottom-to-bottom for use in a deep installation.
6. There shall be no hole in the valve box lid unless the bolt-hole knock-out is removed in
order to use the locking bolt. Lids shall have beveled edges to minimize potential damage
from lawn equipment. Lids shall be clearly marked with the words “Irrigation Control
Valve” molded onto the top. Lids shall have a marking area measuring at least 6” by 2”
that is suitable for branding or other means of identification.
7. The locking bolt, washer, and clip shall be made of stainless steel.
2.12 CENTRAL CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Controller shall be connected to the existing Central Control System, if applicable.
2.13 DECODER SYSTEM ELECTRIC CABLE
A. Conductor construction is tin coated, soft drawn bare copper meeting the requirements of
ASTM Specification B-33.
B. The two conductors shall be insulated with a high quality polyvinylchloride (PVC) for systems
applications up to 600 volts. One conductor will be insulated black and the other conductor
insulated red. Both conductors shall be of the same size as specified and/or shown on the
drawings and as required for the proper operation of the Satellite and Decoder units connected
to it.
C. The two conductors shall be laid parallel and pressure extruded with a solid color, linear low
density, sunlight resistant polyethylene (PE) outer jacket. The standard colors for the jacket
shall be red, green, blue, yellow, black, purple and orange.
D. Application: Suitable for use as communication wire for control of Maxi control systems.
E. Conductor: Tin coated, soft drawn bare copper (ASTM Spec. B-33) Two (2) conductors
1. Solid (14 AWG and 12 AWG)
2. Insulation: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
3. Outer Jacket: Polyethylene (PE)
4. Temperature: 60 degrees C
5. Voltage: 600 volts
2.14 WIRE CONNECTORS
A. All wire connections at electric remote control valves and all splices of wire in the field shall be
made using wire connectors. The wire connectors shall be specifically designed to ensure
water-proof underground wire connections. The connectors shall be under-writers laboratories
listed water-resistant wire connectors; rated 600 volts for PVC insulated copper wire with
insulation temperature rating of 105 degree C.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 9 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 B. The connector shall be insulated with color coded, pliable, vinyl skirt. The feature a live spring
this assures a tight grip even on small wire combinations.
C. All valve combinations shall be arranged at the controller.
2.15 AUTOMATIC BACKWASHING SCREEN FILTER
A. The suction scanning Screen filters shall be made from high-grade, low-carbon steel. All
exposed surfaces, both inside and out, are polyester powder coated over a zinc phosphate
primer coat. All wetted components shall be constructed of either engineered plastics or non-
corrosive metals. Standard 300 micron wire mesh screens shall be PVC-supported which
virtually eliminates the possibility of screen collapse. The suction scanning Screen filters “G-
Series” filters shall be also available in Stainless Steel construction, for the most demanding
water quality applications.
B. Heavy-duty, durable, SS woven wire mesh screen filtration element with PVC support shall be
supplied standard. Other screen construction including multi-layer sintered SS and wedge wire
shall be also optionally available upon request.
C. Standard SS woven wire mesh screens shall be supplied as 300 micron. Optional SS screen
sizes shall be available for 50, 80, 100, 150 or 200 micron, standard flow rates shall be from 25
to 3,500 GPM, standard maximum operating pressure shall be of 150 PSI (higher pressures
optionally available)
D. Filtered, clean water backwashing initiated automatically by time or pressure differential via
integrated controller.
E. Dirty water enters the inlet, where it enters the fine screen. The water passes through the
screen from the inside to the out. The solids accumulate on the inner surface of the screen
creating a pressure differential across the screen. Once the pressure differential reaches a
preset value, a rinse cycle is activated and the control system opens the rinse valve to drain. As
a result, the pressure drops in the hydraulic motor chamber and dirt collector assembly. The
pressure drop causes water to back flush through the screen in a small concentrated area at
the nozzle open­ings. The high velocity backwash stream pulls the dirt off the screen. The
backwash water is carried through the collector and ejected out of the holes in the hydraulic
motor. The dirt collector rotates while it moves linearly (on models with a piston assembly),
ensuring the entire screen is cleaned each cycle. The process takes a matter of seconds,
without interruption of system flow.
F. The standard automatic control sys­tem consists of a microprocessor based control­ler, a
differential pressure switch and a solenoid actuated flush valve. The differential pressure switch
monitors inlet and outlet pressures and comes factory preset to 7 psi. The flush valve is
activated by the controller when the differential pressure exceeds 7 psi. The filtration system is
automatically monitored and controlled on elapsed time since the last cleaning cycle or
pressure differential (user definable). If timed cleaning cycles are utilized, the system will
automatically default to a backwash based on differential pressure if a 7 psi differential
pres­sure is reached before the next timed cleaning cycle. Standard automatic controls are
available for 115 VAC and are user configurable to 230 VAC, 50 / 60 Hz power.
2.16 PUMPS
A. Pumping system: Existing at site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 IRRIGATION INSTALLATION
A. Setting Out
1. Trench lines, sprinklers and valve locations shall be set out prior to commencement of
construction by a qualified surveyor approved by the Engineer. Any discrepancies
between the setting out, the drawings and the site shall be reported to the Engineer in the
form of a scaled sketch drawing. The Contractor shall additionally ensure that the
maximum sprinkler spacing indicated in the specification shall not be exceeded, and any

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 10 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 situations where spacing will be exceeded shall be reported to the Engineer. The Engineer
will make any adjustments as may be required.
B. Trenching
1. Prior to trenching all eventual services crossing or running close to the line of the trench
shall be identified and exposed.
2. During installation special care shall be taken not to disturb any existing temporary
/permanent services. Any damage to existing services shall be remedied by the
Contractor by replacing the plant.
3. Trenches shall be made as narrow as practicable, but not less than the pipe diameter plus
300mm, and shall provide sufficient space for laying, jointing and testing.
4. The width of the trench at the crown of the pipe shall not exceed the maximum pipe
diameter plus 600mm.
5. The trench bottom shall be composed of stable uniform sand with no protuberances that
might cause point loading of the pipe. The trench formation shall be trimmed to an even
finish which will provide continuous support for the pipe. Additional excavation shall be
carried out at the position of the pipe socket to ensure proper joint assembly and pipe
support.
6. If the existing formation is unsuitable for direct laying, pipes shall be laid on a bed of
imported sand 100mm thick (minimum). This sand may be soured from sieved excavated
material, but shall not contain any particles larger than 5mm, and shall have good self
compacting properties.
7. Trench shall not be excavated unless there is sufficient pipe to be installed in order to
ensure that the trenches do not “cave in”.
8. The 300 mm top soil layer shall be removed and placed on one side of the trench, the
remaining sub-layer shall be excavation to a depth of minimum 700 mm and shall be
placed in the other side of the trench to avoid contamination when backfilling into the level
before the top soil emulating the same condition found previous to trenching.
C. Backfilling
1. Piping shall be center loaded leaving joints exposed within three days of laying. Initial
backfill shall be by hand in 300mm lifts and carried out in such a manner as to ensure
adequate support under the pipe and distributed evenly to ensure there are no voids
under or to the side of the pipe.
2. Back material shall be sand and shall be compacted by water tamping once the level of
back fill reaches the crown of pipe.
3. Backfill material shall be sand and shall not contain any particles larger than 25 mm for
the first 100 mm above the pipe; thereafter the backfill material shall contain no particles
larger than 50mm. All backfilling materials near roads or pathways shall be suitable for
the compaction requirements of the same.
4. Whenever ambient temperatures exceed 35?C, centre loading form PVC pipes greater
than 90mm diameter shall only be carried out in the early morning, or shall alternatively be
preceded by cooling of the pipe string by application of water.
D. HDPE Piping
E. Thrust Blocks
1. Concrete thrust blocks shall be installed where there is an abrupt change of pipe direction
or the pipe ends in a slip-on cast type or PVC slip-on fittings. Thrust blocking shall be
affected by hand excavating the area of the blocking, ensuring that the direction of thrust
is cleaned to original and stable earth. Plywood or other disposable forming may be used
to contain the concrete except on the faces of the block assuming the thrust. Concrete
shall be a minimum of 175 kg/cm² strength, with a 10cm slump maximum. The Contractor
shall submit calculation for engineer’s approval.
F. Irrigation Equipment
1. Full and part circle sprinklers shall not be installed until all mains and lateral lines have
been flushed thoroughly. Riser assemblies shall be snug and free of leaks. Equipment

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 11 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 shall be installed strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation and in a neat
and workman like manner. Sprinklers shall be installed flush with grade.
2. The Contractor shall mark the sprinklers with exact length in meters from the precise point
of the sprinkler to the centre of the green. Marking shall occur on the lid of the pop-up with
a weather resistant paint.
3. All valves shall be provided with adequate support and shall be installed in such a manner
as to optimally facilitate operation and servicing. Permanent identification labels shall be
provided for each valve box, showing all pertinent operating information. Additionally valve
details shall be clearly marked on the inside of valve boxes with indelible, water fast ink.
4. Drip lines shall be arranged in a neat and orderly fashion, generally following the contours.
All connection points and end points shall be at the edge of shrub beds. Drip lines shall on
no account across over each other. The maximum bending radius shall be 500mm. For
sharper turns, a double ell assay shall be used. Layout shall ensure the deviations from
the specified nominal spacing of emitters shall not exceed +20 percent. All sprinklers,
valve boxes and other similar items exposed shall be provided with a grass tray a required
by Engineer.
G. Pipe Line Pressure Test
1. The length of test section shall be maximum 500 m or as directed by the Engineer. The
pipe length to be tested may be blanked off using a blank iron or steel flange previously
drilled and tapped for test equipment connection and strutted as necessary against end
thrust. The blank flange may be attached to the pipeline by a flange adapter or similar
fitting.
2. Testing should not be carried out against closed valves. All charging and testing should
preferably be carried out from lowest point of the under test section and all testing
equipment should be located at this point.
3. The pressure gauge also should be located at the lowest point or adjustment must be
made for the level of the pressure gauge relative to the pipes location.
4. Prior to testing, care should be taken to ensure that all anchor blocks have attained
adequate maturity and that any solvent welded joints included in the pipe system have
developed full strength. Correct support and anchorage of any above ground sections of
the pipeline is also necessary. Underground pipelines should be back-filled, taking
particular care to consolidate around lengths which may have been deflected to negotiate
curves.
5. All joints should be left exposed until testing is completed.
6. The main pipe should be charged slowly, preferably from the lowest point with any air
cock in the open position. They should be closed in sequence from the lowest point only
when water visibly free from aeration is being discharged through them.
7. Satisfactorily charged, the main should be allowed to stand overnight to allow any residual
air to settle out. Re venting is then necessary and any water deficiency should be made-
up.
8. Pressure testing can then begin by pumping slowly until it reaches to 9 bar. This pressure
shall be kept for 24 hours.
9. A permissible water loss of 3 litters per 1000 m length per 25 mm nominal bore per 24
hours shall be considered reasonable for PVC pipe.
H. Automatic Irrigation System, Commissioning
1. Flushing
a. All pipe works should be flushed properly in section by section including drip lines
before installation of irrigation heads to the complete satisfaction of Engineer.
b. The main contractor shall ensure himself that enough water is available for flushing
and testing. Contractor shall be fully responsible for supplying enough water to flush
and test system to the full satisfaction of Client / Owner and the Engineer. If such
water is not readily available or not supplied by Client / Owner, Contractor must bid
supply of water into his tender price.
I. Fieldwork

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 12 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 1. Commissioning of fieldwork and equipment shall include all works required to bring the
system into service, and to make sure that it is operating efficiently, and shall include but
not be limited by the following:
a. Adjust valve outlet pressure +/- 10 percent of nominal.
b. Measure head loss from first to last sprayer in up to 50 different cases.
c. Adjust sprayer to ensure spray onto pavement and paths is minimized. Replacing
any spray nozzles that have uPVC burrs or sand lodged inside. Adjust spray patterns
to ensure optimal coverage.
d. Ensure that all sprayers and valve boxes are flush with the finish grade.
e. Replacing any clogged or partially clogged emitters (delivering less than 50 percent
of nominal flow) or any emitter overflowing by more than 50 percent (squirting).
Carrying out emission uniformity test involving at least 40 emitters on up to 10 valves,
as directed by the Engineer.
f. Controllers shall be adjusted to give an optimal flow regime, generally in accordance
with the drawings and as instructed by the Engineer. Valves sequence may be
modified to ensure that valves operate in a logical sequence to facilitate maintenance
operations.
g. Irrigation cycles for sprinklers and sprayers should be programmed during night time
and early morning from 12 mid night up to 5 am unless otherwise indicated.
h. A full cycle shall be run four times and total system flow rates shall be recorded, and
stations shall be adjusted in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer, base
on the results of these trials.
i. Trials shall only be carried out after all valve's pressure have been adjusted. During
these trials main line head losses shall be verified by installing pressure recorder at
the start and the end of the main line.
2. All test records approved by Engineer shall be retained by Contractor and this shall be
submitted along with as built drawings. No pipeline shall be backfilled before successful
pressure testing unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 8423 - 13 IRRIGATION SYSTEM

 SECTION 32 9300
PLANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preparation of subsoil.
B. Topsoil bedding.
C. Palm & palm likes, trees, desert plantings, ground covers, shrubs, and lawn.
D. Fertilizer.
E. Maintenance.
F. Tree Pruning.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Topsoil material.
B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Topsoil material.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Any plant life not specified or scheduled.
B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A300 Part 1 - American National Standard for Tree Care Operations -- Tree, Shrub and
Other Woody Plant Maintenance -- Standard Practices; 2008.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method.
C. Submit list of plant life sources.
D. Maintenance Contract.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with three
years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants .
C. Tree Pruner Qualifications: Company specializing in pruning trees with proof of Arborist
Certification.
D. Maintenance Services: Performed by installer.
1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with regulatory agencies for fertilizer and herbicide composition.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of plants,
fertilizer and herbicide mixture.
C. Plant Materials: Certified by federal department of agriculture; free of disease or hazardous
insects.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of
manufacturer.
B. Protect and maintain plant life until planted.
C. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9300 - 1 PLANTS

 1.09 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 2 degrees C or rise above
32 degrees C.
B. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 48 k/hr.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Provide one year warranty.
C. Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season; replace dead or unhealthy
plants.
D. Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing
season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTS
A. General: Comply with planting details as shown on Drawings.
B. Plants: Species and size identified in plant schedule and softscape details, grown in climatic
conditions similar to those in locality of the work.
2.02 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth,
taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; minimum pH
value of 5.4 and maximum 7.0.
2.03 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS
A. Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion
necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis.
B. Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic
materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4
to 5; moisture content of 30 percent.
C. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of
plants.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Wrapping Materials: Burlap.
B. Stakes: Softwood lumber, pointed end.
C. Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts and Turnbuckles: Non-corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind
pressure and resulting movement of plant life.
D. Plant Protectors: Rubber sleeves over cable to protect plant stems, trunks, and branches.
E. Membrane: 0.5 mm thick, clear polyethylene.
F. Wrapping: Waterproof fabric.
G. Tree Protectors: Metal with galvanized rings.
2.05 TOP SOIL MIX
A. A uniform mixture of 1 part peat and 3 parts topsoil by volume.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide analysis of topsoil; comply with requirements of Section 01 4000.
B. Provide testing of imported topsoil.
C. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt and organic
matter; and pH value.
0- 1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9300 - 2 PLANTS
 D. Submit minimum 280 g sample of topsoil proposed. Forward sample to testing laboratory in
sealed containers to prevent contamination.
E. Testing is not required if recent tests are available for imported topsoil. Submit these test
results to the testing laboratory for approval. Indicate, by test results, information necessary to
determine suitability.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared subsoil and planters are ready to receive work.
B. Saturate soil with water to test drainage.
C. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in
grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove
contaminated subsoil.
C. Scarify subsoil to a depth of 75 mm where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas
where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil.
D. Dig pits and beds 150 mm larger than plant root system.
3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 100 mm over area to be planted. Rake smooth.
B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
E. Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 150
mm.
3.04 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply after initial raking of topsoil.
C. Mix thoroughly into upper 50 mm of topsoil.
D. Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.05 PLANTING
A. Place plants for best appearance.
B. Set plants vertical.
C. Remove non-biodegradable root containers.
D. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum depth of 150 mm
under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball.
E. Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 150 mm
layers. Maintain plant life in vertical position.
F. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
3.06 PLANT SUPPORT
A. Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following:
1. Tree Caliper: 25 mm; Tree Support Method: 1 stake with one tie
2. Tree Caliper: 25 to 50 mm; Tree Support Method: 2 stakes with two ties

0- 1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9300 - 3 PLANTS

 3. Tree Caliper: 50 to 100 mm; Tree Support Method: 3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn
buckles
4. Tree Caliper: Over 100 mm; Tree Support Method: 4 guy wires with eye bolts and turn
buckles
3.07 TREE PRUNING
A. Perform pruning of trees as recommended in ANSI A300.
B. Prune newly planted trees as required to remove dead, broken, and split branches.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B. Plants will be rejected if a ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged prior
to or during planting.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide maintenance at no extra cost to Owner; Owner will pay for water.
B. See Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements, for additional requirements
relating to maintenance service.
C. Maintain plant life for three months after Date of Substantial Completion.
D. Irrigate sufficiently to saturate root system and prevent soil from drying out.
E. Cultivate and weed plant beds and tree pits.
F. Remove dead or broken branches and treat pruned areas or other wounds.
G. Neatly trim plants where necessary.
H. Immediately remove clippings after trimming.
I. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
J. Control insect damage and disease. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
K. Remedy damage from use of herbicides and pesticides.
L. Replace mulch when deteriorated.
M. Maintain wrappings, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight.
Repair or replace accessories when required.
END OF SECTION

0- 1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9300 - 4 PLANTS

 SECTION 32 9415
LANDSCAPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Landscaping work as shown on Drawings and as specified, comprising of the following:
1. General
a. Site Preparation to receive soil and plant materials.
b. Procurement, protection and importation of plant materials to site.
c. Propagation of plant materials.
d. Soil importation.
e. Soil preparation including soil ameliorants.
f. Finish grading of soil.
g. Installation of plant material, palms and palm like, trees, shrubs, and ground covers.
h. Staking and guying of trees.
i. Protection, maintenance and guarantee as specified.
j. Watering during construction and maintenance period.
k. Providing all labor and materials incidental to the satisfactory completion of the work,
including clean-up of the site.
2. Landscaping Features (As detailed on drawings)
a. Sandstone seating with teakwood planks
b. Sandstone random paving tiles
c. Sculpture feature
d. Water features (Refer to Water Feature Schedule on Drawings)
e. Fountains
f. Unique planter
g. East Pool Garden: Natural rocks, grass, gravel, clean sand
h. West Pool Garden
i. Japanese Garden: Seating area, spiral path, stepping stone, wooden steps
j. All other unique landscaping features as detailed on landscape drawings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 031000 – Concrete Forming and Accessories
B. Section 032000 – Concrete Reinforcing
C. Section 033000 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
D. Section 079005 – Joint Sealers
E. Section 093000 – Tiling
F. Section 311000 – Site Clearing.
G. Section 312200 – Grading
H. Section 312316 – Excavation
I. Section 312323 - Fill
1.03 REFERENCES
A. AAN - American Association of Nurserymen:
1. AAN: Botanical Listing, Tagging and Sizes.
B. ACJHN - American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature:
1. ACJHN: Latest Edition of Standardized Plant Names.
C. ANSI - American National of Standards Institute:
1. Z60.1: American Standard for Nursery Stock

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 1 LANDSCAPING

 D. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C 136: Sieve or Screen Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
E. AOAC - Association of Official Analytical Chemists:
1. AOAC: Official Methods of Analysis.
F. Royal Horticultural Society:
1. Dictionary of Gardening
G. BS – British Standards Institution
1. BS 1192: Part 3:1987 Construction drawing practice. Recommendations for symbols and
other graphic conventions
2. BS 1192: Part 4: 1984 Construction drawing practice. Recommendations for landscape
drawings
3. BS 3882: Specification for topsoil
4. BS 3936-1: Nursery stock. Specification for trees and shrubs
5. BS 3936-2: Nursery stock. Specification for roses
6. BS 3936-3: Nursery stock. Specification for fruit plants
7. BS 3936-7: Nursery stock. Specification for bedding plants
8. BS 3936-9: Nursery stock. Bulbs, corms and tubers
9. BS 3936-10: Nursery stock. Specification for ground cover plants
10. BS 3998: Recommendations for tree work
11. BS 4156: Recommendations for peat for horticultural and landscape use
12. BS 4428: Code of practice for general landscape operations (excluding hard surfaces)
13. BS 5837: Guide for trees in relation to construction
14. BS 6031: Code of Practice for earthworks
15. BS 6100-1: Section 1.3: Subsection 1.3.0: Glossary of building and civil
engineering terms. General and miscellaneous. Parts of construction works. External
works.
16. BS 7044: Artificial sports surfaces
17. BS 7188: Impact absorbing playground surfacing
18. BS 7370-1: Grounds maintenance. Recommendations for establishing ad
managing grounds maintenance organizations and for design considerations related to
maintenance.
19. BS 7370-3: Grounds maintenance. Recommendations for maintenance of
amenity and functional turf (other than sports turf)
20. BS 7370-4: Grounds maintenance. Recommendations for maintenance of soft
landscape (other than amenity turf)
H. C.E.N.: European Committee for Standardization
1. CEN/TC223 “Soil Improvers and Growing Media”: Labeling, specification and
vocabulary, safety, sampling and method of analysis.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Laboratory Analysis: Testing laboratory analysis shall provide specific testing for each item
specified herein, expressed in rates and quantities as required.
B. Plant Certificates: Submit plant health and import certificates for review and approval.
C. Plant Supplies: Submit details of sources of supply for trees, shrubs, ground covers, climbers
and grass seeds for review and approval. Make necessary arrangements for the Client to
inspect plant material at the nurseries.
D. Agricultural Soil and Red Sand Supplies: Submit details of supply and certificates for each
delivery of bulk material, including soil and sand, stating the source, quantity, and type of
material.
E. Furnish complete agricultural soil and sand suitability analysis from an approved Independent
Testing Laboratory at intervals as required by the Client for approval.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 2 LANDSCAPING

 F. Furnish the Client a certificate with each delivery of fertilizers and soil conditioners in containers
stating source, quantity and type of material, including manufacturer's statement at testing that
the material meets the requirements of the specifications.
G. Miscellaneous Materials: Furnish samples of materials to be used in association with the
landscaping works.
1.05 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Secure permission from the Client to store plants on Project site. Ensure that planting materials
are protected from damage by sun, wind and construction work.
1.06 WARRANTY AND REPLACEMENT
A. Guarantee executed Work and materials for a period of one year after completion of planting
operations. Replace dying or unhealthy plants after conditions become evident.
B. Plants used for replacement shall be of same kind and size as specified in Plant List and shall
be furnished, planted, and maintained as specified.
C. Approval and Rejection of Materials:
1. Selection of materials and execution of operations shown on Drawings and Specifications
are subject to the approval of the Client.
2. The Client shall have the right to reject material and work which in his opinion does not
meet the requirements of Drawings and Specifications at any stage of the operation.
D. Substitution of Materials: Before submitting bid, locate necessary materials called for and make
sure of their availability for use on job. Contract bids shall be based upon providing specified
materials, processes, and products identified in Specifications and/or indicated on Drawings.
Substitutes will be permitted only upon submission of proof that specified plants are not
obtainable and with authorization of the Client. Written requests with nearest available size,
variety of plant and price adjustments, to be submitted to the Client for approval prior ordering
substitute(s).
1.07 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Establish lines and levels necessary for the location and erection of landscape construction,
excavation, filling, and grading work. Verify site measurements with Drawings, and assure the
proper fitting of this portion of completed work. Changes or compensation will not be allowed on
account of differences between actual measurements and the dimensions shown on Drawings,
but any such differences which may be found shall be submitted to the Client for adjustment
before proceeding with the work.
B. Provide watering equipment as required for the work at no extra cost to Owner throughout the
construction and maintenance period.
C. Provide and maintain substantial and adequate protection as may be required to protect new
and existing work and items of equipment and furnishings through the entire duration of the
work, to the full satisfaction of the Client.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Soil Mixture Materials:
1. Agricultural Soil:
a. Agricultural soil to be from an agricultural source outside the limits of the Project and
in compliance with the requirements specified herein.
b. Soil shall have the same relative composition and structure, a friable sandy loam
character, and be free of roots, clods and stones larger than 25 mm in greatest
dimension, pockets of coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, brush and other litter.
Soil shall not to be infested with plant disease organisms, nematodes or other
insects, and shall be free from all chemicals harmful to plant and animal life.
c. Agriculture soil to meet the following requirements as approved by soil analysis.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 3 LANDSCAPING

 1) Salinity: Not more than 2 milli-mhos/cm as measured by the saturation extract
method.
2) Sodium Absorption Ratio: Not more than 5.
3) PH Value: From 5.5 to 7.5.
4) Boron Concentration in Saturation Extract: Not more than 1 ppm.
5) Silt and Clay Content: Not more than 16 percent by weight.
6) A minimum of 90 percent by weight to pass a 2 mm round hole sieve.
7) Permeability Rate: Minimum 13 mm/hour when tested in accordance with ASTM
D 2434 or other approved methods.
2. Red Sand:
a. Red sand to be from a source outside the limits of the project and in compliance with
the requirements specified herein.
b. Sand shall be free of roots, clods and stones larger than 25 mm in greatest
dimension, pockets of gravel, fine silt, noxious weeds, sticks, brush and other litter
and shall not be infested with plant disease organisms, nematodes or other insects,
and shall be free from chemicals harmful to plant and animal life.
c. Red Sand Physical Characteristics:
1) Materials Passing a No. 10 Sieve: 100 percent.
2) Materials Passing a No. 35 Sieve: From 90 to 100 percent.
3) Materials Passing a No. 140 Sieve: From 0 to 10 percent.
4) Materials Passing a No. 270 Sieve: From 0 to 3 percent.
d. Red Sand Chemical Characteristics:
1) Salinity: Not exceeding 2 milli-mhos/cm as measured by the saturation extract
method.
2) Sodium Absorption Ratio: Not more than 5.
3) PH Value: From 5.5 to 7.5.
3. Water Retaining Polymer: Non-toxic, bio-degradable polyacrylamide co-polymer which
ameliorates the soil by its water storing capacity.
B. Organic Amendments
1. Submit a written request for approval accompanied by a written report of a testing agency
registered by the governing authority for the agricultural evaluation, which states that the
proposed source complies with these specifications. Amendments from sources
including, but not limited to, refuse, human or animal waste will be rejected.
2. Organic amendments shall have a consistent composition, moderately acidic, with
substantial nitrogen content and low salinity. Amendments shall be free of roots, clods and
stones, noxious weeds, sticks, brush and other litter and shall not be infested with
nematodes or other insects or plant disease organisms. Organic amendments shall be
supplied to improve the organic content of the soil.
3. Organic amendments shall meet the following additional requirements:
a. Physical Characteristics:
1) Material passing 9.51 mm sieve: 100 percent
2) Material passing 6.35 mm sieve: 90-100 percent
3) Material passing 2.38 mm sieve: 50-60 percent
4) Material passing 0.50 mm sieve: 0-10 percent
5) Bulk Density: 300 - 400 kg/m3
b. Chemical Characteristics:
1) Organic Matter: Greater than 85 percent
2) PH Value: 5 - 6.5
3) Salinity (ECe x 103): 0.5 - 2.0
4) Total Nitrogen: 0.9 - 2.0
5) Available Phosphorous: 100 - 500 ppm
6) CEC (meg/100 g): 80 - 120
7) Boron (Saturation extract): Less than 5 ppm
8) Sodium Absorption Ratio: Less than 2.0

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 4 LANDSCAPING

 C. Fertilizers:
1. Fertilizers shall be commercial, granulated type, uniform in composition, dry and free
flowing, and shall be delivered to the site in unopened containers each bearing the
manufacturer's name, guarantee, chemical analysis, and weight.
2. Fertilizing materials shall be packaged, first grade, commercial quality products identified
as to source, type of material, weight, and manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Fertilizing
materials shall not contain toxic ingredients or fillers harmful to human and animal life or
plants. Furnish a certificate of compliance stating that the materials used meet the
Specifications when required by the Client.
3. Fertilizers for Soil Mixes:
a. Slow release compound fertilizer which shall be incorporated in soil mix at a rate of
300 g per tree/plant.
2.02 LANDSCAPE PLANTING MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Landscape planting materials shall conform to the applicable standards and nomenclature
of the American Standard for Nursery Stock and the Royal Horticultural Society Dictionary
of Gardening.
2. Refer to the planting schedule and drawings for the complete list of planting materials.
B. Palms & Palm Tree Like, Trees, Plants and Ground Covers:
1. Trees, plants, and ground covers shall be nursery grown in accordance with good
horticultural practices, and grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality
of the Project for at least 2 years.
2. Trees shall be typical of their species or variety, with normal growth, sound, healthy,
vigorous, well-branched, and densely foliated. They shall be free of diseases, insect pests,
eggs or larvae and shall have well-developed root systems.
3. Trees shall have straight trunks with the leaders intact, undamaged and uncut. Old
abrasions and cuts shall be completely calloused over.
4. Standardized Plant Names: Names of the plants shown on the drawings conform with the
names given in American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (ACJHN) Latest
Edition of Standardized Plant Names. Plant species not listed therein shall conform to
plant names accepted in the trade and deliveries shall be accompanied by appropriate
patent certification.
5. Plants to be Furnished: Furnish plant material in accordance with that named on the
Drawings. Replace plant material deviating from the correct plants at no additional cost.
Client reserves the right to inspect plants at place of growth, but such inspection shall not
preclude the right of rejection of the planting site before and/or after planting.
6. Quality and sizes: Furnish plants in conformance with the sizes required by the Drawings.
The size of the plants measured before pruning shall conform to the measurements
specified. Plants larger in size than those indicated may be furnished with the approval of
the Client, but at no change to the contract price. For larger plants, the ball of earth or
spread of roots shall be proportional to the size of the plant.
7. Root Treatment: Immediately after digging, cover roots of bare root plants with a thick
coating of mud or puddling, or wrap in a wet straw, moss, or other suitable packing
material for protection until delivery.
8. Containerized plant material shall have been growing in their containers for at least one
year or sufficiently long enough to develop a root system capable of holding the soil intact
after the removal from the container.
9. Minimum Tree Ball Sizes and Shapes: Ball size shall be 300 mm diameter for each 25 mm
of trunk diameter measured 300 mm above the ground line. Ball shapes shall be truncated
cones; however, root growth structure of designated species and local soil conditions may
require variation.
10. Palms shall be of the size as stated on the Drawings and Schedules. Palms planted in a
group or on road verges shall be approximately uniform in size unless stated otherwise.
Trees shall have neatly trimmed trunks with no frond shrubs or fibrous matting.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 5 LANDSCAPING

 11. Options: Plants may be furnished container grown instead of balled and burlaped or bare
root, provided size requirements are met and the plant containers are proportional with
sizes of plants to be furnished.
12. Substitutions: Plants or cultivars other than those named in the list of plants to be
furnished will not be accepted unless specifically approved in writing by the Client.
13. Labels: Identify clearly shipments of plants. Durable and legible labels stating correct
names and sizes of plants shall be securely attached to individual plants, bundles of like
variety and size, as delivered to the site for inspection and planting identification.
C. Handling of Planting Materials:
1. Heavy balled plants shall be carefully handled to prevent cracked or broken plant balls.
2. No plant shall be handled by or lifted by the stem or foliage.
3. Handle plants in such a manner as to avoid damage and protect roots from drying at all
times.
4. The ball of balled and burlapped plants which cannot be planted immediately upon
delivery shall be covered with moist soil, mulch, or other covering to protect from drying,
wind and sun. Plants shall be watered as necessary until planted.
5. Spray palms or other bare root or root balled plants with an acceptable trade anti-
desiccant spray at the nursery or grove prior to shipping.
D. Shipping of Planting Materials:
1. Notify the Client in advance of the time and mode of shipping.
2. Furnish copies of the required custom documents to the Client 14 days prior to schedule
shipment.
3. Plant materials shall be packed to provide adequate protection against climatic and
physical injuries during transit. Plants shall be securely covered to prevent wind-whipping
and drying.
4. Freight containers shall be carefully packed and adequately ventilated in accordance with
the plant requirements to prevent sweating of the plants during transit. Shipments shall be
given special attention to insure prompt delivery to job site.
5. Plants shall be treated with required pesticides just prior to shipment or as necessary to
comply with local regulations.
6. The required inspection and transportation certificates will accompany each shipment.
E. Delivery to the Planting Site:
1. Supplier shall notify the Client of the scheduled delivery dates 30 days prior to the
shipping date. Send 2 copies of an itemized plant material list with the delivery notice to
insure coordination of the required inspection at the point of delivery. Once delivered,
plants shall be cared for and protected from damage and deterioration until they are
planted at the locations shown on the drawings. All the palms, trees/shrubs and
groundcover material shown on the drawings shall be stored and maintained at the Site
Plant Nursery.
2. Plants shall be properly acclimatized to the local site conditions.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Tree Stakes: Provide tree stakes for supporting trees as shown on Drawings.
B. Tree Ties: Proprietary reinforced rubber or plastic, fully adjustable 600 x 25 mm clinch type tree
ties or plastic buffer through which the tie passes between the tree and the stake.
C. Guy wires and Turnbuckles: Galvanized woven drawn steel wire attached to galvanized
turnbuckle assemblies.
D. Guy Wire Covers: To protect the tree against abrasion of the guy wire, flexible reinforced rubber
hose shall be threaded over the guy wire in the location where the wire loops around the tree
trunk and branches only.
E. Guy Wire Markers: Guy wire shall be covered in 15 mm Schedule 40 white PVC tubing up to 2
meters above ground level.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 6 LANDSCAPING

 F. Anti-Desiccant: Emulsion-type, film forming agent designed to permit plant transpiration, but
retard excess loss of moisture. Apply according to the manufacturer's instructions.
G. Sub-Surface Drainage Gravel: Anti-capillary drainage layer shall be constructed of 12 - 20 mm
nominal size angular gravel with no fines and shall have a minimum thickness of 150 mm.
H. Gravel Mulch: Crushed limestone aggregate from off-site source, well graded, clean, free of
organic materials, and screened 10 - 30 mm size.
I. Filter Membrane: Spun-bonded polypropylene fabric manufactured by an integrated process of
fiber spinning and bonding.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SOIL MIXES
A. General: The following soil mixes shall be used as appropriate.
1. Palm Tree Soil Mix: A two-part mix. Surround palm tree pruned root ball by red sand with
no additives. This encasement in red sand only shall be the diameter of one and a half
times the root ball in size. The rest of tree pit shall be filled with a soil mix similar in
composition to that of trees, shrubs and ground cover.
2. Trees/Shrubs/Ground Cover Soil Mix:
a. Agricultural Soil: 20 percent by volume
b. Red Sand: 60 percent by volume
c. Peat Moss: 20 percent by volume
d. Water Retaining Polymer: 2 Kg/m3
e. Fertilizer: As approved by the Client.
3.02 SOIL PREPARATION
A. Mix completely and compound the soil mix using approved mechanical methods before
placement in tree pits, shrubs and ground cover beds.
B. Add the approved fertilizers to the soil mix at a rate of 450 g/m3 unless otherwise
recommended by the Client. Provide additional slow release fertilizer tablets for tree pits at a
rate of 20 g per tree to be incorporated in the soil mix.
C. Planting bed shall consist of a soil mix over sub-surface drainage of crushed aggregate or
gravel which has been placed to the depth as shown on the drawings.
D. Provide filter membrane where specified with 300 mm overlapping between the soil mix and the
sub-surface drainage.
E. Place soil mix in 150 mm lifts, wetted, tamped to fill to finish grade as shown on the drawings.
After soil mix has been placed, rake to true lines, free from unsightly variations, bumps, ridges
or depressions.
F. Remove sticks, stones, roots and other objectionable materials from the soil which might
interfere with formation of finely graded seed bed.
G. No planting shall take place until the plant bed locations and lawn areas are approved by the
Client.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PLANTING MATERIALS
A. Irrigation System: Utilize the installed automatic irrigation system and hoses from the quick
couplers for the Project. Furnish water hoses and other equipment required for watering the
plants.
B. Planting Season: Conduct planting operations under favorable weather conditions during the
season which is normally accepted in the locality.
C. Layout: Accomplish the ground layout for planting as approved by the Client prior to any
planting, and following completion of planting soil installation. Stake location for individual
plants, outline planting beds, and mark the location of plants within a planting bed other than
ground cover.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 7 LANDSCAPING

 D. Planting Obstructions: Remove obstructions encountering excavation of planting pits, such as
loose rocks, boulders, or construction debris. Existing underground utility lines, new or in use,
shall not be disturbed. When such are encountered or other obstructions appear that are
greater in diameter than the diameter of the planting pit being prepared, the position of the plant
shall be shifted or relocated as determined by the Client. No explosives will be used for the
removal or rock or other obstructions. Repair and/or replace damages to structures and/or utility
lines at no additional cost.
E. Excavation for Planting:
1. Size planting pits for trees as detailed. Increase pits accordingly in size as required for
larger trees.
2. For bare root trees and shrubs, make excavations at least 300 mm wider than root spread
and deep enough to allow for setting of roots on a layer of compacted backfill and with
collars set at same grade as in nursery.
3. For balled and burlapped trees and shrubs, make excavations at least half again as wide
the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth, plus applicable allowance for setting of ball
on a layer of compacted backfill.
4. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, adjusted
to size of container width and depth.
5. Mechanical diggers may be used in the excavation of tree pits, however, the vertical sides
of the pits, burnished to a hard smooth surface, shall be scarified and/or fractured to
eliminate the impervious walls.
6. Where substrate formation inhibit proper drainage, Provide trenches to prevent water
collecting in tree pits.
F. Filter Membrane:
1. Install filter membrane directly above the drainage layer ensuring the membrane is laid out
to minimize small filler pieces around the edges of the planting area. Membrane shall
overlap 150 mm and shall be stapled or woven together at 300 mm intervals to ensure the
membrane joint will not be moved during backfilling.
2. Wrap up the planting pit sides with membrane providing excess above finished grade
during backfilling. Once backfilling has been completed and the finished soil levels
achieved, trim the membrane neatly to the finished soil level.
G. Backfilling:
1. After backfilling plant pit approximately 60 percent full, in 150 mm lifts, add water and
allow soil mix to settle. Add additional soil to finish grade.
2. After settlement, add additional planting mix required to bring pit to finish grade.
3. Removal of containers and/or severing of the sides of plantable containers shall be
completed in a manner which will leave the balls of roots and soil intact. Handling
methods which result in ball damage will be sufficient reason for rejection of the plant.
H. Setting Plants: Set plants in approved topsoil in pits as shown on the Drawings. After initial
watering and settlement, plants shall be at the same ground level grade as the relative grade of
the ground from which they are dug. Set plumb upright growing trees and adjust shrubs and
spreading type plants to produce their natural form and profile.
I. Balled and Container Grown Plants:
1. Place a minimum of 100 mm of compacted topsoil mixture in the bottom of the pit or to
depth necessary to set the plant to required grade.
2. Place planting mixture around ball and carefully compacted to avoid injury to ball and to fill
voids.
3. Cut and remove burlap, rope, wire or other wrapping materials away from the top of the
ball and out of the pit. Do not remove burlap or ties from sides or bottom of ball.
4. Remove plastic materials from the pit.
5. Cut off broken or frayed roots cleanly and treat the areas cut with the approved tree paint.
J. Bare Root Plants: Roots of bare root plants shall be spread out and carefully worked into root
system. Broken of frayed roots shall be cut off prior to planting.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 8 LANDSCAPING

 K. Relocating Plants:
1. Prior to uplifting a palm to be relocated, prepare and approve the new location. This will
involve placement of the soil mix and red sand in a pre-made hole, together with
excavation and burial of the dead men or anchors with attached guy wires.
2. Palms to be relocated should be temporarily guyed or propped to prevent collapse prior to
excavation of the root ball.
3. The leaf fronds shall be substantially reduced in number leaving only the 20 youngest
ones closest to the growing point.
4. Root ball shall be carefully and evenly excavated around the sides gradually working
underneath the root ball to the center of the tree. Slings should be attached around the
trunk of the tree and the weight taken up by the crane prior to the final excavation below
the root ball.
5. Once the root ball is free of the ground the crane shall lower the tree down to ground level,
care being taken not to damage the foliage. Spray fronds with anti-desiccant spray to the
quantities as in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
Tie up the fronds with hemp rope and the growing point wrapped in hessian from 1 m
below the growing point to 1 m above. Tie up the trunk cutting back any untidy leaf midrib
stalks ensuring the trunk are trimmed to an even state.
6. Move the tree to its new location. Immediately prior to planting, the roots shall be
inspected and cut back to the root ball leaving roots clean cut. Cut away rotting or
diseased roots and treat with tree paint.
7. Lift tree into position ensuring the root ball is planted 150 mm deeper than originally grown
with reference to proposed finished grade then surround the root ball by red sand. Backfill
the soil mix and the red sand to achieve finished grade.
8. Install guy wires with wire markers, covers and turnbuckles, tighten and position the tree
to a balanced and vertical position. Due to the growth habit of some of the larger palms to
be relocated this may not be precisely vertical, however, the tree shall appear in a
structurally correct orientation.
9. For palm trees to be supplied from off-site location the orientation sequence shall be the
same, however, the trunk trimming shall be done by the Contractor and not by the
supplier.
10. If palms have to be stored, this shall be for the shortest possible time during which they
shall be kept in a shaded location with the root ball wrapped in hessian.
L. Trees:
1. Plant trees in pits of diameters as indicated on the Drawings. Use the specified soil mix as
a backfill.
2. Water trees each day for the first 3 months.
M. Shrubs and Ground Covers:
1. Plant shrubs, ground covers and climbers in a prepared soil mix bed, 450 mm deep for
shrubs and climbers and 300 mm deep for ground covers.
2. Plant shrubs and ground covers after planting the trees. Space as shown on drawings,
adjusting as necessary to evenly fill planting bed using specific quantity of plants.
3. Final grade of beds shall be 50 mm below walkways and curbs.
4. No plants shall be taken from the nursery for planting until after the pits or holes for the
plants have been properly excavated, watered, and prepared to receive the plant material.
N. Watering and Adjusting:
1. Water plants thoroughly after setting. During and immediately after watering, adjust plants
as necessary to ensure correct depth of planting, vertical alignment and/or natural profile.
2. Firm soil around each plant as final adjustments are made. Form the saucer required for
holding mulch and water at this time.
3. Dispose excess soil resulting from planting excavation off the site or as directed by the
Client.
O. Pruning, Staking and Guying:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 9 LANDSCAPING

 1. Pruning: To be limited to the minimum. To be used for removing broken twigs and
branches and to compensate for the loss of roots dying while transplanting. Paint cuts of
19 mm in diameter using approved tree wound paint. Trimming performed in excess of, or
contrary to, the requirements will not be acceptable, and the plant so pruned shall be
replaced with a new one.
2. Staking and Guying: Set trees plumb and brace rigidly in position. Tamp soil mix solidly
around ball prior to staking or guying. Complete Staking and guying operations
immediately after planting. Perform work in the manner illustrated on Drawings. Care shall
be taken to ensure that the stake does not rub against any part of the tree or penetrate
root ball. Nail two galvanized clout nails to the stake to prevent slippage.
P. Mulching: Place gravel mulch, of the required thickness, planted areas and where indicated.
Q. Lawns/Grass Areas:
1. The soil mix shall be filled to 30 mm above finished hardscape (if adjacent) to allow for
settlement to be level with the top of hardscape. If greater settlement occurs and the top of
the soil is below the finished level of the hardscape, the soil area shall be topped up to
even grades blending in with the adjacent areas ensuring a level finish with the paving.
2. The prepared soil-filled lawn area shall then be watered for 14 days at normal lawn
applications rates to ensure the soil is evenly watered.
3. Prior to seed application the soil shall be fumigated for the elimination of weeds, seeds,
insects and other noxious items. This fumigation shall be in the form of methylbromide or
equivalent. The Contractor shall submit a work plan stating the chemicals, dosing and
method of operation prior to application.
4. Fertilizer shall be applied and incorporated into the top surface of the soil at a rate
recommended by seed manufacturer.
5. The soil shall then be finally fine graded and compacted with a 136 Kg water-filled roller to
80% weight compaction. Only after this grading is completed and approved by the
Owner's Representative will the Contractor be permitted to sow the seed.
6. Seed Growing: Grass seed shall be sown at the rate recommended by seed
manufacturer, unless specified otherwise in the plant schedule. Seed distribution shall be
by mechanical method, or in small areas by hand, by experienced workmen to ensure an
even distribution of seed, hence establishment. Once sown, the seed shall be lightly
raked into the surface. In areas with no existing shade, the Contractor may, at his
discretion, cover the soil surface with hessian to assist in germination. The area should
then be lightly and evenly irrigated to ensure wetting of the seed.
7. Roll area to smooth, evenly finish and compaction.
8. Soil surface to remain moist at all times during turf establishment period. Any dry areas
shall be replanted.
9. If hessian is used, the Contractor shall lift the hessian carefully to limit any damage to the
young grass shoots once established.
10. Re-sow or replant all bare areas at intervals necessary to establish a full sward over the
entire area.
11. The first cutting of the young grass shall not take place until the average length is 75 mm.
R. Lawn Establishment and Maintenance
1. Lawn establishment period to be approximately 90 days. This period will be extended as
necessary until an even sward is achieved.
2. At the time of first cutting and removal of grass cuttings, the grass sward shall be closely
inspected for the following:
a. Low Areas: The Owner’s Representative may require that the sod be lifted in low
areas, topsoil added and the sod be re-laid and lightly rolled.
b. Disease: The sward shall be closely inspected for any insect pests, fungus or other
biological organism attack, and treated as necessary.
c. Fertilizer: The sward color and growth habit should be inspected and a light
application of fertilizer given to promote more even growth. Type of fertilizer and
quantity shall be as recommended by the sod manufacturer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 10 LANDSCAPING

 d. Watering: Water application to consist of deep wetting 3 times per week during early
morning hours for warm month periods and 1-2 times per week during cool months.
Adjust irrigation control timing accordingly to avoid frequent, light applications and
daytime irrigation.
3. Once established and the lawn is a continuous green sward, it should be cut as necessary
when the average length of the sward is 75 mm, cutting down to 30% with the clippings
being removed immediately after cutting; the precise number of cuts depending on growth
rate.
S. Maintenance, Guarantee and Replacement:
1. Maintain landscape planting for one full calendar year after completion of the Project.
Replace providing new materials similar in specifications to the damaged or dead plants or
area of planting judged by the Client to be dead or damaged through lack of maintenance
or otherwise unsatisfactory within this period at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Maintenance includes watering, weeding, mulching, cultivating, tightening or replacing
stakes, firming in and pruning. Re-plant a minimum quantity of spare plant materials of all
species specified in this Project. Occasional site visit of a horticultural specialist shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor during the warranty period.
3. Whenever possible, watering will be done at night to minimize evaporation and burning of
plants. Do not over-water or allow water to fall on walks, streets, building or other
structures.
4. Supplemental Fertilizing: At bi-monthly intervals after planting (starting 1 month after
planting), trees, shrubs, ground covers and climbers shall receive supplementary fertilizer
applied at the following rates:
a. Trees over 50 mm caliper: 45 g each
b. Trees under 50 mm caliper: 23 g each
c. Shrubs/Ground Covers and Climbers: 23 g each
5. Apply supplemental fertilizer at a distance not closer than 150 mm to trunks of trees or
shrubs. Wash off immediately any fertilizer on the foliage of plants. Water fertilized areas
in sufficient quantity to wet entire root structure of plants.
6. Herbicides and Pesticides: If it proves necessary to use herbicides or pesticides, submit a
schedule of materials to be used containing the constituent chemical, manufacturer
application rate, application method and application interval to the Client for approval.
7. Stake, Tree Tie and Hessian Removal: Prior to maintenance handover, inspect stakes,
tree ties and hessian wrapping and remove materials that are no longer required to
support healthy plant growth. Adjust or remove materials that are to be left in place as
necessary to ensure proper plant growth.
8. Maintenance Handover: Contact the Client 30 days prior to the end of the maintenance
period and provide the opportunity for the Owner's personnel to familiarize themselves
with the landscaping maintenance work.
9. Submit monthly maintenance reports to the Client indicating nature and extent of
maintenance work performed, including watering, cultivation, spraying and fertilizing, as
well as plant losses and dates of replacement.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon the completion of construction, and before final acceptance, broom-clean hard surfaced
areas within the contract limits. Remove tools, surplus materials, and equipment as well as
debris and leave the site in a neat and acceptable condition meeting the approval of the Client.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 32 9415 - 11 LANDSCAPING

 SECTION 33 0513
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Monolithic concrete manholes with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and
accessories.
B. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints with masonry
transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories.
C. Monolithic FRP manholes with transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories.
D. Masonry manhole sections with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and
accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Masonry units and mortar and grout.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. TMS 402/602 - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures; 2016.
B. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2016).
C. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2017.
D. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2017.
E. ASTM C260/C260M - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a
(Reapproved 2016).
F. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections; 2018.
G. ASTM C478M - Standard Specification for Circular Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole
Sections (Metric); 2018.
H. ASTM C923M - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals (Metric); 2018.
I. ASTM D3753 - Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Thermosetting-
Resin) Manholes and Wetwells; 2019.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manhole covers, component construction, ________, features,
configuration, and dimensions.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations, elevations, piping sizes and elevations of
penetrations.
D. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of TMS 402/602 or applicable
building code, whichever is more stringent.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 0513 - 1 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 (ASTM
C478M), with resilient connectors complying with ASTM C923 (ASTM C923M).
B. Manhole Sections: ASTM D3753, glass-fiber reinforced polyester with integral steps.
C. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 3000.
D. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 2000, Type S.
E. Reinforcement: Formed steel wire, galvanized finish, wire diameter as indicated on drawings.
F. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 3000.
G. Admixtures, General: Chemical type complying with ASTM C494/C494M (wet mix only).
H. Air-Entraining Admixture: Complying with ASTM C260/C260M (wet mix only).
I. Waterproofing Admixture:
J. Microbiologically-Induced Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Resists growth of bacteria and fungi
on or inside concrete.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Frame and Cover: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B cast iron construction, machined flat bearing
surface; hinged; sealing gasket.
B. Cover: Removable, lockable; closed cover design; cover molded with identifying name.
C. Proof Load: Heavy duty.
D. Manhole Steps: Formed galvanized steel rungs; 19 mm diameter. Formed integral with
manhole sections.
E. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, size as indicated, galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M, Grade
specified for applicable material category.
2.03 CONFIGURATION
A. Shaft Construction: Concentric with concentric cone top section; lipped male/female dry joints;
sleeved to receive pipe sections.
B. Shape: Cylindrical.
C. Clear Inside Dimensions: As indicated.
D. Design Depth: As indicated.
E. Clear Lid Opening: As indicated.
F. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as indicated.
G. Steps: 300 mm wide, 400 mm on center vertically, set into manhole wall.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Adjustment Riser: [].
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.
B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.
C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections.
3.03 MANHOLES
A. Place concrete base pad, trowel top surface level.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 0513 - 2 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

 B. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad.
C. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations. As
work progresses, build in fabricated metal items.
D. Cut and fit for pipe.
E. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as
required.
F. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations.
G. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
3.04 MASONRY WORK
A. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
B. Lay masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 200 mm.
C. Form concave mortar joints.
D. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
E. Install joint reinforcement 400 mm on center.
F. Place joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above base pad and below lid
frame opening.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Storm Sewer Manholes: Precast concrete sections, galvanized steel steps, 1200 mm inside
dimension, to depth indicated, with bolted lid.
B. Electric Service Manholes: Prefabricated FRP sections, integral molded steps, 1500 mm inside
dimension, to depth indicated.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 0513 - 3 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

 SECTION 33 0513
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Monolithic concrete manholes with transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories.
B. Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints covers, anchorage,
and accessories.
C. Monolithic concrete pressure breaking manhole including lid frame, covers, anchorage and
accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 04 2000 - Unit Masonry: Masonry units and mortar and grout.
C. Section 33 4100 - Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 2014.
B. ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe
C. ASTM A674 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe
D. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and Related Commentaries; American Concrete Institute International; 2011.
E. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2012).
F. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 2013.
G. ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections; 2013.
H. ASTM C478M - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
[Metric]; 2013.
I. ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).
J. ASTM C923M - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals [Metric]; 2008b.
K. ASTM A27/A27M -13 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General
Application

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate manhole locations, elevations, piping sizes and elevations of
penetrations.
C. Product Data: Provide manhole covers, component construction, features, configuration, and
dimensions.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold and Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or
applicable building code, whichever is more stringent.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 0513 - 1 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 (ASTM
C478M), with resilient connectors complying with ASTM C923 (ASTM C923M).
B. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 3000.
C. Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 04 2000, Type S.
D. Reinforcement: Formed steel wire, galvanized finish, wire diameter as indicated on drawings.
E. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 3000.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Lid and Frame: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B Cast iron construction, machined flat bearing
surface, removable lockable lid, closed lid design; live load rating of (As indicated) kPa; sealing
gasket; removable molded lid with identifying name either "Storm Sewer' or "Sanitary Sewer"
written in both English and Arabic.
1. Lid and Frame for Storm Drainage: 600 mm diameter opening; cast iron conforming to
ASTM A48/A48M.
B. Manhole Steps: Formed galvanized steel rungs; 19 mm (3/4 inch) diameter. Formed integral
with manhole sections.
1. Manhole steps for Storm Drainage: 25 mm diameter, galvanized mild steel; AISI 1018.
2. Configuration and Details: As shown on Drawings.
C. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, (As indicated) mm size and thickness, galvanized to ASTM
A123/A123M, Grade specified for applicable material category.
D. Manhole Ladders: Stainless steel ladders of an approved pattern as specified may be purpose
made to suit the depth of each manhole. Fixings for ladders shall be approved stainless steel
stud anchors. Fixing holes shall be grouted with epoxy mortar and sealed as above. Rungs or
treads shall be ribbed to provide a non-slip surface.
2.03 CONFIGURATION
A. Shaft Construction: Concentric with concentric cone top section; lipped male/female dry joints;
sleeved to receive pipe sections, as shown on drawings.
B. Shape: Cylindrical.
C. Clear Inside Dimensions: As indicated.
D. Design Depth: As indicated.
E. Clear Lid Opening: 600 mm diameter unless otherwise indicated.
F. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as indicated.
G. Steps: 300 mm wide, 400 mm on center vertically unless otherwise indicated, set into manhole
wall.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify items provided by other sections of Work are properly sized and located.
B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into Work.
C. Verify excavation for manholes is correct.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves required by other sections.
3.03 MANHOLES
A. Place concrete base pad, trowel top surface level.
B. Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 0513 - 2 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

 C. Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations. As
work progresses, build in fabricated metal items.
D. Cut and fit for pipe.
E. Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as
required.
F. Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations.
G. Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
3.04 MASONRY WORK
A. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
B. Lay masonry units in running bond. Course one unit and one mortar joint to equal 200 mm (8
inches).
C. Form concave mortar joints.
D. Lay masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other work.
E. Install joint reinforcement 400 mm (16 inches) on center.
F. Place joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above base pad and below lid
frame opening.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Storm Sewer Manholes and Electric Service Manholes: Prefabricated FRP sections, integral
molded steps, 1500 mm (60 inch) inside dimension, to depth indicated.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 0513 - 3 MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES

 SECTION 33 1416
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water pipe for site conveyance lines.
B. Pipe valves.
C. Fire hydrants.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for thrust restraints.
B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting.
C. Section 21 1100 - Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping.
D. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
E. Section 33 0110.58 - Disinfection of Water Utility Piping Systems: Disinfection of site service
utility water piping.
F. Section 33 0513 - Manholes and Structures.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AASHTO HB - Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges; 2002, with Errata (2005).
B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.
C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; 2018.
D. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000
PSI Tensile Strength; 2014 (Editorial 2017).
E. ASTM A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2015.
F. ASTM A563M - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric); 2007
(Reapproved 2013).
G. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2016.
H. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40; 2017.
I. ASTM D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80; 2015.
J. ASTM D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals; 2019.
K. ASTM F1960 - Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings
for Use with Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) Polyethylene of Raised Temperature (PE-RT)
Tubing; 2019.
L. AWS A5.8M/A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; 2011
(Amended 2012).
M. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; 2010.
N. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2017.
O. AWWA C115/A21.15 - Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-Iron Threaded
Flanges; 2011.
P. AWWA C200 - Steel Water Pipe, 6 In. (150 mm) and Larger; 2017.
Q. AWWA C203 - Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe; 2015.
R. AWWA C205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe, 4 in. (100
mm) and Larger - Shop Applied; 2012.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 1 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 S. AWWA C206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe; 2017.
T. AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Size 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm
Through 3,600 mm); 2018.
U. AWWA C208 - Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings; 2017.
V. AWWA C209 - Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for Steel Water Pipe, Special Sections,
Connections, and Fittings; 2013.
W. AWWA C210 - Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines; 2015.
X. AWWA C500 - Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service; 2009.
Y. AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves; 2015.
Z. AWWA C508 - Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2-In. Through 48-In. (50-mm
Through 1,200-mm) NPS; 2017.
AA. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; 2017.
AB. AWWA C602 - Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place, 4 In. (100 mm) and Larger;
2017.
AC. AWWA C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.
AD. AWWA C800 - Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings; 2014.
AE. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 In. Through 12 In. (100 mm Through
300 mm), for Water Transmission and Distribution; 2016.
AF. AWWA C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1/2 In. (13 mm) Through 3 In. (76
mm), for Water Service; 2017.
AG. AWWA C904 - Cross-Linked Polyethylene (PEX) Pressure Tubing, ½ In. (13 mm) Through 3 In.
(76 mm), for Water Service; 2016.
AH. AWWA M11 - Steel Water Pipe - A Guide For Design and Installation; 2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections,
thrust restraints, and invert elevations. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil
conditions or discovery of uncharted utilities.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with utility company requirements.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
B. Protect crosslinked polyethylene tubing from direct and indirect UV exposure.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C. Provide [] year manufacturer warranty for materials and workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER PIPE
A. Steel Pipe: Welded or Seamless complying with AWWA C200.
1. Underground Pipe and Fittings: Cement-mortar lining and cement-mortar coating.
2. Aboveground Pipe and Fittings: Cement-mortar lining.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 2 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 3. Fittings: AWWA C208.
a. Construct of same material as pipe with standard tube turns or segmentally welded
sections to accommodate the type of couplings or joints provided.
b. Thickness Rating: Comply with not less than specified pipe thickness and calculated
pipe pressure rating.
c. Mechanically or manually wrap, line, and coat all fittings with same protective
materials and applications used for pipe.
4. Pipe manufacturer to calculate and determine wall thickness and fittings in the following
manner:
a. Design Parameters:
1) Pressure Rating: _____ kPa.
2) Earth Cover: _____ mm.
3) Water Hammer: 40 percent of pressure rating.
4) Live Load: H20 truck loading in accordance with AASHTO HB.
5) Allowable Deflection: 2 percent of nominal pipe diameter.
6) Modulus of Soil Reaction (E'): __________.
b. Calculate pipe wall thickness on the basis of an allowable fiber stress in the steel
equal to 50 percent of the minimum yield strength of the steel used in the
manufacture of the pipe.
c. Comply with design procedures outlined in AWWA M11.
5. Joints:
a. Rubber Gasketed Bell and Spigot: Provide pipe manufacturer's standard design,
meeting the requirements of AWWA C200.
b. Welded: Provide electrodes complying with AWWA C206.
c. Sleeve Type Mechanical Coupled:
1) Designed to couple plain-end piping by compression of a ring gasket at each
end of the adjoining pipe sections and provide for confinement and compression
of gaskets.
2) Coupling Assembly:
(a) One steel middle ring, flared or beveled at each end, providing a gasket
seat and two steel or malleable iron follower rings, providing for
confinement and compression of the gaskets.
(b) Provide middle ring and follower rings consisting of true, circular sections,
free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects.
(c) Two resilient and tapered rubber gaskets, designed for resistance to set
after installation.
(d) Bolts and nuts to draw the follower rings toward each other to compress the
gaskets.
3) Bolts: Track head complying with ASTM A307, Grade A, with nuts complying
with ASTM A563 and ASTM A563M, Grade A.
4) Coupling Strength: Not less than adjoining pipeline.
d. Grooved and Shouldered:
1) Groove pipe ends by roll grooving or provide weld-on adapters with cut grooves.
2) Groove dimensions by roll grooving as recommended by the coupling
manufacturer.
3) Dimensions of grooves cut in adapters to comply with AWWA C606.
4) Comply with AWWA C606 for pipe ends.
5) Joint dimensions to comply with AWWA C606 for rigid joints and as indicated for
flexible joints.
e. Flanged:
1) Steel Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D.
2) Bolts, Nuts, and Rubber Gaskets: AWWA C207.
3) Asbestos gaskets not allowed.
f. Insulating Joints:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 3 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 1) Provide flanged type with insulating gasket, bolt sleeves, and washers to
prevent metal-to-metal contact with adjacent piping.
2) Gaskets: Dielectric type, full face, as recommended in Appendix to AWWA
C115/A21.15.
3) Bolts and Nuts: As recommended in Appendix to AWWA C115/A21.15.
6. Lining:
a. Cement-Mortar Lining: AWWA C602, applied in-place.
b. Cement-Mortar Coating: AWWA C205, factory applied.
c. Coal-Tar Enamel Coating, factory applied:
1) Except where indicated, prepare, prime, and coat piping with hot-applied coal-tar
enamel and bonded single layer of felt wrap in accordance with AWWA C203.
2) Asbestos felt not allowed.
3) Felt Material: Fibrous-glass matt complying with AWWA C203.
d. Coal-Tar Epoxy Coating, Shop Applied: Clean, prime, and topcoat piping with coal-
tar epoxy coating system in accordance with AWWA C210.
B. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51:
1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.
2. Joints: AWWA C111/A21.11, Styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or vulcanized SBR gasket
with rods.
3. Jackets: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket.
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, Annealed:
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
2. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
D. PVC Pipe: AWWA C900 Class 5:
1. Fittings: AWWA C111/A21.11, Schedule 40 per ASTM D2466 or schedule 80 per ASTM
D2467.
2. Joints: ASTM D3139 compression gasket ring.
E. Polyethylene Pipe: AWWA C901:
1. Fittings: AWWA C901, molded or fabricated.
2. Joints: Compression.
F. Crosslinked Polyethylene Tubing: AWWA C904.
1. Fittings: AWWA C800, insert-stiffener type.
2. Joints: Cold expansion fittings with PEX reinforcing rings, complying with ASTM F1960.
G. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Water
Service" in large letters.
2.02 VALVES
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B. Gate Valves Up To 75 mm:
1. Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, compression
ends, with control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box.
C. Gate Valves 75 mm and Over:
1. AWWA C500, iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge,
flanged ends, control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box.
D. Ball Valves Up To 50 mm:
1. Brass body, Teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled
for control rod, AWWA inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with
control rod, valve key, and extension box.
E. Swing Check Valves From 50 mm to 600 mm:
1. AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat,
flanged ends.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 4 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 F. Butterfly Valves From 50 mm to 600 mm:
1. AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, ten
position lever handle.
2.03 HYDRANTS
A. Hydrants: Type as required by utility company.
B. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 150 mm with rod and coupling to increase barrel
length.
C. Hose and Streamer Connection: Match sizes with utility company, two hose nozzles, one
pumper nozzle.
D. Pressure Rating: According to utility company.
E. Finish: Primer and two coats of enamel in color required by utility company.
2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: As specified in Sections 31 2316 and 31 2316.13.
B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03 3000.
B. Backflow Preventer: ________.
C. Meter: ________.
D. Manhole and Cover: Refer to Section 33 0513.
E. Casing Spacer: Stainless steel spacer designed to maintain pipe casing integrity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and invert
are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs.
B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C. Prepare pipe connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.03 TRENCHING
A. See the sections on excavation and fill for additional requirements.
B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
C. Form and place concrete for pipe thrust restraints at each change of pipe direction. Place
concrete to permit full access to pipe and pipe accessories. Provide thrust restraint bearing on
subsoil.
D. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Maintain separation of water main from [] piping in accordance with applicable code.
B. Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical.
C. Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than [] of cover.
D. Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 16 mm.
E. Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600.
F. Install grooved and shouldered pipe joints to AWWA C606.
G. Install crosslinked polyethylene tubing and fittings to AWWA C904.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 5 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 H. Route pipe in straight line.
I. Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
J. Install access fittings to permit disinfection of water system performed under Section 33
0110.58.
K. Slope water pipe and position drains at low points.
L. Install trace wire 150 mm above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 31 2316.13.
3.05 INSTALLATION - STEEL PIPE
A. Make and assemble rubber-gasketed, bell-and-spigot joints in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Make welded joints in accordance with AWWA C206 and install in accordance with AWWA
M11, Chapter 12, Transportation, Installation, and Testing.
C. Assemble sleeve-type mechanical coupling joints in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Make flanged joints water-tight without undue strain on other material and equipment, using
right-sized bolts, and parallel to adjoining flanges.
E. Make grooved joints with equipment designed and produced by the manufacturer of grooved
joint couplings and assemble in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's
recommendations.
F. Make shouldered type joints with the specified coupling, connect with shouldered ends, and
assemble in accordance with the couplings manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Make insulating joints with specified materials and assemble for flanged joints with bolts, with
full size insulating sleeves for bolt holes, and no metal-to-metal contact with dissimilar metals
after assembly.
H. After installation, line piping in-place with cement mortar in accordance with AWWA C602.
I. Finish joints on piping with cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C205.
J. Finish joints on piping with coal-tar enamel or coal-tar epoxy coating by cleaning, priming,
coating, and wrapping with cold-applied tape coating in accordance with AWWA C209.
K. Maximum, allowable offsets for bell-and-spigot rubber-gasket joints, from a straight line or
grade, as required by vertical curves, horizontal curves, or offsets, shall be five degrees or less
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
L. Form short-radius curves and closures with short pipe lengths or specified, fabricated specials.
3.06 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS
A. Set valves on solid bearing.
B. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.
C. Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway in accordance
with Section 21 1100.
D. Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 500 mm above ground in accordance with Section
21 1100.
E. Locate control valve 100 mm away from hydrant.
F. Provide a drainage pit 900 mm square by 600 mm deep filled with 50 mm washed gravel.
Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 150 mm above drain opening. Do not connect drain
opening to sewer.
G. Paint hydrants in accordance with Section 09 9113.
3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide water service to utility company requirements with reduced pressure backflow
preventer and water meter with bypass valves and sand strainer.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 6 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 B. Provide sleeve in retaining wall for service main. Support with reinforced concrete bridge. Calk
enlarged sleeve watertight.
C. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall.
D. Provide 1.30 mm galvanized sheet metal sleeve surrounding service main to 150 mm above
floor and 1,800 mm minimum below grade. Size for 50 mm minimum of glass fiber insulation
stuffing.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
C. Pressure test water piping to [].
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest
at no cost to Owner.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 1416 - 7 SITE WATER UTILITY

DISTRIBUTION PIPING
 SECTION 33 3113
SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE GRAVITY PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
B. Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers.
C. Cleanout access.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for cleanout base pad construction.
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches.
C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.
E. Section 33 0513 - Manholes and Structures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill
operations.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2017.
B. ASTM A746 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe; 2018.
C. ASTM C12 - Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines; 2017.
D. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and
Culvert Pipe; 2015a.
E. ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, Culvert
Pipe and (Metric); 2015a.
F. ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe; 2019b.
G. ASTM C76M - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe (Metric); 2019b.
H. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets; 2012 (Reapproved 2017).
I. ASTM C443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
J. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;
2014.
K. ASTM C700 - Standard Specification for Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength,
and Perforated; 2018.
L. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2018.
M. ASTM D2680 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping; 2001 (Reapproved 2014).
N. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2011.
O. AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings; 2017.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 3113 - 1 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE

GRAVITY PIPING
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products
specified.
E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Document results of field quality control testing.
F. Project Record Documents:
1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, manholes, cleanouts, and invert elevations.
2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of
uncharted utilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A. Provide products that comply with applicable code(s).
B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, service type, hub and spigot end.
C. Joint Seals for Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM C564 rubber gaskets.
D. Ductile Iron Pipe: ASTM A746, Pressure Class 350, with asphaltic lining bell and spigot end.
E. Joint Seals for Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C111/A21.11; styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) or
vulcanized SBR gaskets.
F. Vitrified Clay Pipe: ASTM C700, extra strength, unperforated bell and spigot end joints.
G. Joint Seals for Clay Pipe: ASTM C425 compression gasket joint devices.
H. Concrete Pipe: Nonreinforced, ASTM C14 or ASTM C14M, Class 1; bell and spigot end joints.
I. Joint Seals for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression gaskets.
J. Concrete Pipe: Reinforced, ASTM C76 (ASTM C76M), Class II with Wall type A; mesh
reinforcement;bell and spigot end joints.
K. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2680 Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) material;bell and spigot style
solvent sealed joint end.
L. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2729, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; bell and spigot style solvent
sealed joint end.
M. Joint Seals: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve,
neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.
N. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer
Service" in large letters.
B. Casing Spacer: Polyethylene spacer designed to maintain pipe casing integrity.
2.03 CLEANOUT MANHOLE
A. Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, hinged lid.
1. Lid Design: Open checkerboard grill.
2. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: 660 mm.
B. Shaft Construction and Concentric Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast Concrete pipe
sections, lipped male/female dry joints, cast steel ladder rungs into shaft sections at 300 mm;
nominal shaft diameter of 900 mm.
C. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03 3000, levelled top surface to
receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sanitary sewer pipe sections.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 3113 - 2 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE

GRAVITY PIPING
2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Pipe Bedding Material: As specified in Section 31 2323.
B. Pipe Cover Material: As specified in Section 31 2323.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable code(s).
3.02 TRENCHING
A. See Section 31 2316.13 for additional requirements.
B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.03 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are
as indicated on layout drawings.
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
watertight.
1. Clay Pipe: Also comply with ASTM C12.
2. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321.
C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope
of 3 mm in 3 m.
D. Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system, through installed
sleeves.
E. Install trace wire 150 mm above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 31 2316.13.
3.04 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS
A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end
sections.
C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest
at no cost to Owner.
C. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with [].
D. Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with [].
E. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with [].
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 3113 - 3 SITE SANITARY SEWERAGE

GRAVITY PIPING
 SECTION 33 4100
SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
2. Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers.
3. Catch basins, trench drains, plant area drains, paved area drainage, and site surface
drainage.
4. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.
5. Backwater valves.
6. Cleanouts.
7. Drains.
8. Encasement for piping.
9. Manholes.
10. Open channel drainage systems.
11. Catch basins.
12. Storm water inlets.
13. Storm water detention structures.
14. Pipe outlets.
15. Storm water disposal systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill
operations.
B. RCP: Reinforced concrete pipe.
C. uPVC: Unplasticized polyvinylchloride.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches.
C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.
E. Section 33 0513 - Manholes and Structures.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Provide products that comply with applicable code(s).
B. Concrete Pipe Joint Devices: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression gasket joint.
C. Concrete Pipe: Reinforced, ASTM C76 (ASTM C76M), Class V ; mesh reinforcement; inside
nominal diameter of (As indicated on drawings) mm, bell and spigot end joints.
D. Concrete Pipe: Nonreinforced, ASTM C14 (ASTM C14M), Class V; inside nominal diameter of
(As indicated on drawings) mm, bell and spigot end joints.
E. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression
gasket joint.
F. uPVC Pipe Dimensions: Based on SSA 14, DIN 8062 and ISO 161-1 (class 4, PN10 bar)
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, and covers.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 1 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 2. Catch basins, stormwater, inlets and dry wells. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, frames, covers, and grates.
3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames,
covers, design calculations, and concrete design-mix reports.
4. Open Channels: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames, covers, design
calculations, and concrete design-mix reports.
C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in
same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial
relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
B. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
C. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANHOLES
A. Precast Concrete and Cast-in-Place Concrete Manholes:
1. Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 (ASTM C478M), with
resilient connectors complying with ASTM C923 (ASTM C923M).
2. Reinforced Cast-in-Place Concrete: As specified in Section 03 3000.
3. Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 03 3000.
4. Sizes and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.
B. Manhole Frames and Covers:
1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser with 4-
inch- (102-mm-) minimum width flange and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter cover. Include
indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM
SEWER."
2. Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron unless otherwise indicated.
C. Warning Tape:
1. Description: 150mm wide and 250mm micron thickness.
2. Material: Strong composite laminate consisting of
a) 30 Micron polyester film top layer
b) 12 Micron detectable aluminum foil in-between
c) 208 Micron bottom layer polyethylene

2.02 uPVC Class 4 PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Nonreinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M), Class V, with
bell-and-spigot or tongue-and-groove ends and sealant joints with ASTM C 990 (ASTM C
990M), bitumen or butyl-rubber sealant.
B. Reinforced-Precast Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76 (ASTM C 76M).
1. Bell-and-spigot or tongue-and-groove ends and gasketed joints with ASTM C 443 (ASTM
C 443M), rubber gaskets.
2. Class V - Sulfate Resistant.
C. Diameter, Length and Details: As indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 2 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
2.03 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Description: Horizontal type; with PVC body, PVC removable cover, and PVC swing check
valve.
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Plastic Cleanouts:
1. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser
to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.
2.05 DRAINS
A. Reinforced Precast Concrete Trench Drains:
1. Reinforced-Concrete Trench Drains: Medium and Heavy Duty. Comply with Section 03
4100 - Precast Structural Concrete.
2. Overall Width and Length: Plate: As indicated.
3. Profile: As indicated.
a. Grate Openings: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) circular or 3/8-by-3-inch (9.5-by-76-mm) slots.

B. Reinforced Cast-in-Place Concrete Drains / Open Channels:

1. Reinforced Cast-in-Place Concrete Drains /Open Channels: Refer to 1.03 Related
Requirements
2. Overall Width and Length: As Indicated.
3. Profile: As indicated

2.06 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.
B. Material: Linear low-density polyethylene film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm) or high-density, cross-
laminated polyethylene film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm) minimum thickness.
C. Form: Sheet or tube.
D. Color: Black or natural.
2.07 CONCRETE
A. Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R (ACI 350M/350RM), and the
following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type V - Sulfate Resistant.
2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand.
3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel.
4. Water: Potable.
B. Reinforced Precast Concrete: Comply with Section 03 4100 - Precast Structural Concrete.
C. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum
water/cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
D. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement
design mix, 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials
ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of
vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth,
uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: 1 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: 4 percent.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 3 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 E. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) minimum, with
0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
2.08 POLYMER-CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. General Requirements for Polymer-Concrete, Channel Drainage Systems: Modular system of
precast, polymer-concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit
into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include quantity of units required to form total
lengths indicated.
B. Sloped-Invert, Polymer-Concrete Systems:
1. Channel Sections:
a. Interlocking-joint, precast, modular units with end caps.
b. 4-inch (102-mm) inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of
0.6 percent and with outlets in quantities, sizes, and locations indicated.
c. Extension sections necessary for required depth.
d. Frame: Include gray-iron or steel frame for grate.
2. Grates:
a. Manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots or perforations that fit recesses in
channels.
b. Material: Fiberglass.
3. Covers: Solid gray iron if indicated.
4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel
sections.
C. Drainage Specialties: Precast, polymer-concrete units.
1. Large Catch Basins:
a. 24-by-12-inch (610-by-305-mm) polymer-concrete body, with outlets in quantities and
sizes indicated.
b. Gray-iron slotted grate.
c. Frame: Include gray-iron or steel frame for grate.
2. Small Catch Basins:
a. 19- to 24-inch by approximately 6-inch (483- to 610-mm by approximately 150-mm)
polymer-concrete body, with outlets in quantities and sizes indicated.
b. Gray-iron slotted grate.
c. Frame: Include gray-iron or steel frame for grate.
3. Oil Interceptors:
a. Polymer-concrete body with interior baffle and four steel support channels and two
1/4-inch- (6.4-mm-) thick, steel-plate covers.
b. Steel-plate covers.
c. Capacity: 200 gal. (757 L).
d. Inlet and Outlet: NPS 6 (DN 150).
4. Sediment Interceptors:
a. 24-inch- (610-mm-) square, gray-iron frame and slotted grate.
D. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.
E. Channel-Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer.
2.09 CATCH BASINS
A. Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins:
1. Description: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth
indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
2. Base Section: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch (102-mm)
minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and separate base slab or base
section with integral floor.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 4 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 3. Riser Sections: 4-inch (102-mm) minimum thickness, 48-inch (1200-mm) diameter, and
lengths to provide depth indicated.
4. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated.
Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.
5. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.
6. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape
matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
7. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch
(13-mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow
worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step.
Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit
steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500
mm).
8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe
connecting to base section.
B. Designed Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced concrete;
designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy-traffic, structural
loading; of depth, shape, and dimensions indicated, with provision for joint sealants.
1. Joint Sealants: ASTM C 990 (ASTM C 990M), bitumen or butyl rubber.
2. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape
matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring
manufacturer.
3. Steps: Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch
(13-mm) steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow
worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step.
Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch (300- to 400-mm) intervals. Omit
steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches (1500
mm).
4. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe
connecting to base section.
C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Catch Basins:

1. Description: Complying with ACI 318, ACI 350 M/ 350RM, and the following:
a. Cement: ASTM C150, Type II.
b. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, sand.
c. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, crushed gravel.
d. Water: Potable.
2. Portland Cement Design Mix: 27.6 MPa minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious
materials ratio.
a. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain.
b. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.
C. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural
loading. Include flat grate with small square or short-slotted drainage openings.
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.
D. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for A-16, structural
loading. Include 24-inch (610-mm) ID by 7- to 9-inch (175- to 225-mm) riser with 4-inch (102-
mm) minimum width flange, and 26-inch- (660-mm-) diameter flat grate with small square or
short-slotted drainage openings.
1. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent unless otherwise indicated.
E. Configuration, Sizes and Details: As indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 5 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
2.10 STORMWATER INLETS
A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility
standards.
B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to
utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and
dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
D. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards.
2.11 PIPE OUTLETS
A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.
B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregularly sized and shaped, graded stone according to NSSGA's
"Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control."
1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches (76 mm).
C. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No.
FS-2, No. 4 screen opening, average-size graded stone.
D. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment
Control," No. A-1, 3-ton (2721-kg) average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated.
2.12 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEMS
A. Chamber Systems:
1. Storage and Leaching Chambers: Molded PE with perforated sides and open bottom.
Include number of chambers, distribution piping, end plates, and other standard
components as required for system total capacity.
2. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3/4- to 2-1/2-inch (19- to 63-mm) washed,
crushed stone or gravel.
3. Filter Mat: Geotextile woven or spun filter fabric, in one or more layers, for minimum total
unit weight of 4 oz./sq. yd. (135 g/sq. m).
B. Pipe Systems: Perforated manifold, header, and lateral piping complying with AASHTO M
252M for NPS 10 (DN 250) and smaller, AASHTO M 294M for NPS 12 to NPS 60 (DN 300 to
DN 1500). Include proprietary fittings, couplings, seals, and filter fabric.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and
arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout
take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where
specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken
continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves,
and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements,
and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch
connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of
pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-
jacking process of microtunneling.
F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 6 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.
2. Install piping NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at
changes in direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's
proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.
3. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover.
4. Install hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook."
5. Install hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Handbook."
6. Install ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
7. Install corrugated steel piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M.
8. Install corrugated aluminum piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M.
9. Install ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
10. Install PE corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321.
11. Install PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
12. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
13. Install PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
14. Install PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.
15. Install fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 and ASTM F 1668.
16. Install nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's
"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
17. Install reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 1479 and ACPA's
"Concrete Pipe Installation Manual."
G. Install force-main pressure piping according to the following:
1. Install piping with restrained joints at tee fittings and at horizontal and vertical changes in
direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint
system, or cast-in-place concrete supports or anchors.
2. Install piping with 36-inch (915-mm) minimum cover.
3. Install ductile-iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
4. Install ductile-iron special fittings according to AWWA C600.
5. Install PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23, or ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F
1668.
6. Install PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 1668.
H. Install corrosion-protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping
according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105:
1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings.
3. Ductile-iron pipe and fittings.
4. Expansion joints and deflection fittings.
3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasketed joints according to CISPI's "Cast
Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.
2. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron
Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.
3. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe
and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
4. Join ductile-iron culvert piping according to AWWA C600 for push-on joints.
5. Join ductile-iron piping and special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41.
6. Join corrugated steel sewer piping according to ASTM A 798/A 798M.
7. Join corrugated aluminum sewer piping according to ASTM B 788/B 788M.
8. Join ABS sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 2751 for elastomeric-seal
joints.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 7 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 9. Join corrugated PE piping according to ASTM D 3212 for push-on joints.
10. Join PVC cellular-core piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 891 for solvent-
cemented joints.
11. Join PVC corrugated sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal joints.
12. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal
joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasketed joints.
13. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 for elastomeric-seal
joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints.
14. Join fiberglass sewer piping according to ASTM D 3839 for elastomeric-seal joints.
15. Join nonreinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ASTM C 14 (ASTM C 14M) and
ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.
16. Join reinforced-concrete sewer piping according to ACPA's "Concrete Pipe Installation
Manual" for rubber-gasketed joints.
17. Join dissimilar pipe materials with nonpressure-type flexible couplings.
B. Join force-main pressure piping according to the following:
1. Join ductile-iron pressure piping according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41 for push-on
joints.
2. Join ductile-iron special fittings according to AWWA C600 or AWWA M41 for push-on
joints.
3. Join PVC pressure piping according to AWWA M23 for gasketed joints.
4. Join PVC water-service piping according to ASTM D 2855 for solvent-cemented joints.
5. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings.

3.04 IDENTIFICATION - WARNING TAPE

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for
installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground
structures.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.

2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
structures.
B. Warning tape should be installed during backfilling 300mm below finished surface or as
directed by Engineer. Text in Arabic and English indicating the protected services lying below
the tapes shall be permanent ink bonded to resist prolonged chemical and minerals attack by
corrosive acid attack and alkalis with the message repeated at maximum interval of two meters.
Tapes shall be color coded as follows, with black text as indicated. The design and styles of the
text shall be approved by the Engineer.
1. Storm: Yellow
2. Caution: Sewer Below
3. Storm pressure mains: Yellow
4. Caution: Storm Pressure main below

3.05 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal-type backwater valves in piping where indicated.
B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate-valve type in piping and in manholes where
indicated.
C. Install terminal-type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 8 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
3.06 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION
A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron
soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser
extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.
1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas.
B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 450 by 450 by 300
mm) deep. Set with tops 1 inch (25 mm) above surrounding earth grade.
C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement
surface.
3.07 DRAIN INSTALLATION
A. Install type of drains in locations indicated.
1. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification drains in vehicle-traffic service areas.
B. Embed drains in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated.
D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface.
E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints.
F. Embed trench sections in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
G. Lay as per plan, profiles and relevant reference (Site Preparation, embankment fill placement,
final grading of embankment prior to liner installation, liner and slope protection, making rip rap,
storm water inlet and outlet installation. etc. .
3.08 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written
instructions.
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements.
Set tops 3 inches (76 mm) above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.
3.09 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION
A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.
B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.
3.10 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.
3.11 DRY WELL INSTALLATION
A. Excavate hole to diameter of at least 6 inches (150 mm) greater than outside of dry well. Do
not extend excavation into ground-water table.
B. Install precast, concrete-ring dry wells according to the following:
1. Assemble rings to depth indicated.
2. Extend rings to height where top of cover will be approximately 8 inches (203 mm) below
finished grade.
3. Backfill bottom of inside of rings with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm)
above bottom.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 9 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 4. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into rings and terminate into side of tee
fitting.
5. Backfill around outside of rings with filtering material to top level of rings.
6. Install cover over top of rings.
C. Install manufactured, PE dry wells according to manufacturer's written instructions and the
following:
1. Assemble and install panels and cover.
2. Backfill bottom of inside of unit with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm)
above bottom.
3. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into unit and terminate into side of tee fitting.
4. Install filter fabric around outside of unit.
5. Install filtering material around outside of unit.
D. Install constructed-in-place dry wells according to the following:
1. Install brick lining material dry and laid flat, with staggered joints for seepage. Build to
diameter and depth indicated.
2. Install block lining material dry, with staggered joints and 20 percent minimum of blocks on
side for seepage. Install precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes for seepage.
Build to diameter and depth indicated.
3. Extend lining material to height where top of manhole will be approximately 8 inches (203
mm) below finished grade.
4. Backfill bottom of inside of lining with filtering material to level at least 12 inches (300 mm)
above bottom.
5. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches (300 mm) into lining and terminate into side of tee
fitting.
6. Backfill around outside of lining with filtering material to top level of lining.
7. Install manhole over top of dry well. Support cover on undisturbed soil. Do not support
cover on lining.
3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.
B. Lay open channel as per plan, profiles and relevant reference.
3.13 CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.
B. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives,
fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer.
C. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete
around bottom and sides.
D. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated.
E. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints.
F. Embed channel sections in 4-inch (102-mm) minimum concrete around bottom and sides.
3.14 STORMWATER DISPOSAL SYSTEM INSTALLATION (WHERE INDICATED)
A. Piping Systems: Excavate trenches of width and depth, and install piping system, filter fabric,
and backfill, according to piping manufacturer's written instructions.
3.15 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains specified
in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping."
B. Connect force-main piping to building's storm drainage force mains specified in Division 22
Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Terminate piping where indicated.
C. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 10 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove
section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting,
plus 6-inch (150-mm) overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-
day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN 100 to DN
500). Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase
entire wye with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive
strength of 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN 525) or larger, or to
underground manholes and structures by cutting into existing unit and creating an opening
large enough to allow 3 inches (76 mm) of concrete to be packed around entering
connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform
to shape of and be flush with inside wall unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe,
manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete
for minimum length of 12 inches (300 mm) to provide additional support of collar from
connection to undisturbed ground.
a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi
(20.7 MPa) unless otherwise indicated.
b. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and
piping materials.
4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from
entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that
may accumulate.
D. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste
Interceptors."
E. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to
piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use nonpressure-type flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure
sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.
a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes.
b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD.
c. Ring-type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between
smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation.
2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force-main joints.
3.16 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for
installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground
structures.
1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping.
2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground
structures.
3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred.
Inspect after approximately 24 inches (610 mm) of backfill is in place, and again at completion
of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection.
2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.
b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of
size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.
c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping.
d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping.
e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 11 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are
within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or
repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval.
2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'
advance notice.
4. Submit separate report for each test.
5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a. Exception: Piping with soil tight joints unless required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417.
c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924 (ASTM C 924M).
6. Force-Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports,
and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-1/2 times the maximum
system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig (1035 kPa).
a. Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section.
b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within
allowances specified.
E. Warning Tape Test:
1. Thickness of the tape (250 micron/ 1000 gauge) shall be measured in accordance with
BS 2782: Part 6. Method 630A. (Physical properties; Average of 5 tests)
2. Tensile Strength: According to BS EN ISO 527-3
a. Longitudinal (MD) : 160 N (Minimum)
b. Transversal (TD) : 150 N (Minimum)
3. Elongation (PE only): BS EN ISO 527-3a
4. Tear Strength: BS 2782
a. MD:640 gram force
b. TD: 700 gram force Minimum
5. Chemical Resistance: The tape shall be remaining legible and color fast in all soil
conditions at PH 2.5-11.0, inclusive. The tape shall not show any adverse effect when in
contact with the sulphates, chlorides, sand and other minerals present in subsoil and water
oil, 5 percent NaoH and Alcohol mix, if any.

3.18 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4100 - 12 SITE STORM UTILITY

DRAINAGE PIPING
 SECTION 33 4211
STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
B. Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers.
C. Catch basins, Trench drains, Plant area drains, Paved area drainage, Site surface drainage,
Detention tank, and Detention basin.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for cleanout base pad construction.
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches.
C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.
E. Section 33 0513 - Manholes and Structures.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Bedding: Fill placed under, beside and directly over pipe, prior to subsequent backfill
operations.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines; current edition.
B. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
C. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2016).
D. ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2017.
E. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and
Culvert Pipe; 2015a.
F. ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, Culvert
Pipe and (Metric); 2015a.
G. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets; 2012 (Reapproved 2017).
H. ASTM C443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011 (Reapproved 2017).
I. ASTM C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings;
2014.
J. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for
Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2018.
K. ASTM D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;
2011.
L. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe
and Fittings; 2016.
M. DIN 19580 - Drainage channels for vehicular and pedestrian areas - Durability, mass per unit
area and evaluation of conformity; 2010.
1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate the installation with size, location and installation of service utilities.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week prior to the start of the
work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4211 - 1 STORMWATER GRAVITY

PIPING
 C. Sequencing: Ensure that utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products
specified.
E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Document results of field quality control testing.
F. Project Record Documents:
1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations.
2. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of
uncharted utilities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with applicable code for materials and installation of the Work of this section.
2.02 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A. Provide products that comply with applicable code(s).
B. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, extra heavy grade, inside nominal diameter of (As indicated on
drawings) mm, hub and spigot end.
C. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices.
D. Concrete Pipe: Nonreinforced, ASTM C14 (ASTM C14M), Class 1; inside nominal diameter of
(As indicated on drawings) mm, bell and spigot end joints.
E. Concrete Pipe Joint Devices: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression gasket joint.
F. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression
gasket joint.
G. Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2729, Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) material; inside nominal diameter of (As
indicated on drawings) mm, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.
2.03 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve,
neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.
B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
C. Filter Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.
D. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Storm
Sewer Service " in large letters.
E. Downspout Boots: Smooth interior without boxed corners or choke points; include integral lug
slots, integral cleanout, cleanout cover, and tamper proof fasteners.
1. Configuration: Angular.
2. Material: Cast iron; ASTM A48/A48M; casting thickness 3/8 inch (9.5 mm), minimum.
3. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard stainless steel fasteners, stainless steel building
wall anchors, integral neoprene gaskets, and rubber coupling.
2.04 CATCH BASIN, TRENCH DRAIN, CLEANOUT, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS
A. Lids and Drain Covers: Cast iron; medium duty proof load; lockable; hinged.
1. Catch Basin:
a. Lid Design: Linear grate.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4211 - 2 STORMWATER GRAVITY

PIPING
 b. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Cleanout:
a. Lid Design: Linear grate.
b. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As indicated on drawings
3. Area Drain:
a. Lid Design: Linear grate.
b. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As indicated on drawings
4. Trench Drain:
a. Lid Design: Linear grate.
b. Nominal Lid and Frame Size: As indicated on drawings.
B. Trench Drain System: Trench drain system assembled from factory fabricated, polymer
concrete castings in standard lengths and variable depths, with integral joint flanges and
integral grating support rails; includes joint gaskets and grating.
1. Trench Width: 305 mm.
2. Trench Section Length: 1 m, and 500 mm.
3. Grating Support Rail: Stainless steel.
4. Accessories:
a. Foul air trap.
b. Oval to round pipe connection.
c. Vertical outlet strainer.
C. Shaft Construction and [] Cone Top Section: Reinforced precast concrete pipe sections, lipped
male/female dry joints, nominal shaft diameter of (As shown on drawings) mm.
D. Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03 3000, levelled top surface to
receive concrete shaft sections, sleeved to receive sanitary sewer pipe sections.
2.05 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2323.
B. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A. See Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching for additional requirements.
B. Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
C. Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are
as indicated on layout drawings.
B. Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
watertight.
1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321.
C. Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope
of 3 mm in 3 m.
D. Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal
sewer system.
3.03 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS, TRENCH DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS
A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B. Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end
sections.
C. Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4211 - 3 STORMWATER GRAVITY

PIPING
 D. Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.
E. Prefabricated trench drains:
1. Excavate; prepare substrate and supports according to the manufacturer's printed
installation instructions.
2. Install prefabricated trench drain system according to the manufacturer's printed
installation instructions.
3. Expansion, Construction, and Control Joints: Do not locate trench drain system on an
expansion, construction or control joint in concrete or pavement. Where concrete or
pavement joints running transverse to direction of flow cross the trench drain system,
locate concrete or pavement joints and trench drain system joints so that both coincide.
4. Concrete Trench Support: 20.68 MPa compressive strength, minimum.
a. Provide support on all sides of trench in minimum thickness recommended by trench
drain system manufacturer.
b. Screed and finish top edge of concrete flush with top surface of trench drain system.
c. Do not use secondary edge finishing tools.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements.
B. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest
at no cost to Owner.
C. Pressure Test: Test in accordance with [].
D. Infiltration Test: Test in accordance with [].
E. Deflection Test: Test in accordance with [].
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4211 - 4 STORMWATER GRAVITY

PIPING
 SECTION 33 4216
CULVERTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and box culverts, joints and accessories.
B. Bedding and slope protection at culvert end.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete grout fill to adjacent construction.
B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches.
C. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
D. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A929/A929M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
B. ASTM C14 - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and
Culvert Pipe; 2011.
C. ASTM C14M - Standard Specification for Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and
Culvert Pipe [Metric]; 2011.
D. ASTM C76 - Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer
Pipe; 2013a.Class V
E. ASTM C443 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber
Gaskets; 2012.
F. ASTM C443M - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using
Rubber Gaskets (Metric); 2011.
G. ASTM C877 – Specification for External Sealing for Concrete Pipe, Manholes and Precast
Box Sections.
H. ASTM C990 – Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box
Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants.
I. ASTM C1433 – Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box
Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers.
J. ASTM C1577 – Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Monolithic Box Sections for
Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers Designed According to AASHTO LRFD.
K. ASTM C1675 – Standard Practice for Installation of Precast Reinforced Concrete
Monolithic Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers; 2011.
L. ASTM C1786 – Standard Specification for Segmental Precast Reinforced Concrete Box
Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers Designed According to AASHTO LRFD.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe, fittings and accessories.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures required to install Products
specified.
D. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, and invert elevations.
E. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted
utilities.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4216 - 1 CULVERTS

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL CULVERT PIPE (WHERE REQUIRED)
A. Corrugated Steel Pipe: Fabricated of ASTM A929/A929M galvanized steel sheet:
B. Coupling Bands: Galvanized steel, 0.052 inches (1.3 mm) thick x 10 inches (250 mm) wide;
connected with two neoprene "O" ring gaskets and two galvanized steel bolts.
2.2 CONCRETE PIPE CULVERT
A. Concrete Pipe: R e inforced, ASTM C76 (ASTM C76M), Class V:
1. Bell and spigot end joints.
2. Shape: Circular with a nominal diameter as indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C443 (ASTM C443M) rubber compression
gasket joint.
C. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
D. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
2.3 PRECAST CONCRETE BOX CULVERT
A. General: Profiles, dimensions and details: As shown on Drawings.
B. Comply with latest edition of ASTM C1433 or ASTM C1577.
C. Joints: Tongue and groove type with mastic or sand/cement grout.
D. Lifting Holes: To filled with concrete plug after the box sections are in place.
E. Bedding: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
F. Cover: As specified in Section 31 2316.13.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Filter Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.
B. Fill at Ends of Culverts: Soil cement material blend as specified in Section 31 3213.16 with 6
percent cement, premixed and burlap bagged for moist cure on site.
C. End of Culvert Gratings: Square woven steel wire mesh of (As indicated) mm size wire to a grid
of (As indicated) mm x mm.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATING
A. See Section 31 2316.13 for additional requirements.
B. Excavate culvert trench to 12 inches (300 mm) below culvert invert. Hand trim excavation
for accurate placement of culvert to elevations indicated.
C. Place filter fabric over compacted backfill.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations are
as indicated on layout drawings.
B. Install culverts and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
C. Lift or roll pipe into position. Do not drop or drag culverts over prepared bedding.
D. Shore culverts to required position; retain in place until after compaction of adjacent fills.
Ensure pipe remains in correct position and to required slope.
E. Repair surface damage to culvert protective coating with two coats of compatible bituminous
paint coating.
F. Install culverts end gratings.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4216 - 2 CULVERTS

3.3 PIPE ENDS
A. Place fill at pipe ends, at embankment slopes.
B. Installed thickness: (As indicated) mm average.
3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Lay culvert to alignment and slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum
variation from true slope of 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 10 feet (3 m).
B. Maximum Variation From Intended Elevation of Culvert Invert: 1/2 inch (12 mm).
C. Maximum Offset of Culvert From True Alignment: 1 inch (25 mm).
D. Maximum Variation in Profile of Structure From Intended Position: 1 percent.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect culverts and bedding from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in progress.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 4216 - 3 CULVERTS

 SECTION 33 7119
ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS, DUCTBANKS, AND MANHOLES

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and duct:
1. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic utilities duct.
2. High density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit.
B. Precast concrete manholes.
C. Cast-in-place manhole accessories.
D. Accessories:
1. Underground warning tape.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 1000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B. Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
D. Section 07 1113 - Bituminous Dampproofing.
E. Section 22 1006 - Plumbing Piping Specialties.
F. Section 31 2316 - Excavation.
G. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
H. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.

1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Ductbank:
1. Basis of Measurement: By the lineal foot (meter), for each configuration.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery, and installation of duct, fittings,
supports, and accessories, and for trenching, concrete encasement, and backfill.
B. Manhole:
1. Basis of Measurement: Per unit.
2. Basis of Payment: Includes purchase, delivery, and installation of manhole.

1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2016).
B. ASTM C857 - Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground
Precast Concrete Utility Structures; 2016.
C. ASTM C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures;
2019.
D. ASTM C891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures; 2019.
E. ASTM C1037 - Standard Practice for Inspection of Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures; 2016.
F. ASTM F512 - Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Conduit
and Fittings for Underground Installation; 2019.
G. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2017.
H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic
Tubing, and Cable; 2014.
I. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; 2013.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 7119 - 1 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND

DUCTS, DUCTBANKS, AND
MANHOLES
 J. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;
2016.
K. NEMA TC 6&8 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities for Underground Installations;
2013.
L. NEMA TC 7 - Smooth-Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit; 2016.
M. NEMA TC 9 - Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground
Installation; 2004 (Reaffirmed 2012).
N. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.
O. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
P. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 651A - Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, nonmetallic conduit, and manhole accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, reinforcement, size and locations of openings, and
accessory locations for precast manholes.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.
E. Field Samples: Provide sample of actual plastic duct delivered to site, two each 2 feet (610
mm) long.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing and elevations of underground conduit
and duct, and locations and sizes of manholes.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONDUIT AND DUCT
A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct: Comply with NEMA TC 6&8 and ASTM
F512; Type EB-20 listed and labeled as complying with UL 651, suitable for burial with
concrete encasement.
1. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 9.
a. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of duct to be connected.
B. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit: NFPA 70, Type HDPE; comply with NEMA TC
7 and list and label as complying with UL 651A; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES

A. Description: Precast manhole designed in accordance with ASTM C858, comprising
modular, interlocking sections complete with accessories.
B. Loading: ASTM C857, Class A-16.
C. Shape: Square.
1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 7119 - 2 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND
DUCTS, DUCTBANKS, AND
MANHOLES
 D. Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanized rod and hardware. Locate opposite each duct entry.
Provide watertight seal.
E. Cable Supports: Porcelain clamps and saddles.
F. Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 1/2-inch (13 mm) steel
reinforcement.

2.03 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLE ACCESSORIES

A. Frames and Covers: ASTM A48/A48M; Class 30B gray cast iron, 27 inch (686 mm) size,
machine finished with flat bearing surfaces. Provide cover marked ELECTRIC to indicate
utility.
B. Cable Pulling Irons: Use galvanized rod and hardware.
C. Cable Rack Inserts: Minimum load rating of 800 pounds (365 kg).
D. Cable Rack Mounting Channel: 1-1/2 x 3/4 inch (38 x 19 mm) steel channel, 48 inch (1.2
mm) length. Provide cable rack arm mounting slots on 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) centers.
E. Cable Racks: Steel channel, 1-1/2 x 3/4 x 14 inches (38 x 19 x 350 mm), with fastener to
match mounting channel.
F. Cable Supports: Porcelain clamps and saddles.
G. Manhole Steps: Polypropylene plastic manhole step with 1/2-inch (13 mm) steel
reinforcement.
H. Sump Covers: ASTM A48/A48M; Class 30B gray cast iron.

2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Duct Bank Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for
concrete encasement in open trench installation; suitable for the conduit/duct arrangement
to be installed.
B. Bore Spacers: Nonmetallic; designed for maintaining conduit/duct spacing for installation
within casing; furnished with roller wheels to facilitate installation, openings to facilitate grout
flow, and holes for stabilization cable; suitable for the casing and conduit/duct arrangement
to be installed.
C. Underground Warning Tape: Polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial.
1. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape.
2. Color:
a. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Precast Manholes: Inspect in accordance with ASTM C1037.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of duct bank prior to excavation for rough-in.
C. Verify locations of manholes prior to excavating for installation.
D. Duct bank routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated.
Route as required to complete duct system.
E. Manhole locations are shown in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated.
Locate as required to complete ductbank system.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 7119 - 3 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND

DUCTS, DUCTBANKS, AND
MANHOLES
3.02 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION
A. Install duct to locate top of ductbank at depths as indicated on drawings.
B. Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (100 mm per 25.4 m) (0.33
percent). Slope duct away from building entrances.
C. Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
D. Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
E. Join nonmetallic duct using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Wipe nonmetallic duct dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of adhesive to
entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.
G. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points.
H. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required.
I. Terminate duct at manhole entries using end bell.
J. Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches (150 mm) minimum.
K. Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet (1200 mm) on centers.
L. Band ducts together before backfilling.
M. Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.
N. Place concrete under provisions of Section 03 3000. Use mineral pigment to color concrete
red.
O. Provide minimum 3 inch (75 mm) concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of ductbank.
P. Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas.
Q. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples.
R. Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and
moisture.

3.03 PRE-CAST MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for manhole installation under the provisions of Section 31 2316.
B. Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C891.
C. Install manholes plumb.
D. Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation.
E. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole installation is complete.
F. Install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system under provisions of Section
22 1006.
G. Install drains in manholes and connect to 4 inch (DN100) pipe terminating in 1/3 cu yd (1/4
cu m) crushed gravel bed under provisions of Section 22 1006.
H. Dampproof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has cured
28 days, under provisions of Section 07 1113.
I. Backfill manhole excavation under the provisions of Section 31 2323.

3.04 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for manhole installation under the provisions of Section 31 2316.
B. Formwork: Form inside and outside manhole surfaces in accordance with provisions of
Section 03 1000.
C. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing under the provisions of Section 03 2000.
D. Concrete: Provide air-entrained, 2000 psi (20 MPa) compressive strength at 28 days under
the provisions of Section 03 3000.
E. Shape: Square.

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 7119 - 4 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND

DUCTS, DUCTBANKS, AND
MANHOLES
 F. Base: Include 14 inch (350 mm) drain opening and two 1 inch (25 mm) ground rod
openings. Slope to drain at 0.25 inch per foot (6.35 mm per m) (2 percent).
G. Duct Entry: Cast duct openings in walls as indicated.
H. Cable Pulling Irons: Locate opposite each duct entry.
I. Install ladder in each manhole.
J. Attach cable racks to inserts after manhole construction is complete.
K. Install drains in manholes and connect to site drainage system under provisions of Section
22 1006.
L. Install drains in manholes and connect to 4 inch pipe terminating in 0.33 cu yd (0.25 cu m)
crushed gravel bed under provisions of Section 22 1006.
M. Dampproof exterior surfaces, joints, and interruptions of manholes after concrete has cured
28 days, under provisions of Section 07 1113.
N. Backfill manhole excavation under the provisions of Section 31 2323.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 7119 - 5 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND

DUCTS, DUCTBANKS, AND
MANHOLES
 SECTION 33 7900
SITE GROUNDING

PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrodes, connectors, and conductors.
B. Grounding wells.
C. Treatment wells.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Section 26 0526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems - .
C. Section 26 4113 - Lightning Protection for Structures.
D. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Trenching for grounding.
E. Section 31 2316.13 - Trenching: Trenching for grounding.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; 2017.
B. IEEE 80 - IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation Grounding; 2013.
C. IEEE 142 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial
Power Systems; 2007, with Errata (2014).
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having
Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Multiple vertical electrodes buried in straight line pattern.
B. Multiple horizontal electrodes buried in straight line pattern.
C. Single vertical electrode for local grounding at utility transformer.
D. Comply with IEEE 142.
E. Substation Grounding: Comply with IEEE 80 and SEC code of standard.
F. Provide grounding systems that provide overall resistance to ground of 5 ohms or as per
specified under SEC standard.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connectors.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of grounding system and installation details.
D. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground at each system.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.
F. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
G. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of electrodes and
connections.

1009DF / Mishrifa Villa Residence 33 7900 - 1 SITE GROUNDING

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Rod Electrodes: Copper.
1. Diameter: 3/4 inch (19 mm).
2. Length: 8 feet (2.4 m).
B. Active Electrodes: Metallic salt-filled copper tube electrode.
1. Shape: Straight.
2. Length: 8 feet (2.5 m).
3. Connectors: Provide U-bolt pressure plate.
C. Exothermic Connections:
D. Wire: Stranded copper.
1. For Horizontal Electrodes: 120 mm² , minimum size.
2. For Connections to Electrodes: 95 mm² , minimum size.
3. For Bonding Other Objects: 95 mm² , minimum size.
4. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
E. Grounding Boxes: Bronze.
F. Grounding Well Pipe: 8 inch (200 mm) diameter by 24 inch (600 mm) long clay tile pipe
with belled end.
G. Grounding Well Cover: Cast iron with legend "GROUND" embossed on cover.
H. Treatment Well Liner: 8 inch (200 mm) diameter clay tile perforated pipe.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify completion of filling and backfilling before beginning grounding work.
B. Verify that trenching is completed before installing horizontal electrodes.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install rod electrodes ________.
C. Install interconnecting wire 2 feet (600 mm) below finished grade level.
D. Provide grounding wells and grounding boxes as indicated.
E. Provide cast-in-place concrete grounding well under provisions of Section 03 3000.
Construct as indicated.

3.03 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Provide chemical treatment at each vertical electrode site.
B. Use suitable ion-producing treating chemicals that are non-corrosive and non-toxic.
C. Treatment Wells:
1. Location: Provide four uniformly spaced wells along 48 inch (1200 mm) radius from
vertical electrode.
2. Lining: Provide to depth of 60 inches (1525 m).
3. Well Pipe and Cover: Provide flush with finished grade.
4. Treatment: Fill each well to 12 inches (300 mm) below grade with treatment material.
D. Saturate treatment chemicals with water following application.
E. Interface with lightning protection system installed under Section 26 4113.
F. Interface with grounding and bonding provided under Section 26 0526.

1009DF / Mishrifa Villa Residence 33 7900 - 2 SITE GROUNDING

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 4000.
B. Make final grounding system measurements three or four days after chemical treatment.
C. Test Procedures: IEEE 142, fall of potential method.

3.05 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate to facility operation and maintenance personnel the location of each
accessible grounding connection and each chemical treatment well.

END OF SECTION

1009DF / Mishrifa Villa Residence 33 7900 - 3 SITE GROUNDING

 SECTION 33 8126
COMMUNICATIONS UNDERGOUND DUCTS, MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The work required under this Section consist of all feeder, distribution underground ducts and
raceway, including maintenance holes for the project as shown on drawings and/or as
specified herein.
B. The Contractor is held responsible to be familiar with the provisions contained herein and with
other Sections of this Specification as applicable to provide a complete underground outside
plant infrastructure for cable installation. The approved vendor, designed agent or employee is
held responsible to be familiar with the provisions contained herein and is assumed to possess
the proper license(s), bonding, knowledge, manpower, and material applicable to the
completion of the installation.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Division 26, Section 26 0513 – Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Division 27, Section 27 1100: Communications Entrance Protection
C. Division 31 - Earthwork, Sections 31 2316, 31 2200 & 312323: Excavation, backfill, & compaction.
D. Division 32 - Exterior Improvements: Concrete work, blacktop.
E. Division 27, Section 27 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems.
F. Division 27, Section 27 05 28 - Pathways for Communications Systems.
G. Division 27, Section 27 13 23 - Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling Requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Design and install and test data distribution systems per manufacturer’s requirements and in
accordance with local codes, requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and particularly the
following standards and practices. The Contractor is responsible to determine and adhere to the
most recent edition of these standards when developing their responses and completing the
project installation.

1. BICSI TDM, Current Edition

2. BICSI Customer Owned Outside plant Design Manual
3. NFPA 70, The National Electric Code
4. NESC, the National Electrical Safety Code
5. Common Ground Best Practices
6. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
7. ANSI/TIA/568-C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
Standard
8. ANSI/TIA/568-C.2, Copper Cabling Components Standard
9. ANSI/TIA/568-C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
11. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings
12. ANSI/J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
13. ANSI/TIA-942, Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 8126 - 1 COMMUNICATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS,
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
1.4 System Overview
A. The exterior telecommunications pathways will provide a campus distribution system for all
cabling that will be served by the Telecom Equipment Rooms. Exterior pathways are required
to connect new townhouses to the campus telecommunications distribution systems. The
pathways to the campus distribution system may include all or some of the following,
maintenance holes, inner ducts, and conduits.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Client IT Network Team will inspect the installation in progress. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to schedule regular and milestone inspection times with client. It is incumbent
upon the Contractor to verify that the installation and material used has been inspected before
it is enclosed within building features, buried, or otherwise hidden from view. The Contractor
shall bear costs associated with uncovering or exposing installations or features that have not
been inspected.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL:
A. The number, size, raceway duct material and arrangement shall be as indicated on
drawings and / or as specified herein.
2.2 PVC DUCT/CONDUIT:
A. General:
1. All conduits shall minimally be 110mm in diameter with 4x25mm HDPE sub-ducts
2. PVC utility ducts shall meet NEMA TC-6 standard. PVC conduit s shall be
minimum of schedule 40 constructions, including if concrete encased.
3. All bends shall be factory made and be 10 times the diameter of the conduit.
4. Provide bushing on all conduit terminations.
5. Splice conduits with fittings approved by the conduit manufacturer for the
specified applications.
2.3 COMMUNICATIONS MAINTENANCE HOLES:
A. Maintenance holes shall meet the requirements established in this section unless
otherwise approved by client.
1. Provide as specified in the project drawings, specifications and as specified herein
this section. All manhole specifications shall be submitted to client for approval prior
to installation by RFI. Manholes are to be specified for all splice points unless
otherwise specified.
2. Any conflicts in the requirements of these specifications shall be communicated to
client in writing by RFI submittal.
3. Typical full size manholes:
• (Type 1B) shall be inside dimensions 2750mm long by 1500mm wide 2000mm
high unless otherwise specified on the Drawings and Specifications. The exact
manhole size and configuration shall be submitted to client for approval.
4. Only Pre-cast shall be installed.
5. The manhole hole shall be constructed of reinforced pre-cast concrete, 316.4 kg/cm2
and designed for truck loading.
6. Pulling irons shall to be provided on opposite side of the ducts, rated at 453.6
kilograms pulling tensions.
7. Bonding jumpers shall be provide between each section and attached to
reinforcing steel.
8. Pre-cast maintenance holes with reinforcing steel bonded together do not require an

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 8126 - 2 COMMUNICATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS,
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
 additional ground rod. Install a bonding ribbon horizontally around the top of the
maintenance hole and attached to all cable racking and hardware. Continue installation
vertically between bonding clamps so both top and bottom halves are bonded together
on each side. The bonding ribbon will be used to bond all splice cases and hardware
placed within the maintenance hole.
9. Cable racks shall be installed into the walls, arms and insulators must be
provided with cable supports.
10. All manhole hardware shall have rubberized or hot dipped galvanized finish.
11. Provide heavy-duty, cast-iron, frame with nominal 690mm opening pick holes. Lid to be
lettered "Communications" and number as assigned in the drawing.
12. Provide 150mm and 300mm grade ring riser castings as required to elevate cover to
approximately 25mm above finished grade. The internal diameter of grade rings shall
not to be less than internal diameter of manhole cover frame. Verify with manufacturer
product availability to meet the installation requirements. Custom grade rings are
acceptable upon prior approval of client. Cast-iron adjusting rings to trim final elevations.
13. Securable and removable ladders are required for all maintenance hole, and installed to
meet OSHA guidelines. The distance from the top of the rim to the first ladder rung shall
not be more than 450mm.
14. Provide a 300mm sump with gravel and grate cover.
15. Set manholes on leveled undisturbed earth with minimum 150mm granular fill under the
entire manhole before setting. If earth is disturbed during excavation, properly compact soil
and provide 75mm concrete leveling pad under entire manhole before setting.
16. Furnish and install manhole signage within chimney: to include maintenance hole
designator, measured distance to the next maintenance hole, access point or building,
North designation and direction to adjoining maintenance holes and building entrance
points. Signage shall be stamped metal attached to the chimney.
2.4 HANDHOLE / PULL BOX / ENTRY BOX
A. Hand hole shall meet the requirements established in this section unless otherwise
approved by client.
1. Provide pull box / entry box as specified in the project drawings and specifications and as
specified herein this section. All specifications shall be submitted to client for approval
prior to installation by RFI. Entry box should only be specified for pull through applications.
2. The pull box / entry box is a reinforced concrete structure, with a heavy duty Ductile
Iron Frame and Cover of rating grade ‘A’ and size is 800mm X 800mm X 750mm
3. The location of the entry box depends on the location of proposed external line plant.
4. The entry box should be constructed at a maximum distance of 1 meter from plot line
ensuring it touches the boundary wall; however, if such provision is not feasible due to
site conditions, adjustments may be made.
5. The entry box should be exclusively for telecom/low current use and no other services
shall be allowed to use the same
6. Conduits shall enter and exit the maintenance hole in a straight line method. The
remaining parallel walls are to remain free of conduit entrances.

2.5 Inner Ducts

A. Inner duct shall be installed where required and as specified and approved by client.
1. Each inner duct shall have a 13 mm pre-lubricated, woven, 567 kg tensile minimum
polyester tape made from low friction, high abrasion resistant yarns placed within the
inner duct and secured at each end. Tape shall be printed with sequential footage
markings for accurate measurements.
2. Install a single conductor locating wire in the inner duct conduit with a 14-gauge solid

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 8126 - 3 COMMUNICATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS,
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
 orange insulated wire for all non-metallic optical fiber cables.
3. Conduit and Inner duct sealing plugs shall be installed to seal all inner ducts and
conduits used or unused.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. General Conduit / Duct Requirements
1. The exact number of building entrance conduits shall be as per specified in the
drawing.
2. Exact backbone conduit requirements shall be as per specified in the drawing.
3. All bends must be manufactured factory long, sweeping bends with a ten times
the internal diameter of conduits.
4. In underground raceways, angle couplings and bends alone or in combination
with straight sections shall be used for direction changes. Direction changes
made by skewing straight sections of conduits will not be permitted.
5. Orange locatable caution tape shall be installed in two rows 300mm above all
underground conduits.
6. Conduits shall be capped with manufactured caps (Duct Plugs) when
installation is temporarily discontinued.
7. Conduits shall be cleaned by passing a wire brush mandrel and/or rubber duct swab
(or approved alternative) of appropriate size back and forth until all foreign materials
and water are removed.
8. Conduits shall be checked by pulling a round test mandrel, 6 mm less than
conduits size for each duct from both directions to remove obstructions.
9. Conduits shall be provided with continuous 567 kg tensile strength conduit
measuring pull tape in each duct terminated to prevent pullout.
10. No section of conduit shall have more than 180º of bends with a maintenance hole
installed for and access point.
11. No conduit run shall extend more than 100m without a manhole or
maintenance hole installed as an access point.
12. Conduit connections from buildings to manholes shall be installed with a
minimum of 75mm fall per 60m of conduit towards the manhole and sloping
away from the building
13. Conduits shall be inspected and approved for correct formations and tied to
prevent ducts from floating when concrete is poured.
14. The minimum separation from other utilizes is a follows
a. Power up to one KVA:
300mm of well- packed earth
100mm of masonry
75mm of concrete
b. Gas, Oil, Water, etc.:
300 mm when parallel
150 mm. when crossing
15. A minimum of 750mm bury depth (measured from top of concrete encasement to
finished grade) is required.
16. Install a 150mm orange warning tape labeled fiber optics. Install tape 300mm below final
grade level in the entire conduit or duct bank.
B. Concrete Envelope
1. Provide as shown on drawing and in accordance with these specifications. Duct banks
shall not receive less than 75mm of concrete cover all around
2. 3000 psi, class 2, concrete ready mix per ASTM-94 shall be provided for all duct banks
unless otherwise approved by client.
3. Provide with a fine sand cover for initial curing except where waived by client in writing.
4. Rebar reinforcement is required where duct banks will cross roadways, railways or
similar heavily traffic areas.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 8126 - 4 COMMUNICATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS,
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
 5. Install a 150mm orange warning tape labeled fiber optics. Install tape 300mm
above the entire conduit or duct bank.
6. Protected against rain, flooding, freezing, etc., during curing.
7. Ensure no honeycombing occurs and be properly vibrated with small vibrator. Do not
vibrate between ducts.
8. Concrete for the duct bank shall be placed in such a way that the duct bank will not be
disturbed and that the sides of the trench do not crumble, using splash boards, proper
placement, etc.
9. Concrete shall be poured continuous from manhole to manhole. No pours shall
originate between manholes.
10. Interval between base or intermediate spacers shall not exceed 1.5m with a
minimum of two supports per length of duct.
11. Make provisions, such as nylon ties, to prevent the ducts from floating when
concrete is poured.
12. Color top layer of concrete encasement by using “ORANGE” (for
telecommunications) chalk dust while still wet, or dye the concrete.
E. Backfill:
1. Per Division 31 00 00 Earthwork (excavation, backfill, compaction, etc.).
3.2 MANHOLE CABLE SUPPORT
A. The cable supports described on the drawings or herein are intended to assist the
Contractor in obtaining a satisfactory job and shall be altered to fit job conditions.
B. In general, all cables in manholes shall be supported on 1.2m maximum centers
for straight runs, on each side of splices, and within 0.6m of cable entering or
existing a duct or termination.
C. Do not install supports so that cables will block or cross ducts.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Coordinated excavation with other trades, disciplines, specifications and drawing before
starting work.
B. Verify all elevations and arrangements are correct and there are no conflicts with other
utilities. Verify that the entryways into manholes, buildings and other structures meet client
standards. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure requirements are met.
All corrections needed to meet client standards are the responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Verify all utilities shave been located. Complete all requirements before excavating.
Report any conflicts or omitted utility locates to the client.
D. Contractor shall open entire length of trench and establish proper grades before
beginning installation of any portion of connecting duct runs.
E. Coordinate and comply with the requirements of Division 310000 - Earthwork and
Division 020000 and all related sections of the project specifications for
Excavation, Backfill, Concrete, Asphalt Repairs and Related Work.
F. Depth of excavation shall be such that the required bury depths (top of concrete
encasement) are met. The client prior to installation shall approve any deviation
from required depths. It is the responsibility of the contractor to call for an
inspection before closing any work.
3.4 REINFORCING:
A. Reinforcing shall be installed when the following conditions are present and as
specified in the project documents and References listed with this section.
1. Where noted on drawings and /or as specified herein.
2. Where connected to buildings and manhole walls, anchor there using
projecting re-bars.
3. Where crossing trenches for other work.
4. At conduit joints.
5. If continuous pour is impractical, provide (4) #4 reinforcing bars extending 1800 m
into first and second pour.

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 8126 - 5 COMMUNICATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS,
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES
 6. Where trenches cross roadways.
7. Reinforcing shall be supported from bottom of trench at least 25 mm and is not
required if conduits are supported by saddles.
3.5 BACKFILL
A. Shall not be installed until after concrete has reached initial set.
B. Cover with select fill void of stones and debris.
C. Meet all requirements of the client Standards for excavation, backfill, compaction,
and restoration.
D. The Contractor shall restore landscape to its original condition or as specified by
the project documents.
4.6 WARRANTY & AS-BUILDS
A. Mandrel test is required to each manhole prior the cable pulling.
B. The Contractor shall provide a 5 year warranty on materials and labor for all work
associated with duct banks, manholes, handholes, associated apparatus and all
other infrastructure components associated with this section. A certificate of
warranty shall be provided to the client as part of closeout prior to final invoice.
C. The Contractor shall provide as-built drawings and documentation to the client
prior to final payment for this work.
D. As-built information shall be in electronic (Auto Cad) drawings. Indicate location of
all underground routes within the work area.
E. If construction drawings are not utilized, Contractor shall provide all
telecommunications location information on an accurate scaled Auto Cad
formatted site plans.

END OF SECTION

1009DF/ MISHRIFAH VILLA 33 8126 - 6 COMMUNICATION

UNDERGROUND DUCTS,
MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES